^n. •b^ %>, IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-S) // S-. %" ^ try M?^ t^7 V.X 1.0 I.I 1.25 2.5 2.2 12.0 1= ]A. 11.6 •^^^ C/>^: Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14S80 (716) 872-4503 c^ <«^*> ''4^'f4 ^ CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICIVIH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microraproductions historiques L^ SNjJ 1^ Technical and Bibliographic Notas/Notas techniques et bibliographiquas Thee to thi The Instit ite has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographicaily unique, which may alter any of the images in the ruproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. D Coloured covers/ Couverture de couleur I — I Covers damaged/ D a n n Couverture endommag6e Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restaur^ et/ou pelliculte I — 1 Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque □ Coloured maps/ Cartes gtegraphiques en couleur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que oleue ou noire) I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur Bound with other material/ Relii avec d'autres documents Tight binding may caus-^ shadows or distortion along intorior margin/ La re liure serrAe peut causer de ''ombre ou de la distorsion la long de la marge int^rieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans ie texte, mais, lorsque cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ort pas 4tA filmies. Additional comments:/ Commentaires suppiimentaires; L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur axamplaire qu'il lui a iti possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-4tre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une imege reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger una modification dans la mithode normale de filmage sont indiqute ci-dessous. □ Coloured pages/ Pages de couleur □ Parses damaged/ Pages endommagtes r~n Pages restored and/or laminated/ D Pages restauries et/ou pelliculies Pages discoloured, stained or foxei Pages dicolortes, tacheties ou piqudes Pages detached/ Pages ditachdes Showthrough/ Transparence Quality of pri^ Qualiti in^gale de ('impression Includes supplementary materit Comprend du matiriel supplimentaire r~/| Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ r~l Pages detached/ I 7 Showthrough/ I I Quality of print varies/ □ Includes supplementary material/ C □ Only edition available/ Seule Edition disponible Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been ref limed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellemont obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc., ont itik film^s i nouveau de fa^on d obtenir la meilleure image possible. The i possi of th filmii Origi begir the li sion, othei first sion, or iKi The I shall TINL whic Map diffe entir begii right roqu metf This Item is filmed at the reduction rat.o checked below/ Ce document est fMmi au taux de rMuction indiquA ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 22X 26X 30X y 12X 16X 20X 24X 28X 32X The copy filmed here has been re|i/oduced thanks to the generosity of: National Library of Canada L'exemplaire film6 fut reproduit grdce d la g6n6ro8it6 de: Bibliothdque nationale du Canada The images appearing here are the best quality possible considering the condition and legibility of the original copy and in keeping with the filming contract specifications. Original copies in printed paper covars are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impreji- sicn, or the back cover when appropriate. Al! other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. The last recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol — •► (meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), whichever applies. Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method: Les images suivantes ont 6x6 reproduites avec le plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition at de la nettetd de l'exemplaire film6. et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. Les exemplaires originaux dont la cojverture en papier est imprimde sont filmds en commenpant par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires originaux sont filmds en commenpant par la premi&re page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la dernidre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le cas: le symbols — ►signifie "A SUIVRE ", le symbole V signifie "FIN". Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc.. pauvent 6tre filmds d des taux de r6duction diffdrents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour §tre reproduit en un seul cliche, il est film6 d partir de Tangle sup6rieur gauche, de gauche d droite. et de haut en bas. en prenant le nombre d'imagcs ndcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la m6thode. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 ^^iSSSSSSSSBsmmmm HIGH SCHOOL French Grammar AND READER vt W. K. FRASER, B.A.. Associate-Professor of Italiar and Spanish, University of TorenU, AND J. SQUAIR, B.A., Associate-Professor of French, University College^ Ttronto, ^ttthomeb bg the «l)ttcatr0tt 'gti^xtlxami of entnno TORONTO ; THE HUNTER -ROSE COMPANY, LIMITED. Entered according to Act of the Parliament of Canada, in the year one thousand nine hundred; by Tiik Copp, Clak^ ooMyANY, Limited, Toronto, Ontario, in the Office of the Minister of Agriculture. PREFACE. The present volume has been compiled to meet the requirements of the various grades of High Scliool work in French. Part I. consists of a series of lessons on the elements of grammar, and , includes copious exercises. An effort has been made to render the exercises interesting in themselves by basing them, for the most part, on connected pieces of French dealing with topics of every-day life Considerable prominence has been given to oral practice. Part 11. consists of a systematic grammar of modern French A series of exercises has been added, dealing with the various topics treated in the text. It was thought best to group these exercises together at the end of this part, in order not to impair the usefulness of the grammar as a book of reference by inserting the exercises immediately after the paragraphs to which they refer. Each exercise IS furnished with section references, which will enable the pupil to turn readily to the theory upon which the exercises are based. The Reader is made up of interesting selections, for the most part complete in themselves, and affording a considerable range as to topic, vocabulary, and idiom. The exercises which have been inserted at the end of the Reader are based on the idiom and vocabulary of the text and are intended to give practice in the reproduction in French of the substance of the selections. _ A word of explanation is required as to the indication oi the pronun- ciation. The system of transcription employed is that of the Associa- tion Phonitxque Internationale, and in the case of doubtful or disputed pronunciations the authority of the DicUom^a^e Phondiique of Michaelis and Passy has been followed. In order not to confuse the beginner with too minute distinctions, "half long" vowels have not been indi- cated and the same rule has been observed for the most part with regard to such vowels in the stressed syllable as are optionally long or The authors take this opportunity of expressing their thanks to Mr. J. H. Cameron, M.A., and Monsieur St. Elme de Champ, of University college, for numerous and valuable suggestions, and also to many modern language teachers throughout Ontario, whose practical advice and criticism have been of very great assistance. I wmm CONTENTS. Phonetic Introduction 1 Exercise in Phonetic Transcription 12 PART I. Elementary Lessons, 1-LI . , , , , . , ,18 PART II. The Verb 129 The Noun 220 The Article 233 The Adjective 247 The Pronoun ^ 262 The Adverb oqo The Numeral gj^ The Preposition 321 The Conjunction coi The Interjection ^ 034 Abbreviations oog Exercises on Grammar, I, a-LXXV, a 337 FRENCH READER. Prose Selections oqk Poetical Selections ^oj Composition Exercises on Reader ...,.,, 439 Vocabularies : French-English ^ .461 English-French . , 512 I^^^x 543 NOTE TO THE SECOND EDITION. By a decree of the French Minister of Public Instruction, dated February 26th, 1901, certain deviations from commonly accepted rules of grammar are permitted at all examinations held under his control. In the Appendix (see last page of this v.olume) will be found a reference list explaining the bearing of these deviations upon the various sections of the Grammar affected thereby. 1 FRENCH GRAMMAR. PHONETIC INTROEUCTION. I. General Distinctions. The pronunciation will be explained, as far as possible, by comparison with English sounds, but it must never be forgotten that the sounds o^ two languages rarely correspond. Important general distinc- tions between English and French are the following :_ th!"nf "^'''^ ^'T- '^^"^ '*''"' ^§ ^^ ^"^ comparatively weak action of the organs in articulation. tl if'"''' ^^' T^ "^""""' '''"^" ^^'' ^'^^''^^ °^ *'^« °^«^"« in articula. tion IS very energetic. •nLfr'7'/'r' r"//' ^^'^^ "°"'^^ ^^^ consonants, are almost all narrow ..e. uttered with tenseness of the organs concerned in their sound o""-- ^. '^ ?'"-^'"^' '"'^"^"' ^"'^ '^^'^''' --P-- the nar w sound of ea in « seat ' with the wide sound of i in ' sit. ') 4. Tongue and lip positions for French vowels are more definite, and no, law ) and lip-retraction (as in Met,' «hat') are much more definite and energetic in forming French vowels. 6. The tongue, both for vowels and consonants, is, in general Pifhp. further advanced or further retracted than in fo;mi ^ En2h\ound reqmring tongue action. ^ '-nfen^n sounds 6. English long vowels (like a in ' fate') are diphthongal (especially as pronounced m the South of England), while French voweLsf ^ethe" long or short, are uniform throughout their utterance. ThlJ^^ r^^ 77"^" °^ ^'"""^ ^^" ^"tirely foreign to English They are formed by allowing the soft palate to hang freely Is n ordinary breathing, thus causing the air to escape thro^h both no e the^rtllT ''' 'T T""^''' ''' " ^' '^^''^-" '^^ "«er S ^^h the soft palate hanging freely, tlie resulting sound will be annroxi matelythatofthenasal[a]in 'tante' [tu:t/ The poIlL of Z^t » INTRODUCTION. [§§2-^ palate In forming this sound may bo readily observed with p mirror. It must bo carefully noted that there is absolutely no sound of n, m, or ng, in French nasal vowels, and hence that great care must bo taken neither to raise the tongue nor close the lips until the Hound is complete. 2. Sounds. The French language has thirty-seven sounds, exclusive of minor distinctions. Tlie orthography, like that of English, is irregular and inconsistent. Hence, to avoid con- fusion in indicating the pronunciation, we sliall employ a phonetic alphabet (that of the 'Association Phont^tique In- ternationale '), in which each sound is represented by but one symbol, and each symbol has but one sound. 3. Table of Symbols. In the following table, the examples are in ordinu.y orthography, the heavy .ype indi- cates the sounds which correspond to the symbols, and the phonetic transcription is given within brackets : — Stmbolb. Examples. i ni, vive [ni, viiv]. pu, muse [py, myii;]. y e c ? 08 (£ a a a 8 n i w iU [ete]. creux, crease [kr0, kr0!z]. le [I9J. pr^s, p^re [pre, pe:r], fin, prince [f?, preisj. neuf, neuve [noef, noeiv]. un, humble [c6, (3&:bl]. patte, part [pat, pa:rl. pas, passe [pa, pais], tant, tante [ta, tnit]. note, tort [not, to:r]. rond, ronde [ro, r5:d]. BOt, chose [so, Jo!z]. tout, tour [tu, tuir]. viande [vja.'d]. lui [Iqi]. oui [wi]. Symbols. Examples. b beau, robe [bo, rob]. dame, fade [dam, fad], fort, neuf [foir, noei]. gant, doguo [ga, dog], aha ! [a(h)a]. car, roc, [kar, rok], long, seul [13, soelj. mot, dame [mo, dam], ni, ane [ni, am], agneau, digno [ajio, diji]. pas, tape [pa, ta^j]. drap, par [dra, par], si, pense [si, pais], chou, lache [ju, lo :/]. tas, patte [ta, pat], vin, cave [ve, kaiv]. zone, rose [zoin, roiz]. je, rouge [30, ruis]. sign of length. d f (J h k 1 m n ji P r s J t V z 3 I §§4-rt] SYLLABICATION. 8 4. The Alphabet. TIu letters of the alphabet, with tlieir if rench iiunies, ara as follows :— a [a], b^ [be], c^ [so]. lU [de]. effo [ef]. 8: g^ [se]. h acho [aj]. i i[iJ. A b c d e f J ji[3i]. k ka[ka]. J elle [el]. m eninio [cm]. n enne [e:ti]. O o [o]. P P'5[pe]. q ku[ky]. r erre [er]. 9 ease [es], t tt$ [te]. " "fyj. V \6 [ve]. w double v«S [dubl ve]. X iks [iks]. y i greo [i grek], z 7Mq [zed]. I [ thSe7oTSrrh~.^;'rryI'' '^' """'"'^ '''''' ^«"«"' - «^bove. together with 5. Other Orthographic Signs. In mMItion to the letters of the alphabet, the folIowin " " * * ' < -leasts (4 o o I i(y) e(0) (n) (9) e ? (oB «) (o) (o8) ad ,^6as< > < — greatest, ^.B.-In the following descriptions of sounds, the word hke (P). The examples given after the word 'also' show the less common orthographical equivalents ^0- i, y. JninM^;" rfati^T^'L::^:/-- ".:!■: ar:=rr - '- (§ 1, 6) ; narrow (§ 1, 3). ' ^'Phthongmtion Ex.: ni [ni], vive [viiv] j also, ile [iilj, lyre [Ii:r] IJiiuiongization (§1, 6 ; narrow 8 1, 3) Thp cmmrl rv,o u i. . acquired either by prolonging [i]. and 'at Ihe s L W erct^ th ^^^^^l"' '-'''^^ ''' '^^ -^^^ -^ taking treX': J J;;4" fP^J' «^"- [-3^-3 ' -1- m [fy], il eut [il yl nous efin.es ^^- e, 0, 9. 1. e-Like the first part of the sound of a in «dav ' hiif v^th fi, r more rr racted rs i d.\ . »,.^- 1 i- w, . ** '" °»y> "^t, with the lipa .!ctLiea (§ 1, 4) ; avoid dinhthnnmVafi,^^ /£. 1 /?. .„ *^ Pv . AfA r ^ -■ , X -t.i„„j^ ,,.„.n ^„ 1^ uj . narrow {§ 1, 3), SJx. : 6t6 f etej ; ako, parler [parle], donnal [done]. 6 INTRODUCTION. [§§12-13 fiLtr? counterpart in English. The tongue position is prac tical y the same as for [e], with tense rounding of the lips (§ 1. 4); avoid diphthongization (§1, 6); narrow (§1. 3); best acquired by combing as explained for [y] above, the lip-rounding with the [e] position. ' Ex.: creux [kr0], creuse [kr^iz] ; also, boeufs [b0]. rn!' ^'7^ K \^"^"'^ f ."' '^^^ "'^"'' °^ * ^" '^^^'^i^a,' but slightly rounded ; best acquired by relaxing the tension of the organs required for the production of the [0J sound. Ex.: le[la]; also, monsieur [masj^], faisant [fazo]. ^^ e f , oe, de. ^* ''l^i^^'"^ '°''"'^ °^ ^ ^" *^^^'' ^^*^ *^« »"0"th more definitely open and the lips more retracted (§1,4); avoid diphthongization (§ 1 6) • narrow (§ 1, 3). \»*»"/» Ex.: pr^s [pre], pfere [pe:r]; also, f^te [fe:t], terre [teir], secret [sokre], parlais [park], paix [pe], re'ne [rem]. Note -The e of a stressed syllable followed by a syllable containing e mute has almost always this sound (orthographically denoted by h e or e + double consonant), e.g., je mfene [men], tete [teit], chfere [fe-rl' 3 appelle [apel], ancienne [asjen]. This principle accounts for the apparent irregularities of certain verbs and adjectives. 2. 6-The [e] sound nasalized (§ 1, 7), but slightly more open. Ex.: fin [is], prince [prfis]; also, faim [fe], sainte [seit], R«ims[rl:sl plein [pie], simple [seipl], symbole [sebol], syntaxe [sstaks], viendrai [vjedre], soin [swe]. ■" 3. ce-Has no counterpart in English. It has practically the tongue position of [e], combined with definite rounding of the lins ; avoid diph- thongization (§ 1, 6) ; narrow (§ 1, 3) ; best acquired by c!^mbining, with 'kihe [e] position, the rounding described. r->r^^'--r"^ ^''"'^' "^"""^ ^"°''''-'' ^^'°* c^iJ^tk^'r]. ceil N], orgueil 4. <£-The [oe] sound nasalized (§ 1, 7), but slightly more open. Ex. : un [«], humble [d&ibl] ; also, k jeun [a sdfe]. '3» a, a, a. 1. a— Only very slightly resembles the sound of a in 'pat,' which is nearer that of [e]. The [a] sound requires much wider mouth onenintr tna^ a of 'pat,' accompanied by retraction of the Ups and lowering of §§14-16] CONSONANTS. ana r^f ;;:;:?":: i ":r„~or\rr«"' '^"««-' absolutely „euf.I, ...... neither roSntetlt^ ^J. "''•■."if rounding, as of a in • fall.' retracted ; avoia especially ^^Ex.. pas [po], passe tpa.s], also, p4to tpa.t,. roi [rwoj, po«e 3. fi— The [a] sound nasalized (§1,7) MfCr* ^''^' '"■'^ ^""'^ ■' '"'°' '-I- [«^Pl »t,. [a,tr]. ^embre 14* o a™;/d7^.t;L;o:^'r«'.£r^^^ Ex.: note [not], tort [to,r] , also Paul [pol], album [albom]. a o-The 0] sound nasalised (§ 1, 7), but slightly more close. Ex.: rend [ro], rondo [r3:d], also ton,ber[tobe], eomte fko.tl roundi~";,r;;p:rr''l,'™i"'''^"'rr '"-''''" ™" ">-» »-- (§ 1, 3). * *^ ■ ' • ''™"' *phthongization (§ 1, 6) , narrow fautifot'ltular'- '"^^^ ''""'■■ ^»- ''^ tko'^l. c6te [ko.tj. IS. (§ 1. 3). ^ ^^ ' ^ ' '''^°'" diphthongization {§ 1, 6) j narrow Ex.: tout [tu], tour [tu:r] ; also, gout [gu], aofit [u]. t Consonants. i6. J. n, w. atlgt: stsHC ar; 'f ^'^ ' ]' "'^ ' "' ""^ ^<"^ ^ vowel of tbe palate, .^ d 1 en™ aZ""""" """',"" '°W »%h% oloe-cr to fw], respectivelv Tl,r " ™"™"'"*''' ™lue, indicated by [j], [„], espectively. They Me sometimes called semi-vowels. ililH. 8 INTRODUCTION. [§17 1. j—Like very brief and narrow y in • yes.' Ex.: viande [vjaid]; also, yeux [j0], aieul [aj(«l], fille [fi:j], travaiUer [travaje], travail [travaj]. ^ 2. H_Has no counterpart in English ; avoid very carefully the sound of w in ' wall ' ; may be best acquired by at first substituting [y] for it and afte. ward increasing the speed of the utterance and the elevation of the tongue until it can be formed exactly along with what follows. Ex. : iui [\^i] j also, nuage [ni{ai3], ^cuelle [ekqel]. 3. w-Like very brief and narrow w in 'we,' *west.' It is best, however to proceed from the sound of [u] in the manner described for in] above. Ex.: oui [wi] J also, poids [pwa], tramway [tramwe]. 17. The remaining consonantal sounds car. be sufficiently described by noting the differences between their mode of for- mation and that bf the nearest English sounds (see § 1). 1. b — Like bin 'barb.' Ex. : beau [bo], robe [rob], abb^ [abe]. 2. d-Like d in 'did,' but with the tongue so far advanced that Its point, or upper surface, forms a closure with the inner surface of the upper teeth and gums; or the point of the tongue maybe thrust against the lower teeth, the upper surface forming a closure with the upper teeth and gums. It must be remembered that in forming English d (also 1 n, r, s, t, z) the tongue touches at some little distance above the teeth (§ I, 5). Ex.: dame [dam], fade [fad], addition [adisjo]. 3. f— Like fin 'fat.' Ex. : fort [fo:r], neuf [noef], difficile [difisil]. 4. g— Like g- in 'go.' Ex.: gant [gd], dogue [dog], guerre [geir] ; also, second [ssgS]. 5. h— In orthography the letter h is known as 'h mute' (Fr 'h muette '), or ' h aspirate ' (Fr. ' h asp.r^e '), according as it does, or does not, cause elision (§ 19). The learner may regard it. in eithw caae, aa absolutely silent. Ex.: I'homme [1 om], le h^roa [la erol [§17 [fi:j], travailler fully the sound »ting [y] for it, i the elevation ^hat follows. ;.* It is best, mer described > oufficiently mode of for- dvanced that ler surface of nay be thrust sure with the •ming English istance above [segS]. ute' (Fr. 'h does, or does tboiT Qoae, as Sir] CONSONANTS. 9 hit ^tt'' ^°T''' V'""*^ resembling, but much weaker than h in l»at, IS permissible, and is actually used by many Frenchmen i^x.: aha ! [aha], le hdros [la hero], fl^au [fleho] 7. 1-Lik. 1 in ' law,' but with the tongue advanced as for [d] above Ex. : long [15], seul [seel], aller [ale]. 8. m— Like m in 'man,' 'dumb. Ex.: mot [mo], dame [dam], homme [om]. [dl'aboTe":'"' " ^' '"''' '"'"' '"* "^^^ *^« *-g- -<^vanced as for Ex. : ni [ni], ane [a in], donner [done]. 10. ji— Somewhat like ny in ' ban-yan ' excenf fhaf rr,T Ex. : agneau [ajio], digne [diji]. Ex. pas [pa], tape [tap], appliquer [aplike]. Jl ""7^^' "° ^"^^''^ counterpart. It is formed by trilling the tm Thi. r 'if T"t ''' "PP^^ ^""^^' - -- against'^^h u"' r 1 1^^^ This r IS called m French 'r linmialp ' Ti,^ + ^^ ' be well advanced toward? the 3h and % T' fT'' °' '^^' upward, as in „„r r sound (1 srihe son^d "" Tl "'" '"™''* practised at ilrst in combination 'with d T, drT ttT'^'T'' !risieL"::^;;rrr' -' -~ "-"-rfn ^s Ex. : drap [dra], par [par], torrent [tora], rond [ro] thetongBeso'sto v. 'fa tZV o thTtu^ J J^^ '"' elevating the root of English-speaking peop.e to acquire "^''^ '' " "'"""^ ™°'« ^'ffl«»» 'or ^ia^~Like s in 'sea,' 'cease,' but with the tongue advanced as for 10 INTRODUCTION. [§§18-19 W'' ii Ex. : si [si], pense [pu :s], casser [kase] ; also scfene [sein], place [plas], facade [fasad], legon [losa], re^u [rosy], commen^ait [komase], commen- cons [komnso], resumes {rosyni], portion [porsjo], soixante [swasait]. 14. J — Like sh in shoe, but with the tongue more advanced (§ 1, 5). Ex. : chou [ju], lache [la :J], also, schisme [Jism]. 15. t — Like t in 'tall,' but with the tongue advanced as for [d] above ; avoid the slight aspiration which generally follows the English sound. Ex.: tas [to], patte [pat]. 16. V — Like V in 'vine,' 'cave.' Ex.: vin [ve], cave [ka:v]; also, wagon [vago], neuf heures [ncev oe;r]. 17. z — Like z in 'zone,' or s in ' rose,' but with the tongue advanced as for [d] above. Ex.: zone [zo:n], rose [roiz]; also, deux heures, [d0z oeir], exact [egzakt]. 18. 3 — Like z in ' aztire ' or s in ' pleasure,' but with the tongue more advanced (§ 1, 5). Ex. : je [38], rouge [ruij] ; also mangeant [maja], Jean [ja]. 18. Liaison. Final consonants are usually silent, but in oral speech, within a group of words closely connected logically, a final consonant (whether usually sounded or not) is regularly sounded, and forms a syllable with the initial vowel sound of the next word. This is called in French ' liaison ' = ' linking,' 'joining.' Ex. : C'est^un petit^homme [s^e-tce-pa-ti-tom]. 1. A few of the consonants change their sound in liaison, thus, final s or x = z, d=t, g = k, f=v, e.g., nos^amis [no-za-mi], quand^on parle [ka-to-parl] ; the t of et is sileut, for examples see p. 12, 2. The n of a nasal is carried on, and the nasal vowel loses its nasality in part, or even wholly, e.g., un bon^ami [d&-b5-na-mi, or ce-bo-na-mi]. Note. — The sounds carried over really belong in pronunciation to the initial syllable of the following word, but to avoid confusion they will be indicated in the transcription w?th the preceding word, e.g., les^hommes [lez om, more properly le zoni]. 19. Hlision. The letters a, e, i, are entirely silent in certain cases : — 1. The a and e are silent and replaced by apostrophe in le, la, je, me, te, se, de, ne, que (and some of its compounds) before initial vowel or m i §§20-21] CAPITALS. 11 h mute (not. however, je, ce, le, la after a verb) ; so also i of si before il(s). Ex.: L'arbre (=le arbre), I'encre (=la encre), j'ai (=je ai), qu'a-t-il (--que a-t-il), jusqu'^ (=jusque h), s'il ( = si il). 2. In prose the letter e is silent at the end of all words (except when e IS Itself the only vowel in the word), silent in the verbal endings -es -ent, silent within words after a vowel sound, and in the combination ge or je [3]. In verbs which have stem g [.,], g becomes ge [3] before a or o of an ending, to preserve the [3] sound. tab e tabl], sabre [saibr], prendre [pra.dr]. tu paries Lty pari], ils parlent [il pari], gaiety [gete], mangeons [majo], Jean [3a]. N0TB.-In ordinary discourse, thissound is usually slighted or wholly omitted in most IZT ^""^^"•'ntal combinations produced by its weakening or elision can be readily pronounced, but beginners will do well to sound it fully, except in the easel above specfled. The treatment of the [a] in poetry is beyond L scope of this work 20. Punctuation. The same punctuation marks are used in French as in English. 1. Their French names are : . point. , \i'gule. ; point et virgule. : deux points. ? point d'interrogation. 1 point d'exclamation. - trait d'union. — tiret. or tiret de separation. . . . points suspensifs. " " guillemets. ( ) parenth^se. [] crochets. ■j accolade. * astdrisquo. t croix de renvoi. 2 They are used as in English, but the 'tiret' commonly serves to denote a change of interlocutor. dit^P' "^'''^'^^^' dis-je.-Persomie.-Quoi ! personne !-Persomie. 21. Capitals. The principal differences between French and English in the use of capital letters (Fr. 'lettres majuscules,' ' capitales ') may be seen from the following examples : Un livre canadien ^crit en fran9ais par un Canadien. Toronto, lundi le 6 Janvier. Je lui ai dit ce que je pensais. ' EXERCISE IN PHONETIC TRANSCRIPTION. iliiii ili'S [Tho sign (i) in unHtressed syllablos indicates 'half long.'] Tu aimeras le Seigneur ton Dieu de tout ton coeur, de toute ty eimrr; 1 sejioeir 13 dj0 d tu to koesr, da tut ton ame, de toute ta force, et de toute ta pensde; et ton ton aim, da tut ta fora, e d tut ta pa:se; e to procliain comrae toi-meme ... projg kom twameim... Un homme descendait de Jerusalem k Jdricho; et il est <5&n om desaule d jeryzalem a jeriko; e il e tombt^ parmi des brigands, qui I'ont d^pouill^, ils I'ont chargd toibe parmi de brigil, ki 1 3 depuje, i 1 3 Jar3e de coups, et ils sont partis, en le laissant k moiti^ mort. Et d ku, 6 i so parti, a 1 le:sa a mwatje mo:r. e par hasard un pretre descendait par ce chemin-U, et en le par azair (3b pr^itro desaide par so fm? la, e a 1 voyant, il a passed outre. De meme aussi un Invite, arrivd vwaja, il a pa: so utr. da meim o:si (5fe levit, ari:ve dans cet endroit, il est venu, et en le vovant, il a passd outre, da St aidrwa, il e vny, e a 1 vwaja, il a jxiise utr. Mais un Samaritain, qui voyageait, est venu la, et en le voyant, me (5fe samaritf, ki vwajaje, e vny la, e a 1 vwaja, il a ^t^ emu de piti^ ; et il s'est approch^ pour bander ses il a ete cmy d pitje ; e il s et aproje pur boide se blessures, en y versant de I'huile et du vin ; puis il I'a mis sur blesyir, an i versa da 1 xpl e dy vf; pqi i 1 a mi syr 8a propre bete pour le conduire a une auberge, et il a pris soin sa propra be it pur la koidt{iir a yn obers, e 11 a pri swe de lui. Et le lendemain il a tird deux deniers, et il les a d Iqi. e 1 laidmf il a tiire d0 danje, e i lez a donnas k I'aubergiste, en disant, ' prends soin de lui, et ce que done a 1 oberjist, a diiza, pro swe d Iqi, e s ka tu d^penseras de plus, moi je to le rendrai k mon retour.' ty depasra d plys, mwa 3 ta 1 raidre a mo rtuir. — Reprinted by kind permission of M. Paul Passy, from his "Version populaire de I'Evangile de Luc en transcription phon^tique." 12 PART I. LESSON I. 22. Definite Article. 1. The definite article has tiie following forms in the singular: ■«rru , /!* t^®^' ^^^"^^ ^ ™as«"^'"e beginning with a consonant. The = -j la [la], before a feminine beginning with a consonant. 1,1 [1], before any noun beginning with a vowel or h mute. Le p^re, la m6re. The father, the mother. L enfant (m. or f. ), I'horame. The child, the man. 2. The definite article must be repeated before each noun to which it refers : L'oncle et la tante. The uncle and (the) aunt. 23. Gender. 1. All French nouns are either masculine or feminine : Le papier (m. ), la plume (f. ). The paper, the pen. 2. Names of male beings are masculine, and names of female beings feminine, as in English. 24. Case. French nouns have no case endings. The direct object (accusative) is expressed by verb + noun ; the indirect object (dative) by the preposition k + noun ; the possessive (genitive) by de + noun, and these prepositions must be repeated before each noun to which they refer : La mfere aime I'enfant. The mother loves the child. J ai la plume de Robert. I have Robert's pen (the pen of Robert), de donne Targent k Marie et h I give the money to Mary and (to) ^^^ John. 14 LESSON I. [§25 25. Agreements. French lias the following agreements, and they are usually expressed by change of form : (1) Verb and subject, in number and person ; (2) adjective and noun, in gender and number ; (3) pronoun and antecedent, in gender and number. Vocabulary. avec [avek], with. crayon [krejo], ni. , pencil. encre[aikr], f., ink. est [e], is. et [e], and. livre [li:vr], ra., book. montrez-moi [motre rawa], show me. ou ? [u], where ? papier [papje], m. , paper. plume [plym], f., pen. sur [syr], on, upon. table [tabl], f., table. voici [vwasi], here is, here are. voilk [vwala], there is, there are. 13. 18. EXERCISE I. A. 1. Ou est le livre? 2. Voici le livre. 3..0u est la table ? 4. Voilk la table. 5. Oii est le papier ? 6. Voici le papier. 7. Oii est la plume ? 8, Voici la plume. 9. Oii est I'encre? 10. Voilk I'encre sur la table. 11. Oii est le crayon? 12. Voila le crayon avec la plume. 13. Voici le livre et la plume sur la table. 14. Voilk le papier avec I'encre sur la table. 15. Montrez-moi le papier, la plume et I'encre. Oii est le crayon? 17. Voici le crayon et la plume. Voilk le papier et I'encre. B. (Oral Exercise — questions to be answered in French by the pupil.) 1. Montrez-moi la table. 2. Montrez-moi le papier. 3. Montrez-moi la plume. 4. Montrez-moi I'encre. 5. Ou est la table? 6. Oii est le papier? 7. Oii est la plume? 8. Oii est Teiicre? 9. Montrez-moi le papier, la plume et I'encre. Etc., etc. C. 1. Here is the pen. 2. There is the ink. 3. Where is the paper ? 4. There is the paper with the pen. 5. Here is the book. 6. Show me the paper. 7. Here is the paper on the table. 8. Where is the pen? 9. The pen is with the ink. 10. Show me the paper and ink. 11. The paper is on the VMrJLfA\-f 10 TV>r 1^ Id -u rifl^ 4-U a.a.x\j liirfc. jlo tti.V2.i vxxx^ rk v\n yr\. L/c*Lr' er. §26] LESSON ir. 16 LESSON II. 26. Indefinite Article. Ifc has the following forms, which must bo repeated before each noun to which tl.oy refer : •A' or 'an'= -^"" ^*^^' ^^^^^° ^"y masculino noun, lune [yn], boforo any fominino noun. Un livro et une plurao. Un homme, une dcolo. A book and (a) pen. A man, a school. Vocabulary. Marie [raari], Mary, non [noj, no. porte[portj, f., door. qui?[ki], who? tableau [tablo], m. , picture. aussi [osi], too, also, chaise [JeizJ, f., chair. derri^re [derjea], behind, devant [dova], before, in front of. fenfitre [fanejtr], f., window. Jean [id], John. j'ai [3 e], I have ; il a [il a], he has ; elle a [el a], she has j vous avez [vuz ave], you have. EXERCISE II. A. 1 Voici une porte et aussi une fenetre. 2. Montrez-moi la porte 3. Montrez-moi la fenetre. 4. Montrez-moi une chaise et une table. 5. Voilk ure chaise devant la table. 6 It ""« ^n"^^ "'"' ^^ ^^^^"- ^- ^«il^ "^ t'-^bleau derriere la porte. 8. Qui a un crayon et une plume? 9. Jean a un crayon et Mane a urie plume. 10. Non, elle a un crayon et H a une plume 1. J'ai un crayon et vous avez un livre. 12. Ou est Jean? 13. Jean est derriere la table. 14. Marie est atsf 6 eh''". ''■■ ^^''^ ' ^'^"^^^ ^' -^"^ ^ ^^ "-- aussi lb. Elle a le papier et vous avet: I'encre. 17. Montrez- sTlaTabr*" ^"''' ^"^ ^^"'^^' ^^' ^""^'^ ^'"''"'^ ^^'^ ^^ Pl"^« B. (Oral.) 1. Montrez-moi une porte. fenetre. 3. Montrez-moi une table aussi 5. Ou est la table? 6. Qui a la plume e. 1- crayon ? 8. Montrez-moi une plume ? tableau? 10. Ou est le tableau? 11 Ou est Jean ? Etc., etc. 2. Montrez-moi une u 3sfc la chaise? '^J' ? 7. Ou est y. iVlontrez-raoi nn Ou est Marie? 12. n ! 16 LESSON III. [§§27-29 C. 1. There is a door and here is a window. 2. Show me a cliair and a piciure. 3. Here is a chair behind the door. 4. There is a picture. 5. Who lias a pen and a pencil 1 6. John has a pen and Mary has a pencil. 7. You have a pencil. 8. No, I have a pen. 9. Who has the ink ? 10. Mary has the ink. 11. She has the mk. 12. You have the pen and a pencil. 13. There is a chair in front of the window. 14. There is a book on the table. 15. T'le pen is with the book. 16= The chair is behind the door. 17. Where is the picture? 18. The picture is behind the door also. n I LESSON III. 27. Some Possessives. Observe the following, and remember that possessive adjectives must be repeated before each noun to which they refer (for pronunciation, see § 32) : Mon (m. ) livre et ma (f. ) plume. My book and (my) pen. Ton (m. ) livre et ta (f. ) plume. Thy book and (thy) pen. Son (m. ) livre et sa (f. ) plume. His or her book and pen. Votre (m. ) livre et votre (f. ) plume. Your book and (your) pen. 28. Negation. With verbs, 'not' or 'no' = ne . . . pas with the verb placed between them, ne becoming n' before a vowei(§19, 1): Je n'ai pas, vous n'avez pas. I have not, you have not. 29. Interrogation. In questions, the personal pronoun subject comes after the verb, rs in English, and is joined to it by a hyphen, or by -t- if the verb ends in a vowel : Avez- vous ? ; a-t-il ? ; est-elle ici ? Have you ? ; has he ? ; is she here ? Vocabulary. autre [otr], other. boite [bwait], f., box. cour [ku:r], £., yard. dans [da], in, into. mrti; Ifreir], m., brother. kx ;"*ijil h>dtQ. I'encre de votre frfere. your brother's ink mais [me], but ne. . .pas [na. . .pa], not, na oui [wi], yes. salle [sal], f., room (large), soeur [sceir], f., sister. §30] LESSON III. EXERCISE III. 17 A. 1. Avez-vous votre crayon ? 2. Oui, i'ai mon cravon et. Jean a so,, crayon. 3. Oi est votre cra^n? 4 Void^o' IS t. X. ''r- 1'« ^0 A Jle^^bote'Tt'Te tervx: It Te Voinoni;/"''--'' ™- aans la salJe. lU. Qui a I'encre de mon hhrel 20 ?««,. „ uH^yot ™'" ''"^- ''• ^™^-™- - o^yonf-aj^k! Ma^i/ft->Eie?e S', •"s''"! t-L^r '°". '• ^'^ -' fi A f ^11 ^'''^*'"« »<-! » o- A-t-il son hvre et sa plume 1 Lti 8 r P^P^^V^.««^ crayon? 7. Avez-vous votre Iivre? 8 Avez-vous le livre de Marie? 9. Avez-vous un C. 1. Han he the paper? 2. He has not the paper 3 Where is my penciH 4. Where is your pencil? s'^ There is my pencil ,„ the box on the table, fi. A>^here is your shTer? I Is she m the other room! 8, No, she is in the yaiS 9 Where IS your brother! 10. Is he here! 11. HeLrothcre W ?en " HI Ta"* r* y°"'-.b™U'-- 13- Your Tter hTs V« ^' -J . ™ ''«'■ P«»°"- 15. Show me tie picture Lbie'^^T&^teritr'rr^^r,:;- •": ^^^'^ "^ front of the window. '^^ *^'''^ '^ '" *''« "•»<»" i» LESSON IV. 30. Some Pronoun Objects. ' Him • or ■ it ' > le rm ^ h mute (§ 19, 1). They come next beforo the verb, or beW 18 Oil est la plume ? Je I'ai. Oil est le livre ? Le voici. Oil est Marie ? La voilk. LESSON IV. [§30 Where is the pen ? I have it. Where ia the book ? Here it is. Wliere is Mary ? There she is. NOTB. Void and Voll^ are derived from vois = 'see' + lei = 'here* and vois = 'see' + lit = 'there' (literally, 'see here,' 'see there'), and, owing to their verbal force, govern words directly like transitive verbs. Vocabulary. mademoiselle [madmwazel], f. , Miss. maison [mez^"" f., house. monsieur [m9sj0], ni. , sir, Mr. pardon [pardo], I beg your pardon. cahier [kaje], m. , exercise-book. ^cole [ekol], f., school. ^glise [egliiz], f., church. la [la], f. , her, it. le [la], m., him, it. madame [madam], f., madam, Mrs. EXERCISE IV. A. 1. IMontrez-moi la fenetre. 2. La voila. 3. Ou est mon cahier 1 4. Le voila sur la table. 5. Avez-vous votre plume, mademoiselle 1 6. Non, monsieur, je ne I'ai pas. 7. Marie a I'encre. 8. Non, monsieur, elle ne I'a pas. 9. A-t-il mon crayon? 10. II ne I'a pas. IL Ou est ma soeur? 12. La voila dans la conr derriere I'dcole. 13. J'ai mon crayon; IVEarie ne I'a pas. 14. La cour est derriere I'ecole ; la voila. 15. Vous avez I'encre. 16. Pardon, madame, je ne I'ai pas. 17. JMontrez-moi votre maison. 18. La voila derriere I'eglise. 19. A-t-elle sa plume 1 20. Non, monsieur, elle ne I'a pas. 21. La voila sur la chaise. 22. N'avez-vous pas mon cahier? 23. Non, monsieur, je ne I'ai pas. £. (Oral.) 1. IMontrez-moi la fenetre. 2. Ou est votre cahier? 3. Qui a ma plume? 4. Qui a mon crayon? 5. Avez- vous I'encre? 6. Qui a votre cahier? 7. Montrez-moi I'eglise ? 8. Ou est le papier de Jean ? 9. A-t-il son papier ? 10. Avez- vous votre encre? 11. N'avez-vous pas le papier aussi? 12. i^-t-ellesa boite? 13. A-t-elle son papier dans saboite? 14. A-t-elle sa plume aussi? 15. Ou est votre frere Jean? 16. Ou est votre soeur IVIarie ? 17. IVIontrez-moi votre irhre. 18. JVIontrez-moi votre sceur. Etc., etc. C. 1. Who has my pen? 2. John has your pen, sir. 3. John, have you my exercise-book ? 4. No, sir, I haven't §§31-32] LESSON V. Id 'I '^ 't ;: Z *' 7 't!h. \ ""'^ '^^ >^^"^ exercise-book ? pupil has my pen cV Thl ' ""^'V'V'T P"^ ^ 8. Another f« in M ^ ^^ ^^^^ ^^ behind the school : there it IS. 10. Mary, your pencil is on the chai- 11 T W LESSON V. 31. Plural Forms. 1. The plural of a noun or an adiec tive IS regularly formed by addxng -s to the singular • ' Le grand roi, la grande roine. The ereaf kinc. f l,. 2. The plural of the definite article le la 1' is le«? • Les [lo] livres, les [lez] enfants. The books, the children'. 3. The plural of the personal p.onoun le, la, 1' is also les • Je les ai. J, .u ., 1 have them (books, pens, etc.). 32. The Possessive Adjective. 1. The followinc. rre Its forms m full (for agreement and repetition, .ee § 27) :' Masculine. Feminine. p„,,,, mon [mo] „» Imni 1'i^ural. f P^J tes [te], thy, your. , P'''^ , ses [se], )iis, her, its. notrefnotr] „os [no], our. votre[votr] ^os [vo], your. leur [la-ir] leurs [ke:r], their. 2. The forms motl, ton, son, arc used instead of ma ia -a before feminines beginning with a vo^.cl or h mute S^,°">?^"?.^™^«(^-)' Ily fried. Soni3on5..8to,re(f.). His «L.ry. Son Ison, autre plume (f . ). His other pen. o. Since snn ^e:!> c.o«\ ^„„_-, ^i • , ., , 1 1 , ~~ " ^ ' '^^''^ xiicans 4as, 'her,' or 'its' it can only be known from the context which is meant. ton son [so] notre [notr] votre [votr] leur [loe.-r] 20 LESSON V. [§32 Vocabulary. affaires [afcir], f. pL, things. aujourd'hui [ojurdqi], to-day. bon [bo], good. canif [kanif], m., penknife. 6lhve [eleiv], m. or f., pupiL ils ont [ilz 5], they have, ils sont [il so], they are. porte-plume [portplym], m., pen- holder, rfegle [re:gl], f., ruler. sous [su], under. EXERCISE V. A. 1. Mes livres ne sont pas sur la table ; qui les a ? 2. Les voilk sur une chaise. 3. Qui a nos bons crayons? 4. Les voila dans la boite de IVIarie. 5. On sont vos plumes ? 6. Voici nos plumes. 7. Ou sont nos aflaires? 8. Voici vos crayons et vos plumes sur la table. 9. Leurs plumes et les plumes de leur ccour no sont pas ici. 10. Pardon, monsieur, les voici sous la table. 11. Les Aleves n'ont pas leurs livres aujourd'hui. 12. ]Montr6z-moi la regie de I'cleve. 13. La voici dans sa boite. 14. Leurs canif s sont bons. 15. Nos canif s sont bons aussi. 16. Vos porte-plumes ne sont pas bons. 17. Ou est mon encre? 18. La voila avec I'encre de ma soeur. 19. Ou est mon autre plume ? 20. Elle est dans ma boite. B. (Oral.) 1. Oil sont les affaires de mon frere? 2. Qui a le canif de ma sceur? 3. IMontrez-moi votre regie. 4. Ou est la plume de IMarie? 5. Ou sont nos livres aujourd'hui] 6. Avez-vous ma boite 1 7. Qui est dans la salle ? 8. Qui est avec Jean dans ". cour ? 9. Oil est la cour? 10. Oil est Marie 1 11. ir'est-elle pas ici? 12. JMontrez-moi vos bons crayons. 13. Avez-vous mon encre? 14. Qui a mon autre plume? Etc., etc. C. 1. Where are your books to-day? 2. They are here. 3. There they are on the table. 4. Where are your brother's things ? 5. There is his pen-holder and his ruler. 6. Have you my ink and my other pen? 7. Where is your sister's ruler ? 8. Her ruler is not here to-day. 9. There is her pen- knife on the table. 10. Where is Mary's book? 11. Her brother has her book. 1 2. And she has her brother's book. 13. John's ink is on the table. 14. Their books are not here. 15. Hav-3 you not my pens? 16. No, your pens are in the §§33-36] LESSON VI. 21 box. 17. Where are John's and Mary's books? Ifi TTo,.^ they are on the table. 19, Where is mrsister's ruler t fo r b>^ven't it ; there it is on the table. ^' ^ j'ai tu as 11 a nous avons [nuz avo]. voua avez [vuz avel. LESSON VI. 33. Present Indicative of avoir, Ho have.' 1. Aflfirmative. o xr ^• ^' -Negative. I have, etc. t u I have not, etc. ll^\ je n'ai pas [39 n t pa] [/7 tun'aspas [ty n a pa]. *■ "-J- . iln'apas [11 n a po]. nous n'avons pas [nu n av5 pa]. llHont rilzo] ■ votxs n'avez pas [vu n ave pa]. ^ ■■ ilsn'ontpaa [il n pa]. 34. Pronouns in Address. 'You ' is regularly vous • the form tu = ' thou ' or 'you ' is used in familiar address : ' Avez- vous ma plume, monsieur ? Have you my pen, sir ' As-tu ta plume, mon enfant ? Have you your pen, my child ? ^« f •^•r^;^'^^^^ « 'y«^^' by vous in the exercises. unlesR the u.- of tu IS required by the context. *^ 35. Contractions. De + le and de + Ies are always con trac ted mto du and des ; the remaining forms are not contracted, thus, de la, de 1' in full : La plume du [dy] f r^re. The brother's pen. Les plumes des [de] soeurs. The sisters' pens. But : La plume de V4]kve, etc. c ^^ The Partitive Noun and Pronoun. 1. 'Some' or any, whether expressed or implied before a noun in English IS regularly expressed in French by de + the definite article • * ucs iieres r Has lie (any) brothers ? alone ^'^ ^ ^^"^'""^ negation the partitive is expressed by de 22 LESSON VI. [§36 He has no bread. He has no friends. II n'a pas de pain. II n'a pas d'arnis. 3. * Some ' or ' any * as a pronoun = en, which must be ex- pressed in French, even when omitted in English : A-t-il de I'encre ?— II en a. Has he (any) ink ?— He has (some). A-t-il une plume ?— II en a une. Has he a pen ?— He has one. Vocabulary. ami [ami], m. , friend. '\ deux [d0], two. encrier [akrie], m., inkstand. enfant [afa], m. or f., child, boy, girl. il n'en a pas, he has not, he has not any, he has none. fils [fis], m., son. la [la], there. un, une [w, yn], one. EXERCISE VI. A. Continue the following throughout the singular and plural : 1. J'ai des plumes, tu as des plumes, etc. 2. Je n'ai pas de plumes, etc. 3. J'ai des amis, etc. 4. Je n'ai pas d'amis, etc. 5. J'ai de I'encre, etc. 6. Je n'ai pas d'encre, etc. 7. J'en ai, etc. 8. Je n'en ai pas, etc. R 1. Avez-vous des plumes et des crayons 1 2. Je n'ai pas de plumes, mais j'ai des crayons. 3. Mon frere a un canif et ma soeur en a deux. 4. Ou est I'encre? 5. La voila dans I'encrier sur la table. 6. Avez-vous du papier 1 7. Je n'en ai pas. 8. Jean est la dans la salle. 9. A-t-il de I'encre? 10. IS'on, monsieur, il n'a pas d'encre. 11. At il des livres? 12. Non, monsieur, il n'en a pas. 13. As-tu du papier, mon fils? 14. Je n'en ai pas. 15. Tu as de I'encre et des plumes, mon enfant. 16. Pardon, monsieur, je n'en ai pas. 17. Ou sont les livres des eleves 1 18. Les voila sur la table. 19. Mes soeurs n'ont pas de papier, mais elles ont de I'encre et des plumes. 20. Ou est la regie du frere de Jean? 21. Je I'ai. 22. Nous avons des livres et des plumes. 23. En avez-vous? 24. Nous n'en avons pas. C. (Oral.) 1. Avez-vous un cahier ? 2. Ou est votre cahier ? 3. Ou est le cahier de Marie ? 4. A-t-elle des crayons aussi ? 5. Qui a de I'encre? 6. Ou est son encre ? 7. Ou sont vos freres et vos soeurs? 8. Avez-voua des crayons? *^- 4.vons- ^37-88] LESSON VII. 23 B 1 Where is your brother's book? 2. Here it is with me your ruler. 6. I haven't any, but ray sister has one books ^ 17 There are some books on the table. 18 Here are our books on the chair. 19. She has brothers and sisters 20 Where are they ? 21. They are in the yard. 22. Where are ^e pupils' things? 23. They are in the other room 24. Where is your ruler, my boy ? 25 Here it is 2fi W you any ink, my son ? 27. I hLn't any. ^^"" LESSON vn. 37' Present Indicative of auoir (continued). 1. Interrogative. Have I ? etc. ai-je ? [e: 3], as-tu ? a-t-il ? avons-nous ? avez-vous ? ont-ils ? 2. Negative Interrogative. Have I not ? etc. n'ai-je pas ? n'as-tu pas ? n'a-t-il pas ? n'avons-nous pas ? n'avez-vous pas ? n'ont-ils pas ? ,,. ,^ „ ^,^j. 38. Interrogation. 1. When, tho subject of an inter- [a ty]. [a 1 11]. [av3 nil], [ave vu]. [3t il]. [n e: 3 pa], [n a ty pa], [n a t il pa], [n avo nu pa], [n ave vu pa], [n 3t il pa]. rogative sentence is noun, the word order is noun-verb- pronoun : L'hommeest-ilL'i? Is the man there ? 2. This form of question may be combined with an inter- rogative word ; Mais Jean oil cst-il ? But where is John ? Oombien de pliunes Jean a-f.il ? How many pens has John ? lEacaitK',"'»«*!»'s«ve»9»(STMW*w-iSS5?* 24 LESSON VII. [§38 f} {: 3, 'Whatr (as direct object or predicate of a verb) = que? ?ee also § 19, 1 : Qu'avez-vous Ik ? What have you there ? Vocabulary. chez moi [Je mwa], at homo. classe [klais], f., class, class-room. combien de? [kobjf da], how many? ensemble [asaibl], together. maintenant [metna], now. maltre [me : trl, m. , master, teacher. ou [u], or. poche[poJ], f., pocket. quatre [katr], four. sac [sak], m. , bag, satchel. salle de classe [sal daklais], f., class-room. trois [trwa], three. EXERCISE VII. ^.Continue the following: 1. Ai-je un canif?, as-tu un canif?, etc. 2. Ai-je des crayons dans une boite?. as-tu des crayons dans une boite?, etc. 3. N'ai-je pas un bon'ami?, etc. B. 1. Avez-vous votre crayon dans votre boite? 2. Non, monsieur, je I'ai dans raon sac. 3. Combien de livies avez- vous? 4. J'en ai trois ou quatre dans mon sac. 6. N'avez- vous pas un canif dans votre poche? 6. Non, monsieur, ie n'en ai pas dans ma poche, mais j'en ai un chez moi. 7. Or est votre frere maintenant? 8. II est dans la cour avec I. autres enfants. 9. Ou sont Marie et sa sceur? 10. Les voiia ensemble dans la salle de classe. 11. Jean n'a-t-il pas mon po, .e-plume et mes plumes dans son sac ? 1 2. Non, monsieur, il les a dans sa poche. 13. Ou sont le maitre et les 4\kves raamtenant? 14. lis sont dans la salle de classe. 15. Qu'as- tu dans ton sac, mon enfant? 16. J'ai deux livres et quatre plumes dans mon sac. 17. Ou sont les porte-plumes ? 18. En voila un sur la table. C. (Oral.) 1. Ou est le sac de Jean? 2. Montrez-moi votre papier. 3. Jean, ou est ton canif? 4. N'as-tu pas un canif et un porte-plume ? 5. Ou sont les enfants ? 6. Qu'avez-vous dans votre poche ? 7. Combien de f reres avez-vous ? 8 Votre frere combien de plumes a-t-il? 9. Qu'a-t-il dans son sac? 10. Ou sont mes affaires? 11. Qui est dans la salle de classe raamtenant? 12. Le maitie ou est-il? 13. Et les ^l^.ves ou sont-ils? 14. Combien de plumes as-tu, mon enfant? ^•39] LESSON VIII. 25 Zs ears ste ? "li A ^^^ ^'' ^^'''' ^"*^-^'« ^^^^^ ^ff^^^-^s clcin.sieiu.s,sacs? 1«. A vez-vous mes boas crayons? 19 Qui a mes boiis crayons / Etc., etc. i^'. Sjui door ^'3^Vh?.rT '"' ^"^'^ • ^- ''^^^^''^ *^^^>^ ^^^ behind the cloor. 6 W hat aye you in your pocket ? 4. I have a knife and a pencil in my pocket. 5^^ PWe you pens and penc,M 6. Yes sir, I have two pens and th, J pencHs 7 Where are John and his brother? 8. They are vvlth he other boys in the class-room. 9. Sliow me your books and us brothei. 12 How many pencils have they? 13 Thev ri ba. ir h" ""^ ^^"^- ^^'^"-^^ ''' H-« they - m my bag. 16. Have we any pens? 17. Yes sir here are some in the box. 18. Wlfer^ are John and R^be t? 19. There they are together in the class-room. 20 How twr 'IT'^ '''''' ^'''' 21. T have one and my brother ha" two. 22. Have you any paper ? 23. We haven't any but the master has some. 24. Here is his paper. ^' 39. LESSON VIII. Present Indicative of etre, 'to be.' 1. Affirmative. I am, ecc. je suis [39 siji]. f-u es [ty e]. il est [il e]. nous somraes [nu soni]. vous etes [vuz e:tj. ils sont [il so]. 3. Interrogative. Am I ? etc. suis-je? [sqii 3]. es-tu ? [e ty]. est-il ? [et il]. sommes-nous ? [som nu]. L'tes-voiiR? [eitvu]. sont-ils ? [sot il]. 2. Negative. I am iiot, etc. jo lie suis pas [39 „a gip pa], tu n'es pas [ty n e pa], il n'est pas [il n e pa], nous lie sommes pas [nu 119 som pa]. vous n'ettvs pas [vu n eit pa], ils ne sont pas [il na so pa] 4. Negative Interrogative. Am I not ? etc. ne suis-je pas ? [nasqiispa]. n'es-tu pas ? [n e ty pa], n'est-ilpas? [n et il pa], ne sommes-nous pas ? [no som nu jia]. n'etes-vous pas ? [n eit vu pnl. nosont-ilspas? [na sot il pu]. 26 LESSON VIII. W [§40 40 Observe tl.at il ancj elle n.ean not only 'he' an.l 'sh.,' French: ' """ "' ^"' '"" ^""'"''^ "^ "^"^ "' Ou est la ,)l„„u, ? Elle est ici. Where is the pen ? It is hc-re Ou sunt les p,u.„e«? Elles sent iei. Whe.e u.e the penn? Th; ,re here. VOCAIUTJ.AIIV. ^ fi-l, to, at, ill. commence [k.)mu:s], begins, difficile [difi^ilj, dirticult. facile [fasilj, easy. le9on[los5], f., lesson. EXERCISE VIII. malade [iiialad], ill, sick, nous [im], IKS. tableau noir [tahio nwaul m., k present [a pre//.], at present. .1. Continue the following.: 1. Je suis k I'^cole, tu os etc J. Je suis nialnde .'lumurd'liui tu ps pfo •? t ' oans la i,alJe de classe, et le niaitre est ifi ...,«c.; q xt Hvons nos affaires. 4.'n„s ca„i,?':„;,t\^: ." ^ p„lf °- Nos plu.nes^et „„s porte-plumes sont da«» „o» l„,iter 6 Nos l.vres sont dans „„s ,s„o,,. 7. L'^ncre est dans les e, n-ie.s 8 eYleT.'ut'i.e "t' '" *"'''""■ """■■ "■ ^"- -■".-, as caliers- er. les autres eleves en ont aussi 10 Tn i «""«••*>, 1 l^La ]e,on n'est pas difficil ^"12. EHe Si fS. ^'"""^"^^• S^nt . /• V'^T'"'""^"'^ 4. Qui est avec nous? 5 0^ sont Jes aifaires des e eves '? 6 Le m-ittrP nWf ,-i ^ , Aleves, 7. Ou sont les chaises etlSt Wear's' KvTz™:: pa. vos hv,.es 9. Mo„trez-moi les regies et les port^ pTu™" 10, Qui est devant le tableau noir? 11. Of. est la lernn ! 2. Avez-vous des cahiers? 13. U le,on com, ence t u" 14. Qu, commence la le^on! 15. Ta le^on est-el"e facie 16. Tes lemons sont-elles difficiles, „,on enfant! Ete etc ,•„ ft J ■' •?'■?"'?'■« <"'■<> not in tlie clas.<.-i-oom. 2. Tl'iev are you not 111 our class ? 5. Yes T am §§41-42] LESSON IX. 27 9. YoH, .and"„u. lH.>tJ . 1: ,i^ ^^avo you exercise-hooks? 13. Yos, here they are on ^l^Me HWuZ f""''^ '"^^^ your baijs? 15 Wn i...„ ^*' '^"'^^^ ^'^ive you in •;;.l..or.s.'in Ate'Vou'l^-n 7'';V^'^:f?t""'^ ""' '"'" How many books have you 'i 19 T {..f i ''''' ^'''"^- ^^• three at }u)uie. 20. The lessor, i. 1 T i "' ^" '^'^ ^'^S. and John's lessons are difficulT 09 T ^"^^'^^ ', '^ '' ^^'^^^^ ^^• John? 23. Yes, sir, th^y are ciifHcurt! "^"^ ^"^'^"" ^^'"^'^•"'^' LESSON IX. -ir, -re. info th Jlj:;ti ^ "'" ""•'''' """'^^ -• Donner [donel, to lmvp p;,,;^ re • -,' . ^ ■^^^• Tit .1, ^^""rffimirj.tofinish. Vendre [vuidrl to nell Lke these are conjugated all regular verbs wi ponding infinitive endings. '''''''"^^- 42. Present Indicative of donner, 'to .ive ' 1. Aflirmative. I give, am giving, etc, je (lonn e [.,o don], tu donn es [ty don], il donn e [il don], nous donnons [nu dono]. vous donn ez [vu done], lis donn ent [il don]. 3. Interrogative. Amigiving?, dolgive?, eta donne-je? donnes-tu ? donne-t-il ? donnons-nous donnez-voiiis ? donnent-ils ? [done! .1]. [don ty]. [don t il]. ne donne-t-il [dono nu]. ne di [done vu]. 2. Negative. Idonotgive, am not giving, etc. jene donn e pas [sonadonpo] tu ne donn es pas [ty no don po]: line donn e pas [ilnadonpal nous ne donnons pas [nu no dono pal vous ne donn ez pas [vu no done pa lis ne donn ent pas [il no don pa]. 4. Negative Interrogative. Am Inot giving?, dolnotgive?, etc ne donnd-je pas ? f„e done: , paT ne donnes-tu pas? [no don ty pa/ ne dnnn«.. ,-, p^., , [uo don t il pa'] onnoiis-rtQii nedonnez-vouspas? [no don pas? [no dono nu pa) fdont ill --—'.- » uu« pas : no done vu pal i^^-t d]. ne donnent-ils pas ? [ne dont il poT 28 LESSON IX. 'This,' 'that' = ^ [§§43-44 43. Interrogation. By prefixing the won^s est-ce que ? litonilly, -is it thatT, any statement may be turned into I (jueHtion • Vous avez moi. canif. You lmv.> my penknife. Est-ce que vous avez nion cauif ? Have you my penknife ? Nom-The first fli..jrular interroKn.ive for,.. „:„., donrioje? Buis-Je? etc-.; is avoLled ... most vorl.s, a„d m„.t he avc.i.i.,1 i„ sck-. by ..sin^ • est-ce one?' In the exerc-.^es, use 'cst-ce .,uer every whe.e i., i,.terroj,'atio..8 with the first sin^fular. 44. The Demonstrative Adjective. 1. The following are its forms, and tj.oy must be repeated before each noun to which they refer : 'ce [so], before a masculine beginning with a consonant, cet [sEtJ, before a ni. begiiniing with a vowel or h mute, ^cette [set], before any feminine. ' These,' ' those ' = ces [se], before any plural. 2. To distinguish 'this' from 'that,' or for emphasis, add -Ci ( = ici) anil -la respectively to the noun : Ce livre, cet l.omme, cette an.ie. This (or that) book, man, friend, Ce crayon-ci et ces plumes-Ik. This pencil and those pens. Vocabulary. aller [ale], to go. arriver [arive], tc arrive, chemin [J'^me], m., road, way. commencer [koniose], to begin. continuer [k.Himie], to continue. ^couter [ekutej, to listen to, hear. en [u], in, on. entrer [a tre] dans, to enter, go into, histoire [istwair], f., story. nous void [nu vwasi], here we are. en route [a rut], on the way. EXERCISE IX. ^ ^. Je ramasse mes affaires pour aller a I'^colfc. Voici mes hvres, mon cahier, mes plumes, ma regie, mon crayon T.es voila maintenant dans mon sac. Maintenant je suis en route marcher [niarje], to march, walk. pour [pur], for, in order to. raconter [rakote], to relate, tell. ramasser [raniase], to pick up. collect. rencontrer [rokotre], to meet. Robert [robe: r], Robert route [rut], f., way. rue [ry], f., street. uii §44] LESSON IX. 29 IK> r 1 ^cole. Dans la ruo jo rc^ncontro n.on ami Robert Nous marchons onsomble. Nous coutinuons not^o dumin n racoute une usto re. Nous arrivons a la porte 1 Se" Nous entrons ,lans l\--^«^ 13- Qui arrive k la porte (ie 16cole? 14. Ou entrous-nous ? 15. Ou sonimes nous maintenant? 16. Qui est dans la classe? 17 EsTce que les autres Aleves sont dans la classe aLsi? 18 Qui ^1. Where are you going? 2. Are you going to school ? 3 We are going to school. 4. I am collecting my thin^ o fur frifndf in 'the 'T ^^^V^ 'l" -^ ^^g -- 6^ We S.e t our tnends in the street. 7. We continue our way 8 We too 12 tT'^ . ^^'! 'T^^°°^- ^^- "^^ ^'^t^'- tlie school 3 TtI IW T ?' ""^^ '^i" P"P"^ ^^-^ "^ t'^e class-room. iowf 15 T 'n't^'^'''"Vr ^1- ^' ^^^ ^^-^^"'^^"S ^he lesson easv 17* ^,^^«",<^^^"^«/he lesson. 16. This lesson is not IQ^ThJ . IS diftcult. 18. These lessons are difficult you HstenT:f If'v ''''^' T ''' ."^'^ ^''^''^ ^^^^^^ ^l- Are you listening i 22. Yes, sir, T am listening now. 23 Robert rtei:^,"^'*'"°^' '*■ ^-' -• 25? Are tho.e'^ptS 80 LESSON X. [§§45-47 m Hull iiiti LESSON X. 45. Plural Forms. Note the following exceptions to the rule (§31) that the plural of nouns and adjectivea is formed by adding -s to the singular : 1. Nouns in -s, -x, -z, and adjectives in -s, -x, remain unchanged in the plmal, e.g., bras, bras, arm(8) ; voix, voix, voicc(8) ; nez, nez, nose(8) ; bas, bas, low ; vieux, vieux, old. 2. Nouns and adjectives in -au, nouns in -et', and a few nouns in -ou, add -X instead of -s, e.g., couteau, couteau:c, knife, knives; beau, beaux, fine ; jeu, jeux, game(8) ; bijou, bijoux, jewels) ; caillou, cailloux, pebble(8), and a few rarer nouns in -ou. 3. Nouns, and the commoner adjectives, in -al change -al to -au and add -X (as above), e.g., gt'n»5ral, gt^n^raux, generals); rival, rivaux, rival(8), except bal, bals, ball(8), and a few rarer nouns. 4. Oeil, yeux, eye(8) ; del, cieux, sky, skies, heaven(8). 46. Contractions. The forms ^ + le and k + les are always contracted into au and aux respectively ; the remain- ing forms are not contracted, thus, a la, a 1' in ^ull : Je parle au [o] frere. I speak to the brother. Aux [o] soeurs, aux [oz] hommes. To the sisters, to the men. But : Je parle k la soeur, k I'homme. 47. Use Ofi/ya. 1. * There is' and 'there are' are not only translated by voil^, but also by il y a : Voilk des plumes sur la table. There are some pens on the table. II y a [il j a] des plumes sur la table. There ar ome pens on the table. 2. Observe, however, that voila answers the question 'where is?', 'where are?', and makes a specific statement about an object to which attention is directed by pointing or the like, while il y a does not answer the question 'where is ? ', • where are ? ', and makes a general statement. 3. II y a governs nouns just like other transitive verbs : Je donne des plumes h Marie. I give (some) pens to Mary. iS sur la table. Tiere are (some) pens on the table. n ~.i. §«) LESSON X. 81 Vocabulary, lac [lak], m., lake. Tun [I (Hi], the one, one. naturel [natyrcl], natural. noir [nwair], black. ceil, yeux [a>j, j0], m., eye, eyes. parce que [pars ko], because. pourquoi ? [purkwa], why ? qui [ki], indecl., who, whom, which. reprisenter [raprezate], to . jpre- sent. sable [saibl], m., sand, si [»'], so. vieux [vj0], old. aimer [erne], to love, like. beau [bo], fine, handsome. beaucoup [boku], much, very much. blanc [bla], white. bleu [bl0], blue. bord [bo I r], m. , edge, shore, boidor. caillou [kaju], m., pebble, stone. cheval [jeval], m., horse. COurag:eux [kura30], brave. creuser [ki0zo], to dig. eau [o], f,, water. fougue. .: [fug0], spirited, fiery. g^n^ral [general], m., general. grand [gru], great, large, tall. jouer [3 we], to play. k cheval, on horseback, chez nous, at home, at our house. EXERCISE X. A. II y a deux tableaux chez nous. Nous les aimons beau- coup, parce qu'ils sont si naturels. L'un reprdsente qnatre enfants qui jouent au bord du lac. L'eau du lac est bleue (f.), et les yeux des enfants sont bleus aussi. II y en a deux qui ramassent des cailloux, et lea deux autres creusent dans le sable. L'autre tableau repr(5sente deux grands generaux k cheval. lis sont sur deux beaux chevaux. L'un des chevaux est blanc et l'autre est noir, Les gdndraux sont courageux et leurs chevaux sont beaux et fougueux. B. Continue the following: 1. Je parle aux gdne'raux, etc. 2. Je parle k I'enfant, etc. 3. Est-ce que je raniasse dos cailloux?, etc. 4. II y a des plumes dans ma boite, dans ta boite, etc. 6. II r'y en a pas dans ma boite, ta boite, etc. 6. Mes -^ux sont bleus, tes yeux, etc. 7. J'ai deux beaux chevaux, etc. 8. J'aime ces vieux tableaux, etc. C. (Oral.) 1. Oil sont les tableaux? 2. Est-ce que vous les aimez? 3. Pourquoi est-ce que vous les aimez? 4. Y a-t-il des tableaux dans cette salle ? 5. Montrez-moi ces tableaux. 6. Qui joue?_ 7. Ou est-ce qu'ils jouent? 8. Les yeux des enfauts sont-iis bleus ou noirs? 9. Vos yeux sont-ils noirs? If ml 32 LESSON XI. [§§48-49 10. Qui ramasse cles cailloux? 11. Que ramassez-voiis ? 12. Qui creuse dans le sable? 13. Ou sonc les deux grands generaux? 14. Les chevaux des gt'iieraux sont-ils bl.uics ou noirs? 15. Vos fr^res sont-ils courageux? 16. A qui est-ce que je parle ? 17. A qui est-ce que vous parlez? 18. Y a-t-il des plumes dans votre boite 1 1 9. Combien de tableaux y a-t-i{ chez nous? 20. Ainiez-vous ces vieux tableaux? Etc., etc. Z>. 1. There are two fine pictures in our class-room. 2. Tiic pupi's like them. 3. These pictures arc natural and beautiful. 4. In this picture there are four children. 5. They are play- ing 6. The children's eyes are blue. 7. Three of the children are picking up pebbles on the shore of the lake. 8. The other child is digging in the sand. 9. He is talking to the other children. 10. There is the other picture. 11. In that picture there are two generals. 12. Their horses are fine and spirited. 13. The generals are brave. 14. I like these pictures very much. 15'. The master is relating the story of the generals to the pupils. 16. There is a pupil who is not listening. 17. Show me the pupil who is not listening. 18. I am listening, because I like this siovy. 19. Now, show me the fine pictures. 20. There they are. LESSOiN XI. 48. An Indefinite Pronoun. 1. 'One,' 'some one,' 'we,* 'you,' 'they,' 'people,' used indefinite.^, ai-e represented in French by on, with the verb always in the singular: On [5] parle de Jean. We (you, they, etc. ) speak of John. 2. When following a verb v/ith a final vowel, on is joined toitby-t-(cf. §29): Par oh commenee-t-on ? Wliere do we (etc. ) begin ? 3. An on construction often corresponds to an English passive, especially when the agent is not mentioned : Ensuite on apporte le potage. Next the soup i.s brought. 49. Interrogation, Observe the frequeni,ly used inter- rogative phrase ' qu'est-ce que ?' = ' what ? ' which is made up of que ? (§ 38, 3) + esSce que ? (§ 43) : Qu'a-t-il ? or Qu'est-ce qu'il a ? What has he ? §50] LESSON XI. 33 50. Present Indicative off aire, ' to do/ < make ' (irreg.). I do, am doing, etc. We do, are doing, etc. ]e fais [sa fe]. nous faisons [nu fazo]. tu fais [ty fe]. vous faites [vu fetj. il fait [il fe]. iig font [il fo]. VOCABULARV. d'abord [d abo:r], first (of all). apporter [aporte], to bring. assiette (as jet], f., plate, bientot [l)jeto], soon, biblioth^que [bibliotck], f., li- biary. bonne [bon], f., maid, servant, cafe [kafej, m., coflee. chapeau [Jf.po], ni., hat. couteau [luUo], ni., knife, cuiller [kyjeir], f., spoon. dessert [deseir], ni., dessert. ensuite [usqit], then, next, escalier [eskalje], m., stairs. fourchette [furjetj, f., fork, fruit [frqi], m., fruit, journal [,'^urnal], m., newspaper, legume [Icgym], ni,, vegetable. lire [li : r], to read, manger [nia^e], to eat. en haut (u oj, up stairs. moment [moma], m., moment. monter [mote], to go up. nappe [nap], f., table-cloth. oter [ote], to take off. place [plas], £., place. potage [pota:3], m., soup. prend [pro], 3 sg. pres. ind. pren- dre, to take. puis [pi{i], tlien, afterwards. remporter [raporte], to take away. repas [ropd], m., meal, repast. retourner [rgturnej, to return, go back ; do ratour, back. saile a manger [sal a maje], f., diniiigioom. sonne'r [sone], to ring. vestibule [vestibyl], m., hall, en- trance. viande [vja:d], f., meat. en bas ['"i ba], down stairs. EXERCISE XI. A. Nous voici d3 retour de I'ecole. Nous entrons dans la maison Dans le vestibule /lous otuiis nos chapeaux. Ensuite nous montons I'escalier. Nous sommes en haut maintenant et nous entrons dans la bibliotheque un moment pour lire les journaux. BientOt on sonne, ot nous allons en bas. Nous voici dans la salle a manger. La nappe est sur la table. Les assiettes, les cuillers, les couteaux et les iburcb.ettes sont'a leur place. On commence le repas. La bonne apporte le nnt.n^- Pu., elle apporte la viande et ,e. l.g„.e. On .ange. Vn ! 1 1 34 LESSON XI. t§50 !!IJ! raconte des histoires. La bonne remporte les assiettes. dessert on mange du fruit et on prend du cafe. Au B. Continue the following 1. J'ote mon chapeau, tu 6tes ton chapeau, etc. 2. Je ne suis pas en haut, etc. 3. Qu'est-ce que je fais?, etc. 4. Est-ce que je ne sonne jkis?, etc. 5. Je ne monte pas I'escalier, etc. 6. On apporte mon repas, ton repas, etc. 7. Est-ce qu'on n'apporte pas mon repas?, ton repas?, etc. 8. II n'j a pas de viande sur mon assiette, ton assiette, etc. C. (Oral.) 1. Oil est-ce que nous allons maintenant ? 2. Que faisons-nous dans le vestibule? 3. Qu'est-ce que vous faites dans le vestibule? 4. Ensuite que faites- vous? 5. Pourquoi est-ce que j'entre dans la bibliotheque ? 6. La bibliotheque est-elle en haut ou en bas* 7. Ou est la palle a manger? 3. Qui Sonne ? 9. Est-ce que la bonne sonne pour le repas ? 10. Qu'est-ce qu'il y a sur la table cians la salle k manger? 11. Oil sont les couteaux et les fourchettes? 13. Les cuiilers sont-elles sur la table? 13. Qu'est-ce qu'on apporte d'abord ? 14. Ensuite, qu'est-ce qu'on apporte ? 15. Qu'est-ce qu'on fait au repas? 16. Raconte-t-on des histoires aussi ? 17. Qui apporte le dessert? 18. Qu'est-ce qu'on mange au dessert? Etc., etc. D. \. 1 am returning home now. 2. I enter the house. 3. First, I take off my hat in the hall. 4. You take off your hat. 5. I meet my brother in the hall. G. We go into the library for a moment to read the newspapers. 7. Somebody rings. 8. We listen. 9. We are up stairs. 10. The dining- room is down stairs. 11. There is a cloth on the tabic in the dining-room. 12. There are plates, spoons, knives and forks on the table also. 13. First, the soup is brought. 14. The soup is eaten, and the maid brings the meat. 15. There is no fruit on the table now. 16. The maid brings it at (the) dossert. 17. People take coffee at dessert. 18. Then they ^o up stairs. 19. Then they go into the library. 20. What am I doing now? 21. What aro you doing? 22. We are going into the library. §§51-53] LESSON XII. 85 LESSON XII. 51. Feminine of Adjectives. It is regularly formed by adding -e to the masculine singular, but adjectives ending in -e remain unchanged. Grand, m., grande, f., tall ; facile, m, or f., easy. 52. Irregularities. Change of stem takes place in cer- tain adjectives on adding -e. The following list shows the commoner types : M. actif, heureux, flatteur. Wane, long, faux. F. active, active, heureuse, happy. flatteuse, flatter- ing, blanche, white, longue, long, fausse, false. M. F. cruel, cnielle, cruel, gentil, • gentille, nice, ancien, ancienne, ancient, gros, grosse, big. muet, muette, dumb, cher, chhre, dear. sec, shche, dry. Observe also: m. beau or bel, f. belle, fine; m. nouveau or nouvel, f. nouvelle, new; m. vieux or vieil, f. vieille, old, with cwo forms for the masculine, one of which gives the feminine. The masculine forms m -1 are used before a vowel or h mute : Le bel arbre, le bel homme. The fine tree, the handsome man. But: L'arbre est beau; le beau livre; les beaux arbres; les arbres sent beaux. 53' Position. 1. An attributive adjective more usually follows its noun : Un homme riche, une pomme mfire. A rich man, a ripe apple. 2. Adjectives from proper nouns, adjectives of physical quality, participles as adjectives, almost always follow : La langue anglaise. The English language. Du caf^ chaud, une lampe cass6e. Hot coffee, a broken lamp. 3. The following of very common occurrence nearly always precede : Bon, good, mauvais, bad ; beau, fine, handsome, joli, cretty, vHain ugly ; jeune, young, vieux, old ; grand, tall, great, gris, big, petit' smaU ; long, long, court, short * 86 LESSON XII. [§§54-55 ?l 54. Interrogative Adjective. •Which?', 'what?', 'what (a)!'=m. quel?, f. quelle?, m. pi. quels?, f. pi. quelles? Quel [kel] livre ? Which (what) book ? Quelle [kcl] plume ? Which (what) pen ? Quelle belle vue 1 Quels h^ros ! What a fine view 1 What heroes I 55. 'There,' 'in that place ' = y. It stands for a place already referred to, is put before the verb like a pronoun object, and is less emphatic than la = * there ' : Est-il k r^cole ? II 7 [i] est. Is he at school ? He in (there). ag^neau [apo], m., Iamb. animal [animal], m., animal, beast. arbre [arbrj, m., tree. beau, belle [bo, bel], fine, 'hand- some. blanc, blanche [bla, blci: f], white. bois [bwa], m., ■wood(s). campagne [kSpaji], f., country. champ [Ja], m., field. chemin de fer [jeml da feir]. m., railway. comme [kom], how ! comment [koma], how? cousin(e) [kuzl, kuzin], cousin. fer [feir], m., iron. fleur [floe if], f., flower. gare [gair], f., station. heureux -se [cer0, cer0:z], happy (to, de). h la campagne, in the country-. VOCAEHLARY. joli [soli], pretty. oncle [i)!kl], m., uncle. par [par], by. parents [para J, m. pi., relatives. passer [pase], to pass. petit [psti], small. regarder [ragarde], to look at. semaine [samem], f., week. tante [ta:t], f., aunt. tout [tu], all, everything. travailler [travaje], to work. trouver [truvej, to find. vache [vaj], f., cow. visiter [vizite], to visit. vite [vit], quickly. voir [vwair], to see. voiture [vwatyir], f., carriage. y [i], there, in that place. de nous voir, to see us. aller visiter, to go to visit, go and visit, en fleurs, in flower, blooming. EXERCISE XII. A. Nous allons visiter nos parents k la campagne. Nous y allons par le chemin de fer. Nous arrivons k la petite gare. Nous y trouvons ma tante et une de mes cousines avec leur voiture. v>omme nous sonjrnes neursux oe Jgs voir ! iriOn oncle et mes cousins n'y sont pas, parce qu'ils travaillent dans §§54-55] LESSON XII. 87 oute Corame la campagne est belle! Tout est en fleurs, les arbres et les champs. Nous passons devant les beaux champs et les johes maisons blanches. Les chevaux marchent vite, et nous arrivons bientot chez nos parents. Nous v passons deux ou trois semaines. Nous allons dans les boil et les champs. Nous y trouvons des fleurs et des fruits Nous allons regarder les animaux, les belles vaches et les jolis agneaux. B. Continue the following: 1. Quelle plume est-ce que ie etc. 3. Mes fleurs sunt belles et blanches, tes fleurs, etc 4 Jenesuis pas heureuse, etc. 5. Je suis k la campagne: iV suis, etc. 6. J'ai un bel arbre devant ma maison,^u as in bel arbre devant ta maison, etc. ■ , ^ a^ un C (Oral.) 1 Ousontvos parents? 2. Comment allons-nous a la campagne? 3. Comment y allons-nous ? 4. La ^are est! ellegrandeou petite? 5. Qui trouve-t-on d la gare ? 6. Notre tanto est-elle heureuse de nous voir ? 7. Que fait votre oncle^ b. rourquoi vos cousins ne sont-ils pas k la gare ? 9 Aimez" vous la campagne? 10. Pourquoi? 11. Les chevaux de yotre oncle sont-ils beaux? 12. Et sa maison est-elle bellel 16. Oombien de aemaines passez-vous chez vos parents? 14. Aimez-vous les fleurs blanches? 15. Quelles fleurs aimez-vous? 16. Etes-vous heureuse de visiter votre tante mademo sella? 17. Ou trouve-t-on ces belles fleu^? 18 oil sont les belles vaches et les jolis agneaux ? 1 i). Quels animaux y a-t-il clans les champs? Etc., etc. />. L I have an uncle and aunt in the country. 2 The-' have a fine house an 9. ihe flowers in frle) the fields are so pretty! 10. We go to see the animals in the fields. 11. There are some cows and some vl ate lau>bs in the fields. 12. We are going to pass two or strlr t!: :X^ ^tttJ'^ TheyL happy to aunt and iincle. ^10.¥/.eh IiL^are Tou golg t^ pow ? .1 , . What are you going to do in the countT/? * m i ;flf:: 38 LESSON XIII. [§§50-58 LESSON XIII. 56. Present Indicative of donner, finir, uendre. I give, am giving, etc. (lonn e [donj. donn es [don], donn e [don], donn ons [dono]. donn ez [done]. donn ent [don]. I finish, am finishing, I sell, am selling, etc. fini s [fini]. lini "^iini]. firii t ^iini]. finiss uiis [tiniso]. finiss ez [finiae]. etc. von;! 3 [va]. vend s [vu]. vend* [vu]. vend ons [vado]. vend ez [vdde]. vend ent [vu:d]. finiss ent [finis]. *Vendre is irregrulur in this one form. The regular verb rompre has rompt, but vendre is here given as beinjf more useful for practice. NoTB.— The pronounHJe.tU.il, etc., have been omitted ii this paradigm and in some others to econondze spactj in printing. They should be sup[)lied in learning or reciting the paradigms. 57" The General Noun. A noun used in a general sense takes the definite article in French, though not commonly in Engli ., . Man is mortal. Men are mortal. Honey ' i very sweet. The horse is a useful animal. 58. Tout. *A11/ 'the whole,' * every,' = tOUt, with the following forms, which precede the article, when it is present : m. s., tout[tu]. f. s., toute [tut], m. pi., tous [tu]. f. pi., toutes [tut]. L'honmie est mortel. Les honimes sont niortels. Le niiel est trfes doux. Le oheval est un aniniai util IrA Tout hommo, toute femme. Tous les honmies. Toute la journee. aoiit [u], m. , August. bsttir [bati:r], to build. bon, bonne [bo, bon], good. Cerise [sariiz], f., cherry. cerisier [sorizje], m., cherry-tree Every man, every woman. All the men. The whole day. Vocabulary. espfece [espes], f . , species, kind, fruitier [frqitje], fruit (adj.). gout [gu], m. , taste. g'rimper [grtpe], to climb. majorite [majorite], f., majority. §58] LESSON XIII. 39 marchand [niarja], m., merchant mois [mwu], m., month. mur[my:r], ripe, murir [my ri : r], to ripen, poire [pwa:r], f., pear, poirier [pwarjo], m., pear-tree, pomme [pom], f., apple, pommier [pomje], m., apple-tree, prune [pryn], f., plum, prunier [prynje], m., plum-tree. k la maison, at home, pour en in what month ? au mois d'aout, quand [ka], when. rouge [ru 13], red. septembre[septu:br], m., Septem- ber. souvent [suvu], often. vendre[vu:flr], to sell. verger [verse], m., orchard. vert[veir], green. ville[vil], f., town, city. avoir, to get some, en quel mois ?, in the month of August. EXERCISE XIII. A. Chez nofcre oncle a ]a campagne il y a xm vemer. Dans ce verger il y a des arbr^es tVuitiers. La niajorit/des arbt"s sunt des pommiers, et ils doionent des pommes de toute esp'ce il y en a qui munssent au mois -d'aout, et il y en a „ui pumiers efc des poiriers. Les cerises sont rouges et ont un bon gout quand elles sont mures. Les prunes et les poires oont bonnes aussi. Nous les aimons beaucoup. et souvent nous gnmpons dans les arbres pour en avoir. //.Continue the following: 1. Je vends des pommes aux marchands?, etc. 3. Je ne vends pas de pommes%tc. 4 Je firns mes lemons, tu finis tes le9ons, etc. 5^^ Est-ce que je batis une maison?, etc. 6. Je ne batis pas une maison, etc 7 J anne les pommes, etc. . v- < . arbi-ei v'n';\^'^ ^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^'^o'' ^^ "^^^"^ ^^^^^^ 2. Quels donkent^-k^^^^ son verger? 3. Quel fruit les pomnners aoiment-ils? 4. Quel frmt est-ce que la prunier donne? ont^lr'^f^ «ont-elles mures ou vertes? 6. Les pommes ont-eles un })on gout quand elles sont vertes? 7 En auel mois les prunes murissent-elles ? 8. A qui p«t.-oe -u'or - -nd SnmesT^0^' 1^" "^"'l "^^'^ "'*"'" 'i"' ^°*'" «"^^'^ ^^"^'ses pommes^ 10. I^^ vender vous pas toutes vos poires? U. 40 LESSON XIV. [§59 Aimez-vous les poires? 12. Man^e-t-on les poires quand ellea sont vertesi 13. Mange-t-on toutcs les poires h la maisoul 14. En quel mois la poraine murit-elle? 15. Pourquoi griinpez- vous dans le pommier de votre oncle? 10. Allons-nous visiter le verger de votre oncle aujourd'hui ? 17. Est-ce que vous tinissez vos lemons maintenant? 18. Qui ba,tit cette maison derriere le verger? Etc., etc. D. 1. There is a pear-tree in our orchard. 2. There are also apple-trees, pluni-trees and cherry-trees. 3. What fruit does the apple-treo bear {dormer) t 4. What fruit do pluin- trecs bear? 5. The clierry-tree bears -cherries. 6. Are the •plums ripe now? 7. In what month do plums ripen? 8. They ripen in the month of September. 9. The apple also ripens in the month of Septembei-. 10. The pears on {de) these trees are green. 11. There are ripe cherries on that tree.. 12. When the apples ripen they are sold. 13. We sell them to the merchants. 14. We do not eat apples when they are green. If). They have not a good taste. 16. When we finish our lessons we go into the orchard. 17. All the apples are ripening now. 18. I climb into the pear-tree to get pears. 19. We sell the gocJ pears. 20. We give the others to the animals. LESSON XIV. ^ 59. Partitives. In partitive constructions (§ 36), de alone is used: — 1. In a general negation (§ 36, 2) : II n'a pas de plumes. He has no pens, 2. When an adjective precedes the noun : Marie a de jolies fleurs. Mary has (some) pretty flowers. J'ai de votre argent. I have some of your money. But : J'ai des pommes mures. i have (some) ripe apples. 3. Similarly when a noun after an adjective is understood :. De bona rois et de mauvais. Good kings and bad (kings). 4. As in English, in such constructions as the following: Beaucoup de th^. Une livru de viand©. Assez de viande. Trop de paiu. A great deal of tea (much tep ). A pound of meat. Enough (of) meat. Too much bi-eadt §§60-61] LESSON XIV. 41 60. The preposition de + a noun forms adjectival phrases: Une robe de sole. A silk dress. LafeuiUed'^rable. The maple leaf. fol';/f^'''' *^' ^'"""^"^ expressions of frequent use, formed from avoir + an undetermined noun : avoir besoin [bazwrj de, be in need of, need, avoir chaud (Jo], be warm, avoir froid [frwa], be cold, avoir faim [f 2], be hungry. avoir soif [swaf], be thirsty, avoir sommeil [someij], be sleepy, avoir raison [rezo], be (in the) right, avoir tort [to:r], be (in the) wrong. abrlter [abrite], to shelter, alors [aloir], then. brise [briiz], f., breeze, canadien [kanadjg], Canadian, chaud [Jo], m., heat. chose [Joiz], f., thing. 6cureuil [ekyrceij], m., squirrel, emblfeme [ablejra], m., emblem. Arable [erabl], m., maple, leuille [foBij], f., leaf. fenillage [foejajs], m., foliage. foumir [fumiir], to furnish. h6tre[eitr], m., beech. VOOABULAR*. I insecte [fsekt], m., insect. I int6ressant [fteresa], interesting. mauvais [move], bad. moins [mwg], less. national [nasjonal], national nombreux rn5br0], numerous. nourriture [nurityir], f., food. oiseau [wazo], m., bird. ombre [oibr], f., shade. orme [orm], m., elm. parmi [parmi], among. tr^s [tre], very. utile [ytil], useful. a fait chaud, it is warm, hot (of weather or temperature). EXERCISE XIV. aux bdr^'^On ?! '""""T ^ ^^ ^a^Pagne nous allons souvent aux bois. On y trouve beaucoup de choses int^ressanter Tl tent beaucoup de petits animaux. Les ^cureuils et les netits oiseaux trouvent leur nourriture dans les arbres lis fleurs fournissent de la nourriture aux insectes noSeux Parmi 'il'lvT' "if^- ^ .^^^'\ d'^rable est I'embl^me national sonrr"' ""l ^ f.,^'^"t^-«« arbres, comme le h^tre et I'orme "qu 8ont beaux et utiles aussi. Leur feuillage est vert eTdZe 42 LESSON XIV. [§61 de rombre. Quand il fait cliaud nous trouvons souvent k I'ombre une Ijonne brise, et alors nous avons moins cbaud. B. Continue the following : 1. J'ai de jolies fleurs, etc. 2. Est-ce que j'ui des poinines mures?, etc. 3. J'ai de bonnes pomnies et de m.-iuvaises, etc. 4. Jaime la feuillo d '(Arable, etc. 5. Est-ce que je vends beaucoup de ponnnes?, etc. 6. J'ai raison, etc. 7. Je n'ai pas tort, etc. 8. Est-ce que j'ai chaud?, etc. C. (Oral.) 1. Qu'est-ce qu'on trouve dans les bois? 2. Ou trouve-t-on de grands arbies 1 3. Y a-t-il de petites fleurs dans les bois aussi? 4. Quels animaux les arbres abritent-ils ] 6. Les oiseaux ont-ils besoin de nourriture 1 6. Ou est-ce que les oiseaux trouvent leur nourriture ? 7. Ou trouvons-nous notre nourriture 1 8. A quels petits animaux les fleurs fournis- sent-elles de la nourriture? 9. Quels arbres trouve-c-on dans les bois? 10. Quels arbres aimez-vous? 11. L'erable ost-il un bel arbre ? 12. Aimez-vous la feuille d'erable ? 13. Trouve t-on des arbres fruitiers dans les bois? 14. Ou est-ce qu'on les trouve? 15. Les arbres des bois son t-ils beaux ? 16. Y a-t-il de beaux arbres chez votre onJ.s? 17. Qu'est-ce que le feuil- lage des arbres donne ? 18. Est-ce qu'il fait cbaud aujourd'hui? 1 9. Avez-vous chaud ? 20. Ou allons nous quand ii fait chaud? 21. Est-ce qu'on a soif quand il fait chaud? 22. Avez-vous soif ? Etc., etc. D. 1. To-day it is hot, and we are going to the woods. 2. There are many interesting things in the woods. 3. One finds there great trees and beautiful flowers. 4. Among the trees there are pretty little animals. 5. The leaves of the trees and the flowers shelter many little insects. 6. These trees are very beautiful and very useful also. 7. The maple is a vary fine tree. 8. We love the maple leaf because it is our national emblem. 9. The beech and the elm are useful trees. 10. The foliage of trees gives shade., 11. In the woods behind our house there are large trees j-nd small ones. 12. People like the shade of trees when it is hot. 13. We go into the woods to find shade. 14. The animals in the woods have need of food. 15. The fruits of the trees furnish food to the animals. 16. Many little insects find food in the flowers. 17. When it is hot the animals are thirsty. 18. Then they need water. 19. They find it in the woods. 20. W^e need water when we are thirsty. 21. People need food when they are hungry. 1 §62-66] LESSOxN XV 48 LESSON XV. 62» Past Participles. Oiven Fi„i3he.l. Sold. Had. Been. ' clonn6[do„o]. fini [fini]. vendu [vady]. eu [y]. ,t6 fetej. 63. Compound Tenses. They are formevving section. 64. The Past Indefinite. ' iTvfT' '' ^ ^""^ ^"'«^^^' '^ I h-e sold, or I gave. etc. i finished, etc. I sold, etc j'ai donud [3 e done] i'ai fini r^ n fi..n •» • j , etc. «<^°- etc. I have had. or I had, etc. j'ai eu [3 e y]. tu as eu [ty az y], il a eu [il a y]. etc. I have been, or I was, etc. j'ai iU [3 e ete]. tu as et6 [ty az ete], il a dte [il a ete]. etc. 65. Word Order. The auxiliary is the verb in a com- pound tense, and all rules of word order apply to it : Nous ne I'avons pas fini 1x7^ u ^ z? . , , vr, . „ ,, " . ^e have not finished it. Na-t-ellepas^teici? Has she not been here ? hafh "'^ f ^f ^' Indefinite. It denotes not only what has happened or has been happening, as in English, but also what happened ( = English past tense): Fill ^""'^ZT'^^"- ^ ^^^« fi"i«hed my work. J'ai ,uitt/paris^rhi^er pass. ?irk'riSrw!nr^"^^- thf m.rf'^^' ^'f ■ "''^''^'"'^" ^' '^^" "''^"''''y P^'^ *«"«« of French. For the past tense of narrative in tlie literary style, see § 148. •f '■ \ 44 LESSON XV. [§67 ^1' 1' ii H 67. Idiomatic Present Indicative. Besides its use in general, as in English, the present indicative is used idioma- tically, in certain phrases, to denote what has been and still continues to bo : Dopuis quand ott's-vous ici ? How long have you boon horo ? Jo suis ici dopuis trois jours. I havo been here for tluco days {or for tliroo days past, or for thu last throo days). VOCABULAUY. acheter [ajte], to buy. battre [batr], to beat, thresh. h\6 [ble], ni., wh^at. centre [kotr], against, from, couper [kupe], tu out. depuis [dopHi], since. fait [fe], p.p. /aire, to do. farine [farin], f., flour. froid [frwa], ra. , cold, g^ermer [serme], to sprout. grandir [yradisr], to grow largo. grange [graij], f., barn. hier [jeir], yostorday. meunier [in0nje], ni. , millor. morceau [morso], ni., piece, neige [he: 3], f., buow. paysan [pcizu], ni. .poasantjfarmei. plante [plfut], f., plant. prot^ger [protesc], to protect, saison [scz5], f., season. sec [sek], dry. semer [some], to sow. transporter [trusporto], to carry, bring. . en quelle saison?, in what season?, when?; au printemps [o pr?tci], in spring ; en 6t6 [an etc], in summer ; en automne [an oton], in autumn; en hiver [an ive:r], in winter. EXERCISE XV. A. Voici I'histoire d'un morceau de pt. En automne le paysan a sem^ le bl^, et puis le bl<^ a gerra^. En hiver la neige a prote^g^ les jeunes plantes contre le froid. Au prin- temps elles ont grandi. En 4t4 le bl^ a muri. Les pay sans I'ont coup^. lis I'ont transport^ dans la grange, et ils I'ont battu. Le meunier a achate le h\4 pour faire de la farine. II a fourni la farine au boulanger. Le boulanger a fait le pain, et ensuite il I'a vendu. Voila un morceau de pain sur la table. II est la depuis hier, et il est tr^s sec. B. (Ora\.) L Quelle histoire est-ce que vous racontez? 2. Qui a travaill^ nour faire le t>ain1 .3. Qui a seme le bl^? 4. En ouelle saison IVt-il sem^ ) 5. Quand le bl^ a-t-il germ^ 1 6. Qu'est-ce ! ^ ■ I ill .ill vr §§68-69] LESSON XVI. 45 quo la nei^e a fait en Iiiver? 7. En quelle saison esice que les plantea ont grandi ? 8. Quaml lo \)U a-t-il raflri 1 9. Avez-vous coup.< le bid? 10. Est-ce que j'ai couptJ le bid 1 11. Qui a coupd le bid? 12. Ou I'ont-il.s transportd ? 13. Et ensuite qu'est-ce qu'ils ont fait? 14. A qui I'ont-ils vendu? 15. Qu'est-ce (jue le meunier a fait? 16. Le boulanger qu'a-t-il achetd pour faire le pain t 17. Qui a fourni la farine au bou- langer? 18. Avons-noua vondu le pain ? 19. Qui I'a vendu? 20. Depuis quand ce morceau de pain est-il sur la table? 21. Pourquoi est-il sec? 22. Depuis quand 6tes-vous ici? Etc., etc.* C. 1. This Ijread is dry. 2. It has been on the table since yesterday. 3. Here is the story of a piece of bread. 4. The farmer sowed the wheat. 5. He sowed it in the autumn. 6. The wheat sprouted. 7. In the winter the snow protected the young plants Tom the cold. 8. When did they grow large? 9. In spring. 10. When did the wheat ripen? 11. It ripened in summer. 12. Who cut the wheat? 13. Did we bring it into the barn? 14. Did you thresh it? 15. Who bought the wheat? 16, The miller bought it, and made the flour. 17. We are the bakers ; we made the bread. 18. Then we sold it to the farmers. 19. Here are two pieces of dry bread. 20. Did you make this bread? 21. Who made it? 22. Our baker made it. LESSON XVT. 68. Comparatives. Place plus =' more,' moins = *less,' or aussi = ' as,' before the adjective, and que = * than ' or • as ' after it, to form comparatives : II est plus grand que Jean. Ho is taller than .fohn. II est moins grand que Jean. Ho is less tall than (not so t. as) John. II est aussi grand que Jean. He is as tall as John. 69. Superlatives. 1. Place the definite articlp or a pos- sessive adjective before plus or moins to form superlatives : Marie est la plus jeune de toutes. Mary ^'3 the youngest of all. Obs.: La plus jeune des deux. The younger of the two. 2. Do not Omit the definite article when the superlative follows the noun : La Ie5on la plus difficile. The most difficult lesson. Mes livres les plus utiles. My most useful books. ■( ■ 1 !' :, ] 1 ■•; 1 if ;;';:: i .1 S • In! 1 1' 1 ' LESSON XVI, [§§70-78 70. Irregular Comparison. Observe the irregular forms : bon [bo], good. meilleur [mejcpir], better. le meilleur [la mejoeir], the best. 71. Comparison of Adverbs. 1. They are compared bv plus and moins like adjectives, but le in the superlative is invariable. 2. Observe the irregular forms : bien [bj?], well, mieux [mj0], better, le mieux [la nij0], (the) best. peu [p0], little. moins [mwe], less. le moins [la mwe], (the) least. 72. Present Indicative of a//e/; 'to go' (irreg.). I go, am going, etc. We go, are going, etc. je vais [?o ve]. nous allons [niiz alo]. tuvas [tyva]. vous allez [vuzale]. il va [il vaj. ils vont [il vo]. 73. Imperative of a//e/; 'to go.' va [va], go. allons [al3], let us go. allez [ale], go. ^ Vocabulary. ann6e [ane], f., year. avril [avril], m., April, carotte [karot], f., carrot. charmant [Jarma], charming. chou [Ju], m., cabbage. chenille [Janiij], f., caterpillar. c6t6 [kotc], m., side. couleur [kuloeir], f., colour. d6jk [desa], already. dernier, -i^re [dcrnje, -jeir], last. encore [akoir], yet. entre [ciitr], among. graine [grein], f., seed. gros, -se [gro, grojs], big. jardin [sard?], m. , garden. modeste [modest], modest. muguet [mygs], m., lily of the valley. ilttipr mieux» to liks better ■•irftfnr oignon [op3], m. , onion. partie [parti], f., part. peu [p0], m., little. peut-etre [p0t eitr], perhaps. planter [plate], to plant. pomnie de terre [pom da teir], f., potato. pousser [pnse], to grow. probablement [probablama], prob' ably. reine [rem], f., queen. r6serv6 [rezerve], reserved. rose [ro:z], f., rose. semaine [samem], £., week. terre [teir], f., earth. toujours [tujujr], stilL tout k fait [tut a fe], quite. tulipe [tylip], f., tulip. •>. !..j ^v.-., v.c J auiic I.UCC, on en© oiiie side, on the other side ; I'ann^e ' ■ rni^re, last year. §73] LESSON XVI. 47 EXERCISE XVI. A. Nous sommes toujours k la carapagne. Allons voir main- tenant le jardin. D'un cote il y a des legumes, de I'autre cote il yades fleurs. II y a des porames de terre, des choux, des oignons et des carottes. On a plants les pommes de terre au mois d'avril, et elles sont raaiiitenant en fleurs. On a plants les choux la semaine derniere. lis ont ddja poussd un peu. lis voht etre probableinent raeilleurs cette arinee que I'ana^e derniere. L'ann^e derniere les chenilles en ont mange beau- coup. On a sern^ la graine de deux especes de carottes : des carottes rouges et des carottes blanches. Nous aimons mieux les rouges pour le potage que les blanches. Les oignons sont d une esp^ce plus grosse que les oignons de I'anne'e derniere. Dans la partie du jardin rdserve'e aux fleurs nous trouvons entre autres, des roses, des tulipes et des muguets. La rose esc la reine des fleurs. Elle est peut-etre la plus belle de toutes les fleurs. Les tulipes sont tres jolies. Elles sont de toutes les couleurs. Le muguet est une petite fleur blanche, tr6s modeste mais tout k fait charmante. R Continue the following: 1. Je suis plus grand que Robert, etc. 2. Est ce que je suis aussi grande que Marie ?, etc. 3. Je suis le meilleur ^leve de la classe, etc. 4. N'ai-ie pas la legon la plus difficile?, etc. 6. J'ai vendu mes nieilleurs hvres, tu as vendu tes, etc. 6. Est-ce que j'aime mieux les fleurs rouges ?, etc. 7. Est-ce que je vais visiter mes parents ?, est-ce que tu vas visiter tes parents?, etc. 8. Je n'ai pas encore visits mes parents, etc. C. (Oral.) 1. Qu'est-ce que vous allez voir auiourd'hui? a.?J''L*'^'^ "^^ ""^ ''^^^'^ ^' Q"'est-ce qu'il y a de I'autre c0t6? *4. Dans quel mois plantez-vous vos clioux? 5. Les choux poussent-ils aussi vite que les pommes de terre? 6. Vos porames de terre sont-elles bonnes cette annde ? 7. Sont-elles raeilleures que Tannic derniere? 8. Sont-elles plus grosses? 9. Est-ce qu'elles ont un meilleur goiit ? 10. Combien d'espfeces de carottes y a-t-il dans ce jardin? 11. Aimez-vous mieux les carottes blanches que les carottes rouges? 12. Pourquol? 13. Quelle est la reine des fleurs? -. — „„ ...,^„^^^£- j,^,-, uuiipca suiiu-uiius » io. De quelle couleur le muguet estil? 16. Est-il aussi blanc que la neige? Si 1 1 ": 1 I : ( ' i 1 43 L2SS0N XVIL [§§74-75 17. Quelle est la fleur la plus charmante de votre jardint lo. Quels sont vos meilleurs legumes? Etc., etc. A 1. I am going to see your garden. 2. Your garden is . f?ru ^''®- ^' ^^^* ^^^® y«« planted on this side? 4. Where are the flowers? 6. I planted my potatoes in the month of April. 6. I am going to plant my cabbage this week. 7. The potato is a very useful plant. 8. It is perhaps the most useful of all the vegetables. 9. It is good for men and for animals. 10. Carrots are not so useful. 11 I like the red carrots better than the white. 12. They are better tor soup. 13. The white ones are larger, but they are not so good. 14. Now let us go and see the flowers. 15. How beautiful those tulips are ! 16. They are finer this year than last year. 17. The lily of the valley and the rose are not yet in flower. 1 8. Do you like roses better than tulips ? 1 9. Yes but I like the lily of the valley better than all the other flowers 20. It is smaller than the others, but more charming. 21. I like your garden very much. 22. I am going to visit ft often this summer. LESSON XVII. 74. Agreement of Past Participle. 1. In a compound tense with avoir the past participle agrees 'in gender and number with a direct object which precedes it : J'ai fini mes le9on8. I have finished my lessons. Je les al finies. I have finished them. Quels livres a-t-il achetis ? What books has he bought ! N.B.-Remember that the participle does not agree with en, e.g., ♦Avez-vous des plumea? Oui, j'en ai achet6 hier.' 'Have you any pens? Yes, I bought some yesterday.* i b « 2. When used as an adjective, the past participle agrees like an adjective : La plume achet^e hier. The pen bought yesterday. 75. Some Relative'-. 1. The relative pronouns of most common use are qui as subject, and que as direct object of a verb : The lady who sings. ^' The books which are here, pommes que j'ai achet^s. The apples that I have bought. La dame qui chante. T — li : -- . . JJK.-> XI Vies UUI oUUb I( m LESSON XVII. 49 Le pain que j'ai achet^ hier. The bread I bought yesterday. banane [banan], f., banana. car [kar], for. Cher, -fere [Je.-r, Je:r], dear. cuisinifere[kqizinje:r], f., cook. dfner[dinej, m., dinner. douzaine [duzen], f., dozen, franc [fra], m., franc. laitue [kty], f., lettuce. march^ [mar/e], m., market. matin [matf], m., morning, oeillet [oeje], m., pink. oie [wa], f., goose. Vocabulary. omer [ome], to decorate, adorn payer [peje], to pay, pay for. Plusieurs [plyzjoeirj, several. * poulet [pule], m., chicken, fowl, preparer [prepare], to prepare, quant k [kat a], as for, as to. salade [salad], f., salad. soir [swair], m., evening. sou[su], m., sou, cent, train [tre], m., train, act of, efco. vingt [ve], twenty. volaille[vola:j],f., poultry. ^^tre en train de, to be in the aet of, be busy (doing a thing) a doLt^^r ^ ^^"^ '-'' ^^"^ '^ ^°"^-^' ' ^^^ *-nty cents EXERCISE XVII. loc 1 ' ^"''*"Ae- ^^ous aliens avoir des amis a diner Vnin» les legumes que nous avons achet^s. II y a des DommeTd« i. et la laitue est pour la salade. Voila, sur la table ll fl^^ ' ta cuisiniire est en train de lei nXarp! P T /"'"''■ nous avons achet,5 des pommes et des bZn J T V'""' sont oh.res. Nons ,es ilons ..^JT^.^ZZ. ^J^!"- B. Continue the following -_ ^ v^,ii k„ ^^ aohet.es. etc. 2. Quellea fleurs ai-je ache^^ar^^hT?: j^' i it < m 1 j ■ ll 50 LESSON XVII. t|75 3. J'ai vendu les pommes qu'on a achetdes hier, etc. 4. Est-ce que j'ai ^te au marche ce matin t, etc. 5. J'ai achet^ les livres qui sont sur la table, etc. Relate the story of Part A^ using the first singular instead of the first plural. C. (Oral.) 1. Avez-vous ^te au marehd ce matin? 2. Qu'avez-vous achet^? 3. Pourquoi avez-vous achet^ toutes 4. Combien d'amis allez-vous avoir k diner ? 5. les legumes que vous avez achet^s. 6. Sont-ils 7. Combien avez-vous pay^ les achet^es? 8. Quels autres legumes avez-vous achet^s ? 9. Ou sont-ils? 10. Quelle belle oie! combien Tavez-vous payee? 11. Qu'est-ce que la cui- siniere fait maintenant? 12. Ou sont les fleurs que voup avez achet^es? 13. Quelles espeees de fleurs y a-t-il 1^? 14. Qu'allons-nous faire de ces fleurs? 15. Les fleurs qu'on a achetdes hier les avez-vous encore ? 16. Quels fruits allez-vous avoir pour le dessert? 17. Les bananes sont-elles plus chores que les pommes cette atm^e? 18. Combien avez-vous pay6 ces pommes? Etc., etc. D. 1. We are going to have some friends to dinner this ces choses? Montrez-moi les legumes tres chers en cette saison? pommes de terre que vous avez evening. 2. I have bought some flowers to decorate the table. 3. The cook has been at the market to buy meat and vege- tables. 4. Ixere are the things she brought. 5. What poultry did she buy? 6. Is poultry dear at this season? 7. Here is a goose which she paid three francs for. 8. There are two chickens which she bought. 9. Chickens are not so dear as geese; they are not so large. 10. What pretty flowers ! 11. Where did you buy them ? 1 2. I bought them at the market this morning. 13. I bought some yesterday, but they are not so prstty. 14. My flowers are dearer. 15. I paid three francs a dozen for the roses. 16. Last year I bought roses for twenty cents a dozen. 17. Fruit is dear this year. 18. How much did you pay 19. I paid twenty cents a dozen for them, to have a good dinner. 21. The cook is now. for the bananas ? 20. We are going busy preparing it' §76] LESSON XVIll. 61 LESSON XVIII. 76. Tenses with ^tre. 1. The verb 6tre + the past parti- ciple forms the compound tenses of all reflexive verbs (§ 82) and of a few intransitive verbs, of which aller, ♦ to go/ arriver, ' to arrive/ and venir, ' to come/ are of very frequent use. 2. The past participle of a verb (not reflexive) conjugated with ^tre agrees with the subject, thus : I have arrived, etc. je suis arriv6(e) [arive], nous sommes arriv6(e)s [arive]. tu es arrive(e) [arive]. vous 6tes arriv^(e)s [arive]. il (elle) est arriv6(e) [arive]. ils (elles) sont arriv6(e)s [arive]. Vocabulary. admirablement [admirablarad], admirably. admirer [admire], to admire, amuser [amyze], to amuse, celfebre [seleibr], celebrated. chanter [Jute], to sing, concert [koseir], ra., concert. depuis que [dapqi ka], conj., since dimanche [dimaij], m., Sunday. Edifice [edifis], m. , edifice, building. emplette [aplet], f., purchase. entendre [ataidr], to hear. hotel de ville [otel da vil], m., town-hall. hier soir [jeir swa.-r], yesterday evening. intention [etasjo], f., intention. jour[3Uir], m., day. lundi [l&di], m., Monday, magasin [raagazs], m., shop, mener [mane], to lead, take. nuit[ni{i], f., night. partout [partu], everywhere. pr6dicateur [predikatceir], m.. preacher. principal [presipal], principal. prochain [proje], next. public [pyblik], public. rencontre [rakoitr], f., meeting. sermon [sermS], m. , sermon. songe [s5!3], m., dream. theatre [ tea ;tr], m., theatre. tour [tu!r], m., circuit. tramway [tram we], m., street- cars. venu [vany], p.p. rmir, to come. aller k la rencontre de, to go to meet. faire le tour de, to go around. EXERCISE XVIII. A. Nos parents de la campagne sont chez nons d«nni« «„o. ^e jours, lis sont arrives lundi dernier par le chem~h;i"defe^ Nous sommes all^s k la gare a leur rencontre. Depuis qu'ih M! ■h 62 LESSON xviiL r§76 soiit ici nous lea raenons partout pour lea amoser. Nous mon- tons en tramway et nous faisons le tour de la ville. Nous entrons dans les grands magasins pour faire des emplettes. Nous avons visits les principaux ^ifices publics. Nous avons admir^ les ^glises et I'hdtel de ville. Hier soir nous avons 4t6 au thd&tre. On y a jou^ le "Songe d'une nuit d't't^" de Shakespeare. Nous I'avons beaucoup admir^. Nous avons ^t^ aussi k un concert. On y a chants admirablement. Dimanche prochain nous avons Tintention d'aller k I'^glise pour entendre un sermon par un des plus c^l^bres pr^dicateurs de la ville. B. Continue the following: 1. Je suis arriv^ hier, etc. 2. Je (f.) suis venue ce matin, etc. 3. Est-ce que je ne suis pas all^ k la gare ?, etc. 4. Est-ce que je ne suis-je pas allt^e k la rencontre de raes amies?, est-ce que tu n'es pas all^e k la rencontre de tes amies ?, etc. 6. Je fais le tour de la ville, etc. 6. Je suis entr^ dans les magasins, etc. 7. Je n'ai pas 4t4) au theatre, etc. 8. J'ai Tintention d'aller k I'^glise, etc. C. (Oral.) 1. Qui est chez vous? 2. Vos parents sont-ils toujours chez vous? 3. Depuis quand sont-ils chez vous? 4. Quand est-ce qu'ils sont arrives? 5. Votre tante est-elle venue ce matin ? 6. Qui est alld k sa rencontre 1 7. L'avez- vous trouv^e k la gare ? 8. Que faites-vous pour amuser vos amis? 9. Comment faites-vous le tour de la ville ? 10. Sont-ils entr^s dans les magasins? 11. Dans quels magasins sont-ils entr^s ? 1 2. Quels sont les plus grands Edifices de votre ville ? 13. Votre tante a-t-elle admird les ^glises? 14. Ou est-elle all^e hier soir? 15. Qu'est-ce qu'on va jouer au th«^&tre ce soir? 16. Aime-t-elle mieux aller au concert qu'au th^&tre? 17. A-t-elle I'intention de retourner bientSt k la campagne? 18. Vos parents oii sont-ils all^s dimanche dernier? 19. Ou avez-vous I'intention d'aller I'^t^ prochain ? Etc., etc. D, 1. My uncle and aunt are at our house. 2. They arrived this morning. 3. They came by the railway. 4. My sister went to meet them at the station. 5. They came from the station in a carriage. 6. They soon arrived at our house. 7. • ToKlay we took them into the city to amuse them. 8. First we went around the city in the street-cars. 9. Then my aunt '-'Aiv VXr \7L3.\J r\f 4-hr% ]A«.^wAk mV^.^^^*. ._! 1 igc nnup-= hK> iUUilC purCIicioUo. ■I A m_ XV. XV- morrow we are going to visit the largest churches. 11. They §§77-78] LESSON XIX. 58 admire very much the public buildings of -the city. 12. We are going to the concert this evening, perhaps. 13. We went to the theatre yesterday evening. 14. My aunt did not go {y) ; she does not like the theatre. 1 5. I always go {y) when they play Shakespeare's " Midsummer Night's DreamV' 16. I admire it very much. 17. The churches of this city are very fine. 18. My aunt intends to go to church next Sunday to hear a sermon. 19. Next Monday my uncle and aunt return to the country. 20. They admire the city, but they like the country better. LESSON XIX. 77* Pronoun Objects. 1. The personal pronoun has, for the indirect object of the third person, the following forma : lui Pqi], (to, for) him, (to, for) her. leur [Iceir], (to, for) them. 2. Lui and leur precede the verb (§ 30), but follow le, la, les: We speak to him (to her). I am giving Mary a rose. I give her it (it to her). I give the children my books. I give them (to) them. 78. Observe the following orthographical peculiarities : 1. commencer, nous commen^ons— stem c [s] becomes 5 [s] before o of ending (cf. § 5, 4). 2. manger, nous raangeons— stem g [3] becomes ge [3] before o of ending (cf. § 19, 2). 3. mener, je mfene [men], tu m^nes, il m^ne, lis mfenent— stem e [a] becomes h [e] in most verbs when ending is e mute (cf. § 12, 1, n.). Vocabulary. Nous lui parlons. Je donne une rose k Marie. Je la lui donne. Je donne mes livres aux enfants. Je les leur donne. accompag^er [akSpape], to accom- pany. article [artikl], m., article. avoir [avwa:rj, to have, get. bonbon fbobS], m. , bonbon, candy. chapelier [Japalje], m., hatter. chaussures [Josyir], f. pi., boots, shoes. confiseur [kofizoeir], m., confec- tioner. couru [kury], p. p. courir, to run (about). 54 LESSON XIX. [§78 m I: 'ifl 1: montrer [mStre], to gJiow. mouchoir[mujwa!r], m., handker- cliief. nouveaut6 [nuvote], f., novelty. paille[i)fj:j], f., straw. paire[i)e!r], f., pair, prix [pri], in., i)riue. Soulier [sulje], m., shoe. toilette [twalet], f., toilet. demander [domCide], to ask (for). dentelle[dutelj, f., lace. dollar [d:)la:r], ni., dollar. examiner [egzamiue], to examine fatigud [fati(je], tired. faux-col [fo kol], m., collar. k la fin [a la f?], at last, finally, manchette [niu/et], f., cuff. meme [nieinil, same. k bon marche, cheap, magasin de nouveaut6s, dry-goods store, aller faire des emplettes, to go shopping. EXERCISE XIX. A. Que nous somraes fatigues ! Nous avons couru beaucouo aiijourd iiui, J ai accoinpagnt? mon cousin chez plusieurs mar- chands pour avoir des articles de toilette. D'abord nous soranies entres chez le chapelier. Mon cousin a demands un chapeau de paille. Le cliapelier lui a montr^ un tres ioli chapeau a un dollar, que mon cousin a achete. J 'en ai acliete un aussi au nieine prix. Ensuite nous souimes alles chez le raarchand de chaussures o^i nous avons examine plusieurs paires de souliers. Mais nous n'en avons pas acliet^ Puis nous somraes entres dans un grand magasin de nouveautes. Mon cousin y a demande des faux-cols et des manchettes. On lui en a montre' a ties bon marche, et il en a achete. Nous y avons achete aussi des mouohoirs pour mon oncle et de la dentelle pour ma tante. A la fin nous sommes entre's chez un conhseur ou nous avons achete pour mes cousines des bonbons que nous leur avons donnas. R Continue the following: 1. Qu'est-ceque jelui donne?, etc. ^. Je parle a mes amis, je leur parle ; tu paries a tes amis, tu leur paries, etc. 3. Voici une plume ; je la lui donne, etc. 4. Voici des bonbons; je ne les leur donne pas, etc. 5. Est-ce que je ne mange pas beaucoup de bonbons ?, etc. 6. Je com- mence mes legons, etc. 7. Est-ce que je mene mon cousin chez le conhseur ?, est-ce que tu m^nes ton cousin, etc Relate part A, using 'ma tante' and ^elle' as subject, and changmg 'cousin' to 'cousine.' ^ C^ (Oral.) 1. Votre oncle est-il fatiiru^? 2. Pournuni? ,l sout-ils ohers ou Ik,,. ,n.M1 13. Voire oncle votre tante a ache^e? 16. Erue qTel " Vlt^^'^dLlI I -. Et pour qm so„t les bonbons? 18. Quand e t-ce aS J Ze^ 'Z orV '"; M'";?-"— destonbons i: n ir " '1''°" '"=•''"« '«' bonbons! Etc., etc. ^. 1. We are going shopping again to-daV. 2 Mv rela artiirof d^"" V^t "'^"^ """="»• •''• *'>ey always bi; vesterdav B FW T . • , "^ ''°"8*'' ^^^e™' "''Mcles yesterday b. First I went with my uncle to a hatter's 7. The hatter showed him several straw hats 8 Mv uncle bought one at a dollar. 9. Afterwards I went with mv ^e,„to Mm] and .^ Cght'lherTon .^ IK^yZJZ been to a dry-goods store to buy handkerch eft 14 Tl!f shop-keeper showed her handkerchiefe at a doHar a doJei 15, She bought some of them for my uncle. IG Finalt Tv aunt and my cousin (f.) went t. a confectioner's TrTte S fo°r t''T'' "i"™ ^^™™' ^'""^^ of bonbons 18 Who paid for the bonbons? 19. My cousin paid for them 20 wK t!::. ""'^ ^'^'^^' ""^ ^'^ ^ «-s t:;i™Tbem'^ LESSON X.A.. =„^'wt'^°"f' P™"""" Objects. The remaining form, serve both as d.rect and indirect object of verbs (for elision see § 1 y) : ' tTSr'r/,!:-;'^ nous M. us. to (for, u. 1 : 4 LESSON XX. [§§80-83 80. Pronominal Adverbs. Thoy are uHod with verbs, and ar(» t'ininal lexive I with 3ta )8 I. pre- 38. i. § 84"! LESSON XX 67 84. Observe the possessive force of the article, or of the article with an indirect object, when there is no ambiguity as to the possessor ; Je VOU8 doniie la main. I give you my hand. La bonne leut lave les mains. The maid ig wasJiing their hands. lis se laveiit les mains. They are waHhing their hands. Vocabulary. habiller [abije], to dress. habit [abi], m., coat. instant [?sta], m., instant. laver [lave], to wash. main [m?], f., hand. m^re [meir], f,, mother. mettre [metr], to put, place. peigne [peiji], m., comb. p^re [peir], m., father. prfit [pre], ready. se lever [lave], to rise. se promener [promne], to go for a walk, drive, etc. savon [savo], m., soap. serviette [servjet], f., towel. temps [ta], m., time. apr^s [apre], after. armoire [armwair], f., cupboard, clothea-prees. bonjour [b33uir], m., good morn- ing. brosse [bros], f., brush. brosser [broso], to brush. chercher [Jerje], to seek, look for. cheveux [Jov0], m. pi., hair, dejeuner [dej^no], m., breakfast, dent [da], f,, tooth. descendre [desaidr], to descend, go down (stairs). dire[diir], to say, tell, dormir [dormiir], to sleep. figure [figyir], f., face. gilet [jile], m., vest, waistcoat. tout de suite [tu do sqit], at once. k I'instant [a 1 ?sta], at once, in- stantly. donner la main k^ to shake hands with. je suis lev6, I am up. EXERCISE XX. A. Comme nous avons bien dormi ! II est temps de se lever maintenant. ISTous nous levons tout de suite, et nous faisons notre toilette. Je vais me Liver les mains et la figure, mais oil sont I'eau et le savon ?— Les voici ; je vais vous les donner. Maintenant, ou est la serviette 1— La voici.— Je cherche main- tenant mes brosses et mon peigne.— Les voila sur la table de toilette.— Je me brosse les cheveux et les dents. Je vais mettre mon gilet et mon habit, mais 011 sont-ils ?— Les voici nfl-ns I'fl.rmniro ia Trrwno Iqci ^yN»^«^ X 1'; J- J- ««■ •». ., Etes-vous pret aussi ?— Oui, me voil^ habUld.— Nous descem ou^ 68 LESSON XX. im & la salle k manger. Mon p6re et ma m^re y sont d6\k Nous promener'' '^"''' ^'""J"'"''- ^""^''^^ ^° tU'jeuiier nous ullons nous £. Continue tlie following: 1. Jo me Ifevo, etc. 2. Je me 8U1S lavd les mains, etc. 3. Voil^ . Me voil4 pret, te voila pret, etc 6 Me voil^ ptrte, te voil^ prete, etc 7. Je des- cena^ 4 la salle a manger, etc. 8. Je me suis proment^ hier, tu V es, etc. C. (Oral) 1. .\vez-vousbiendormi? 2. E.st-il temps de se lever maintenant? o. Vllezvous vous lover tout de suite? i Qui se lave les mains? 5. Est-ce que Jean et Robert .se soni lavd les mains? G. Alle-vous leur donner do I'eau et du savon / 7. Qui en donne aux autres enfants? 8. En donne- t-elleaussU Marie? 9. Qu'est-ce que vous cherchez ? 10 Qui est-ce qui va me donner la serviette et les brosses ? 1 1. Qu est raongilet? 12. Qui vous a donne ce beau gilet? 13. Est-ce que les enfants sont Imbil^s ? 14. Que font-ils ensuiteV 15 Qui est dans la salle a manger? IG. Les enfants donnent-ils la mam ^ leur pfere? 17. E«t-ce que je lui donne la main aussi? 18. Les enfants que vont-ils faiie apies le dejeuner? 19. Ne sont-ils pas encore prets ? 20. Ou est-ce que vous vous etes promene^s hier? Etc., etc. D. 1. Hcive you slept well ? 2. Yes, and it is time to rise now. 6. I rise, you rise, we rise, we are up. 4 Now I make my toilet. 5. I ^m washing my hands and my face. b. You have already washed your hands and your face 7 I give you your comb and brushes. 8. T give you them 9 You are brushing your hair. 10. I brush my teeth ' 11* Have you brushed your teeth yet? 12. You need your vest and coat now. 13. Why do you not give me them? 14. I here they are in the clothes-press. 15. I am going to give you them at once. 16. We are ready now, and we are fjoina down stairs 17. We shake hands with our father and mother" 18. They shake hands with us. 19. We shake hands with each other 20. They are going for a walk in the garden after breakfast. 21. We are going for a walk there too iW tu §§85-89] LESSON XXI. 59 LESSON XXI. 8s Imperfect Indicative of donner, finir, vendre. I was giving, otc. donn ais [done], donn ais [dons], donn ait [dnnej. donn ions [danjS]. donn iez [donje]. donn aient [done]. I was finishing, etc. finiss ais [finise]. finiss ais [finise]. finiss ait [finise]. finiss ions [finisjo]. finiss iez [finisje], finiss aient [finise]. I was selling, etc. vend ais [vdde]. vend ais [vade]. vend ait [vTide]. vend ions [vadj5]. vend iez [vadje], vend aient [vude]. 86. Imperfect Indicative of avoir, etre. I had, used to '.uve. etc. I ^as, used to be, etc. avais[ave]. av ions [avjo]. dt ais [ete]. ^t ions [etj3]. avais avej av ,ez [avje]. ^t ais [etej. ^t iez et e . avait[ave]. av a:ent [avc]. dtait[ete]. ^t aient [ete]. To form the Pluperfect tense, add a past participle, see §63. 87. Usp Of Imperfect. 1. It denotes what used to hap. pen or continued to happen : Nous parlions souvent de cela. We often used : , ^peak of that. Mon oncle etait tr^s vieux. My uncle was very old. II allait souvent i pied 4 la viUo. He would often walk to town. 2. It denotes what was happening when something else happened or was happening : SVarSt't* T"l^ '" '"" "''""'• '^^''^ "^^^ «'"g'"g -hen I arrived. II parla^t pendant que nous Chan- He was speaking while we sang (were singing). 88. Imperfect of /a/>e (irreg.). I was doing, etc. je fais ais [sa faze]. nous fais ions [nu fozjSl tufais ais [ty faze]. vous fais iez [vu fazje]. il fais ait [il faze]. iis fais aient [il faze]. 89. For imperfect of commencer. mano-Ar of «5 78 15- je commensals [39 komase], etc. je mangeais [mase], etc!' lil^ ^i 60 LESSON XXI. [§89 EXERCISE XXI. [Tho vocabularies for this and tho remaining exercises will be found at tho end of tho volume.] A. Nous avons eto a I'oglise co matin. Quand nous sommes arrives on chantait deja lo preniicr cantique. II y avait beaucoup do nioudo, et nous avons trouve un banc avec diffi- culty Lo pasttnir a hi (rmd) iin chapitre des proverbes. Tout le mondo dcoutaib attentivenient pendant la lecture du chapitre. Knsuito le pasteur a prie Dieu, eb on a cliante des versets duix autre cantique. Apr^s cela le pasteur a choisi comme texto un ver.set du "Sonnon sur la nu)nta,^M»e." Voici lo texte qu'il a clioisi: "Tout arbre cpii est bon porto do bons fruits; mais un mauvais arbre porte do mauvais fruits." Lo pasteur la expluiuo, et en a tiro d(^ bonoos lec^^ons. II a compare les homines avec les arbres. Lo m^rite des hommes consiste dans leurs bonnes actions, conmie le nierite des arbres dans leurs bons fruits. Ce sermon a etc un encouragement i\ faire le bien. Ijo sermon fini, on a fait la quote, on a chantd encore et le pasteur a donm^ la bdnediction. B. Continue the following: 1. Jo chantais le premier cantique, etc. 2. J'avais deji\ chantd le premier cantique, etc 3. Le pasteur priait Dieu quand jo suis arrive, le pasteur, etc., quand tu, etc. 4. Je comparais les hommes avec les arbres,' etc. 5. Est-ee que jo faisais la quete ?, etc. 6. Est-ce que je ne finissais pas mes lemons ?, est-ce que tu , . . tes le9ons ?, etc 7. A qui est-ce que je vendais mes pommes?, i\ qui est-ce que tu...tes pommes?, etc. 8. Y avait-il beaucoup de plumes dans ma boite ?, dans ta boite, etc. C. (Oral.) L Oil avoz vous ete ce matin? 2. Y avait-il beaucoup demonde? 3. Que faisait-on quand vous etes entrds? 4. Qu est-ce que le pasteur a fait apr^s cela? 5. Est-ce que nous deoutions pendant la lecture du chapitre? 6. Votre tante dcout.iit-elle attentivement aussi? 7. Tout le monde dcoutait-ilattentivement? 8. Qu'est-ce qu'on faisait pendant que le pasteur priait Dieu? 9. Et apr^s cela qu'est-ce que le pasteur a fait ? 10. Quel dtait le texte qu'il a choisi ? 1 1 Le sermon dtait-il intdressant? 12. Qui a expliqud le texte? 13 Quols fruits les bons arbres portent-ils? 14. Et les mauvais — J ,„,,., poiientiiaf Lu. l^uosu-ce quou a fait apr^s le sermon? 16. Est-ce qu'on chantait pendant qu'on §90-91] LESSON XXII. 61 faisait la quete ? 17. Qui a donnd la bdnddiction ? 18. Que taisaifc-on quaiid vous etes arrivd chez vous? 19. Alliez-vous souyent h I'eglise quand vous etiez k la campagne 1 20. Voire vieil oncle allait-il h I'eglise tous les dimanches ? Etc., etc. i>. 1. I often used to go to church when t was in the country. 2. My relatives used to go (y) every Sunday. 3. My old uncle used to go (y) in his carriage. 4, I went to church last bunday. 5. AV hile I was at church my brother was taking a walk on the mountain. 6. There were a great many people in the little church. 7. There were people everywhere, in the seats and at the door. 8. I met one of my cousins at the door. 9. When we went in the pastor was finishing the reading of the chapter. 10. They (on) had already sung and prayed. 1 1 . Then they sari"- two verses of another hymn and the pastor began the sermon. 12. What was the text? 13 Ihe text was a verse from the "Sermon on the mount " 14 While the pastor was speaking, everybody listened attentively.' 15. He hnished the sermon, and then the collection was taken up. 16. Wiiile they were taking up the collection, the pastor read some verses. 17. We sang again, and after the last hymn tlie pastor pronounced the benediction. 18 As I was going home I met my brother. 19. We were hungry when we arrived at the house. 20. My uncle had already arrived ana we had a good dinner. ' LESSON XXII. 90. Future Indicative of c/onner, finir, uendre. I shall give, etc. donner ai [donare]. donner as [donara]. donner a [donara]. donner ons [donar5]. donner ez [donare]. donner ont [donaro]. I shall finish, etc. finir ai [finire]. finir as [finira]. finir a [finira]. finir ons [finiro], finir ez [finire]. finir ont [finiro]. I sImiII sell, etc. vendr ai [vadre]. vendr as [vadra]. vendr a [vadra]. vendr ons [vadro]. vendr ez [vadre]. vendr ont [vadro]. 91. Future Indicative of avoir, etre. I shall have, etc. j ^i.^^ ]^^^ ^^^ aur as [.^re]. aiir ons [or3]. ger ai [saie]. ser ons [saro]. auras[ora]. aur ez [ore]. ser as [sara]. ser ez [sare] aura [oral, aur out [oro]. sera [sara]. ser ont [saro]. *«*«-«»iR»,««i»»».;i»s«»«t*i. n-M h )h ! 'ii' LESSON XXII. 92. Future Indicative o{a//er (irreg.), and f aire (irreg.). I shall go, etc. I shall do, etc. ir ai [ire], ir ons [iro]. fer ai [fare], fer ons [faro]. iras[ira]. ir ez [ire]. fer as [fora]. fer ez [fare]. ira [ira]. ir ont [iro]. fer a [fara]. fer ont [faro]. 93. For the future of lever and acheter, cf. § 78, 3 : je l^verai [kvare], etc. j'achfeterai [ajctare], etc. 94. Use of Future. It is used in general as in English, but observe its use in a subordinate sentence, when futurity is implied : Je lui parlerai quand il arrivera. I shall speak to him when he comes. EXERCISE XXII. A. II est deja tard. Maintenant nous allons nous coucher. Nous avons fait no.s plans pour deuiain. Nous nous leve- rons de bonne heure. Le dejeuner sera pret quand nous nous l^verons, et nous sortirons bientOt apres. S'il fait beau temps, nous irons h. pied, mais s'il fait mauvais temps, nous prendrons le tramway. Nous passerons d'abord chez la modiste. Si nos chapeaux ne sont pas prets, nous attendrons un peu. IVTais ils serunt prets, parce que je les ai vus hier, et ils ^taient bien avanc^s. Avant midi nous serons chez la couturiere pour essayer nos robes. Nous y resterons probablement une heure. Alors nous irons prendre une glace au cafe. Ensuite lious entrerons dans un magasin de nouveautyj^'\'^^^y'='Ce, as representative subject, in cases like the lollowing : * C'est Mario et sa mfere. C'est nous, ce sont eux. C'est un homnio celiibre. C'est une jolie dame. Ce sont des amis de Jean. Ce sont nies nieilleuros amies. C'est aujourd'hui lundi. C'est .'I nous qu'il parle. C'est ici qu'il demeure. It is Mary and lier mother. It is we, it is they. He is a celebrated man. She is a pretty lady. They are friends of John. They are my best friends. It is Monday to-day (to-day is, etc.). It is to us that lie is speaking. It is here that he lives (he lives here). EXERCISE XXIII. J^T'~^.'^''V^^'?^ *'"' ''""''" '"''•'" *''*^ J^'-^^^"^' indicative of voir. «to see '8124 anditspastparticiple t)M, 'seen.' 10 see, giZ4, oJ'i^r^ l"'"''^ ^"^ "^'"^ '"^ i^^'^ "^ "^^*»"' n'est-ce pas?--Oh oui, il fait beau, e nous causerons en route. Qui est ce monsieur qui est 14-bas de I'autre c6te^ de la rue?-C'est nn 1 nu« .uc.cns voisius. ll demeure a present dans une autre §97] LESSON XXIII. 65 rue.— Voilk tm autre monsieur qui attend le tramway ; c'est votre professeur de frangais, n'est-ce pas?— Oui, c'est lui. if va donner probablement une legon— Voili maintenant le tramway qui passe. Avez-vous vu ces deux messieurs qui nous ontsalu^s?— Oui, je les ai vus. Ce sont les messieurs que nous avons rencontres I'autre soir.—Voyez-vous cette dame qui monte en voiture? C'est I'amie de votre me're, n'est-ce pas?— Non, ce n'est pas elle. L'amie de ma mere est plus grande. — Qui est ce monsieur qui approche ? II va nous parler, n est-ce pas ?— Non, ce n'est pas a nous qu'il va parler, mais k ce monsieur qui est derrifere nous.— Voila encore un autre monsieur qui vous salue.— Ce n'est pas moi qu'il salue, c'est vous.— Mais zion, c'est bien vous. II m'est inconnu. C'est la premiere fois que je le vois— Nous voici arrives maintenant. C est ici que vous alliez entrer pour acheter vos gants. £. Continue the following: 1. Je vais donner une lecon n est-ce pas?, etc. 2. C'est ici que je demeure, etc. 3. C'est moi qui vais en ville, c'est toi qui vas en ville, etc. 4. J'irai k pied, etc. 5. Je vois un monsieur qui monte en voiture tu vois, etc. 6. Ce n'est pas moi qu'il a salue, co n'est pas toi, etc. C. (Oral.) 1. Oil est-ce que vous allez ce matin ? 2 Allez- vous&pied ou en voiture? 3. Qu'est-ce que nous ferons en route pour nous amuser? 4. Qui est ce vieux monsieur lk-ba.s( 5. Ou est-ce qu'il demeure a pre'sent? 6. Voil4 un monsieur qui attend le tramway; qui est-ce? 7. Voyez-vous ces messieurs qui nous saluent? 8. Ce sont des amis de votre p^re, n est-ce pas ? 9. Qui est cette dame qui se prom^ne en T J'''^o I?' ^''''''^ ^^^'""^ "1"® J^ I'ai vue? 11. Est-ce bien io S^ nionsieur qui approche est votre voisin, n'est-ce pas? 13. Est-ce moi qu'il a salu^? 14. Qui est-ce que vous avez salue devant I'hdtel de ville? 15. Est-ce un de vos anciens amis ? 16. Est-ce ici que vous allez acheter vos gants ? 17. JN est-ce pas dans cet autre magasin labas? 18. Est-ce la premiere fois que vous allez dans ce magasin ? Etc., etc. D. 1. We are going down town on foot. 2 We are chatting on the way. 3. We see a gentleman on the other side^of the street. 4. He is one of my old neigli],ours 5 He avea on the other side of the street. 6. He is your old French teacher, is he not? 7. No, he is an old merchant I 66 LESSON XXIV. [§98 8. A carriage passes next. 9. "VVho are those two gentlemen in the carriage who bowed to us 1 10. Tliey are the gentlemen we met yesterday evening. 11. Was it I tliat they bowed to? 12. Who bowed to them, you or I ? 13. I see a lady (who is) waiting for the street-cars. 14. She is a friend of your family, is she not ? 15. She is a friend of my mother. 16. Do you see that gentleman who is approaching? 17. Yes, who is it? 18. He is a celebrated general who lives in this city. 19. Is it here that you buy your gloves? 20. No, it is in that large shop over yonder. II-'' w m LESSON XXIV. 98. Impersonal Verbs. They are conjugated in the third person singular only, with the subject il = < it,' used indefinitely and absolutely. Among such are verbs descri! ang natural phenomena, as in English : Quel temps fait-il ? What kind of weather is it ? II fait beau temps. It is fine (weather). II pleut, il pleuvait. It is raining, it was raining. II a plu, il pleuvra. It has rained, it will rain. II neige, il a neige. It is snowing, it has snowed. II fait chaud, il fait du vent. It is hot, it is windy. EXERCISE XXIV. A. C'est mardi dernier que nous avons fait notre pique-nique. Nous nous sommes leves presque au lever du soleil. La pre- miere question a ^te : quel temps fera-t-il ? Le temps etait convert, et il faisait tres lourd. II y avait de gros nuages a I'ouest, et \e tonnerre grondait deja. II a fait des eclairs, et apres un grand coup de tonnerre la pluie a commence. II a plu pendant une heure. Ensuite le soleil s'est montre, et un bon vent a chasse les nuages. Biciit6t il a fait tres beau, et nous sommes partis. Le pique-nique a eu lieu dans les bois au bord du lac. Nous avions I'intention de nous promener en bateau, mais il faisait du vent, et il y avait des vagues. C'est pourquoi nous ne sommes pas alle's sur I'eau. I] p, fait chaud, mais nous etiCT." a iOnibre, Bv un vc.nt trais nous arrivait du lac. Vers midi nous avons mang^ notre gouter. Dans I'aprfes- §98] LESSON XXIV. en nous r™::r.r/cttr • ^™" '^ --- «'>• »•«« A Commit to mem .ry : La semaine an lundi commence, Et uiardi I'ouvrage avanee, Ensuite vient le mercredi, Le jeudi, puis le vendredi ; Le samedi corable nos vceux Et le dimanche nous prions Dieu -reiiaant combien f (0 temps est-ce mi'il fl nil, "2 o r\ i i. mang(5 votre ?(nng to p>t Ronto pona, I Koo sonio soldit'is loiniiig. I inako tho Im<11 ring. 2. Precodod by de, aftor ^tre iuiporsonally + an adjective; aftor many verbs like cesser, 'cease,' regretter, 'regret,' prier, 'beg'; after nouns to form adjective phrases; and after most adjectives : II eat faoilo de \mv\er. It is easy to talk. II a oosst^ de ohantor. Ho has coased singing. Lo criino de volor. Tho crinio of stealing. Vou8 etoa lihro de jmrtir. You aro fioo to i o. 3. Preceded by k, after verbs like r^USSir, 'succeed,' aimer, 'like,' enseigner, 'teach,' etc.; and after some adjectives: J'aimo k imfuwr. I like to skato (like skating). Jo m'amuso k pvtinor. I anmao myself (by) skating. Cela est faoilo k fairo. That is easy to do. 4. Observe that the same adjective may take ^ or de, accoi-ding to the construction in which it is used : II est facile k oontentor. Ho is easy to satisfy. n est faoile de le contenter. It is easy to satisfy him. C'est facile & faire. That (or it) is easy to do. 5. A verb governed by a preposition must be in the infini- tive, except after en (ef S lOi) : Je I'ai fait sans peuser. I did it without thinking. [§99 §§100-103] LESSON XXV. 'II 100. Present Participle of donner, finir, uendre, etc. living. Finishing. Selling, donn ant [doml]. fiiUHs ant [finisd]. vend ant [vadfl]. Having. Being, ay ant [eju]. ^t ant [otd]. 101. Agreement. Used na an adjective, the present parti- ciple uj^reeH like an adjective ; otherwise it is invariable : TJno Ho6no (tliarnuuite. A charming scene. Kilo tonibait souvont on marchant She ofton foil while walking. 102. Present Indicative of pouuoir, *be able,' »can; 'may' (irreg.). I can, am able, etc. je puis or poux [7,0 pt{i, p0]. noua pouvons [nu puvS], tu poux [ty p0]. vous pouvez [vu puve]. il pout [ilp0]. il8pouvont[ilpce:v]. 103. Observe the use of the impersonal il faut + infinitive : 11 lui faut partir. He must (it is necessary tor him to) go. 11 mo faudra travailler. I shall have to work. II no faut pas volor. We (one) must not steal. EXERCISE XXV. A. Bonjour num .. eesso pas d- cluuite. , etc. 6. Je vols une scene charmante, etc. C. (Oral.) 1. Conniient vous portez-vous ce matin? 2 Avez-vous bien don.ii ? 3. Est-ce qu'il a geli' rette nuit? 4. En (piello saison les oiseaux cessent-ils de chanter? 5. Quand est ce qu'ils commcncent a chanter? G. Est-co qu'il y a deja d(5 bonne ^'laco sur le lac ? 7. Peut-on v patiner ce soir 1 8. Aimez-vous k patiner ? 9. Qu'est-ce que; vous faites en hiver pour vous amuser? 10. Est-il facile de samuser en hiver? 11. Pouvez-vous vous promener on traineau ce soir? J. No dosirez-vous pas sortir ce soir? 13. Qu'avez-vous I'intention de faire? 14. Allez-vous passer toute la soirde cl.cz vous ? 15. Faut-il avoir des amis pour samuser? 16. Aimez-vous a passer la soiree fi lire ? 17. Quand avez-vous commenct^ a liio ces romans? 18. Ce sont des romans charmants, n'ost-co pas? 19. Vous faut-il renter k la maison ce soir ? Etc., etc. D. 1. Good morning; T am charmed to see you. 2. The weather is very fine for the season, is it not? 3. Did you look at the ice on the lake in passing? 4. Yes, the ice is good, and we can soon skate. 5. Do you like to skate? 6. Yes, but I cannot go skating this evening. 7. I must stay at home. 8. You can amuse yourself reading. 9. I like to pass the evening at home sometimes. 10. It is easy to find amusements. 11. We oftcii invite friends to pass the evening with us. 12. We have begun to read a novel together. 13. It is charming to go for a sleigh-ride soraetimes. 14. '^he white snow and the moonlight make a charming scene. 15. It is so charming to hear the sleigh-bells ring. 16. Wq must go for a sleigh-ride tomorrow. 17. I shall go if I can. 18. We shall go too, 19. We mjjst h.ave some friends with us. 20. To enjoy one's self one must have friends. §§104-106] LESSON XXVI. 71 I ("lay) give, etc. doTin e [don], donn es [don], donn e [don], donn io s [d )nj;3], donn U';z [tlonjej. donn ent [dor]. I (ju ly) sell, etc. vende [void]. vend es [vd'.d], vende [vaid]. vend ions [vndjo]. % end iez [vudje], vend ent [vuulj. LESSON XXVI. 104. Present Subjunctive of donner, finir, uendre. '"" ~'" 1 (niay) finish, etc. iuiiss e [nnis]. tintss es [dnis]. fmiss » [fin 14 tinission' ''finirfjo]. Sni&s iez [finisje]. finiss ent [finis]. ^^^^ rna^B^r'^'i;''^''''''^'^"' "''''"'"*'" '^ "lay give.' etc., are only approxi- mate, as will oe seen uora the ( aiuples l.elow. 105. Present Subjunctive of auoi'r, 4tre. I (may) have, etc. I (may) be, etc. ^ aie J ]. ayons [ej5]. sc.is [.swa]. soyons [swajo]. aie8[e. aye. [eje]. sois [:swa]. soyez [swaje]. ait [£]. aieat [e]. soit [swa]. soient [swa]. 106 Use of tlie Subjunctive. Some of the commoner uses of the subjunctive are: 1. In a .subordinate noun clause introduced by que ' that ' aftor expressions of willing or desiri7ig : ' Je desire que vous restie.. I desire you to remain ( = that you may or should reu lin). 2. SimiJarly, n.hvv express! >ns oijoy or sorrow • Je suis co„tent qu'il .soit id. I «. , , lad he is here. 3. So also after expressions of necessity, like 11 faut : II faut que vous restiez. Yo„ must romu.a. est necessaire que vous re. tiez. It is ner essaiy for you to remain. 4. It is used in idverbi.al clauses after certain conjunctions e^g. afin que, in order that,' pour que, 1 order hat,' f^i"* ?"^' '^'^'''^*' "'^" ^"^' 'althougi,,' quoique, * although,' etc. ^ ' Bien qu'il soit pauvre il est he"»«' speaK. FuT. II faudra ) '^ ( You will have to speak. 108. Present Indicative ol uou/oir, 'wii:,' 'wish,' etc. (irreg.). I will, wish, etc. je veux [36 v0]. nous voulons [nu vulo]. tu veux [ty v0j. vou. v^oulez [vu vule]. il veut [il v0]. iU /eulent [il vcel]. 109. Present Subjunctive oifaire (irreg.). I (may) do, etc. fasse [fas]. fassions [fasjo]. fasses [fas]. ' fassiez [fasje]. fasse [fas]. fassent [fas]. EXERCISE XXVI. A.. On frappe a la porte. Je vais voir qui c'est. C'est una de mes amies. Elle entre. Nous causons ensemble. — Qu'allez- vous frtire aujourd'nui ?— Ma robe n'est pas encore prete. II faut que je sois chez la couturiere avant midi. Apr^s cela je yais porter des fleurs a une amie qui est un peu souffrante, et je desire que vous m'accompagniez, si vous pouvez. C'est assez loin, mais nous n'irons pas a pied. Je serai si contente que vous soyez avec moi. II faut que vous fassiez connaissance avec mon amie; elle est si charmante.— Je regrette de ne pouvoir pas vous accompagner ce matin ; j'ai mal aux dents depuis hier, II y en a deux qui me font souffrir.— Que je regrette que vous ayez tant d'ennui ! C'est tres fAcheux. Et qu'allez-vous faire?- II me faut aller voir le dentiste. II arrachera une de mes dents probablement, car elle est entifere- ment g^tf^e. Mais je desire qu'il tache de me conserver I'autre. B. Continue the following : 1. Je suis content qu'il soit arrive, tu es, etc. 2. Je veux qu'elle attende, tu veux, etc. 3. II faut que je sois 1^ avant midi, il faut que tu, etc. 4. II desire que je le finisse, que tu, etc. 5. II faut que je vende ma maison, que tu, etc. 6. Bien que i'aie des amis, bien oua tu, etc. 7. Je suis fache qu'elle soit souffrante, tu qs, etQ, ^ §110] LESSON XXVII. 78 demande? 3. Votro robe est-elle prete 1 4. Faut-il que ie soisen ville avant midi? 5. Me faut-il partir tout deluL^' o. uesirez-vous que je vous accompagne i 7. Keirrettez-voua que vo re amie soit souffrante ? 8. "^tes-vous conttnte quelle Tlade? U ^^'^'7-^°"'^ ^"«. « dentiste arrache votre dent ma adeJ? 19 ^,^"^"7,«"« ^^^^ y«"« ^^r^che les deux dents malades? 12. Que desirez-vous 1 13. Ne voulez-vous pas que je vous attende au caf d ? 14. D^sirez-vous queTe so! avec vous chez le dentiste? 15. Faut-il que nous soyons de retour avant midi ? IG. l^tes-vous fdch^e que votre 4re ait cTteVu^rT^ //• ^--—,^-''-^ e2 ach^te^u^erns f.f ■ ^1 ^^'® '','' ^''°'^'' ''^ *^*® ^°«^- 2. I do not vash you be at"! d"^ ^^T > ^' ^ "^^^ y^^ *^ ^^°g- 4. Must^ou be at the dressmaker's at noon? 5. Yes, I must have my trtZ'J "■ "^'T^- !• ^ ^"^ S^^"S afterwards to see my inaisposed. 8. I must take her some flowers. 9. Do vou Tt home' *^TTP'"^ ^'" ^ ^^- ^"' ^ ^^^^^^ y«" *« remain nlo /vT'/.f" T^ «orry you have toothache. 12. Is it necessary that the dentist should extract your two teeth? 13 I must go and see him first. 14. I wish him to try and save one of the two 15. Although this tooth is a ^little decayed, it is better than the other. 16. Do you wish me to be with you at the dentist's? 17. No, I wilh you to buy some fruit for our dinner. 18. Although fruit is dear 1 shaU buy a great deal. 19. One must eat to live. 20 EvVybodv must eat enough. j^veryooay LESSON XXVII. Imperative of donner, finir, uendre. Finish, etc. finis [fini]. qu'il finiss e [finis], finiss ons [finiso]. ,., - - - fin?33 ez [finiso]. venu ez ivddeP re]. ser ait [sore]. ser aient [nare]. Obs. : In all verbs the stem of the conditional is the same as that of the future. 116. Conditional Sentences. 1. The conditionalis used to express what would happen (result) in case something else were to happen (condition) : S'ilavait le temps (condition), If he had time (had he time, etc.), il finirait sa le^on (result). he would finish his lesson. 2, A ' result ' clause in the conditional (English ' should ' or * would') regularly has the * if clause in the imperfect indica- tive, whatever be the corresponding English form : Si j'^tudiais bien (condition), If I studied (or if I were to s., or le maltre serait content (result). were I to s. , or should I s. ) well, the master would be glad. 3. A * result ' clause in the future requires the * if ' clause in the present indicative, whatever be the corresponding English form : S'il est ici domain (condition), If he is {or be, or will be, or should je lui donnerai I'argent (result). be) here to-morrow, I shall give him the money. 5117] LESSON XXVIII. 77 117. Future and Conditional off aire (irreg.) and aller (irreg.). ir ai [ire]. ir ais [ire]. fer ai [fore], fer ais [fare]. if as [ira], etc. ir ais [ire], etc. fer as [fara], etc. fer ais [fare], etc. EXERCISE XXVIII. A. Sij'avais mes livres, j'etudierais mes le9ons. Je les ai laisses k I'ecole. — ^Cependant il n'est pas ndcessaire que vous perdiez votre temps. J'ai mes livres et je puis vous les preter, si vous desirez preparer vos leQons. — Vous etes trop aimable, je les accepterai avec plaisir. — De quels livres avez-vous besoin? — J'ai besoin d'une arifchmdtique et d'une geographic. Sij'avais aussi un crayon efc du papier, j'en ferais usage. — IMa bibftotheque entiere est k votre disposition. — A propos. qu'allez-vous faire pendant les vacances 1 — Si j'avais beaucoup d'argent, j'irais bien loin. Je suis si fatigue depuis quelque temps. Et qu'est-ce que vous allez faire 1 — Si je n'avais pas ete si souvent a la campagne, j'y serais alle encore cette annde. Mais il me faut un plus grand changement s'il est possible. — Alors vous n'etes pas encore decide. — Pas encore, il y a tant de reflexions k faire. S'il ne fait pas trop chaud, nous reste- rons ici. On sera tr^s bien ici, s'il fait frais. ]\Iais s'il fait tres chaud, nous partirons pour un endroit plus agreable. B. Complete the following by adding a 'result' clause or an 'if clause as the case may be: 1. Le maitre sera content. . . 2. S'il fait chaud deniain. . . 3. S'il ne faisaitpas si chaud. . . 4. Je lui donnerai I'argent . . . 6. Je lui donnerais I'argent. . . 6. Si j'avais du papier et des plumes ... 7. Si j'avais ma grammaire fran; nialtre sera-t-il content si nous ne prdparons pas no« \e(;oTL^. 1 6. Ne serf.-t-il pas content si nous ^tudions deux heu'es jntiferes? 7. Serait-il content si je perdais mon temps ? 8. J^ maitre est-il content si nous perdons notre temps? 9. Est-ce que je sierai content si je perds mon temps? 10. Serions-nous contents si nous perdions notre temps? 78 LESSON XXIX. h Mil [§118 11. Seriez-vous fatigu^ si vous travailliez toute la soirde? 12.^ Irez-vous k la carnpagne s'il fait chaud demairi? 13. Qu'est-ce que nous ferons s'il fait chaud demain? 14. Si vous aviez des vacances, est-ce que vous resteriez h la maison? 15. Que feriez- vous? 16. Iriez-vous k la carnpagne? 17. Si vous aviez beaucoup d'argent, que feriez-vous pendant I'et^? 18. Serons-nous bien ici s'il fait chaud ? Etc., etc. i>. 1. I have left all ray books at school. 2. If I had them, I should prepare my lessons for to-morrow. 3. If I do not pr- pare them, the master will not be pleased. 4. If you wish to study, I shall lend you my books. 5. If you were to lend me them, I should be very glad. 6. I should study the whole evening. 7. I do not wish to lose my time. 8. I am never happy, if I am not working. 9. Should you make use of my pens and paper, if I lent you them? 10. I should accept them with pleasure, if you were kind enough to lend me them. 11. If we work the whole evening, we shall be tired. 12. By the way, what are you going to do in the holidays? 13. I shall go to the country, if it is hot. 14. I should go tec. if I had not been there so often. 15. If I had a great deal of money, I should go a long way off. 16. If one has no money, one cannot go far. 17. If it is possible, I shall spend some days with my relatives. 18. It (ce) will be for me a great pleasure, if my cousins are at home. LESSON XXIX. Il8. Use of Article. 1. Names of continents, countries, provinces, large islands, regularly take the definite article : La France est un beau pays. France is a beautiful country. Nous aimons le Canada. We love Canada, II demeure aux :6tats-Uuis. He lives in the United States. 2. The article is omitted after the preposition en = *in,' *to/ it is also omitted after de in certain constructions : Mon p6re est en Angleterre. My father is in England. Nous allons en France. We are going to France. II vient d'ltalie. He comes from Italy. Lee vins d'Espagne. Spanish wines. 5^119-120] LESSON XXIX. ..V 119. 1. Place 'where,' 'wliereto,' is usually denoted by tti before names of continents, European countries singular, and feminine countries singular outside of Europe ; other countries usually take the preposition a + the definite articiG : II est en (va en) Europe. He ^s in (goes to) Europe. II est au (va au) Canada. He is in (goes to) Canada. 2. Cities, towns, etc., usually take d, without any article : He is in 0?" at (goes to) Paris. At New Orleans. II est k (va k) Paris, But : A la Nouvelle-Orl^ans, 120. Present Indicative of sauoir, Ho know' (irreg.). I know, etc. je sais [se]. nous savons [sayo], tu sais [se]. vous savez [save], 11 eait [se]. ils savent [saiv]. EXERCISE XXIX. A. Savez-vous que votre ami est parti hier pour la France 1 ' — Qui, je le sais. II etait si content! II sait d^jk bien le fran- 9aisj dans quelques mois il le parlera comme ua FranQais. — Avez-vous jamais 6t4 en France 1 — Non, je n'y ai jamais 6t4, mais j'ai I'intention d'y aller I'annee prochaine. Vous y avez ^te, n'est-ce pas? — Oui, j'y ai pass^ deux annees. C'est un beau pays, J'aime beaucoup la France, j'aime les FrauQais et le franQais. C'est une belle langue. — Oh oui, vous, vous etes bien avanc^. Vous parlez frangais couramment, mais moi, je trouve cela difficile, — En commen9ant, c'est difficile, mais avec le temps vous rapp*'endrez, surtout si vous passez une annee en France,- -Quelle partie de la France avez-vous habitue 1 — J'ai habits Paris, mais j'ai visits d'autres grandes villes, J'ai ^t^ k Boupr et k Lyon, — Avez-vous jamais 6t6 au Bas-Canada? — Oui, j'y a,i ete. J'ai et^ a IVEontr^al et k Quebec. Ce sont deux belles villes. J'ai 4t4 aussi a la Nouvelle-Orl(^ans, oii il y a beaucoup de Fran^ais. On ^ y parle encore aujourd'hui franqais. IVfais en general aux Etats-Unis les Frangais n'ont pas conserve leur langue si fidelement que les Frangais du Canada. 80 LESSON XXIX. [§120 -ff. Continue the followii.g : 1. Jo parJe anglais, tu, etc. ^. ±.st-ce que je parle f ran9ais ?, est-ce que tu ?, etc. 3. Je sais bien le fran9ais, tu, etc. 4. Ai-je ^U en France ?, as-tu et^ ?. etc. 5. Deraam je partirai pour le Canada, tu, etc. 6. Je vais aux Etats-Unis, tu, etc. 7. J'habite les Etats-Unis, tu, etc. 8 J irai k Paris I'ann^e prochaine, tu, etc. 9. J'ai demeurd une ai.mde k Paris, tu as, etc. C. (Oral.) L Oii est la France? 2. Quelle langue les Fran- 9ais parlent-ils? 3. Savez-vous le frangais? 4. Parlez-vous iran9ais / 5. Le parlez vous couramment? 6. Avez-vous jamais 6t6 en b ranee ? 7. Coml)ien de temps avez-vous passd k Paris ? 8. Avez-vous 4t6 aussi k Rouen et a Lyon ? 9. Aimez-vous la J^rance? 10. Aimez-vous les Fran9ais? 11. Est-ce que le fr^n9ai3 est une belle langue? 12. Quelle langue parlez- "iTV i , ""^^ "1"® "^^"^ sommes Anglais ou Francais? 14. Les habitants de la France parlent fran9ais, n'est-cepas? iO. i: a-t-ilbpaucoupdeFran9aisaux Etats-Unis? 16. Quelle langue parle-t-onauBas-Canada? 17. Parle-t-on aussi la langue f ran9aise k la Nou velle-Orleans ? 1 8. Quelle langue parle-t on & Montreal et k Quebec? 19. Les Fran9ais des Etats-Unis ont-ils conserved fid^lement leur langue? 20. Depuis quand dtudiez-vous le fran9ais? 21. Avez-vous intention d'aller en' France lann^e prochaine? 22. Dans quels pays avez-voua pass6 les vacances I'ann^e derniere ? Etc., etc. D. 1. France is in Europe. 2. France is a beautiful country 3. Its inhabitants speak French. 4. French is spoken also in Canada and in the United States. 5. It is spoken at Mont- real Quebec and New Orleans. 6. French is a fine language. 7. We like the French and the French language. 8. We have been studying French for three months. 9. I have not been m !• ranee yet. 10. I intend to go there next year. 11 I shall set out for France in the summer. 12. I shall spend a month m Pans, and some time also at Lyons and Rouen. 16. On my return, I shall remain some days at Montreal and Quebec. 14. French is a difficult language for the English 15. We speak English. 16. We live in Canada. 17 Our relatives live in the United States. 18. They live in New Orleans. 19 They have never been in France, but they speak French like Frenchmen. 20. If you were to spend a year in France, you would speak it fluently also. ii./ i.' §§121-123] 121. LESSON XXX. LESSON XXX. The Possessive Pronouns. SI Singular. le mien [rajJ], m. la inienne [mjen], f. le tien [tj?], m. la tienne [tjen], f. le sien [sj?], m. la sienne [sjen], f. le notre [noitr], m.'i la notre [noitr], f. J le votre [voitr], m. ] la votre [voitr], f. j le leur la leur [Iceir], m. 'J [loeirj, f. J" Plural. les miens [nijf],m.\ . les miennes [mjen], f. J les tiens [tj?], in. 1 ,, . lestiennes [tjsn], f. T^^"^' >^°"^^- lessiens [sj?], m. |his, hers, les siennes [sjen], f. J its, one's own. les notres [no:tr], ours. les votres [voitr], yours, les leurs [loeir], theirs. 122. Agreement. Possessive pronouns agree in gender and number with the object possessed, and in person with the possessor : J'ai mes livres ; elle a les siens. I have ray books ; she has hers. 123. Use of Possessive Pronouns. 1. After 6tre, mere ownership is regularly expressed by a + a personal pronoun disjunctive, while the use of a possessive pronoun implies distinction of ownership : Cette montre est k moi. This watch is mine. Cette montre est la mienne. This watch is mine. 2. De and a + le mien, etc., contract as usual (cf. §§ 35, 46): Je parle de son ami et du mien. I speak of his friend and of mine. 3. Since le sien, la sienne, etc., mean ' his,' ' hers,' * its,' 'one's,' the context determines which sense is intended : II a sea livres ; elle a les siens. He has his books ; she has heiv 4. Observe the idioms : Un de mes amis. Un Parisien de mes amis. 6 A friend of mine. A Parisian, a friend of mine. 82 LESSON XXX. [§124 l^ii il!j 124. Present Indicative of dire, ' to say,* ' tell ' (irreg.), and of voir, 'to see' (irreg.), I see, etc. je voia [vwa]. nous voyons [vwajo]. tu vois [vwa]. vous voyez [vwaje]. il voit [vwa]. il8 voient [vwa]. I say, etc. je dis [di]. nous disons [dizo]. tu dis [di]. vous dites [dit]. il dit [di]. lis disent [diiz]. EXERCISE XXX. A. Un de mes amis, qui voyage actuellement en Europe, m'a envoy^ une lettre I'autre jour. Dans cette lettre il fait les comparaisons les plus interessantes entire les habitudes des Europ^ens et les notres. Par exemple, les chernins de fer europeens sont differents des notres. Nos voitures sont plus grandes que les leurs, et elles ont un seul compartiment, tandis que les leurs sont divisees en pluueurs. Les petits compartiraents sont souvent tr^s commodes ; on pent y etre seul ou avee une petite compagnie agreable. / Mais il y a un inconvenient : on risque de se trouver face a face avec un compagnon de voyage tres desagr^able, ou meme dangereux. Un jour, par exemple, mon ami se trouvait dans un comparti- ment avec un individu qui ne respectait pas trop la difference entre le mien et le tien. Mon ami avait une jolie montre d'or. Son compagnon la remarque. Le train approche d'une petite ville, et ralentit sa marche. L'iiidividu tire un revolver de sa poche et dit a mon ami : " Vous avez la une belle montre, donnez-la-moi et je vous donnerai la mienne." Mon ami a peur, il donne sa montre, et le voleur saute du train. B. Complete the following by supplying a suitable posses- sive pronoun form: L Ma montre est en or;. ..est en argent. 2. Mes parents sont k Paris ; . . . sont aux Etats-Unis. 3, Marie va chercher mes plumes et . . . 4. Nous avons fini nos lemons ; ils ont flni ... 5. J'ai fini mes legons, et Jean a fini ... 6. Vos lemons sont faciles, mais . . sont difiiciles. 7. J'ai mon crayon, et Marie a . . . 8. Marie a ses crayons et . . . aussi. 9. Les Fran9ais airaent leur pays, et nous aimons . . . 10. Nous aimons notre langue ; les Fran^ais aiment. . 11. Je parle de mes amis, et vous parlez. . . 12. Jean donne des fleurs k ses soeurs, et Robert en donne . . . §124] C. (C tudes d( Nos che voitures sont-elle ami se t voleur e montre 1 la mienr ce que 1( ami? 1 a-t-il tir au vole 15. L'ai la v6tre et le tiei D. 1. is much ours. '^ 4. Their of our t: are ofte divided one of t pocket \ individu; and thin looks at " Here a of silver 15. Att pocket, because arrives a from the watches, and if I different. V §124] LESSON XXX. 83 C. (Oral.) 1. Qui vous a envoy (5 unelettre? 2, Les habi- tudes des Europ^ens sont-elles les memes que les n6tres? 3. Nos chemins de fer sont-ils meilleurs que les leuis? 4. Leurs voitures sont-elles plus grandes que les nOti es 1 5. Les ndtres sont-elles plus commodes que les leurs? 6. Avec qui votre ami se trouvait-il dans un compartiment ? 7. La montre du voleur ^tait-elle meilleure que la sienne 1 8. En quoi est votre montre? 9. Voulez-vous me donner la v6tre en ^change de la mienne? 10. A qui ^tait la belle montre d'or? IL Qu'est- ce que le voleur veut donner en echange de la montre de votre ami? 12. Qui a tir^ un revolver de sa poche? 13. Votre ami a-t-il tire le sien aussi de sa poche? 14. Auriez-vous donne au voleur votre belle montre en dchange de la sienne? 15. L'auriez-vous donnde si la sien;>3 avait ^td meilleure que la v6tre ? 1 6. Qui ne respecte pas la difference entre le mien et le tien? Etc., etc. 2>. 1. A friend of mine is travelling in France, 2. There is much difference between the customs of the French and ours. "^ For example, our railways and theirs are different. 4. Their railways are not so long' as ours. 5. The carriages of our trains are larger than theirs. 6. But their carriages are often more comfortable than ours. 7. Ours are not divided into compartments. 8. One day I find myself in one of these compartments. 9. I draw my watch from my pocket to look at it. 10. My travelling companion is an individual who does not respect the difference between mine and thine. 11. He draws out his also from his pocket, and looks at it. 12. He looks at mine too. 13. He says to me: " Here are two watch ^ yours is of (en) gold and mine is of silver. 14. Give me yours, and I shall give you mine." 15. At these words, I draw a revolver which I have in another pocket. 16. The thief does not draw his from his pocket, because he has no revolver. 17. At this moment the train arrives at a little town. 18. The thief is afraid, and jumps from the carriage, leaving me his watch. 19. I have now two watches, mine and his. 20. If he had had his revolver, and if I had not bad mine, the affair would have been very different. I u I 125. iLfiSSON XXXI. LE8S0N XXXI. The Demonstrative Pronouns. [§§125-129 ce [80], this, these, that, those, he, she, it, they. c^ci [sosi], this. cela [sohv], that. c1wS'^'"-}hri;°"^''''^°"^^' ''""^ rB0].m.Uhose (ones,, the ce le ise j. J he, she. celles [sel], f. /ones, they c le d :: ' -1 J' "• l^'^^°"^^' ^^"^-^ ^^^ «'J- ™- \those' ones,. celetrr 1'"^^'^""°^''^^ ceux.IMMla].m.Uhose(ones), celle-lk [sd la], f. /former. celles-lk [ssl la], f. /the former. 126. For tlie use of ce as distinguished from the personal pronoun U (elle, etc.), see § 97. 127. Ceci = 'this,' and cela = 'that,' are used to denote something pointed out or indicated, but not named. Cela is often contracted into Qa in familiar language • Cda est joli ; je pr^f^re ced. That is pretty ; I prefer this. Pouvez-vous fmre cela ? Can you do that ? •^*^">«?a- Hike that. 128. Celui, 'that (one),' 'the (one),' 'he,' is used of persons or things, and is regularly followed by a relative dause or a de clause : He whom I expected has arrived. Those who seek find. My flowers and Mary's. The ones (flowers, you like. 129. 1. Celui-Ci, 'this,' 'this one,' 'he,' and celuM^ that ' that one,' are used of persons or things already men. tioned, to contrast the nearer and the more remote : Voici les deux chalnes; gardez Here are the two chains; keep celle-ci et donnez-moi celle-lk. this (one, and give me that (one, 2. 'The latter' is celui-ci, and 'the former 'is celui-la the order of ideas being inverted as compared with English : ' Cic^ron et Virgile ^taient tons Cicero and Virgil were both cele- deuxcef^bres. celui-d^tait brated; the former was an "®^^- liiator ana the latter a poet. Celui que j'attendaia est arriv^. Ceux qui cherchent trouvent. Mes fleurs et celles de Marie. Celles que vous aimez. •%' i'/ §120] LESSON XXXI. 85 EXERCISE XXXI. A. Un ct 1 bain horame posaddait un Ane t uii ieti* lien. A cHui-ci il donnait des caresses et h celui-14 des lar< .lUX k portor. <' 'ainusait toute la journde. II mrait par-ci par-Iu. i(. o il iiiangeait avec son maitre. 11 donnait la patU' h tout !(' monde, et tout 1(5 monde lui donnait des baiseis. Lp pauvre Ane voyait tout cela, et il en t^tait trfes .•content/ Un jour il se deniande : •' Pourquoi lie me donne- t-on pas aUtant de bonnes choses qu'a ce miserable petit chieni Pourquoi donne-t-on toutes les caresses k celui qui ne travaille pas, et tous les coups de baton k relui qui travaille toujours 1 Je cesserai de travailler. J'entrerai dans la salle k manger de mon ran "e, je doiinerai la patte k tous ceux qui y sont, et ils me doniu i ont des caresses." Le pauvre Ane tAche de faire cela. II entre dans la salk k manger, il salue la conipagnie. II cliante de sa belle )ix. II veut donner la patte k son maitre. Mais en levant la patte il fait tomber la vaisselle. On a peur. on crie. Les valets entrent, et donnent k la pauvre b§te, non des caresses, mais des coups de bfiton. B. Complete the following by supplying suitable demonstra- tive pronoun forms : 1. Ceci est bon, . . .est mauvais. 2. Cela est grand, ... est petit. 3. Voila deux montres d'or ; ... est plus jolie que ... 4. . . . de mon ptjre est plus jolie encore. 5. Voici des livres pour nous; donnez-raoi . . . , et je vous donnerai... 6, Donnez-moi d'autres plumes, j'ai perdu... que vous m'avez pretties. 7. Je [)arle de Ciceron et de Virgile;. . .^tait poete et. . .^tait orateur. 8. . . .qui volent sont des voleurs. 9. Cet homma a vole mon argent et. . .de mon ami. C. 1. Give me that. 2. I do not need this. 3. There are two pens ; give me this one and keep that one. 4. My watch is finer than John's. 5. My father's still finer. 6. He who steals is a thief. 7. Those who steal are thieves. 8. I have two brothers, John and Robert; the former is taller than I, the latter smaller. D. (Oral.) 1. Quels ^taient les deux animaux que poss^dait cet horame 1 2. Qu'est-ce qu'il donnait a celui-ci 1 3. Qu'est-ce qu'il donnait k celui-l^? 4. L'ane ^tait-il content de celal 5. Qu'est-ce que Vkne se demanded 6, Ou est-ce qu'il veut i:! IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) A m 1.0 1^ 1^ i^ Ui 1^ m |2.2 I.I us u 1.25 1.4 11.6 1 < 6" J ,%'> m Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. 14S80 (716) 872-4503 ,\ iV M St >^ V %'^ »'"^ ;\ ^^ ^i LESSON XXXII. [§§130-182 entrer? 7. Est-ce qu'il a fait cela? 8. La voix de I'^ne est-eJleplus bel e que celle du cl.ien? 9. A qui veutl contents? 11 Qu est-ce que font les valets? 12. Est-ce B. 1 The ass and the dog are useful animals. 2. The former carries burdens and the latter is the faithful friend of Zn .J. The ass in this story is dissatisfied. 4. He asks himself 5 ^ifrnft^"' ^'"^ *'"'^^ *" *^^- -h« do not work' wnr? T Tv!" ^'T '^'''''' *^ *^^ ^^^ ^^d blows to him who works. 6. Ihe unhappy animal is dissatisfied with that^ 7 He ceases to work, and enters the dining-room. 8 He^ Jlutes hose who are there. 9. He sings wk his beautTful voic? 10. That IS not very agreeable to the company. 1 1. You know hat the v^oice of the ass is not so pleasant a^ that of the dog scLm T4 Th" "'\ i^- ^^'^"^^ "h^ -« P-«ent scream 14. The servants hear this, and enter the room 10 I hey give the poor ass blows with a stick. 16. People do not always give blows to those who deserve them ^ LESSON XXXIL 130. The Relative Pronouns. qui [ki], who, which, that, whom (after a preposition). que [ka], whom, which, that. dont [do], whose, of whom, of which. oil [u], in which, into which, at which, to which, etc. lequel [lakel], m. s., lesquels [lekel], m. pi. ) laquelle [lakel], f. s., lesquelles [lekelj, f. pl./^^'^' "^^o™* which, that. quoi [kwa], what, which. ^ 131. Agreement. A relative pronoun, whether variable or invariable in form, is of the gender, number and person of Its antecedent : Moi qui ^tais (vous qui ^tiez) 1^. I who was (you who were) there. Le« lettres que j'ai apportees. The letters which I have brought. 132. Use of the Relative. 1. The relative of most i J ■J ^ I i c J J ( J I ellu I §133] LESSON XXXII. 87 i I 5^ I V it. i % Qui = * whom ' (of persons only) is also used after a preposition : L'oncle chez qui je demeurais. The uncle with whom I lived. 3. The force of de + a relative is generally expressed by dont ; Lea amis dont nous parlions. The fr'ends of whom we spoke. L^^glise dont je vois la tour. The church whose tower I see. 4. Oi = dans (or some other preposition of position) + a relative : La ville ou (or dans laquelle) je The city in which I live, demeure. 5. Lequel is often used instead of qui (que, etc.), to avoid ^ Liunbiguity^and must be used of things after a preposition vU.>f ^^Les soeurs d^e ncs amis, lesquelles The sisters of our friends, who (e.&, sont Chez nous k present. t|ie sisters) are with us now. 6. Quoi stands after a preposition, rarely .otherwise : Voilk de quoi je parlais. That is what I was speaking of. 7. The absolute *what,' 'whicb,' 'that which' as subject is ce qui, and, as object or predicate, ce que; 'of what,' 'that of which,' is ce dont : Je vois ce qui vous amuse. Je sais ce que je sais. Vous savez ce que je suis. Ce dont j'ai besoin. 8. * He who,' « the one who,' etc. = celui qui : J'aime ceux qui m'aiment. I Jove those who love me. Ma montre est plus jolie que My watch is prettier than the one celle que vous avez. you have. 9. The relative pronoun, often omitted in English, is never omitted in French : , Le tableau que j'ai vu hier. The picture I saw yesterday. 133- Present Indicative of connaitre, * to know,' * be acc^uainted with,' etc. (irreg.). <&'<.(^. • 1 '< -*s i| T 1 '•^^ 1 I see what amuses you. I know wha* I know. You know what I am. That which I need. 8S [§133 ^ ■ S LESSON XXX ir. I know, etc. je connais [39 kone]. nous connaissons [nu koneso]. tu connais [ty kone]. vous connaissez [vu konese], il connait [il konej. ilg connaissent [il koneis]. * EXERCISE XXXII. A. C'esfc ma premiere promenade k Paris. Un Parisien de % mes amis m accompagne. Nous voila k la place de la Con- ^ corde.--Quelle est cette eglise dont on voit la fa9ade au bout ?V de cette rue ?--C est I^glise de la Madeleine dont je vous a deja parl^ ce matin. ^e.t une tres belle Eglise. Je vous y wTTi"^'' «eces jours pour agister k la messe^-Quel est cefc autre ^.hhce de I'autre cotd di^^euve ?-C'est le palais de la Chambre des deputes. C'est 14 que se font les lois du pays Je connais un depute qui m'a donn^ des billets d'entree pou; demain Voulez-vous m'y accompagner ?-Avec plaisir. Et quel est ce grand monument tout pres de nousf-C'est un ob^ isque ^gyptien qu'on a apportd en France sous Louis- • TT. ^^^'f^-^s ai^ssi ces huit statues situdes 4 diff^rents points ^utourde la Place? Ce sont des statues qui reprd- sentent les villes les plus importantes de la Prance. Kegardez surtout celle de Strasbourg qui est couverte de couronnes C est une societe patriotique qui a fait cela pour marquer la douleur que lui a causee la perte de cette ville./ Reglrdons encore ce qui se trouve autour de nous. A droite i!y a les fameux Champs-^lys^es avec leurs belles promenades. Cette avenue splendide qui les traverse m^ne au bois de Boulo£;-ae en passant par I'Arc de Triomphe qu'on voit 14-bas k I'horizon A gauche nous ^^oyons les jardins des Tuileries, et plus loin le Louvre, ancien palais des rois de France. C'est Ik que nous irons visiter les grandes galeries de peintures. Tout ce qu'on voit d'lci est interessant. ^ nrfioifn "in "^^ ^^'% ^?"«^!;ig ^y supplying suitable relative pronoun forms: 1. La ville. . .nous habitons. 2. La ville .^.nousdemeurons. 3. L'oncle ehez. . .je demeurais. 4. Les lTh!«''«'^r'''^P'''^'!^ii^--^'i^^^^^^ ^«it !«• facade la-bas 6. Les s^^r^^tp^ ^hez nous k pr Jent. 7. Les dames . .JTi donne les^urs. 8. Les chiens i'ai donn^ la viande. 9. Vous savez ce . . . il a perdu. 10. Je voi« ce.vous amuse. 11. Nous aimons ceux...nous aiment i^. <^e. . .j ai besoin. ^•133] LESSON xxxn. 89 C, (Oral.) 1. Est-ce la premiere promenade que vous faitesi Paris ? 2. Quel est I'ami qui vous accompagne ] 3. L'arai que vous accompagnez connait-il la ville 1 4. Quel est I'emiroit ou vous commencez votre promenade 1 5. L't^glise dont on voit la £a9ade, quelle est-elle? 6. Est-ce I'^glise dont vous m'avez parl^ oe matin ? 7. Et cet autre Edifice dont on voit la faQade de i autre c6t^ du flcuve, quel est-il ? 8. Vous dites que vous avez des billets d'entree ; qui vous les a donnds? 9. Est-ce le d^put^ chez qui vous ^tiez hier soir ? 10. Ou est cet ob^lisque dgyptien dont vous m'avez parl^'! 11. Est-ce le grand monument prfes duquel on voit tant de monde ? 12. Que repr^sentent ces statues-la 1 1 3. Celle sur laquelle on voit tant de couronnes, la connaissez-vous ? 14. Voulez-vous me dire ce qu'elle repr^- sente? 15. Cet espace qui se trouve k droite, est-ce un jardin public'? 16. Cette avenue par laquelle on voit passer les voi- tures, ou m^ne-t-elle '? 17. Quels sont les jardins qui sont k gauche 1 18. Quel est cet Edifice dont on voit d'ici les fenetres ? 19. M'avez-vous montr^ tout cequ' *^t interessant? Etc., etc. D. 1. Paris is a city of which we have often spoken. 2. To-day I take my first walk in Paris. 3. The gentleman who accompanies me knows the city well. 4. He shows me every- thing that is interesting. 5. The point at which we begin our walk is the "place de la Concorde."/ 6. From this square we see the church of the Madeleine, whose fagade we admire. 7. We see also the "chambre des Deputes," where the laws of the country are made. 8. A member of parliament (depute), at whose house we were yesterday, has given us tickets of admission. 9. Naar the middle of the square there is an obelisk which was brought to France in the time of {sous) Louis-Philippe/'' 10. Statues which represent the most im- portant cities of France nre situated around the square. 11. What is that statue on which I see so many wreaths'? 12. It is a statue which represents a city the loss of which caused much sorrow to France. 13. Let us look again at what is around us. 1 4. Where does that avenue lead, through which we see the carriages passing? 15. And what public gardens are those on our left, to which we are going (se rendre)1 16. They (cg) are the gardens of the Tuileries. 1 7. Farther off you see the Louvre, in which lived (vitrre) the kings of France. 18. All that you have shown me is very interesting. 19. I thank you very much. MMte 90 ! i 'I LESSON XXXIII. LESSON XXXIII. The Interrogative Pronouns. [§§1&4-13,^ 134. qui?[ki], who?, whom? que ? [ka], what ? quoi ? [kwa], what ? laquelle ? [lakel], f. s. , lesquelles ? [lekel], f. pi. / what one(s) ? 135. Use of Interrogatives. 1. Qui? = 'wbo?,"whom?» IS used of persons: ' Qui Sonne? Qui sont-elles ? Who is ringing ? Who are they? Dites-moi qui sonne. Tell mo who is ringing. Qm a-t-il frappd ? ^hom has he struck ? De qui parlez- vous ? Qf whom are you .peaking ? 2. ' Whose V denoting ownership simply = a qui ?, otherwise generally de qui ?, but never dont : Aquiestcelivre? Whose book is this ? De qui gtes-vous (le) fils ? Whose son are you ? 3. Que? = 'what?,' stands always as the object or the predicate of a verb : Que vous a-t-il dit ? Qu'est-ce? What did he tell you? What is it? 4. «What?' as subject is usually qu'est-ce qui?, and • what m indirect question is usually ce qui (ce que, etc.) : Qu'est-ce qui vous a int^ress(5 ? What has interested you ^ Je ne sais pas ce qui m'a frapp^. I do not know what strv x me Dites-moi ce que vous d^sirez. Tell me what you desire. 5. Quoi ? = ' what V stands regularly after a preposition, or absolutely, the verb being understood : A quoi pensez-vous ? What are you thinking of ? Je cherche quelque chose. -Quoi? I am looking for something. -What ? 6. Lequel? (laquelle?, etc.) = ' which?,' 'which or what one ?,' agrees in gender with the noun referred to. Both parts of lequel (le and quel) are inflected, and the usual contrac- tions with de and a (cf. §§ 35, 46) take place : Laquelle des dames est Ihl Which of the ladies is there ' Auquel des horames parle-t-il ? To which of the men does he speak ? §135] LESSON XXXIII. 91 EXERCISE XXXIII. A. Mon ami et moi continuons aujourd'hui notre promenade. Nous allons voir d'autres choses int^ressante.s. Je demande k mon ami : " Qu'est-ce que c'est que Tile de la Cit^ dont vous meparlez?" — L'ile de la Cit^ est une ile de la Seine oil on trouve plusieurs des grands Edifices publics de Paris. Mais vous allez voir tout de suite. Nous voici au Pont-Neuf par lequel on entre dans la Cit^y-Quel est ce grand edifice dont nous approchons ? — C'est le Palais de Justice. — Qu'est-ce que c'est que le Palais de Justice? — C'est I'endroit ou les juges r^glent les diif(^rends qui existent entre les particuliers. — Quelle est cette partie de I'edifice qui ressemble a une ^glise? — C'est, en effet, une ^glise qui s'appelle la Sainte-Chapelle. — Par qui a-t-elle ^t^ bdtie ? — Elle a ^t^ ba,tie par un roi de France qui . s'appelait Saint-Louis, fils de la c^l^bre Blanche de Castille^ Mais continuons notre chemin. En avan9ant nous voyons I'Hdtel-Dieu. — Qu'est-ce que c'esb que I'lidtel-Dieu?— C'est un hdpital. — Et en face de nous quelle est cette grande ^glise? — C'est I'dglise de Notre-Dame dont nous avons d^j4 tant parl^. — Oh oui, jo me rappelle. Je ne sais pas k quoi je pensais. Que je suis b^te ! Laquelle est la plus ancienne, I'dglise de Notre- Dame ou la Madeleine? — Notre-Dame est beaucoup plus ancienne : ello est parmi les plus anoiennes ^glises de TEurope. C'est une belle facade ; admirons-la un peu. Regardez les trois portails qui sont ornes de statues. — Qu'est-ce que c'est que cette rang^e de statues au-dessus des portails ? — C'est ce qu'on appelle la galerie des rois. — Qu'est-ce que cela signifie? — On dit que les vingt-huit statues repr^sentent des rois de France. Au-dessus do la galerie 11 y a une belle rosace, plus haut, une deuxi^rae galerie ou il n'y a pas de statues, et encore plus haut, les deux grandes tours ou se trouvent les cloches. JB. Write in French one example of the correct use of each of the following interrogative forms and locutions: 1. Que? 2. Est-ce que? 3. Qu'est-ce que? 4. Quel? 5. Quelle? 6. Quels ? 7. Quelles ? 8. Qui ? ' 9. Qu'est-ce que c'est que ? 10. Quoi? 11. Lequel? 12. Laquelle? 13. Lesquels? 14. Lesquelles. 15. A qui? 16. Dequi? C. (Oral.) 1. Avec qui vous promenez-vous aujourd'hui? 2. Qu'est-ce que vous allez voir? 3. Qu'est-ce que g'est que r -J .*i f''1 ■4 ' n lit! 92 LESSON XXXIV. [§136 Tile de la Cit^? 4. Ou est-ce qu'elle est situ^e? 5. Quels Edifices s'y trouvenfc? 6 Comment s'appelle ce pont-l^.? 7. Qu'est-ce que c'est que ce grand palais ? 8. J 'en vois deux, lequel voulez-vous dire? 9. Voulez-vous me dire par qui la Sainte-Chapelle a ^t^ batie? 10. Savez-vous de qui il ^tait le fils? 1 1. Savez-vous ce que c'est que I'Hotel-Dieu? 12. Quelle est la plus ancienne de ces deux dglises, Notre-Dame ou la Madeleine? 13. Quel est I'autre Edifice que vous voulez visiter maintenant? 14, Auquel voulez-vous aHer? 15. Ou sont ces fameux portails dont vous parliez? 16. Qu'y a-t-il au-dessus des portails? 17. Qu'est-ce que c'est que la galerie des rois? 18. Voulez-vous me dire ce qu'il y a dans cette tour-la? 19. Qu'est-ce qui vous a intdressd le plus dans cet edifice? Etc., etc. D. 1. What interesting things are you going to see to-day? 2. What is the ile de la Cit^ % 3. What is the name of the bridge by which one enters it {y) ? 4. Which of those build- ings is the Pa'ais de Justice? 5. What is the Palais de Justice? 6. What is a judge ]^ 7. A judge is a man who settles disputes. 8. There is a part of the building which resembles a church ; what is it % 9. Will you tell me by whom the Sainte-Chapelle was built ?/lO. Which of those buildings is the H6tel-Dieu? 11. Do you know what the H6tel-Dieu is? 12. What is the name of that large church in front of us? 13. Which is the more ancient of those two churches, Notre- Dame or la Madeleine ? 14. Which of these two churches do you admire the most? 15. In which do you attend mass? 16. What is it that people call ''la galerie des rois"? 17. What is there in the two high towers on the right hand and on the left? 18. What has interested you most in Notre-Dame ? LESSON XXXIV. 136. Indefinite Pronouns. The indefinite pronouns of most frequent occurrence are : — 1. On [0], 'one,' 'someone,' 'we,' 'you,' 'they,' 'people,' etc. (cf. §48). 2. Quelqu'un [kelk oe], m. , quelqu'une [kelk yn], f., 'somebody,' 'some one,' 'any one,' plural quelques-uns [kelkoz ce], m., quelques-unes [kelkoz yn], f., ' some,' ' some people,' ' any,' ' a few ' : §137] LESSON XXXIV. M II y a quelqu'un 6, la porte. There is somebody at the door. J'ai vu quelques-unes de vos amies. I have seen some of your friends. Avez-vous des cerises, madamu ? Have you any cherries, madam ? J'en ai quelques-unes. I have a few. 3. Quelque chose [kelko Jo:s], m., 'something,' 'anything' : Quelque chose est tomb6. Something has fallen. J'ai quelque chose de bon. I have something good. 4. Along with ne + a verb, or when alone, a verb being understood, personne [psrson], m., means 'nobody, 'not anybody,' 'no one,' and rien [rjf], ra., 'nothing,' ' not anything ' : Je n'ai parl^ k personne. I did not speak to anybody. Vous n'avez rien apporte. You have brought nothing. II n'a rien dit de mauvais. Ho said nothing bad. Qu'a-t-il dit ?— Rien. What did he say ?— Nothing. Personne ici ! Nobody here ! 137* Certain forms serve both .as adjectives and as pronouns. Those of most frequent occurrence are : — 1. Autre [otf], 'other' (adjective); un autre, 'another,' I'autre, ' the other' (pronoun) : Una autre fois ; d'autres causes. Another time ; other causes. Les autres iront aussi. The others will go too. 2. Distinguish un autre from encore un : Une autre plume. Another (a different) pen. Encore une plume. Another (an additional) pen. 3. From autre are formed various locutions : L'une et I'autre occasion. Both occasions. Les uns et les autres partent. All are going away. Donnez-le k I'un ou k Tautre. Give it to either. Ce n'est ni pour les uns ni pour It is for none of them. les autres. Elles se flattent les unes les autres. They flatter each other, lis ont peur les uns des autres. They are afraid of one another. 4. When used with ne + a verb, or when alone, the verb being under- stood, aucun [okce], nul [nyl], pas un [paz ce], as adjectives = ' no,' ' not one,' ' not any,' and as pronouns = ' none,' ' no one,' ' not one' : Aucun auteur ne dit cela. No author says that. A-t-on de I'espoir ? — Aucun. Have they any hope ? — None. f' i/^ \P m M LESSON XXXIV. f! U [§137 r -f '^•^ f^'='3='«"«h,' un tel = 'such a.' 'Such' as an advorb is si [81] or tenement [telmoj : Such are my griefs. Who tells Hucli a story? Such a beautiful house. Such a cruel man. J**^ Telles sont mea douleurs, Qui raconte une telle histoire ? Une si belle maison. Un horn me tellement cruel. 6. Tout [tu] m., toute [tut], f.. tous [tu (as adj.), tus (as pron.)], m. pl.. toutes [tut], f. pL, = 'all,' 'every.' 'any.' ' whole,' etc.: Tous les hommes. All (the) men. Toute ma vie. All my (my whole) life. Tous (toutes) sont arriv^(e)s. All have come. 7. Mfime [meim], before a noun or as a pronoun = ' same ' ; m6me following the noun or pronoun qualified = ' self,' 'very,' 'even' and agrees, but has no article ; as adverb mSme = ' even ' • La tnSme chose, Ce sont les memes. ' Dieu est la bont^ mSrne. Les enfants memes le savent. Nous-mfiraes ; elles-mdmes. lis nous ont m6me battus. The same thing. They are the same. God is goodness itself. The very children know it. We ourselves ; they themselves. They even beat us. EXERCISE XXXIV. A. A Paris on peut s'amuser facilement. On v trouve des amusements pour tout le monde. On y trouve des theatres, des cirques, des spectacles de toute esp^ce. Hier nous avons fn i "^f 'P^?*^^'^^^^ q"^ nous a amuses beaucoup. Un monsieur dltw ni?': ""^'', *''"' ^^' ^"^""^^ ^^^i^n* des chats et des chiens. C dtait quelque chose de magnifique. On n'a jamais rien vu de plus amusant ! Personne n'avait jamais vu des animaux si intelligonts ! II y avait des chiens noirs et des chiens blancs. II y en avait des grands et des petits. II y en avait de toutes les races : des chiens danois, des chiens de berger, des terre-neuve, des levriers et des caniches/ Les grands chiens portaient les petits sur le dos. Quelques-uns ^taient habilles en homme et d'autres en femme : ils faisaient beaucoup detours comiques. H yen avait qui fumaient la pipe II y en avait d autres qui causaient ensemble ccmme des personnes Dautres promenaient des voitures d'enfant corame des bonnes guelques-uns se promenaient a bicyclettr, quelques-uns mar- LESSON XXXIV. 95 • • §137] chaient sur les pattes de derrifere, et un, plus fort- que les autres, marchait sur les pattes de devant. 11 y en avait d'autres qui se battaient k coups de poing. II y en avait meme qui tiraient des coups de pistolet. lis couraient, ils sautaient, et pas un ne semblait s ennuyer. Les personnes qui assistaient au spectacle ne sennuyaient pas non plus. On ria t, on applaud issait, on battait des mams, et personne n'a quitt^ la salle en mauvaise humeur. B. Write in French one example for the use of each of the following in a sentence : 1. On. 2. Quelque chose. 3. Quel- que chose de. 4. Quelqu'un. 5. Quelques-unes. 6 Ne personne. 7. Ne . . . rien. 8. Autre (adj.). 9. L'une I'autre." 10. Les uns aux autres. 11. Pas une (adj.). 12. Un tel. 13. Toutes (adj.). U. Tous (pron.). 15. M^me (-self). 16. M6me( = even). ^ ' C\ (Oral.) 1. Est-ce qu'on s'amuse faoilement k Paris? .ijZ. des amusements pour tous? 3. Quelques-uns des theatres sont-ils trfes cdlfebres ? 4. Avez-vous ^t^ k quelque spectacle hier? 5. Etait-ce quelque chose d'amusant? 6 N'avez- vous jamais rien vu de plus amusant? 7. Avez-vous jamais vu un tel spectacle ? 8. A-t-on vu des aniraaux si intelligents ? 9. guelles espfeces de chiens y avait-il? 10. Qu'est-ce que les uns fftisaient pendant que les autres fumaient la pipe ? 11. Avez-vous dit que les uns parlaient aux autres ? 12 Com- ment se battaient-ils ? 13. Jouaient-ils tous en mgme temps ? 14. Lst-ce que tous les chiens semblaient contents? 15 Est- ce que les personnes qui y assistaiont s'amusaient 'bien ? lb. ^t personne n'a quitt^ la salle avant la fin, n'est^ce pas? 17. Ces chiens sont-ils les memes que nous avons vus I'ann^e passde? 18 Est-ce que les enfants iront les voir encore une tois? 19. Irez-vous vous-meme? 20. Irez-vous meme s'il fait mauvais temps ? Etc., etc. o ^u^' '^i^®^® ^""^ amusements in Paris for all sorts of people 2. Ihere is something new every day. 3. One can find amusement m the promenades and public gardens for nothing 4. You can also visit the picture galleries for nothing.-.^. Some a o **iejitres of Paris are among the best in the world b feome of Its promenades are very celebrated, for example, the Champs-Elysdes. 7. Yesterday evening I was at a very f jnusing show. 8. Two of my cousins (f.), who are at our (( ! ^' !5 V. !it M tESSON XXXV. [§138 loThrrnlf' ""• "• '',°"' ™J"y«' «'«ni»elves very much cafq 19 T^i ''"*'"'^*^«> »" wiiich the actors were docs md ;^.c. «JXX/i:;V' fj -e.,.. shepherd-,"!^'! dressed like raen^ and women 14 ^ °' "" "^^S' ""^ their hind feet Ifi OM ^°™* ""^ ""'king on Oil uiiiu leec. JO. Utnors were smokinir nir^q ia a j show. 18. We l;ere:^/e^tu^:X^t'\tT'' "' ^ 138. 1. un, une 2. deux 3. trois 4. quatre 5. cinq 6. six 7. sopt 8. huit 9. neuf 10. dix 11. onze 12. douze 13. treize 14. quatorze 15. quinze 16. seize 17. dix-sept 18. dix-huit 19. dix-neuf 20. vingt [<*, yn). [d0]. [trwa]. [katr]. [sfik]. [sis]. [set]. [Hit]. [iioef]. [dia]. [5:z]. [du!z]. [trejz]. [katorz]. [k?!z], [seiz]. [dis sst]. [diz qit]. [diz noef], [ve]. LESSON XXXV. Cardinal Numerals. 21. vingt et un 22. vingt-deux 30. trente 31. trente et un 40. quarante 60. cinquante 60. floixante 70. soixante-dix [v?t e «]. [vfnd d0j. [trait]. [traitedfe], [karSit]. [8?ka!t]. [swasait]. "~ ""..^^-wiA [awasaitdis]. 71. soixanto et onze [swasdjt eSizJ. 80. quatre-vingts [katr v?]. 81. quatre-vingt-uii [kair \? <36]. 90. quatre-vingt dix [katr vf dis]. 91. quatre-vingt-onze [katr v? oiz]. 100. cent [sa]. 101. cent un [sa &]. 200. deux cents [d0 sa]. 201. deux cent un [dj^ sa &]. 1000. niille TOOL milleun 2000. deuxmille [mil], [mil &]. [dfi mil]. i§139-142] LE3S0N XXXV. 97 Nouns of Ndmber: 1,000,000 = un milH/ - [«T. railj5]; 2,000,000 = deux millions [d0 miljS] ; 1,00(»,000,0(M) = un milliard [(t> railja:r]. Oh^erve: 1. Tho hyphen uiiitus togothor compound numerals under l<)0. except where et ooours. 2. Et Rtands regularly in 21, 31, 41, 61, dl, id optional in 70, omitted it> HI, and elsewhere. Notes on Pronunciation : 1. Tho final consonant of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 17, 18, 19, is silent before initial consonant or h aspirate of a word multiplied by them, not elsewhere: 'Cinq livred' [s? liivrl, hue Mo cinq raai' [la s2:k me]. 2. No elision or liaison occurs before huit, onze: Le huit [la qit] ; les huit livres [lo \\\ llivr]; lo onze [lo 3:z]; les onze francs fie oiz frd]. 3. Tho t is sounded in vingft in 21, 23, 24, 25, 26. 27, 28, 29, becomes d in 22, is silent from 81 to 99, is silent in cent un, deux cent un, otc. 139. Million and milliard require de before the ooject enumerated ; cent = 'a (or one) hundred '; mille = * a (or one) thousand': II a pay6 un million de francs. Ceci vaut cent francs. He has paid tx million (of) francs. This is worth a hundred francs. 140. Quatre-vingt and the multiples of cent take -s only when iraikiediately preceding a noun, or whon tliey theraselves are used as nounr, oi number : Quatre-vingts francs. Eighty francs. Trois cents francs. Tiiree hundred francs. Les cinq cents. The five hundreds. But : Trois cent un francs ; quatre-vingt-un francs, etc. Obt. : They are not nouns of number in dates, or when used as ordinaly^ 141. Multiplicatives. 'Once' = une fois, 'twice' = deux fois, * three times ' = trois fois, etc. : Dix fois dix font cent. Tcj) times ten make a hundred. 142. Ordinal Numerals. They are formed from 'third' upwards by adding -i^me to the corresponduig cardinal, final e being dropped ; cinq adds u, and neuf changes f to v before -i^me : 7 1 • . # H . 1 ! J dd LESSON XXXV. [§143 Ist premier [promje], \deuxi6ine [d0zjem]. 3rd troisifeme [trwazjem]. 4th quatri^rne jTcatriem]. 6th ciiuiui^me [sfkjem], 6th sixi^me [aizjem]. 7th septi6nie 8th huiti^me 9th neuvi^me 10th dixifeme 11th onzi^mt [setjem]. [ilitjem]. [noevjem]. [dizjem]. Lozjcm]. 21st vingt et uni^me [vet e ynjem]. 22nd vingt-deuxi6nie [vgiid d0zjem]. 143. Fractions. The numerator is expressed by a cardi- nal, the denominator by an ordinal, as in English. ' Half ' = moitid, f. (as noun), and demi (as adjective) ; ^ = un quart, ^ = un tiers. Before a noun, demi is invariable, and joined by a hyphen, but agrees else-vhere. Use la moitid (not demi) where 'the half of is, or may be, used in English : Un huitifeme ; les trois dixi^mes. One-eighth ; the three tenths. La moiti^ de I'ann^e. ' — rtJne heuy^ ejlfeinift./ Les trois quarts de cette somme. (The) half (of) the year. An hour and a half. Half an hour. Three-fourths of that sum. EXERCISE XXXV. A. En France on indique la valeur des objets par francs et centimf;s. Le franc vaut k peu pres vingt "cents" de la monnaie canadienne ou am^ricaine. Le centime est la centieme pa-rtie du franc. On compte souvent aussi par sous pour les petites sommes. Un sou, aussi bien qu'un " cent " am^ricain vaut cinq centimes./ Pour trouver la valeur, <^n monnaie canadienne, d'une sdmme quelconque, exprime'e en francs, on la divise par cinq. Par exeraple, une somme de sept francs quarante centimes (7 fr. 40) vaut un dollar et quarante-huit "cents" de notre monnaie. Au contraire, pour trouver la valeur en francs d'une somme quelconque, exprim^e en dollars on la multiplie par cinq. Ainsi $7.45 vaut, en monnaie irangaise, trente-sept francs vingt-cinq centimes (37 fr. 25). £. (Oral.) 1. Compteyen fran9ais jusqu'^ dix ; de dix k ymgt; de vmgt k trent^/2. Nommez les nombres 40, 4l, 50, ?n^ ?Xi^^'.ni'/A' ^^' '' ^^' ^^' ^^' 8^' ^^7, 90, 91, 92 93 100, 101. 102/11S..J71. 17Q 900 9on inno 1aV»i tk nnV 2,000,000, '^-^^^--'^ ~ --':-' — - -^^' ^--^ ->-00, •f h h 2l# 3. Deux fois un font deux ; deux fois [§143 §144] LESSON XXXVl. 9d deux font quatre, etc. . .continuez jusqu'4 deux fois dou2:e. 4. Irois fois un font trois, etc. 5. Combien font 2 fois 10:7 tois 9; 9 fois 9; 11 fois 11?, etc. 6. Donnez les nombres ordi- naux jusqu'^ vingtihne. ^ 7. Nommez les ordinaux 2P, 5P 71«, 89«, 101% 200«, 200^ 8. Comment indique-t-on la valeur des objets en France f 9. Combien vaut le franc en notre monnaie? 10. Combien de centimes y a-t-il en un franc? 11. Quelle partie du franc le centime est-il? 12. Combien vaut le sou? 13. Quelle est la valeur de cent francs en monnaie canadienne? 14. Quelle est la valeur de cent dollars en monnaie fran9aise? Etc., etc. C. Give in dollars and cents the equivalents of : 1. Cinq centimes. 2. Dix c^tjmes. 3. Quinze centim^^. 4. Vingt centimes.^ A, Vingt-cinq centimes. 6. Cinauante centimes. 7. boixanlJe-quinzece^times. 8. Quatre-Viii^-quinze centimes. .^- \^ f^^'^c diV^ ^centimes). 10. Un franc vingt-cinq. ^ 5- X ^^\o' VJ" ^'^'^^ soixante-quinze. 12. Un franc^cinquante. 3 /C^13. Dix sous "" ^"* ^v,- ^. ..^c^^ , 1^ , ^ , ^^- ^^^^^m^^^^' CinquM^e^sous. 16. il^,OoKjent francs. l7o . Cent cinotiant.ft fmnr^s 18. Deux cents o \ ^^Cent ciriqtiante francs Mille francs. cents, cents, cents., dollar. 21. Deux quivalents . 4. Ten yo i^,. ^VJ francs. 19. Cin^'c^ts francs. 20, millions de francs. ^ ^ j^^. ^i^O, ot. 1. Ond^cee:^^2. Five^cents. ,^a.ignu cents. *. len d-c;^,^ 5. Fifteen cents. 6. Eighteeh c^ht^: ' 7. Twenty ^^ 8. TweniEy-tive cents. 9. Thirty cents. 10. Fifty *" 11. Seventy-five cents. 12. Ninety cents. 13. One 14. One dollar and twenty-five cents. 15. One dollar and fifty cents. 16. One dollar and seventy-five cents 17 Two dollars. 18. Ten dollars. 19. Fifty dollars. 20. A hundred dollars. 21. A thousand dollars. LESSON XXXVL 144. Dates, Titles, etc. 1. The form mil is used in dates of the Christian era, from 1001 to 1099; from 1100 onward dates are often expressed by hundreds, as so fre- quently in English : (En) I'an mil six. (Tn) the j^ear 1006, En mil neuf cent neut In nineteen hundred and mne. En dix-ni'iuf cent neuf. In 1909. J 100 LESSON XXXVI. [§144 ^ 2. Days of the month and numerical titles of rulers are indicated by cardinals, except 'first' =. premier: llr^.7^1 "''''' ^^^'^''P'^^^^^' The first of May. Charles the First.' Pans, le deux mai. Parfs. the 2nd of May. Louis quatorze (XIV). Louis XIV. 3. Observe the following date idioms: Quel jour du mois est-ce aujour- What day of the month is this ? a hui ? Quel jour du mois soraraes-nous aujourd hui ? Quel quanti^me du mois est-ce ■1.1 . " •• II aujourd'hui ? C'est aujourd'hui le quinze. To-day is the fifteenth. Ce sera demain le seize. To-morrow will be the sixteenth. Le SIX Janvier , Qn the sixth of Unuary. Ks sont arrives lundi. They came on Monday. - D aujourd'hui en huit. A week from to-day (future). II y a qumze jours. a fortnight ago. 4. The names of the months may be conveniently learned trom the following rhyme : • Trente jours ont septembre, Avril, juin, novembre ; Trente et un out mars et mai, Aodt, octobre, puis juillet, Et d^cembre et Janvier ; De vingt-huit est f^vrier. 5. Observe the following idioms referring to age: Quel age avoz-vous ? How old are you ' J'aivingtans I am twenty (years old). LTne fiUe agee de six ans. A girl six years old (or of age). A 1 age de vingt-cinq ana. At the age of twenty-five (years). EXERCISE XXXVI. A. Dans tous les pays il y a des jours de fete, o^ on ne J. »»-^v^, A'^'J J1JU.I O 1 sont : les dimanches. Ir innr rio i' A « nes on so donne des etren- le lundi de Paques, qui tombe entre le 21 mars et le §144] LESSON XXXVI. 101 26 avril ; I'Ascension, qui tombe qnarante jours aprfes Piques ; le lundi de la Pentec6te, qu'on celebre cinquante jours apr^s Paques en memoire de la descente du Saint-Esprit sur les apdtres/ la Fete Nationale, qu'on c^lfebre le 14 juillet en mdmoiro de la destruction de la Bastille (le 14 juillet, 1789) ; I'Assomption, qu'on c^lfebre le 15 aout en memoire de I'ascension de la sainte Vierge ; la Toussaint, la fete de tous les saints, qui tombe le P' novembre; et le jour de Noel, le 25 d^cembre, en memoire de la naissance de Jesus-Christ. II y a beaucoup d'autres fetes religieuses, comme par exemple le vendredi saint et la Fete-Dieu. II y a aussi, en outre, plusieurs fetes plut6t populaires que religieuses, quoiqu'ayant une origine religieuse, comme le jour des Rois et le mardi gras. B. Parmi les rois de France les plus c^lfebres se trouvent ceux-ci: Fran9ois 1% n^ le 12 septembre, 1494. II a com- mence k rdgner en 1515, a I'Sge de vingt ans. II est mort le 31 mars, 1547. Louis XIV, n^ le 5 septembre, IGSS/Lors- qu'iln'avait que cinq ans il a succ^d^ a son pfere le 14 mai, 1643. Apr^s un long rfegne de soixante-douze ans, il est mort le P' septembre, 1715. Louis XVI, n4 le 23 aout, 1754, a succ^d^ a son grand-p^re, Louis XV, le 10 mai, 1774, k I'age de vingt ans. C'est sous son regne que la Revolution a 4c\ai4. II a 6t4 decapitd le 21 Janvier, 1793. (7. (Oral.) 1. Re'p^tez-moi les noms des six premiers mois de I'annde. 2. Quels sont les noms des six derniers mois de I'annde ? 3. Quels sont les mois qui n'ont que trente jours ? 4. Le mois de fevrier combien de jours a-t-il 1 5. Quelle est la premiere fete de I'annee en France ? 6. Entre quelles dates le lundi de Paques tombe-t-il 1 7. Com>^i"en de jours y a-t-il entre Paques et I'Ascension ? 8. Quand est-ce qu'on cdlebre la Fete Nationale 1 9. En memoire de quoi la c^l^bre-t-on 1 10. Dites-moi la date de la fete de I'Assomption. 11. Qu'est- ce que c'est que la Toussaint? 12. Quand est-ce qu'elle se celebre ? 13. Qu'est-ce qu'on celebre le jour de Noel 1 14. Quel jour du mois sommes-nous aujourd'hui ? 15. Quel jour du mois serons-nous demain? 16. Quel jour du mois scrons-nous d'au- jourd'hui en huit ? 17. Et lundi de la semain* prochaine quel jour du mois serons-nnns ? IS Oiiol ion.. A(^ U c^wv>„;^^ xj-.:^i tombe-t-il cette ann^e 1 Etc., etc. mM I ft 102 LESSON XXXVI. [§144 n^? K n ,^^^^ J''''' "^^ '°^^' ^ 4- ^"and Francois I- est-il 6 Ouand^^Hl'^^' avait-il quand il a commenci rr^er sa morfc? ^o'-'^;^"^"^,^^'^ ^^^g^^r? 7. Dites-moi la date de samortf «• J^n quelle ann^e Louis XIV est il n^? Q n i hafe thirt/Zf "9" T^ P"'' -^T"' September and November nave thiity days. 2. The months of January, March Mav Ju y August, October and December have thirty-one davs' 3. The month of February has twenty-eight, and^sometlr, ne^nl» / ^ *^ ' occasion de) New-Year's Day in France people (to) g,ve each other gifts (^«r<.««e,,); fi Kaster Monl v fa Is between the 21st of March and tht 26th rf A^u"''T Tie Fete Nationals ,s celebrated on the 14th of July "^8 It is 1789 9 TheTsT'^f 1 "■%<^.-*r"°" "' ''"' Bastille in w » J. ». 1 he 1 5th of August is the date of the Feast of th„ 11. The J5th of December is Christmas Day. F. 1. Francis I Louis XIV., and Louis XVI., are amon" the most celebrated kn"s of France 2 Fi-»„,.i. T u ^ (est n^)on the 12th of Septembe" "494. h: waTrwe^j: years of age when (larsqu,) he began to reign 4 He rdZd thirty-two . .rs, and died (est mSrl) in 1541- 5 Lo^is XIV years' 8 The d %T'"^\ '' «« reigned seventy-tw" mS 9 irtL 7- f'^ "^"f ^ ^?' "■' ''^* °f September, 1 :■ u , "^"'S" °* <™'"' 'f'™'s XVL the French Revo ution broke out. 10. Louis XVL had succeeded Louis XV at^d IS Ho W ^''' °*, ^T"^'^' "°3, he was decapi: tated 1 ^. How old are you } 1 3. How old we e you when Wh^^T ". ^WK°/f ""'I '*• ^'«'* '^ 'he datJ of your birthday? 15. What day of the month is it to-day ? I6Tw„ weeks from to-day (it) will be the 24th May. '»• iwo [§144 §145] LESSON XXXVII. 103 , LESSON XXXVII. I4S The Time of Day. The hours and fractions of hours are indicated as follows : Quelle heure est-il ? II est deux heures. Trois heures et demie. Trois heures (et) un quart. Quatre hemes inoins un quart. Trois heures dix (minutes). Quatre heures moins cinq (minutes) Trois heures oinquante-c?nq. II est midi et derai. II est minuit. A. sept heures du soir. A quelle heure ? A trois heures precises. Vers (les) trois heures. What o'clock is it ? It is two o'clock. Half- past three. A quarter past three. A quarter to four. Ten minutes past three. Five minutes to four. Three fifty-five. It is half- past twelve (noon). It is twelve o'clock (night). At seven o'clock in the evening. At what o'clock ? At three o'clock precisely. About three o'clock. i.e matin a neuf heures un quart j'arrive chez le taiUeur pour trLTe,rV?T"'- C'e^t un i„„piet,e„ serge. uSZ Vflimo ^f V ^iid-peiier. ii na pas de chapeaux que jaime, et j en commande un. Le prix sera de vingt-deux francs. J'entre chez le gantier k onze heures precises. J'achTte mTSri ^" r '' ^t ^^^™"' ^ «-^ heures et dem ^ me voila chez le marchand de chaussures. On prend ma m^decin. Jaifait ma premiere visite il y a huit lours/ll p'oftrinr^T ' ^^ '\ \ '''^'f^^ -- une Ve USde poitnne. II ma fait una ordonnance, et j'irai le voir pour la troisieme fois d'aujourd'hui en Imit. A midi .t ^.JL J?^!!,.! f?r "''• ^T^^'^'^"^ ""^ ^^ ^^^^li- L'addition^est' de de7x francs vingt-cmq, avec cinc^ sou, de pourboire. 1 une heure I ,; 104 LESSON XXX VIL ., h, hS hi-. <> [§145 vingt-cinq me voilh dans les galeries du Louvre. J'y passe une heure et demie. A trois heures un quart j'arrive au Theatre- Fran9ais. Je paie ma place au parterre deux francs cinquante. On joue^e 6\V/ de Corneille. A six heures moins vingt-cinq j'arrive ici. J'etais tr^s fatigu^, et je me repose pendant une heure avant de m'habiller pour diner. A sept heures dix nous nous mettons a table. Nous dinons bien. Nous causons apres. Et voila maintenant huit heures et demie. Je vais ecrire ma lettre. B. 1. Relate the above, beginning at the fifth sentence, using « mon fr^re ' as the subject, and making the necessary changes throughout. 2. Re-write the extract, substituting a time five minutes later for each hour of the day mentioned. j^ C. (Oral.) 1. C'est aujourd'hui le dix, n'est-ce pas? ID. Que] ^- jour de la semaine est-ce? 3. Quelle heure est-il a votre montre? X,' f- Avez-vous et^ en ville aujourd'hui? 5. A quelle heure V etes-\ ous parti ce matin ? 6. Chez qui etes-vous all^ d'abord ? 7. Quand etes-vous arriv^ chez lui? 8. Combien votre complet . en serge coutera-t-il ? 9. A quelle heure vous etes-vous trouv^ V chez le chapelier? 10. Quel sera le prix du chapeau que vous J^" avez command^ ? 11. Etes-vous rest^ une demi-heure chez le ^ gantier? 12. Oil ^tiez-vous 4 onze heures et demie precises? ^^ 13. Quand vos souliers seront ils prets? 14. A quelle heure •^^ votre medecin se trouve-t-il chez lui? 15. Quand etes-vous all^ le voir I'autre fois? 16. X. quelle heure avez-vous dejeun^? 17. Combien avez-vous paye? 18. A quelle heure etes-vous arrivd au LouMre? 19. A quelle heure avez-vous din^ ce soir ? 20. Quelle heure est-il a present ? Etc., etc. B. 1. My brother has related to me what he did to-day down town. 2. He has told me the precise hour at which he was at the tailor's, the hatter's, etc. 3. He set out at half- past eight. 4. He arrived at the tailor's at half-past nine. 5. He says that his serge suit fits him well. 6. He was trying on hats at the hatter's at ten minutes after ten. 7. He bought two pairs of gloves at eleven o'clock precisely. 8. Half an hour later he was at the shoemaker's. 9. His shoes will be ready in a week. 10. At five minutes after twelve he visited his doctor for the second time/ 11. He will visit him again a w^fifik frnm frw-rlmr 10 Af KnK «>»c.f f«^«l — U_ i i i •_ . restaurant. 13. His lunch cost him two frauca 9,^4 fifty cea- §§146-148] LESSON XXXVIII. 105 times. 14. At twenty-five minutes past one he went fn iha after seven (the) dinner was ready 20 Al UhaM. fnf. r^'' for him, but not for me. ^ interesting LESSON XXXVIII. 146. Past Definite of cfonner, finir, uendre. I gave, etc. donn ai [done], donn as [dona], donn a [dona], donn 4mes [donam]. donndtes [donat]. donn ^rent [donejr]. I finished, etc. fin is [fini]. fin is [fini]. fin it [fini]. fin imes [finim]. finites [finit]. fin irent [finiir]. I sold, etc. vend is [vadij. vend is [vadi]. vend it [vadi]. vend imes [vadim]. vendites [vadit]. vend irent [vadiir]. 147. Past Definite of auoir, etre. ^^^^'^^0. I was, etc. eus[y]. eftmes[ym]. fus [fy]. fAmes rfvml eus [yl. eilfpq Fvfi f r/i lumes iiymj. eutrvl eutes [yt]. fus [fy]. f^tes [fyt]. eut[y]. eurent[y:r]. fut [fy]. furent [fyj]. used?; y^.^%?^ *^^ ^^'* ^^^"^^^- ^^^ P-^* d«fi-te is Tol T. ; "^ """"'^"^ ''''' *^ ^--^^ -hat happened events) It never denotes, like tl.e imperfect {§ 87), what was happenmg or used to happen, or continued to happen ' Les Romains brul^rent Carthage. The Romans burnt Cartha.e ^n .L.L leJVeu. dJt:; ^r : cr ts^^.::^ ;;;: de Cam, parce que son coeur r^^tait eyes from those of CahrbeZfe h s pas pur. . .Un jour Cam et Abel heart .ns not pure ' 0„e d" ^tatent seuls dans un champ, etCain Cain anrl A b.i .1. JiVJ' i.^^^ ,"/ 36 jeta 9ur Abel, et le tua. and C-J. fou' '^'^ ' TH " "* "^''^' ' '^"** ^"*^ ^»in fell upon Abel, and slew Uim. 1 '!S' ilig I'llJ [§140 106 LESSON XXXVIII. 149- Past Definite oi faire (irreg.;. I did, etc. je fis [39 fi]. nous fimes [nu fim]. tu fis [ty fi]. vous fites [vu fit]. ilfit[ilfi]. il8firent[ilfiir]. EXERCISE XXXVIII. NorB.-Up to this point the past indefinite has been used exclusively in the exeroises to express completed action in post time. It was thought well to give ample practice m the past mdefinite, owing to its almost exclusive use as a past tense in the language of every-day life. Since the past definite, however, is so extensively employed in narration m the literary or elevated style, and since familiarity with its forms is so necessary for the reading of books, this tense will be given prominence in the extracts and exercises which follow. A. Un petit rouge-gorge frappa a notre fenetre. " Ayez piti^ de moi ! Ouvrez-moi, je vous prie ; la neige tombe. la bise souffle, et j'ai bien faim." Nous eumes pitid du petit rouge-gorge, et j'ouvris la fengtre. Le gentil oiseau vola dans la chambre, et ramassa les miettes de pain qui ^taient tombe'es de la table. Bientdt meme 11 becqueta le grain dans la main qu'on lui tendait/ Mais lorsque la neige fut fondue, le printem^s revint et les haies s( couvrirent de feuilles. Nous ouvrimes la fen§tre, et notre petit h6te s'envola dans le bois voisin, ou il batit son nid, et nous entendimes ses joyeuses chansons. L'hiver revint, et le rouge-gorge revint aussi, cette fois avec sa compagne. Les deux petits oiseaux entr^rent avec con- fiance dans la chambre, et nous nous rejouimes beaucoup de les revoir. B. Continue the following : 1. J'eus piti^ de lui, tu eus, etc. 2. J'ouvris la fenetre, tu, etc. 3. Je volai dans la chambre, tu, etc. 4, Je ramassai les miettes de pain, tu, etc. 5. Je me couvris la tete, tu, etc. 6. Je m'envolai dans le boisj tu, etc. 7. Je batis une maison de pierre, tu, etc. 8. J'entendiy des chansons d'oiseau, tu, etc. 9. J'entrai dans la chambre, tu, etc. 10. Je me rdjouis de les revoir, tu, etc. 11. Je fis mon devoir, tu fis ton, etc. 12. Je fus joyeux, tu, etc. (7. (Oral.) 1. De quel oiseau raconte-t-on cette histoire? 2. Ou frappa ce petit rouge-gorge? 3. Qu'est-ce qu'il adit? 4. Est-ce que vous eutes {or avez eu) pitie de lui? 6. Qui \\ d d d d d d §150] LESSON XXXIX. 107 rOuJrpf°''n ' ^- ^S "^"'-^ ^"« fit ^- rouge-gorge? 7. yuest-ce quil ramassa ? 8. Qa'est-ce qu'on luf tendaifc souvent dans la main? 9. Quelle slison arriva enfin 10 ll neige^tait-elled^ji fondue? 11. Qu'es^rque vous m^' /^ ^rot^l ceTu'il I'n', '' Petit.rouge-gorgl o. seLofa" ^7? io. i4u est-ce qu il l)atit dans le bois ? 14. Chantait-il souvenf 8 15^^ Ses chansons etaient-elles joyeuses ou tristeaT 1 6 Enteu dite-vous ses chansons ? 17. Quand le rouge-gorge re vintT ore cette tois i 20. Et les oiseaux que firent-ils ? Etc., etc. f„lK ■ \^^''^ 'f ^^^ ^^''^ ^^ ^ ^^*^*^e robin. 2. The snow was falling the north wind was blowing, and the robin wrhungry ^. lie often knocked at our window 4 Af loof TuJ-f' on the poor bird, and I opened the window 6 Thtte'tt^ ., J ! u ?j ^'''''' """^ ''® P'^ed them up. 7 Mv sixtpp h^wtetveredU = ^^d^ ^ZJ^'r'^^r^ wood. ,3 We Larf hU oy?:l\'„:^,"^ ii" V/te°S returned (revint) with the winter Ts A^^^u ine robm .ompaniedUim Ls ti.e.^ Twe r\ oit^t; t^h Tt" in o the rol' 'TTr'^ ""'r^' ^"^ ^^^ two'^birds flew 3 fll . .^^^^ P^""^^ a second winter with us and flew away again in spring. ' 150. Imperfect (That) I gave, might give, etc. donn asse [donas], donn asses [donas], donn kt [dona], donn assions [donasjo]. donn assiez [donasjoj. donn assent [donasj. LESSON xxxrx. Subjunctive of donner, flnir, uendre. (That) I finished, might (That) I sold, might finish, etc. sell, etc. finisse [finis]. vend isse [vadis]. finisses [finis]. vend isses [vadis] fin it [fini]. vend it [vadi]. fin issions [finisjo]. vend issions [vadisjo] finissiez [n,ii«jej. vend issiez [vadisjel. finissent [finis]. vendissent [vadis]. 108 LESSON XXXIX. m m> ■ill ■■ [§§151-162 (That) I lidd, might have. eu88o [ys]. eusHions [ysjS], ouHHOB [ys]. ouHfiiez [ysje]. eiit fy]. ou88ent \ya]. 151. Imperfect Subjunctive of auoi'r, itre. (That) I was, woro, might be, etc. fuHHo [fys]. fu8sioii8[fyHJ.l]. fusses [fys]. fuasioz [fysje]. fat [fy]. fuaseiit [fysj. 15^ Tense Sequence. Any other tonse tlum the present or future {^XOl) in the governing clause regularly requires the imperfect subjunctive in the governed clause ; so also for com- pound subjunctive tenses, the auxiliary being considered as the verb : Imi'f. Jo d^sirals P. Dek. Jo d^sirai CoNDL. Jo ddsirerais Plupf. J'avais d6gir6 qu'il restAt. ri was desiring him to remain. 1 1 desired him to remain. j I should desire him to remain. LI had desired him to remain. EXERCISE XXXIX. A. L'^ducation d'Henri IV, roi de France, fut dirigie par son grand-p^re Henri d'Albret, roi de Navarre, qui ne voulut pas qu'on elevat le jeune prince avec la d^licatesse qu'on a d'ordinaire pour les gens de cette quality sachant bien que dans un corps inou et tendre n'ha})ite ordinaireraent qu'une ftme molle et faible/ II d^fendit aussi qu'on i'habillat riche- ment, qu'on lui donnat des babioles, et qu'on le flattat, parce que toutes ces choses ^l^vent le cceur des enfants plutcU dans I'orgueil que dans les sentiments de la ginerositd. Mais il ordonna qu'on habiliat et qu'on nourrit son petit-fils comme les autres enfants du pays, et meme qu'il fut accoutum^ k courir et k grimper sur les rochers, pour I'habituer k la fatigue. Note. -The imperfect Bubjunctive is of very limited use in the language of every- day life, being rarely employed except in the literary or elevated style. A knowledge of its forms and their use is, however, necessary for reading purposes. B. (^ontinue the following : 1. Mon pfere ne voulait pas que je partisse hier, que tu partisses, etc. 2. Le maitre ddfendit que je parlasse k Henri, que tu, etc. 3. Notre voisin d^sirait que je lui vendisse des pommes, que tu, etc. 4. Un bon roi d^sirerait que je fusse heureux, que tu, etc. 5. Un tel roi regretterait que j'eusse besoin de rien, que tu, etc. L <»^, §152] LESSON XXXIX. 109 Turn the governing verbs in the extract into the present indicative, and make the necessary changes in the subjunctive forms. C. (Oral.) 1. Qui ^tait le grand-ptre d'llenri IV? 2 Par qui reeducation d'Henri JV fut-elle dirigce? 3. Le jeune prince fut-il tMevd avec d^Iicatesse ou avec seveSrit^ ? 4. Est-ce o- 'on a ordinaireraent beaucoup de dc^Hcatease pour le.s jeunes princes? 5. Le vieux roi voulait-il qu'on ^levftt le prince avec dc^icatesse ? 6. Quelle ane trouve-t-on souvent dans un corps mouettendre? 7. Henri d'Albret ddsirait-ii que son petit- hls eat une telle Ame? 8. Les gens de la cour aiment ils k flatter les jeunes princes ? 9. Le grand-pere aimait-il qu'on flattat ce jeune prince? 10. Permettait-il que les gens d. la cour flattassent son petit-fils? 11. Votre p^ro permettait-il que vous vous habillassiez richement quand vous etiez jeune ? 12. Henri d'Albret ordonna-t-il que son petit-fils eut une nournturo riche? 13. Comment voulut-il qu'on le nourrit? 14. Pourquoi ordonna-t-il que le jeune prince fut accoutum^ k courir et h. grimper? 15. De'sireriez-vous que je fusse ac- coutum^ k courir et k grimper? 16. Pourquoi le ddsireriez- vous? 17. D^sireriez-vous que j'eusse des sentiments de gen^rosit^? Etc., etc. i>. 1. Henry d'Albret was the grandfather of Henry IV. of France. 2. His grandfather directed his education. 3. Here is what the old king said to the people of the court. 4. "I desire my grandson to have a strong mind {dme). 5. Knowing that a weak mind usually dwells in a weak body, I desire his body to be strong. 6. I desire that nobody should flatter him." 7. So you see that the king did not wish the prince to be brought up with delicacy. 8. He did not wish his gra.idson to have a soft and weak mind/ 9. He wished his body to be strong in order that his mind might not be weak. 10. He did not like the people of the court to flatter hira. 11. He forbade them to flattt. him. 12. He did not • permit them even to give him trinkets. 13. He - Hp-ed the prince to be dressed like the other children of ,o mtry. 14. He allowed him to play with ^he other chix, r and to chmb the rocks. 15. He wished him to be fed like the other children too. 16. All this Hp A'xA V>Qr.oi,cn v„> ,„;„u«j u- j -. "-v tvi.ioi_- iit, maiicu. Ills gl'tlilU- son to be a good king. 17. Our parents wish us to be strong and good. 18. They would not wish us to be weak and bad. -/ 110 EXERCISE XL. \ EXERCISE XL. A. Un raatelot, h hard d'un vaiaseau, ayant» eu la maladresse de laisser tomher par-dessus le bord uno thdi^re d'argent, allaS 1 trouver le capitaine et lui dit^: "Peut-on* dire3 d'une chose \ quelle ests perdue", lorsqu'on sait- ou elle e8t»?— Non, niorl "'wT"'^*^ ^® *^*^' ^''"^ n'avezi rien k craindreS pour'votre thdi^re; car je sais^ qu'elle est' au fond de la raer." '«164. »J103. •§164. f,222. •|i9a '1160. 4j^.. ,|210. (The sections Indicated give the forms of the Irregular verbs.) B. Complete the following by conjugating the tense in full repeating also the remainder of the expression along with the verb: 1. II alia trouver le capitaine. 2. II lui dit. 3. Peut- il dire? 4. II sait ou il est. 5. Elle est perdue. 6. Vous n avez rien k craindre. C. (Oral) 1. De quelles personno.q parle-t-on dans cette histoire? 2. Ou etaient ces personnes'< 3. Qu'avait fait le matelot? 4. Qu'est-ce que c'est qu'une thei^re? 5. En quoi dtait cette thdifere? 6. A qui ^tait-elle? 7. Ou ^tait-elle tombee? 8. Savait-on ou elle^tait? 9. j&tait^elle a^lors vrai- ment perdue? 10. Mais quel ^tait I'argument du matelot? Jiitc, etc. D. 1. The sailor was so clumsy as to let the tea-pot fall. 2. It you let a silver tea-pot fall into the sea, it is lost. 3 Go to the captain. 4. I went to the captain. 5. Tell him that the tea-pot is not lost. 6. The captain will say : "My good fellow, did you drop my silver tea-pot into the sea ? » 'v,hm we are on board of a ship we do not let tea-pots fall :- 'he sea. 8. Where is the tea-pot ? 9. I do not know wuext; it is. 10. No one finds tea-pots at the bottom of the sea. K A sailor dropped the captain's silver tea-pot into the sea Ihe captain went to the sailor and said to hi-i : "You let my tea-pot fall into tihi sen, did you not? It is lost." "No no " said the 8ai:v -, I \m)v where it is. It is at the bottim of the sea*" ■ EXERCISE XLL 111 EXERCISE XLI. A. Tin Arabe, <^^ar^ dans lo desert, n'avaifc^ pas mang^' depuis deux jours, et se voyait^ menacd* de raourir* de faim. Ell passant pr6s d'un de ces puits oh les caravanes viennent*' abreuver l«iirs chameaux, il voit^ sur le sable un petit sac de cuir. II le ramasse et le tate. "Allah soit^ b^ni" ! dit-il^; ce sont/ je crois,!^ des dattes ou des noisettes." Plein de cette douce esp^rance, il se h&te d'ouvrir^i le sac ; raais, k la vue de ce qu'il contienti2: " H«^las 1 s'dcrie-t-il douloureuseraent^ ce ne sent 7 que des perles 1" > 8164. ♦9160. M1B4. •8193. »« 9176 *§i6e. •§174. •8168; •» 9 191. ««9177 '{224. • § 178. B. Complete the following, as in the preceding exercise: 1. II n'avait pas mangd 2. II se voyait menac«^. 3. lis viennent. 4. II voit son sac. 5. II le tate. 6. Qu'il soit b^ni ! 7. Je le crois. 8. II se hate d'ouvrir le sac. 9. II s'^cria. Relate the story in the first person singular, thus : " !l^gar^ dans le ddsert, je n'avais pas, etc." C. (Oral.) 1. Ou demeurent les Arabes? 2. Oii est I'Arabie? 3. OCi s'^tait ^gard I'Arabe? 4. Est-ce qu'il y a beaucoup de deserts dans ce pays? 5. Dans quel ^tat se trouvait I'Arabe ? 6. Par ou passait-il ? 7. Qu'eot-ce qu'il a vu? 8. Qu'est-'ie qu'il y avait dans le sac ? 9. :^tait-il content de trouver les ptrles ? 10. Est-ce que les perles ne sont pas des choses pr^cieuses ? 11. Qu'est-ce qu'il espdrait trouver dans lesac? 12. Pourqaoi pr^f^rait-il des noisettes k des penes? 1 3. Lesquelles pr^fdreriez-vous raaintenant ? Etc., etc. D. 1. The Arab has lost his way. 2. If we had not eaten for two days, we should be hungry. 3. We saw* ourselves threatened with starvation. 4. The caravans will come to water their camels at the well. 5. We shall water our camels. 6. If I saw pearls on the sand, I should pick them up. 7. He felt the dates in the bag. 8. If there had been hazel-nuts in ■urrviil/l VinT: »T "^T^ivt lit* T - -'**0> «"• ii- JLJUV 112 'III \'i I > EXERCISE XLIL the bag did not contain nuts, it contained only pearls 10 At the sight of that he exclaimed : "I shall die of hu^g^r." «„f ■ f"" ."^"""H ^'^'^i ^""^^ ^'^ "^^y in the desert. Not havinrr eaten for two days L. saw that he M^ould soon starve As Sf wa passing near a well where the caravans came to water tho ir camels, he saw there on the sand a leathern ba^ vvhich he hoped to find full of dates or hazel-nuts. He pfcked it up, felt It, and opened it. Alas, it contained only pearL I EXERCISE XLII. t^ rri. vz feSSlr'F -r entre .es doigte pour faire' sorMrS it " ' f T'J'' "»* "Sifla »S224. "§154. •§177. •§158. •§202. » § 195. «§16e. »§2ia "§i5a "§223. droits. 4. II s'^cria 5 LT f ^' "^H ^® tenaient courb^sl 6. J^Xetu^xt tTl%?fLr1 S fait pencher leur t^te. 9. lis ne valent rien.^ ^' ^^ Cxive the present indicative in full of- 1 AlK 9 q de^nftf thus'*«Tf ^"^"^^^*"^"^g the past indefinite for the past aennite, thus : Un paysan ... est all^ visiter," etc. C. (Oral.) 1. Qu'est-CG que c'est ou'un navsan ? 9 n.\ ^nai„at coruxir^ epis Uans Jes champs qu'ila out EXERCISE XLTL 113 Se nsit^s ? 7. Tous les dpis se tenaient-ils droits ? 8. Comment les autres se tenaient-ils? 9. Quel c^pis prc^f^rait le petit Auguste? 10 Qu'est-ce qu'il s'est dcrid? 11. Lesquels prd- fte-vous? 12. Pourquoi les prdfdrez-vous ? 13 Lesquels des dpis dtaient courbds? 14. Qu'est-ce qui leur faisait pen- Cher la me 1 1 5. Pourquoi les autres se tenaient-ils si droits ? 16. Lesquels valent le plus? 17. Comment le pfere a-t-il d^- montrd cek a son fils? 18. Les personnes fibres valent-elles ordmaireme.it grand'chose? 19. Prdfdrez-vous les personnes modestes ? Etc., etc. i>. 1. I am going to see the fields. 2. If you were to go and vif.it the fields, in what conditi- -i would you find the wheat? 3. Hold yourself upright. 4. Take two earr o! wheat. fi^Rub the grain out.-^^. The best wheat is not in the upright ears. X The full ears are bent, whilst the empty ears are upright. ^ Just look, my boy, the upright ears are empty. 9. Full heads aie worth a great deal, but empty heads are worth nothing. Use either the past definite or the past indefinite for the narrative tenses of the following : £. Little Augustus went one day to the fields. He went with hh father, who was goii;^ to see whether his wheat wai npe. They arrived at a wheat-field. Augustus observed thai certain ears of wheat were bent down towards the earth. He observed also that others held themselves upright. He said to his father: "Look at those ears of wheat. What a pity they are so bent down ! I prefer those which hold them selves upright." His father wished to teach him a lesson. He took two of the ears of wheat, and rolled them betweeiv his fingers. The one was empty and was worth nothing. The other was full of good wheat. Then he said: « Look, my boy, this ear which raised its head so proudly was almost empty.' On the contrary, this other which was so bent down was full of the best grain. We observe the same thing amongst men. Those who are proud have an (the) empty head. They are worth nothing. On the contrary those who are modest and bumble are generally the best." 114 EXERCISE XLIIL ml m i EXERCISE XLIIL A. Un laboureur ^tant sur le point de mourir', et voulant' donner k ses enfants une dernifere preuve de sa tendresse, les fit3 venir* aupr^s de lui, et leur dit^; "Mas enfants, apr^s moi vous aurez le champ que mon pfere a poss^d^«, le champ qui m'a servi'' k ^leverS et k nourrir ma famille. Cherchez bien dans ce champ, et vous trouverez un tr^sor." Les enfants, apr^s la mort de leur pere, se mirent* k retour- ner le champ en tous sens, bechant, labourant la terre. lis n'y trouv^rent ni or ni argent; mais la terre bien remu^e, bien labour^e, produisit i® une moisson abondante. Le sage vieillard ne les avait pas tromp^s ; il leur avait enseigud que le travail eat un tr^r. . 1 H HI . 1. The father gave his children a proof of his love. 2. He called his children into his presence. 3. The children will own the field after the father. 4. The children delved and ploughed the field. 5. Stir the land, and it will produce a harvest. 6. If you plough this field, you will find a treasure. 7. It will not be silver or gold, but it will be a good harvest. 8. Your father 5b not deceiving you, he is teaching you a good >- EXERCISE XLIV. 116 B A husbandman, who was at the point of death, wished to teach his children that labour is a treasure^ Calling his chil- dren into his presence, he told them that they would have the held which his father had owned.^It was a good field, and it had fed his father and his father's family. i^If they would seek m it, they would find a treasure there. Jr After the old man's death, the children dug everywhere in the field, but they found no treasure. Cjhere was no gold or silver, but they -/mu^^^l*^®^''''^ ^^ ^^^^ that_they had an abundant harvest. /. Ihey had not been deceived.>-Their father had taught them a good lesson. EXERCISE XLIV. A Louis XIV, traversant avec sa cour la galerie de Ver- sailles, aperQoit^^ Jean Bart fumant sa pipe dans I'embrasure dune fenetre ouverte2; il le fait^ appeler*, et lui dit^ d'un ton affectueux: "Jean Bart, je viens" de vous nommer chef descadre.— Vousavez bien faits, sire, repondit^ le marin en continuant de fumer tranquillement sa pipe." Cette brusque S^^ r^ponse ayant e;.cit^ parmi les sots courtisans un grand ^clat l, de rire : "Vous vous trompez, messieurs, leur dit^ gravement '^^ le roi, cette reponse est celle d'un homme qui sent^ ce qu'il vaut.o, et qui compte m'en donner bientot de nouvelles preuves. bans doute, Jean Bart ne parle pas comme vous ; mais qui de vous peutio faire^ ce que fait^ Jean Bart ? " ni. » § 213. *§176. ••> § 195. *§]58. » § 193. « § 178. » § 210. «§166. •§223. "§221. B. Complete the following, as above: 1. II aper9oit Jean Bart. 2. II le fait appeler. 3. Je viens de le nommer. 4. Vous avez bien fait. 5. Vous vous trompez. 6. II sent ce qu il vaut. 7. II ne parle pas comme les autres. Give the imperfect indicative and the imperfect subjunctive of: 1. Apergoit. 2. Fait. 3. Dit. 4. Viens. 5. Sent.. C (Oral.) 1. Qui^tait Louis XIV? 2. 0{i est Versailles ? 6. Quest-ce que c'(^tait autrefois? 4. Quel est I'autre person- nage de notre histoire? 5. Quelle dtait sa profession? 6. Etait- il, ce jour-m, k bord de son vaisseau ? 7. Qu'est-ce qu'il faisait -j_ .^....„.^ qa u n Qv^xim pas cuuitisan { o. jje quelle facon ie roi a-t-il montr^ au'il n'en ^tait pas mdcontenti 9. Quells lA^ xs*n EXERCISE XLV. «^ ^^«-i*.4i^(y^ a sorte de r^ponse Jean Bart a-t-il faite au roi J 10 Ouellfl im press,on a^^elle faite sur les courtisans! . Qudle en' S lopmioa du roi? 12. Pourquo, ^tait-il pe™is i Jean Barte nonpas ™^ou;t^p«defeirjune^brus^quer^po„se? Etcet^ t W. 1, -f „ ?T°'' '^^'"' S'"''- 2. I shall call him. \ jT •'"^' """^'^ •^"^n Bart. 4. The king had iust appointed him rear-admiral. 5. A great outburst li klhter was excited by Jean Barfs blunt aniwer. 6. The kW d"d not appoint the stupid courtiers rear-admirals. 7 We „e mS taken ; it is not a blunt answer. 8. Do not make a mTstrke thev did'nTt'LTth""^ '"•^ "°V"'"'^« """' ''°^-«^^' be *™ '« they did not feel their own worth. 10. Jean Bart hopes soon whirjean^lrrf^T"™'^"''^'^^''-*- "" ^^ - -Ho of f wMow^fn^r' T"^/r'''"« •"'' P'P« '" *>>« embrasure ^L!;J • J . u? P'''*'=® "^-^fe"") of Versailles, as the king accompanied by his courtiers, was passing through the St K r^- • ?t'""« '<""*°'' the brave sailo?, and told hTm*that he had just been appointed rear-admiral. The sailor's blunt reply : "You have done well, sire," caused a burst of laughter it wT,Mr V'° T'" "'"' J''^ "^'"g- But Louis knew that It was the reply of a man who would soon give proofs of his worth. Jean Bart did not talk like a courtier.^bu. he did what courtiers could not do. EXERCISE XLV. fortune'"' FMe"""" P"*'^ ''?"™' 1"! ''""it' S^ et U cherchant loitune. Elle a rencontr.S sur son chemin un brin d'herbe quelle voudraita bien emporter; mais comment faii^M II es^ SI gros, et elle est si faible. Alors elle est montde sur „n raut'd-une'r' '"r' ^"'' 'T'^" '" --Pagn" — du haut dune tour. Elle regarde, elle regarded enfin elle a S"I eZ ^Eir T^t^T 1"' ^^^^' P" '^' «' '"e direr . .. V '• 8^ 'f '" *'•»"<' .'« n^'' "onfe leur nez pour leur bon >'• llf ? J"* "•"' """' ' " y ^ P^-- '^ qo-'lque chose de le Lsissent P» "";;' '" pr^cipitent vers le brin d'herbe et Mglrpotr Ik'' '"^'^''"' ^" *"°"'P'"' '« •'"» -l^™-'" '§i6a '§226. •»2i& »§W3. •I17& •§221. "«i7a ay }tL(H.<^ AJc-xA^ (J^ik^ EXERCISE XLV. 117 ^Complete the following, as above : 1. Elle allait ci etl&. w. Jl.lle voudrait bien I'emporter. 3. Elle est mont^e. 4. Elle court k elles. 6. Elle se frotte le nez. 6. Venez. 7. Elles se precipitent 8. Elles le saisissent. 9. Elle ne pouvait pas le faire. 10. Elles le font aisdment. ^ Give in full the past definite of: 1. Vu. 2. Rencontrd Font ^Pergu. 5. Court. 6. Se precipitent. 7. Beginning at the second sentence, relate the story in the past definite, thus : " Elle rencontra, etc." 9\S^l^}'\ }' ^® ^"^^ insecte parle-t-on ici ? 2. Qu'est-ce quelle faisait? 3. Qu'est-ce qu'elle a rencontrd sur son chemin? 4. Le brin d'herbe e'tait-il gros ou petit ? 6 Et la fourmi ^tait-elle forte ou faible 1 6. Qu'est-ce que la fourrai aurait voulu faire? 7. Est-ce qu'elle pouvait le faire toute seule? 8. Ou est-clle montee? 9. Qu'est-ce qu'elle a regard^ du haut du caillou ? 1 0. Pour la fourmi le caillou (5tait comme ?S®^''"''i ^'^^^'"^^ P""^^ 11- Q«'est-ce qu'elle apergoit enfin? 12. Que faisaient les deux compagnes de la fourmi? 13 Et fourmi ^qu'est-ce qu'elle a fait? 14. Est-ce qu'elle leur a r ? 1 o. Comment leur a-t-elle parl^ ? 1 6. Qu'est-ce qu'elle leur a dit ? 17. Quelle est la premiere chose qu'ont faite les trois fourmis? 18. Et ensuite qu'ont-elles fait! 19. Une fourrai pouvait-elle emporter la brin d'herbe? 20 Les trois fourmis ensemble pouvaient-elles le faire aisement ? li. iourquoi le brin d'herbe est-il devenu l^ger? Etc., etc. t ^-[-^^^^^^ ^"* was going hither and thither one day. ^ She tound a blade of grass on the road. 5" This blade of grass is very big 'thought the ant. V^ am too weak to carry it off alone. ^ I know what I shall do.-t I shall climb upon a pebble. >From the top of the pebble I shall look around. ^ The pebble will be for me like a tall tower."c; She did so.-^he looked about h^r a long time.^i/At last she saw two of her compan- '°?,>rT ^^ ^^^® passing along {par) the same roadi^She called them, and they ran to hep/^She said to them • "Come here, for I have found something good."^'^She said this by rubbing her nose against theirs..^- Ants, as you know, cannot speak like meii.- After that the three ants rushed towards , -- '- — o " ■ iv-jj -i^v^ra iu quiukijv-«^j.o hau been very heavy for the one ant^ut the three together carried it off easily. 118 EXERCISE XLVI. EXERCISE XLVI. A. Un homme descenditi de Jerusalem h Jericho, et tomba parim des brigands, qui le depouiU^rent. Apr^s I'avoir blesse de plusieurs coups, ils s'en alk^-ents, le laissant k demi raort 3 Un pre tie, qui par hasard descendaiti par ce chemin-1^, I'ayant vu4, passa outre. Un levite, venant* aussi dans le m6me endroit, efc le voyant*, passa outre. Mais un Samaritain, qui voyageait«, vint^ vers cet homme, et le voyant*, fut touch^ de compassion. S'approchant de lui, il banda ses plaies. et il y versa de I'huile et du vin ; puis il le mit^ sur sa mon- ture, le mena^ k une auberge, et prit^ soin de lui. Le lende- main, en partant", il tira de sa poche deux deniers d'argent et les donnant k I'aubergiste, lui dit": "Aie soin de lui et tout ce que tu ddpenseras de plus je te le rendraii k mon retour. » § 210. »§160. 3 § 174. ♦§224. •§178. •§156. » § 198. «§158. » § 202. '"§166. »»§193. B Complete the following, as above : 1. II descendit. 2 Ils le d^pouill^rent. 3. lis s'en all^rent. 4. II descendit par ce chemin. 5. II passa outre. 6. II vint vers cet homme 7 II y versa de I'huile. 8. II le mit sur sa monture. 9. II prit soin de lui. ^ Give the present indicative and present subjunctive of- 1. fe en allerent. 2. Mort. 3. Tenant. 4. Voyant. 5. Mit' , ^' iP'^illl ^- ^'oiia-t-on tir^ cette histoire? 2. Comment sappelle Ihistoire? 3. Ou sont Jerusalem et Jdricho? 4 Est-ce que la terre sainte est un grand ou un petit pays? 5. Quont fait les brigands au voyageur ? 6. En quel ^tat se trouyait-il apres leur depart ? 7. Quelles personnes sont venues ensuite 1 8. Qu'est-ce qu'elles ont fait ? 9. Qui est venu aprfes le pretre et le Idvite? 10. Est-ce que les Samaritains dtaient bien aim^s des Juifs? 11. Est-ce que cela a empechd le Samaritain de faire le bien? 12. Qu'est-ce qu'il a fait au i , 13. Apr^s I'avoir soignd qu'a-t-il fait? 14. Qu'a-t-il donn^ a 1 aubergiste ? 15. En quittant I'auberge, qu'a-t-il dit ? Etc., etc. ^ B. 1. If we fall among thieves, they will strip us. 2. After »aviRg ivounded us they will depart. 3. If you should see a EXERCISE XLVII. 119 poor traveller half dead, would you pass by on the other side? 4. If the priest had been touched with compassion, he would have bound up the wounds. 5. Let us pour oil and wine into his wounds. 6. Let us put the poor man on our own beast 7. Let us take him to the inn. 8. Let us take care of him there. 9. The next day we shall give money to the inn- keeper 10. On our return we shall give him back whatever he shall have spent for our friend. E. A man, who was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho fell among thieves. They stripped him and wounded him, and left him half dead. Then a priest and a Levite came by chance to the same place, and they saw him and passed by on the other side. But a Samaritan, who was going down by that road, saw him, and was touched with compassion. Then after having bound up his wounds, he put him on his beast and took him to an inn. On the morrow he gave money to the innkeeper, and said that on his return he would give the innkeeper whatever he should spend if he took care of the poor man. EXERCISE XLVIL nia f°,?^"® ^- I^affitte, le faraeux banquier, vintl k Paris, en 1788, a 1 age de 21 ans, toute son ambition se bornait a obtenirS une petite place dans une maison de banque. II se piesenta Chez un riche banquier. "Impossible de vous admettre^ chez moi, du moins pour le moment, lui dit* le banquier : mes bureaux sont au complet." Le jeune homme salue et se retire. En traversant la cour, il aper9oit5 k terre une ^pingle, et la ramasse. Debout devant la fenetre de son cabinet le riche banquier avait suivi^ des yeux la retraite du jeune homme. II lui vit^ ramasser I'^pingle et ce trait lui fit^ plaisir. Le soir mdme le jeune homme regut^ un billet du banquier, qui lui disait": "Vous avez une place dans mes bureaux; vous pou- vez9 veniri I'occuper des demain." Le jeune homme devinti bientot caissier, puis associ^, puis maitre de la premiere maison de banque de Paris, et enfin homme d'Etat tr^s influent sous Louis-Philippe. • §178. «§177. S fi 100 *§193. §213. §206. " § 224. "§196. §221. 120 EXERCISE XLVII. ^Complete the following, as above: 1. II vmt *. Vt^xis 2 Jj.lle se bornait a cela. 3. II se presenta chez le banquier. 4. 11 se retire. 5. II aperqoit a terre une epingle. 6. II I'avait suivi des yeux. 7. II vit ramasser I'epingle. 8. 11 re^ut un billet. 9. II lui disait. 10. Vou.s pouvez venir. 1 1. II devint maitre. Give in full tke future and conditional of: 1. Tenir 2. Admettre. 3. Aper^oit. 4. Suivi. 5. Vit. a (Oral.) 1. Quel age avait M. Laffitte k son arrivde k ir'aris? 2. Qu'est-ce qu'il cherchait? 3. Rdussit-il d'abord k trouver une place ? 4. Ou se pie'senta-t-il ? 6. Que lui a-t-on dit ? 6.^ En se retirant ou va-t il ? 7. Qu'est-ce qu'il trouve 1 8. Quilavu? 9. En e'taitil content? 10. De quelle facon a-t-il montr^ son contentement ? 11. Qu'est devenu le ieune hcmme par la suite ? 12. Quelle est la morale de I'lustoire 1 Etc., etc I D. 1. If your ambition is only to get a humble position, you will get It. 2. Present yourself at the office of the rich banker. 3. He will admit you into his employ 4 His offices are not full. 5. Do you see that pin on the ground 1 ■^. ^\ "P- '^- T^^^^'® is the rich banker standing at his office window. 8. The banker is watching the young man as he retires 9. If we see him pick up a pin, it (cela) will please us. 10. Did you receive a note from the banker? 11. You shall have a position in his banking-house. 12. You shall soon become his partner, shall you not ? 13; Those who pick up pins may become statesmen. K When M. Laffitte was twenty-one years of age he came to Pans. He wished to get a humble position with a rich banker. But when he presented himself, the rich banker told him that his offices were full, and that he could not admit T' ?^^^^t^i^^^'ew. The rich banker watched him from his office window, and saw him pick up a pin which he noticed on the ground as he was crossing the yard. This action pleased the banker. That very evening he sent a note to the young man, which said that he could have a position in his office! the very next day. The young man became head of a great banking-house, and at last an inrluential statesman. EXERCISE XLVIIL 121 EXERCISE XLVIII. ^ A. 'Benjamin Franklin raconte I'anecdote suivantei-. "Quand ;etais un enfant de cinq ou six ans, mes amis, un jour de fete remphreat ma petite poche de sous. -^ Je partis2 tout de suite pour une boutique ou I'on vendait^ des jouets. ^Chemin faisant* je VIS dans les mains d'un autre petit gar9on un sifflet, dont le son me charma-^Je lui donnai en ^change tout mon argent ^Revenue chez moi, fort content de mon achat, sifflant par toute la maison, je fatiguai les oreilles de toute la famille. -^Mes tr^res et mes sceurs apprenant^ que j'avais tout donn^ pour un mpuvais instrument, me dirent^ que je I'avais pay^s dix fois plus Cher qu'iljie^valaitio. ^. Alors ils dnum^rerent^i toutes les johes choses que j'aurais pui2 acheter" avec mon argent SI J avais ^te plus prudent.^^Ils me tournferent tellement en ridicule que j en pleurai./iCependant, cet accident fut de quelque utility pour moi.^Lorsque plus tard j'dtais tent^ dacheter" quelque chose qui ne m'e'tait pas n^cessaire, ie disaiss en moi-meme :^e donnons pas trop pour le siffleL et J epargnais mon argent." ^ • § 206. ♦§19S. » § 202. •§157. i>§16& a §166. » § 224. "§193. ««»§223. ia§221. »§210. • § 178. B. Complete the following, as above: 1. Quand j'dtais un enfant. 2. lis remplirent ma poche. 3. Je partis tout de suite. 4. Je vis un sifflet. 5. Je fatiguai tous mes amis, b. Je remplis mes poches, tu remplis tes poches, etc. 7 lis me dirent, ils te dirent, etc. 8. Je disais en moi-m^me, tu disais en toi-meme, etc. C. (Oral.) 1. Qui ^tait Benjamin Franklin? 2. A quelle ^poque yivait-il ? 3. Quel age avait-il k I'epoque de I'anecdote? 4. Qu est-ce qu il avait dans sa poche? 5. Qui le lui avait donne ? ?xT l,""^!,^",^?^*. ^^V^i P^^*^i ensuite? 7. Y est-il jamais arrive ? 8. Quel ^tait I'obstacle ? 9. Qu'est-ce qu'il a fait de son argent? 10. A son retour chez lui, qu'est-ce qu'il a taitf 11. A-t-ilcharme ses freres et ses sceurs? 12 Est-ce quil avait pay^ assez cher son sifflet? 13. Est-ce* que la tamii e etait contente de son achat? 14. De quelle facon la tamille a-t-elle fait voir son m^contentement ? i5. Le pauvre ;■! , .hi -i I EXERCISE XLIX. Franklin dtait-il content k la fin ? IG. Quelle lecon Franklin a-t-il ro,;ue par cet accident / Etc., etc. V"" i^ankiin ZI ;• ^"" P'^ ^•''^ '^°"*^-" ^*^'' tJ'^^t pencil, that will b'. three tunes as nn.ch as it is worth. 3. Never pa more for things than they are worth. 4. We could have bouglTmany pretty things with our money, if we had l.en p.u.ient 5 H our fnend had been less prudent, he could not have bought so our tuends 7. When we are (fut.) tempted to buy some- sdv£-"'w' " "«^,— -^ ^-- -. -e' shall sa7to " - on a mZ^A?'!"!" ^'"'i^^'^"' ^'^'^ ^^" y^-^'"' <^1'1> his brother, on a holiday, filled iis pockets with coppers. Starting off at anotheriitti:7 "'>" f'^f ""'^ '^«^^' ^^ "^^ on the w.^ another httle boy who had a whistle. The sound of th^ instrument charmed him, and he gave all his moriey o have t He was much pleased with his purchase, but he whistkd .o much all over the house that he tired the' wl^le fam I h s brothers and sisters asked him where he had bought hifwhistle and how much he had paid for it. He told thein he haJg fen all his money to the little boy. Then they told him he had paid too much or it. They said too that if he had Ln more prudent, he could have bought ten times as many pretty thhi/s and he cried on account of it. But the affair wTof Yome use whiorhi r/"-. ^^'"f"''' ^" "^^ *^'"P*-^ to buy Things wh ch he did not need, he would always say to himself- -I will not give too much for the whistle " * EXERCISE XLIX. ncf: ■^^''^' ^^' "^^^^ """^ ^h^'«^' s'^tant dearth, suivanti sa coutume, de ses gardes et de sa cour, rencontm un pavsan assis2 sous un arbre. ''Que fais-tu3 ]4? lui dit* le prinTe - r/nondiln ^^^ ^^^ ^^ P^^"* ^^ i^"''. PO"r voir^ pass^erTroi, r^ponditMe paysan; sans ce d^sir, je serais k labourer mon champ, qui n'est pas fort ^loign^._Si tu veux^ monter su^a ^srirroi'eTtu f"^^^' "^^'^^^^ Henri, ,. te condlaio o2 esc le roi, et tu le verra? ^ a ton aise." Le paysan, enchants, profite de la rPncnnf..p jv,^^.. x ^^.^ du roi, etdemande, chemin faisant3, comment ilpourraio^econ- \\ \; \ EXERCISE XLIX. 123 \\ Enfin le moment arrive ou le roi reioinfi'/L! T'^ cour et se trouve oarmi «n« nZ, .• ^^JO^nt'' une partie de sa excent^ I,n- Ai ^M^ courtisans; tous so d^couvrentia >§206. "§216. ••» § 195. ♦§193. • § 178. "§224. i210. •• § 225. » § 186. " § 221. >» §188. "§176. ••■•9190. X. ayons. "uvieau. o. ii ny a que nous qui C. (Oral.) 1. Qui ^tait Henri TV? 9 a n ^ cnassef 4. Qui a-t-il rencontr^ un iour? 5 On'p«f L c est qu'un oavsan ? fi n,,^ * • -1 , ^" est-ce que Muuu pay&an f b. C^ue faisait le cavsan ? 7 n^^^. • combien de temps v dtqif n? s t> P'^/S'^^y f- Depuis 9 «}',-l r,'^f„'4. ^ ^ etait-iJ } 8. Pourquoi y (^tait-il venn ? ». fell n^tait pas venu ou aurait-il cte? 10 0„W ni V roi a propose au pavsan? 11 rt <^u est-ce que le 19 Onw/^ ^'U pciyban { 11. Le paysan a-t-il accentf^? 3 On.? ;%T '" P-'^'™ " d«mande au roi en chem'„ 1 1*. ys roi et le laypTu ou an- vent-ils bientf,t1 1 Pi n. > •que les courtisans ont fait a leur approche fi k% T personnes restaient couvertes ! n pr!.! I- ^T^""" ^e avait-ildanslacompagnie? Etcetc. ^' ™'' ^ D. l^have wandered from the court. 2. If the king X - -. ..V. xiavc waiiuerea rrom the courf, 9 T* ^-u^ i • .r" ra°*Vl^Weca nave not 'seen "TO* kinsr cm hv ^ tu^ * '' — v^..^,. -r. x^^ plouglung the field 8 Tff ^\ ^^"^ V^^^^nts are busy-r^.c«i the king^ 7 A thev llZ F ""^^'^'^^^ ^«' you will see ^^* kincr. «?T.i.: u^ "^^"^^^ ^^o"g' <^he peasant said to the King lake me where the kina ic » « i? i. i , , , hat on, and we conld w ^ • , ^^^^ybody had his XI, rtuu we could not recognize the kina Q Tf fi.^ courtiers had taken off ^l.-., i ° i^"« King. y. it the <>he king. "'^"" ^'^''' "^^ ^"^^^ have recognized 124 I \ I its ^ ^K / EXERCISE L. ^. One (lay Henry IV. had wandered from his courtiers. ^ Meeting' a peasant who was sitting under a tree, lie asked the latter what he was doing there. ^riio peasant replied that he had be.Mi there since dayl)reak, and that ho wished to see the king, and that if ho had not come, he would be busy ploughing his fiel(l..^rhe king said to him: " Get up behind me, and 1 shall take you where you am see the king. 'if^ The peasant wa.s delighted, and got up beside the king^ ift they went along, he asked how he should recognize theTcing, and the king told him to look at the one who should have his hat on, whilst the others should be bareheaded. ^ When they ^irrived where the courtiers were, the latter took off their liats. friien the king asked the peasant which was the king. V 'He replied : «' We two have our hats on, the others are^bare- headed : it is you or I." EXERCISE L. A. JJn paysan traversait la campagne avec son fils Thomas. " Regarde ! lui dit-iP en chemin, voil4 par terre un fer k cheval perdu^, ramasse-le ! " " Bah ! repondit2 Thomas, il ne vaut^ pas la peine c:^ se baisser pour si peu de chose ! " Le pfere ne dit» rien, ramassa lo fer et le mit* dans sa poche. Arriv^ au village voisin, il le vendit2 pour quelques centimes au mart^chal ferrant, et acheta^ des cerises avec cet argent. Cela fait<'', ils se remirent^ en route. Le soleil ^tait brulant. Thomas mourait^ de soif, et avait de la peine a poursuivre^ son chemin. Le pere, qui marchait le premier, laissa, comme par hasard, tomber une cerise. Thomas la ramassa avec empresse- ment, et la mangea». Quelques pas i)lus loin, une secondo cerise s'echappa des mains du pere, et Thomas la saisit avec le merne empressement. Le p^re fit^ de meme avec toutes les cerises. Lorsque I'enfant eut portd a la bouche la derni^re cerise, le pere se retournaet lui dit^ : " Vois^o, mon ami, tu n'as pas voulu" te baisser une fois pour ramasser le fer a cheval, et tu as ete obligei2 de te baisser plus de vingt fois pour ramasser les cerises." » §i9a *§198. ' §174. » § 156. "§225 - § 210. 6 R 1i;q 3 ..»v». s §208. "• J ,24. »^§106 ■« § 223. « § 195. EXERCISE I* Itft B Complete the fol owin^, as above: 1. II ne dit rien. 2. II le nut dans sa poclm. 3. ]1 vondit le fer. 4. 11 acheta des censes D. II .nourait do soif. 6. II man^^ea u,.o cerise. 7 Illasaisit. aillitdernCme. 9. lis se ronrironb ea route, baiss^ ** echappa de sea mains. 1 1. H so retourna. 1 2. Tu t'ea C. (Oral.) 1 De quelles personnes parle-t-on dans cette his- Tn . ?• ^" f^^'''^ "1"^ '''^'*^ ^"'"" P''''3^«^" ' 3. :^tait-il seul ? 4 Qu est-ce qu lis ont vu en cliemin? 5. Qu'est-ce que c'est qu un fer ii chevaH 6. Qu'est-ce que le p6ro ,i dit au fils 1 i Quest-ce quo le fils a respond u ? 8. Lequel des dc-ux citait le plus prua> It ? 9. Par quelle action a-t-il montr^ sa prudence ? 10. A qui a-t-on yendu le fer k cheval 1 II. Pourquoi I'a-t-on vendu k un mar^chal ferrant? 12. Qu'est-(^e quW a achetd avecl argent? 1 3. Quel temps faisait^iU 14. Quel t^tait Met de la chaleur sur le petit Thomas? 15. Est-co que le p^re navait nen pour la soif? 16. Est-co quo les cerises sont bonnes pour la soif? 17. Qu'eat-ce que le p^-re a fait des cerises f (8. Et qu'est-ce que son fils en a fait? 19 Com- bienena-t-il mangZ-es? 20. Pourquoi aurait-il mieux fait de 86 baisser pour le fer k c'neval ? Etc., etc. />. 1. It was not worth the trouble. 2. It will not be worth the trouble 3. If it is worth the trouble, we shall pick up the horse-shoe. 4. Put the horse-shoe into your pocket and buy cherries. 5. We shall set out again on our journey. 6. If Lhe sun is hot, they will not .set out again. 7 I am very thirsty (dying with thirst); give me some cherries. 8. We have difficulty in picking up the cherries. 9. If you are dying with thirst, I shall drop a cherry. 10. The cherries are on the ground ; pick them up. 11. If you walk ahead, will you pick up th« che-ries? 12. A few steps farther on, I stooped to nek up the horse-shoe. 13. Why did you seize the horse-shoe so eagerly ? 14. We did not seize it eagerly. Ip. If you had been willing to turn round, we should have given you the cherries 16. Stoop, if you wish to pick up. mLwl . '" r* ^'"'"^ ^"^ ^*^^P '^'^^^^ ^i" perhaps stoop more than twenty times. r tr f E. As a peasant and ids son were crossing the country ^hey saw a horse-shoe on the ground. The father told his son ^^- /-Z.€^t c^ (.*■ ^^G—v-t-t^. ^^t^ L heocVi^^^n^ -e>^^t(-*-e-<- -/^^j i 126 EXERCISE LI. i , to pick It up and put it into his pocket. The son replied that It was not worth while to stoop for a horse-shoe. Then the father stooped and picked it up. They sold it to the black- smith of the neighboring village, and bought some cherries, Zt\ f !u ^' 1?"^^ '"'u^ ^'' P^"^^*- They pursued thei^ way, the father walking ahead. The sun was hot and Thomas was very thirsty, and, as if by chance, a cherry fell from his father s pocket. The son seizing it, ate it, and also a second one, which slip,.ed from his father's pocket. Soon the last enl7{-™.?T^/ u V'.T"*^'' ^^^ ^'' ^^^^^'' *"^"ing round, told him that if he had been willing to stoop once for the horse-shoe, he would not have been obliged to stoop twenty times tor the cherries. •'^ EXERCISE LI. A. Vn jour Frederic le Grand, roi de Prusse, ayant sonnd sans que personne r^ponditi k cet appel, ouvrit2 la porte de son antichambre et trouva son page endormis sur une chaise. An moment ou il allait^ le r^veiller, il apergut^ un papier dcrit« sortant de la poche du page. La curiosity du roi fut excit^e, il prits le papier et le lut«. C'dtait une lettre de la mere du jeune homrae, dans laquelle elle remerciait son fils de ce qu'il lui envoyaitio une partie de ses gages pour la soulagerii dans sa misfere Le roi, ayant lu« la lettre, prit^ un rouleau de ducats et le ghssa avec la lettre dans la poche du page. Un instant apres il sonna si fort que le page se rdveilla et accouruti2 aupres de lui. « Vous avez dormi^," lui diti3 le roi. Le ieune homme, ayant honte, tacha de s'excuser. Dans son embarras il mit la main dans sa poche, et y trouva le rouleau de ducats. II le pnts, paht, trembla, et ne putio articuler un soul mot. "Quavez-vous? diti3 le roi.-H^las ! sire, diti3 ]« page quel- qu un veutio me perdrei; je ne sais'^ pas d'oA m'est venues cet o;;---^^ fortune ne vient-elle^s pas souvent en dormant^? reprits Frdd^nc Envoioio cette somme k ta mhve, en lui fai- Xde toT" ^^"'P^^"^^^*^ «* assure-Ia bien que j'aurai soin d'elle » §210. •§213. •§197. ••■'§193. " §222. «§i7e. •§194. »o§157. '♦§198. "§178. •§166. "8166. " 8156. 1 Jt o OO^ 7S ^Cit. '•' §lu& «§i6a •§202. »«81«4. "8226. EXERCISE LI. 127 18 ^. Complete the following, as above : 1. Sans qu'il r^pondit. r4.1 '''''^t il P^'*"' ^- ^^ ^"*^ ^^ ^i"^^- 4- 11 ^ll^it le r^veiller. 5. 11 apergut iin papier. 6. II remerciait le roi. l^JL^'^ll r^ ^"^^''^- ^- ^^ P"^ ^^ ^«"1^^"- 9. II se nt ; io i^^^o"r^<^ ^"P^es du roi. 11. H ne put dire ?4. Tnvoiicettlirr ''''''' ''' '^ '''' ^'^^ '^^ -- the'';a:t1ynt.""''''' substituting the past indefinite for C (Oral.) 1. Quel est le sujet de cette anecdote? 2. A quelle dpoque vivait Frederic le Grand ? 3. Ou est la Prusse ? 4. J^uest-ce que cest qu'un page? 5. Ou etait le page dont parlel'histoire? 6. Qu'est-ce qu'il y faisait ? 7. Qu'esL que les pages devraient faire dans les antichambres des rois? «. Est-ce que le roi s'est mis en colere centre le page? 9. Qu est-ce qu'il a fait ? 10. En lisant la lett.e qu'est-ce que le roi a ddcouvert? 1. Est-ce que la mfere du page e^tait Hche? 1.. Qu est-ce que le page faisait pour elle? 13. Le roi en ^tait-il content? U. De quelle fagon a-t-il montrd son con- tentement? 15 Comment le jeune homme a-t-il d^couvert ce que le roi avait fait? 16. Qu'est-ce que c'est qu'un ducat? 17. Que pensait-il en sentant les ducats dans sa poche? 18. De quelle fagon le roi a-t-il calmd le jeune homme? ly. ±.st-ce que le proverbe est toujours vrai : "La fortune nous vient en dormant?" 20. Qu'est-ce que cette histoire nous apprend ? Etc., ere. D. 1. He rings without anyone answering him. 2. If we open the door, we shall find the page. 3. I am going to wake him. 4. He will waken. 5. The paper was sScking out of his pocket. 6. She thanked her son for sending her a%art of his wages. 7 She sent a letter in which she thanked her son. 8. We have been asleep. 9. We had been asleep. 10. The king asked : What is the matter with him ?" 1 L Somebody will rum me. 12. He took care of him and her. R One day Frederick the Great rang, and nobody answered n«L ^!TM *^^ ??? ^^ ^^^ antechamber, he finds his page ::!!fL Jt^t^i "_^^?.\7- taking out of the page's pocket, mnfhi;' "'" "."1 ^yuriosity. The young man used to send his mother a part of his wages, and in this letter she was thanking !!. f 128 EXERCISE LI. him for it. The king read the letter, and, taking a roll of ducats, shpped it, with the letter, into the young nan'spoeket h 's pre^e^e' 'hT ^'l^'.^ ""^'^' ^'^ ^""^^'^ ^^^ hastenK his presence. He asked the young i^an if he had been asleep The young man was ashamed, and tried to excuse hfmself trP^K^^ "'>^^ ^"'^ ^'' P^^k^^ he finds the ducats He trembles, and cannot utter a word. The king asked him what ^oV^uTZT^'^r 'f '' ^'f^' thattmebodrwilhed to rum him, for he did not know where the ducats came from ^d bin? ^^^^ ^'^^ ^^ ""^^ *^^^ "^^^ «f his mother h >l m §153] REGULAR VERBS. 129 oil of 3cket. 1 into sleep, uself. He what ished Prom, le we 3ther PART II. THE VERB. REGULAR VERBS. 153' Regular Conjugations. Regular verbs are con- veniently divided into three classes or conjugations, according as the present infinitive ends in -er, -ir, -re, and are inflected in their simple tenses as follows : — I. ) Present. donn er, to give. Present. donn ant, giving. Past. donn 6, given. Present. / give, am giving, etc. je donn e. tu donn es. 11 donn e. nous donn ons. vous donn ez. lis donn ent, 9 II. Infinitive Mood. "^ Present. fin ir, to finish. Participles. Present. fin iss ant, finishituj. Past. fin i, finished. Indicative Mood. Present. /finish, am finishimj, etc. je fin i s. tu fin i s. 11 fin i t. nous fin iss ons. vous fin iss ez. lis fin iss ent. III. % Present. romp re, to break. Present. romp ant, breaking. Past. romp u, broken, Present. /break, am breaking, etc. je romp s. tu romp s. 11 romp t. nous romp ons. vous romp ez. lis romp ent. 130 Imperfect. / waa giving, iised to give, etc. je donn ais. tu donn ais. il donn ait. nous donn ions. vous donn iez. lis donn aient. Past Definite. / gave, etc. je donn ai. tu donn as. il donn a. nous donn ames. vous donn ates. ils donn erent. Future. / shall give, etc. je donner ai. tu donner as. il donner a. nous donner ons. vous donner ez. ils donner ont. Conditional. / should give, etc. je donner ais. tu donAer ais. il donner ait. nous donner ions, vous donner iez. ils donner aient. THE VERB. Imperfect. / was finishing, used to finish, etc. je fin iss ais. tu fin iss ais. il fin iss ait. nous fin iss ions. vous fin iss iez. ils fin iss aient. Past Definite. I finished, etc. je fin is. I tu fin is. il fin it. nous fin imes. vous fin ites. ils fin irent. Future. / shall finish, etc. je finir ai. tu finir as. il finir a. nous finir ons. vous finir ez. ils finir ont. Conditional. / should finish, etc. je fini.- ais. tu finir ais. il finir ait. nous finir ions, vous finir iez, ils finir aient [§153 Imperfect, / was hrenhing, nsed to break, etc. je romp ais. tu romp ais. 11 romp ait. nous romp ions, vous romp iez. ils romp aient. Past Definite. I broke, etc. je romp is. tu romp is. il romp it. nous romp imes. vous romp ites. ils romp irent. Future. / shall break, etc. je rompr ai. tu rompr as. il rompr a. nous rompr ons. vous rompr ez. ils rompr ont. Conditional. / should break, etc. je rompr ais. tu rompr ais. il rompr ait. nous rompr ions. vous rompr iez. ils rompr aient §154] AUXILIARY VERBS. 131 Present. Give, etc. donn e.* (qu'il donn e.) donn ons. donn ez. (qu'ils donn ent. ) Imperative Mood. Present. Finish, etc. fin is. (qu'il fin iss e. ) fin iss ons. fin iss ez. (qu'ils fin iss ent. ) Present. Break, etc. romp s. (qu'il romp e.) romp ons. romp ez. (qu'ils romp ent.) *Thi8 form becomes ' donn es ' when followed by -y or -en (cf . § 370, 3, obs. 3, 4). Present. ( That) I {may) give, etc. (que) je donn e. (que) tu donn es. (qu') il donn e. (que) nous donn ions. (que) vous donn iez. (qu') ils donn ent. Subjunctive Mood. Present. ( That) I {may) finish, etc. (que) je fin iss e. (que) tu fin iss es. (qu') il fin iss e. (que) nous fin iss ions. (que) vous fin iss iez. (qu') ils fin iss ent. Present. ( That) I {may) break, etc. (que) je romp e. (que) tu romp es. (qu') il romp e. (que) nous romp ions. (qiie) vous romp iez. (qu') ils romp ent. Imperfect. Imperfect. Imperfect. ( That) I {might) give, etc. {That) I {might) finish, etc. {That) I {might) break, etc. (que) je donnasse, (que) tu donn asses. (qu') il donn at. (que) nous donn assions (que) vous donn assiez. (qu') ils donn assent. (que) je fin isse. (que) tu fin isses. (qu') il fin it. (que) nous fin issions. (que) vous fin issiez. (qu') ils fin issent. (que) je romp isse. (que) tu romp isses. (qu') il romp it. (que) nous romp issions (que) vous ronq) issiez. (qu') ils romp issent. AUXILIARY VERBS. 154. The auxiliary verbs avoir, * to have,' and ^tre, ' to be,' are conjugated in tlieir simple tenses as follows : — xniiiiiLivc Pres. avoir, to have. pRES. ^tre, to be. Ml ■H4 132 THE VERB. Participles. Pres. ayant, having. Pres. ^tant, being. [§154 Past, eu, had. Present. / have, am having, etc. j'ai. nous avons. tu as. vous avez. il a. ils ont. Imperfect / had, was having, etc, j'avais. nous avions. tr avals, vous aviez. il avait. ils avaient. Past Definite. / had, etc. j'eus. nous eftm tu eus. vous eAtes. il eut. ils eurent. Future. / sJiall have, etc. j'aurai. nous aurons. tu auras, vous aurez. il aura. ils auront. Past. 6t6, been. Indicative. Present. ^w, am being, etc. j^ il est. nous sommes, vous eLes. ils sont. Imperfect. / was, tvas being, etc. j'^tais. nous ^tions. tu ^tais. vous ^tiez. il etait. ils ^taient. Past Definite. / was, etc. je fus. nous fftmes. tu fus. vous ftites. il fut. ils furent. Future. / shall be, etc. je serai, nous serons. tu seras. vous serez. il sera. ils seront. Conditional. Conditional. / should have, etc. / should be, etc. j'aurais. nous aurions. je serais, nous serionp. tu aurais. vous auriez. tu serais, vous seriez. il aurait. ils auraient. il serait. ils seraient Imperative. Present. Present. Have, etc. Jie, etc. ayons. soyons. ale. ayez. (qu'il ait. ) (qu'ils aient. ) sois. Boyez. (qu'il soit. ) (qu'ils soient. ) §154 P55] COMPOUND ENSES. 133 Present. ( That) I (may) have, etc. (que) j'aie. (que) nous ayons (que) tu aies. (que) vous ayez. (qu') il ait. (qu') ils aient. Subjunctive. Present. (That) I (may) be, etc. (que) je sois. (que) nous soyons. (que) tu sois. (que) vous soyez, (qu') il soit. (qu') ils soient. Imperfect. (That) I (mbjht) have, etc. (que) j'eusse. (que) nous eussions. (que) tu eussGs. (quo) vous eussiez. (qu' ) il eat. (qu' ) ils eussent. Imperfect. ( That) I (might) be, etc. (que) je fusse. (que) nous f ussions. (que) tu fusses, (que) vous fussiez. (qu') il fat. (qu') ils fussent. COMPOUND TENSES. 155' Formation. Compound tenses are formed from the past participle of the principal verb along with an auxiliary verb (usuaJLy avoir, sometimes 6tre), see §§ 227-229. Avoir. Perfect. To have given. avoir donn^. Perfect. Having given. ayant donn6. Past Indefinite. I have given, etc. j'ai donn6. tu as donn^. etc. Pluperfect. / had given, etc. j'avais donn(5, etc Infinitive. ti ;re. Participle. Indicative. Perfect. To have arrived. etre arriv6(e)(s). Perfect. Having arrived. ^tant arriv^(e)(s). Past Imjefinite. / have arrived, etc. je suis arriv^{e). tu es arrive(e). etc. Pluperfect. / had arrived, etc. j'^tais arriv^(e). £tc. 134 THE VERB. ni \u [§156 Past Anterior. / had given, etc. j'eus donn^. etc. Future Anterior. / shall have given, etc. j'aurai donn^. etc. Conditional Anterior. / should have given, etc. j'aurais donn^. etc. Past Anterior. / had arrived, etc. je fus arriv^(e). etc. Future Anterior. / shall have arrived, etc. je serai arr've(e). etc. Conditional Anterior. / should have arrived, etc. je serais arriv^(e). etc. Subjunctive. Perfect. Perfect. (That) I (may) have given, etc. (That) I (may) have arrived, etc. (que) j'aie donni. que je sois arriv^(e). etc. etc. Pluperfect. Pluperfect. (That) I (might) have given, etc. (That) I (might) have arrived, etc. (que) j'euase donn^. (que) je fusse arriv(4(e). ®t^' etc. •/ 156. ORTHOGRAPHICAL PECULIARITIES. Verbs in -cer and -ger. I. Verbs m -cer, e.g., avancer [avase], 'to advance,' require the [sj sound of c throughout their conjugation, and hence c becomes c before a or o of an ending (§ 5, 4), but not elsewhere : Impf. Suhj. ^ avan9ant. avance. avangais. avangai. avangasse. avangasses. avangat. avan^assions. avan^aasiez. avan^assent. Pres. Part. Pres. Indie. Impf. Indie. Past Def. avan^ant. avance. avangais. avan^ai. avances. avangais. avan^as. avance. avan^ait. avan^a. avan^ons. avancions. avan^ames avancsz. avanciez. avaneatcs. avancent. avan^aient. 9 avanc6rent §156 etc. etc. e[sj ;fore bj. ns. z. It. §§157-158] ORTHOGRAPH'CAL PECULIARITIES. 136 nf 1 1''^'.'" '^^l' ''^" '"^"^^'' ^'""•'"^' ' <^« «'^^'' ^^q^i'-e the [3] sound Pres. Part. Pres. Indie. Imp/. Indie. niangeais. inangeais. inaiigeait. mangions. J>.angeant, . mange, manges, mange, mangeons. mangez. mangent. niangiez. Past Dcf. mangeai. niangeas. nuiiigea. niaiigeames. mangeutes. mang^rent. Impf. Svbj. mangeasse. mangeasses. mangeat. niangeassions. mangeassiez. mangeassent. niangeaient. ^57- Verbs in -yer. Verbs in -oyer and -uyer change y to i whenever it comes !)efore [al n conjugation but not elsewliere ; verbs in -ayer ana -eyer may eithe retam y throughout, or change it to i before [oj : Pres. Indie. FuL Condi nettoie, etc. nettoierai, etc. nettoierais, etc. P'^y^'letc. P^y^'''"'letf. F erais,! , Paie, / paieiai, f ' paierais. T^'- 158. Verbs with Stem-vowel e or e. Verbs with stem-vowel e require the [e] sound of e (§ 12, 1 ) whenever, m conjugation, the next syHahle contains [0] ; so also verbs with the stem-vowel e, shown orthographically as follows :— yieW V '^'^"^"'^^ ' "' ' '"^ ' ^^ ^"' ^^' '■^" """""'' ' *° ^^^^'' ^^^«^' • *° Pres. Suhj. nettoie, etc. P^P'letc. paie, J Pres. Indie. m^ne. mfenes. m^ne. menons. menez. m^nent. Pres. Suhj. mene. menes. mene. meniona. meniez. menent. Put. mineral, meneras. menera. m^nerons. m^nerez. meneront. Condi. mfenerais. menerais. m^nerait. m^nerions mfeneriez. m^neraient, ■r But c^der with the stem- vowel 6 : c^de, etc. cede, etc. c^derai [sedore], etc. c^derais [sedare], etc. Obs: Inmen^-je? [mane 13], e of the ending is not mute, and hence the stem-vowel e is unchanged. Like mener : Verbs with stem- vowel e (for exceptions in -ele'' xnd -eter, see below). 186 THE VERB. [§159 Y' Like c6der: Verbs with stem- vowel ^ + consonant, e.g., rigner • reign,' etc. ' NoTH.-Verb8 like cr^er, create, with gtem-vowel followed by a vowel are reirulpr- Je cr6e, etc. b • 2. Most verbs in -eler, -eter, however, indicate the [e] sound by doubling 1 or t (§ 12, 1), e.g., appcler, ' to call,' Jeter, ' to throw': ,11 R 11/4 tlU. A- Prea. Indie. appvlle. appelles. appcUo. appelons. appelez. appellent. So also, Jeter : jette, etc. Prea. Suhj. appelle. appelles. appelle. appe lions. appeliez. appellent. jette, etc. Put. appellerai. appelleras. appellera. appellerons. appellerez. appelleront. Condi. appellerais. appellerais. appellerait. appellerions. appelleriez. appelleraienv jetterai, etc. jetterais, etc. A few verbs in -eler, -eter take the grave accent precisely like mener e.g., acheter, 'to buy': ' achfete, etc. achfete, etc. aclifeterai, etc. ach^terais, etc. Exceptions like acheter : . agneler, /am&. * ipousBeter, dmt. modeler, morfet- becqueter.pec*. mqueter, label. p^^ler, peel. bourreler, j70«d. geler, /reeze. rapidceter. piece. d(5manteler, dismantle. harceler, harasH. trompeter, trumpet. dcarteler, quarter. marteler, hammer. *Fut. ^pousseterai according to the 'Dictionnaire de rAcad^mie.* Exceptions like appeler or acheter : botteler, bale (hay, etc.). caqueter. cackle. crocheter, pic'^i^ lock), canneler, groove. ciseler, chisel. FORMATION OF T^ VSES. 159. Principal Parts. By the following rules, the various tenses of all regular verbs and of most irregular verbs may be known from five forms of the verb, called principal parts or primary tenses : — 1. The Tnfinitivp gives the Future by addin--^ -ai »ont, and the Conditional by adding -ais, -ais, -ait - ojs, -a, -ons, -ez. I -ipn§, -lez. -ez, -iez. i§ 160-161] IRREGULAR VERBS IN -ER. 137 both" tTnle?^^"^ ^^^ ^"^^ '"'^"'''''" "^ '^ ^''^ ^'^'"^ conjugation for 2 Tho Present Partielph gives the />,/y>.r/.c< Imlkativ, by changinK -ant into -ais. -a,s, -ait, -ions, -iez. -aient. and th^ Present Suhjumtive by changing -ant into -e,.-es, -, -ions, -iez, -ent. « ■^" '^/fo^?'^ ^"'-^'^'^V'/^ gives tho Compouml Tenses, with the auxiliary ^loL^^ '^^ """ ^*'^ ^^^'^^^' "'"^ ^^^" ^"■^*»'^^' ^'th the auxiliary 4tre 4. Tlie Present Indicative gives tlie Imperative by droppintc che pronoun subject of the second singular and fir.t and second pl.ral the -s of the first conjugation second singular being also dropped, except before y and en (cf. §370, 3, obs. 3, 4). 5 Tho Past Definite gives the Imperfect Svhjunctive by changing the final letter of the first singular (-i or -s) into -sse, -sses, -t. -ssions, If'!?. T^""^' P""'"^' ^ circumflex accent over the last vowel of the third singular. Drfnciii'n!^''''-'''^^'' '•*'' '"*'"'° ""^ -'""ditional. are not really ^lerived from the prm^pal parts, as is so.u :.mi, said in Kranunars; the m.thod is n^erely an aid to i6o. IRREGULAR VERBS IN -er. Aller, ' to go.' 1. Infinitive, aller ; /m^. *irai, iras, ira, etc.; condL irais, etc 2. Pres Part allant ; imp/, indie, allais, etc.; pres. subj, aiUe [aijl. allies, aille, alhoiis, alliez, aillent. 3. Past Part. aU6 ; past indef. je suis alld, etc. alltz.^"^''" ^'"^''' ^^'^ ^^^^' '"''' ^^' ''"'''''' ^"^^' ''°"* ' '"'^'"' ^^' ^"°"«' 5. PastDef. allai, alias, alia, alMmes, aliates, aI16rentj imp/, subj. allasse, allasses, aliat, allassions, allassiez, allasaent. * The stem of the future is from the Latin infinitive ire. Like aller : I i. — s'en aller, go away. I V i6i. Envoyer, * to send.* 1. Infimtive. envoyer ;fut. enverrai, etc.; condl. enverrais, etc. , "■ ''• ff''^- .e"^°yant ; imp/, indie, envoyais, envoyais, envoyait, envoyions [avwaijo], envoyiez, envoyaient ; pres. subj. envoie, envoies, envoie, envoyions [avwaijSj, envoyiez, envoient. 188 THE VEUa [§§162-164 i 1 3. Past Part, envoy^ ; pant indff. j'ai envoy(<, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, envoie, envoies, envoie, envoyons, envoyez, envoient*, htipve. envoie, envoyons, envoyez. 6. Past Def. envoyai, envoyas, envoya, envoy&mes, envoyites, envoy^rent; impf. subj. envoyasae, onvoyaBses, en voyM, envoy assions, envoyaasioz, envoyaaaent. Like envoyer : renvoyer, send away, dtsmiu. /V /i^ IRREGULAR VERBS IN -ir. r62^ Acqudrir, * to acquire/ 1. Infinitive, acqudrir ; fut. acquerrai, acquerraa, etc. ; condl. acquer* rais, etc. 2. Prea. Part, acqu^rant ; impf. indie, acqu^rais, etc.; pt^a. subj. acqui^re, acqui^res, acqui6re, acqudriona, acqudriez, acqui^rent. 3. Past Part, acquis ; past indef. j'ai acquia, etc. 4. Prea. Indie, acquiers, acquiera, acquiert, acqu^rons, acqu^rez, aoqui^rent ; impve. acquiera, acqut^rona, acqu^rez. 6. Past Def. acquis, acquis, acquit, acquimes, acquitea, acquirent ; im/pf. aubj. acquiaae, acquisses, acquit, acquissiona, acquiasiez, acquiasent. Like acqu6rir : oonqu^rir, conquer, *querir or qu6rir, seek. requ6rir, require, claim. 8'enqu^rir, inquire. reconqu^rir, reconquer. * Has only the infinitive. 163. Bdnir, 'to bless/ Is regular, but has alao an irregular paat participle b^nit, uaed only as adjective : De I'eau b^nite ; du pain b^nit Holy water ; consecrated bread. 164. Courir, * to run.' 1. Infinitive, courir ; fut. courrai, courras, etc. ; condl. courraia, etc. 2. Prea. Part, courant ; imp/, indie, couraia, etc. ; prea. aubj. coure, coures, coure, couriona, couriez, courent. 3. Past Part, couru ; paat indef. j'ai couru, etc. 4. Prea. Indie, cours, coura, court, courona, courez, courent ; impve. cours, courona, courez. §§165-166] IRHEGULAR VERBS IN -IR. 139 6. Past De/. courus, courus, courut, courflmeB, oouratea. couni- rent; tmp/. suhj. couruss", courusaea, oourat, courueaiona, oouruaaiez. oouruBaent. Like courir are ita compounds : accourir run up, hapten. dl«,c:.rir. discourse. recourir. run a,ain, apply. concourir. co-operate, con- enoourir. incur. ^urfr, succor, help cur, compete. parcourir, run over. NoTB.-Courre, chase (a hunting temX •ometlme* replaces courlr In the infinitive. n i6s Cueillir, ' to gather,' ' pick.' 1. InfinUive. cueillir ; fut. cueiUerai, etc. ; condl. cueiUeraia, etc 2. Pres. Part. cueiUant ; imp/, indie. cueiUaia, etc. ; pret. mbj, cueille, cueiUea, cueille, cueilliona, cueilliez, cueiUent. 3. Past Part, cueilli ; past indef. j'ai cueilli, etc. . 4. Pres. Indie. cueUle, cueilles, cuuiUe, cueiUona, cueiUez, cueiUent; tm/we. cueille, cueillons, cueillez. ^. Past Def. cueillis, cueillis, cueillit, cueillimea, cueilUtea, cueilU- rent; %mpf. aM^. cueillisse, cueillisses, cueillit, cueilliaaiona, cueilUasiez cueilliasent. ' Obs. : The present Indicative, future, and conditional are like those of donner. Like cueillir : aooueilllr, M;efcorn«. * assaillir, assaiV. tressaillir ttort. recuelllir, gather, colle f. f saillir, jut out. * Regular in future and conditional : asaailliral, etc. t Saillir, gush out, rush forth, is regular, like flnir. -J^$L— . ^.l£onni r, 'to sleep? ;^ 1. Infinitive, dormir ; fut. dormirai, etc. ; cmdl. dormiraia. etc. 2. Pres. Part, dormant; impf. indie, dormais, etc., jyres. mbj. dorme, dormes, dorme, dormions, dormiez, dorment. 3. Past Part, dormi; past indef. j'ai dormi, etc ^ 4. Pres. Indie, dors, dora, dort, dormona, dormez, dorment j tmpve. dora, dormons, dormez. ^ 5. Past. Def. dermis, dormia, dormit,dormfme8,dormtte8,dormirent; tmpf. subj. dormisse, dormiaaea, dormlt, dormiaaiona, dormiasiez. dormisaent. Like dormir : endormir, put to sleep. 8'endormir, fall asleep. redorniir, s^cp ajain. rendormlr, put to sleep again. ■e rendormlr, go to sleep again. bouiiiir, boil. (Sbouillir, boil away. rebouillir, boil again. mentir, lie. d^mentir, contradict, belie. partir, set out. d^partir, distribute. 86 d^partir, desist / n I"- itr* repartir, set out again, reply, Sfc repentir, repent. eentir, feel. THE VERB. consentir, consent. pressentir, forebode. lesBentir, resent. servir, serve. [§§167-169 Be Bervir, make use. desservir, clear the table. sortir, ms. subj. conduise, conduises, conduise, conduisions, conduisiez, conduisent. 3. Past Part, conduit ; jmst indef. j'ai conduit, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, conduis, conduis, conduit, conduisons, conduisez, conduisent ; m;we. conduis, conduisons, conduisez. 5. Past Def. conduisis, conduisis, conduisit, conduisimed, condui- sites, conduisirent ; impf. .subj. conduisisse, conduisisses, conduisit, conduisissions, conduisissiez, conduisissent. Like conduire : se conduire, conduct one's self. ^conduire, show out, dismiss. recoiiduire, lead back. *duire, please, suit. 10 d6duire, deduct. enduire, coat (with plaster). induire, induce. introduire*, introduce. produire, produce. rMuire, reduce. reproduire, reproduce. si^diiire; sedv.ce. traduire, translate. 'Xjnstruire, construct. 146 THE VERB. -^ m. i A [§§186-188 ddconstrulre, taloe apart. ddtruire, destroy. flulre, thine. inBtrulre, rn« 147 sent; vnvpf. mglce. , etc. pres. con- issez, •nnu- 3siez, J 189. Coudre, 'to sew.' 1. Infinitive, coudre ; ful. coudrai, etc. ; condl. coudrais, etc. 2. Prea. Part, cousant ; imp/, indie, cousais, oto. ; pres. aubj. Qojjsp, couaes, couse, cousiorts, cousiez, couaent. 3. Past Part, cousu ; past indcf. j'ai cousu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, couds, couds, coud, cousons, cousez, cousent ; impve. couds, cousons, cousez. 6. Past Def. cousis, cousis, cousit, cousimes, cousltes, cousirent ; impf. aubj. cousisse, cousisses, cousit, cou8i8sioijs,^cpugissi£2^cou8i8sent. Like coudre : d^coudre, rip, unaew. J 190. Craindre, *to fear!' ^ ^ 1. Infinitive, craindre ; fut. craindrai, etc. ; condl. craindrais, etc. wij 2. Pres. Part, craignant ; impf. indie, craignais, etc. ; prea. aubj. I «raigne, craignes, craigne, craignions, craigniez, craignent. ^ k^. V) 3. Past Part, craint; past indef. j'ai craint, etc. V^ 4. Pres. Indie, crains, crains, craint, craignons, craignez, craignent; impve. crains, craignons, craignez. 5. Past Def. craignis, craignis, craignit, craignimes, craignttes, craignirent ; imp/, aubj. craignisse, craignisses, craignit, craignissions, craignissiez, craigniasent. Like craindre : Aoiii, uuusiiims, uuuHites, cousirenc ; J, cousiasigns, cpuaissiez. cousissent. ^A ^7^ fit, /^/A recoudre, sew agam. ' ' a«< i)./. Iu9, luH, lut, mnies. lates, lurent| imp/, ^ubj. lusse. luasos, Iflt, lussions, lussiez, lusaont. Like lire : iWre, eUct. rimte, re-elect. ttllre, read offain. 198. Mettre, 'to place/ 'put.* Infinitive, mettre; fut. mettrai, etc.; cow«. mettrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, mettant; imp/, indie, niettais, etc.; ^rt*. mbj. mette. prettes, mette, mettiona, mettiez, mettent. 3. Past Part, mis ; past indcf. j'ai mia, etc. 4. Pr^^. /,M;ec. mets, mets, met, mettons. mettez, mettent; impve meta, mettona, mettez. 5. PastDef. mis, mia, mit, mtmea, mites, mirentj iinpf. subj. misse misses, mit, missioua, missiez, missent. * Like mettre : se mettre, begin. admettre, admit. commettre, commit. compromettre, compro' tnu«. 199. diSmettre, dismiss, ^mettre, emit. s'entreniettre, interpose. oniettre, omit. permettre, permit. promettre, promise. reniettre, put back, hand to. repromettre, promise Uyain. soumettre, submit. transmettre, traimnit. Moudre, 'to grind.' L Infinitive, moudre; fut. moudrai, etc.; condl. moudrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, moulant; impf. indie, moulais, etc.; pres. subj. moule moulea, moule, mouliona, mouliez, moulent. ' 3. Past Part moulu ; past indef. j'ai moulu, etc. ' 4. Pres. Indie, mouds, mouda, irioud, moulona, moulez, moulent • impve. mouds, moulona, moulez. ' 5. Past Def. moulus, moulus, moulut, mouKimes, mouMtes, moulu- rent; xmpf. subj. mouluase, moulusses, moulftt, moulussiona, moulussiez moulussent. * Like moudre : imoudre, UfAet. \j'' )i r^uioudro, sharpen. v^ §§200-202] IRREGULAR VERHS IN -RK 151 200. Naitre, • to be born,' etc. 1. Injinitive. naftre ; A^ nattrai, etc.; condl. naltrais, etc. 2. Prea. Part, naissant ; imp/, indie, naissais, etc.; pren. Mubj. naisse, naissos, naisao, naissionH, iiaiHsioz, naiHsont. 3. Past Part. n6 ; jHist indef. jo suis mi, etc. 4. Pren. Jtidic. nais, nais, nait, naissons, naissez, naiRsont; impve. nais, naissons, naisHoz. 6. Pant Def. naquis, naquis, naquit, naqulmea, naquttes, naqui- rent; impf. subj. naquisae, naquissos, uaqutt, aaquisaions, naquissiez, naquissent. Obt.: Steiu-vowcl 1 has the circumflex (1) everywhere before t. Like naitre : ranattre, revive. 201. Plaire, 'to please.' 1. Infinitive, plaire ; fut. plairai, etc. ; condl. plairaia, etc. 2. Pres. Part, plaisant ; imp/, indie, plaisais, etc. ; pres. eubj. plaise, plaises, plaise, plaisions, plaisiez, plaisciit. 3. Past Part, plu ; past indef. j'ai plu, etc. 4. Prea. Indie, plais, plais, plaJt, plaisons, plaisez, plaisent; impve. plais, plaisons, plaisez. 6. Past Def. plus, plus, plut, plftmes, plfltes, plurent ; imp/, auhj. plusse, plusses, plat, plussions, plussiez, plussent. Like plaire : complaire, humour. d^plaire, dutplease. • taire, say nothing abouL *n talt has no circumflex. 202. Prendre, *to take.* ■■)\ 1. Injinitive. prendre ; fut. prendrai, etc. ; condL prendrais, etc. 2. Prea. Part, prenant ; imp/, indie, prenais, etc. ; prea. eubj. prenne, prennes, prenne, prenions, preniez, prennent. 3. Past Part, pris ; past indef. j'ai pris, etc. ^ 4. Pres. Indie, prends, prends, prend, prenons, prenez, prennent; impve. prends, prenons, prenez. 5. Past Def. pris, pris, prit, primes, prites, prirent j imp/ mbj. prisse^ prisses, prit, prissions, prissiez, prissent. Like prendre are its compounds : apprendre, /earn. entreprendre, tmdertofce. rapprendre, foam ooafn. ueprendre, part. tf^prendre, he taken. rsnranHrp take h.-'ck d^pprendre. unlearn. ae m^prendre; be mistakmw v^j^vsadxt^mrvrUe. oomprendre, undwaUmi. urji«>iu«^ mrynw. v A *i^t^ /I > ■• X 152 203. THE VEIia R^soudre, Ho resolve.* [§§203-206 1. Infinithe. r^soudre ; fttt. it^soudmi, etc. ; condl. rtsoudrais, eta 2. Pre.% Part, r^solvant ; imjif. indie, ic'jsolvais, etc. ; pi-es, suhj. rt'solvo, resolves, resolve, resolvions, reaolviez, resolvent. o. Past Part, r^solu iiml r^sous ; pant imfef. j'ai resolu, etc. ' 4. Pn's, Indie, r^sous, resoua, rt^sout, r(5solvons, rtSsolvoz, rdsolvent ; iinpve. resous, rt5Holvc.».s, resolvez. 6. Pant Def. r^solus, retiolua, r(5Holut, r«5aolAme8, rdsolAtes, r^solurent; Imjpf. suhj. resolusso, resoiu.'^ses, rusolut, resolussions, rdsolussiez, r^suluB»ent. Like r^soudre : * abcoudre, absolve. * diasoudre, dissolve. * Pasi part, absous (f. absoute), dissous (t. diasoute), respectively, lack the poat definite and iiuperfect subjunutive. 204. Rire, ' to laugh.' ^' 1. Intuitive, rire; fitt. rirai, etc.; condl. rirais, etc. 2. Prea. Part, riant; imp/, indie, riais, etc.; pres. aubj. rie, ries, rie, riions, riiez, rient. 3. Past Part, ri ; past indef. j'ai ri, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, ris, ris, rit, rious, riez, rient ; impve. ris, rions, r'ez. 5. Past Def. ris, ils, rit, rimes, rites, rirent; imjif. suhj. risso, risses, rit, rissions, rissiez, rissent. Like rire : ae rire, make sport (of, de) sourire, smile. 205. Sourdre, *to rise,' etc. 1. Infinitive, sourdre; fiit. il sourdra ; condl, il sourdrait. 2. Pres. Part, sourdant; impf. indie, il sourdait; pres. suhj. il sourde. 3. Pa.Ht Part. ; past indef. . 4. Pres. Indie. , , sourd, , , sourdent j impve. — — » 5. Past Def. il souroit ; impf. suhj. il sourdit. Note, — Little used beyond the infin. and third bing. pres. indie. ^ 206. Suivre, ' to follow.' L Infinitive, suivre; ful. suivrai, etc.; condl. suivrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, suivant ; inijf. indie, suivais, etc.; pres. suhj. siiive, suives, suive, suivions, suiviez, suiveat. >03-206 §§207-209] IRRFOTTLAR VERBS IN -RE. 153 is, eta res. sub). insolvent c solurent ; solussiez. 3k the post ries, ne. ons, r^ez. JO, risses, il sourde. 've. hj. stiive. V 3. Past Part, suivi ; past bulef. j'a Hiiivi, jtc. 4. Pre«. Indie, suis, suis, suit, Buiv ma, suivez, suivont ; impve. Buis, Buivons, Huivez. 5. Pant Dcf. suivis, puivia, Ruivi't, Buivtmoa, Buivttes, suivirent; xmpf. 8ubj. auivisso, suivisHos, suivit, BuiviaHions, suiviaaiez, BiiiviHsout. Liko suivre : ■•einuivreClnipers.), u'/o?tow». pomtaivn, purtue. 207. Tistre, *to weave.' Used only iu the i>afit part, tissu, and compound tensea 208. " Traire, -to milk.' 1. Infinitive, traire ; fut. trairai, etc. ; condl. trairaia, etc. 2. Pres. Part, trayant ; imp/, indie, trayais, etc. j pre8. mhj. traie, traies, traio, tiayion.s, trayiez, traient. 3. P((Ht Part, trait ; past indef. j'ai trait, etc. 4. Pn'3. Indie, trais, trais, trait, tiayons, trayez, traient} impve, kais, trayons, trayez. 6. Past Def. ," impf. stdij. . Like traire : 8oustrb>i(i, subtract, •braire, bray. abatraire, abstract extraire, extract. attraire, attract. reiitralie, darn. distraire, distract. retraire, redeem (legal). ♦Commonly used only in the infln. and the third pers, pres. indio. fut and oonOL 209. Vaincre, 'to conquer.' 1. Infinitive, vaincre ; fut. vaincrai, etc. ; condl. vaincrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, vainquant ; impf. indie, vainquais, etc. ; pres. «t?^ vainque, vainques, vainque, vainquions, vainquiez, vainquent. ■jn^^' Past Part, vaincu ; past indef. j'ai -, aincu, etc. f y/ ^' Pres. Indie, vaincs [vf ], vaincs, vainc, vainquons, vainquez, vain* I j/I.-^ quent ; impve. vaincs, vainquona, vainquez. 5. Past Def. vainquis, vainquis, vainquit, vainquimes, vainquites, vainquirent ; impf subj. vainquissa, vainquisses, vainquit, vainquissionSi minquissiez, vaini^uissent. Obs. : Stem c [k] bocomes qu [k] before any vowel except u. Like vaincre : con vaincre, convinee. 154 THE VERB. 1 11 f n ll ' s i It li ll m '/ [§§210-213 210. • Vendre, ' to sell.' Irregular only in tliird singular present indicative : II vend (t omitted), Like vendre : All verbs in -andre, -endre*. -erdre, -ondre, -ordre. * jlxcept prendre, reprendre, surprendre, etc. 211. Vivre, ' to live.' x^ 1. Infinitive, vivre ; fut. vivrai, etc. ; condl. vivrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, vivant ; iinpf. indie, vivais, etc.; pres. subj., vive, vjves, vive, vivions, viviez, vivent. 3. Past Part, vecu ; pa,^t indef. j'ai vecu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, vis, vis, vit, vivons, vivez, vivent ; impve., vis, vivons, vivez. 5. Past Def. vecus, vecus, vecut, vecftmes, vecfttes, v^curent ; impf. subj. v^cusse, vecusses, v^cfit, vecussions, vecussiez, vecussent. Like vivre : revivre, revive. survivre. survive. IRREGULAR VERBS IN -oir. Note.— The few verbs in -oir, which are all irregular, form, in some grammars, a separate conjugation, the third, verbs in -re being the fourth. 212. Avoir, ' to have.' See §154 for the full conjugation of this verb. Like avoir : * ravoir, have again. * Used only in the infinitive. 213. Recevolr, ' to receive.' 1. Infinitive, recevoir ; fut. rec jvrai, etc. ; condl. recevrais, etc. / 2. Pres. Part, recevant ; imp/, indie, recevais, etc.; i?ms. subj. U^ re9oive, regoives, re^oive, recevions, receviez, regoivent. \ 3. Past Part, re^u ; past maef. j ai re9u, etc. ^ 4. Pres. Indie. ve. °»v.«icii» tLike the forms in oi (oy) of asaeolT. hnt Jut. and condl. surseoiraifa). s 156 THE VERB. [§§216-219 2l6. Ddchoir, ' to decline/ etc. 1. Infinitive, d^choir ; fat. decherrai, etc. ; condl. ddcherrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part. ; iwpf. indie. ; pres. siibj. dechoie, dechoies, dechoie, ddchoyions, dt5choyiez, dochoient. 3. Past Part, dechu ; i5a.s< indef. j'ai dechu or je suis dechu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, dechois, dechois, dt5choit, dechoyons, dechoyez, lit^choient ; impve. dechois, dechoyons, d(^choyez. 5. Past Dff. dechus, dechus, dechut, dechfimes, d^chutes, ddchurent ; iinpf. subj. dt^chusse, dechusses, dechut, dechussions, d^chussiez, d^chussent. Like dechoir : * choir, fall. * rechoir, fall again. *Hardly used beyond the infin. andcomp. tenses. 217. ]^choir, * fall due,' etr 1. Infinitive, echoir ; /»/. il *echerra ; condl. il *echerrait. 2. Pres. Part, echeant ; imp/, indie, il ^choyait ; pres. subj. il echoie. 3. Past Part, echu ; past indef. je suis 6chu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie. , , echoit or echet, , , ^choient or ^cheent ; impve. . 5. Past Def. , , il echut ; , , ils (^churent ; impf. subj. il echut. * Or regular: il ^choira(lt). 218. Falloir, 'must,' etc. (irapers.). 1. Infinitive, falloir ; fat. il faudra ; condl. il faudrait. 2. Pres. Part. ; impf. indie, il fallait ; pres. subj. il faille. 3. Past Part, fallu ; past indef. il a fallu. 4. Pres. Indie, il faut ; impve. . 5. Past Def. il fallut ; impf. subj, il fallut. f 219. Mouvoir, * to move.' 1. Infinitive, mouvoir ; fut. mouvrai, etc.; condl. mouvrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, tnouvant; impf. indie, niouvais, etc.; prK.6. subj. meuve, meuves, meuve, niouvions, mouviez, meuvent. 3. Past Part, mu (f. niue, pi. mu(e)s); ])ast indef. j'ai niA, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, meus, nieus, meut, mouvona, mouvez, meuvent; impve. meus, mouvons, luouvez. §§220-223] IRREGULAR VERBS IN -OIR. 157 5. Pant Def. mus, mus, mut, mftmes, mfttes, murent ; impf. subj. musse, musses, mftt, mussions, mussiez, m^^sent. Obs.: Stem-vowel becomes eu wherever stressed. Like mouvoir : *6mouvok, arouse. *vromomoir, promote. * Past participle has no circumflex accent. 220. «y^ Pleuvoir, Ho rain ' (impers.). 1. Infinitive, pleuvoir ; fut. il pleuvra ; condl. il pleuvrait. 2. Pres. Part, pleuvant; impf. hidic. il pleuvait; jtre.s. suhj. il pleuve. 3. Past Part, plu ; pant hide/, il a plu. 4. Pres. Indie, il pleut ; impve. . 5. Past Def. il plut j imp/, .mhj. il pWt. 221. Pouvoir, * to be able,' etc. 1. Infinitive, pouvoir ;/m<. pourrai, etc. ; condl. pourrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, pouvant ; impf. indie, pouvais, etc. ; pres. subj. puisse, puisses, puisse, puissions, puissicz, puissent. • 3. Past Part, pu ; past indef. j'ai pu. /.7 4. Pres. Indie, puis or peux, peux, peut, pouvons, pouvez, peuvent : impve. . 5. Past Def. pus, pus, put, pftmes, pfttcs, parent ; impf subj. pusse, pusses, pO.t, pussions, pussiez, pusscnt. Obs. : The first sin^. pres. indie, in ne-ation is usually « je ne peux pas,' or 'je ne puis' ; in questions, only ' puis-je?'; otherwise ' puis ' or ' peux.' 222. Savoir, ' to know/ etc. 1. Infinitive, savoir ;/«/. saurai, etc. ; condl. sauiais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, sachant ; impf indie, savais, etc. ; pres. subj. sache, saches, sache, sachions, sachiez, sachent. 3. Past Part, su ; past indef. j'ai su, etc. ^x] sac1;orsrsache^" ^^'^ ^''^' '^''' '^'*' ''^'^''"'' ''''^""' '^''""* ' '"^P''"- «^^«' 5. Past Def sus, sus, sut, silmes, sr6valoir, prevail. fchaloir. revaloir, pay back, return like for like. *Pres. subj, pr^vale, etc. t Hardly used beyond, ' II ne me chaut de,' • I care not for.* 224. Voir, 'to see.' 1. Infinitive, voir ; fut. verrai, etc. ; condl. verrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, voyant ; impf. indie, voyais, etc. ; pres. subj. voie, voies, voie, voyions, voyiez, voient. 3. Past Part, vu ; past hide/, j'ai vu, etc. 4. Pres. Jndic. vols, vois, voit, voyons, voyez, voient; impve. vois, voyons, voyez. 5. Past Def. vis, vis, vit, vimes, vites, virent; imjf. subj. visse, visses, vit, vissions, viasiez, vissent. Like voir : entrevoir, catch sight of. * pourvoir, provide. f pr^voir, foresee. revoir, see again. *d6pourvoir, strij), leave destitute. *Past def. -vus, etc.; impf. subj. -vusae, etc.; /«(. and condl. -voirai(s), regular ^Fut. md condl. -VOirai(s), etc., regular. 225. Vouloir, *to will,' etc. 1. Lifin. vouloir ; fut. voiidrai, etc. ; condl. voudrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, voulant ; impf. indie, voulais, etc. ; pres. subj. veuille, veuilles, veuille, voulions, vouliez, veuillent. 3. Past Part, voulu ; past indef. j'ai voulu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, veux, veux, veut, voulons, voulez, veulent; impve. veux, voulons, voulez. 6. Past Def. voulus, voulus, voulut, voulumes, voulAtes, voulu- rent ; impf. subj. voulusse, voulusses, voulut, voulussions, voulussi3Z, voulussent. Obs. : St«n '-vowel becomes eil whenever it is stressed. Nora.— The regular impve. veux, voulons, voulez is rare; veuille2='have the kindness to' geuerahy serves as second plural imperative. §226] LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 159 226. Reference List of Irregular Verbs. Note.— Each verb in the list is referred to the section in which its irregularity is explained. For verbs in -cer, -ger, see §156 ; for verbs in -yer, §157 j for verbs with stem-vowel e or 6, §158 ; for verbs in -andre, -endre, -erdre, -ondre, -ordre, §210. A. abattre §180 absoudre 203 abstenir 177 abstraire 208 accourir 164 accroire 191 accroitre 192 accueillir 135 acquerir 162 adjoindre 190 admettre 198 advenir 178 aller 160 » apercevoir 213 apparaltre 188 apparoir 188 appartenir, . .„ .. 177 apprendre 202 assaillir 165 asseoir 215 astreindre 190 atteindre 190 attraire 208 avenir 178 avoir 154 B. battre 180 b^nir 163 boire 181 bouillir 166 brairc 208 bruire . . 182 c. ceindre § 190 chaloir 223 choir 216 circoncire 187 circonscrire 194 circonvenir 178 clore 183 combattro 180 conimettre 198 comparaitre 188 comparoir 188 complaire 201 comprendre 202 compromettre ... 198 concevoir 213 conclure 184 concourir 164 conduire 185 confire 187 conjoindre 190 connaitre 188 conqu^rir 162 consentir 166 construire 185 contenir 177 contraindre 190 contredire 193 contrefaire 195 contrevenir 178 convaincre 209 convenir 178 coudre 189 courir § 164 courre 164 couvrir 176 craindre 190 croire 191 croitre 192 eueillir 165 cuiro 185 D. d^battre 180 decevoir 213 dechoir 216 declore 183 deconfire 187 deconstruire .... 185 d^coudre 189 decouvrir 178 decrire 194 decroire 191 d§croitre 192 d^dire 193 d^duire 185 defaillir 167 defaire 195 ddjoindre 190 d^raentir 166 d^mettre 198 departir , . 166 d^peindre 190 deplaire 201 ddpourvoir 224 deprendre 202 ddsapprendre. . . . 202 li 1 . ^ 160 iesservir §166 d^teindre 190 d^tenir. 177 d^truire 185 devenir 178 d^vetir 179 devoir 214 dire 193 disconvenir 178 discourir 164 disjoindre 190 disparaitre 188 dissoudre 203 distraire 208 dormir 166 duire iao E. ^bouillir 166 ^choir 217 Colore 183 ^conduire 185 6crire 194 ^lire 197 emboire 181 ^mettre 198 ^moudre 199 ^mouvoir 219 empreindrc 190 enceindre 190 enclore 183 encourir 164 endormir 166 enduire 185 enfreindre 190 enfuir 170 enjoiiidre 190 enqu^rir 162 ensuivre 206 entremettre 198 entreprendre 202 THE VERB. entrotenir §177 entrevoir 224 entr'ouvrir 176 envoyer 161 dpreindre 190 ^prendre 202 dquivaloir 223 ^teindre 190 etre 154 (5treindre 190 exclure 184 extraire 208 F. faillir 167 faire 195 falloir 218 feindre 190 ferir 168 fleurir 169 forclore 183 forfaire 195 frire 196 fuir 170 G. geindre 190 gesir 171 H. hair 172 I. imboire 181 inclure 184 induire 185 inscrire 194 instruire 185 interdire 193 intervenir 178 introduire 185 issir 173 J. joindre 190 [§226 L. lire §197 luire 185 M. maintenir 177 malfaire 195 maudire 193 m^connaitre 188 mMire 193 mefaire 195 mentir 166 meprendre 202 messeoir 215 mettre 198 moudre 199 mourir 174 mouvoir 219 N. naitre 200 nuire 185 O. obtenir 177 offrir 176 oindre 190 omettre 198 ouir , 175 ouvrir 176 P. paitre 188 paraitre 188 parcourir 164 parfaire 195 partir 166 parvenir 178- peindre 190 percevoir. 213 permettre 198 plai?idre 190 plaire 201 pleuv'oir 220 §226] LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 161 poindre §190 poursuivre 206 pourvoir 2'24 pouvoir 221 predire 193 prendre 202 preserire 194 pressentir 166 pr^valoir 223 pr^venir 178 prt^voir 224 produire 185 promettre 19.. promouvoir 219 proscrire 194 provenir 1 78 ^"^^:^| 1G2 querirj R. rabattre 180 rappreudre 202 rasseoir 215 ratteindre 190 ravoir 212 reboire 181 rebouillir 166 recevoir 213 rechoir 216 reclure 184 reconduire 1 85 reconnaitre 188 reconquerir 1 02 reconstriiire .... 185 recoudrc ] 89 recourir 1 64 recoil vrir 176 r^crire 194 recroitre 192 recueillir 165 recuire 185 rcdufairo 195 redevenir 178 U redcvoir §214 rcdiro 193 redoriTiir 166 reduiit! 185 rt''<'lire 197 relaire 195 rejoindre 190 relire 197 rcluire 185 remettre 198 reiiioudn^ 199 r^-raoudre 199 renait'o 200 rendormir 166 runtraire.. 208 rcnvoyer 161 n paitic 188 reparaitre 188 repaitir 166 repeindre 190 repentir 166 reprendre 202 reproduire 185 repromettre 198 recjuerir 162 1 soudic 203 ressentir 166 ressortir 106 ressouvenir 178 restreindre 190 reteindre 190 retenir 177 retraire 208 revaloir 223 rcvcnir 178 revOtir 179 revivie 211 revoir 224 rire 204 rouvrir 176 S. saillir 165 satisfaire 195 savoir §222 secouri, 164 seduire 185 sentir 166 seoir 2l6 servir 1.66 sortir 166 souffrir 176 souinettre 198 sourdre 205 souriro 204 Houscrire 194 sou.straire 208 soutenir 177 souvenir 178 subvenir 178 suffire 187 Ruivre 206 siircroitre 192 surfaire 195 siuprendre 202 surseoir 215 survenir 178 survivre 211 T. taire 201 teindre 190 tenir 177 tistre 207 traduirc 185 traire 208 tran,serirc 194 transmettro 198 tressaillir 165 V. vaincre 209 valoir 223 vciidie 210 venir 178 vetir 179 vivre 211 voir 224 VQuloir 225 I I ^ 162 THE VERB. USE OF A JXILIARY VERBS. [§§227-229 \ 227. Avoir + the pcast participle forms the compound tenses of all transitive and of most intransitive verbs (cf. § 155). 228. Etre + the past participle forms the compound tenses of all reflexive verbs (§242), and of the following intransitives denoting motion or change of condition (cf. § 155) : aller, go. dchoir, fall due. mourir, die. arriver, arrive. ^clore, hatch out. naitre, be bam. choir, fall. entrer, etiter, go (come) in. venir, come. d^c^der, die. So also, the following compounds of venir : devenir, become. parvenir, attain. survenir, supervene. redevenir, become again, provenir, proceed. intervenir, intervene. revenir, come back. 229. 1. Avoir or ^tre + the past participle forms the com- pound tenses of a number of intransitive verbs, the general distinction being that avoir, when so used, denotes action, while 6tre denotes state or condition resulting from action : La pluie a pass^ par la fenetre. La pluie est pass^e. EUe a grandi bien vite. Elle est grandie. The rain came through the window. The rain is past. She grew up very fast. She is grown up. 2. Reference list of verbs with avoir or ^tre : aborder, land. accourir, run to. accroitre, increase. iipparaitre, appear. baisser, fall, decline. cesser, cease. changer, change. croitre, grow. d^border, overflow. ^Itichoir, decay. d6croitre, decrease. d6g(5n6)"(ir, degenerate. demeurer renain. *'le8cendre, descend. disparaitre, disappear, dchapper, escape. tehouer, be stranded, fail, C'mbe".ir, grow handsomer. emigier, emigrate. empirer, groio tvorse. c\))irer, expire. grandir, gro^v up. *monter, go up. *partir, set out. I'asser, pass. rechapper, escape again. "redescendre, come doivn again, *renionter, go up again. *rentrer, go in again. repasser, pass again. *ressortir, go out again. ressusciter, revive. rester, remain. *retomber, fall again. *retourner, go back. sonner, strike, toll. *sortir, go out, *toraber, fall, vieillir, grow old. •Almost .' vays with fitre, and p}T,cec 6tre exclusively. ome graramarians among verba taking §230] USE OF VERB PHRASES. 163 a. Any verb in the list, used transitively, must, of course, take avoir (§227): II m'a pass6 la plume. He handed mo the pen. Avez-vouH rentr6 votre bid? Have you hauled in your wheat? lis ont descendu le tableau. They have taken down the picture. b. The meaning also determines the auxiliary in a few other cases : ifetre. Avoir. convenlr, suit, become. discoiivenir, not to suit, be discordant. repartir, reply. Nous sommes convenus du prix. Le prix ne m'a pas convenu. convenlr, agree. disconvenir, deiiy. repartir, go away again. We are (have) agreed on the price. The price did not suit me. USE OF VERB PHRASES. 230. Auxiliary Function. Several verbs, when followed by an infinitive, have a sort of auxiliary function, and serve to form verb phrases of various values, modal, temporal, etc. : 1. Vouloir= ' will,' • wish to,' * want to,' * desire to,' etc. : p Je ne veux pas rester. I will not remain. II voudrait (bien) le savoir. He would like to know it. EUe n'a pas voulu m'ecouter. She would not listen to me. II aurait voulu le fcAre. He would have liked to do so. Veuillez le faire. Be so good as to do so. a. Distinguish from * will ' of simple futurity : Elle vous dcoutera. She will listen to you. 2. Devoir=* ought,' 'should,' *must,' 'be to,' 'have to,' 'be obliged to,' 'intend to,' etc., varies in force in different tenses: Present : je dois rester. Imperfect : je devais parler. Future : je devrai revenir. Conditional : je devrais dcrire. I am to (have to, intend to, must) remain. I was to (had to, etc. ) speak. I shall have to (be obliged to) come back. I ought to (should) write. Past Indefinite : j'ai dii m'arrcter. I have had to (been obliged to) stop, must have stopped. ^ Mi t y ■it 164 THE VERB. [§230 Past Definite : Je dus revenir. I had to corao back. ;; s fifl I ought to )iave (should nave) known. Conditional Anterior r j' savoir. 3. Pouvoir= ' can,' * be able to,' ' be permitted to,' * may,' etc.: II ne pouvait pan porter le sac. He oould nut carry the sack. May T go to town ? They could (miyht) have tl me it. 1 could do it, if I would. Could they find any ? Might I ask you? Puis-je allpr k la ville ? Tla auraient pu le faire. Je pourrais le faire, si je voulais. Pourraient-ils en trouver ? Pourrais- je vous demandei- ? 4. Savoir= ' know how to', * can,' etc. ; Elle salt chanter et danser. She can sing and dance. a. Distinguish savoir in this sense from pouvoir : Elle est enrou^e et ne peut pas She is hoarse and cannot sing this chanter ce soir. evening. 6. The conditional with ne li peculiar idiomatic force s Je ne saurais le croire. I cannot believe it. 5. Oser= 'dare': Je n'ose pas le lui dire. I dare not tell him so. NOTB.— The above Ave verbs are sometimes called 'modal auxiliaries.' / 6. Faire = ' make,' ' cause to,' * cause to be,' ' have,' ' order,' • order to be,' etc. : J'ai fait dtudier les enfanta. I have made the children study, H les fera ^couter. He will make them listen. H s'est fait faire un habit. He had a coat made for himself. Faites chercher un mddecin. Send for a doctor. a. A governed substantive follows the infinitive, but a governed con- junctive personal pronoun (not reflexive) goes with faire : Faites venir le domestique. Have the servant come. Faites-le venir. Have him come. 6. If the infinitive with faire have a direct object, the j^ersonal object of faire must be indirect (cf. §293, 2, a) : Je fis ^rire mon fils. I had my son write. Je fis ^criro un devoir h. mon fils. I made my son write an exercise. Tfoifoa-lci-ln! Anvirvi IVTato Viim ■urrifft if. Je le leur fis voir. I showed them it. [§230 lid nave) )tc.: melt. 8ing this ",' * order tudy. nself. 'ned Gon- ial object ercise. §§231-232] AGREEMENT OF VEllB AND SUIilECT. 166 c. Possible ambiguity is Bomotimos avoided by par: II fit porter lo sac par lu guide. He had the sack carried by the guide. d. Note the passive force of a t msitive infinitive after faire : Je ferai ecrirr une lettre. I shall have a letter written. 7. LaiSi'T = ' let,' has usually the f me constructions as faire : Laisscz ecrire Ics enfiints. Let tliu children write. Laissez, our {m- -les) ticriro un Let them ^ rite an exercise. duvuir. 8. The present and iuiperfect ol aller+an infinitive give a kind of imniediato future, as also in English: II va I'acheter. . He is ^ ling to (is about to) buy it. Nous allion nous arreter. We were about to top. 11 allait 80 iioyer. He was on tlio point of drowning 9. Similarly i <> pre ciit and imperfect of vciiir de + an infinitive give a kind of immediate past : Ju viensdr lo voir. I have just seen him. II venait do i'entendre. He had just heard it. \ .A K AGREEMENT OF VERB AND SUBJECT. 231. Gei eral Rule. The verb agrees with its subject in. number and j lerson : Les hommes sont mortels. Men ar mortal. Tout le nionde est ici. Everyb' dy is here, Toi et moi (nous) no taisons qu'un. You an 1 a. but one. 232. Simple Subject. Special rules for ilie agreement of a verb v ih one subject are : — 1. A colluct" e subject singular, when not followed by de, or when followed by de + the singular, has a singular ^ M-b : Lo pcuple franij'ais est brave. The i^rench people are brave. Lo senat I'a decidd. The senate has (or have) decided it. La plupart du 11. onde le croit. Most people believe it. 2. A collective subject singular + de + a plural takes a plural verb, unless the sense c i the collective be dominant: 166 THE VKIIB. [§232 Une nu^e do sauvagen I'attaxiufe- rent. Uno nin5o do traits robscurcit. Uno partio des soldats restent. Uno partio des bourgeoiH protesta. Cetto sorto do poires est ch6re. A cloud of savages attacked him. A cloud of arrows hid him. A part of tiio soldiw s remain. A part - f t'lo citizens protested. This sort of pears is dear. a. Wlien so used, adverbs of quantity, c.;/. beaucoup, peu, etc., the nouns nombre, quantity, without article, and la plupart, aro regularly plural in sense ; so also, force : Beaucoup de gens pensent ainsi. Peu do gens lo savent. Que d'ennemis m'at taquent ! Nombre d'Atheniens avaient fui. La plupart dos soldats pt^rirent. Force sots lo tenteront. Many peo .e think so. Few people know it. How many enemies attack me ! A number of 'Athenians had fled. Most of the soldiers perished. MiMiy a fool will try it. ft. Beaucoup, peu, combien, used absolutely, aro singular or plural according to the sense of the de clause implied ; la plupart when so used is always plural : Beaucoup (.sc. de gens) le croient. Many {sc. people) believe it. Peu {sc. de ccci) me suffini. Little (.sr. of this) will suffice me. La plupart vot^rent contre. The majority voted nay. c. Plus d'un is singular, unless reciprocal or repeated, and moins de deux is plural : More than one witness has sworn. Less than two is no use. More rogues than one cheat each other. More than one officer, more than one general was killed. 3. Ce requires a plural verb only when the predicate is a plural loun, a plural pronoun of the third person, or when ce refers to a preceding plural : Is it your friends ? It is they. Those must be his. They are our fellow-creatures. His desires are his law. Plus d'un tdmoin a dt^pos^. Moins de deux ne valent rien. Plus d'un fripon so dupent I'un I'autre. Plus d'un officier, plus d'un g^n^ral furent tu^s. Sont-ce vos amis V -Ce sont eux Ce doivent etre les siens. Ce sont nos semblables. Ses ddsirs, ce sont sa loi. But : C'est moi ; c'est toi ; c'est lui ; c'est nous ; c'est vous. a. The third singular Li often used for the third plural in this nonstrup- tion, more especially in familiar language or to avoid harsh locutioiits . §233] AGREEMENT OK VERR AND SUBJECT. w Est-co les Anglais quo jo crains ? Is it tho English that I fear ? Cost eux qui I'ont fait. It is they wlio did it. C'est doa betisea. That is stupidity. Ne fut-co quo quelquos lignea. If it wore only a few lines. h. The verb with ce is singular when the predicate is a numeral + a noun of collectivo force : C'est dix heiir.vs qui sonnont. It is ten o'clock that is striking. c. Si ce n'est is always singular : Qui, si CO n'est nos parents ? Who, if it is not our parents ? 4. II (impers.) always has a singular verb, whatever be the logical subject : II est arrive bien dea choses. Many things have happened. II en reste trois livrea. Tlu-co pounds of it remain. a. Importt - is construed personally or impersonally : Qu'importe (importent) les depena? What matters the cost ? 233. Composite Subject. A verb common to two or more subjects is regularly plural ; when the si^bjects differ in person, the verb agrees with the first person, if one subject is of the first person, otherwise with the second : Toi et moi (nous) ne faisons qu'un. You and I are but one. Sa s(Eur et lui sont la. His sister and he are there. a. With subjects of different person, pleonastic nous, vous, is generally used: Vous et lui (vous) I'avez vu. You and he have seen it. b. With ou = 'or,' ni. . .ni= 'neither. . .nor,' the verb is singular if the sense is clearly alternative, i.e., the one subject excluding the other, otherwise generally plural ; I'un ou I'autre is always singular : Sa vie ou sa mort en depend. His life or death depends on it. Ni lui ni votre fr6re n'aura ce Neither he nor your brother will Poste. ^ have that post. Ni I'un ni I'autre ne sont bons. Neither is good. L'une ou I'autre viendra. The one or the other will come. L'un ou I'autre jour me convient. Either day suits me. c. If the subjects (generally without at) are synonymous, or nearly sa or form a climax, the verb may be singular- -i '"t ih4 168 THE VERB. [§234-2a Sa dignity, sa noblesse frappa tout Ic monde, L'heure, le lieu, le bras so choisit aujourd'hui. Une excuse, un mot le d«5sarme. His dignity, his nobility struck everybody. The hour, the place, the arm are chosen to-day. An excuse, a word disarms him. d. When the subjects are recapitulated by a word in the singulai e.g., tout, rien, etc., the verb is singular agreeing with it : Remords, crainte, perils, vien ne Remorse, fear, dangers, nothing de- m'a retenue. terred me. €. With an intervening clause, e.g., ainsi que, plus que, etc., the subject is usually only apparently composite : La vertu, plus que le savoir, eleve Virtue, more than knowledge, ele- I'homnie. vates man. /. Even with et the sense is occasionally singular, or distributive, or alternative, and a singular verb is required : Le bien et le mal est en ta main. Good and ill are in thy band, L'un et I'autre pent se dire. Both may be said. L'et^ est revenu et le soleil. Summer has returned and the sun. Tombe Argos et ses murs. Let Argos and its walls fall. 234. Relative Subject. The verb agrees with the rela- tive pronoun subject, which is itself of the number and person of the antecedent (see also Relative Pronoun) : C'est nous qui I'avons fait. It is we who have done it. Dieux (vous) qui m'exaucez ! (Ye) Gods who hear me ! POSITION OF SUBJECT. 235. General Rule. The subject usually precedes the veib. Exceptions to this rule are noted in the following sections. 236. Interrogative Word Order. Direct interrogatioii is expressed as follows : — 1. A personal pronoun subject (also ce or on) follows the verb, and is joined to It by a hyphen : Farlez-vous fran9ai8? Do you speak French^ Est-celui? Is it he? ^•236] POSITION OF SUBJECT. 169 a. The letter -t- is inserted after a third singular with final vowel before a pronoun witli initial vowel : Parla-t-elle ? Parle-t-on? Did she speak? Do they speak? h. A final e of the first singular takes acute accent, but with the sound of [e] : Donne-je ? [done : 3]. Do I give ? 2. A noun subject precedes the verb, and is repeated after it. by a pleonastic pronoun ; so also, possessive, demonstrative and indefinite pronouns : Get h Dmme parle-t-il anglais ? Does that man speak English ? Cela est-il vrai ? Is tliat true ? Les miens ne sont-ils pas bons ? Are mine not good ? 3. Questions are also asked by interrogative words (adjec- tives, pronouns, adverbs) : Quel po6te a (5crit cela ? A quelle heure partira son ami ? Qui est la ? Qu'y a-t-il ? Lequel des deux est parti ? Combien coute cela ? Combien cela coute-t- -il?/ What poet wrote that ? At v/hat o'clock will his friend go ? Who is there ? What is the matter' Wliich of the two has gone ? How much does that cost ? a. The word order of either of the last two examples is commonly permissible for noun subject under this rule. h. The word order of the last example is obligatory wlien the verb has a direct object (not reflexive), or a prepositional complement, o.< when ambiguity might aris'j ; this arrangement is preferable with pourquoi r, or when a compound tense is used : Oil le roi tient-il sa cour ? Where does the king hold his court ? De quoi le roi parle-t-il ? Of" what is the king speaking ? Quel prix le roi paya-t-il ? What price did tie king pay ? Jean qu.: aime-t-il ? Wliom does John love ? Pourquoi mon ami part-il ? Why does my friend go ? Quand ce roi a-t-il dt^ decapitd / When was this king beheaded ? 4. By prefixing est-ce que ? a statement becomes a ques- tion without change in its word order : Est-ce que vous partez ? Are you going away ? Quand est-ce que vous partez ? When are you going away ? I ft i£ il. 170 THE VERB. [§237 a. The use of est-ce que? is permissible with all forms of the verb, but is obligatory with a monosyllabic first singular (except ai-je ?, suis-je ? dis-je ?, dois-je ?, fais-je ?, puis-J2 ?, sais-je ?, vais-je ?, vois-je ?), and is preferable to avoid forms like donn6-je ? : Est-ce que je sers, moi ? Do I serve ? Est-ce que je parle de lui ? Do I speak of him ? 5. Interrogation is also exoressed by mere inflection of the voice, without change in word order : Vous partez dej^ ? You are going already ? 237. Rhetorical Inversions. Owing to rhetorical con- siderations the noun subject not uncommonly follows the verb, or ihe sentence assumes interrogative form, though not inter- rogative, as follows : — 1. In interjected remarks explanatory of direct quotation, as in English : Fais comme tu voudras, dit-il. Do as you please, said he. Que veux-tu ? demanda la mere. Wliat do you wish? asked the mother. 2. In optative clauses when que is omitted, and also after the rare omission of si, * if ' : (Long) live the king ! Perfsh the tyrant ! If he wished money, his father al- ways xvc him some. If it were only for that. 3. Very commonly after certain adverbs and adverbial locutions : Du moins devrait-il attendre. He should at least wait. A peine le jour fut-il arriv^. Hardly had the day arrived. Such are : k peine, hardly. * peut-Stre, perhaps. aussi, hence. encore, besides. aussi bicn, moreover. toujours, however. au moinn, at least. tout au plus, at most. du moins, at least. d'autant plus, the more. *Peut-6tre que does not cause inversion : 'Peut-6tre qu'il ]j fera,' 'Perhaps he i^illdoso.' Vive le roi I Perisse le tyran ! Voulait-il de I'argent, son p6re lui en donnait toujours. Ne fAt-ce que pour cela. toutefois, although. en vain, in vain. rarement, rarely. pro'jablement, probably. etc. §238] POSITION OF SUBJECT. 171 4. Sometimes in exclamatory sentences : Avons-nous crie I Did„,<. ^^ ^^^^^ ^ 5. When a predicate adjective heads the phrase : Telle fut la fin de Carthage. Such was the end of Carthage. Quelque riche que ,soit cet homme. However rich that man is. th^ll'iature^'ol t'he 8Xe'ci"but'fefnw^* ^^^ '"!,* *'"^'""' ™*>- ^^^e place whatever be pi-onouu subject. ^ ' ^ *^^ following rules do not usually hold good for Snal 6. Very commonly in a relative clause, especially when a second relative clause qualifies its subject • \ti%r:e^C!:r "- ^^ ^"^^^ .-^^* ^ -- - -^o 1 u se respecte. respects himself. Dites-moi ce qu'a fait votre ami. Tell me what your friend did Dis-moi oil est ton ami T.n u "^"i«naaia. Tell me where your friend is. whfrgoTj'n: S'"" '^ ""'■*""" ^^"°""^>' ^"^ -*"-"^- «t-ds next the verb 7. Commonly after c'est que, and in the second member ot a comparative sentence : C'est en yous qu'esp^rent tous. It is in you that all hope J en a, plus que n'en a mon ami. I have more of it than m'^friend has. 8. Commonly when an adverb, other than those mentioned ltit"d%r' ^T'' ^^^"*^<^'^^i' 1^> -'-> or an adverbial pma,!^ heads the sentence .• wr'-'Tt- . So goes the world. B,ent6t vendra le prmtemps. Spring will soon ,ome. the sacred stanc.ard. 9. Quite exceptionally, wh^ the verb comes first; Viendra nn autre. /ai » •„ (Along) will come another. N0TB.-N,> inversion of noun subject iMuaAlv ocourn if th- „.-k u or a preposit.'.onal complement. ^ ^^^^ ^^ ^ '^^'^^ object 238. Indirect Interrogation. It ha^ no special rules of word order apart from tho.e of th« clause in which it occui. : JJis-moi ce qu'il a dit t^*! ^ 172 THE VERB. [§§239-241 1 I , i\' II .Ml I THE PASSIVE VOICE. 239. Formation. Tho passive voice of a transitive verb is foruHHl from tlie auxiliary ^tre + tlio past participle, which agrees with the subject of tlu^ vevh in g«ui(lc" and number: Pkks. In kin. Etro ImuHe) or \ouv(v:)h, to lie primed. Vv.nv. In KIN. Avoir vU lomHo) or \ou6(v.)h, to have been praimd. I'liKS. Pa: '. l'<]lant louiHt') "'" loud(i^)«, fx'io'J praucd. Pkrk. Pakt. Ayaut vi6 loini(o) or h)iio(e)s, havhuj hecn praiml. Pkksknt Indicativk. Past iNOKKiNrrK Indicativk. / am (/ ani. behiu) praised, etc. I have been (/ wan) jn-ained etc. jo SUIS tu es 11 (ello) osf, , nous sDim Vt)US ctcs. ils (oUes) jont lcnK'(o)- j'ai t5t6"| tu as otci \ lom5(e). il (ello) a ('"to J >(e)s. us avous vt6'\ IS ji.v'07. M.t\ ^ nous vous avez ^t*!; J lou(5(o)3. ils (cllos) out 6t6 J etc., etc., throughout. Ofrff.; 1. Tlie iwvst participle 6t6 is alwn.vs invariable. 2. Tiie ])ast participle after VOUS ftjjroea willi the sense: 'Miwlanie, vous serez nitiprisce tie toius,' 'Madam, you will be (lespisetl by all.' 240. The Agent. The person by whom the action is done is usually denoted by par, when a specific intention or definite volition is implied, and by de wlien the action is habitual, usual, or iniletinite : EUo fut saisio par lo voleur. Sho was seized by the thief. Lo genthal fut suivi de pr^s par The geueral was closely followed by reuuemi. the euoiny. La reine otait sui vie de ses dames. The queeu was followed by her ladies. Ils sont aiui6s de tous. They are loved by everybody. 241. Remarks. 1- Only transitive verbs regularly have the passive voice, but the intransitives obdir, d^SOb^ir, par- donner, may also be made passive : Vous etes pardonnt^s tous. You are all pardoned. Elle est toujours ob^ie. She is always obeyed. 2. The passive is much less used than in English, especially ji the agent be not specified, or if the correapoudiug Fi'ouch I §212] THE REFLEXIVE VEllH. 173 verb is intransitive, or if an indirect object be present. Substitutes are : a. A verb with the indefinito pronoun on : On m'a iroinjxi. On me soup9onne. < On a rc'pondu a ma se'/, etc. je me fl^te. tu te flattes. il (elle) se flatte. nous nous flattons. vous vous fiattez. lis (elles) se flattent. ^ !: :i' 174 THE VEllB. 5! -I I 1 [§§243-245 Imperative. Flatter thysejft etc. Do -notfiaiUr Ihyaelft etc flatt(!-toi. no to flatte pas. (qu'il 86 flatte. ) (qu'il no so flatte pas. ) flattons-nous. no nous flattens pas. flattcz-vous. no vous flattez pas. (qu'ils so flattent. ) (qu'ils no se flattent pas. ) NoTKS.— 1. Sc flatter, se flattant, etc., are the infinitive and participial forms found in dictionaries, but se muat be replaced by me, te, etc., accordinff to tlie sense. 2, Except in the use of 6tre as auxiliaiy, reflexive verbs have no peculiarities of con- jugation on account of being reflexive. 243. Reflexive or Reciprocal. A reflexive verb often has reciprocal force, especially in the plural. Ambiguity is gener.'Jly avoided by some modifying expression : EUes se flattent. JThey flutter themselves. \The3 'hey flatter each other. They flatter one another. They cheat each other. EUe s'est deride. Elle s'est dit k elle-meme. lis se sent 6crit. EUes se sont achet6 des robes. Si It EUes se flattent I'une I'autre. On se dupe mutuellement. 244. Agreement of Past Participle. 1. In compound tenses, the past participle of a reflexive agrees in gender and number with the reflexive object, unless that object be indirect : She cried out. She said to herself. They wrote to each other. They bought themselves dresses. 2. Besides the reflexive object, a direct object may precede the verb, and vv^ith this object the participle agrees : Les plumes qu'ils se sont achetees. The pens they bought themselves. Notes.— 1. The auxiliary 6tre is considered as replacing avoir, and the above agreements are explained by the general principle (§ 291). 2. The agreement with vous is according to the sense : ' Vous VOUS fites troinpt5e, madame,' 'You were mistaken, madam.' 245. Omission of Reflexive Object. 1. It is always omitted with the past participle used as attributive adjective : T^ * J. ^A * «'i'~ The time past. §§246-247] THE REFLEXIVE VERB. I75 2. The infinitives of certain verbs, such as s'asseoir, se souvenir, se taire, regularly omit se when preceded by faire : Faites asseoir vos amis. Je vous en ferai souvenir. Make your friends sit down. I shall remind you of it. a. A similar omission of se sometimes occurs after laisser entendre voir, etc. ' ' 246. Remarks. The reflexive construction is much com- moner in French than in English :— 1. It often translates the English passive, especially when the agent is not specified : La bourse s'est trouvde. The purse has been found. Cela se raconte partout. That is being told everywhere. 2. Or it is expressed by an English non-reflexive verb, gen- erally intransitive : S^arreter ; s'^crier ; se porter. Stop ; exclaim ; be (of health). S asseoir ; se hater ; se tromper. Sit down ; hasten ; be mistaken. 3. Or the French reflexive -fa preposition has the value of an English transitive : S'approcher de ; se douter de. ApproaoJ. ; suspect. S'attendre a ; se fier k. Expect ; trust. Se passer de ; se souvenir de. Do without ; recollect. 247. S'en Alien The conjugation of s'en aller, *to <^o away,' presents special difficulty : '^ Past Indefinite Indicative. Present Ii^dicative. / go away, etc. ]e m'en vais. tu t'en vas. il s'en va. nous nous en allons. vous vous en allez. tte fi'ou, vont. / have gone (/ ivent) away, etc. je m'en suis^j tu t'en es [all^(e). il (elle) s'en est J nous nous en somnies 1 vous voup en etes j-alld(eja. Us (elles} s'en sont ) , ^^ i ![; I 176 IMPERATIVE. 9o away, etc, »'a-t'en. (qu'il aim aille. ) allons-nous-en. allez-vous-en. (qu'ils s'en aillent.) Further examples : Est-ce que je m'en vais ? Vous en allez-vous ? S'en sont-elles all(5es ? THE VERB. [§§248-249 Imi'Krativk Negative. Do not go aivay, etc. ne t'en va pas. (qu'il ne s'en aille pas. ) ne nous en allons pas. ne vous en allez pas. {qu'ils ne s'en aillent pas. ) Us ne s'en sont pas alles. Ne nous en soninies-nous pas al- l^(e)s ? IMPERSONAL VERBS. 248. Conjugation. An impersonal verb, or a verb used as such, is one conjugated, in the third singular only, with the subject il = ' it,' ' there,' used indefinitely and absolutely, e.g., tonner, * to thunder ' : Indicative. Pres. II tonne, it thunders. Past Indf. II a tonn^, it has thundered. Impf. II tonnait, it thundered. Plupf. II avait tonn6, it had thundered. Past Dep. II tonna, It th unde.red. Past Ant. II eut tonn6, it had thundered. etc., etc., like the third singular of donner. Note.— Apart from beintj limited to the third singular, their conjugation does not differ from that of ordinary verbs. Some are regular, others irregular. 249. Use of Impersonals. 1. Verbs denoting natural phenomena and time are impersonal, as in English : II tonne ; il a plu ; il pleuvra. It thunders ; it rained ; it will rain. II a gele hier ; il degele. It froze yesterday ; it is thawing. II est une heure ; il est tard. It is one o'clock ; it is lata Such verbs are : pleHvoir, rain. neifcr, snow. grfiler, hail. 6clairer, lighten. geler, freeze. ddgeler, thaw. 2. Faire = * make,' is also much used impersonally to describe '??'eather, temperature, etc. : §§250-251] IMPERSONAL VERBS. 177 Quel temps fait-il ? II fait beau (temps) co matin. II a fait bien froid hier. II faisait du vent aussi. Eat-ce qu'il fera obscur ce soir ? What kind of weather is it ? It is iino (weather) this morning. It was very cold yesterday. It was windy too. Will it be dark this evening? Obs : Distinguish these from constructions with a personal subject: ' Le temps est beau,' 'The weather is fine'; ' L'eau est froide." The water is cold.' "^'''"'P'®"* 250. Impersonal avoir and etre. 1. The verb avoir, preceded by y, used impersonally = ' there is,' « there are,' ' there was,' ' there were,' etc. : Ilya. Ilyaeu. Ya-t-il? There is. There has been. Isthere? liny a pas. II n'y a pas eu. There is not. T-..<,re has not been. Y a-t-il eu ? N'y a-t-il pas eu? Has there been? Has there not been? i aura-t-il ? II peut y avoir. Will there be ? Uliere may be. 2. II est (e'tait, etc.) is sometimes used for il y a in this sense : II est des hommes qui le croient. There are men who think so. 3. II y a=' there is,' 'there are,' is distinguished from VOila = ' there is,' 'there are.' Voila answers the question 'where is?,' 'where are?,' and makes a specific statement about an object to which attention is directed by pointing or the like, while il y a does not answer the question 'where Is?,' * where are ?,' and makes a general statement. II y a des plumes sur la table. There are pens on the table Voili les plumes sur la table. There are the pens on the table. . 4. Y avoir also forms idiomatic expressions of time, reckoned backwards, and of distance : lis sent arrives il y a trois jours. They came three days ago. II y avait trois jours que j'etais \k. I had been there three days. Combien y a-t-il d'iei a la villo ? How far is it to the city ? II y a dix miUes d'iei k la ville. It is ten miles from here to the city. 251. Falloir='be necessary,' expresses the various mean- ings of riust,' 'be obliged to,' 'have to,' 'need,' as follows : 1. ' Must ' + infinitive ^ fallojj. + q.^g and subjunctive : 12 lis THE VERB. [§252 II faut que je parte. II faudra quo vous restiez. I nuist go You will have to (he obliged to) stay. 2. Or the subject of 'must,' etc., if a personal pronoun, may become indirect object of falloir + an infinitive : n mo faudrait roster. I aliould l)e ol.liged to remain. II leu- faut faire cola. They must do that. II lui a fallu parlor. He was forced (obliged) to speak. 3. The /nfinitive construction without indirect object is used in general or indelinitc statement : II faut faire son devoir. II ne faut pas voler. 4. Falloir + an indirect object and a substantive signifies ' lack,' * need ' : II faut une ardoise i\ Jean. John needs a slate, II leur faudra cent francs. Tliey will need a hundred francs. 5. S'en falloir =' lack': n s'en faut do beaucoup que I'un The one is not nearly so good as tlie vaille I'autre. other. 252. Other Impersonals. 1. Besides faire and avoir, already noted, many other verbs take a special meaning as impersonals : One must do one's duty. Wo must not steal. Do quoi s'agit-il ? II est souvent arrive que, etc. II vaudra mieux ne rien dire. II y va de ses jours. II se pout que je me trompe. What is the matter ? It lias often happened that, etc. It will be l)etter to say nothing. His life is at stake. It may be that I am mistaken. Obs. : Compare the literal meanings : Agir, act, arriver, arrive, valoir. be worth aller, go, pouvoir, be able. 2. Many verbs may stand in the third singular with imper- sonal il representing a logical subject, singular or plural, following the verb : n viendra un meilleur temps. There will come a happier time. n en reste trois livres. There remain three pounds of it n est arriv6 des messagers. Messengers have arrived. J'; [§262 tl to) stay, •un, may ain. speak, 'bject is §5^'^ 3-256] TENSES OP THE I J signifies rancs. od as tne I avoir, ning as etc. ling. ;en. , be worth, I imper- plural, ime. of it. I 253. Omission of//. II is understood ^'Uch as : NDICATIVE. 179 in certain phrases, '^este k savoir. N'iniporte. Mieux vaut tard que jaiiu.is. It remains to ho seen. No matter (it matters not). Bettor lato tluin never. THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 254. Use Of Indicative. The indicative is the mood of claCbothar :• "'\" ^'""'^'-^^ '-^^^ insubordinate Clauses, both affirmati uid negative : Dieu crea le monde. r^,-, , ,, Moiop ,i,f ^,„^ TV . , " created the world. woisedit que Dieucr^ale monde. Mos, savs H.nf r- 1 ^»iob( sa>s that God created the n,', ^^^ « world, Uu allez-vous ? ttt, BMiipiy Dj the fact that the clause is subordinate. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. Je parle. II a ecrit. II disait. I speak (am speaking, do speak). He has written (has heen nriting). He was saying (used to saj , etc.). 256. Elliptical Forms, Ellipsis of part of a verb form IS common m English ; in French the form is either Z given or entirely avoided : ^ J'irai.-Moi, je n'irai pas. j shall cm T ci, ii w II a promis de venir. 4is il n'e.t u ^ ~~I ^" "°* ^^°)' pas venu. "" ^'^"^^^"^ '^ "'^^^ but he dif not (comeV ^a. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) / ^'^ fA I 1.0 I.I ■-ilM |S0 ""'^^ 1^ 1^ 2A i.8 \M MM. 1111.6 'c^: Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 87^-4503 ,f iV \\ % V ^-^^ \ >^ ^ '<*. ) . , ., speak) of that. LesRomamsbrulaientleursmorts. The Romans were accustomed to burn their dead. o. lo denote what continued to happen : Son p^re^tait ndgociant .t de- His father was a merchant and meurait dans cette rue. lived in this street. 4. To denote what had happened and still continued, after 11 y a . . . que, voici (voila) . . . que, depuis, depuis quand ?. depuis ... que (cf. § 257, 2) : . i- 4 cum r, Je le disais depuis longtemps. I had long been saying so. Voilk un an que je le disais. I had been saying so for a year. 5. In indirect discourse, after a past tense, instead of the present : Je croyais qu'il revenait. I thought he was coming back. Je demandai ou ,1 ^tait. I asked where he was. But : Ou est-il ? ', demandai-je. ' Where is he ? ',1 asked. 6. Regularly in an 'if clause when the ' result ' clause is conditional : S'il venait. je serais content. If he came, I should be glad. 7. Occasionally, instead of the conditional anterior in condi- tional sentences : Si je ne I'avais pas arrjtj, il torn- Had I not stopped him he would bait ( = serait tombe) du train. have fallen from the train, a Sometimes instead of the past definite (§ 260) : Un moment apr6s, le pere Alphee A moment afterwards. Father Al- se dressait, marchait a grands pheus rose, walked about with pas. voiU s'ecnait-il, etc. g.eat strides, there cried he, et... 259. Past Indefinite. The past indefinite is used ;— 182 THE VERB. [§260 1. To denote what has happened or has been happening, equivalent to an English tense with 'have,' reference to the present being implied : J'ai fini mon ouvrage. L'avei.-vous vu derni^rement ? Je I'ai souvent rencontr6, J'ai chants toute la matinee. I have finished my work. Have you seen him lately ? I have often met him, I have been singing all morning. 2, In familiar style, spoken or written, to denote a past event, without implied reference to the present, or a succes- sion of such past events as mark the progress of a narrative, answering the question ' what happened T or * what happened nextV For narrative in the literary style, see §260 : lis sont arrives ce soir. They arrived this evening. Je I'ai vu il y a dix ans. I saw him ten years ago. De quoi est-il mort ? What did he die of ? J'ai quitte Rome le dix. Puis je I left Rome on the tenth suis alle voir des amis k Lyon, j'ai pass^ quelques jours a Paris, et je suis revenu a Londres hier. Then I visited some friends at Lyons, I spent some days in Paris, and I came back to London yesterday. 3. Occasionally instead of a future anterior : Attendez, j'ai bientdt fini. Wait, I shall have finished soon. 260. Past Definite. The past definite denotes a past event, or a succession of such ppst events as mark the progress of the narrative, answering the question 'what happened?', or 'what happened nextf Its use is confined to literary or " book " French, and formal public address. It is hardly ever used in conversation or in easv correspondence : >7Seu cr6a le monde. God created the world. La guerre dura sept ans. The war lasted seven years. On for^a le palais, les sc^erats They broke into the palace, the n'oserent pas resister longtemps et villains did not dare to resist long, ne songferent qu'd fuir. Astarb^ and only thought i>f fleeing. As- voulut se sauver dans la foule, tarb^ tried to escape in the crowd, mais un soldat la reconnut ; elle but a soldier recogixized her ; she lit prise. was captured. [§260 ppening, ;e to the )rning. 3 a past a succes- larrative, lappened I. Then I b Lyons, I ris, and I esterday. id soon. 3S a past ! progress ppened V, ) literary is hardly )alace, the resist long, :eing. As- the crowd, [ her; she §261] TENSEo OF THE INDICATIVE. 183 a. Some verbs have a specirl force in the past definite : Avoir; j'eus. To have ; I received. Savon- J je sus. To know ; I found out (learned) Connaitre ; je connus. To know ; I realized. ^* 26i. Examples of Narrative. 1. The following ex. amples illustrate the principal uses of the past definite imperfect, past indefinite, and historical present, in the literarJ narrative style : '^ ,^Jr'' ''"' ""P™''''"' e"tou-aient cette maison tout embras^e sortajentpomt; ma.s leur .Stonncmeiit fut encore plus grand lorsou'ila V rent ouvnr les partes, et le roi et les sion. (ondre sur e«f JdisX Charles et se, prmcpaux offlciers ^taient ar„A d'^p^es et de pisSTett chacunhra deux coup, 4 la fois a I'instant que la porte .■ouvrit et dan, le meme diud-a.iI, jetant leur, pisto!et, et Lrmant de I'urs «apr*.3 cette petite troupe fut entouree: le roi, qui itait en bottes elon sa coutume .'embarrassa dan, ,es eperou, et tomba vius e qu .1 commandait en Pom„ran.e, et partit avec le baron Spa.re, qui a ^te depu,, ambassadeur on Angleterre et en France, et avec un autre colonel: dprend le nom d'un Franjai,, „omm« Har;^, alors major au ZZt ''• '' ""' "* """^ *P"^ -"■■»--»-* de DantLk.!! 2. So nearly identical is the force of the past definite and the past mdefimte, as narrative tenses, that they are often used interchangeably, as in the following extract, taken from a newspaper : . ivui , ^rrrT' ^.'^'-'-H^'- »!■-. ^ onze henres et demie, un m^ie a icMi dans ratelier de composition de la muioncU Pre^s aI^ Plusieurs pompcs a vapour arrivferent immMiatement sur le lieu du -mt^, et rmcondie s'^t^ndit avec une telle rapidity, que l^lt ■naison a et6 oompUtement dtouite.-ic Matin. aan 184 THE VERB. [§§262-263 •! 262. Pluperfect and Past Anterior. 1. Both denote what had happened, like the EngUsh phiperfecb : Lorsque jo I'avais (eus) fiiii. When I had finished it. 2. The pluperfect is of much commoner occurrence than the past anterior, and can alone be used after si = * if,' or when custom, continuance, etc., is implied (cf. 258) : Si je I'avais vu, je Taurais dit. Had I seen it, I should have said so. J'avais toujours fini avant midi. I always had finished before noon. 3. The past anterior denotes what had happened immedi- ately before another event. It is rarely used except after conjunctions of time, such as lorsque, quand, apr^s que, aussitdt que, ne . . pas plus tdt . . . que, etc. : Apr^s qu'il eut dintJ, il partit. After he had dined, he set out. 263. Future. The future is used :— 1. To denote what will happen : Us viendront demain. They will come to-morrow. Je le'^ verrai bientCt. Je ne sais pas s'il viendra. o. Distinguish English ' will' of futurity from ' will' of volition, and from ' will ' of habitual action : Il ne restera pas. He will not stay. II ne veut pas tester. He will not stay. Ce chasseur reste souven t dar-s lea That hunter will often reia^. n whole bois pendant des niois entieis. months in the woods. 6. Observe the following commonly occurring forms : Ne voulez-vous pas rester ? Will you not stay ? Voulez-vous que je reste? Shall I stay? Je ne resterai pas. I shall not stay. 2. Ref'ularly in a subordinate clause of implied futurity : Payez-le quand il viendia. Pay him when he comes. Faites comme vous voudiez. Do as you please. Tant que je vivrai. As long as I live. 3. To denote probability, conjecture, or possibility, etc. : I shall see them soon. I know not whether he will come. 262-263 1 denote than the or when ,'e said so. re noon. immedi- 3pt after •^s que, t out. 7. ill come, lition, and Ui..n whole lUrity : §§264-265] TENSES of the indicative. 185 La nef appartient au XII" si^cle, The nave belongs to the 12th cen, mai8 le choeur sera du XV. tury. but the choir is probably of the loth. 4. Sometimes with imperative force : Tn ne tueras point. Thou shalt not kill. Vous voudrez bien m'ecouter. Be good enough to hear me. a. This use is common in official stylo (edicts, etc.). 264. Future Anterior. The future anterior is used :— 1. To denote what will have happened : li aura bientOt fini. He will soon have done. 2. To denote implied futurity (cf. §263, 2), probability, conjecture, or possibility, etc. (cf. § 263, 3) : Quand vans serez rentrd je When you have come home, I shall go out. sortirai. Je me serai trompe. I must have made a mistake. , etc. : 265. Conditional. 1. The main^^i^^T^TtS conditional is to denote result dependent on condition, i.e., what would happen in case something else were to happen : Je serais content, s'il venait. I should be glad, if he came. . "•'rj^\«°"<5ition on which the result would depend is often merely implied, but not formally stated : H^siter serait une faiblesse. To hesitate would be weakness. 6. Distinguish English « should' of duty, etc., « would' of volition, and would of past habit, from conditional 'should 'and 'would': Je devrais partir. j should (ought to) set put. II ne voulait pas (5couter. He would not listen. J allais souvent le voir. I ^ould often go to see him. 2. It corresponds to an English past in a subordinate clause ot implied futurity (cf § 263, 2) : Je prendrais ce qui resterait. I should take what remained. 3. In indirect discourse, it denotes what was once future and IS now regarded as past, i.e., the original future of the r THE VERB. [$^;26G-2G7 assertion or question Ijecomes a conditional -.^heti in a clause subordinate to a verb in a past tense : Je croyaia qu'il plcuvrait. I thought it -woulcl rain. A-t-il (lit s'il lo feniit ? Bid he say whether lie would do so? But : • Je le ferai,' dit-IL * 1 shall do so,' said he. 4. It is used in statement or request expressed with defer- ence or reserve : Je le croirais au moins. Auriez-vous la bontd d'y aller? Cela ne serait jamais vrai. Je ne saurais vous le dire. I should think so at least. Would you have the kindness to go? That never could (can) be true. I cannot tell you. 5. It sometimes denotes probability, conjecture, or possi- bility, etc., in exclamations and questions (cf. § 2G3, 3) : Serait-il vrai qu'il I'a dit? Can it be true that he said so? Serait il possible ? Can (could) it be possible? 6. It sometimes denotes concession after quand, quand m6me, or with que : Quand (meme) 11 me tuerait, etc. Even if he should kill me, etc. Vous me le jureriez que je ne Even if ycu swore it to me, I should vous croirais pas. • not believe you. 7. It is used to give the substo.iice of hearsay information : A 06 qu'on dit, le roi serait malade. By what they say, the king is ill. 266. Conditional Anterior. Its uses are precisely parallel with those of the conditional (§265) ; it denotes what would have happened, etc., etc. : Je serais parti, s'il ^tait venu. I should have gone, had he com'?. ^ Je partirais d^s que je I'aurais vu. I should go when I had seen him. Selon les journaux, la guerre se According to the newspapers, war was declared last evening* It is used in general as in serait declaree hier soir. 267. Imperative Mood. English : Lisez-le. Ne le lisez pas. Allons-nous-en k present. Veuillez m'6couter. Read it. Do not read it. Let us go away now. Be good enough to hear m& 6G-2G7 clause d do so? 1 defer- S3tO go! rue. r possi- so? quand etc. I should QQation : ^ is ill. (recisely ies what ! com'?, jn him. lers, war \1 as ia §§268-269] THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 187 a. The first plural sometimes serves instead of the lackinc first smgular: * Soyons digne de ma naissance. Let mo be worthy of my birth Pensons un moment. Let me think a moment. b. The imperatives va, aliens, allez, voyons, often have special idiomatic force: Aliens done ! Aliens, dii courage ! Nonsense ! Come, courace ' J en suis content, allez I I am glad of it. I oan assure you I Veyons, que pensez-vous ? Come now. what do you think ? c. An imperative perfect is rare : Ayez fini votre tache ce soir. Have your task done to-night. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 268. General Function. The subjunctive denotes, in genera], what is viewed as being desirable or undesirable uncertain, contingent, or the like, and usually stands in a subordinate clause. 269. Subjunctive in Noun Clause. The subjunctive IS used in a clause introduced by que and serving as logical subject or as object of a verb : 1. After expressions of desiring (including willing, wishing, preferring) and avoiding : Je desire (veux) qu'il parte. Voulez-vous que je reste ? Je souhaite qu'il ait du succes. II pref^re que vous restiez. Evitez qu'il ne vous voie. ■ Such are : I desire (wish) him to go. Do you wish me to (shall I) stay ? I wish that he may have success. He prefers that you should stay. Avoid his seeing you. aimer, like. aimer mieux, prefer. avoir envie, be desirous. d^sirer, desire, wish. ^viter, avoid. pr6f6rer, prefer. prendre garde, take care (lest). Bouhaiter, wish. il me tarde, / long. vouloir, tvill, wish. eto. ^ «. Prendre garde requires ne in the subjunctive clause; so also, eviter generally. * Prends garde que cela ne se fasse. Take care lest that happen. r u 188 THE VERB. [§269 2. After expressions of commanding (including requesting, exhorting), forbidding, consenting : Voua ordonnez quo jc m'en aille. You order me to go. Je demande quo vous me payiez. Dis-leur qu'ils soient prets. Lo mddecin defend que jo sorte. Je con send que cela se fasse. Such are : I ask that you syinuld pay me. Tell them to be ready. The doctor forbids me to go out. I consent that that bo done. admettre, admit. aprrd'er, permit. avoir soin, take care. conjurer, implore. consontir, consent. convenir, a'jree. AHew\Tc, forbid. demander, attk. empficher, hinder. exhorter, exhort, exii,'er, exact. laisser, allow. 8'opi)Oser, oppose. ordonner, order. So also, dire, fell, 6crire, torite, entendre, mean, pr^tendre, intend, when deiiotiiiji; conniaiid. permettre, permit, prier, beg, ask. Boiiffrir, suffer, supplier, beg, pray. trouver niit\\re\,Jindnatural, veiller, take care, etc. a. The future or conditional often stands after arreter, commander, decider, d6cr6ter, etc, especially when the subject is a word denoting final authority, sucli as cour, roi, etc. : Le roi decr6te qu'il sera pendu. Tliekingdecrees that heshall be hanged. b. The subjunctive after empecher usually has ne : Empechez qu'il ne sorte. Prevent his going out. 3. After expressions of judgment or opinion involving approval or disapproval : I approve of his coming back. He deserves to be feared. It is better for you to stay He will have to go to-morrow. J'approuve qu'il revienne. II merite qu'on le craigne. II vaut mieux que vous restiez II faudra qu'il parte demain. Such are : appromer, approve, avoir int6r6t, be interested. blamer, blame. d^sapprouver, disapprove 6tre d'avis, be of opinion. 6tre digne, be worthy. fitre indigne, he unworthy, trouver mauvais, disapprove juger k propos, think fit. trouver juste, think just. louer, praise. trouver in juste, think unjust, niv'riter, deserve. valoir, be worthy. teuir (a ce que), insist. etc. trouver bon, approve. So also, a large number of impersonals of like force ■iiint ■) \ §2G9] THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 189 il convient, U iitfidiiuf. c'est asBez, it ia enough. il est, it ia +5 propoH, proper, + bien, ivell. +bon, good. +conyma.h\e, fitting. +es8entiel, essential. +& d^airer, to be desired. + facile, easy. ■^'^m\\ortani, important. + indi8pen8able, indixpena able. +Jll8tC, jitst. + iiaturel, natural. + n(5ce»8aire, necesmry. +^ aouhaitcr, to be wished. +(tout) simple, {quite) simple. + temps, time, 11 faut, it is necessary, mu$t, il iiiiporte, it is important. il ptMitse faire, it may be. il sufflt, it suffices. il viuit niieux, it is better. etc., and their opposites. 4. After expressions of emotion or sentiment, such as joy sorrow, anger, shame, wonder, fear : fites-vous content qu'il Hoit ici ? Arc you glad he is here ? Je regrette qu'il soit parti. II est fach»i que vous le bldniiez. II a honte que "ous le sachiez. Je m'ti tonne qu il n'ait pas honte. J'ai peur qu'il n'ait trop tlit. Such are : admirer, be astonished. s'affliger, grieve. avoir honte, be ashamed. avoir crainte, fear. avoir peur, fear. craindre, fear. dt^plorer, deplore. e'est, it is.,.. +un bonheur, fortunate. +dommage, a pity. +uije honte, a shame. +honteux, a shame. +piti6, a pity. il eat, it is . . I regret tiiat he has gone. Ho is angry at your blaming him. He is ashamed that you know it. I wonder ho is not asliamed. I fear he has said too much. + t5tonnant, astonishing. + fiicheux, annoying. + heiircux, fortunate. enrager, be enraged. s'^tonner, be astonishnt etre, be +affligd, grieved. 'l-bien aise, very glad. +charm6, delighted. + con tent, glad. +ddsol(:', very sorry. +(5tonnd, astonished. +faoh6, sorry, angry. +heureiix, happy. +indignd, indignant. + joyeux, glad H-nKjcontent, displeased. +satis:ait, satisfied. +surpris, surprised. + triste, sad. se facher, be sorry, angry. se plaindre, complain. redouter, fear. regrettei , regret, se r(jjouir, rejoice. se repentir, repent. rougir, blush. soupirer, sigh. trembler, tremble, etc. +curieux, strange, whl^^'V' ''/'^''^'"'"'"""° ^"^ ^^"PP^" *he subjunctive has „e . when It IS feared something will not happen the subjunctive has „e ' pas; when the expression of fearing is negative, or interrogative* ;; rr in-tth : ' ^^""^ '-'''-' •' -''' '-'^ negationir ^pi: Je crains qu'il ne vienne. i fear he will come. Je crains qu il ne vienne pas. I fear he will not come Je ne crams pas qu'il vienne. I do not fear he will come Craagnez-vous qu'il vienne ? j,, ^,^ f,,^ ,^ ^.^^ ^^7;; 190 THE vEnn. [§269 Ne craignez-vouH pas qu'il ne vienne? Do you not fear ho w.U come ? Si je craignais qu'll vtnt. If I feared he wouhl couio. Je ne mains paa qu'il ne vienne pas. I do not fear lie will not come. b. After expressions of emotion or sentiment (except fear), which admit de after them, dc ce que + indicative may hs used : J'ai honte de ce qu'il a ^chou6. I am ashamed that he failed. 5. After expressions of doubt, denial, despair, ignorance or very slight probability : II douto que je sois loyal. He doubts that (whether) T am honest. Je nie (lue cela soit vrai. I deny that that is true. II est rare que vous ayez tort. You are rarely in the wrong. Such are : oontester, dispute. ddsesp^rer, despair. disconvenir, deny. dissimuler, not confens. 86 dissimuler, be hidden. douter, doubt. il est, it is... 4-douteux, doubtful. +ta.u\, false. + impossible, impossible. + possible, possible. +rare, rare. il s'en faut, there is wanting. ignorer, not know. nier, deny. de (a) quol sert-il ?, of what use is it t il ne sert de (il) rlcn, it is of no use. il se peut, it may be. il ne se peut pas, it cannot be. il senible, it seems. etc. a. Douter si ( = ' if,' ' whether') requires the indicative : II doute si je suis loyal. He doubts if (whether) I am honest. b II semble regularly has the subjunctive, since it indicates slight probability as distinguished from il parait='it appears,' 'is evident,' and il me semble = ' it appears to me' (personal conviction) : II semble que vous me craigniez. It seems that you fear me. II me semble (il parait) que vous It seems to mo (it appears) that you me craignez. f^ar me. c. Verbs of doubt and denial used negatively or interrogatively regu- larly require ne in the subjunctive clause : Je ne nie pas que je ne le sois, I do not deny that I am such. d. Ignorer + negative = ' know well,' and hence takes indicative : Je n'ignore pas qu'il a menti. I know well he has lied. NoTB.-Peut-«tre que, perhaps, and sans doute que, doubtless, require the indicative. 6. After expressions of perceiving, thinking, knowing, declaring, resulting, but only when uncertainty or doubo is §269] TJii!. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 18, require the 191 implied hy negation, interrogation, or condition; otherwise the indicative : Verra-t-on que j'aio plourt^ ? Je ne crois pas quo ce aoit hii. Esp^rez-vous qu'il r^ussisse ? Je ne auis pas mv qu'il vienne. Si jo pr^tendais qu'il eilt tort. But : Je crois que c'est lui. J'eap^re qu'il r^ussira. Such are : Will they see that I have wept? I do not think that that in ho. Bo you hope ho will Hucteed ? I am not suro he will cojiie. If I claimed that he was wrong. I think it ia ho. I hope he will succeed. afflrmer, affimt. 8'apercevoir, perceive. apprendre, team, hear. assurer, assure. s'atnendre, expect. avertir warn. avouer, declare. conclure, conclude. connaitre, recognize. croire, believe, think. declarer, declare deviner, guess. dire, say, tell. se douter, suspect. 6crire, vxrite. entendre dire, hear said. espdrer, hove. Ctro ctv'tai, , be certa, . 6trc per8up.fl(:., 'te persuaded. fitre sCir, be sure. se flgurer, imagine. se flatter, flatter one's self. Iniaginer, imagine. s'imaginer, imagine. Jugrcr, judge, think. Jurer, declare. onh\\ct,furget. penser, think. persuader, persuade. pressentir, /oreiorfc. protendre, assert, claim. prdvenir, forewarn. prdvoir, foresee. proinottre, protnise. se rappeler, recollect. reconnaitre, acknowledge. renmrquer, remark, tipi^er, repeat. rdpondre, answer. savoir, knoio. sentir, /eel, notice. soutenir, maintain. se souvenir, recollect. Buppoaer, suppose, trouver, fir. I, think. voir, see. etc. So also, a number of impersonals of like force : il s'ensuit, it follows. il est av6r6, it is stated. ilest, iti«... +certain, certain. +clair, clear. +dvident, evident. +ddniontr(5, demonstrated. + incontestable, indisputable. + probable, probable. +sftr, sure. + vralseniblable, probable. i^ risulte, it folloics. il m? semble, it seems to me. a. Negative question usually implies affirmation ; hence the indicative • Ne truuves-tu pas qu'il est beau ? Don't you think he is handsome ? &. When what the speaker regards as fact follows the negative or conditional clause, or when a person is questioned as to his knowledge of what IS regarded as fact, the indicative stands : II ne croit pas que je suis ici. He does not believe I am here, b II savait que u es ici. if he knew you were here. Savez-vous qu'il est arrive ? Do you know that he has come T ,'? j ■ ' i 1 i J- 2B i •! i t n , > 1 192 THE VERB. li [§270 c. II me semble + negation lias subjunctive; with interrogation + negation the indicative : II ne me semble pas qu'il soit fou. It does not seem to me he is mad Nevoussemble-t-ilpasqu'ilestfou? Does it not see?- to you '.e is mad? d. A precerling dependent clause with this class of verbs always has the subjunctive : Qu'il ait ^choue, je le sals. That he has failed, I know. Note.— For the choice between que clause and infinitive see § 283. 270. Subjunctive in Adjectival Clause. The sub- junctive is used as ibllows in clauses introduced by a relative pronoun : — 1. When purpose regarding the antecedent, or unattained result is implied : Montrez-moi un chemin qui con- Show me a way which leads to duise k la science. knowledge. Jechercheunendroitou je sois en I seek a place where I may be in P^^^- peace. a. The indicative, liowever, is used 'to express what is regarded as fact or certain result : Montrez-moi le chemin qui con- Show me the road which leads to duit k la Yille. the town. J'irai ot je serai libre. I shall go where I shall ue free. 2. When the principal clause contains general negation, interrogation implying negative answer, or condition (all of which imply non-existence of the antecedent) : II n'a pas de raison qui vaille. He has no reason worth anything. As-tu un seul ami qui soit fiddle ? Ha/e you one friend who is true ? Si j'ai un ami qui soit fidele c'est If I have one friend who is true, it '^^^' is he. a. General negation is sometimes merely implied : II y a peu de gens qui le sachent. There are few people who know it. b. When the negation is not general, or when the interrogation does not imply negative answer, the indicative stands : Oe n'est pas vous que je crains. It is not you that I fear. N'est-ce point un songe que je vois ! Is it not a dream that I see ' §271] THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 193 c. In a uegative relative clause ne, not ' ne . . . pas,' is used when the principal clause is negative or implies negation : lln est-il ua seal qui ne tremble ! Is there one who does not tremble ? 3. When tlie antecedent is qualified by a superlative, or' ' by seul, unique, premier, dernier (all with superlative force) : C'est le meilleur ami que j'aie. He is the best friend that I have. C'est le seul ami que j'aie. He is the only friend I have. a. Wliat is stated unreservedly as fact requires the indicative : C'est la seule chose qu'il a dite. It is the only thing he said. 4. With concessive force in compound relative and indefinite clauses ( = ' whoever/ 'whatever,' etc.) : Quoi que vous fassicz. Whatever you do. Qui qu'on y puisse el ire. Wliosoever may be elected to it. Qui que tu sois, parle. Whoever you are, speak ! Quelles que soient vos raisons. Whatever be your reasons. 271. Subjunctive in Adverbial Clause. Tlid suyibc- tive is used in clauses of adverbial force, as follows : — "^ 1. After conjunctions of time before which or up to which (avant que, en attendant que, jusqu'a ce que) : Dis-le-lui, avant qu'il parte. Tell it to him, before he goes. Assjyez-vous, en attendant qu'il Sit down until he comes back. revienne. Pers^vi^rez jusqu'k ce que vous Persevere till you have succeeded. ayez reussi. a. Jusqu'k ce que may have the indicative, Avhen referring to com- pleted past event : II y resta jusqu'^ ce que je revins. He remained till I came back. 2. After conjunctions of purpose or result (afin que, pour que, de crainte que, de peur que): J'ecris ceci afin que (pour que) I write tliis in order that you may vous sachiez la verite. know the trutli. Je le tins de crainte qu'il ne torn- I held him lor fear he should fall. bat. 13 usmtiamm 194 THE VERB. [§271 a. So also, de sorte que, en sorte que, de teJle sorte que, de fa^on que, de mani^re que, tel . .que, tellement. . que, when denoting pur- pose, but not result : Agis (le sorte que tu reussisses. Act in such a way as to succeed. But : J'ai agi de sorte que j'ai r^usai. I acted so that I succeeded. 3. After conjunctions of condition (en cas que, au cas que, a moins que . . . ne, pourvu que, supposd que, en supposant que) : Je viendrai au cas que je sois I shall come in case I am free to- libre demain, ou k moins que morrow, or unless I am detained. je ne sois retenu. a. After si = 'if,' the pluperfect subjunctive stands exceptionally (§275,6). 6. The present subjunctive sometimes expresses conditi ^n : Vienne I'ennemi, il s'enfuit. If the enemy comes, he flees. c. A (la) condition que takes indicative, conditional, or subjunctive : Je lui donne I'argent k (la) condi- I give him the money on condition tion qu'il partira (or parte). that he will go. Note.— Dans le cas oii, au cas oii usually have conditional: ' Au cas oil cela serait vral,' ' in case that should be true.' 4. After conjunctions of concession (quoique, bien que, encore que, nonobstant que, soit que . . . soit que or ou que, pour (si) peu que, si tant est que, malgr^ que) : Bien qu'il soit inalade, il sortira. Althougli he is ill, he will go out. Pour peu qu'il fut malade, il se If he were ever so little ill, he croyait mourant. thought himself dying. a. The present subjunctive with que sometimes has concessive force : Qu'il perde ou gagne, il partira. Though he lose or win, he will go. b. The use of a subjunctive after advei^bial quelque (tout, si, etc.) + que = ' however ' depends on the same principle : Quelque grand que vous soyez. However great you may be. Si brave qu'il se croie. However brave he thinks himself. c. Quand (meme) used concessively sometimes takes the pluperfect subjunctive for the conditional anterior (ef. §265, 6) : Quand (meme) il m'eut dit cela. Even if he had told me that. §272-273] THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 195 as oil cela 5. After conjunctions of negative force (non que, non paS que, loin que, sans que) : n partit sans que je le susse. He went away without my knowing it. 6. After que replacing any conjunction requiring the sub- junctive, and also after que replacing si = ' if ' : Venez que ( = afin que, pour que) Come, that I may see you. je vous voie. Si je vais et que je le voie. If I go, and if I see him. 272. Subjunctive in Principal Clause. The subjunc- tive is sometimes used in principal clauses, as follows : 1. Either with or without que to denote what is desired, etc. : So be it ! (Long) live the king I Would to God it were so ! Let him go at once. May I die, if I am lying ! Let him believe it who will ! Ainsi soit-il ! Vive le roi ! Plut k Dieu qu'il en fut ainsi ! Qu'il parte tout de suite. Je meure, si je mens ! Le croie qui voudra ! a. Que followed by the third person present subjunctive regularly serves as an imperative j so also, sometimes, the first singular : Qu'il parte. Let him go. Que je vous entende. Let me hear you. Note.— This construction, as also those without que, may be explained by ellipsis of some expression of desire, command, etc. (§ 269, 1, 2). 2. The present subjunctive first singular of savoir is sometimes used to denote modified assertion ; Je ne sache rien de plus beau. I know nothing finer. 3. The pluperfect subjunctive stands exceptionally for con- ditional anterior in a « result ' clause (cf. § 275, b) : S'il etit [or avait) su cela, il ne If he had known that, he would not I'edt (or aurait) pas dit. have said it. 273. Tense Sequence. The tense of the subjunctive is usually determined by the tense of the finite verb in the governing clause, as follows: — * — ll; ;: 196 THE VERB. [§273 1. A present (including present subjunctive and imper- ative) or a future, in the governing clause, requires the present subjunctive in the governed clause : Je doute ^ I doubt that (whether) he will come. Quoique je doute I ,., „. „„^ Though I doubt that he will come. Doutez ^ Doubt that he will come. Je douterai J I shall doubt that he will come. 2. Any other tense than the above (^.e., an imperfect, past definite, conditional, etc.) requires the imperfect subjunctive : Je doutais '\ I doubted that(whether)he would come. Quoique je doutasse I ,-, - ^ Though I doubted that he would come. Je doutai j- qu i vin . j j^^ij^g^j ^j^^^j. j^^ ^ould come. Je douterais j I should doubt that he would come. 3. Compound tenses follo'v the same rules, the auxiliary being reckoned as the verb : J'ai dout^ (quoique j'aie doute, j'aurai doute) qu'il vienne or soit venu. J'avaisdout^ (j'eus doute, quoique j'eusse doute, j'aurais doute) qu'il vint or fut venu. I have doubted (though I have doubted, I shall have doubted) that he will come or has come. I had doubted (I had doubted, though I had doubted, I should have doubted) that he would come or had come. Obs. : As appears from the above, the subjunctive simple tenses express uncompleted event, and the compoir ' tenses completed event, with reference to the time of the governing verb. 4. The following exceptional cases depend mainly on the sense of the context : a. The sequence after the past indefinite depends upon its value as a present past or as a past (§259, 1, 2) : J'ai dout^ qu'il vienne (soit v. ). I have doubted that he will (has) c. J'ai doute qu'il vint (fut venu). I doubted that he would (had) come. h. Exceptionally after verbs of saying, etc. , a governing present may take a past subjunctive and vice versd : Je ne dis pas qu'il fut a biamer. I do not say he was to blame. II ne croyait pas qu'il y ait un He did not believe there is a God. Dieu. §§274-275] CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 197 c. In a relative clause a past indefinite may stand for a pluperfect • II portait cet habit la seule fois TT« «, ■ . PJ"Periect . que je I'aie vu. °" 2;.:??^ ''f ^°^' ^'^ ^^^^ time that I saw him. d. The conditional of modified assprfmr. /Roar ^n i • present. . eo„™„„„ ,„„„.ea b^ rXf itju^vr^ ""'"^"^ " ue aesirerais que vous venier T cu^ n i-i II n-y a pas de rang .u'ello „e put T„ere is no n.nk she c„„,d not hold. money. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. Si j'avais le temps, i'irais kTi Tf T u j i.- P , J irdis a i5. If I had time, I should go to B S.. ne «t pas hea^. .^n., ,.,. iTftTnT.:'^!!;,', Xo Je n'irais ms r«=i r^^ ^ ," •• '''"^■'*^ '^'^"'^ ^« weakness, de n ira,, pas (si j etais de lu,;. I should not go (if I were he) Ah .. s, J ^tais a sa place. ^h, if I were'in his pLe ! ^■ 275- Mood and Tense. A 'result' clause in the present md.cat.ve .operative, or future, regularly requires the "r clause m the present indicative ; a 'result' clause in the con- ditional regularly requires the 'if ^lause in th. 7 . indicative : " ^''^ imperfect s'n:!:::Z:'!!.J::t....._ ^^e has time, he goes. -'lave, should have) time, tell him to go. 198 S'il a le temps, il ira. S'il avait le temps, il irait. THE VERB. [§275 If he has (have, will have, should have) time, he will go. If he had (had he, were he to have, if he should have, should he have) time, he would go. Obs. : The condition is regularly expressed by the indicative present or imperfect, whatever be the corresponding English form. a. The above rules hold good for compound tenses, the auxiliary being considered as the verb : S'il I'a dit, il le fera. If he has said it, he will do it. S'il est venu, faites-le-moi savoir. If he has come, let me know. S'il a eu le temps, il sera venu. If he has had time, he will have come. Si j'avais eu le temps, je serais If I had had time, I should lave dll»5. , gone. S'il etait brave, il aurait fait cela. If he were brave, he would have done that. b. Sometimes, in literary style, the pluix'rfcct subjunctive stands in the ' if clause, or in the 'result' clause, or in both : S'il eAt {or avait) an cela il ne Had he known that, he would not Teiit {or aurait) pas dit. have said so. c. Occasionally the imperfect indicative stands in the 'if clause instead of the pluperfect, and in the ' result ' clause instead of the con- ditional anterior : Si Stanislas demeurait (= avait If Stanislas had remained, he would deme«r6), il etait (= aurait dte) have been lost, perdu. d. Occasionally the condition is expressed by inversion, without si ; N'^tait-ce la crainte de cela. If it were not for fear of that. Eut-il ^te moins riche. If he had been poorer. e. A virtual condition (concession) is sometimes expressed by various locutions : I Quiconque le fera. Whoever (if any one) does it. ' II 1® dhr^it, le ferait-il ? Even if he said it, would he do it ? *) Quand meme il ne I'aurait pas dit. Even though he had not said so. i^ II le dirait que je ne le croirais Even if he said it, I should not believe it. ^ypae §§276-278] THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 1^9 s'if e^furt '^'^''''''' ^'^'•^ "^ the "if" clause. The expression SU en fut, however, is noteworthy: "'eolm™ " '"' ''•■'"'""'' "'"'■" "'■'••'' ''"y °"« -^ *"»■ >»" <=o^- ^ ■ rui)t. 17. Si= ' whether' may take the future or conditional : D.s-mo. .si tu iras (irais) che. die. Tell me whether (if) you wiU. (would) go to her house. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. vefh^?; ^"""*^^"-, T'^^ ''"^'-t-e is a verbal noun. As a verb It governs, and as a noun it serves as sul,ject, object, etc • Vous devriez lui parler v u. . j i^, etc. . Voir c'est croire J"" ""^\' ^ '^'^^ *« ^"-- Tl 1,-f c. , heemg is believing. II ht sans comprendre. He reads without understanding. f 1, ^^^^ ^-^^ ""^ Infinitive. The cliief difficulty in the use of the infinitive is to determine, (1) wlien it should stand M^ithout any preposition, (2) when it should be preceded by a, (3) when It should be preceded by dc. ^^ ^^) ^^en 278 Infinitive without Preposition. The infinitive without any preposition is used :— 1. As subject, or in apposition : Mentir est honteux. Tn lio n - x • v Trop parler nuit. ? ^'^ dymg is base. Vivre c'est souffrir. To lir', ^''" ^"'"' J. o live IS to suffer. 2. As predicate after a few verbs (see list below) : Vous semblez h^siter. v^„ ,.^„ + i, ■ . Tl P=f ^^v, A 1. • r. ^ou seem to hesitate. II est ce„s. 1 aver fa.t He is supposed to have done it. 3. As logical subject after a few impersonah (see list below) : II vaudrait mieux se tair^ t* 1 1 i , II fait Cher vivre i Pal """'^ "T '""'" *" '"'^P luiet. i-aus. Living is dear in Paris. motion T^' 1 ™°'' '"'^^ "' """°° '"'•^ — «»" of motion, after verbs of desiring and preferring, after verbs of I , 1 200 THE VERB. [§278 perceiving,, after verbs of thinking and intending, after verbs of saying and declaring, and after certain verbs of lacking and failing (see list below) Voulez-vous diner chez nous ? Faites-lui apprendro sa le^on. Envoyez chercher le mddecin. Je d^sirerais lui parler. Je les vois venir. Quand comptez-voiis revenir ? II pretend avoir raison. J'avais beau crier. Will you dine with us ? Make him learn his lesson. Send for the doctor. I should like to speak to hira. I see them come (coming). When do you expect to come back ? He claims to be in the right. It was in vain that I shouted. ). Sometimes, in elliptical expressions, as an imperative, as a direct or indirect interrogative, or absolutely : Voir les affiches. See the posters. Que faire ? Oix me cacher ? What (am I) to do ? Where hide ? Je ne sais que faire. I know not what to do. Penser qu'il a dit cela ! To think that he said that ! 6. Reference list of verbs requiring direct infinitive : Pi accourir, hasten. affirmer, affirm. aimer (condl.)i '' should like. aimer autant, like as well. aimer mieux, pr^er. aller, go. apercevoir, perceive. assurer, assure. avoir beau, be in vain. avouer, avow. compter', intend. confesser, con/ess. courir, run. croire, think. daijjner, deign. declarer, declare. d^poser, testify. descendre ^ , come (go) down. ddsirer', desire, wish. devoir, ought, to be, etc. dire*, say. dcouter, listen to. entendre, hear, intend. * Sometimes takes de. * Sometimes takes ^ or de. ' See also list of verbs requiring * See also list of verbs requiring envoyer, send. esp6rer' , hope. 6tre, he. fitre cen86, be supposed. faillir^, be on the point of. faire, make, cause. il fait(imper8.), '' is. falloir, be necessary. Be figurer, imagine. s'imaginer, fancy. juger, consider. jurer*, swear, attest by oath. justifier, justify. laisser'', *, let, allow. mener, lead, bring. mettre, set, put at. monter, go up. nier', deny. oser, dare. ouir, hear. paraitre, appear, penser"*, intend, be near. pouvoir, can, may. a (§ 279, 6> prdferer', jjre/er. pr^tendre"", assert. se rappeler', recollect. reconnaitre, acknoivledge regarder, look at. rentrer, go in again. retourner, go back. revenir, come back. aavoirj know how to, can. sembler, seem. sentir, hear, feel, souhaiter', ivish. soutenir, maintain^ supposer, suppose. 4tre suppose, he supposed tdmoigner, testify. se trouver, he. valoir autant, be as good. valoir mieux, be better, venir'', *, come. voir, see. voler, fly. vpulpir, ttrill, wish. de {§ 280, 6). §279] THE INFINlTrVF MOOD. 201 Jb"; .'^;^°':,= •"^«'' 'boindehtoa' withindirectobjecttake.de: Je lui dois d'etre encore en vio T . ,• . «'«•«•'- ae. b Fair^fni. ^"°'°^"/'^- I "^'« to lam that I am still aliva 0. haire takes de r, ne faire que de : II ne fait que de sortir. v^u • ^ ^e has J ust gone out. c. Ne pas laisser= ' not to cease,' etc., takes de : II ne laisse pas de le dire tt„ • i F ane. He is always saying so (says so for all that). nr5^' if ",'"^« with the Preposition a. Tl.e infinitive preceded by a = ' to.' ' in,' < at,' 'by,' etc., is used :- 1. As direct object of a few transitives (see list below)- J aime k chanter. j jjj^^ . . '' Continuez k lire. />-«„.. ° ^!"^' , Ti ^> • , v>ontinue to read. "auxr i: :r ? --- t : ^'- "'--«'• Ti r,',, „ i , •*• "^^® to study to-morrow II n y a pas 4 se plaindro. There is nothing .o oorpTain of to wllrtr'"^'T"'' "'!"■ """^ ™''''^' '° -^^""'^ the object wl,atr X T""-"""^' (answering the question -to do Tlace / ■ '",' '"■ ''' ""' '""»■' "'"«'' *e action takes II aspire k devenir riche. Poussez-les k agir. Je les ai invites k venir. Aidez-moi k porter cette malle. II r^ussit k me trouver. Je suis k dcrire une lettre. II s'amuse k me taquiner, J'ai gagne k vendre ma maison II joue k faire le malade. He plays at beinglli." 3. As the complement of certain adjectives (cf. §280 2) and no^ s denoting fitness, tendency, purpose, etc. : ^ Ceci est bon k manger. This is good to eat Je suis or^t A vous dcouter. - fe " ^o eat. He aspires to become rich Urge them to act. I have invited them to come. Help me to carry this trunk. He succeeded in finding me. I am (busy) writing a letter. He amuses himself teasing me. I gained by selling my house. XT 1 . , . ... '' Quelque chose d'utile k Cela est facile k faire. savoir. am ready to hear you, icthing S That useful to know. IS easy to do. 202 THE VERB. [§279 La tendance k se croiro grand. ;ri " The tendency to think one's sell great. A maid of all work. Une bonne k tout faire. a. So also, le premier, le dernier, le seul : II n'est pas le seul ii le dire. Ho is not the only one to say so. 4. To form adjectival phrases denoting use, fitness, quality, etc.: Une salle k manger. Une chose h, voir. Des contes h dormir debout. Un spectacle a faire peur. De manifere k reussir. Voua etes k plaindre. Cast k en niourir. A dining-room. A thing v/orth seeing. Very tiresome stories. A terrible sight. In such a way as to succeed. You are to be pitied. It is enough to kill one. 5. To form adverbial phrases : EUe chante k ravir. She sings charmingly. EUe pleurait a faire piti^. She wept pitifully. A vrai dire, je le plains. To tell the truth, I pity him. EUe est laide k faire peur. She is frightfully ugly. 6. Reference list of verbs requiring infinitive with a : sabaisser, stoop. abandonner (s'), give up. aboutir, "nd (in), te7id. B'abuser, be mistaken (in). B'accorder^', acfree (in). fitre d'accord, agree (in). accoutumer(8')', accustom. s'acharner, be bent (on). adniettre, admit. s'adonner, addict o. s. aguerrir(8'), inure. aider, help. aimer'', ♦, like. amener, lead. amuser (s*), amuse (in, by). animer(s*), excite. appeler, call. appliquer (a'), apply. apprendre, learn, teach. appr6ter(8'), get ready. s'arrfiter, stop. aspirer, aspire. as8ujettir(s'), subject. astreindre, compel. s'astreindre, bind o. s. attacher, attach. s'attacher, be intent (on). attendre (8*), expect. autoriser, authorize. s'avilir, stoop. avoir, have, must. avoir (de la) peine, have difficulty (in). balancer, hesitate. se borner, limit c. s. chercher, seek, try. condamner (8e), condemn. condescendre, condescend, conduire, lead, con8acrtr(8e), devote. consentir^, consent, consister, co7mst (in), conspirer, conspire. con8umer(8e),co?isMme (in). contlnuer', co7itinue. contraindre', constrain. contribuer, contribute. convier", invite. coClter, cost, decider'', i7idv£e, se decider, resolve. d^fler'', challenge, incite. demander', ask. commencer^, begin. se complaire, take pleasure demeurer, remain. (in). ddpenser, spend (in). concourir, co-operate (in), d^sapprendre, forget. §279] THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 203 descendre*. Mtoop, abate o. * destiner, destine. ddtenniner', induce. Be ddterminer, resolve. d6vouer(8e), devote. diffdrer', delay. disposer (se), dispose. diver (se), omuw. donne. v . dresser, traiii. B'eflforoer', try. s'6gaycT, divert o. s. (by). employer (s'), employ (in). s'empresscr ',•■', be eager. encourager, encourage, eng&geriay, engage, advise. enhardir', embolden. s'enhardir^, venture. s'ennuyer','', Ork 2 Sometimes 4. » See also list of verbs requiring ^ (§ 279, 6), ♦ See also list of verbs requiring direct infinitive (§ 278, 6). 281. Distinctions. As appears from tlie list, the same verb sometimes requires a, de, or the direct infinitive. The following are examples of cases in which the sense varies with the construction : — refuser'', refuse. regrettcr, regret. se r^jouir, rejoice. remercier, thank (for). se repentir, repent (of). reprendre, reprove (for). riprimander, reprimand (for). reprocher(se), reproach (with). rdsoudre'', resolve. soupgonner, suspect, sourire, smile. se souvenir, recollect. siiggdrer, suggest. supplier, beseech. tacher'-, try. tenter-, attempt. trembler'', tremble, fear. trouver bon, think fit, se vanter, boast (of). venir'', *, have just. ™. 1, Aimer i- J'aimerais bien le connaitre. J'aime mieux vous dire tout. Aimez-vous a demeurer ici ? ^ 2. Decider : II m'a decide a entrer. Nous dt5cidames de partir. 3. Deaer: On le defia k boire. Je vous d^fie de prouver cela. 4. Descendre : Descends chercher ton chapeau. II a descendu meme k voler. I should like to know him. I prefer to tell you all. Do vou like to live here ? He induced me to go in. We decided to set out. They challenged him to drink. I defy you to prove that. Go down and get your hat. He even descended to theft. §281] THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 207 5. Determiner: Je I'ai dt^termine k rester. il avait determine de h rebatir. 6. Dire : II dit I'avoir vii. Je liiaiditde venir. 7. S'empresser : II s'empressait k lui plaire. II s'enipressa de r^pondre. 8. fetre: Je suis k ecrire des lettres. C'est k vous de parler. C'est a vous k parler. 9. Sefatiguer: II se fatigua k jouer au billard. II est fatigue de jouer. 10. Finir: II ne finit pas k me le dire. J'ai fini de travailler. 11. Jurer: Je jure I'avoir vu. Je jure de le faire. 12. Laisser : Je I'ai laiss^ dire. Je vous laisse k penser. II ne laissa pas de parler. 13. Se lasser ; II s'est lass6 k courir. II se lasse de courir. 14. Manquer: Je manquai de tomber. II a manqu^ k faire son devoir. 15. Obliger: Je I'ai oblige k (de) le faire. •e suis obligu de partir. I induced him to stay. He had determined to rebuild it. He says he saw it. I told him to come. He was eager to please her. He hastened to reply. I am (busy) writi^rr letters. It is your place to speak. It is your turn vo speak. He fatigued himself playing bilUards. He is tired playing. He was never done telling me-sa I have finished working. I swear I saw it. I swear i will do it. I let him talk. I leave you to think. He did not stop talking. He tired himself out (by) running. He is tired of running. I was on the point of falling. He has failed to do his duty. I obliged him to do it. ° - r 1 am obliged toga Vo^s^m'obligerez beaucoup de le You will greatly oblige me by doing it. iil • >} if I' ■I ii ■Ml 208 THE VERI5. [§282 I I 1 1' ii ■ 1 ', m Ik ai ■■ 16. S'occuper: II s'occupe h rieii fairo. II s'occupo de tout voir. 17. Penser: Quo pcnsez-vons fairo ? Jo ponsai tonilwr. Jo penso k rc'pliquer jV cela. 18. Prendre garde : Prcncz gardo k le faiio. Pronez garde k no pas le faire. Pronoz gardo de lo fairo. 19. Fr^tendre: II pr^tond vous connaitre. II pretend k dovenir savant. 20. Prier: n m'a prit^ k diner. Je vous prio de nx'aider. 21. Refuser: Me refusez-voua k manger ? Je refuserai d'y aller. 22. Resoudre : II m'a rt^solu k raclieter. J'ai i-esolu de Tachetor. 23. Trembler: II tremble k me voir. II tremble de me rencontrei". 24. Venir: Venez nous voir. Si vous venez k le voir. Je viens de le voir. llo is busy doing nothing. Ho ia intent on seeing everything. Wliat do you intend to do ? I nearly foil. 1 think of replying to that. Take care to do it. Take care not to do it. Take care not to do it. He asserts that ho knows you. He aspires to bot-ome learned. He invited me to dine. I i)ray (ask) you to help me. Do you refuse to give me foodl I shall refuse to go. Ho induced mo to buy it. I luivo determined to buy it. He trembles when he sees me. He fears to meet me. Come to see us. If you happen to see him. I have just seen him. 282. Infinitive with other Prepositions. The infinitive stands also after par, pour, sans, apr^s, entre, and after locutions endinff in de or a such as afin de afin oiie d© jusqu'a, etc. : — [§282 rything. you. led. le. 'ood\ it. me. nfinitlve nd after IIIA Hfk §§283-284] THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 209 1. Par = * by,' usually only after commencer and finir : II finit par in'insultor. Ho ended by insulting mo (or Ho finally inmilted mo). 2. Pour usually translates « in order to/ ' for the purpose of; sometimes also 'for,' 'from,' 'because,' 'tliough,' etc., and ' to ' after assez, trop, etc. : II faut manger pour vivre. We rnnst eat (in order) to live. II est mort pour avoir trop bu. Ho died from over-drinking II fut puni pour avoir ri. He was punished for laughing. Pour etrepauvre.iln'est pas larron. Though poor, he is no thief II est trop frane pour so taire. He is too frank to keep quiet. a. Pour after a verb o.f motion (§ 278, 4) emphasizes the purposo : J'irai pour le voir. I shall go to see him. 3. Sans = ' without': N'allez pas sans manger. Do not go without eating. 4. Apr^S =' after ' requires the perfect infinitive : Apr^s avoir dintS jo partis. After having dined, T set out. 283. Infinitive for Subordinate Clause. 1. An in- finitive construction usually replaces a que clause of which the subject is the same with that of the subject or object (direct or indirect) of the principal clause : licroitvous avoir vu. Ho thinks that he has seen you. Dites-leur de s'en aller. Tell them to be gone. 2. Similarly afin de, a moins de, apr^s, avant de, de crainte de, de peur de, de fa?on a, de mani^re a, pour, sans, etc. + tb-^ infinitive stand for afin que, etc. + the subjunctive, but only when the subject of both verbs is the same: II partit sans me voir. He went without seeing me. But : II partit sans que je le visae. He went without me seeing hiro. 2S4. Infinitive with Passive Force. A transitive in- finitive has passive force after verbs of perceiving (voir, etcA 210 THE VERB. [§§285-286 after faire, laisser, and when a + an infinitive is used adjec- lively (cf. §241, 3): J'ai vu batir cette maison. Je me fais faire un habit. Vous etes a plaindre. Une faute a eviter. I saw this house being built. I am having a coat made. You are to l)e pitied. A mistake to be avoided. NoTB.— This construotion may be explained by supi)lyiug some such ellipsis as the following' : * J'ai vu batir une maison (k or par quelqu'un), ' I have seen somebody building' a house.' 285. Infinitive for English -fng. The infinitive must be used to translate many such forms (see § 287, 2, 3, 4). :^t m \\v THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 286. Functions. The participial form in -ant serves as a verbal adjective, as a present participle (without en), and as a gerund (with en) : — 1. As a verbal adjective, it denotes (juality or state, and agrees like an adjective : Elle parait bien portante. She seems well. Les enfants doivent etre obeissants. Children must be obedient. Les vivants, et les mourants. Tlie living and the dying. Des paroles consolantos. Comforting words. Obs The verbal adjective, attributively, regularly follows the noun, as in the last example. a. Some verbs have a special form for the verbal adjective : Adj. different, different. convaincant, convincing. f atigant, fatigii ing. etc. Part. diff(!'rant. convainquant. fatiguant. etc. Adj. ndgligent, careless. savant, learned. puissant, powerful. eto. Part. n^gligeanfe. sachant. pouvant. etc. 2. As a present participle, it is used, in general, like the English present participle, to denote simultaneous action, manner, cause, motive, etc., and is invariable: Pleurant, elle continua le recit. Weeping, she continued the story. Je le trouvai riant comme un fou. I found him laughing like mad. >87] THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 211 Elle ne sortit pas, dtant malarle. She did not go out, being ill Ayant parl6 ainsi, il sortit. Having thus spoken, he went out. II n entrera pas, moi vivant. He shall not enter, while I live. Notes -1. It is often difficult to determine whether the form in -ant is participle (invariahle) or adjective (variable). As a participle, the action (generally transitory) is prominent but as an adjective, quality or else continued action (state) is denoted It IS nearly always a participle when it has a complement or a construction peculia,r to the verb, such as object, negative, adverb following : ' Une femme mourante,' ' A dying woman ; Des gens mourant de faim.- 'People dying of hunger'; ' L.s ennemis se ret.r6rent, brOlant les v.lles partout.' 'The enemies retired, burning the towns everv- where ; Une femme ne craignant rien.' ' A woman fearing nothing'; < Des dames parlant doucement,' ' Ladies speaking softly ' ; ' De soi-disant amis,' ' So-called friends.' 2. I" 'he last example, SOi-disant. though adjective in force, remains invariable in view of the literal meaning, 'calling themselves.' 3. Ayant and 6tant are also always invariable, except in ' les aya.ils-.iroit (-cause)'. 3. As a gerund, it denotes either simultaneons action or means by wliieli, and is invariable; en =' while/ 'in,' 'on,' ' when,' ' as,' ' by,' etc., or is untranslated : En jouant, j'ai perdu ma niontre. While playing, I lost my watch. En rentrant, j'ai trouv(5 la lettre. On returning, I found the letter. Vous perdrez, en agissa.it ainsi. You will lose, if you act thus En hsant on apprend k lire. By reading one learns to read. a. Both participle and gerund denote simultaneous action, but the use of en, strengthened sometimes by tout, usually emphasizes the continuity of the action : (En) disant ceci, il prit la lyre. (While) saying this, he took the harp J out en pleurant, elle continua. Still weeping, she went on. b. The gerund usually refers to the subject : Je I'ai vu en allant k la poste. I sa^v him while going to the post But : L'appt^tit vient en mangeant. One's appetite comes while eating. c. En is sometimes omitted, especially after aller : Generalement parlant. Generally speaking. II s'en va (en) grondant. Off he goes grumbliiig. d. The gerund denotes progressive action in a few expressions formed from aller : Cela alia (en) dirainuant. That kept growing less and less. 287. English Forms in -ing. These are variously translated into French ; idiomatic diiferences are :— 'H. dejeuner ; , bieahfast nn, d(5pendre de, depend o». §296] GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 219 ■e ddsolcr de, gneva over. te nourrlr do, live on. dfner de. dine on. proflter dc, proft by.' fdllciter de, congratulate on. pmiir de, pmmh for. giimir de. lament over. rt^compcmer de. reward toucnle, praine for. f„r. ae mCler de, meddle with. se r<:jouir de, rejoice at. remeroler de, thank for. rire de, lau/jh at. triompher de. triumph over. vivre de, live on. •to. Tr;.°i\r-' "'■"•"'""*■•"">■»' ""nnoh. . ,,„.. „*. „,„,,/.. (or for) some one arracher (pich. inY\n., match from cacher qqch. h. qqu., hide from. conf(5rer qqch. b. qqu., co*»/Br on. denmiider qqch. fi ,'|(,u., Of ••/«'• (o/). d(5rober qq^-h. .'i qqu , gteatjrom. Bmprunter qqch. ^qqu., borrow from Inflife-ur qqch. t\ qqu., uj/Zci o/i. Inspircr (|(|ch. X qipi., »/Nw^,>e ^,7/,, mfiler q(|ch. k (i(|ch., muii/fo with panloniier «|qch. A qqu., pardon for. payer qqch. ^ qqu., pay for. penscr .'i qqch or ^ qqu., *iGqqi:h., agree about. croire, qqu., or qqch., believe. 'I k, en, believe in. demandtr qqu. or qqch., ask after. mch. a. qqu., ask for (from, of). h^riter de qqu., be heir of. 11 de qqch., m/ien7. jouer qqu., deceive. >' d'un instrument, play on an instru- ment. " i un jeu, play {at) a game. nianquer qqu. or qqch., miss. II de, lack. " u, fail in. penser k, think of (about). penscr de, have opinion of. prdtendre qqch., assert. II k, aspire to. servir. serve (tr. and intr.). II de, serve as. II i, be useful for. se servir de, make use of. 8uppl(4er qqu., take the place of 11 .'iqqch., cmnplete. toucher qqu. or qqch., touch. II de I'argent, draiv msney. II .'i. meddle ivith, be near to. 11 d'un instrument, play an instru- ment (ke^ed). user qqch., wear out. II de, 7nake use of. en user de, deal, act. veillerqqu., ivatch over, nurse. II .'i qqch., attend to, %vatch over. II sur qqu., watch over, eta ■k-\ ijf.l ,'£ 1 220 THE NOUN. [§§297-301 297. Position. Objects and prepositional complements regularly follow the verb, the direct object (if any) being first; but if of unequal length, the longer usually last. For position of personal pronouns, see the Pronoun. 298. Composite Complement. The various parts of a complement must be of the same grammatical value, i.e., all nouns, all verbs, etc.: II apprend h lire et a chanter. He learns to read and sing. II apprond la lecture et le chant. He learns reading and singing. 299. Manifold Verb. Two or more verbs can govern the same complement only if alike in government : II aime et respecte son oncle. He loves and respects his uncle. II aime sou oncle et lui obuit. He loves and obeys his uncle. i THE NOUN. GENDER OF NOUNS. 300. General Rule. Nouns in French are either mascu- line or feminine. As an aid to memory, general rules for determining gender are given in the following sections. 301. Gender by Derivation. 1. Nouns derived from I itin masculines are regularly masculine : Mur (L. 7nurum) ; livre (L. librum) ; Wall ; book ; order ; poet. ordre(L. ordinevi) ; po6te (L. poeta). a. Exceptions are not uncommon ; Latin masculine abstracts in -or (accusati re -orem) have become feminine, except masculine honneur, d^shonneur, labeur, amour : candeur, f. (L. candorem), candour. . erieur, f. (L. errorem), error. *couleur, f. (L. colorem), colour. fu-eur, f. (L./urorein),/ury. doMleur, f. (L. dolorem), pain. etc. *Mascuiinein such phrases as 'coulear de feu,' 'couleur de rose," etc., e.g., 'ce rubaq est d'un beau couleur de rose.' ;f §302] GENDER OP NOUNS. 221 2. Nouns derived from Latin ferainines are regularly feminine : Justice (L. juatitiavt) • charitd Justice ; charity ; hand ; faith. (L. caritatcm); main (L. man' um) ; foi (L. Jidem). 3. Nouns derived from Latin neuters are regularly masculine : Corps (L. corpus) ; fer (L. ferrum) • Body ; iron ; gold ; meadow ; or (L. aurum) ; pri (L. pra- century ; verb. turn) ; sifecle {L.siecu/um)', verbe (L. verbum). a. More than a hundred neuter plurals in -a have become feminine singular in French, just as if derived from nouns in -a of the Latin first declension : anne (L. arma), arm, date (L. data), date. dette (L. debita), debt. 6tude (L. studia), study. feuille (L. folia), leaf. graine(L. grana),seed. huile (L. olea), oil. joie (L. gaudia), joy. I6vre (L. labra), lip. oouvi'e(L. opera), work. ponime (L. poind), apple. etc. 302. Gender by Endings. 1. Masculine are most nouns ending as follows : — (1) In a vowel sound (not -e mute) : Un op^ra (c8t(5, chapeau, cheveu). An opera (side, hat, hair). Un parti («dro, caillou, tissu). A party (zero, pebble, tissue). a. Feminine exceptions are : gu(5rilla, guerilla. iiioiti^, half. gutta-percha, gutta-percha. fourmi, ant. polka, polka. merci, mercy, foi, faith, ioi, laio, paroi, wait, virago, virago. Further, abstracts in -t6, -ti6 : &m\m,/ leiidship. liberty, liberty. charity, charity. piti^, pity. (2^ In a consonant : Le sac (pied, joug, sol, nez, temps). The sack (foot, yoke, soil, nose, time). razzia, raid tombola, charity -lottery vf^randa, verandah, cit6, city. bru, daughter-in-law, glu, bird-lime, tribu, tribe, vertu, virtue, eau, water. peau, akin. etc ■ant6, health, etc. f^W Ml' hi 1 '■Jiiif 222 THE NOUN. [§303 a. Feminine exceptions are : clef, key. nef, ship, nave. soif, thirst. faim, hunger, tnqon, fashion. fin, end. le9on, lesson, main, haiid. ran^on, ransom. chair, Jlesh. cour, ooMrf. cuiller, spoon. mer, seo. tour, toiver. brebis, sheep. fois, tme. oasis, oasis. souris, movse. vis, screw, dent, -l '^""ns. 1. Compound "wvic u^ oi a verb 4- a o'ovprnpfl »if>i,v. i , masculine: *«veinea noun are regularly , un poiteituille. A corkscrew ; a portfolio, a. Occasionally they are feminine : Une perce-neige. » * A snowdrop. 2. The gender of other compounds is re-ularlv thnt nf .1 Une eau-forte. a , , . Une mappe-nionde. A^v^f '^ Tf' Laf6te-dieu A map of th 3 world. Corpus Chxisti day. 1. Some by a different word : Masc. Fem. boeuf, ox. vache. bono, he-goat. ch^vre. poule. soeur. femme. coq, cock. frere, brother. homme, man. Masc. mari, husband. oncle, uncle. parrain, god-father. pore, pig. etc. Fem. fem me. tante. niarraine. truie. etc. 228 THE NOUN. [§306 a. The feminine form is often obviously cognate ; I 't Masc. Fbm. Mabc. Fem. ambossadeur, ambassador. ambassadrice. gouverneur, tutor. gouvernante. canard, drake. cane. loup, tool/. louve. *chanteur, singer. cantatrice. mulet, mule. mule. cochoii, hog. coche. *procureur, proxy. procuratrice compagnon, companion. coinpagne. serviteur, servant. servante. dindon, turkey cock. dinde. vieillard, old wxin. vieille. empereur, emperor. inip^ratrice. etc. etc. •Also in -eUBe, see § 337, 2, (2), a. 2. Some by adding -esse to the last consonant : Masc. abb^, abbot. ane, ass. chanoine, canon. comte, count. diable, devil. dr6le, rogue. druide, dmid. h6te, host. maitre, master. Fem. abbesse. anesse. chanoinesse. comtesse. diablesse. drolesse. druidesse. hfitesse. maitresse. Masc. ogre, ogre. pair, peer, pauvre, pauper. pretre, pried. prince, prince. «uisse, Swiss. tigre, tiger. traitre, traitor. etc. Mabo. dieu, god. doge, doge. due, duke. larron, thief. n6gre, negro. proph6te, prophet. bail'iur, lessor. Feh. d^esse. dogaresse. duchesse. larronnesse. n^gresse. proph6te8se. bailleresse. ♦Also in -euse, see §337, 2, (2), a. 3. A few nouns take -ine Masc. Fem. tsar, czar. tsarine. heros, hero. heroine. Masc. •chasseur, huntsman. d^fendeur, defendant. •demandeur, plaintiff. enchanteur, enchanter, p^cheur, sinner. •vendeur, seller (law), vengeur, avenger. Masc. Philippe, Philip. etc. Fem. ogresse. pairesse. pauvresse. pretresse. princesse. suissesse. tigresse. traitresse. eto. o. So also the following, but with changes in the stem : Fbm. chasseresse. d^fenderesse. demand eresse. enchanteresse. pechercsse. venderesse. '/engeresse. Fem. Philippine, eto. 4, Most other nouns follow the analogy of adjectives of like termination, and will be noted under the Adjective. §307-308] NUMBER OF NOtJNS. 229 NUMBER OF NOUNS. 307. General Rule. The plural of a noun is regularly torined by adding -s to the singular : Roi(s) ; reine(s) ; jardin{s). King(s) ; queen(s) ; garden(s). 308. Principal Exceptions. The following are the principal exceptions to the above rule :— 1. Nouns in -s, -x, -z remain unchanged in the plural • so also invariable words when used as nouns : Le bras ; la voix ; le nez. The arm ; the voice ; the nose. Les bras ; es voix ; les nez. The arms ; the voices ; the noses Les oui ot les non ; los on dit. The ayes and noes ; the rumourt PIusieur,s peu^out un beaucoup. Many littles make a ' muckle.' 2. Nouns in -au, -eu, and seven in -ou, take -x • '^vCS''"'''"^''^'^'"^^^' K^^'-^(«)5 oastle(s); game(s) ; ^^^\^)- vow(s). The seven nouns in -ou are : bijou(x) im.; ge„ou(x), knee. joujou(x), toy. caillou(x), pebble. hibou(x), owl. pou(x). Le. chou(x), cabbage. But : Clou(s), nail, sou(s), half-penny, etc. 3. Most nouns in -al change -al to -au, and add -x as above • ^jneral ; cheval ; journal. General ; horse ; newspaper. Ui. eraux ; chevaux ; journaux. Generals ; horses ; newspapers. o. But tlie following, and a few rarer oaes in -al, are regular : a^al(£j). endowment. cal(B). callosity. chacairR> m^Pn? "al(S). ball Uor Uancin,). earnaval(s). carnival. r^^f ' 4. The following in -ail have the plural in -aux : coiail {.r,ux), crral. vantail {-auxj, fokling-door. glass window. soupnail (-aux), ventail (-aux), ventaU. air-hole. But: detaiKs), d,MU : «ventai!{s), /«, etc., are regular. rr •' 230 THE NOUN. [§§309-311 I I'll! 5. Gent = 'race,' 'tribe,' has the plural gens = * people,' etc. Note.— A similar omission of t in the plural of nouns In -ant, -ent, now archaic, ia maintained in the Reoue des deux Monden, e.g., 'etifans' for ' eii/anta.' 309. Double Plurals. The following have two plural forms, mostly with varying meaning : aieul (aieux), ancestor. ceil (yeux), eye. '' (aieu^ \ (jrandfather. " (ceils-) in compounds, e.g. ail (aulx), (jurlic. ceils-de-bceuf, oval windows. "(ails), " "pal (^QMx), pale, stake. ciel (cieux), shj, heaven, climate. '* (pals), ** " " (cieh), bed-tester, ski/ {in paint- travail (travaux), work, ing), roof {0/ a quarry). " (travails), report [of a minis- ter, etc. ), brake {for horse-shoeing). Obs.: The -X plural regularly has the literal meaning of the word. 310. Foreign Nouns. Nouns of foreign origin take -s usually only when fully naturalized, but usage varies greatly (see dictionary) : a. Partial list of variable foreign nouns : accessit(s>, honourable men- l)ill(3), bill. toa8t(s), toast. tion. ' duo(s), rfieo. tramwayia), street-railway. albuin(s), album. Jury(s), jury. vivat(s), hurrah. alibi(8), alibi. op(5ra(s), opera. etc. bifteck(s), beefsteak. pensum(s), task. h. Partial list of invariable foreign nouns : amen. item. interim. post-Bcriptum. vade mecum. deficit. in-folio. magnificat. requiem. veto, facsimile. in-octavo. nota bene. Te Deum. eta c. A few Italian nouns retain their plural in i : dilletante(-i), dilletante. 8oprano(-i), soprano. quintetto(-i), quintette. libretto(-i), libretto. lazzaroneC-i), beggar. etc. 311. Compound Nouns. The only components which take a plural sign are nouns and adjec' /es. The following are special rules : — 1. Compounds without hyphen are treated as one word, and follow the general rules : Portemanteau(x) ; grand'm^re(s). Valise(s) j grandmother(s). a. Exceptions are : bon(8)hoinme(s), goodman, etc. madame (mesdames), madam, Mrs. gentil(8)homme(8), nobleman. mademoiselle (mesdemoiselles), Miss. monsieur (messieurs), Mr., sir, etc. monseigneur (messeigneurs), my lord. M §311] NUMBER OF NOUNS. 231 2 When placed in juxtaposition and connected by a hyphen, nouns and adjectives are variable • a. Demi- is invariable in coinpounrls Desdemi-h..,res. Hali-hours. h. Further exceptions are : blanc-seing(s), i(ifir«flr(«re m Wan*. tprr.. nl»i-./oN t ., chevau-IdgeKs), u^U-horseman. '«';-P'«>"(8). plat/orm. 3 Of two nouns joined by preposition and hyphens, the nrst only is variable : ^ r > Arc(s)-en-ciel ; ohef(s)-d'cBavre. Rainbow ; masterpiece. a. The preposition de is Gonietimes understood : bain(s)-niarie, ivater-hath. tu.A.,.^/c\ h6tel(s).dieu. hos,ital. tunb,-e(8).poste, postagcstamp, h. The following arc invariable, since the idea conveyed by their plural does not properly belong to tlie first component simply • p.ed.i-terre, tnnporanj lodglnj. tfitci-tfite. private interview. varlble "'''"' '^'^^' P»'«««dinS invariable component is usually Anglo-Saxon(s) ; avant-garde(s) ; Anglo-Saxon ; vanguard • tire-bouchon(s) ; vice-roi(s) ; corkscrew ; v ceroy ; ' bouche-troufs) • ' "O' . ^''''' stop-gap. n.A. ^y-^cuitiu oat place. perce-neige, «noM.t/ro». c^c* creve-coeur. heart.hrenl- „ ■ i- . woca;. 5. Invariable words, such as verb, adverb. nrenosiJmn etc are invariable in coinpoiind-s ; ' ' '' ' " »es OD dit i des passe.p.,rtout. Eumours ; ma^ter-lceys. 232 THE NOUN. [^§312-313 a. Garde-! is URually variable in compounds denotins persons, and invariabl'3 in thoao denoting things : Dca gardes- nialades. Sick-nurses. But I Dea garde-robes. Wardrobes. 312. Plural of Proper Nouns. 1. Names of persona or families are usually invariable in the plural : TL«3 two Racinca. The Corneillos and Racines of the stage {i.e., Corneillo, Racine, and otliers like them). (Tlie) Duvals have come. Les deux Raoino. Les Corneillu et les Racine de la seine. Les Duval sont arrives. a. A few Latin names, originany plural in form, and certain well- known liistorical names of families and dynasties, take -s : Les Bourbons. LesOracques. Lea Pharaons. LeaTudors. Les Cdsars. IjCS OiiiseB. Les Scipiona. etc. Les Condds. Les Horaces. Les Stuarts. 6. Names of persons used as common nouns to denote * persons like ' or 'works by' those named are often variable, but usage is not fixed : Les Corneilles sont rares. Comeillcs are rare. J'ai vu deux Raphaels. I saw two Raphaels. But : Les Hamlet ; les La Fontaine ; les Goethe ; les Washington, etc. 2. Names of places take -s when the idea is plural : Les Indes ; les Vosges. The Indies ; the Vosges. Les deux Romes. The two Romes (i.e., the old and new). CASE RELATION AND AGREEMENT OF NOUNS. 313. Case Relations. The noun in French does not vary in form to denote case j it is used as follows : — 1. With verbs, as subject, object, predicate : Le p6re aime son fils. The father love?, bia p.nn. ^ Jean est devenu soldat. John has become a soldier, U2-313 sons, and persons B8 of the ,cine, and ^ain well- rudors. sons like ' i;e is not gton, etc. and new). S. not vary / §§314-316] CASE RELATION AND AGREEMENT. 233 2. In appositions, and witli udj'octival force: Henri IV roi do France. Hen. y IV. . Kir.^ of Franco. Un ro, enfant. a child kii.g. 3. After prepositions: J'ai parld h non p6ro. j have spoken to In's father. 4. Absolutely, generally with adverl)ial force : Le .liner fini. il partit. Tho dinner ended, he Bet out. 11 etait \h, lo chapeau fi la n.ai.i. He was there, (with) his hat in bin hand. I came on Saturday. He stayed three hours. Je suis venu samedi. II est rest(5 trois heurea. J'ai marchd dix milles. Nous I'avons achet.:' dix francs. 5. Vocatively : Bonjour, mes amis. 314. Agreement. A predicate noun, or a noun used adjectivally, usually agrees like an adjective with the word referred to, see agreement of the Adjective : lis (elles) sont Allemand(e)s. They are Germans. La reine m6re. Tlie ciueen mother. I walked ten liles. Wo hough t it for ten francs. Good morning, my friends. 315. THE ARTICLE. The Indefinite Article. Masc. un, a (an). Fem. une, a (an). 316. The Definite Article. ®^^«- Plub. Masc. le (l')l Fem. la (1')/ the. Masc. or Fem. les, tha Ob8.: For the forms in parenthesis, see §19, 1. ■i 'i i I 111 234 THE ARTICLE. [§§317-318 i^'li 317. Contractions. The prepositions de and ^ + le and les, are always contracted as follows : de + le = du. i+le = au. de + les = des. & + leG=aux. Notes— 1. No contraction takes place with la, 1'. 2. Formerly en+les was con- tracted to ka, a form still used in academical titles, e.g., 'Bachelier ^a lettres,' • Bachelor of Arts.' 318. Agreement and Repetition. The article agrees in gender and number with its noun, and is regularly, repeated (as also de, a) before each noun or adjective denoting a distinctive object : Une maison et un jardin. Le flux et le reflux. Au bon et au niauvais c6te. Les bons et les niauvais. Des homines ou des femmes. But : Le bon et pieux pretre. Le delta ou basse Egypte. A house and garden. High and low tide. On the good and bad side. The good and the bad. Men or women. The kind and pious priest. The Delta or Lower Egypt. a. The definite article is not repeated when a single adjective precedes nouns joined by et : Les principalcs villes et provinces The principal towns and provinces de la France. of France. b. Singular adjectives in apposition to a plural noun omit the article: Les langues frangaise et anglaise. The French and English languages. Or : La langue fran9aise et la langue anglaise. La langue frangaise et I'anglaise. c. A few expressions of collective force, like the following, are per missible, but are either not obligatory or are confined to set expressions ; Les p^re et mfere. Les lundi et mardi. Les trois et quatre avril. Les officiers et soldats. Ecole des ponts ot chauss^es. The parents. (On) Mondays and Tuesdays. The third and fourth of April. The officers and soldiers. School of bridges and roads. d. For the repetition of ie, la, les with the superlative, se - <'bmparison of Adjectives. 'H §§319-321] USE OF ARTICLE WITH NOUNS. 235 USE OF THE ARTICLE WITH NOUNS. 319. Use in General. French and English agree to a considerable extent in the use of the article; differences are noted below. ^ 320. The Indefinite Article. 1. Its use corresponds m general with that of English 'a,' «an'; its plural is the partitive des (§323) : Un homme ; une femme ; des gens. A man ; a woman ; people. 2. Contrary to English usage, the indefinite article also commonly stands before an abstract noun used partitively with •^n adjective or an adjectival adjunct : II montra un sola extreme. He showed extreme care. II a une patience it toute dpreuve. He has patience equal to anything. Elle jouit d'une bonne sante. She enjoys good health. O est une triste nouvelle. It is sad news. 4 S'^dttd r '""-'''-^'-'-y ^^- <^^P-^i"g on such a noun Voilk une patience ! There is patience for you I J etais d une humeur. . . I was in a temper. . . Un gargon d'une raison. . . Ayoungfellowof(.plendid)intellect! PrenTlf'^r'T,'"""'' '" "^^'"^ '^' ^"8^"«h '"^««"it« article is replaced by the French deHmte article, or vice versd, or is omitted, see below. 321. The General Noun. A noun used in a general sense, ^.e., 'in general,' 'all,' 'every,' etc., being implied with It, regularly has the definite article in French, though not usually in English: La vie est courte. Le fer et le cuivre sont utiles. J'^tudie la musique. Les Fran^ais aiment la gloire. Le cheval est I'ami de I'liomme. Le noir voiis sied hien. J'aime les porames et lea poi'res, Le beau et I'utile. Le boire ei le manger. Life is phort. Iron and copper are useful, I am studying music. The French love glory. The horse is the friend of man. Blach becomes you. - 1- -■-- i^i- ito aiiu. piXiifS. The beatitiful and the useful Eating and drinking. 236 THE ARTICLE. [§§322-324 ih a. So also, names of languages, except after en ; but not, however, after parler : Sait-il le fran9ais ? Does he know French ? II parle bien (le) fran5ai8. He speaks French well. But : Dites cela en frangais. Say that in French. Parlez-vous frangais ? Do you speak French ? 322. The Partitive Noun. A. noun implying * an unde- termined quantity or number of ' is said to be used parti tively or in a partitive sense. 323. Partitive with Article. The partitive sense, ex- pressed in English by the noun simply, or else the noun preceded by *some' or 'any,' is regularly expressed in French by the noun preceded by de + the definite article : Du pain tremp^ dans du vin. (Some) bread dipped in wine. A-t-il des amis ? Has he (any) friends ? Des enfants poussaient des cris Some children were uttering ter- desesper^s. rible cries. II est des gens qui le croient. There are people who believe it. C'est du Carlyle pur. That is pure Carlyleism. NOTK. —This use of de+the definite article, or even of de alone (see next section), is often called the ' partitive article ' ; it is entirely identical in form with de+the article in other senses, e.g., 'Je vends du bl6,' ' I sell wheat ' ; 'Quel est le prixdubl6?,' * What is the price of the wheat ?' 324. Omission of Article. The partitive sense is ex- pressed by de alone + the noun as follows : — 1. When an adjective precedes the noun; so also, when a noun is understood after an adjective : Avez-vous de bon papier ? Have you any good paper ? Donnez-moi de ces plumes-Ik. Give me some of those pens. J'ai de vos livres. T have some of your books. De bon vin et de mauvais {sc. vin). oood wine and bad. De gros livres et de petits (sc. livres). Big books and little ones. But : Des soldats fran9ais. French soldiers. J'ai du pain blanc. I have white bread. a. The article is not omitted when the noun has a distinctive adjunct: Du bon papier qu'il a achet^. Some of the good puper ho bought. 5322-324 r, however, ' an unde- lartitively jense, ex- the noun in French i^ine. tering ter- lieve it. !xt section), is ,e+the article prixdubl6?,' Lse is ex> 3, when a paper ? se pens, books. ones. ve adjunct: ho bought. §325] USE OF ARTICLE WITH NOUNS. 237 b. The article is not omitted when adjective and noun are indivisible in sense, i.e., when forming a real or a virtual compound : Des grands-p6res ; des petits-fils. Grandfathers ; grandchildren. Des petits pois ; du bon s.ns. Green peas ; common sense. Des jeunes gens ; de la bonne foi. Young men ; honesty. c. Familiarly, the article is often used contrary to the rule : Du bon vin ; du vrai bonheur. Good wine ; true happiness. 2. After a general negation, implying non-existence of the object in question : II n'a pas de montre. Je n'ai point de livres. Sans avoir d'argent. II ne fit pas de remarques. Pas d'argent et pas d'amis. He has no (not any) watch. I have no (not any) books. Without having (any) money. He made no remarks. No money and no friends. 3. But the article is not omitted, the negation being no longer general : a. When the noun has a distinctive adjunct : Je n'ai plus du vin de cette ann^e. I have no more of this year's wine. Je n'ai pas de I'argent pour le gas- I have no money to waste ( = I have piller. money, but not to waste). b. In contrasts : Pas du lait, mais du th^. Not milk, but tea. c. In negative interrogation implying affirmative answer : N'avez-vous pas des amis, de la Have you not friends, health, in- sant6, de I'influence ? fluence ? 325. Omission of the Partitive Sign. The partitive sense is expressed by the noun simply, when the preposition de forms an essential part of the governing expression, thus : — 1. In expressions of quantity or number : Une livre de the (noix). A pound of tea (nuts). Un morceau de papier. A piece of paper. Une foule de gens, A crowd of people. Peu de temps ; beaucoup d'amis. Little time ; many friends. i T) ill' i 'i' \ I t I, It i' I I f is' J 238 THE ARTICLE. [§32C Assez de livres. Enough books {or books enough). Des milliers d'»5toile8. Thousands of stars. Que de gens assembles ! What a number of people assembled 1 a. Analogous to the above are expressions like the following : Trois jours de niarche. Three days' march. Cent soldats do tu^s. A hundred soldiers killed Quelque chose (rien) de bon. Something (nothing) good. b. Bien= ' beaucoup' regularly has de + the definite article : Bien de I'argent ; bien du monde. Much money ; many people. Bien des gens le croient. Many people think so. But : Bien d'autres. Many others. Note.— Bien in other senses does not take de : ' J'ai bien faim,' • I am very hungry.' c. Laplupart=*most,' 'the greater part,' etc., has de + the definite article : La plnpart des hommes. Most men. La plupart du temps. Most of the time. d. Expressions of quantity or number with a distinctive adjunct have de + the definite article ; so also, beaucoup, peu, etc., abso'ately: Une livre du th(5 de ce marehand. A pound of this tratlesman's tea. Beaucoup des Juifs de ce pays. Many of tlie Jews of that country. 2. After a verb requiring de before its complement, and in phrases, adjectival or adverbial, formed from de + a noun: H vit de pain (not * de du pain '). He lives on bread. He lacked money. He was covered with wounds. A silk dress. A man of genius. A purse full of gold. II manquait d'argent, II ^tait convert de plaies. Une robe de sole. Un homme de gonie. Une bourse pleine d'or. NoTKS.— 1. In both cases (§325, 1, 2) the disappearance of the partitive de is caused by its coincidence with a governing de. 2. The negative construction (§ 324, 2) is really parallel, the particles pas, point, etc., being etyniologically nouns. 326. General and Partitive Sense. The general sense of a noun (§321) is to be carefully distinguished from the partitive sense (§322) : Les oiseaux ont des ailes. Birds have wings. Les honunes sout des animaux. Men ai-e animaJa. §§327-328] USE OF article with nouns. 239 327. Article with Titles. A title of dignity or pro- fession, preceding a proper name, regularly takes the definite article, except in direct address : I-ia reine Victoria est aimeo. Queen Victoria is beloved. Le docteur Ribot est arriv(5. Doctor Ribot has come. Qu'est-ce que le pfere Daru (lit? What does Father Daru say? But : Bonjour, docteur Ribot. Good morning, Doctor Ribot. a. So also, when such title is preceded by a title of courtesy (mon- sieur, Diadame, etc.)» whether in speaking to or in speaking of the person : Bonjour, monsieur le docteur. Good morning, doctor. Monsieur le president I'a dit. The president said so. b. A preceding attributive adjective may have the force of a title : La petite Claire ; le gros Robert. Little Clara ; big Robert. 328. Article for Possessive. The definite article is commonly used with the force of a possessive adjective, when no ambiguity arises from its use : Donnez-moi la main. Give me your hand. II a perdu la vie. He has lost his life. II avait le chapeau sur la tete. He had his hat on his head. a. The use of an indirect pronoun object + the definite article often avoids ambiguity : Le courage lui manqua. His courage failed (him). II lui a arraclie les yeux. He tore out his eyes. II s'est fait mal a la tete. He hurt his head. h. Possessive force appears also in avoir mal (froid, chaud, etc.) k + the definite article followed by a noun denoting part of the person ; similarly, in phrases of personal description made up of avoir + the definite article + a noun + an adjective: ' J'ai mal h. la tete. n a mal aux yeux. n a froid aux pieds. n a la tSte grosse {or une grosse tgte). n a les bras longs (or de longs bras). He has long arms. Le ohdne a T^corce rude. The oak has (a) rough bark. I have a headache (my head aches). He has sore eyes (his eyes, etc. ). He has cold feet (his feet, etc.). He has a large head. 1 lli 240 THE ARTICLE. [§§329-330 329. Article Distributively. 1. The definite article with distributive force replaces English 'a' of weight, measure, number, when indicating price : Deux francs la livre (le mfetre). Two francs a pound (a metre). Des (Kufs (k) (lix sous la douzaine. Eggs at ten cents a dozen. Des poires (a) un sou la piece. Pears at a cent apiece. a. Otherwise par is generally used with price : Cinq francs par jour. Five francs a (per) day. Cent francs par tete. A hundred francs a (per) head. Trois francs par legon. Three francs a (per) lesson. 2. The definite article is also used distributively with names of days : II vient le dimanche. He comes (on) Sundays. Le bateau part tous les lundis. Tlio boat goes every Monday. 330. Omission of the Article. The article, whether definite, indefinite, or partitive, is frequently omitted. This takes place :— 1. In a large number of expressions made up of a verb + a noun : J'ai sommeil ; il a honte. I am sleepy ; he is ashamed. Je vous demande pardon. I beg your pardon. Further examples are : donner avis, notify. donner ordre, give orders, faire attention, pay atten- tion. faire cadeau, make a present, faire faillite, fail (in busi- ness). 2. In many adjectival and adverbial phrases made up of a preposition + a noun : D'apris nature ; devant t^moins. After nature ; before witnesses. Sana cause : k travers champs. Without cause : across the fieldg. avoir besoin, need. avoir faim, be hvngry. avoir bonne mine, look well. avoir peur, be afraid. avoir tort, be {in the) wrong. courir risque, run the risk, demanderconseil, ask advice. faire place, make room. prendre cong6, take leave, prendre garde, take care. rendre visite, pay a visit. trou\er moyen, find means. etc., etc. 329-330 icle with measure, fcre). §330] USE OP AIITICLE WITH NOUNa 241 ead. fi names vhether . This rerb + a ^eroom. ake leave, ake care, y a visit. . Jind up of ses. Further examples are k bord, on board. k cheval, on horseback. iidessein, intentionally, k genoux, on one's knees. k pied, on foot. pot k fleurs, Jlower-pot. nioulin k ve«t, wind-mill. aprts diner, after dinner. aveo int6r6t, with interest. aveo plaisir, vHth pleasure. sortir de table, leave the table. ohlen de beTger,8hepherd'8 dog. homme de coeur, man of feeling, homme de g^nie, man of genius. en bateau, in a boat, en 6t6, in summer. en voiture, in a carriage. par an, by the year. par chemin de fer, by rail- way. par exemple, for example. par exp6rience,62/ experience par terre, by land. sans crainte, without fear. sans raison, without reason. sous condition, on condition. sous presse, in the press. 8ur papier, on paper. etc., etc. 3. Before a predicate noun which qualifies in a general way the personal subject, or object, of certain verbs (cf. § 295): lis sont Russes. Elle est modiste. Nous sommes m^decins. II paralt honnete homme. Son fr^re se fit soldat. On I'a ordonn^ pr^tre. Soyons amis. They are Russians. She is a milliner. We are doctors. He seems an honest man. His brother became a soldier. He was ordained a priest. Let us bo friends. NoTB.-Noun8 so used are commonly those of nationality, profession, title, etc., and their function is adjectival. Whenever a predicate noun denotes an individual or a species, it must have the article : 'La rose est une fleur,' 'The rose is a flower' ; ' Les rois sont des hommes,* 'Kings are men.' a. The article is not omitted when the predicate noun has a distinctive adjunct ; Son frfere est un artiste de m^rite. His brother is an artist of merit, lis sent devenus des g^neraux They became distinguished generals, distiugu^s. h. Observe the predicative force of a noun after traiter + de qualifier + de: II m'a traitd de sot He called me a fool. Je quaUfie cela de fraude. I call that fraud. & After c'est, ce sont, the noun is logical subject, not predicate, and hence the article or some other determinating word must be used with it: Cest une AUemande. She is (a) German. Ue sont les (mes} ganta. Those are the (my) gloves 16 i m ! \ii 242 THE ARTICLE. [§330 4. Before such an appositive noun as serves merely the purpose of a parenthetical explanation : L'Avare, comddie de Molifere. L'Avaro, a comedy by Moli^sro. Paris, fils de Priam, ravit Hel^ne, Paris, the (a) son of Priam, carried femme de M»Sn^las. off Helena, (the) wife of Menelaus. a. Thus is explained the omission of the article in numerical titles : Jacques premier (deux). James the First (the Second). 6. An apposition which distinguishes, contrasts, compares, regularly has the article, as in English : Pierre le Grand. Bacine le fils et non Racine le pfere. Montreal la plus grande ville du Canada. M. Cook, un ami do mon p^re. Peter the Great. Racine the son and not Racine the father. Montreal the largest city in Canada. Mr. Cook, a friend of my father. c. Colloquially, the article is often omitted in contrasts : Dumas pfere et Dumas fils. Dumas the elder and Dumas the younger. Note. -Pseudo-apposition (really ellipsis of de or of a de clause) is found in many cases like • L'6glise (sc. de) Saint-Pierre.' 'St. Peter's Church ' ; 'des meuble8(8c. du temps de) Louis XV,' 'Louis XV. furniture'; 'La rue (sc. de) Mirabeau,' Mirabeau Street.' 5. In condensed sentences, such as titles of books, enumera- tions, addresses, advertisements, proverbs, antithetical expres- sions, etc., and usually after ni . . ■ ni, sans . . • ni, soit . . . soit, tant ...que, jamais: Causes of the fall of Rome. (A) portrait of Napoleon III. Causes de la perte de Rome. Portrait de Napoleon III. Soldats, officiers, citoyens, tous accoururent. Beauts, talent, esprit, tout s'use k la longue. II logoi rue Richelieu. Maison h vendre. Chapeaux pour hommes. Corps et ame ; nuit et jour. le combat. Soldiers, officers, citizens, all has- tened up. Beauty, talent, wit, everything wears out in the long rvui. He lives in Richelieu street. (A) house for sale. Men's hats. Body and soul ; night and day. Whether from fear or prudence, he avoided the combat. §331]" USE OF ARTICLE WITH NOUNS. 243 II n'a ni p^re ni m6re. Sans amis ni argent. Tant hommes que femraes. Jamais pore n'a taut uiini'. He has neither father nor mother. Without friends or money. As well men as women. Never did a father love so much. 331. Unclassified Examples. The following examples show Idiomatic distinctions in the use of the article wMch cannot conv .niently be brought under general rules : Vous etes le bienvenu. Demander (faire) I'aumOne. Avoir le temps. AUer k I'ecole (l't5glise). Commander le respeet. ^e feu s'est d^elard Faire la guerre. Jeter (lever) I'ancre. >-Garder le silence, /Mettrelefeu k. Sur (vers) les trois heures. Au revoir ! L'ann^e derniere (prochaine). La semaine (I'annee) passee. Le vendredi saint. Le mercredi des cendres. Le printemps, I'et^, etc. Au printemps, en 4t6, etc. La (sc. fete de) Saint-Michel. La {6c. fete de) mi-juin. La moitid de I'annee, Les deux tiers du temps. Tous (les) deux ; tous (les) trois. Tons les mois. Le ministre de la guerre. Le meilleur des amis. II cria k I'assassin. Je I'ai dit au hasard. Prendre le deuil de quelqu'un. Sentir la fumde. Je vniia anii}ioiff> 1^ V. — „_ -,. , — — jL.^.tt^ ,jj Dunne annee. li n'a pas le sou. You are welcome, i^ Ask (give) alms. To have time. ^ l^ To go to school (church). Command respect. Fire broke out. Make war. Cast (weigh) anchor. Keep silence. To set fire to. Towards three o'clock. Good-bye ! Last (next) year. Last week (year). Good Friday. Ash Wednesday. Spring, summer, etc. In spring, in summer, etc. Michaelmas. Mid-June. (The) half (of) the year. Two-thirds of the time. Both ; all three. Every month. The minister of v^ar. The best of friends. He cried murder. I said it at random. Go into mourning for somebody. Smell of smoke. I wish you a happy new year. He is wretchedly poor. 244 THE ARTICLE. [§332 u f H est plus grand que vous de la tete. Un homnio k la bitrbe noire. La belle question ! A la (*c. mode) fran^'aise. S'en aller a I'anglaise. A la (ac. mode de) Henri IV. Cent (mille) ans. Les amis, oil allez-vous ? He is taller than you by a head. A man with a black beard. What a (fi/ie) question ! In the French style. To take Fre^ich leave. In the style of Henry IV. A hundred (a tliousand) years. (My) friends, where are you going ? THE ARTICLE WITH PROPER NO \S. 332. Names of Persons. 1. Names of persons usually take no article, as in Englisli : Corneille ; George Fox. Corneille ; George Fox. a. The definite article is a constituent part of some surnames : Les romans de Lesage. The novels of Lesage. Les fables de La Fontaine. The fables of La Fontaine. 2. The definite article is used according to Italian analogy in the French form of a few famous Italian surnames; so also, in a very few names which are not Italian : Le Corr^ge ; le pofeme du Tasse. Correggio ; the poem of Tasso. Le Poussin ; le Camoens. Poussin ; Camoens. 3. The article is used when the name has a distinctive adjunct, when it is plural, jv when used as a common noun : Le Christ. Christ ( = the ' Anointed '). Le Satan de Milton ; le grand Milton's Satan ; the Great Conde. Conde. Les Corneille et les Racine. A Corneille, a Racine ( = Corneille, Racine and others like them). He is an Alexander. It is pure Ciceronian. I have read T^l^raaque. C'est un Alexandre. C'est du Ciceron tout pur. J'ai lu le Te^maque. 4. Familiarly, often in a depreciatory sense, the definite article is not uncommon, especially with names of females : Sans attendre la Barbette. W'ithout waiting for Barbara. ^ Duval me I'a dit. Duval told me so. §383] THE ARTICLE WITH PROPER NOUNS. 24jj 333. Names of Countries. 1. Names of continents, countries, provinces, large islands, regularly take the definite article, always so when standing as subject or object of a verb: L'Asie oat uii grand contiueui. Asia is a large continent. Nona aimona le Canada. We love Canada. La Noimandie ; I'Angloterre. Normandy ; England. a. A few countries named after cities have no article : Naples ; Parme ; Bade. Naples ; Parma ; Baden. NoTB.-Con8iderable variety prevails regardinjr tho use of the article with names of islands: some require the article, whilst it is omitted with others, e.g., 'La Corse' Corsica, 'La Sioile,' Sicily, 'Cuba,' Cuba, 'Terre-Neuve,' Newfoundland. L'lle de, precedirif,' the name, and Hie in apposition, are common forms, e.//., 'L'lle de Cuba,' Cuba, 'L'lle Saint-Dominique,' St. Doming'o, 'Les lies Bahama,' The Bahama Islands*. 2. Before names of continents, European countries singular, and feminine countries: singular outside of Europe, en denotes 'where,' 'where to,' and the article is omitted; so also, after de denoting * point of departure from ' and after de in most iidjectival phrases : He is in (is going to) Europe. He travels in France (Portugal). He comes from Spain (Denmark). The King of Portugal (Spain), Swedish iron ; French wines. II est en (va en) Europe. II voyage en France (Portugal). II vient d'Espagne (Danemark). Le roi de Portugal (Espagne). Le fer de Suede ; les vins de France. a. Exceptions arc very rare, e.g., 'au Maine,' 'Le due du Maine,' etc. Note.— In an adjectival phrase, de denoting titular distinction, origin, description, or mere apposition usually omits the article, e.g., ' le pays da Frur"*-^,' ' Le Royaume Uni de Grande-Bretagne et d'Irlande.' 3. But the definite article is not omitted, in answer to ' where V ' where to ?', or after de as above, when the name is plural, or has a distinctive adjunct, or denotes n masculine countiy outside of Europe : II est aux Indes. II va aux Etats-Unis. Aux Pays-Bas. L'imp^rcitrice des Indes. Venir des Indes (de I'lnde), Dans la France mdridionale. He is in India. He goes to the United States. In (to) the Netherlands. The Empress of India. To come from India. In Southern France. 'n !,tl I ;:i! 246 THE ARTICLE. [§§334-33.S 1 1 Dans rAmdriquo du Nord. La reine do la (Jrande-Bretagne. II re 'iont do rAfri(iiic australe. An Canada (Japon). Le Dominion du Canada. ^ La PuiHHanco du Canada. J Chassis de laChino. Lc consul du IVtou. Le for du Canada. In North America. The Quoen of dreat Britain. Ho returns from South Africa. In (to) Canada (Japan). The Dominion of Canada. P]xpollcd from Clnna. The consul of Peru. C;inadian iron. Ob».: When'tho definite article is used, * where/ • where to,' =iL (general) or danB (specific). a. In a few names like • Asie Mineure,' ' bac-e Bretagne,' the adjec- tive is no longer felt to be distinctive : En Asie mineure. In Asia Minor. 4. Omission of the article in the predicate, in enumerations, titles, etc., sometimes occurs (of, §330, 5) : La Gaule est devenue France. Gaul became France. Espagno, Italic, Belgique, tout Spain, Italy, Belgium, all would eut pris feu. have caught fire. 334. Names of Cities. Names of cities and towns usu- ally have no article, unlesr: used with a distinctive adjunct : Londres, Paris, Quebec. London, Paris, Quebec. A T9ronto (Montreal). To or in Toronto (Montreal). But : La Rome de ce si^cle. (The) Rome of this century. La Nouvelle- Orleans. New Orleans, a. The definite article is an essential part of several names of cities : Le Caire ; le Havre ; la Havane. Cairo ; Havre ; Havana. 335. Names of Mountains and Rivers. Names of mountains always, and names of rivers regularly, have the definite article : Les Alpes ; le Nil ; le mont Blanc. The Alps ; the Nile ; Mt. Blanc. a. For rivers, the usage after en, de, is parallel with that described in § 333, 2 : De I'eau de Seine. Seine water. Un abordage a eu lieu en Seine. A collision occurred on the Seine. ^^:m §§336-337] TflE FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. 247 THE ADJECTIVE. THE FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. 336. General Rule. The feminine of an adjective is regularly formed by adding -e to tlio masculine singular, but adjectives ending in -e remain unchanged : M. F. grand, graiule, tall. joli, jolie, pretttj. rus6, rusc'e, cunning. bless^, blessee, wounded, mort, morte, dead. M. P. facile, facile, eaay. jouiie, jeinie, young. sincere, sincire, nincere. c^l^bre, ceiebro, celebrated. etc. etc. a. Similarly, nouns of like termination (but see § 306, 2) : M. F. M. F. marquis, marquis, maniuise. artiste, artht, artiste. ami, friend, cousin, cousin, lapin, rabbit. ainie. cousine. lapine. caniarade, comrade, caniarade. coiicie.vQ, jmrter, concierge, malade, patient, nialade. 6. Adjectives in -gu are regular, but require the diuresis to indicate that u is sounded, e.f/., aigu, sJiarp, aigue. c. The circumflex in du (f, due) distinguishes it from du= 'of t>'?,' and disappears in the fom. (§214) ; observe also mu (f. mue, §219). d. Besides adjectives in -e, a very few others are invariable for the feminine, e.g., capot, in etre capot= 'have come to grief,' grognon, grumbling, rococo, rococo, sterling, .sterling, and rarer ones. Note.— Here also properly belongs grand in grand'm^re, etc. In O. F. grand was masculine or feminine, but fframmariana at a later date gave it the apostrophe to denote the supposed elision of e. 337- Special Rules. 1. Irregularities consist chiefly of changes in the stem on adding the feminine sign -e j thus, when -e is added : — (1) Final f=v, X = S, C = ch in some, and qu in others. g:=g:u: M. p. M. p. actif, active, active. *blanc, white, blanche. bref, brief, b'-6ve. tpublic, ^.H6/ic, publique. heureux, happy, heureuse. long, long, lonrue. So also : Franc, fimik, franche ; sec, dr]/, s6clie. tSoalso: Ammoniac (-que), ammoniac; caduc (-que), decrepit: hana (-an^) Prankish; turo {-q}Xe), Turkish. ^ * **"'*^'*"'' 248 THE ADJECTIVE. K 'I I. I \i'A i ! ii'i [§337 a. Similarly, nouns of like termination : M. F. M. F. M. F. veuf, widoiver, V5uve, ^poux, upouse, dpoufle. turo, Turk, turque. Note.— Here also belongs bailll, bailiff (O. F. baillif), baillive. 6. The adjectives doux, douce, siveet, faux, fausse,/a/se, roux, rousse, red (of hair, etc.), retain the [s] sound in the feminine, denoted by c and ss respectively ; grec, Greek, has feminine grecque ; prefix prefixed, is regular. (2) Final -el, -eil, -ien, -on, and usually -s, -t, double the final consonant : M. F. ^pais, thick, ^paisse. expres, expresfi, expresse. prof^s, professed, professe. muet, dumb, muette. sot, foclish, sotte. etc. etc. But : ras, rase, flat ; gris, grise, grey ; mat, mate, deid, dull ; pret, prete, ready; devot, devote, devout; bigot, bigote, bigoted; cagot, cagote, hypocritical ; idiot, idiote, idiotic, and a few rarer ones. a. Similarly, nouns of like termination, but see § 306 : M. F. M. F. M. F. mortel, mortal, niortelle. lion, Ko»i, lionne. poulet, chicken, poulette, chien, dog, chienne. chat, cat, chatte. liuot;, linnet, linotte. b. A very few adjectives and nouns of other ending;- follow this analogy: M. F. M. F. paysan, peasant, paysanne. genti" nice, gentille. rouan, roan, rouanne. nul, null, nulle. N^TE. — The doubling of the iinal consonant in -el, -ien, -et serves to ienote the required [e] sound (§12, 1); a few adjectives in -et denote this [e] sound by the grave accent without doubling, cf. (4) below. (3) The following have two masculine forms, one of which doubles 1 for the feminine, like the above : M. F. oruel, crttel. cruelle. pareil, like, pareille. ancien, old, ancienne. bon, good. bonne. bas, loio, basse. gros, big. grosse. M. beau or bel, fine, fou or fol, mad, jumeau or (O.F. juinel) (will. F. belle. foUe. jumelle. M. F. mou or mol, soft, moUe. nouveau or nouvel, new, nouvell' vieux or vieil, old, vieille. Obs.: The -1 form is regularly used only before a vowel or L n ate; vleux before vowel is permissible, c.(j., ' un vieux ami ' (better : ' un vieil ami '). p37] THE B'EMININE OF ADJECTIVES. 249 a. Analogous arc a few nouns : M. F. M. F. chanieau, ca»nf?, chamelle. iouvencea.\i, young fellow, jouvencelle, etc. (4) Before final -r anri -et of a few adjectives e becomes h (cf. §12, 1) ; so also in bref, breve, seC, s^che : M. F. M. F. cher, dear, chere. complet, complete, complete, leger, lujlit, l^geie. etc. etc. a. Similarly, nouns in -er : M. F. M. F. berger, shepherd, bergfere. ^iranger, stranger, 6trangere, etc. h. The complete list of adjectives in -et with fern, in -ete is : (in)complet, (i7i)complete. (in)discret, (in)discrcet, repli , over-stout. concret, concrete. inquiet, iniea-sy. secret, secret. Note,— The grave accent denotes the required [e] sound (§12, 1). (5) The following feminine stems show etymological ele- ments which have disappeared in the mascuhne : M. F. M. F. coi (L. quietus), quiet, coite. frais (L. L. fre-scus), cool, fraiche. b^nin (L. henignus), benign, benigne. tiers (L. tertius), third, tierce, favori (It. favorito), favourite, favorite. 2. Adjectives in -eur form their feminine as follows : — (1) Majeur, mineur, meilleur and those in -^rieur are regular : M. F. M. F. majeur, major, majeure. exterieur, exterior, ext^rieure. meilleur, better, meilleure. superieur, superior, superieure. mineur, minor, mineure. etc. etc. a. Similarly, nouns of like termination : M. F. M. F. M. F. mineur, minor, mineure. prieur, prior, pricure. infiiTieur, inferior, inf^rieure. (2) Those in -eur with a cognate present participle in -ant change -r to -s and add -e : "1. F. M. F. causeur, talkative, causeuse. reveur, dreamy, reveuse. 'Aa.itc.MV, flattering, flatteuse. trompeur, deceitful, trorapeuse. menteur, lying, menteuso, etc, etc. ;l,i I ■ 250 THE ADJECTIVE. [§§338-339 a. Similarly, nouns of like termination, but see also §306, 1, a, 2, a : M. F. danseur, dancer, danseuse. chanteur, singer, chaiiteiise. a&ttear, jlatterer, flatteuse. F. M. buveur, drinker, buveuse. vendeur, seller, vendeuse. etc. etc. (3) Those in -teur, '.vith no cognate present participle in ant, have the feminine in -trice : ^I- F. M. F. crdateur, creative, cr^atrice. acousateUT, accusing, accusatrice. directeur, directive, directrice. etc. etc a. Similarly, nouns of like termination, but see §306, 1, a, 2, at ^I' F. M. F. accusateur, accuser, accusatrice. crdateur. creator, cr^atrice. a.ctQ\xr, actor, actrice. etc. etc. THE PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES. 338. General Rule. Most masculine adjectives and all feminines form their plural by adding s to the singular (cf. §307): grand(s), grande{s). jeune(s), jeune(s). bas, basse(s). joli(s), jolie(s). aigu(s), aigue(s). doux, douce(s). ruse(s), rusee(s). complet{s), compleio(s). etc. etc. 339. Spec'al Rules. The following rules are parallel with those for the irregular plural of nouns (cf. § 308) : 1. Masculine adjectives in -s, -x (none in -z) remain unchanged • S. P. bas, bas. ^pais, epais. frais, frais. etc. S. P. gris, gris. soumis, sourais. doux, doux. etc. s. p. faux, faux, vieux, vieux. heureux, heur-'ux. etc. 2. Masculine adjectives in -^au, and one in -eu take x ; S- P. S. P. beau, beaux. juraeau, jumeaux. nouveau, nouveaux. hebreu, hebreux. But : bleu, bleus ; feu, feus. §340] AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. S. arnica', brutal, capital, P. amicaux. brutaux. capitaux. cardinal, cardiuaux. <^gal, e'gnux. fiscal, fiscaux. S. P. moral, moraux. priMcipal, principaux. ruraux. speciaux. triviaux. etc. 251 ^^3.^Masculine adjectives in -al regularly have the plural in S. p. general, gdn^raux. l«gal, Idgaux. liberal, liberaux. rural, local, locaux. special, loyal, loyaux. trivial, martial, martiaux. etc. «. Fatal makes ' fatals ;' Littre gives also final(s) r^^^J: '"' ''''"'"'^'•' '^ ^'^-^^«^^ the following have no *automnal. frugal. »,-ovial * Lit^r(5 gives a plural in -au^ ^ *^' nearly fifty of which, howe er Uttc" g .^^ ri; "';. P""^' °^ ^'^'^ ^^^^^ "^ ^hese, to been pronounced upon by either l^o" t/: B u " Z^ J'^ ^°"°"'"^^ '^^ -^ la .^ medicinal, n.ntal. .nonacal, paradcial, ^Z^l^!:::!: ^1^::^,^'-'^''' repas frugal ; des rep^s ^p ^ V Vj^: f ,!; '^^^^^^^ frugal, glacial. i„ltiai:n,ati;Xata..naa^h^^^^ ^° ^^°^^^^ '^^ ■• ^^^''^•. «-l. AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. orf '':.-^f"^''^^ ^•'^^^- "^^^ ^^J^^*^^^' whether attributive Z^:^' '''''-'' ''-- '- '-'- -' -^- .itlt E^:":itr"^^^^^- Sf—-arehealthful. lis se disaient malades. tLJ are pleased. Je les crois sinc^res. jtl '"^t. ^^ ^''' "^^ 1 believe them sincere. a. When the substantive has a de oIanc,p tu^ „ with that explained for subject and verMcf §232. T " ''""'' ft. The agreement with vous is according to the' sense : Madame, vous ^tes bien bonne. Madam, you are very I Ind. ill m 252 THE ADJECTIVE. [§§341-343 Mi:, I 1919 h 11. 341. Manifold Substantive. 1. One adjective qualify- ing two or more substantives is made plural, and agrees in gender with both, if of the same gender ; if of different gender, the adjective is masculine. De la viande et dcs pommes de Cold meat and potatoes. terre fioides. Sa soeur et lui sent contents. His sister and he are pleased. a. When substantives are joined by ou, ni. . .ni, or arc synonymous, or form a climax, etc., tlie principles stated for agreement of subject and verb apply (cf. § 233). b. When nouns ditfor in gender, the masculine one is usually placed nearest the a A beautiful white house. A white and dazzling ol i M ml \'\U II T 272 THE PRONOUN. §373 a. With lui so used, and sometimes also with eux, the conjunctive subject may he omitted : Lui seul (il) ne le voulait pas. He idonc did not wish it. Lui travaillait ; eux jouaiont. He worked ; they played. NoTB.-Je S0U8Sign^ = ' I the undersifrned • is a relic of the earlier language. 3. As logical subject after ce + ^tre : C'est moi (toi, vous) : ce sont eux, etc. It is I (thou, you) ; it is they. 4. With an infinitive : Moi t'oublier ! jamais. I forget thee ! Never. Et eux de s'enfuir. And they made otl'. 5. When the subject or object is composite, see also S362 1, a and 2,(1): ' Son hi^ve et lui sont venus. His brother and he have come. a. A composite subject or object is usu illy summed up by a pleonastic appositive conjunctive, especially wlien the components are unlike in person : Vous et lui (vous) I'avez vu. Je vous envoie, toi et ton fr^re. 6. After a preposition : Je parle de toi et d'eux. lis sont chez eux. II se moque de nous. You and he saw it. I send you and your brother. I speak of you and of them. They are at home. He makes sport of us. a. Observe the peculiar use of a preposition + a disjunctive pronoun as a sort of emphatic appositive of possession. J'ai une maison a moi. I have a house of ray own. Mon idee a moi, c'est, etc. My (own) idea is, etc. Note. -A disjunctive for things after a preposition is usually avoided, either by means of en, y, or else by an adverb, such as dedans, dehors, dessus, devant, derri^re etc : ' Je ne vois rien 1^ dedans (in it)' ; • Voyez sur la table, cherchez dessus (on It) et dessous (under it). ' ^ 7. For moi and toi after imperative, see §370, 3, obs. 1. 373. Pronouns in Address. In addressing one person VOUS is, in general, the pronoun of formality and respect, ■ I in §373 !ie conjunctive I it. yed. anguage. ; it is they. !e also §362, ve come. y a pleonastic are unlike in ^other. hem. tive pronoun wn. either by means ant, derrl^re, lez dessus (on , obs. 1. one person id respect, §374] whilst t as fol THE PObSE.SSlVE iRONOUN. 27'^ denotes familiarity, all'ection, solemnity, etc.. 1. - 'you,* of one person, is generally used between merabe.6 of the same tan' nd and wife, parents and children, brotliers and isu l ween very intimate friends, between children, by grown persons to children and sometimes to servants, by e\ body to animals and inanimate objects : Ou es-tu, nion cher pure ? Where are you, my dear father ? Est-ce toi, mon enfant ? Is that you, my child ? Pau e chien, tu as faim. Poor dog, you are hungry. 2. Tu = 'thou' is used in poetry and elevated prose, and by Protestants in addressih^ God, Roman Catholics using vous : Nous te (vous) louons, 6 Dieu ! We praise t; ^e, God ! 3. Vous, with the above limitations, is used, both in the singular and plural, as in English. THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 374. Possessives. 1. Adjectival Forms : Sixo. Plur. 2. Pronominal Forms : m. f. m. f. m. f. m. f. m. f. m. f. Jmes, my. mon ma (mon)^ te"ton)} tes, thy, your. son sa(son) } ses, notre votre leur 18 }his, her, its, one's. nos, our. vos, your. leurs. theirs. Sing. m. le mien f. la mienne le tien la tienne le sien la sienne le notre) la notre/ m. le votre \ f. la votre j m. le leur\ f. la leur/ m f. m f. m f. Plur. les miens ") , . J-mine. les miennes J les tiens les tiennes, les siens "1 his, hers, its, les siennesj one's own. ^ j- thine, yours. les notres, ours. les votres, yours. les leurr., theirs. t> s.nJ V«> ^^. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-S) :A Z- 1.0 I.I IM 2.2 us 1^ IL25 mil \A 2.0 1= 1.6 <^ %/ /i /. ^a w ^J V '-'V''? z!^ '/ Fhotographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4.503 m iV ^v c\ \ 'Q".^. ^ ri>- u. I 274 THE PRONOUN. [§§375-376 «,««;« . '" P"^"*h^«^«' 06*. ; 1. The feminine, except for leUT. mon, ton son, are used instead of ma, is formed as for adjectives of like ending! ta, sa. before a vowe or h mute: 'Mon 2. D9. k+ie, les, contract as usual ; thus, ame 'myfnendCf.)'; 'ton histoire du mien ( = de.le mien), aux mienne h ; '"""^^ ' I '°'' *""'•' ''"''•' ^=^+l«« •"•^""^«)' ^t«- ^- Note the ac ««1^ hf . ' r" '■. !• .'"'' '°" ^'^ ''''' ""'•'^ '" ^•'^t'-^' ^'^'••e, absent in notre. Bes)= his,' her/ ' Its,' < one's,' the con- votre. 4. Since le sien (la Bienne etc text determines which sense is intended. = ■ his.' < he.s,' ' its,' ' onll' thTconS determines which sense is intended. NoTE.-The regular feminine forms, ma. ta, sa, were at one time used before a vowel sound ; a trace of this usage survives in ma mie (for m'amie), m'amoUT. 375' Agreement. The possess! ves agree in gender and number with the noun denoting the object possessed, and in person with the possessor : EUe a son crayon et les miens. She lias her pencil and mine II a sa plume et les vOtres. He lias his pen and yours. a. The possessive adjective must be repeated precisely like the definite article (cf. §318) : " Mes parents et mes amis. My relatives and friends. b. When the possessor is indefinite, son (sa, etc.) and le sien (la sienne, etc. ), are used : On doit tenir sa parole. One must keep one's word Se charger des affaires d'autrui et To undertake the business of others n^ghger les siennes. and neglect one's own. 376. Use of Adjectival Forms. They are used, in general,^ like the corresponding English forms; idiomatic distinctions and special rules are : 1. The possessive adjective is commonly replaced by the definite article (cf. §328) when no ambiguity arises from its use: Donnez-moi la main. Give me your hand. II nra diichir^ le visage. He has scratched my face. But : II a dcchir^ son habit. He has torn his coat. a. If the sense is specific, emphatic, or distinctive, the possessive is used : Mon bras me fait mal. My arm pains me. Voila ma migraine encore ! There is my sick-headache again I 1376] THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 275 Je I'ai vu de mes propres yeux EUe lui a donne sa main. I saw it with my own eyes. She has given him her hand {sc. in marriage). 2. En + the definite article serves in certain cases as a substitute for son, leur, see §367, 2, (2) : a. This construction is more usual for things than for persons ; for things personified, for names of places, or to a\oid ambiguity, son, leur are not uncommon : La necessite parle ; 11 faut suivre Necessity speaks ; we must follow sa loi. her law. Vous rappelez-vous cette ville ? Do you remember that city? Its Ses promenades sont tres belles. promenades are very fine. La source de toutes les passions Sensation is the source of all the est la sensibility, I'imagination passions, imagination determines determine leur pente. their tendency. 3. The emphatic 'own' is denoted by propre or by an apposition with a : Je I'ai ^crit de ma propre main, C'est mon opinion k moi. Cf. also : J'ai un cheval k moi. C'est k moi k jouer. T wrote it with my own hand. That is my own opinion. I have a horse of my own. It is my turn to play. a. Along with son the a construction often avoids ambiguity : Son p6re k lui. His {i.e., not ' her ') father. 4 Mon (ma) is commonly used, in direct address, before the name of a relative (not before papa, mam^n) or the titl- of a superior officer : Bonjour mon p^re (mon colonel). Good morning father (colonel). But : Est-ce toi papa (maman) ? Is that j'ou papa (mamma) ? Note.— This usage explains the origin of monsieur ( = mon+sieur), madame (=ma+dame), etc. 5. In speaking to a person of his or her relatives, votre (VOS) is often preceded by monsieur, etc., for politeness : Madame votre mere y est-elle ? Is your mother in ? 1 im' 1 IHi 276 THE PRONOUN. I 'I I 'A I. [§377 6. When there is plurality of possessor, the object possessed usually remains singular, if it is singular as regards the individual possessor : ^ImZu'Tr^"' """' ^ ^'"'' ^^^" ''"'"^ ^^^« «f ^'-- «°"Js than Ame qu k leur corps. of their bodies. lis ont perdu la vie. They lost their lives. a. Sometimes the sense demands a plural : Leurs tetes se resserablent. Tlieir heads are alike. 377- Use of Pronominal Forms. They are used in general like the corresponding English forms; idiom'atic distinctions and special rules are the followincv-— 1. ' Mine,' etc, after etre is regularly expressed by a -f- moi etcvvhen denoting ownership simply, while le mien, etc.', denotes a distinction of ownership : Cette montre est k moi. ") Cette montre est la mienne. J T^^^t watch is mine. ^ 2 The pronominal form sometimes stands without article m the predicate after certain verbs : Ces opinions sont vOtres. Those opinions are yours. EUe deyiendra nuenne. She shall beeome mine. Je les ai fait miens. j ,„ade them mine. Such verbs are : 6tre. devenir. dire. faire. regarder comme. etc. A friend of mine. /One of my friends, (who is) a doctor. I A doctor, a friend of mine. A friend of mine. This friend of mine One of his tricks. a. The use of mien (tien, sien) attributively in this sense is familiar • Un mien parent A relative of mine. CJne sienne cousme. a cousin of his. Un de mes amis. Ijn m^decin de mes amis. Un ami k moi. Mon ami que voici. Cf. : Un tour de sa fagon. [§377 §§378-379] THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. £77 4. Emphatic 'own' is rendered by propre, or is, more usually, untranslated : Son avis et le mien (propre). His opinion and my own. 5. When used absolutely, i.e., without antecedent, the singular denotes 'property,' 'what is mine,' etc., and the plural 'relatives,' 'friends,' 'allies,' etc.: Je ne demande que le mien. I ask only for what is mine. Lea nOtres se sont bien battus. Our soldiers (etc. ) fought well. a. Familiarly, the feminine means 'pranks,' etc.: II fait encore des siennes. He is at his pranks again. NoTK. -other absolute uses are not permissible, e.g., ' Votre lettre (not • la v6tre ') d« la semaine derni6re.' THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 378. Demonstratives. 1. Adjectival forms : 2. Pronominal forms : Sing. m. ce(cet) f. cette m. ce (cet) . . .-ci f. cette . Pl.o'R. I this, that. ces. ^j [this. ceH...-ci. Sins, m. celui t celle etc. m. ce(cet).. -l^Ku . f. cette.. -1^ l*^'^*- «^es...U ni. celui-1^ f. celle- , IT ce,this(these),that(those) he(8he,it,they). Oi;.s. : The form cet is used before a 2 cecl, this. i that (one), ^j I this (on , , j that (one), etn. m. celul-cl\,.. , . ^ f. celle-ci r^'' ^°"'^' ^*°- PliUR. ceux \ celleB f ceux-cl -k celles-ci / ceux-l^ 1 celles-1^ vowel or h mute : Cet arbre ; cet ^ cela, that. homms ; cet autre 66 ; but : CO Ch6ne ; ce hetre. Obs. : The e of ce is elided before a vowel or h mute (§19); c' becomes c* before a (§5,4): 'c'a6t6.' 379- Agreement. The adjectival form agrees in gender and number with the noun before which it stands ; the pro- nominal form agrees in gender and number with the noun instead of which it stands: Cette plume et celle de Jean. This pen and that of John. J'aimc ces livres-^i, ^na is je n'aime I like these books, but I do not like pas ceux-li. those. 141 278 THE PRONOUN. [§§380-382 i anicle'^^f '^^"''"^*'^''^^''^ adjective must be repeated like the definite 380. Use of Adjectival ce. Ce (cette, etc.) = 'this' or 'that'; to distinguish 'this' from 'that' -ci and -la are respectively added to the noun : Lis ce livre-ci ; lis ce livre-lH. Read this book ; read that book. J aime ces tableaux-Ik. I like those pictures. a. Ce (cette, etc.), referring to what has already been mentioned sometimes has the force of ' that ' : ' Le t^legraphe. cette grande d^- The telegraph, that great discovery couverte de notre si^cle. of our century ^ h. The definite article replaces the demonstrative adjective in a few idioms : Ne parlez pas de la sorte. J'irai k I'instant. Do not speak in that way. I shall go this (very) moment. 381. Celui. The pronoun celui (celle, etc.) = ' that,' 'that one,' 'the one,' 'he,' is regularly used only along with a relative clause or a de clause : Ceux qui rient pleureront. Those who laugh will weep. Celle dont je parle est venue. She of whom I speak has come. Le devoir d^aimer Dieu et celui The duty of loving God and that of d aimer son prochain. loving one's neighbour. Cette robe et celle que j'ai vue. Tlii.. dress and tlie one I saw Mes plumes et celles de mon f rere. My pens and my brother's. Obs. : Note the use of celni=Enfi:lish possessive noun substantively. a. The relative .enter.ce is sometimes elliptically expressed by the past participle : Lesddcouvertesdnum^r^essont The discoveries enumerated are celles faites par Edison. those made by Edison. b. Celui-lk replaces celui when the predicate comes before the relative : Celui-lk est riche qui est toujours He (that man) is rich who is always content. happy. 382. Celui-ci, celui-la. The pronouns celui-ci (celle-ci etc.) = ' this/ 'this one,' 'lie,' 'the latter' and celui-la (celle- §383] THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 279 Ikt etc.) «* that/ Hhat one,* 'the former,' are used to contrast the nearer with the more remote : Voici les deux chaines ; gardez eel- Here are the two chains ; keep this le-ci, et renvoyez ceIle-1^. (one), and send back that (one). Veut-il ceux-ci ou ceux-1^ ? Does he wish these or those ? Cic^ronetVirgiledtaientRomains; Cicero and Virgil were Romans; celui-ci ^tait po^te, et celui- the former was an orator, and Ik orateur. the latter a poet. Obs.: The idiom in the last example is literally ' the latter. . ., the former.' a. ' This ' or * that ' for emphasis, not contrast, is celui-lll : Cest une bonne loi (que) celle-ld. This (that) is a good law. 383. Ce as Representative Subject. Ce = 'this,' 'that,* * these,' * those,' ' he,' ' she,' ' it,' ' they/ according to the con- text, is used with 6tre, or with devoir, pouvoir, savoirH- 6tre, as representative subject, when the logical subject is : — 1. A proper noun, or a determinate noun, including adjectives as such : It is Mary and her mother. That (it) will be a fine sight. These (those) are our pens. Was it the best ? They (those) are Germans. He (she) is my friend. That may be John. C'est Marie et sa m6re. Ce sera un beau spectacle. Ce sont nos plumes. Etait-ce le meilleur ? Ce sont des Allemands. C'est mon ami(e). Ce pent etre Jean. a. Before etre + an indeterminate noun il (ils, elles) is the regular construction : II est temps de s'en aller. Ils sont amis (Allemands). EUe est couturi^re. It is time to go. They are friends (Germans). She is a seamstress. NoTR.— For a few expressions like c'est dOIIimage, etc., in ..hich c'est stands with an indeterminate noun, see 384, 1, note 3. b. II est is always used to indicate hours of the day : II est midi (trois heures). It is noon (three o'clock). But: Quelle heure est-ce qui What hour has just struck? — It is vient de sonner ? — C'est cinq five, heures. 280 THE PRONOUN. [§384 Who is it ?— It is they. Those are theirs. It is this ; it is that. They (those) were the same. Those must be mine. e. Observe the use of ce in the following date idioms : Cost aujonrd'hui lundi. To-day is Monday. Ce sera domain le quatre. To-morrow will be the fourth. 2. A pronoun : Qui eat-ce ?— Ce sont eux. Ce sont les leurs. C'est ceci ; c'est cola. C'^taient les memes. Ce doivent etre les miens. 3. An infinitive, or an infinitive with de : Ce serait tout perdre. That would be losing everything Voir c est croire. Seeing is believing. Ce que je crains c'est de I'offenser. What T fear is to offend him. 4. A noun sentence : Est-ce que vous ne lo ferez pas ? Will you not do it ? Oh est-ce qu'il est ? Where is it that he is ? Ce n est pas qu'il ait peur. It is not that he is afraid. a. The noun sentence may be understood : Vous partirez, n'est-ce pas? (= You will go, will you not ? n est-ce pas que vous partirez ?) 5. An adverb of quantity : Combien est-ce ? 9'a dte trop. How much is it ? It was too much. Note.— For agreement of the verb, see §232, 3. 384. Ce as Real Subject. Ce stands as real subject of 6tre, or of devoir, pouvoir, savoir + ^tre, when the com- plement of ^tre is :— 1 . An adjective, an adjective -f a + an infinitive, an infinitive preceded by a, an adverb (in all cases without further syntac- tical connection, see a, below) : C'est facile (yrai, bien). That (it) is easy (true, well). Ce doit etre (ne saurait etre) vrai. That must be (cannot be) true. II est parti, c'est clair. He is gone, that is clear. C est dair, il est parti. It is clear, he h gone. C est k desirer. That (it) is to be desired. [§384 §385] THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 281 Ofi sera-ce ? where will it (that) be T C dtait bion mal h voua That was very wrong of you. a When followed by de + an infinitive or by aque clause, the regular construction for the above i.- in.personal il (not 'ce'); so also the parenthetical il est vraiand n'est-U pas vrai? (=n'est-ce pas?), though without syntactical connection : II est fa que ?, what ? t§, quol?, what? Obs. : 1. For the feminine and plural of quel, cf. §§337, 1, (2), and 338. 2. Lequel=le+quel, both parts being inflected (§§316, 389, 1) ; de, k contract with le, les (duquel, auquel, etc., cf. §317). S. Que=qu' before a vowel or h mute (§19). 284 THE PRONOUN. [§§390-392 390* Agreement. Tho adjectival forma agrco like ordi- nary adjectives; the variable pronominal forms a^'reo in gender, not necessarily in number, with the nouns for which they stand; quij* assun?es tho number of the noun or pronoun referred to: Quels livrcs avez-vous? Qiielli'H Hoiit vos raisons? L.'Kiuello (loH (laiiics est vonuoT Qui Honno? Qui Hont-ulles? Which (what) 'dooUs ha^e you? What aro your reaHoiis? Which of tho ladies has conio? Who rings? Who aro they? 391. Quel ?, Lequel ?. The adjective quel ? = ' which Vj 'what?', and the pronoun lequel? 'which (one)?', 'what (one)?', refer either to persons or things, and stand both in direct and indirect (juestions : Quels livrcs nvez-vous? Ditea-nioi quel livre il a. Desquela avez-voua hesoin? Dites-moi lesquels vous avez. Quelle dame eat arriv^e? Je ne aaia pas laquellc. Quc.Iea sont vos raisona ? Quel honinie eat-ce \k ? Auquel ties homni^a parle-t-il? Winch (what) books have you? Tell nie which (what) book he has. Which (ones) do you need ? Tell nio which (ones) you have. Which (what) lady has come? I do not know wliich (one). What are your reasons ? What (what kind of) man is that? To whicli of tho nie»i does he speak ? a. Quel I in exclamations sometimes = ' what a ! ', ' what ! ' : Quel h^ros ! Quels hdros ! What a hero ! What heroes ! Quelle belle sc^r.e ! What a beautiful scene ! h. Quel ? as predicative adjective often replaces qui ? = * who?' : Quels sont ces gens-U? Who are those people? {or what kind of people a^e those ?) Sais-tu quelle est cette dame ? Do you h now who that lady is ? NoTK.— A pleonastic de is commonly used before alternatives after quel 7, lequel? and other interrogatives, probably caused by case attraotion with des deuX, often present in such expressions : * Quel(dea deux) est le plus habile, de cet homme-ci ou de oelui-l&?' ; ' Laquelle est la plus illustre, d'Ath^nes ou de Rome?' 392. Qui?. 1. The pronoun qui? = 'who?', 'whom?', is regularly used of persons only, and stands in both direct and indirect questions : §393] THE INTEHUOGATIVE PltONOUN. 285 Quifrappo? QuicHtlAt l)oqui (liqiii) parln-t-il? Qui avuz-vous vu f Qui flteH-vouB? Dites-nioi qui est venu. Who Jh knocking ? Who in there? Of whom (to w». -^>) it) ho ^[Hxiking? Whom onno h juro? What brings you so early ? b. Qui ?, predicatively, is often roplacpd, especially when feminine or plural, by quel ? : Quelle est cette dnrre ? Who is that lady? (What 1. is that?). Quels Bont-ils? Who aro they? 2. * WFiose V, denoting ov> aershi^ simply = k qui ? ; other- wise generally de qui?, sometimes quel?, but never 'dont*: A qui est cette maison-lii ? Whose houpo is that ? De qui fites-vous fils ? Whoso son are you ? Quelle maison a 6t6 hidUe ? Whose (what) house was burnt ? NOTB. -Compare with this the idiom c'est il. qui : ' C'(SUit k qui flniralt le premier,' • It was a strife as to who would flnish first.' 393- Que?, Quoi?. The form que? = 'what?' is con- junctive, while quoi? = *wh'.tr is disjunctive; their uses in detail are : — 1. Que? stands regularly as direct object or as predicate, and in direct question only : Que vous a-t-il dit ? W hat did he say to you ? Que cherchez-vous ? What are you looking for ? Que sont-ils devenus ? What has become of them ? a. Que?, alternatively with quoi?, may stand with an infinitive in indirect question ; Je ne sais que (quoi) dire. I know not what to say. 6. Que? and que ! sometimes have adverbial force : Que ne m'avez-vous dit cela ? Why did you not tell me that ? Que vous etes heureux 1 How happy you are ! Que d'argent pendu 1 What a quantity of money lost I 286 THE PRONOUN. [§394 i » ' ( ' i iii if ill 2. 'Whatr as subject of a verb is regularly qu*est-ce qui ? : Qu'eflt-ce qui fait ce bruit ? What is making that noise ? a. The form que? may stand as subject to a few intrrnsitive verbs, mostly such as may also be impersonal, but never as subject to a transitive verb : Que sert de pleurer f What is the use of crying ? Que vous en semble ? What do you think of it ? Qa'est-ce? What is it? 3. Quoi ? is used absolutely, i.e., with ellipsis of the verb, and after a preposition : There is news. — What? What finer than that ? What ! You admire him 2 What are you thinking of? In what can I help you ? II y a du nouvQau.— Quoi? Quoi de plus beau que cela 1 Quoi ! vous I'admirez ! A quoi pensez-vous ? En quoi puis-je vous servir ? a. In cases of special emphasis quoi ? may be direct object : Je re^ois quoi ?— Des lettres. I receive what ?— Letters. b. With an infinitive, que ?, or more emphatically, quoi? is used : Que (quoj ) faire ? What is one to do ? Je ne sais que (quoi) r^pondre. I know not what to answer. 394- Interrogative Locutions. The use of interrogative phrases formed with est-ce, etc., instead of the simple forms is very frequent (cf. §§392-3) : Qui est-ce qui chante? for Quichante? Qui est-ce que vous demandez ? ., Qui demandez-vous ? A qui est-ce que vous parliez ? Qu'est-ce que cela prouve ? Qu'est-ce que c'est ? Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela ? De quoi est-ce qu'il parle ? Qu'est-ee qui fait ec bruit ? II A qui parliez-vous ? II Que prouve cela ? •I Qu'est-ce? II Qu'est-ce que cela? n De quoi parle-t-il ? What is making that noise? §§395-397] THE KF.LATIVE PRONOUN. 267 395. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. Relative Pronouns. qui, who, which, that ; wl.om (after a preposition), que, whom, which, that. dont, whose, of whom, of which, etc. oil, in which, into which, at which, to which, etc lequel, m. s. lesquels, m. pi. ) laquelle, f. s. lesquelles, f. pi. K^**' '^^°"'» ^^^*^^' **^ quel, what, which. Obs.: For qu', see §19. 396. Agreement. A relative pronoun, whether variable or invariable in form, is of the gender, number and person of its antecedent : Moi qui etais (vous qui etiez) la. Les lottres quo j'ai apportees. Moi qui suis son anu(e). Dieux (vous) qui m'exaucez ! C'est nous qui I'avons c^t. Jo suis celui qui I'ai -wit,hout 'les '-usually denotes ' simultaneousness (= ' both together,' etc.) ; les is obligatory above ten, and usual from five to ten. c. For the distinction between tout and chaque see §404, 2, a ; for tout. . . que = ' however,' see §404, 5, b, note. 7. Un is used either alone or as correlative to autre : — (1) Un, as adjective, = ' a,' 'an,' (cf. §320), 'one,' 'a certain ' ; un, as pronoun, = 'one ' : La maison est d'un c6t^. The house is on one side. Un monsieur A. I'a dit. A (certain) Mr. A. said so. Une des dames I'a dit. One of the ladies said so. Voici un crayon. -J'en ai un. Here is a pencil. -I have one. Les uns sont de cet avis, les au- Some are of this opinion, (the) others tres n'en sont pas. are not. a. Un as a pronoun is often preceded by 1', especially with a de L'un des consuls est arriv6. One of the cor^suls has come. (2) L'un rautre, so also the feminine and plural, are combined into various correlative phrases, as follows : !'Wi rr [§406 5407] THE INDEFINITE PRONOUN. 301 h,' etc., eminine sewhere ry much issan'?.' vorld). leousness ten. 2, a ; for e:— Dne,' * a ne. de) others dth a de le. iral, are s : I'un I'autre = * each other,' ' one another ' ; pi. ditto. Tun et I'autre = ' both ' ; pi., ' both,' ' all.' I'un ou I'autre = ' either' ; pi., ditto. ni Tun ni i'autre (. . . ne) = ' neither ' ; pi., 'neither,' ' none. ' EUes so flattent I'une I'autre. I' parlent les uns des autres. Lcl uns pour les autres. L'une et I'autre occasion. Les uns et les autres parlent. Dites ceci aux uns et aux autres. Je prends run(e) ou I'autre. Parle k l'une ou k I'autre. Ni les un(e)s ni les autres ne sont pour vous. Ni pour run(e) ni pour I'autre. They flatter each other. They speak of one another. For one another. Both occasions. Both (all of them) speak. Say this to both (all). I take either. Speak to either. Neither (none -^f them) are for you. For neither. 407. Indefinite Relatives. 1. Adjectival : 2. Pronominal : Quelconque, any (whatever, at all). Quiconque, whoever. Quel que( + subj. of etre), whatever. Qui que . . . (+subj. of etre), who- Quelque . . . que ( + subj. ), what- ever. ever. Quoi que . . . ( + subj. ), whatever. a. Quelconque takes -s for the plural,, and always follows its noun ; quiconque is invariable ; the other forms are made up from quel, quel- que, qui, quoi, + que : Any (two) point(s) whatever. Any reasons whatever (at all). Whoever speaks will be punished. Whatever be (may be) your designs. Un (deux) point(s) quelconque(s). Des raisons quelconques. Qu'conque parle sera puni(e). Quels que soient/ (puissent etre) vos desseins. Quelle que ftit la loi. Quelques efforts qu'il fasse. Qui que tu sois (puisses etre). Quoi que vous fassiez. Whatever the law was. Whatever efforts he makes. Whoever you be (may be). Whatever you do. Obs. : For the use of the subjunctive, see § 270, 4 : b. Qui que and quoi que are also used with ce before soit : Qui que ce soit qui le dise. Whosoever says it. Quoi que ce soit qu'il dise. Whatsoever he says. I I I \: W f . 802 THE ADVERB. THE ADVERB. [§§408-409 408. Simple Adverbs. The following list contains the commoner simple adverbs : ailleurs, elsewhere, ainsi, thus, so. alcrs, then, apr^s, afierwards. assez, enough, rather. aujourd'hui, to-day. auparavant, before. aussi, also, too, as. aussitdt, directly. aiitaut, as mucJu autrefois, formerly. beaucoup, mmh. bien, voeVL, very, much. bientCt, soon. cependant, however. certes, indeed. comhienCiyiowmuchif). comme, as, like. comment(?), how{f). davautage, more. dedans, inside. dehors, outside. A&]k, already. demain, to-morrow. derri^re, behind. desormais, henceforth. dessous, under. dessus, above. devant, before. dor<5navant, henceforth encore, still. eufin, at last. ensemble, together. ensuite, then. environ, about. expr6s, on purpose. fort, very. hier, yesterday. ici, here. jadis, formerly. jamais, ever, never. \k, there. \om,far(off), along way. longtemps, (a) long (while). lots, then. maintenant, now. mal, badly. meme, even. mieux, better, moins, less. ne. . ., not. n^anmoins, nevertheless. non, no. oi'i (?), where {f). oui, yes. parfois, sometimes. partout, everywhere. pas, not. peu, little. pis, worse. plus, more. plut6t, rather. point, not. pourquoi (?), why (?). pourtant, however. pr6s, near (by). presqua, almost. proche, near (by). puis, then, thereupon. quand (?), when(?). que !, how (!) quelquefois, sometimes. si, so ; yes. souvenb, often. surtout, especially. tant, so much. tant6t, soon, recently. tard, laie. t6t, soon. toujours, always, still. tout, quite, entirely. toutefois, however. tr6s, very. trop, too (much). vite, quickly. volontiers, willingly. 400, Adverbs from Adjectives. Most adjectives become adverbe by the addition of -ment to the feminine singular: the §409] Adj. ADVERRS FROM ADJECTIVES. 303 Adv. pur, purement, purely. strict, strictement, strictly. actif, activement, actively. sec, s6chement, dryly. Adj. Adv. doux, doucement, sweetly. fou, foUement, madly. facile, facilement, easily. autre, autrement, otherwise. a. Adjectives ending in a vowel, other than -e, drop the -e of the feminine on adding -ment : Adj. Adv. Adj. Adv. poli(e), voViment, politely. ddcid^Ce), d6c\(i6menb, decidedly. ab80lu(e) ahsolument, absolutely. etc. etc. NOTB.— The omitted e is denoted by a circumflex accent in assidtlment, COntinOl- ment, crOment, (in)(mment, galment (better 'gaiement'), nttment. b. The following adjectives in -e change e to 6 on adding -ment : Adj. Adv. Adj. Adv. aveugle, aveugl^menfc. immense, immens^ment. commode, commod^ment. incommode, incommod^ment. conforme, conform^ment. opiniatre, opiniatr^ment. (5norme, ^norm^ment. uniforme, uniform^ment. c. The following adjectives change the added -e of the feminine to 6 1 Adj. Adv. Adj. Adv. commiin(e), commun^ment. obscur(e), obscur^ment. confu8(e), confus^ment, diffu8(e), diffus^ment. expres8e(e), express^ment. importun(e), importun^ment opportun(e), opportun^ment. pr6cis(e), pr<5cis^ment. profond(e), profond^ment. profu8(e), profus^ment. d. Adjectives in -ant, -ent (except lent, present, v^h^ment) as- similate -nt to m and add -ment to the masculine form : Adj. Adv. Adj. Adv. constant, constamment, const *le cinq mai' [la ssik rae]. 2. No elision or liaison occurs before huit, ijnze: Le huit [laqit]; les huit livres [le qi liivr]; le onze [la 3:z]; lea onze francs [le diz fra]. 3. The t is sounded in vingt in 21, 23, 24, «5, 26, 27, 28, 29, becomes d in 22, is silent from 81 to 99, is silent in cent un, deux cent un, etc. a. Un (f. une) is the only cardinal which varies for gender : Une (deux, trois, etc. ) plume(s). One (two, three, etc. ) pen(8). Vingt et une vaches. Twenty -one cows. b. Cardinals are invariable for number, except that -s is added to quatre-vingt and the multiples of cent, but only when immediately preceding a noun, or an adjective + a noun, or when they themselves merve as nouns of number : Quatre-vingts francs. Iroia cents (bonnes) plumes. Deux cents millions. T~>;~ ^ — 4.- J _ s.\js.a -wCiita tic pUlUUICSa Les cinq cents. Eighty francs. Three hundred (good) pens. Two hundred millions. Three hundred apples. The five himdreds. i ■ T 316 THE NUMERAL. [§422 But : Trois cent un francs ; les cent hommes engages ; quatre-vingt- une plumes ; deux cent mille ; trois mille milles, etc. N.B.— They are not nouns of number in dates (c. below) or when used as ordinals (§ 427) : • L'an quatre cent ' ; ' page deux cent ' ; ' page quatre-vlngt' c. The form mil (not 'mille') is used in dates of the Christian era from 1001 to 1999 : En mil huit cent quatre-vingt- In eighteen hundred and ninety- onze. one. (En) l'an mil six. (In) the year 1006. But : L'an mille (sometimes mil) ; l'an deux mille trois cent ; l'an mille cent du monde, etc. d. From 1100 onward dates are often expressed by hundreds, as so frequently in English : Onze cent(8) ; treize cent(8). Eleven hundred ; thirteen hundred. Quinze cent cinquante. Fifteen hundred and fifty. e. 'A {or one) hundred '= cent ; ' a (or one) thousand '= mille : Mille soldats. A (one) thousand soldiers. NoTB.— Septante =70, octante =80, nonante =90, Blx-vinst(s)=i20, and quinze- Vlngt(8)=300, are now obsolete in the literary language. 422. Ordinal Numerals. The ordinal numerals denote order or place in a series relatively to the first; they are formed, from ' third ' up, by adding -i^me to the last conso- nant of the corresponding cardinal, cinq adding u, and f of neuf becoming v before -i^me : 1st premier [pramje]. « second [s8g5]. ^ \deuxieiTie [d0zjem]. 3rd troisieme [trwazjem] 4th quatri^me [katriem]. 5th cinquieme [sSkjem]. ^th sixieme [sizjem]. 7th septi^me 8th huitifeme 9th neuvi^me 10th dixi^me [sEtjem], [qitjem]. [ncevjem]. [dizjem]. [ozjem]. 11th onzi^me 21st vingt et uni6me [vft e ynjem]. 22nd vingt-deuxi^me [vend d0zjem]. N0TR8.— 1. Besides the ordinary forms, tiers (f. tierce)= ' ♦bird,' quart(e)= ' fourth,' are used in a few expressions and in fractions : ' Le tiers 6tat,' 'The commoners' ; •En maison tierce,' 'In the house of a third party'; 'Une flfevre quar^.' *A quartan ague.' 2. Quint = ' fifth ' is used only In ' Charies-Quint,' Charles V. (the EmperOF)' ; ' Sists- Quint,' ' Sixtus V. (the PopeX* § §423-424] COLLECTIVES — FR ACTIONa 317 a. Ordinals are like ordinary adjectives in inflection and agreement, and regularly precede the noun : La (les) premi6re(8) maison(s). The first hou8e(s). Nous sommes arrives les premiers. We arrived first. b. Deuxi^me instead of second is more usually employed in a series of more than two, and always in compounds : Le second volume. The second volume (of two). Le deuxi^me volume. The second volume (of three, etc. ). La cent deuxi^me fois. The hundred and second time. 423. Collectives. The following nouns are used with collective force : un(e) couple, a couple (two). une paire, a ijair. une huitaine, about eight. une dixaine, about ten. une douzaine, a dozen. une quinzaine, about fifteen. une vingtaine, about twenty. une trentaine, about thirty. une quarantaine, about forty. une cinquantaine, about fifty. une soixantaine, about sixty. une centaine, abovi a hundred, un cent, a hundred. un millier, (about) a thousand. un million, a million. un milliard, ' un billion, etc. lliard, \ lion, / billion. a. They take -S in the plural, and have the construction of ordinary nouns : II y a une centaine d'^lfeves. There are about 100 pupils. II y en a deux cents. There are two hundred of them. Des milliers de gens. Thousands of people. Deux millions de francs. Two million(s of) francs. 424. Fractions. The numerator is regularly denoted by a cardinal and the denominator by an ordinal; 'half ' = moiti^ £., as a noun, and demi as an adjective or a noun : fun demi. *\une moiti^. i un quart. f trois quarts. I deux demis. ^ un cinqui^me. i un tiers. f un septi6me. I deux tiers. r^ un onzi^me, a. Demi, before its noun, is invariable and joined by a hyphen, but agrees elsewlicre ; as a noun, demi is hardly used, tsAuept in arithmetical calculations : 1^ trois seiziemes. t^ sept centi^mes. ^x dix cent uni^mes. rHir onze milli^mes. etc; 318 THE NUMERAL. [§§425-426 I ■ ii.> : Une demi-heure ; une heure et demie. Quatre demis=deux. La moiti^ de la somme. Half an hour ; an hour and a half. Four halves = two. Half the sum. b. The definite article is required before fractions followed byde + a noun when the noun is determined by the definite article, a possessive, or a demonstrative, and similarly for pronominal substitutes for such constructions : La moiti^ du temps. Half the time. Les trois quarts de ces (ses) biens. Three-fourths of those (his) goods. J*en prends les cinq sixifemes. I take five-sixths of them. 425. Multiplicatives. The following are used as adjec- tives, or absolutely as nouns : double, dottle. septuple, sevenfold. triple, triple. octuple, eight/old. quadruple, qtuzdruple, nonuple, ninefdd. quintuple, fivefold. decuple, tenfold. sextuple, statfold. centuple, hundred/old. As nouns, le double, the double, etc. : La triple alliance. The triple alliance. Payer le double. To pay twice as much. a. Double is sometimes adverb : n voit double. He sees double. 2. * Once,' * twice,' * three times,' etc, = une fois, deux fois, trois fois, etc.: Dix fois dix font cent. Ten times ten make a hundred. Deux fois autant. Twice as much* 426. Numeral Adverbs. They are formed from the ordinals by -ment, according to rule (cf. §409) : premi^rement, firat^ firstly. troisi^mement, thirdly. secondement \,,condly. ^^" ^^' deuxiSmementJ a. Substitutes for them, of very frequent use, are : d'abord = * at first,' puis=*then,' 'after that,' ensuite = ' then,' 'next,' en premier Ueu«t*in the first place,' en second lieu, etc. = *in the second place,' etc ; or the Latin adverb forms prime, secundo, tertio, etc., abbre- viated to 1% 2^, 3°, etc., are used. .i'!l^ §§427-428] REMARKS ON USE OP NUMERALS. 31D REMARKS ON THE USE OF NUMERALS. 427. Cardinals and Ordinals. 1. Premier =* first' is the only ordinal used to denote the day of the month or the numerical title of a ruler; otherwise, cardinals are employed : Le premier (deux, dix) mai. The first (second, tenth) of May. Le onze de ce mois. The eleventh of this month. Napoldon (Gr^goire) premier. Napoleon (Gregory) the First. Henri (Catherine) deux. Henry (Catherine) the Second. 2. Observe the following date idioms : Quel jour du mois est-ce aujour- What day of the month is this? d'hui ? Quel jour du mois sommes-nous n m n « aujourd'hui ? Quel quanti^me du mois est-ce mm n n aujourd'hui ? C'est aujourd'hui le quinze. To-day is the fifteenth. Ce sera demain le seize. To-morrow will be the sixteenth. Le six Janvier. On the sixth of January. lis sont arrives lundi. They came on Monday. D'aujourd'hui en huit. A week from to-day (future). II y a quinze jours. A fortnight ago. 3. Other numerical titles, book, chapter, scene, page, etc., are expressed as in English, ordinals being used before nouns, and either cardinals or ordinals after nouns : Tome troisi^me (trois). Volume third (three). La dixi^me sc6ne du second acte. The tenth scene of the second act. a. The first of two ordinals joined by et or ou is not uncommonly replaced by a cardinal : La quatre ou cinqui^me page. The fourth or fifth page. h. Cardinals must precede ordinals : Les deux premieres scenes. The first two scenes. 428. Dimension. The various methods of indicating dimension may be seen from the following: (1) Une table longue de dix pieds. A table ten feet long. (2) Une table de 10 p. de longueur .. » „ „ (3) Une table dc 10 p. de long. n „ „ „ (4) Une table d'une longueur de 10 p. .. „ ., ti i* II •I i1 ! J* I-L-, I 1^ i ■ 320 THE NUMERAL. [§429 The table is ten feet long. (6) La table est longue de 10 p. (6) La table a 10 p. dj longueur. n n n n n »i (7) La table a 10 p. de long. h h h n n i' (8) La table a une longueur de 10 p. n n n n n ii Oba.: 1. Dimension after an adjective is denoted by de, cf. (1), (5). 2. Substitutes for the adjectival construction of (1) are seen in (2), (3), (4). 3. The verb « to be ' is 6tre, as in (5), or avoir, as i" '".). H), (8) 4. Haut, large, long (but not • 6pais,' • profond ; :- .. • > ' used as nouns, instead of hauteur, largeur, longueur, cf. (3), (7). a. *By,' of relative dimension =sur ; 'by,' after a comparative =de : Cette table a dix pieds de longueur This table is ten feet long by three sur trois de largeur. wide. Plus (moins) grand de deux pouces. Taller (shorter) by two inches. 429. Time of Day. The method of indicating the time of day may be seen from the following : — Quelle heure est-il ? II est une (deux) heure(s). II est trois heures et d 'e. Trois heures (et) un quart. Quatre heures moins un quart. Trois heures trois quarts. Trois heures dix (minutes). Six heures moins cinq (minutes), Cinq heures cinquante-cinq. II est midi et demi. II est minuit (et) un quart. A huit heures du soir. A quelle heure ? A trois heures precises. Vers (les) trois heures. What time (o'clock) is it? It is one (two) o'clock. It is half-past three. A quarter past three. A quarter to four. A quarter to four. Ten minutes past three. Five minutes to six. Five fifty-five. It is half-past twelve (noon). It is a quarter past twelve (night). At eight o'clock in the evening. At what o'clock ? At three o'clock precisely. Towards (at about) three o'clock. Ohs.: 1. ' It is (was, eto.)'=il est (6tait, etc.). 2. Heure(B) is never omitted. 3. Et is essential only at the half hour. 4. Demi(e) agrees with heure (f.) or with midi (m.), minuit (m.). 6. Minutes ia often omitted. & 'A quarter to,' ' minutes to * is moins before the following hour. 7. Twslve o'clock ia never douze heures. !:! §§430-432] PREPOSITIONAL LOCUTIONS. 430* Age. Idiomatic expressions denoting age are : Quel age avez-vous ? How old are you ? J'ai vingt ans. I am twenty (years old). Je suis ftg6 de vingt ana. n n n .1 „ Une fiUe ftg^e de six ans. A girl six years old (of age). Plus ag^ de deux ans. Older by two years. Obs.: 1. The construction with arolr is the more oommon. 2. All(s) may not be omitted in specifying age. & 'By'sde^afteracomparisoa 321 THE PREPOSITION. 431. Simple Prepositions. The following list contains the commoner simple prepositions : k, to, at, in, on, etc. apr^s, after, next to. avant, before. avec, with. chez, with, at — 's. centre, against. dans, in(to). durant, during. en,^n, to. entre, between, among. envers, towards. hormis, except. jusque, till, until. parmi, among. pendant, during. pour, for. sans, without. sauf, save, except. selon, according to. sous, under. malgrd, in spite of. de, off from, with, etc. moyennant, by means of. suivant, according to, depuis, since, from. nonobstant, notunth- sur, on, upon. derri^re, behind. d^s, from, since. devant, before. standing. outre, besides. par, by, through. vers, towards. voici, here is (are). \oUk, there is (are). 432. Prepositional Locutions. Phrases with preposi- tional function, mostly ending in de or ^, are numerous : A c8t6 de I'dglise. Beside the church. Jusqu'^ la semaine prochaine. Until next week. A travers la for^t. Through the forest 21 322 THE PREPOSITION. [§§433-435 VI ffl Such locutions are : k cause de, tn account qf. & c6t6 de, by the side of. k force de, by dint of. k regard de, tvith regard to. k I'exception de, except, k I'insu de, unknown to. i\ t ravers, across, through. au delii de, beyond. au-des80us de, under. au-dessus de, above. au lieu de, instead ?/. autour de, around. au moyen de, by means of. aupr^s de, near by. au travera de, across, through. d'apr^s, according to. en de(;ii de, on this side (of). en d6pit de, in spite oj. faute de, for want of. jusqu'ii, as far as, urUU. par delii, beyond. par-dessous, under. par-des8U8, over. pr^s de, near. quant k, as for. vis-i-vis de. opposite. etc., etc. 433* Position. Prepositions regularly precede the governed word, as in English : Je parle de Jean (de lui ). I speak of John (of him). a. CJonjunctive personal pronouns governed by voici, voilk, precede : Me voici ; les voilk. Here I am ; there they are. En voici quelques-uns. Here are some of them. b. Durant is sometimes placed after its noun : Durant sa vie (or sa vie durant). During his life. 434. Repetition. The prepositions ky de, en, are regu- larly repeated before each governed substantive ; the repetition of other prepositions is regular in contrasts, but is elsewhere optional, as in English : n aime k lire et k 6crire. Le p^re de Jean et de Marie. En France ou en Italie. Sur terre et sur mer. He likes to read and write. The father of John and Mary. In France or Italy. By land and sea. .' '^ Par la persuasion ou par la force. By persuasion or force. But : Pour lui et (pour) son fr^re, etc. Iltf IDIOMATIC DISTINCTIONS. 435* Prepositions vary greatly as to idiomatic force in different languages. In the following sections are given some of the various French equivalents of the commoner English prepositions. ^^ § §430-4 ;8] IDIOMATIC DlSDNCTIONa 823 436. About. 1. In the sense of * around ' =autour de : Regardoz autour de vous. Look about you. Autour de la place. About the square. 2. In the sense of 'concerning,' 'of =de k: De quoi parlez-vous ? What are you talking about ? A quo, ponsez-vous ? What are you thinking aboui ? 3. In the sense of ' with,' ' about (the person) '=sur • Avez-vous de I'argent sur vous ? Have you any money about you ? 4. Denoting approximation = environ, prfes de, Ifpeu prfes, vers : Environ (pr^s de, k peu pr^s) deux About two thousand franca ; about mille francs ; vers (sur lea) dix ten o'clock ; about 1830 heures; versiasO. ""uu loou. 437. After. 1. Denoting time, rank, order, position=aprfes: Apr^s diner; le premier apr^s le After dinne. j' the first after the Tom eon tf '^''^ '' '^^"^ ' the adjective is placed after nom ; courez apr^s lu,. the noun ; run after him. 2. In the sense of ' at the end of '=au bout de : Au bout de trois si^cles. After three centuries. 3. Unclassified : ^llZn T r[ '' .^'''^"^ ^'^P'^' ^^y ^f*^^ ^^y ' d^^n after Raph- Raphael ; le lendemain de son ael ; the day after his return -he retour ; ,1 tient de sa m^re. takes after his mother.. 438. Among:. timesttr::""";' '" the midst of.' unded by'=parmi, some- Une brebis parmi les loups. A sheep among wolves. n fut trouvd entre les morts. He was found among the dead. 2. * Among (distributively or reciprocally) '= entre • II le partagea. entre ses amis. He divided it among his friends. Us parlaient entre eux n^Ur.. 1 s •■«-> nieuus, f tenure eux. ^ hey spoke among themselves. 3. Unelassiiied : C^teit ainsi Chez les Grecs. It was so among the Greeks. ^Yf 324 THE PREPOSITION. [§§439-441 4» At. 1. Denoting place, time,=i^ sometimes en : A r^ole ; ji Douvres ; k table ; ^ At school ; at Dover ; at table ; at cinq heures ; k I'dge de ; en tete five o'clock ; at the age of ; at de ; en (au) meme temps ; k la the head of ; at the same time ; fin (enfin). at last. 2. In tho sense of *at the house, etc., of,' ' at — '8' = chez : J'ai ^t^ chez vous ; il est chez I was at your house ; he is at Mr. Monsieur Ribot. Ribot's. 3. Unclassified : A mes d^pens; k tout prix ; d'abord ; sous la main ; entrer par la fenStre ; en haut (bas) ; au moins ; sur mer ; en guerre. At my expense; at any price; at first ; at hand ; come (go) in at the window ; at the top (bo* lom) ; at least ; at sea ; at war. 44a Before. 1. Denoting place, in the sense of ' in front of,' in the presence of '*= devant: Mettez oela devant le feu ; le jar- Put that before the fire ; the garden din est devant la maison ; il is before the house ; he preached prficha devant le roi. before the king. 2. Denoting time, order =avant : Avantmidi; je I'ai vu avant vous ; Before noon; I saw it before you; mettez I'article avant le nom. 3. Unclassified: Sous mes yeux; la veille de la bataille ; comparaitre par-de- vant le juge. put the article before the noun. Before my eyes ; the day before the battle; to appear beiore 'ihe judge. 441. By. 1. Denoting the agent after the passive = par, de (cf. §240) : Elle iut saisie par le voleur ; ils She was seized by the robber ; they som'. aim6s de tous. are loved by alL 2. Denoting means, way, etc. =par (usually) : Par ia poste ; par chemin de far ; By post ; by railway ; by par ce moyen ; par un ami. means ; by a friend. this §442] IDIOMATIC DISTINCTIONS. 325 3. Denoting moa8uro=de; relative dimension asur: Plus grand de la tete; plus ftg^ Taller by a head ; older by ten years de dix ans (de beaucoup) ; plus (by far) ; heavier by a pound ; ourd d une li vre ; moindre de less by half ; ten feet by six. la moiti^ ; dix pieds sur six. 4. Unclassified: De jour (nuit) ; k I'ann^ ; goutte By day (night) ; by the year ; drop A goutte; il est midi h ma by drop; it is noon by my watch ; montro ; connaitro de vue ; de ' ' " vive voix ; un tailleur de son ^tat; vendre au poids; fait k la main. to know by sight; by word of mouth ; a tailor by trade ; to sell by weight ; made by hand. 442. For. 1. In the sense of • for the sake of,' • instead of/ ' (in exchange) for ' rrpour: ® ' Mourirpourlapatrie; jelefaispour To die for one's country ; Idoitfor vous ; donnez-moi ceoi pour cela. you ; give me this for that. 2. Denoting destination : Je pars pour la France; une let- I leave for France; a letter for tre pour vous. yQ^^ 3. Denoting a period of time (future) = pour : Je resterai (pour) huit jours ; j'en I shall stay (for) a week ; I have ai pour dix ans. enough of it for ten years. VmT'Z' ^r' °'«™tT* '"'"'" '' """^"""'y •■^"'^^'•^ = ' ^'^'^^' ^^^ io^ra absent or J 6tai8 absent pendant huit jours,' ' I was absent for a week ' ; « Tl y a (voici vollM deuj^heurcB que je lis or Je lia depuis deux heures/ I have been reading for two 4. Unclassified : Mot k mot or mot pour mot ; un remade centre (pour) ; trembler de crainte ; par cxemple ; quant k moi; vendre dix francs or laisser (donner) pour dix francs; renicrcier (punir) de ; changer pour (contra) ; e'est k vous de dire ; malgr^ tout cela. Word for word ; a remedy for ; to tremble for fear ; for eiiample ; as for me ; to sell for ten francs or to give for ten francs; to thank (punish) for: to change for ; it is for you to say ; for all that. ^.1 II I I] 326 I ! THE PREPOSITION. From. [§§448-444 443. 1. Usually = de : II vient de Paris; do trois k He comos from PariH j from three quatre heures ; je I'ai appria to four o'clock ; I heard it from do lui. him. 2. In the sense of 'because of,* ' out of,' • through ' = par : Cela arriva par n»5gligenco ; par That happened from carelessness | experience (amiti«5). from experience (friendsliip). 3. In the sense of ' dating from ' = dhs, depuis, k partir de : D6s (depuis, k partir de) ce jour ; From that day ; from 1820 (on). k partir de 1820. 4. Unclassified: D'aujourd'hui en huit ; dessin^ A week from to-day ; drawn from d'apr^s nature ; boire dans un nature ; to drink from a glass ; verre ; 6tez cela k I'enfant. take that from the child. 444. In, into. 1. Denoting place or time specifically, i.e., in the sense of 'within,' • inside of,' ' in(to) the interior of ' = dans (cf. §333, 3) : Dans ce paquet (champ) ; dans In this parcel (field) ; iii(to) the la maison ; dans I'Afrique aus- house ; in South Africa ; in the trale ; dans toute la ville ; whole city ; in the same year, dans la meme ann^e. Note.— The governed noun usually has the definite article. 2. Denoting place or time generally = en, k (cf. §333, 2, 3) : En Afrique; h la maison; aux In Africa; in the house (at home); champs ; au Canada ; h Ber- in the fields ; in Canada ; in Ber- lin ; k la campagne (ville) ; en lin ; in the country (city) ; in hiver ; au printemps ; en paix. winter ; in spring ; in peace. NoTB.— The governed word after en has but rarely the definite article (mostly in fixed expressions before initial vowel sound): ' En I'air ' ; ' En I'honneur de,' etc. 3. In the sense of 'at the end of (time) ' = dans; 'in the course of (time)'=en: Le train part dans une heure : on The train leaves in an hour ; one peut aller 4 L. en une heure. can go to L, in an hoiu*. ? §§446-446] IDIOMATIC DisTiNcriONa 827 4. Denoting place, after a suporlativo = de : U plus grando ville du monde. The largest city in the world. 5. Unclassified : Par la pluie ; le matin , de nos In the rain j In the morning ; in jours; par le passd j i I'avenir ; our day(8) ; in the past ; in the d avance ; entro les mains de ; future ; in advance ; in the hands k mon avis ; sous le r6gne de j of ; in my opinion ; in the reign sous presso j de cette mani^re ; of ; in press ; in tliis way : one ^^^dix, in ten. 44S. 1. Usually =de: Le toit de la maison j la ville de Paris ; un homme d'influence ; une livre de tii^ ; digno d'hon- neur ; 11 parlo d'aller i\ Paris. 2. Denoting material = en : Un pont en bois (fer); les pieces de dix francs sont en or. 3. Unclassified : Cest aimable k vous ; sur 100 personnes 50 sont ^chapp^es; docteur en m^decine; uu de mes amis ; majeur. 0£ The roof of the house ; the city of Paris ; a man of influence ; a pound of tea ; worthy of honour ; he speaks of going to Paris. A bridge of wood (iron); ten franc pieces are of gold. It is kind of you ; of 100 persons 50 escaped ; doctor of medicine ; one of my friends ; of age. On, upon. 446. 1. Usually=sur: Le Uvre est (je mets le livre) sur The book is (I put the book) on the ^ <»ble. table. 2. Is omitted in dates before specified days : Le dix mai ; je viendrai mardi ; il On the tenth of May ; I shall come o«.,™ « ^„j ^^ Tuesday; he arrived on the morrow. arriva le lendemaiii. I i i 328 THE PREPOSITION. [§§447-44(9 k 3w Unclaasified : Par une belle journ^e d'dW j mettre au feu ; pendre coutre le mur ; dans la rue ; dans I'tle ; dans I'escalier ; en (dans un) voyage ; en visite (cong^) ; en chemin (route) ; d'un c6t^ ; tomber par tcne ; a genoux ; dans cette occasion ; k cheval (pied) ; & droite (gauche) ; k son arrirte ; au oontrairo ; pour affaires. On a fine summer day ; to pat on the fire; to hang on the wall; on the street ; on the island ; on the stairs ; on a journey ; on a visit (a holiday) ; on the way (the road) ; on one side ; to fall on the ground ; on one's knees ; on that occasion ; on horseback (foot); on the right (the left); on his arrival ; on the contrary ; on business. 447. Out ot 1. Unclassified: ' Boire dans un verre ; copier dans To drink out of a gl&ss ; to copy un livre ; regarder par la out of a book ; to look out of the fen^tre ; un sur dix. window ; cne out of ten. 448. Over. 1. In the sense of * above '=au-dessus de : Au-dessus de la porte ^taient Merits Over the door were written these ces mots; lesnombresau-dessus words; the numbers over one de mille. thousand. 2. Denoting motion above s sur, par, par-dessus : Passez la main sur ce drap; par Pass your hand over this cloth; monts et par vaux; il sauta over hill and dale; he leaped par-dessus la haie. over the hedge. S, Unclassified ; Au dela de la riviere ; I'emporter Over the river ; to triumph over ; sur (triompher de) ; se r^jouir to rejoice over ; to watch over, de ; veiller sur. 449. Through. 1. Denoting motion across =k travers (au travers de), par : Jo rkn.asni i f.ravpra ^nii froAT-ora r{a\ T T\qaao/1 fVir/-iiirrV> i\\a (m^aat* fr> v^aoa la foret ; passer par Berlin. through Berlin. §§450-453] IDIOMATIC DISTINCTIONS. 329 2. In the sense of 'because of,' 'owing to,'=par: Par negligence. Through carelessness. 450. Till, until. 1. Unclassified : Jusqu'^ demain ; pas avant I'ann^e Till to-morrow ; not till next year • Ztr ' '"' ' ^" "''^" if ,;°" '' '^^^ -orning"^ tili 451. To. 1. Denoting the indirect object =^ (of. §362, 2) : Je I'ai donn^ k un ami. i gave it to a friend. ll^T:i;r:^^^^ § ^33, 2, 3) ^ m the .nse of . to the ''runbal"l''t"''^'"''T"' ^' S*^^ *^ ^-- <*« «°hool; to tu^al cW I" ^°" •^^P^" ' *° ^ ^^" ■' '- F— ; to tugal, Chez euxi chez mon Portugal; to their house, etc. ; ^™^- to my friend's), tefdetyl': ""' °^ ' *°--«^'= vers (physical tendency), envers (moral Levez les yeux vers le del ; il est Raise your eyes to heaven ; he is juste envers tous. j^^t ^o all 4. In the sense of ' as far as ' = jusqu'^ : Venez jusqu'au bout de la rue. Come'to the end of the street. 5. Unclassified : \Zi^^" ^^:?^I ^". ^""''^"^ ' ^^^' J^"™^y strain) to Montreal ; to ^cnre sous dict^e ; dans ce but. write to dictation ; to this end. 452. See §451, a 453. 1. Usually = sous : Sous la table; sous la loi • <=o"o tt»,j„„ .i__ . ,, , . _ J ' "" v/naci mu cable; under the law- peine demort. under pain of ieath. ' Towards. Under, underneath. •}u 330 THE PREPOSITION. [§454 :■ ? M- III IS' 2. "Denoting lower than, less than=au-dessous de : Au-dessous du coude ; vendre une Under the elbow ; to sell a thing chose au-dessous de sa valeur. under its value. 3. Unclassified: Fouler aux pieds ; k cette condi- To tread under foot ; under this tion ; dans les circonstances ; condition ; under the circura- dans la n^cessit^ de ; mineur. stances ; under the necessity of ; under age. 454. With. 1. In the sense of * along with,' * in company with '=avec : Dinez avec moi k I'hdtel ; un offi- Dine with me at the hotel ; an offi' cier avec des soldats. cer with some soldiers. 2. In the sense of * at the house, v:tc. , of ' = chez : H demeure chez nous. i-e lives with us. 3. Denoting instrument, manner = avec (usually) ; Frapper avec un marteau ; ecrJre lo strike with a hammer ; to write avec une plume ; avec courage with a pen ; with courage (force), (force). 4. Denoting a characteristic =k : Un homme k la barbe noire. A man with a black beard. 6. ' With ' of accessory circumstance is usually turned by an absolute construction : II parla les yeux baiss^s. He spoke with downcast eyes. 6. In the sense of * from,' ' on account of,' and after many verbs and adjectives =de: Elle pleura de colore ; couvrir de ; She wept with anger ; to cover content de. wi\ >:■ ; satisfied with. 7. Unclassified : A I'exception de ; k haute voix ; With the exception of ; with a loud ^ bras ouverts; de bon app^tit ; voice; with open arms; with a ^ l'<£il nv. I de tout mon coeur. gond appf^tite ; y/ith tho naked eye ; with all my heart. §455] CONJUNCTION& 831 THE CONJUNCTION. 45S Conjunctions. The following table contains most of the conjunctions and conjunctive locutions in use : — t^ (la) condition que^, 07i condition that. *afin que*, in order that, so that. aiiisi, therefore, hence. ainsi que, as well as, as. alors que, when, k mesure que, as, just as. *k moins que. . .ne^, unless. apr^s que, after. k proportion que, in proportion as. attendu que, considering thai. tau cas oix^, in case (that). *au cas que^, in case (that). aussi, hence, therefore. aussit6t que, as soon as. *avant que^, before. *bien que% though, although, car, for. *ce n'est pas que"*, not that. cependant, however, yet. comme, as. +dans le cas oh^, in case (that). *de crainte que. . .ne^, for fear that. tde fagon que*, so that. fde mani^re que 2, so that. de meme que, as well as. *de peur que. . .ne\ for fear that. depuis que, since. tde (telle) sorte que*, so that. d6s que, as soon as, when, since. done, now, then, therefore, *en attendant que*, tmtil. *en cas que^, in case (that). encore, yet, still. *encore que^, though, although. ten sorte que 2, so that. *en supposant que^, sujiposing that. et, and. et. . .et, both., .and. excepts que, except thai. tjusqu'^ ce que*, until. *loin que"*, far from. lorsque, when. niais, but. *malgr^ que^, though, aUhough. ndanmoins, nevertlieless, ni, nor. ni. . .ni. . .( . . .ne), neither. . .nor. *nouobstant que'*, notwithstanding that. *iion (pas) que^ not that. lion seulement . . . mais encore, not only . , . but also. or, now. ou, or. ou. . .ou, either. . .w. outre que, besides that. parce que, because. partant, therefore, hence. pendant que, while, whilst. *pour peu que*, if ever s(^ little. *pour que^, in order that. pourtant, yet, however. *pourvu que^, provided that. puisque, tiince. quand, ivhen. tquand meme*, though, even if. tque^, that, than, as. *quoique'*, though, although, y- i J 332 THE CONJUNCTION. m , M ■A : M I'' feif II i- S't [§§456-457 *8oitque. . .ou que*, whether. . suivant que, according as. *8uppos6 que', suppose that. tandis que, whilst, whereas. tant. . .que, both. . .and. tant que, as long as. ttellement. . .que^, so . .that. toutefois, yet, nevertheless. une fois que, as soon as. vu que, seeing that. *san8 que', without. *80it que . . . ou que*, whether ...or. selon que, according as. +8i3, i/(§271, 3, a). fsi bien que^, so that. fsi peu que*, however little. sinon, i/ not, or else. sit6t que, as soon as. soit. . .soit, whether. . .or. soit . . . ou, whether . . .or. *8oit que. . .soit que*, whether. . .or. * Followed by the subjunctive. t Followed by the indicative or subjunctive. N.B.— Conjunctions without * or t in the table are followed by the indicative. 1 See §271, 1 (time before which or up to which). 2 See §271, 2 (purpose or result). 3 See §271, 3 (condition). 4 See §271, 4 (concession). 6 See §271, 5 (negation). 6 See §269, §271, 6, and §458. USE OF CERTAIN CONJUNCTIONS. 456. Et. 1. When repeated, et usually denotes 'both. . . and ' ; otherwise it stands with the last only of two or more clauses : Je oonnais et le p6re et le fils. I know both the father and son. Les fcmmcs pleuraient, criaicnt et The women wept (and) screamed gesticulaient. and gesticulated, 2. ' And ' after a verb of motion is usually untranslated : AUez leur parler. Go and speak to them. 457. Ni. 1 . A finite verb with ni or ni . . . ni must be preceded by ne : II n'a ni or ni argent. II ne mange ni ne boit. He has neither gold nor silver. He neither eats nor drinks. a. For the position of ni. . .ni. . .ne, see §416, d. §§458-459] USE OF certain conjunctions. 333 2. In sentences of negative force, * and,' * or,* are rendered by ni : Honneurs ni richesses ne font le Honours and wealth do not consti- bonheur. tute happiness. 3. Observe the following equivalents of 'neither,' 'not either," * nor either,' * nor,' when not correlative : Je ne le ferai pas.— Ni moi non I shall not do it.— Nor I either plug, {or Neither shall I). II ne le fera pas non plus. He will not do it either. n ne I'a pas fait, et il ne le fera He has not done it, nor will he pas. (do it). 458. Que. 1. Que = ' that' is followed by the indicative or subjunctive according to the context : Je dis que vous avez raison. I say that you are right. Je suis fach6 que vous ayez raison. I am sorry that you are right. 2. Que often replaces another conjunction ; when so used, it takes the same construction as the conjunction for which it stands, except that que instead of si = ' if always requires the subjunctive : Quand vous aurez fini, et que vous When you have finished, and (when aurez le temps. you) have time. Venez que ( = 'afin que,' 'pour Come that I may see you. que') je vous voie. Si vous venez demain, et que vous If you come to-morrow, and (if you) ayez le temps. have time. 3. Que may not be omitted before a finite verb, as 'that' often is in English : Je crois qu'il viendra et qu'il res- I think (that) he will come and 459. Distinctions. The following conjunctions are espe- cially liable to be confounded in use : 1. Quand, Lorsque. They are equivalents in the sense of ' when,* but quand (not 'lorsque') serves also as an interrogative adverb in direct or indirect questions ; >jlE 8S4 THE INTERJECTION. [§460 Qnand est-il arriv^ "i When did he come ? Dis-moi quand il est arriv4 Tell me when he came. Quand (or lorsque) je I'ai vu. When I saw him. Nous partirons lorsque {or quand) We shall leave when the letter la lettre arrivera. comes. 2. Pendant que, Tandis que. Pendant que = * while,' * whilst,' * during the time that'; tandis que=' while,' 'whilst,' 'during the time that,' and also, * whilst,' * on the contrary,' * whereas ' : Lisezle journal pendant que j'^cris Read the newspaper while I write ce billet. this note. Tandis que vous 6tes ici. Whilst you are here. Le p6re travaille, tandis que le fils The father works, while the son ne fait rien. does nothing. 3. Depuis que, Puisque. Depuis que denotes time; puisque denotes cause assigned : : Je suis bien seul depuis que men I am very lonely since my brother fr6re est parti. went away. II me fau^ rester, puisqu'il n'y a I must remain, since there is no pas de train ce soir. train this evening. THE INTERJECTION. 460. Interjections. The commoner interjections and ex- pressions used as such are : — 1. Joy, admiration, approval : ah ! , aA / & la bonne heure I , toelt done /, that's ha, ha! or hi, hi I (to denote right! laughter). bis ! , encore f bon I , good! bravo ! or bravissimo I , weU done /, bill !. goodf bravo/ & merveille ! , capital f hourra ! or vivat ! » hurrah I 2. DisjD^t^ disapproval, indifference : fi done ! ffy!* shsasss ' fie del, /son/ foin de ! , a plague upon t oh!y oA/ §460] INTERJECTIONS. 335 bah ! or ah ! bah ! , nonsense /, pooh-pooh ! baste ! , enough !, pooh /, nonsense t 3. Grief, fear, pain : ah ! , aA / oh. \, oh! h^las ! , aUta I aie !, oh!, oh dear! 4. Surprise : ah !, ah ! oh !, oh ! eh !, ah! ha !, ha ! comment !, what ! 5. Encouragement : allons !, come I courage !, cheer up ! voyons !, come now ! qk. !, or or §^ !, or sus !, or or sus !, now then ! 6. Warning : gare !, look out /, take care ! 7. Calling: h^ !, or oh6 !, or hol^ !, Iio /, hoy ! Iialloo ! hem !, ahem! 8. Calling for aid : k moi !, or au secours !, Iielp! ^I'assassin or au meurtre !, murder! 9. Silencing, stopping : chut ! or st !, hush ! silence !, silence ! motus !, not a word ! par exemple ! , dear me I zest t , pshaw ! misdricorde ! , mercy / ouf ! (to express suffocation, or relief and exhaustion). quo! !, what ! vraimont !, indeed! tiens !, indeed ! par exemple !, yon don't say so f misericorde !, mercy ! en avant !, forward ! ferme !, steady! preste !, quick! holi !, stop!, stop! st !, hi there ! qui vive !, who goes there! au voleur !, stop thief! au feu !, fre ! tout doux or tout beau !, gently! not so fast ! halte-U !, stop there ! NoTB.— Akin to interjections are imitations of sounds : Cric crac !, breaking ; drelin, drelin ! or drelin, din, din!, ringing; pan pan !, hang ; pif paf !, gunshots; boum !, eetnnonading ; rataplan !, drtim ; dare dare !, quick mnvf'ntent ; cahin-caha^ jogging along; clopin-clopant, hobbling; tic tac, ticking, etc. 336 ABBREVIATIONS. [§461 ABBREVIATIONS. n 4 h ft I:' 461. French Abbreviations. The following are the co.'HEjoner abbreviations used in French : M"" (pi. M") = Madame, Mrs. M'' = maison, house, firm. ms. (pi. mss.) = nianuscrit, manu- c.-i.-d. =c'est-A-dire, that is. C«« or O=compagnie, company. etc. = et caetera. f r. or f. = francs, francs. h. =heure, hour. in-fo= in-folio, folio. J.-C. =J^su8-Christ, Jesus Christ. M. = Monsieur, Mr. MM. = Messieurs, Messrs. M.R. or M.R. . . = Monsieur R. or Monsieur R Trois-liJtoiles, Mr. R. or Mr. R—. M*=marchand, merchant. M«(pl. M«») = maitre, is used with names of laun/ers instead of mon- sieur. Mgr. (pi. NNSS,) = monseigneur, my lord. M"e (pi. M»«) = Mademoiselle, Miss. script. N. -D. = Notre-Dame, Our Lady. N.S. =Notre-Seigneur, Our Lord. n®=num(5ro, number. R.S.V.P. =R^pondez s'il vous plait, an answer is requested. S. A. R. = Son Altesse Royale, His Royal Highness. s.-ent. =sous-entendu, understood. S. Exc. = Son Excellence, His Ex- cellency. S. M. (pi. LL. MM.) = Sa Majesty, His (Her) Majesty. S.S. =Sa Saintet^, His Holiness. a. V. p. = s'il vous plait, */ you please. V*= veuve, widow. lis I** (in titles) = premier, the First. l^ (fem. pw) = premier, first. II (in titles) = deux, the Second. 2* = deuxi^me, second. Le XV* sifecle, etc. =le quinzi^me l»=zprimo, firstly. Bi^cle, the 15th century. '7^^=se]ptemhre, September. Etc. n EXERCISES I-II, a. 337 EXERCISES. [The references at the head of the exercises are to the sections in the Grammar on which they are based.] EXERCISE I, ao (§§156-161.) 1. What are you eating ? 2. We are eating apples. 3. It was necessary that they should eat. 4. Who is calling? 5. We are calling. 6. The general leads his army. 7. We shall lead the horses. 8. Who is throwing stones? 9. It will freeze. 10. He is buying a coat. 11. We never yield. 12. They will never yield. 13. The servant is peeling apples. 14. When will he pay? 15. They never pay. 16. The servant is cleaning the kitchen. 17. We shall clean our gun. 18. The little girl wipes the dishes. 19. The farmer sows the seed. 20. It is freezing. 21. We are going to school, 22. We went home. 23. They used to go to market on Saturdays. 24. He will send it. 25. The servant is bringing the horses. 26. I send hira there. 27. I shall go to school. 28. Let them go to the city. 29. It was necessary that you should go there. 30. They will buy a box. 31. Let us bring the children. 32. Bring the children. 33. Let him not throw stones. 34. We have led the horses to the stable. 35. Let us trace a line. 36. We are advancing. 37. They were eating. 38. We ate. 39. They will eat. 40. Let us advance. 41. Let us never yield. 42. Let us call the children. 43. Let us not go there. 44. The queen has been reigning a long time. 45. The children were throwing stones. 46. He led the horse to the stable. 47. He paid the money. 48. The servant wiped the dishes. 49. The child traced a line. EXERCISE II, a. (§§162-166.) 1. He is running. 2. Shall we run? 3. Run fast, my little boy, 4. He is acquiring a fortune. 5. we should run. 6. They will conquer 22 It was necessary that that city. 7. The ^1' \m r 338 EXERCISE III, a. general has ac((uired glory. 8. He gives hira consecrated bread. 9. Tliey acquire knowledge. 10. We shall accuire property. 11 There is he water. 12. Let us not run. 13. Let them acquire it. 14. We are gathering apples. .15. It was necessary that they should gather flowers. 16. He welcomed me. 17. We shall gather them. 18. Let us not start with (de) fear. 19. He assails his enemy. 20. He will assail his enemy. 21. He is sleeping. 22. Let us not sleep. 23. He must sleep. 24. We shall soon sleep. 25. They fall asleep. 26. He is leaving for France. 27. He left yesterday. 28. If he were asleep, I should call him. 29. He will go out. 30. Let him not go out. 31. The water bo- 32. The water was boiling. 33. When he speaks, he lies. 34. He makes use of it. 35. He will feel it. 36. If he were here, we should not sleep. 37. The water will soon boil. 38. He has run. 39. It was necessary that we should sleep. 40. I have not slept. 41. He never lies. 42. The horses would run, if they were not tired. 43. They ran. 44. We acquired it. 45. The horses run over the field. 46. He does not consent to it. 47. He will never consent to it. 48. Let him not make use of it. 49. We were running. 50. We fell asleep. EXERCISE III, a. (§§167-179.) 1. He failed on (en) that occasion. 2. It is a prosperous country. 3. He flees. 4. Let us not flee. 5. They fled. 6. He will not flee. 7. It was necessary that I should flee. 8. Here lies a hero. 9. Here lie the remains of the great Napoleon. 10. I hate evil. 11. Mon hate their enemies. 12. Let us not hate our enemies. 13. He hates his father. 14. Let him not hate his father. 15. Was it necessary that he should hate his father? 16. She dies. 17. They will die. 18. Let us not die. 19. It was necessary that he should die. 20. He died. 21. She will die. 22. Let him not die. 23. If they died, we should be sorry for it. 24. That tree is dying away. 25. Open the door. 26. We have opened the box. 27. He offers me his book. 28. She used to suffer a great deal. 29. If we had any, we should offer you some. 30. Columbus discovered America. 31. We held it. 32. Let him not hold it. 33. I hold it. 34. Let us hold it. 35. We EXERCISE IV, a. 33'^ are coming. 36. We shall come. 37. We should come, if you would come. 38. If T should come, I should find it. 39. They are coming back. 40. It is necessary that he come. 41. It was necessary that he should come. 42. Hold it. 43. He has held it. 44. The purse contains money. 45. If he comes, we shall be glad (of it). 46. They will come back. 47. He is ill clad. 48. He clothes himself well. 49. He will clothe his child. 50. It is necessary that he clothe his child. EXERCISE IV, a. (§§180-188.) 1. We beat the horse. 2. He fells the tree. 3. It is necessary that he fight the enemy, 4. We drink water. 5. They drink milk. 6. They were drinking wine. 7. We shall drink water. 8. Let him drink milk. 9. He has drunk the wine. 10. It was necessary that we should drink wine. 11. We shall not drink wine. 12. The wind rustles in the trees. 13. He encloses his garden. 14. He will close the bargain. 15. Those flowers will soon open. 16. He is concluding his argument. 17. Let us conclude the bargain. 18. The bread is baking well. 19. If he were there, he would conclude the affair. 20. It was necessary that he should conclude the bargain. 21. He drives the cows to the field. 22. They destroyed their books. 23. They will construct houses. 24. Let us translate this phrase. 25. It was necessary that we should translate that book. 26. He led his horse to the stable. 27. We were translating our exercise. 28, We con- structed a house. 29. Let him translate his lesson. 30. I have translated a book. 31. I translated a book. 32. She was preserving plums. 33. We are preserving cherries. 34. That suffices. 35. That will be sufficient. 36. Let that sufdce. 37. Five francs a day are sufficient for him. 38. I know that gentleman. 39. It is necessary that we should know him. 40. Let him appear. 41. The cows eat the grass. 42. It was necessary that v e should know him. 43. It was necessary that he should appear. 44. He will not disappear. 45. We used to know him. 46. When he appears, we shall conclude the affiiir. 47. Let him recognize him. 48. You know him, do you not? 49. You will know him. 50. He reappeared. 340 EXERCISES V-VI, a. EXERCISE V, a. (§§189193.) 1. The little girl is sewing. 2. We were sewing 3. They will sew. 4. She sewed. 5. They had sewed. 6. Let us sew. 7. Let her not sew. 8. Let us not fear. 9. They fear. 10. Let him not be afraid. 11. We shall not fear. 12. Men fear death. >3. Tliey pity us. 14. He was painting a pic- ture. 1.5. Put out Uie fire. 16. Let him put out the lamp. 17. It was necessary tlic?.t we should rejoin our. friends. 18. The general girds on his swcrd. 19. I feared the rain. 20. I believe you. 21. We shall not b^iieve it. 22. Let us believe it. 23. I used to believe it. 24. It is necessary that he should believe it. 25. He did not believe it. 2*6. It was necessE.ry that he should believe it. 27. We did not believe it. 28. Do not believe it. 29. The flowers are growing. 30. The tree grows. 31. That tree will grow fast. 32. We grew. 33. It was necessary that we should grow. 34. The trees were growing last. 35. Let it grow. 36. He has believed. 37. The tree has grown. 38. Do not say so (le). 39. We say so. 40. We should not say so, if we did not believe it. 41. Is it necessary that he should say so? 42. They used to say so. 43. Let him not say so. 44. Was it necessary that we should say so ? 45. Do not say so again. 46. Do not slander. 47. They do not say so. 48. Cain was cursed by (de) God. 49. We do not curse our enemies. 50. If I should say so, would you believe me ? EXERCISE VI, a. (§§194-200.) 1. I was writing when he came. 2. Let us write our ex- ercise. 3. We wrote a letter, 4. Write your lesson. 5. Let him write. 6. We shall write our letter. 7. It was neces- sary that you should write. 8. He has desciibed his travels. 9. They are writing. 10. Would you write, if I should write? 11. Do what I say. 12. He did not do it. 13. He has not done his work. 14. Let us do our work. 15. Let him do what I said. 16. It was necessary that you should do so. 17. I shall do so when you come. 18. If you do so, we shall do so. 19. If you should say so, we should do it. 20. I was doing my work when he came. 21. It is neceB.s.ar" that we do that." 22. If I do this, will you do that? 23.^1 "was ir^ EXERCISE VII, a. 841 3. They Let U8 ley fear. 12. Men g a pic- he lamp, ds. 18. . 20. I 3 believe that he It was : believe rig. 30. Te grew, he trees lelieved, 39. We jlieve it. ey used ecessary Do not [rsed by [ should our ex- 5. Let 3 neces- travels. 1 write? has not him do do so. we shall >. I was bh-it we . I was reading, when he came. 24. Ho will never read that book. 25. Head that letter. 26. They are reaaing their book. 27. Did you not read the newspaper? 28. If I should read this book, would you read that one? 29. Is he reading the newspaper? 30. It was necessary that I should read the letter. 31. Let him not read that book. 32. Did they not read this book ? 33. I placed the book on the table. 34. Do not commit that crime. 35. It is necessary that he put on his coat. 36. "Wo shall put on our clothes. 37. Tlujy have placed their books on the table. 38. We shall not permit it. 39. Does he permit it ? 40. It was necessary that he should not permit it. 41. What would you say, if we should permit it. 42. The miller grinds the wheat. 43. We are grinding wheat. 44. We ground the wheat. 45. Let him grind the wheat. 46. The prophet said that a child would be born. 47. We are born weak. 48. We were born [on] the same day. 49. Let a young nation arise ! 50. Was it necessary that hatred should arise between them ? EXERCISE VII, a. (§§201-211.) 1. That does not please him (lui). 2. You please me. 3. Come when it pleases you. 4. Do so if you ploase. 5. May it please you. 6. Take your places. 7. He takes his hat from (s7ir) the table. 8. If I should take it, what would you do? 9. Let him take his book. 10. It was necessary that he should take the medicine. 11. We took our places. 12. Have you learnt your lesson? 13. He will not undertake that. 14. Fire resolves wood fnto (en) smoke. 15. We have resolved to (de) do it. 16. He solved the diffi- culty. 17. He will solve the difficulty. 18. Let us not laugh at0e)him. 19. Why is he laughing? 20. If I should laugh, what would you say? 21. Was it necessary that he should laugh? 22. We laugh at them. 23. Water springs from the earth. 24. Follow me. 25. The dog follows his master. 26. Let him follow us. 27. It is necessary that we should follow you. 28. We followed him. 29. If- I should follow him, it would please him, 30. We shall never follow him. 31. Is he not milking the cow? 32. If I should do that, he would not milk the cow.°. 33, When we were in the country, we used to milk the cows. 34. Let him milk the cow. 'il 1 ", .' > ^ 342 EXERCISE VIII, a. 35. That distracts him from his work. 36. The general con- quers his enemies. 37. We conquer our passions. 38. If you were to conquer your passions, you would be happy. 39. Our army will conquer. 40. We have conquered our enemies. 41. Let him conquer his passions. 42. He is not selling his house. 43. He will never sell it. 44. Horses live on {de) hay. 45. He lives only for himself. 46. Let us live in {en) peace. 47. He will live yet [a] long time. 48. Louis XIY. lived in the 1 7th century. 49. Long live the King. 50. Hurrah for liberty ! EXERCISE VIII, a. (§§212-222.) 1. We receive our friends. 2. He has received the letter. 3. Let us not receive the money. 4. If they should receive us, we should be glad. 5. We owe him (lui) money. 6. We shall owe him something. 7. If they receive it, we shall tell (it to) you. 8. Let him not receive it. 9. We received the money. 10. Sit down. 11. He sits down. 12. They will sit down. 13. Let us sit down. 14. It was necessary that we should sit down. 15. If we should sit down, would you tell [raconter) us a story? 16. Let them not sit down. 17. That does not become him Qui). 18. That will not become us. 19. We sit down. 20. The payment falls due. 21. His influence has declined. 22. It will be necessary to do it. 23. It is necessary to be there. 24. Passion moves men. 25, Steam and water drive (mouvoir) machines. 26. His story moved (Smouvoir) the audience. 27. Such a story must move men. 28, We shall go out, if it does not rain. 29. It was rain- ing when we came. 30. It will rain. ol. I did not think it would rain. 32. It has rained. 33. I shall come, if I can. 34. I shall come when I can. 35. They cannot go away. 36. I would do so, if I could. 37. I wish that he may not be able to do so. 38. I could do that, if I were rich. 39. You may do so, if you desire, 40. Could (condl.) you not give me some? 41. We know our lesson. 42. Do you know how to do that? 43. That child cannot write ; he is too young. 44. I cannot write ; I have a sore finger. 45. Do you know that gentleman? 46. I used to know how to swim. 47. Your father must not know that. 48. We knew it. 49. We shall know it to-morrow. ^'x#^ EXERCISES IX-X, a. 343 EXERCISE IX, a. (§§223-225.) 1. That horse is worth one hundred dollars. 2. Virtue is worth more {mieux) than riches. 3. Those houses are worth more (plus) than these. 4. That was worth more last year, 5. That will be worth more next year. 6. If that were worth more, I should take it. 7. He has nothing (which is) of value (subj.). 8. We shall not see him again. 9. Do you see him? 10. I saw him. 11. We saw him. 12. If we should see him, we should tell (it to) him. 13. When we see him, we shall speak to him about it. 14. We must see our parents. 15. It was necessary that we should see our children. 16. I have seen him. 17. If we wished to do it, we could do it. 18. You may come when you wish. 19. He will wish to do that when he can. 20. Be so good a to sit down. 21. If you will sell your house, I shall buy it. 22. Will you be so kind as to give me some? 23. We do not wish to do that. 24. Should you like to see him ? 25. I should like to see him, if I could. 26. I could do this, if I wished. 27. If it rains, we cannot go out. 28. If they were willing, they could do it, 29. If they are not willing to tell (it to) you, you will not know how to do it. ■ EXERCISE X, a. (§§227-229.) What has become of his brother? I know what has become of him. She was born. She died. She has gone up {or up stairs). Note.— In this exercise, verbs having the asterisk in the list §229, 2, are to be con- jugated with 6tre when intransitive. Qu'est devenu son fr^re ? Je sais ce qu'il est devenu. Ella est n^e. Elle est raorte. EUe est mont^e. 1. Your mother has come, has she not? 2. No, she has not yet come ; she will come to-morrow. 3. Our friends have gone to church ; let us go (there) too. 4. The old gentleman who lived in that house died last night. 5. (The) Queen Victoria was born on the twenty-fourth of May. 6. My little sister was born on the tenth of March. 7. How old is your father ? 8. He is seventy : he wars born before the death of Napoleon. 9. What has become of your brother? "^lO. He ^ j '!' m m I ^ 344 EXERCISE XI, a. has gone to (partir pour) France. 11. When did he gol 12. He went, yesterday morning. 13. Is your father out? V 14. No, sir, he is in. 15. When did your father return? 16. He has not yet returned; he will return next week. 17. The servant has brought down the trunk. 18. Where is your sister ? \1 9. She lias gone down for breakfast, 20. Where are the children? X 21. They have gone up stairs. 22. Why did they not come down when I was there K 23. What is the matter, my child ? 24. It was slippery, and I fell. 25. My father has gone into the house. 26. Although he was born rich, he is now poor, 27. He died poor, although he was once rich. 28. I have not seen him to-day ; what has become of him 1 29. I don't know what has become of him. 30. Have you taken up the gentleman's trunks? 31. Not yet, but I shall take them up immediately.- 32. At what o'clock did your sister go out this morning? 33. She went out at half- past nine. 34. Where is my sister ? ^5. She has gone up stairs ; she has gone to get her books. EXERCISE XI, a. (§230.) Si vous vouliez bien me le dire. Faites-les entrer. If you would kindly tell me. Show them in. 1. We do not wish to leave this country; we should like to remain here, but if we cannot, we shall go away. 2. You ought to go home (my) children ; it is late. 3. We cannot go home ; it is dark, and our father told us to (de) wait for him. 4. We cannot go away before six o'clock ; we are to wait here till our friends come. ^"ffTWe could have written the letter, if we had known that you desired it. 6. That beggar could have had work, if he had wanted it, but he was too lazy ; he would not wo^-k, and now he must beg. 7. Those children cannot read yet ; they are too young. ^S. If they had been able to read, they would not have believed all that was said to them. 9'.^o\x ought to let them go away, for their father told them that they were to leave before (the) night. 10. You might have seen them, if you had been willing to come with me. 11. Our teacher told us that we were to write this exercise. 12. We are to have a house built next year. 13. Their teacher made them write their exercise. 14. We should have in- ac \^.'.H ■ikfiRClSES xh-XTII, SL^-^~^ 345 a house built, if we were rich enough^^ 15. We said to the innkeeper, will_yQa.be so. kind as to have our horses saddled? We are going to start. J^ Opium makes [us] sleep - 17 It IS very warm ; if this great heat continues, it will kill the crops. EXERCISE XII, a. (§230.) 1. Those children make a great deal of noise ; they talk too much; make them be silent. 2. That girl could write, if she ^ylshed (it). 3. If you would kindly tell me where the doctor Jif' i.^^^"^ «e^^ for him. 4. Do you know Daudet's Za mie-Nivernaise ? 5. Oh, yes, it is a charming book ; I liked it so well that I had my pupils read it. 6. That is a beautiful picture. 7. Yes, I have just been showing it to your mother and sister. 8. When did you see my father? 9. I had iust been speaking with him, when you came. 10. What are vou going to do to-morrow? 11. To-morrow we are going to^see the Invahdes and the Arc de Triomphe, and the day after to-raorrow we are to see Notre-Dame and the Louvre (m ) 12. We ought to have visited the Loiovre when you were with us; you could have shown us the fine pictures. 13. May I go with you when you visit the Louvre next time? I should like to have explained to me some of the beauties of the finest pictures. 14. That gentleman must have been in Paris for he speaks French like a Parisian. 15. Why did you not make those ladies sit down when they were here? 16. They said they would not stay, because you were out. 17 There are ladies at the door. 18. Very well, show them in. ly. Your son ought to write his exercises. 20. Very well make him write them. 21, If I had made him study his lessons when he was at school, he would liave become a better man. EXERCISE XIII, a. (§§231-234.) V 1. The French people are brave and gay ; they (il) have their (ses) defects, but also their good qualities. 2. Few people believe that the earth is not round. 3. Most people believe that the ea.-th will be destroyed. 4. The greater part of his friends abp ndoned him. 5. Many think that our friends will not succeed. 6. A great number of men were killed. Ml M 34r EXERCISE XIV, a. x^^'' 7. The Swiss people are brave, tliey (il) will always he free. 8. More than one house was burnt, 9. Is it your friends who live in the house on the hill? 10. Yes, it is they; they have lived there for two years. Nil. You and he were there, were you not? ^12. Yes, he and I were there, and your brother too. ,43. Will you and your brother come and see us, when you are in London? "14. We shall be very happy to (de) visit you. "15. Do you see those two children? Both were born [on] the same day. / 16. You or I shall speak. 17. There happen many misfortunes here below. 18. There arose a great quarrel between them. ,d9. Who went for the doctor? 20. It was (pres.) I who went for him. 21. Do you see those two gentle- men ? Both have had houses built this year. 22, Religion, truth, honour, all was abandoned. 23. Many think that you will never be able to build your house. 24. The majority are not always right. 25. If there happened such misfortunes to me, I should leave the country. 2(i. Were it only a few lines, I should like yc^ to write to me, 27. If you and I were young, fine things would be done (reflex, impers.). 28. Who can have done that, if not our friends ? 29. Neither he nor his brother can go away ; both must stay. ^^ &^ EXERCISE XIV, a. (§§235-238.) ' If ' 1. Is that book yours or your brother's? 2. How much did these books cost ? 3. I do not know how much they cost. 4. Does that merchant provide you cheap with what, you -need ? 5. What is the matter with that boy this morning ? 6. I do not know what is the matter with him. 7. Do I say, or daixj^l "say, the half of what he has done ? 8. Whatever men may 3o, they cannot escape death. 9. What books did your father buy when he was in the city? 10. Your father told me what your brother had done, 11. Your brother told Will you tell me where those men 13. I cannot tell you where they books than that gentleman has, than you have, 16. Virtue is a love it, 17. My father is here; perhaps he will come to see you. 18. However good men may be, they are sometimes poor. 19. Such are my reasons me what he had done. 12, were when you saw them 1 were. 14. We have more 15. We have more books beautiful thing, hence we .^u EXERCISE XV, a. 347 for doing so. 20. You have told iiie that my friend has gone; I did not know (iinpf.) it, but perhaps you are right. 21. I wish you wejQ here, were it ,onl^ to encourage us. • 22. That man does not respect hinfeetf,' Tience he cannot be good. ^23. Come and see us, said he, as soon as you can (fut.). 24. If I do tliis, thought he, 1 shall be punished, hence I shall not do it. 25. When was your little brother born? 26. I do not know where that man died. <27. To whom did your friend give his gold watch 1 ' 28. I do not know ; perhaps he gave it to his sister. 29. I cannot do (de) such things ; am I xiot [an] Englishman? ,30. Do I not tell you that I shall be there, and that I shall see you ? VvL Uf u, \ cXjo^ - ' f *•» ^i^^ EXERCISE XV, a. (§§239-241.) On hii ob^it. ) II est obei. J On me I'a pardonn^. He is obeyed. I have been pardoned (for) it. 1. America was discovered by Christopher Columbus. 2. The first steamboat was built by Fulton. 3. We have been deceived by that scoundrel. 4. We have been deceived. 5. That gentleman has been mistaken in that affair. 6. Where is that said? 7. Oh, that is said ever where. 8. Who com- mitted that crime? 9. lb was our neighbour's brother. 10. Will he not be punished? 11. No, he has been pardoned for it. >^ 12. I have often seen it done. 13. I have been told that you had it done. 14. Is that not done every where ? 15. Oh, no, that is never done amongst respectable people. xl6. How unfortunate he is ! He is a good fellow, but he is deceived and suspected pv^^vhere. 17. How little it is! It can hardly be seen. IK I'hat man is not a good teacher; he is not obeyed by his pupils. 19. There is a house to be sold^^^^ -i v. 20. There is an exercise to be done. 21. That beggar was -/^ ^U given bread and mj%.^ 22. ,We were made read our less«u. , '"'^'^vZ/\ 23. That is a man tt> l^e "feared. 24. They were told that you\ -' were not here. 25. Why were we not told that our friends had gone away ? - J-Jij/\ 't^HXe.u-'-U a:^ •friCtiikiri'tLfliM J la - V\aAaa. (CH 348 EXEUCISE XVI, a. % EXERCISE XVI, a. (§§'212-247.) Fillo H'ost rai)i».>liW(' »MU> j'ai ilit. "j i , .t -i , , ' , •,1,, jMvo I'tiiuiulioiod wliat, 1 Haul. Kilo s est. Houvt'imo clr co tjuo ai «ln.. / ,lo nio lo rapiu'lK'. "» Jo lu'on soiivioiis. / .To mo 1(^ I'apjM'llo. "^ .To ino souvitMis i\v lui. / lis HO soiivioiiMont do luoi. .lo in'oM Kors. II s'oii |)as8o. Kilo s'ost fait nial !\ la main, lmoml>or mo. I (ISO it (1 iiialio uso of it). Ho 'l. Thoy have not u'i> p^owo away ; thoy will riMuaiii Ihm'o till to-morrow. '2. When you aio in front, of Mr. .lackson's, l»o good enough to stop. \3. How havo you [nnm ilyn lon^ linu;'? ^ I have hoxm very wol!. - -^. How has your mofclior'^b^cin, since she has been living iiA Toronto? (5. How unfort-unatti 1 an», she excl.iinied, my inends renuunlxH" me no longer. 7<^"When the door opens^^we can go in. -8. 'Where is my lK)ok ? I cannot ^o^|fIipq(, it. <6'r Why do you not make .ise of that pen ? fOT TV is liot a ^'cod i)en ; T cannot use it,. -i-1^ There are some ladies in the parlour; very wciil, have them sit down, and ask them to wait a little. 12. Why are you crying, my little girl ? -^-ST T have fallen and hurt myself. 4-^ Where did you hurt yourself? "tftr 1 hurt my hand. 16. Why did those ladies not sit down? 17. Tlu^y would not sit down, because they could not stay. 1^. If you wish to use this ink atid paper, T shall give you some. ^ 19. It was very slippery this morning, and my mother in going down the street, fell and broke her arm, 20. If you cannot do without this book, I shall lend it to you. >51. I ca?' do witliout it now, but I shall need it next week. ^2. Do you remember what was told you last evening? 23. No, T do not remember it. 24r'-Did that little girl hurt herself badly, when she fell ? 25. Yes, she hurt herself very badly ; she broke her arm. >2^, Have those young ladies writtf»n letters to each other? 27. They have written many ; they have been writing to each KXKUCIHK XVII, a. 849 oMuM' for (avo ydiun. 2H. I him moI. well Mmh inoriiiMff ; T hurt, my Ih'ikI. 21). Aro you iiHiii;; yonr |». As kooii an I oamo, ho Immwiiiu^ .sihrnt,. EXERCISE WII, a. (t5S'2'»'2 '2J7, nmliniml.) ci i 1 . f Wliiit, aid y»»u (!h11(h1 ? l/OinilKMlt. V(>UHIip|)(f|(V/,-Vt)IIH? [ ,, , . *' I VV hat, in y»»ur mono? Jo m'a|){>olIo J(Niii. I am lalind .lolui (my iiaiiio ih .lohn). Ko proiiKUKM- a pind {k clioval). To talus a walk (a lid(i). IStiproinoiioron voil,in(>((iii haU'aii). 'I'o tako a l"l hIx llOUIOH. Att(ui(l(i/-iiioi. Kilo no H'y ohI pas at.loiidiu . TiO prcitro loH a iiiarirH. iSlio wttiil. to 1x1(1 at ti'oiii()ii(ir on hatoaii. AlloiiH nous proiiKinur. Kilo s'oHt (nidorinio. Ko ooniialt-il en tahli^aux ? II H'y (toniiidt asHoz bioii. VouH onnuyozvouH ici ? Sho waH niarriod yoHtorday. No lias ^oiKi for a row (or nail). Lot UM go for a walk. Sho f(!ll aHl(!(!p. Th Iio a g«)od jiidgo of piotnroH ? Ho i.s a jnotty go<»d jiulgo of tliom. Ar(! you tir(!d of Ixting lioro? 1. What; is Unit, littlo Imy'.s namo? 2. His namo is Tlfinry. 3. What aro yon ii*i2. It had been snowing for two days and we couldn't go for a drive. 13. It has been raining sinceV yesterday morning, and it will be better to remain here 14 ". My sister is very ill ; her life is at stake. 15. We canno.; go away; it is raining. 16. No matter; I do not fear the rain. 17. How did you enjoy yourself yesterday? 18. We did not enjoy ourselves at all; it was raining all day. 19 If it is very dark this evening, we shall not go to see our friends 20. Yes, It will be better to stay at home; we can easily amuse ourselves. 21. How long have you been in this city ? 22. I came here three years ago. 23. What sort of weather will It be to-morrow? 24. I do not know; I am not a good judge of such things\^ 25. It has been raining for two days • we are tired of being ftere. 2Ck In winter it is generally mild in Italy, but it is often cold in Canada. 27. Those two men are disputing ; what is the matter ? 28. It is about (s'agir de) the price of a horse which one sold to the other. 29 It was very warm yesterday, but it rained in the night, and now it is very comfortable. 30. I think (that) it will rain, but it may be that I am mistaken. 31. We need another house- this one IS too small. 32. Their number is far from being com- plete. 33. Letters have come which tell us that there has been a great storm in the United States. 34. How far is it from Toronto to Montreal ? 35. By the railroad it is three hundred and thirty-three miles. EXERCISE XIX, a. (§§254-267.) C'est k peine s'il sort k present. A peine le soleil fut-il (etait-il) leve, qu'on apergut I'ennemi. II fait bon marcher. He hardly ever goes out now. Hardly was the sun up, when the enemy was seen. /The walking is good. \lt is good walking. 1. When that man is working, he will often stop to (pour) speaK with his companions. 2. How long have you been reading? 3. I have been reading for an hour. 4. It was at your ..ouse that we met those gentlemen. 5. We shall be glad, if you are there. 6. We shall be glad when you are 352 EXERCISE XX, a. ■"I there. 7. W( often used to go for a walk when we lived at your houi, s hut he. 3 it is not good walking, so we hardly ever go out now 8. When w« were young, our mother would often tell us fairy stories whtoh Itif^^restod us very niucliy 9. We remember them yet, and wo hope (oha ) we shall never forget them. 10. I had be^n there ten days when he came. 11. He had been reading an hour before his sister rose. 12. He asked me where I came from, and wiiere I was going. 13. I answered him that I came from Montr^nl, and (that I) wis going to Boston. 44. He wrote me a letter saying that he wished to see me. 15. He said in his letter that he had been ill, but that he was better now. /1 6. When he lived with us, we would often go out for a walk before breakfast. xl7. The eldest of the miller's sons received the mill, but the youngest received only the cat. ^18. As soon as he learned that I was to go out for a walk, he' wished to go also. 19. Tf he had seen it, he would have told me (it). 20. When I had finished my lessons, I would always go out for a walk. ^21. When he had finished his dinner to-day, he werl out. 22. Hardly hud he finished his work when his friend came. 7^ 23. We do not know whether our friends will come. 24. Our father did not know whether he would come, 25. Why is that work not done? '7-26. I told my brother to (de) do it, but he will not do it. 27. Will you buy my horse ? -28. No, I shall not buy him ; I do not need him. 29. Good morning, gentlemen, will you walk in? ^ 30. No thank you, we shall not go in. 31. As long as we live, we shall not forget your kindness. 32. As soon as he comes, I shall tell him. 33. We shall do as we please. 34. You may start when you will. 35. He may come when he likes. EXERCISE XX, a. (§§254-267, cow^wmerf.) l.^We shall soon have finished our work. 2.xWhen you have finished your lesson, you may g out for a walk. 3. Everybody should learn the ten commandments. 4. They tell us: Thou shalt not (point) have any other gods. 5. Thou shalt not take the name of thy God in vain. 6. Thou shalt not steal (fUroher). 7. That poor chi|d is very weak ; it can hardly walk ; it must have been ill. >^. My brother told me that you were not well. > 9. You must have made a mistake, for I am very well ; I never was better in {de) my life. 10. el. I , r EXERCISE XXI, a. 853 'IS, We should be sorry, if you should do so. 11. You should be virtuous, if you wish to be happy. 12. I told him (that) he ought to obey his teacher, l: Boulevard d>'.i Italiem is? 22. I could not ^ell you (it); I have not been long in Paris. ^ 23. (!an it be true that he has none that? 24. One woi \' say that you are [a] Parisian, you speak French so well. ^ 25. Even if that were true, I shoi.ld not go. '2G. Even if it should not rain, I shall not go for a drive. '^T. According to the newspapers, a great quantity of hh ney x.as stolen (use: on). 28. By what he says. Ins neighbours are po()r.^29. ^ y\en T v.as in Europe, T saw a horse as big as an elephant. ..0. Nonsense ! You are joking. 31. Come! Come! (my) children, you are making too much noise. )(32. Let us go away. (33. Go away. 34. I did nut think he would know it. \35. If you will not do it, we siiuU not do it. ^I EXfiRCI^ XXJ, a. (§§ 254-267, continued.) The two kings met (rach other) on <^he 13th of July in vast plain between Warsaw ( Varsovie) nO Cracow (Cracovie). Augustus had nearly twenty-four thous nd men; Charles had only ten thousand. At the first volley, the Duke of Holstein, who commanded the Swedish cavalry, received a cannon-shot in the bale. The king aske(/ if he was dead: he was tvld (use : on) uhnt he was (que oui) : he ma/Je no reply ; (sonu ) tears /eZ^ from hi . eyes ; he (e) hid his [le) face [for] a moment with his {les) hands ; then he rush d into the midst ^ the enemy at the head of his guards. The king of Poland did all t^tijbA, one should expect from a prince who wa fighting for his crown; he himself brought back his troops three times to th«; charge; but he. fought with his Saxons only ; tl; Poles, vfho formed his riglit v^lng^Jled at the beginning of the battle. Charles won a complete victory. t 354 EXERCISE XXII, a. i-i He did not stay on tho fu^Id (.f battle, ])iit {et) marched direct to Cnieow, pursuing the king of Poland, who kept Jieeimj l)efore him. EXERCISE XXII, a. (gji li(i8-273.*) Je tiens i\ co (|uo vous appreniez lo latin. Nous n'aimorions pas qu'on so mo- qujlt do nous. II mo tarda que cela soit fait. I am (moat) anxious that you shall learn Latin. Wo sliould not liko to be made sport of. I am longing for r at to he done. Je voudrais bien quo vous lo fassioz. j J '^'^^' >"" '^''"' ' ^^ '^^ ^^ II should liko you to do it. 1. Our teacher said that he wished us to write our exercise. 2. If you wish to go to the city, you may (pouvon') go (tliere), but if you wish us to go (there), we tell you plainly that we cannot. 3. I wish you to do your work before (the) breakfast. 4. Our friends wish us to stay with them this week. 5. My father is most anxious that I should learn French, but I don't like it. 6. Would you prefer that I should go to church this morning? 7. We should not like our friends to be made sport of. 8. You say that you are going to buy a house from chat man ; take care lest he deceive you. /| 9. I am longing for my house to be finished. 10. I am anxious that he should come to see us when he visits Toronto, x 11. My teacher told me that I should write my exercise. VI 2. My father told me that he had seen you. 13. The law forbids that to be done. ,^14. These children must stay in; their parents have forbidden them to go out. 15. I shall give orders not to admit them (use: on). K16. I did not ask that I should be answered (use: on) before the others. yi7. I shall avoid her speaking to me about it. 18. The doctor ordered that he should be given no wine. 19. We do not ask that you should pay the money. 20. The rain hinders people (on) from going out to-day. 21. I wish you to know that he is my friend. 22. You approve of my coming back, do you not? 25. Yes, I wish you would go away. 24 It is better for the children to go to school. 25. What shall I say to that man? He has insidted me. 26. That makes no difference, he is not worthy of being answered (use : on). 27. The doctor gave orders that my father should go out for a drive eve ry day. 28. He has torn his book ; he deserves *See note on limit' d use of inipf. subj., p. 108. """" ~~ / y EXERCISE XXIII, a. 855 tt> be punished (use : on). 29. I should like you to go for a Weakness often hinders good iutentious 31. J long for his return. 32. There is walk with nie. 30 from heing fulfilled no more bread ; 1 should like you to go and get some. 33. That man is most anxious that his children should go to school, but he is too poor to (pour) buy them books. 34. Take '^are that the dog does not bite you j he is very cross. 35. That young man is not very amiable ; we should not like him to treat us as he has treated his father. / EXERCISE XXIII, a. m 26S-2TS, continued.) 1. It is fitting that children should obey tlieir parents. 2. It is good that men should sometimes undergo misfortunes. 3. It may be that he has returned, but I have not seen him. 4. It is natural that we should hate our enemies. 5. It is getting late; u is time that we should go home. 6. He had to learn French, for he lived in France. \7. We are very glad that you have come. 8. We are very sorry that you did not come. 9. I am surprised that he said so, because he told me that he would not say so. \10. It is a pity that we cannot always be happy. 11. It is a shame for those young men to be so ignorant. 12. It is sad that a man like him should be so poor. 13. I fear he will commit some crime. 14. I am glad you are so well. 15. I am afraid my father is not well enough to [pour) go with us. • 16. 1 wonder he did not come last night. 17. I know why he did not come: he was afraid it would rain. -18. He was not afraid it would rain ; he was afraid a certain person would be there whom he did not wish to see. 19. I do not fear he will not go. 20. Are you not afraid he will be able to ;)rev;nt your intentions from being fulfilled ? 21. I doubt whe her he will be able to come. 22. I do not deny that I am glad of your ill-fortune. ^23. Do you doubt that he is an honest man?' 24. Not at all; I know that he is an honest man; I have known him for twenty years.^ )25. I do not doubt that you will be able to fulfil all your intentions. 2G. It seems he has not received [any] of my letters. 27. It cannot be that you are ignorant of his intentions. 28. How is your father? 29. He is very well;- he is rarely ill. 30. It seems to me ic will be dangerous if we do not follow his advice. 31. That child is afraid you will (' ;c.o.<.cr*AAA- K\ ^' "^ I 356 EXERCISE XXIV, a. •- 1- hurt him. 32. I am glad you did not hurt yourself when you fell. 33. We regret very much that we did not see you when you were in Paris. 34. Are you not afraid that you will tire of being in the country 1 35. I am not afraid that I shall tire of being in the country. EXERCISE XXIV, a. (§§268-273, contimced.) 1. Our neighbour is an honest man; I hope he will succeed. 2. I do not think he will succeed ; he has not much ability. ^\3. We thought he would come to-day. 4. You told me that you did not think he would go away, did you not 1^5. Do 3'ou think we must believe what he says 1 6. It is probable that we shall go away to-morrow. /-T. It is not certain that our friends will come to-morrow. 8. Is it probable that you will go away to-day"? 9. We are sure that we saw them yesterday. 10. Are you not sure that you saw them yester- day? 11. Do you think your father will go to France this summer? 12. It is probable he will go there. 13. It is certain that all men will die. 14. Is it certain that our friends will be there this evening? 15. Is it not certain that your neighbour will buy your house? 16. Does he imagine we shall do that merely to {pou7') please him? 17. We are not sure that will please him. ^8. Do you think you will go for a walk this evening? i,;19. Yes, I think I shall go out with my brother. 20. Give me the book which contains that beautiful story of which you were speaking. ^1. Give me a book which contains some beautiful stories. 22. I should like to buy a house which would suit me better than this one. 23. I am looking for a grammar in which I can find better exercises. 24. I have a grammar which has better exercises. 25. Send me some clothes which I can wear in the house. 26. Has he a single friend who is true to him ? 27. He has not a single friend who is true to him. 28. There is nobody here who can speak French. 29. I have nothing which is of value, 30. There are no houses here which are as large as those in the city. 31. There are few people here who have learned French. v32. It is the finest thing one can see. 33. That is the largest ship I have ever seen. 34. Whatever you do, you will not be able to persuade me that you are right. 35. Whoever you are, you will have to obey the law, as long as you are in this country. EXERCISE XXV, a. 367 EXERCISE XXV, a. (§§268-273, contintusd.) What does he mean ? f Men trust him. \He is trusted. Send me word (let me know). I never hear from him now. He is very busy. He takes an interest in that. Que veut-il dire ? On se fie k lui. Faites-moi savoir. Je no re9ois plus de ses nouvelles. II est tr6s occupe. II s'occupe de cela. 1. I have told him nothing which could influence him. 2. I know no book which pleases me better. 3. I want a house wliich will suit me better. 4. Mr. Jackson is the richest man I know. x5. However good men may be, they do not escape misfortune. 6. Let us go out for a walk before your father returns. 7. We rose this morning before the sun rose. 8. Will you not stay here until the weather is warm 1 9. Oh, no ; we must leave before it begins to be warm. 10. We are going to work until we go to bed. 11. You must always act so that men may respect you. 12. Tell the truth always, so that men may trust you. 13. He insulted me so that I put him out doors. 14. That gentleman made a speech, but he spoke in such a way that one could not understand him. 1 5. I did not trust him, for fear that he might deceive me. 16. He passed our house before we had finished our breakfast. 17. I explained it to him, for fear he might not know what you meant. 18. I cannot trust you, unless you explain to me what you mean. 19. In case you cannot come, will you be kind enough to send me word. 20. We shall send you our carriage, in case you need it. 21. In case what he says is true, we shall send you word. 22. Although the children have gone to bed, they have not yet gone to sleep. 23. Although you may not like that man, you must confess that he isL an honest man. 24. Although we used to be good friends, I never hear from him now. 25. Not that he has forgotten me, but he is so much occupied with his business. 26. Far from his saying that he hates you, I assure you that he will say he loves you. 27. He gave her the money with- out my knowing it. 28. Even if he had told me that he liked me, I should not have believed it. 29. Though Canada be less interesting than England, Canadians love it better. 30. I cannot go out, without my dog following me. 31. If we are 358 EXERCISE XXVI, a. fchere and see him, we shall tell him what you say. 32. Al- though he is far away, I hear from him occasionally. 33. Not that we take no interest in your enterprise, but we are so busy with our own work that we can't tliink of anything else. V 34. We are at the wrong door ; would you be kind enough to tell us where we are, so that we can find where our friends live? 7^^5. We shall rise early to-morrow morning, so as to be at the station before our friends start. a. .^'k > EXERCISE XXVI, a. (§§268-273, continued.) liij II .>«^ 1. Would to God he were here ! 2. Let him be silent, if he cannot explain what he wishes. 3, The Frenchmen shout "Rurrah for France ! " 4. He doubted whether there is a GkxL > 5. I should like you to write me a letter when you are absent. 6. If his father should say so, he would have to do it. 7. I was most anxious that he should nucceed in his enterprise. 8. We were not willing that you sb«>old go away without our seeing you. 9. His father gave ord-rs that he should be taken 'o school. 10. The doctor forbade that the patient should go ror a walk. 11. I was longing for that to be done. 12. He would not permit it to be done. 13. The rain hindered us all Jay from going out. 14. It was necessary that we should go away before the others came. 15. It was better that we should be here without their knowing it. 16. I was afraid that he had said too much. 17. I doubted whether he would be able to pay that price. 18. I was very sorry that we had not been able to go for a walk together; I am sure we should have enjoyed ourselves. 1 9. Our friends were glad that you had visited them before they left for France. 20. He told me he would go away, unless he succeeded better. 21. We did not say you should write the letter; you may do as you wish. 22. Did you fear he would go away without coming to see you 1 23. My father thought you would come, but my mother thought you would not come. 24. It was impossible that he should not be mistaken ; he trusts those who are not worthy of confidence. 25. We are not sure they would come. 26. We waited until they came. 27. We have taken care that they should not see us.-^28. No man has ever lived who could equal him in prudence. 29. He was the noblest man I have ever known. 30. I left Russia when I was a bnv • I snu^ht a EXERCISE XXVII, a. 359 country where I might be free. 31. Did he ever have a friend who was faithful to him 1 32. Show me a house which will suit me better than this one. 33. I have never seen anything'' which suited me better. ^34. Why did your father come ? 35^ He came in case I should be ill. 36. Although he was very ill, he would not go home. JJ\^.:^XERCISE XXVII, a. (§§274-275.) Je lui ai dit sOn fait. Nous nous plaisons k la ville. II se plait a la campagne. I (have) told him what I thought of him. We like it (like to be) in the city. He likes it (likes to be) in the country. Qu'il fasse beau, ou qu'il pleuve. "i S'il fait beau, ou qu'il pleuve. / ^^^ther it is fine, or whether it rams. Quand mgme ce serait vrai. P'^'^" '^ '^ ^^^^ *^"^- ^Even were it true. II s'en plaint. He complains of it. ,l>if it does not rain, will you go for a walk to-morrow morning 1 2. No, even if it should not rain, I must go down town to-morrow morning on business. 3. If it were to rain to-day, we should not go down town. 4. If I had known that you were in town, I should have gone to see you. 5. Had it not been so warm to-day, I should have gone away. (C^If the Germans had not taken Alsatia, the French would not hate ther^j af/ much to-day. 7. If I come here next year, I shall brinf mf brother with me. 8. ; If I were ivou. I, should tell him what I think of him^ 9. If ^ ^m presenMlierr^he arrives, I shall tell him what I told you.J 10. If it is cold in winter, we go to Florida; if it is mild, we remain in Canada. 11. If my father likes it in the country, he will stay there till (the) autumn. l2. If I should like it in the city, I shall stay there always. 13. I can never trust that l>oy; if he should tell me anything, I should not believe him. 14. Whether it rains or is fine, we shall come. 15. He is a g(x>d (brave) man, if there ever was ont. 16. If that man were as rich as Crcesus, he would not be satisfied. 17. See what that man has done to me! He is a scoundrel, if there tiver was one. 18. If I Bhould go to sleep before yoy Cum«>, be good enough to wake me. J9. Will you not go down town with me? -gO. I cannot go, I am not well : if I were better. I should f»o willingly. 360 EXERCISE XXVIII, a. 1 1 21. If he had risen at six o'clock, he would nob have missed the train. ?2. Yes, he would {si I si !). He would have been late, even if he had risen at half-past five, for the train left at a quarter past five. 23. I have been told that your friend has insulted you ; is it true ? 24. No, but even if it were true, I should pardon (it to) him. 25. T)id our friend tell you last evening whether he was coming to-morrow 1 26. Yes, he told me that he would come. 27. That man told me that he had a thousand dollars. 28. We e iie to swear it, I sho 'id not believe it. 29. If you meet him, and he should ask you where I am, do not tell (it to) him. 30. Whether he comes, or not, (that) makes no difference to me. f 31. If I were he, I should tell that scoundrel what I thought of him. /!32. If we liked it in the country, we should stay there. 33. If he had insulted me like that, I should have kicked him out. '^. Even were you to hate me, I should not complain (of it). 35. I should have liked it in the country, if it had not rained without ceasing. JiXERCISE XXVIII, a. (§§276-285.) -. . e • r^ine promenade. "i , . . Je vais fairej ^^ .^^^ de promenade. )^ ^™g°^^g ^^' ^ ^^1^' Je voudrais le faire. Je voudrais qu'il le fasse (fit). I should like to do it. I should like him to do it. wish him to do it. n fait beau marcher (se promener). \ -, . /°^ ]^ good. lit IS good walking. fit is vain (useless) for you to speak. Vous avez beau dire (parler). J'ai cru voir passer qiielqu'un. Je les ai ecout^s chanter. II a pens^ mourir. Je pense (songe) k le faire. Ij ne fait que de venir (arriver). II veut faire k sa t^te. J'aimerais autant m'en aller. Faites-le mooter. I You may say what you like. I thought I saw some one go by. I listened to them sing(ing). He was near dying. I am thinking about doing it. He has just come. He will have his own way. I would as soon go. Send (show) him up (stairs). -\1. Let us go for a walk this morning ; the walking is good, and it is cool. 2. Living is always dear in Paris. 3. Are the children coming i 4. Yes, I saw them couiiug when I X EXERCISE XXIX, a. 861 svas on the hill. 5. I should like to speak to the doctor when he comes. 6. I should like you to speak to my father when you see him. 7. When do you expect to be there? 1 . T^^^^ ^"^ ^^, ^^^''^ "' "" fortnight. V 9. He might say what he hked, nobody would believe hir2. 10. It was use- less for us to speak, nobody would listen to us.t 11 I like better to live in the country than in the citi 12 My friends have left me, and I know not what to do 13 1 think It IS going to be warm to-day. 14. My father thought he heard some one go by, but I think he was mistaken, o. My father was very ill last year; he was near dying, lb. His little^ boy fell into the water, and was near bein^ drowned. 117. I was thinking about going to see you"! l«. 1 hope 1 shai! see you wiien you come. 19. I hope he will come to see me when he is here. 20. Did you see my sister at the ball? 21. I thought I saw her, but I am not sure (ot It). 22. I am thinking about writing him a letter, but 1 do not like writing letters, and so I delay (it) from week to week. 23. I should like better to go than to stay. 24 It would be better to go than to stay. 25. Come and see us whenever you wish. 20. My mastor has just come; after he has dined I shall tell him that you are here. '-27 I hope I shall be able to go for a walk with you to-morrow 28 I hope you will not go away before I have seen you 29 We ought to go and see your fatlier before he leaves. 30 It is useless for you to say anything ; he will have his own way. .il. You may say what you like; young people will have their own way. 32. I would as soon go as stay. \ 33. I am not ^r'^rpr ^ ' T'".^"^'' ^ ^°^ goi ng to sen d for the doctor, .i^^ S^. Ihe doctor has just come; shallTsend him up? v35 We thought we heard some one go by, but we must have been mistaken, ' EXERCISE XXIX, a. (§§ 276-285, con^mygtZ. ) II est k travaillor. J'y suis accoutunie. II finira mal. Se plaire h mal faire. II tarde k venir. Tenez-vous (beaiicoup) ;i y allor? Je u'y tiens pas. He is busy working. I am used to it. He will come to a bad end. To delight in evil- (wrong-) doing. He is long in coming. Arp vol' (\'pr-jT\ »r>v:<-...r, *.„ xi «■ xii _ \ III. , .(., J f .nj.-LiOU.- lG yu Ltiure ; I am not anxious (for it). ! y^'* >.:.;' . ; r n ,.^^^^■| 362 EXERCISE XXX, a. 1. Continue reading until you 4iro called. 2yWe are busy writing our exercises. '^S. I have my work to do. 4. Our teacher taught us to do tliat. 5>Will you help rae to do my work ? 6.^1 should like to help you, but I have work to do also. 7. I have difficulty in believing that he has done that. 8yHow old is that child? 9; He is two years old; he is li^ginning to talk. 10. The servant is busy washing dishes in the kitchen. 11. We are occupied to-day in writing to our friends. 12. He spends hib time in reading novels, 13. He is not lazy; he sets about writing his lesson as soon as his teacher tells (it to) him. 14. Do you not get .tired (in) reading those difficult works? 15. A little, but I am rather used to it. 16. He lo^t a great deal in selling his house. 17. That boy persists in reading bad b^oks ; he will come to a bad end. 18. The wicked delight in evil-doing. 19. Our friends invited us to stay with^ them. ^. 20. I should like to know where my mother is ; she is long m. coming. " 21. vl wish she would come; I long t^ see her. 22. Are you anxious to have it to-day? 23. Oh no, I am not anxious for that ; but I must have it to- morrow. 24. "Are those apples good to eat? 25. We are looking for a^maid of all work. 26. That young lady sings and dances charmingly. 21.' ^There are five bed-rooms in that house. 28. That poor little girl has hurt her hand; she is crying pitifully. 29. Our neighbour has died ; his family is to be pitied. 30. That young man seems to delight in wrong- doing. 31. Are you not very anxious to see your friends? 32. Yes, I should like to see them ; I have not seen them for a long time./ 33. That is very difficult to do ; I should like you to help me"? 34. I am always ready to help you. 35. I am glad to know that you are not the only one to say so. 36. That scoundrel did not succeed in deceiving us. ' ')* EXERCISE XXX, a. (§§276-285, continued.) II fait semblant de dormir. He pretends to bo asleep. Bien faire, mal faire. To do well, to do evil (^ vrong). ^1^ Our teacher tells us that it is easy to read that book. 2. I am ashamed to say that we are mistaken. 3. He pretends to be asleep. 4. She pretends to be reading. /'Sa It is difficult to say whether we are right or wrong. 6. He is wrong to EXERCISE XXXI, a. 863 believe that we are his enemies. 7. Will you permit me to go to bod ? 8. Promise us not to go away without telling us (it). 9. I am very glad to say that I sliall be able to come and see you at once, x 10. We are sorry to tell you that we cannot come. 11. Cease to do evil; learn to do well. 12. Hasten to finish your work before leaving. 13. Let us hasten to leave, or we shall be late. 14. I am afraid to speak, al- though I know it is my place to toll them that they have done wi'ong. 15. He commenced by telling me that he was a rich man's son, and ho finished by asking me to lend him five dollars. ■ 16^ Take care not to fall. 17. If you happen to see him, toll him that I shall not go away before seeing him. 18. I have just seen him, and he told me to tell you that he would come to-morrow. 19. We ( We shall make them do their work. 2. They (<>n) have made her suffer great ills. "S3. Show them up stairs when they come. 4. I have seen the children play. 5. Wo have seen him play that part. 6. He was born [a] poet. 7. He has become [a] soldier. 8. What will become of us i 9. I believe he is an honest man. /slO. He thinks he is [a] scholar. 11. I know he is [a] scholar. 12. We should not slander our neigh- bours. 13. I perceived their dejection, as soon as I came in • did you? (see § 25G). 14. No, I did not notice it. 15. We cannot do without our books ; we are going to use them to- morrow. 16. I remember the sorrows you made me undergo. 17. These gloves do not fit me. 18. That young lady's gloves do not fit her. 19. I shall look for a house which suits me better (see § 270, 1). 20. That house does not suit our friends. 21.1 cannot trust him ; he often lies. 22. The sou resembles his father. 23. We are not permitted to leave the city. 24. The law does not permit children to marry. 25. The king pardons him his crime. 26. Did you pay the tailor for your coat? -^7. I ht^ve not paid him for it vet. 28. What are you looking at? ^. I am looking at those men workin*/ in the field. 30. Wait for me, till I come. 31. I think of my friends who have gone away. 32. Do you think of the money you have lost? 33. I do not. 34. Shall you be at the ball this evening? 35. I do not know; that depends on you. 36. Did you thank him for having lent you his book ? 37. I did. 38. He stole that watch from his father ; what do you think of that? 39. He is laughing at us. 40. Those men were playing cards. 41. Those young ladies play on the violin. 42. You believe me; do you not? 43. Yes, I believe you. 44. That old lady believes in ghosts. 45. He loves EXEP JISE XXXIV-XX. a. 867 ai ()i»eys his parents, 46. He missed the train ; diu he noti 4*7. . am short of money this mornit><,' ; I cannot pay you. lb. He fails in liis duty when he does not pay iiis debts. 49. Have you asked y<>ur father for money 1 50. I L ive u ..sked him for ny. EXERCISR XXXIV, a. (§§300-306.) 1. Tell i servant to put the frying-pan on the stove. 2. That man . a regular dupe. 3. He is not a friend ; he is a mere acquaintance. 4. He was received with all the honours. 5. That poet is always singing of his first love. 6. The errors of men are numerous. 7. The old man has {/aire) a nap after dinner. 8. He pai'^ me a large sum of money. 9. My memory is not good ive me a memorandum of that affair. 10. Steam makes tlie steamer go. 11. That man and his wife are a happy couple. 12. I have Hugo's works at home. 13. The works of the sculptor B eye were exhibited in Paris in 1889. 14. Old people are generally less thoughtless than young people. 15. Those people are not all good. ' 16. All those people were present. 17. All good people are worthy of respect. 18. All the clever people in {de) the town were present at the ball. 19. Happy [are] the people who do not love vice. 20. All the young men of the village were present at the celebration. EXERCISE XXXV, a. (§§307-314.) Hi.,o Tomber h genoux. To fall on one's knees. Le petit bonhomme. The brave little fellow. 1. That man has broken his two arms. 2. The 'ifs' and the 'buts' are often convenient words. 3. The criminal fell on his knees before the king.X4. That little boy likes to pick up pebbles. V 5. The generals have good horses.^ 6. We read the newspapers before go'.ng down town [inj the hiurning. 7. Frenchmen like carnivals and balls. 8. Our neighbour has some beautiful corals at home. 9. The Minister of Public Works has ordered a railway to be constructed. 10. His grandfathers are dead. 11. Our ancestors were great men who left [behind them] many noble works. "^12. The poor boy had tears in his (aux) eyes when he was told that his bird was •;•.•% IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) ^ /. ^ ^4^. w i^. / €^. 1.0 I.I 1.25 ^^ illM u |M 2.2 1.4 12.0 1= 1.6 Photographic Sciences Corporation # \ <^ "% \ LO^ ";23. I have two Molieres at home. 24„ Ihe Bourbons have Uen very unfortunate ; I pity them. 25. 1 saw the school-boys marching yesterday ; the brave little fellows were really fine-looking. 26. The noblemen of France have suflPered much during this century. ,27. There are two gentlemen and two ladies waiting for you. ^28. Good morn- ing, ladies; how do you do? 29. I ha^ visited all the county-towns of that part of France. 30. Many of Moli^re's works are masterpieces. EXERCISE XXXVI, a. (§§315-335.) ^•i' ^?'«^owed remarkable courage in struggling with his difficulties. 2. We used to enjoy good health when we lived in prance. 3. Do you not like music? 4. I do, when it is good. 5 Gold and silver are abundant in that country. 6 ihe rich have much gold and silver. 7. Does that young lady know Greek? 8. Slie does not, but she l^nows French and German well. 9. Does your mother speak French ? 10 Yes she speaks French and German well. 11. W^e have French and German books in our library. 12. Have you any ^ood sugar for sale, sir? 13. Have you any of my books in your library { 14. Have you any of the good wine you bought last yearf 15. We have no pens and no paper. 16. They have no more money, and so they must stay at home. 17. That is not wine ; it is water. 18. It is not money I ask you for, but friendship. 19. Why do you complain; have you not friends? 20. I should like to buy a pound of tea ; have you any of the good tea which you ordered from China ? 21.1 shall give you something good, if you come to see me. 22. He promised me something very beautiful, but he never gave it to me. 23 Many people believe that he will come to a bad end. 24* Many others believe that he will succeec' well. 25. Most people are ignorant of their true interests. 26. We wer<* EXERCISE XXXVII, a. 369 absent most of the time. 27. Silk dresses and gold watches are not always necessary. * 28. Horses are animals which are useful to men. 29. Queen Victoria has been reigning a long time. 30. The President of the French Republic has sig..ed the treaty. 31. King Louis XIV. is often called the Great. 32. That old man has a long beard. 33. Give me your hand, and I shall help you to rise. <34. We shook hands before we parted. 35. She has not taken off her hat and gloves ; she says she cannot stay. 36. I have tooth-ache and ear-ache, and so I cannot go out. 37. That little girl has blue eyes, and blond lia.ir. --^8. I had my hair cut before starting. 39. What is the matter with you, my little boy? 40. My hands and feet are cold. EXERCISE XXXVII, a. (§§315-335, continued.) Combien les avez-vous pay^s ? How much did you pay for them ? Je les ai pay^s dix franos la douzaine. I paid ten francs a dozen for them. II part pour la France. He is starting for France. Au nord de la France. In the north of France. 1. You liave some very fine pears; how much did you pay for them ? 2. I paid two cents apitce for them. 3. That is not dear ; I thought that pears would not sell so cheap this year. 4. Carpenters are earning ten francs a day at present. 5. We do not go to school on Saturday. 6. He will come on Saturday. 7. You were wrong to come on Wednesday ; you should always come on Thursday. 8. Did I step on your toe ? I ask your pardon. 9. Are you going on horseback or on foot? 10. How we love spring! 11. In spring nature awakes from its long repose. 1 2. In winter there is sometimes much snow in France. 13. Those gentlemen are Frenchmen 14 Our neighbour is a carpenter. 15. His son has become a distmguished physician. 16. Charles the First, Kincr of England, was beheaded. 17. She was born at Marseill^ a city of Southern France. 18. We were without friends and money. 19. Those children have neither father nor mother. 20. He will come home at Michaelmas. 21. Those ladies dress in French style. 22. Have you ever read Tasso's great poem ? 23. Yes, and Ariosto's also. 24. We are to start for Europe to-morrow. 25. Normandy is a province of France 24 I I I 370 EXERCISE XXXVIII, a. 26. Did you ever live in Paris ? 27. Yes, I lived a long time in France, and in England too. 28. My brother has liv(^d in China, but he is living now in Japan. 2i). The United States is the most important country in North America. 30. Havre is an important seaport of the north of France. 31. New Orleans is a large city of the United States. 32. French wines are celebrated in all parts of the world. 33. That traveller comes from Africa, and is going to South America. 34. Ladies, you are welcome ; we are always glad to receive you. 35. Our neighbour goes to the city every other day. EXERCISE XXXVIII, a. (§§336-358.) 1. That little boy's grandmother has given him a knife. 2. That little girl is very foolish. 3. I know those old ladies well ; they are our old neighbours. 4. What a fine-looking man ! Do you know him ? 5. There are some beautiful trees ! 6. The prince addressed him most flattering words. 7. That statesman is celebrated for his liberal principles. 8. There are, according to Catholic doctrine, seven capital sins. 9. The man and his wife were both old. 10. The French and Italian nations are often called Latin nations. 11. Those flowers smell sweet, do they not? 12. That large building is the school for (de) deaf-mutes. 13. He left the door wide open when he went out this morning. 14. The newly married couple had just left the church. 15. My mother had blue eyes and light auburn hair. 16. When 1 was young, I used to go barefoot to school. 17. That lady looks kind. 18. A pound sterling is worth tweiity-five francs. 19. He is getting richer and richer. 20. He is richer than people (on) believe. 21. The older one is, the wiser one should be. 22. My brother is older than I by four years. 23. The richer one part of the population becomes, the poorer the rest often become. 24. Your house is small, but ours is smaller still. 25. That man is bad, but his brother is still worse. 26. The dearer those articles are, the less of them we shall be able to buy. 27. Our house is go(>d, but yours is better. 28. His most intimate friends knew nothing of his good fortune. 29. Men are often the mrt-st uniiappy when they ought to be the most happy. 30. Is that net a splendid - EXERCISES XXXIX-XL, a. 871 - sight? 31. Yes, it is most beautiful! 32. Tlie rcliesfc men in the world are not always the happiest, than I b^^ three inches. 33. She is shorter EXERCISE XXXIX, a. mmS^S, continued.) 1. You are all welcome, ladies ; how kind you are to come to see me! 2. What a pretty little girl ! What is her name ? 3. Tiiere were bhick horses and white ones in the proces- sion. 4. Will you give me some cold water to (pour) drink ? 5. Whose is that broken cane] 6. Our neighbour is not an educated man. 7. Our friends live in a beautiful white house behind the town. 8. The English language is spok'in in all parts of the world. 9. I have just seen that pretended noble- man go by. 10. We have just been at a political meeting, where we listened to a very long speech. 1 1. My dear child, you are too young to wear dear dresses! 12. I love that gentleman; he is so kind to children, 13. Are you not ready lo start? You are very slow in dressing. 14. I am very glad to see you; when are you coming to visit me? 15. I am very sorry to say that I have no time to visit you before I go away. 16. We are charmed .vith the beautiful present you gave (/aire) us. 17. You are not angry with me, are you? 18. I do not like that man; he is too severe with his children. 19. That is a nice lit£le girl; she is so polite to everybody! 20. That little boy is very clever at history and arithmetic. 21. That army is weak in numbers. 22. We must be charitable to everybody. 23. Living languages are more useful than dead languages. 24. We must not confound the verbal adjectives with the present participles. 25. That young man is the living image of his father. 26. The more learned that man becoiues, the less generous he becomes. EXERCISE XL, a. (§§359-373.) L Are there any good pens in the box? 2. There are none. 3. Do you know that old man? 4. I know him and his brother. 5. Do you know that man and his wife? 6. We know both him and her. 7. We know him only. 8. Did you see my father and mother? 9. We saw her only. 10. Are you going to give them some money? IL I have already f 11/ 372 EXERCISE XLI, a. ■^ 'J- !• . 9' V Si given them some. 1 2. Will you give me some apples ? 13.1 shall give you and him some. 14. Have you spoken to my cousin of your plan ? "^5. I have spoken of it to her and her mother. 16. Will you have the goodness to introduce us to your mother? 17. I shall have great pleasure in introducing you to her. 18. I was thinking of you when you came in. 19. Do you think of me, when I am far away? 20. Yes, I always think of you. 21. Whose is that house? 22. It is mine. 23. As soon as the child saw his mother, he ran to her. 24. Are you that young man's sister? 25. I am. 26. Are you satisfied, madam ? 27. lam. 28. Are you an American, sir? 29. lam. 30. Are you the gentlemen we met yester- day ? 31. We are. 32. I shall go for the doctor, if you wish. 33. I shall do the work, if it is necessary. 34. That man is richer than we are. 35. Why do you tell me to be brave ? I am so already. 36. He carried the day over all his rivals. 37. Tell me where he lives, if you know. 38. He is a Canadian, and I am one too. 39. Do you know the Robin- sons ? 40. Yes, they are very fastidious people, and I do not like to have [anything] to do with them. 41. There is the box ; put the pens into it. 42. Go there, my child ; do not stay here. 43. Do not go there, my daughter; you will hurt yourself. 44. Give them some, my little boy. 45. He is a bad man; I cannot trust him. 46. The earth about those flowers is dry; throw some water there, my daughter. 47. Let us not go away ; let then^ laugh at us, if they will. 48. The children wish to go to the celebration; let us take them there. 49. Tht\t boy has apples and pears ; let z ask him for some. 50. That boy has your knife; take lo away from him. EXERCISE XLI, a. mS59-S1S, continued.) 1. My father did not hurt himself, but he had a narrow escape. 2. Every one for himself is too often the maxim of men. 3. One should not always be thinking of one's self. 4, The selfish live only for themselves. 5. Do you need money ? 6. I do. 7. Do you come from London ? 8. We do. 9. I cannot understand why he has a grudge against me. 10. However that may be, it is all over with him. 11. Have you any money ? 12. I have, but I should like to have more. 'I BXERCISE XLII, a. 873 ;il3. How many apples have you?. 14. I have six. 15. Here are some fine pears; do you wish any? 16. Yea, I should like some, for I have none. 17. Switzerland is my country: 1 love Its blue sky and free institutions. 18. I planted this apple-tree; I hope I shall eat its fruit. 19. Do you ever oA^w?^ ^^"^ country when you are in foreign countries? 20. When I am far away, I always think of it. 21. My brother has gone home, and I am going too. 22. T see a crowd of people in the street ; what is the matter? 23 Were you ever in Europe ? 24. I never was. 25. We shall make him do it when we come. ^26. The doctor is at home ; shall o/^rSu • ^'°^^ \^^- ^^'^'® *^^y ^-^^^ SO and get them. J». Ihere is some water; give us some, for we are thirsty, 29. Do not give them any; they do not need any. 30. Where are the children? ^31. They are coming up the street. 32. Do not listen to them ; they are making sport of you. 33. There 18 my hat; give it to me, if you please. 34. That is my hat; do not give It to him. 35. Let us go away ; it is getting late. f.- ^\/^^ ^*^® ^"y money, give me some. 37. He gives I himself some, but he will not give us any. 38. Take us there. > d9. Crive It to us ; do not give it to them. 40. What are you doing naughty dog? Go away. 41. I saw him, and gave him the money. 42. They are worthy people; I love and admire them. 43. Our duty to our parents is to love and obey them. \U. It is I who was there. 45. My father and I were not there. 46. What were you and he doin^? 47 He was writing, and I was reading. 48. He has a house of his own. 49. You and he were there, were you not ? 50 There is the box; I should like to know whether there is anything EXERCISE XLII, a. (§§374-377.) EUe lui a ferm^ la porte au nez. Cela lui a fait venir I'eau k la bouche. Cette nuit ; de toute la nuit. She shut the doc-x in his face. That made his mouth water. Last night ; all night. 1. My father and yours will soon be here. 2. I have your books and my own. 3. Our friends are coming by the rail- way ; yours are coming by the steamer. 4. My brother and sister have gone away ; they will not be back till Wednesday next. 6. One should not fail to pay one's debt>s. 6. I had .1 ? s 3U EXERCISE XLIII, a. •, my hiiir cut this itjoriiing ; T am afraid I sliall catch a cold. 7. The duke was piescnted to tlie queen, .and he kissed her hand. 8. She has cut her finger. 9. I shall love him, as long as my heart beats. 10, It was so warm that I could not close my eyes all night. 11. Close your eyes, and open your mouth. 12. He shuts his eyes to the light. 13. He was walking [with] his eyes closed ; he fell and broke his arm. 14. I have my hands full ; I cannot help you. 15. I went to see him, but he shut the door in my face. 16. It is a very cold morning; will you not warm your hands 1 17. Thank you ; my hands are not cold, 18. That clumsy fellow stepped on my toe, and he hurt me very nmch, 19. My head aches this morning ; I did not close my eyes last night, 20. The sight of those beautiful apples made my mouth water. 21. He stood there, [with] his arms folded, awaiting his fate like a brave .soldier. 22. As long as my heart beats, I shall never forget you. 23. If they come here, we shall shut the door in their face. 24. Do you see those poor children ; those beau- tiful pears made their mouths water. 25. Let us hope that the law has not lost its force in this country. 26, He has a watch of his own. 27. Whom do you mean ; his father or her father? 28. I mean her father. 29. This house is his, not yours. 30. They lost their lives fighting for their (la) country. 31. Negroes have dark skins and large mouths. 32, One of my friends who is a doctor told me the following story. 33. I am going to take a,v/ay these books of yours. 34. The difference between mine and thine is not always easy to determine. 35, I love very much these books of mine. EXERCISE XLIII, a. (§§378-388,) 1. I have never read that book, but 1 have read this one, and I like it very much. 2. These houses are not so fine as those. 3. You should not eat in that way. 4. Have patience, I shall be (pres.) there this moment. 5. Those who do wrong will be punished, 6, He of whom you were speak- ing yesterday has arrived. 7. Which of those horses do you like best? 8. I like the one you bought better than your brother's, but I like my own best. 9. This house and the one in which our neighbours live will be sold to-morrow. 10. Our house and our neighbour's are both (en) brick [houses]. 11. EXERCISE XLIV, & 875 These facte, and those discovered since that time, prove that, although he was a great scholar, he was wrong. 12. I saw the man (celui) last evening wiio wanted to buy my liorse. 13. Who are those two gentlemen? U. This is Mr. llobinson, and chat is Mr^ Jones. 15. You are looking for apples ; very well, will you take these or those? 16. I will take these; those are too small. 17. How is butter selling to-day ? 18. That sells at two francs a pound, and this, which is finer, at two franca fifty centimes. 19. Gam'oetta pnd Hugo were distinguished men ; the former was an orator, the latter a poet. 20. That is a fine horse! How much is he worth? 21. Why do these people not reply when we speak to them? 22. They are Russians; they do not understand you. 23. Who did thaty :24. It was John who did it. 25. What o'clock is it? 2G. It is half-past ten. 27. What day of the month is it? 28. Today is the tenth. 29. Is that the house of which you spoke to me? 30. No, it is the next one. 31. Who is that lady? 32. She is the lady wlio lives next door. 33. What I fear is that he will never come back. 34. It is not that he is losing his money, but he is destroying his health also. 35. It is time to go home. EXERCISE XLIV, a. (§§ 378-388, continued.) Cest line belle chose que de pro- It is a fine thing to protect the t^er les faibles. weak. Ce sent des qualitds ndcessairea Mildness and firmness are necessary pour r^gner que la douceur et qualities for ruling. la fermet^. n a cela de bon. He has this good thing about him. 1. It is they who have done it. 2. It was kind of you to help those poor people. 3. You can do it; it is easy. 4. That was not kind of you ; you should have allowed me to do it. 5. You are rich ; it is easy for you to say so. 6. It is a pity that we did not know it sooner. 7. It is unfortunate that he did not come yesterday. 8. My father told me you were here ; that is why I came. 9. It is to be feared that the traveller has died of hunger. 10. It is to be desired that those misfortunes will never happen. 11. What we were speaking of has happened. 12. What I am thinking of is the way of preventing that misfortune. 13. What he says is true. 14. It's a fine thing. * ii ^i r 376 EXERCISE XLV, a. (' is ') nioni'y ! 15, It is not to you that I spenk. 16. He has lost all his money, which is sfid. 17. What a beautiful thing is virtue! 18. It is money that he wishes. 19. He is a line young man, ( * is ') John ! 20. It would be a good thing to go away. 21. It is a fine thing to love virtue. 22. Health and good sense are qualities necessary for succeeding in tluj world. 23. You are the one who did that. 24. liove is the strongest of all passions. 25. This does not belong to me, but that does. 26. Give me this ; keep that for yourself. 27. He has this good thing about him, that ho always tells the truth. 28. What a lazy beast; and yet he thinks that he works I 29. Did he give you back your pencil? 30. No, but that does not matter; I have another here. 31. It is difficult to trans- late the word 'that' into French. 32. I am sure that that * that ' that that man uses is superfluous. EXERCISE XLV, a. (§§389-402.) f ^ ^ 1. Whom did you see yesterday? with you the day before yesterday, what my reasons are. 4. What sort morning? 5. I think it will be fine, which of those men we were speaking. I hope it will continue until we leave *^9. It is the man I sold my house to. 2. I saw him who was 3. I told you already of weather is it this 6. I do not know to 7. What fine weather! 'S. W^ho is that? 10. What was the matter this morning; I heard a great noise in the street? 11. What were you speaking of to that man you met? 12. I was speaking to him of what we w^ere discussing yesterday. 1 3. Scoundrel that you are, if I catch you, I'll give you what you deserve. 14. What I complain of is that you make no progress in your studies. 15. I do not understand you ; will you explain to me clearly what you mean? 16. What has become of that young gentleman with whom I saw you? 17. I don't know what has become of him ; I have not seen him lately. 18. Which of those ladies did. you see? 19. I saw the one that was here yesterday. 20. What are you thinking of? 21. I am thinking of what we are gqing to do to-morrow. 22. What did your father ask you to do? 23. I have done what he asked me to do. 24. The gentleman, whose son was visiting us last year, will come himself next year. 25. The lady, whose daughter has just been married, will 9 i f EXERCISE XLVl, a. 877 He has 'ul thing is a fine npr to go iilth and (5 world, trongest tut that 27. He 10 truth. works ! hat does )o trans- lat that vho was already it this Icnow to i^eather ! s that? was the street 1 12. I sterday. 3U what uake no )u ; will hat has w you? lot seen 19. I ire you ig to do 23. I I, whose it year. }d, will spend some weeks with us next Hunuufr. 26. The. people, of whom I speak, would never do such a thing. 27. 1, who am your friend, tell you so, and you ought to believe it. 28. It was we who gave them their liberty, and yet to-day they are our enemies. 29. He has gone away, and what is worse, he has not paid his debts. 30. That is very sh-ange ! I sent him a letter, and yet ho says he never received it. 31. To whom are y<.u speaking, sir? 32. It is to you I am speaking, and I want you to pay attention to what I say. 33. The house they are coming out of belongs to my father. 34. The people of the village from which he came were very glad to be rid of him. 35. The gentleman, for whose house I offered sucli a high price, has bought another.. 36. The cause, for which those soldiers fought, was the deliverance of their country. 37. The man, in whom I trust, will not deceive me. 38. That child is dear "-^^ dumb, which is a great pity, for he seems very intel- ligent. '69. I thank you very much. 40. Don't mention it, 41. What I was expecting was that he would pay me. 42. That is not a poor man ; he is well off. 43, Where is the pen T made use of yesterday? 44. Take what you need ; there will be enough for all. 45. Which way did you come this morning? 46. I came the way you came yesterday. 47. There is, in that affair, something strange and mysterious. EXERCISE XLVI, a. (§§403-407.) 1. Certain people say the criminal has escaped. 2. Each day brings its labour. 3. We rise every morning at six o'clock. 4. I have seen him many a time. 5. I have no apples, but I have some pears and peaches. 6. However great and rich we may be, we must die. 7. Whatever your intentions were, your actions were not good. 8. However good your intentions were, you did not succeed in doing us good. 9. We should respect the rights of others. 10. Every one for himself is, happily, not a maxim which everybody practises. 11. If we do not love others, others will not love us. 12. Those children will receive, each one at his majority, their portion of their father's estate. 13. Mother, will you come down? You are wanted. 14. It is said that the robber has been caught. 15. It is not known whether the ship was wrecked or not. 16. When one is pretty, one is rarely i 878 I f EXERCISE XLVII, a. ignoran*; of it. 17. People wonder wliy that young man associates with thoHO scoundrels. 18. When one sees a noble action, it always ;L5ive8 one pleasure. 19. I have never seen any one who had so many noble qualities. 20. I am afraid to say anything about it to any one. 21. No one has ever done anything like that, 22. What a beautiful view ! Did you ever see anything liko it? 23. He went away without visit- ing anyone. 24. Did you find anything where you were looking yosterdayl 25. I ao not know any one of his friends. 26. I doubt whether any one of you will do so. 27. If I can do it without any expense, I shall do it willingly. 28. I do not like this book ; give me another. 29. That little boy has had one apple, and now he wanttf another. 30. Frenchmen often laugh at us Englishyien, because we are less gay than they. 31. This man I have seen else'vhere, but that one I never saw anywhere. 32. These are the same people that were here yesterday morning. 33. That lady is goodness itself. 34. Even if you were to say so, I should not believe it. 35. That is a young man in whom I have 'confidence ; I shall put him in a position to make his fortune. 36. Were there any children at the meeting? 37. Yee, there were several. 38. I shall never accept such conditions. 39. I never saw such a foolish man. 40. If he were to say such a thing to me, I should pat him out of doors. 41. He spent his whole life in doing good. 42. Our neighbour's dj,ughters have become quite tall. 43 He comes to town every other week. 44. Where are the children? Both were here a little ago. 45. I found two apples in the basket, but neither is good. 46. Any line being given, draw a straight line which shall be equal to it. 47. There is no reason whatever which can persuade me. 48. Whoever has stolen that Door woman's money ought to be punished. 49. Whoever he is who told you that, he is mistaken. 50. Whatever that man may do, he will never succeed. 51. Whatever the reason may be, be will never come to see us. EXERCISE XLVII, a. (408-420. > 1. I will not^ sell it, cheap or dear. 2. You did ic on pur- pose, did you not? .3, Not at all, it was quite accidental. 4. A Christian ought to love not only his friends, but even his Ji rXERCISE XLVII, a. 879 enemies. 5. Those poor people had acarcel}- - ny bread to eafc when we found tliern. 6. We liave said nothtn*^ at all about it. 7. That ia a ^'ery complicated affair , I can understand nothing of it. 8. We did not see a living soul in the street when we rose that morning. 9. Whom did you see 1 I saw nobody at all. 10. I shall bo silent, so as not to hinder you from working. 11. Ho told me to do nothing until he returned. 12. I went a^vay so as not to be punished. 13. What is the matter with that little boy? 14. I do not know, I sir ; I neither did nor said anything to him. 1 5. Would you not be glad to see our old friend? 16. No, I neither wish to see him nor speak to him. 17. I have a headache this evening; I can neither sing nor play. 18. Neither he nor his father were there. 19. I saw neitl er hii.; nor his brother. 20. I have neither friend nor money, but 1 have strong arms and courage. 21. No more regrets; take courage, and forget the past. 22. Why did ho not tell me so before leading me into thi'i peril? 23. There is nobody here he does not know. 24. Take care that you are not deceived. 25. There ia nothing which does not please me better than that. 26. Not one of those we invited has come. 27. Do you know where Dr. B. lives? 28. I cannot tell you. 29. If you have no use for this book, lend it to me. 30. Unless you do what you said, I shall not pay you. 31. Do you not fear he will go away? 32. I do not fear he will go away. 33. I am afraid our friends will not be there. 34. If I were afraid he would do it, I should do something to hinder him (from it). 35. If I were not afraid he would hurt himself with it, I should let him have it. 36. That man writes better than he speaks. 37. We do not wish more money than we have now. 38. I do not doubt that that is true. 39. Not much is lacking for the number to be com- plete. 40. We have not seen each other for three years. 41. It is more than three years since we were there. 42. I cannot go with you ; I have no time. 43. Yes, you have, you are not so busy. 44. You have stolen my apples. 45. I tell you I have not. 46. But I say yes, for I saw you. 47. He has as much money as you have, but he has not as much as I have. 48. Let us say no more about it. 49. We are in a hurry ; let us not stay any longer. 50. I have more than fifty francs, but he has more than I, and his brother has still more. II 380 EXERCISE XLVITI, a. EXERCISE XLVIII. (§§421-.1J0.) II a une vingtaino (raiuu-cs. Ho is about twenty (years old). 11 a une trentaine do niille francs. He l.asabout thirty thousand francs. 1. Columbus discovered Auieric.i in the year 1492. 2 TJie _brencl. national fHe i« on the f<»urteentli of July, because [on J tliat day ti.e Bastille was taken. 3. My father left England on the iirst of May, 1824. 4. Napoleon tlie_tirst waa a greater man than Napoleon the Third o^ Charles the First of England and Louis the Sixteenth of J^ ranee were both beheaded. G. The first train leaves at a quarter to five ni the morning, and the second at twenty minutes past two in the afternoon. 7. We went to bed last night at half-past twelve. 8. The first two houses in the street belong to us. 9. We have only the last two chapters in the book to read. 10. The carriage arrived at half past one in the morning. 11. The father gave his son a fifth of His property when the son was twenty-one. 12. How old would you say that man is? 13. I should say he is about torty. 14. It IS twenty years since I saw him. 15. That man is well off; he has an income of about twenty thousand francs a year 16. The first volume of his works contains poetry, and the fourth novels. 17. This house cost three times as much as that one. 18. Ten times ten make a hun- u OA ^? P'"'"^ "" hundred and twenty dollars for that horse. 20. That carriage cost one thousand one hundred dollars. 21. That old man is eighty-five years old. 22 fOnl what day of the month did that happen? 23. lo h.-opened on the twelfth. 24. That table is two metres loner C one metre wide 25. We are going to have a house built sixty teet long by twenty-four wide. 2G. What o'clock is it? -..It IS just noon. 28. A boy ten years old was killed last evening by a carriage in the Boulevard des Italiens. 29. That girl is older than her brother by two years. 30. I am taller than my brother by two inches. 31. Will you come at two o clock or at three? 32. I shall be there precisely at three 66. Is that boy ten years old or eleven ? 34. He is eleven. EXERCISE XLIX, a. 381 s old), and francs. 2. TJie , because y father Napoleon le Third, teenth of leaves at t twenty ) bed last s in the chapters half-past I fifth of How old is about 15. That thousand contains st three e a hun- for that hundred 22. [On] nppened by one lit sixty < is it 'i lied last 19. That m taller at two t three. 3ven. EXERCISE XLIX, a. (§§431-454.) 1. I was thinking of what you were talking about this morning. 2. He paid about twtuity francs for that hat. 3. He will be here about six o'clock in the evening. 4. The day after our arrival we went to see the museum. 5. That child has black eyes ; he takes after his father. 6. The money 'vas divided amongst the children. 7. Amongst all those people there is not one sensible person. 8. Art arrived at great per- fection among the Greeks. 9. He was at my house when I was at his. 10. They all laughed at my expense. 11. We all laughed at him. 12. The thief will have to appear before the court. 13. He will be here before a quarter past three. 14. That is greater by half than what we expected. 15. That box is six feet long by two wide. 16. It is a quarter to four by my watch. 17. I know that man by sight only. 18. He will leave for France in a week. 19. We lived in that city for twenty years. 20. I have been here for two years. 21.1 traded my black horse for this white one. 22. I thanked him for his kindness. 23. From the fifteenth of May I shall live in that house. 24. They drank their wine from golden cups. 25. That picture is painted from nature. 26. In spring the weather is warm and the flowers open. 27. There is not so much misery in Canada as in Russia. 28. Let us live in peace with everybody. 29. There are several nations in North Arnerica. 30. Not one in a hundred was good. 31. Is your house (in) brick or stone 1 32. It was kind of you to aid me . in my misfortune. 33. In rainy weather we stay at home. 34. We shall go away on Saturday. 35. He is now on the road for England. 36. Our house is on this side of the street, and his is on that side. 37. When you come to the next street, turn to the right. 38. Instead of studying he is alwaj''S looking out of the window. 39. His gun was hanging above the chimney. 40. The dog jumped over the fence. 41. He watched over my interests. 42. In passing through the forest we saw many rare plants. 43. We work from morning till night. 44. We are going to our friends' house. 45. The train for Pa; s will be here immediately. 46. They sold those goods under their value. 47. Wicked men tread God's laws under foot. 48. If you will live with us, we shall i I ' ? ! 382 EXERCISES L-LI, a. treat you well. 49. Do yon remember the man with the big nose whom we saw yesterday? 50. She told us her story with tears in her eyes. EXERCISE L, a. (§§455-459.) 1. For fear it should rain we shall not go away to-day. 2. He did his work so that all were pleased with him. 3. Unless you come to-morrow, we shall not wait for you 4. Both he and his brother were there. 5. Go and get us some bread. 6. She neither laughs nor cries. 7. Those poor people are without bread or meat. 8. He does not believe whai; you say; nor I either. 9. We shall not be there; nor he either. 10. We have not gone away, nor shall we. 11. As soon as you are there and have the time, will you go and visit my brother? 12. If he is there and we see him, we shall tell him what you say. 13. When bread is dear and the weather is cold, the poor suffer. 14. I think we shall go away the day after to-morrow. 15. If your friend comes to the meeting and I am there, I shall speak to him. 16. Since you went away I have been writing letters. 17. Since you cannot do It you must let me try. 18. Since you went away yester- day he has done nothing but play. 19. Since every action brings its recompense with it, we must pay attention to what we do. 20. While I was doing my exercise, she was writing her letters. 21. The good shall be rewarded, whilst the bad shall be punished. 22. When I saw him, he was busy working in his field. 23. As long as the world lasts, justice shall pre- vail over injustice. 24. He did his work, so that he was praised by all. 25. He was kind to the poor, so that he mi^ht be praised by all. * EXERCISE LI, a. The largest clock in the world will be the one^ which soon^ will adorn the city hall of Philadelphia. The dial of this colossal clock will be^ ten metres in diameter, and will be placed and illuminated so as to be visible night and day (de) everywhere in the city. The hands will be, one^ four metres and the other three metres long ; the bell of the striking part will weigh forty-six thousand pounds, and in order to wind the EXERCISES LIT-IV, a. 383 bh the big lier story clock a steam-engine placed in the tower will be used daily ( = one will use daily a steam-engine, etc.). •§381. 2 §413. »8 428,o6».8. « g 406, 7, (1), o. y to-day, ith him. for you. d get us tiose poor t believe lere; nor ihall we. 11 you go him, we • and the go away 3 to the ince you 11 cannot 7 yester- y action to what writing the bad working hall pre- he was le might 3h soon2 of this will be lay (de) metres ng part ind the EXERCISE LII,a. Horses^, birds^ and animals^ of all (the) sorts speak a language as well as men\ We cannot understand all (= all that which) they say. but we understand enough of it to^ know that they have thoughts^ and feelings-l They are sad when they lose a companion, or when they are driven away* from home. They are pleased when they are well treated*, and angry when they are ill treated*. They have, so to speak, a conscience ; they feel ashamed when they do what displeases us, and are very glad when they merit our approbation. Kindness^ on our part towards them is as reasonable as love^ and kindness^ between brothers^. ' § 321. " § 282, 2. ' § 322. «§ 241. 2,0. EXERCISE LIII, a. A richi man, it is said^, once"^ asked* a learned man what was^ the reason that scientific men were^ so often^ seen at the doors of the rich, while^ the rich were^ very rarely seen^ at the doors of the learned. "It is," replied* the scholar, "because the man of science knows the value of riches^, but the rich man does not always know the valufc, of science''." *§351. 3 §413. «§2r)8, 5. » § 321. «§ 241, 2,0. ♦§4o9, 2. •§258,1. « § 459, 2. EXERCISE LIV, a. Moliere, the great French^ author, was born2 in Paris in the year one thousand six hundred and twenty-two^. His father was the king's upholsterer, and was probably a rather rich* man. The son received^ a good education, but not much is known^ of his youth. When he was about twenty years oW^, he organized^ a company of actors, which was^ called L'lllustre Thedtre. But in this enterprise he did not succeed*^ very well. He soon^ lost^ all his money, and with his troupe was^ forced to^ leave Paris and (to) make a tour in [the] proviiice[s]. This I Sri i I \ I if 384 EXERCISES LV-LVI, a. tour lasted^ from sixteen hundred and forty-six to sixteen hundred and fifty-eight. During these years he travelled^ over nearly the whole of France, and playe(P in many of the large cities. After his return to Paris he became'^ the king's favourite, and produced^ the masterpieces which have rendered him so celebrated. At last, after fifteen years of great suc- cess, he died^ in sixteen hundred and seventy-three at the age of fifty-one. 6 8 260. » § 430. » § 280, 6. « \k 241, 2, a. 8 § 413. ' § a>2, 1, (2). * Past Def . •"«§421,c. *§361. EXERCISE LV,a. Speaking of the small world in which even the greatest live^, Lord Beaconsfield used to tell^ that Napoleon I., a year after his accession to the throne, determined to^ find out if tliere was* anybody in the world who had never heard of him. Within a fortnight the police of Paris had'^ discovered a wood-chopper at Montmartre, in Paris itself, who had never heard of the Revolution, nor of the death of Louis XVI., nor of the Emperor Napoleon. § > 237, 6. ' § 258, 2. '§280,6. ' § 258, 5. • § 232, 1. EXERCISE LVI, a. Napoleon, the greatest general of modern times^, was born^ at Ajaccio on the 15th of August, 1769. At the age of ten^ he was sent to th'^ lilitary* school at Brienne, where he remained more than^ five years. Then entering the French* army, he was, in 1796, appointed general of the army of Italy 6, and soon succeeded in conquering''^ that country. He used so well the opportunities which were oifered him by the weakness of the Republic that in less than ten years he vas elected Emperor. The ten years* struggle, in which he engaged with the purpose of subduing^ Europe^, ended with the battle of Waterloo in 1815. Banished to (a) St. Helena he died^'* there on the 5th of May, 1821. Twenty years after his death his remains were brought back to (en) France, and interred in the Hdtel des Invalides. »|821. i>Pa8t Def. s i 430, obB. 2. » § 412, 1,6. ' § 279, 2. « § 333, 1. ♦§852,1,(2). «§ 333, 2, note. « § 280, 2. «<>§ tnoumt or «««mort. ) sixteen iravelled^ xy of the he king's rendered reat suc- le at the » § 280, 6. ;est live^, ear after lere was* W^ithin a l-chopper d of the r of the § 232, 1. ^as born^ f ten^ he •emained xrmy, he ly^, and i so well ikness of elected ^ed with jattle of e diedi" lis death terred in or est mort. EXERCISES LVII-LVIII, a. EXERCISE LVII, a. 885 Great Britain' and Ireland' are two large islands m the west of Europe'. Great Britain is the larger of the two and comprises England', Scotland', and Wales'. The monarch of tlie United Kingdom of Great Britain^ and Ireland^ is Queen^ Victoria, who was born* on the 24th of May, 1819. She is the daughter of the Duke of Kent, son of George III. She ascended the throne on (a) the death of William IV. in 1837. She has to (pour) assist her in the government of the country a parliament which meets once a year at Westminster. When she appeared before (le) parliament for the first time. Queen Victoria declared that she would place her trust in the wisdom of her parliament and the love of her people, and she has not failed to keep this promise. Having thus early won the hearts of all her subjects, she has retained their affection during a long reign of more than' sixty years. Queen Victoria is a^ widow ; her husband, Prince^ Albert of Saxe-Coburg- Gotha, whom she married in 1840, died in 1861, much regretted by the Queen and the people. • § 833, 1. *§ 338,8. i§827. * § eat Hie. •S412.1,6. «|8a(\& EXERCISE LVIII, a. There was^ in the city of Macon, a parrot which had learned to^ say continually : " Who is there ? Who is there V This parrot escaped one day from its cage in the garden, and soon^ flew into a wood near by, where a peasant saw it, and began to^ chase it. The peasant had never seen a parrot in (de) all his life. He approached* the tree where the bird was, and was going to^ kill the poor bird with his gun. At that moment the parrot began to^ repeat the usual question : "Who is there? Who is there?" The peasant, terrified at these words, let his gun fall^ from his hands. Then taking his hat oflp, he said, very respectfully : " My dear sir, I pray you to^ excuse me, I though that it was a bird." 250. t A 970 A *§413. 48 QOA •§278,6. « § 230, 6, o and 7. f280,a 25 386 I EXERCISES LIX-LX, a. EXERCISE LIX. a. The unknowni author of ''Beowulf" was not a2 native of f^fu'^r'T '"^ t^ ^''^ ^^ ^^'^ ^^""S line of English3 poets is lyhul^r""' K^*^^ 'f' "^ ^ P^^"^ «*°ry'^ the way in whieh4 C^dmon became a^ poet. He was already almost an^ old man before he knew anything^ of the art of poetry. At the feasts, in those days, everybody used to sing« in tirn to^ amuse the company, but Credmon used to leave^ the table before the harp was given^ to him. One evening, when he had done thus he went to the stable and lay down, after having^ cared for the cattle, because, you must know, he was only a farm-servant in the monastery at Whitby. As he sleptio, some one appeared to him, and said, -Ca^dmon, sing a song to me. - 1 cannot" sing," he replied, " and that is why I left the feast." "Nevertheless," was the answer, "you .nust '"'^ *? ISu "^^"' ^^^< ^«^^^d C^dmon, "what shall J T^ 12 ., mu''^^^'" '■''P^^^^^' " ^^^g ^he beginning of created things Thereupon he made some verses, which he still remembered when he awoke. The Abbess Hilda, hearing of his dream, believed (that) the grace of God had been given him, and made him a.^ monk. » § 352, 1, (3). ='§330,3. » § 352, 1, (2). * § 398. ' § 282, 2. «§405, 4, ffl. »§241, 2, a. « § 268, 2. » § 282, 4. "§258, 1. • ' § 230, 4. •2 §321. EXERCISE LX, a. A miser wenti one day to markets, and bought^ someS fine apples. He carriedi them home, arranged^ them carefully in his cupboard and used to go^ and look at them almost every day, but woulds not eat any until they began to spoil. l^:verv time he did eat one he regretted it. But he had a son, a young school-boy, who liked apples; and one day, with a comrade he found the miser's treasure. I do not know how he found the key of the cupboard ; but he did«, and you may imagine how many apples they ate. When they had' finished the apples, the old father came, and caught them. How angrys he was! How he shouted at them! "Wretches' where are my beautiful apples? You shall both be hanged i You have eaten them all ! " His son replied : " Do not be a a EXERCISES LXI-LXII, a. 387 angry, fatlier^ ! You only eat the bad apples ; we have not touched (a) those; we have eaten the good ones, and left you yours." > § 260. * § 331, ex. 4. » § 324, 1. ♦ § 258, 2. » § 265, 1, 6. « § 256. ' § 262, 3. « § 350, a. S 376, 4. EXERCISE LXI, a. A hungryi fox was one day looking for^ a poultry-yard. It was late in the afternoon, and, as he was passing^ a farm- house, he saw* a cock and some hens which had^ gone up into a tree for the night. He drew near*, and invited* them to^ come down and'' rejoice with him on account of a new treaty of peace which had been formed between the animals. The cock said he was^ very glad of it, but that he did not intend^ to^ come down before the next morning. "But," said he, "I see two dogs coming^^ ; I have no doubt they will be^^ glad to^2 celebrate the peace with you." Just then the fox remem- bered that he had business^^ elsewhere, and, bidding the cock good-bye, began* to run. " Why do you run 1 " said the cock, " If the animals have made a peace, the dogs won't hurt you. I know them, they are good, loyaP* dogs, and would not harm any one." " Ah," said the fox, " I am afraid they have^^ not yet heard the news." i§ 352, 1,(3). 2 §258,1,; §296,3. » § 258, 1. ♦ § 260. -§229; §262,2. « § 279, 6. ' § 456, 2. « § 2.'>8, 5. 3 § 280, 2, a. »o§287, 3. 1 > § 269, 5. 12 §356. »''§323. »♦§ 352,3. »6§269, 4, a. EXERCISE LXII, a. A woodman, who was cutting^ wood on the bank of a river, let^ his axe fall^ into the water. He at once* began^ to^ pray [to] the gods to'"' find it for him. Mercury appeared^ and asked^ him what was^ the matter. "I have lost my axe," said2 he. Having heard this, Mercury dived^ into the water, and brought^ up a golden axe. "Is this^ yours?" "No," said the man. Next time Mercury brought up a silver one. "Is this one yours?" "No," said^ the chopper again. The third time Mercury brought up an iron one, which the man recognized, as soon as he saw2 jt '< It is yours," said the god, "and for your honesty I shall give you the other two also." J8 258, 1. 2 §260. ••' § 230, 6, a, and 7. » § 279. 6. ' § 258, 5. « § 236, 2. ' § 413. <•■ § 280, 6. 388 EXERCISES LXIII-LXV, a. EXERCISE LXIII. a. Two men were travel lingi togetlier, when they saw2 a bear coming outa of the forest. The one climbed into a tree, and tried to4 conceal himself in the branches. The other, when he saw that the bear would ( = was going to) attack him, threw himself upon the ground, and, when the bear came up, he ceased to"* breathe, for it is said--^ that a bear will not touch« a dead ' body. When the bear had« gone, his companion came down, and asked : "What was it that the bear was saying to you?" His friend replied: "He advised me not'' to travel with a friend who runs away at the approach of danger^o." » § 258, 1. »§260. •^ § 287, 3. ♦ § 280, 6. * § 241, 2, a. « § 296, 5. ' § 352, 1, (3). * § 262, 3. » 8 416, a. '"§321. 'tXERCISE LXIV, a. A well-knowni Englishs actor, travelling to Birmingham by tlie Great Westerns railway the other day, on approaching* Banbury, began to feel hungry, and determined to have one of the buns for which the town is famous. The train having stopped, he called a boy, gave him six- pence, and asked him to get "two Banburys, ' promising him one of the t^o for his trouble. Just as the train was about to start, the boy rushed up to • the carriage in which the impatient actor was seated, and offering him three pence, exclaimed : " Here's your change, sir." " Bother the change ; where's the bun," roared the hun^^rv actor. " ^ "There was only one left," replied the boy, "and I'm eating that ! " ' § 352, 1, (3). «§ 352, 1,(2). •■» § 330, 4, c, note. ' § 296, 1. EXERCISE LXV, a. Under a magnificent walnut-tree near the village, two little boys found a walnut. " It belongs to me," said the one, "for it wasi 12 who was the first to see it ( -- who have seen it the first)." "No, it belongs to me," exclaimed the other, "for it v/as 12 wlio picked it up." Thereupon there^ arose between EXERCISES LXVI-LXVII, a 389 them a violent ciuarrel. ** I am going to make peace"* between you," said to tliem a third hoy, wlio was passing at that moment. The latter placed himself between the two claim- ants, opened the walnut, and pronounced this sentence: "One of the shells belongs to him'' who was the first to see the walnut ; the other to him^ who picked it up ; as to the kernel, I keep it for the costs of the court. That's how lawsuits'* generally end," added he, laughing. '§257,3,6. '§372,3. ■•'8 252,2. ♦§321. ''§381. EXERCISE LXVI, a. Many years ago^ there^ lived in the city of Paris a cele- brated^ physician who was very fond of animals. One day a friend of his* brought to his house a favourite'* dog, whose leg had been broken, and asked him if he could do anything for the poor creature. The kind doctor examined the wounded^ animal, and, prescribing a treatment for him, soon*' cured him, and received the warm thanks of his friend, who set a very high value upon his dog. Not very long afterwards, the doctor was in his room busy studying^. He thought^ he heard a noise at the door, as if some animal was scratching in order to be let^ in. For some time he paid no attention to the noise, but continued studying!*^. At last, however, he rose up and opened the door. To his great astonishment he saw enter the dog which he had cured, and with him another dog. The latter also had a broken^ leg, and was able to move only with much difficulty. The dog which the surgeon had cured had brought his friend to his benefactor, in order that he, too, might be^^ healed ; and, as well as he could, he made the doctor^^ under- stand that this was what he wanted. » §250,4. 2 § 252, 2. 3 § 851. ♦ § 377, 3. <>§ 352, 1,(3). « § 413. ' § 279, 2. « § 458, 3. "§241, 2, a. »'>§279, 6. " §271,2, »2§230, 6, &. EXERCISE LXVII, a. There was once a cat who was a^ great enemy of the rats. He had eaten a great many^, and they were much afraid of him. So the chiefs of the rats called a meeting to^ discuss they should do to'^ rid themselves of him. A great S^ I 390 EXERCISE LXVIII, a. 1, 1 t many plans were proposed, but after a little diHCJssion they were all abandoned. At last a young rat, who thought him- self very clever, rose and said : " Do not despair n>y friends, I have not yet proposei. a plan. A splendid idea occurs to me ; I know what we cun do. We can, if we are economical, soon save enough money to^ buy a little bell. This we can attach to the neck of our old enemy, and, if ho approaches, we can'' flee to (clans) a place of safety." The young rats all applauded the idea, but one of the old [ones], who up to this time had .said nothing, gravely^ asked the one who liad made the speech if he would promise to put the bell on the cat. The young rat blushed, and said he would think of it". The meeting broke up shortly after, and the rats dispersed without doing anything^. » § 330, 3. *§ 367, 2,(1). 'I § 282, 2. * § 263, 2. §413. §3G8. ' § 405, 4, a. EXERCISE LXVni, a. Long ago^ the frogs, tired of havingS a republic, resolved to^ ask Jupiter to send them a king. Jupiter di § 250, 4. ♦ § 278, 6. ^ § 402, 1. * 8 280. 2. » 8 296. 2. » S 9m. 1 »§280, 6. •§258,1. » § 282, 2. 10 S 970 1 » ' § 459, 3. I 2 fi 001 • Arin i 9 uux I •T\j£t^ i. EXERCISES LXIX-LXX, a. EXERCISE LXIX, a. 891 The two youngest of my children were already in bod and ttsleep, the third had^ gone out, but at nty return I found him .sitting beside my gate, weeping'^ very sore. I asked him the reason. " FathorV «aid he, " I took tliis morning from"* my mother, without her knowinij;^ it, one of those three apples you I ought her, and I kept" it a long while ; but, as I was playin^. sr .^e time ago^ with my little brother in the street, a slave that went^ by snatched it out of my hands, and carried it oflF ; I ran after him asking for it, and, besides, told him that it belonged to my mother, who was ill, and that you had taken a fortnight's journey to fetch it ; but all in vain, he would^ not give it back. And because I still followed him, crying out, he stopped and beat me, and then ran away as fast as he could, from one street to another, till at length I lost sight of him. I have since that been walking outside the town, expecting your return, to pray you, dear father, not to tell my mother [of] it, lest it should make her worse." And when he had^^ said these words, he began weeping again more bitterly than ever. • § 229. a § 286, 2. •^ § 376, 4. ♦ § 296, 4. " § 271, 5. « § 259, 2. ■> § 250, 4. « § 258, 1. "§265,1,6. «o§262, 3. EXERCISE LXX, a. A celebrated Italian^ painter had told his pupils to^ ask the name of any (tout) person who might come^ to his house during his absence in the city. One day three gentlemen came to'* see the painter, and the latter was not at home. One of the pupils, whose name was John, opened the door for them^, said that his master was not in, and let them depart without asking their names. When the master returned and*' heard of the three gentlemen, he asked '^ John who they were. John could say nothiiig but, " I do not know, sir." The paiL.ter got angry, but John, with a few strokes of his pen- cil, drew (/aire) the portrait of the three, ad gave it to his master, wlio immediately^ recognized them. The artist admired the skill of the young man so much that he the drawing, and kept it afterwards among his most pre. ■ possessions. It is needless to'-' add that he pardoned the pupil. i § -d-M, 1, (2). 2 § 280, 6. ••* § 270, 1. * § 2V8, 6. ° § 302, 2. « § 458, 2. • § 290, 2. » § 413. ■J § 384, 1, a. y 392 EXEKCLSES LXXI-LXXII, O. EXERCISE LXXI,a. no„ l.y. A ,„ar. vvns passing, tl.o ni^^l.t, at an inn. Ho had d askcd^ hun vyliy he had left tho pla.'e. He replied because my neighbours were so (h-sagtoeable and cJisob 1!^; H^noTn! '' T^'f f "■' 'T" '^^^''^ "^ "«i.^'l'l)ours where you 1 e g,),ng. Ihe following day another traveller came from the same place. H- told U.e landlord that he was oblige o eave the place where he had been living, and that it caused kInd'anS o?r'-'' '^'V'f 'r "^'^"''•--' ^^^^ ImV be;n so h m t^nt / "''"^n ?? ^^""^'^""^^ encouraged him by telling:^ hirn that he would find exactly the same sort of neighbours wnere he was going. ° • § 230, 1. " § 296, 2. »§5^, 3. EXERCISE LXXII, a. hiZ^T ^t''''^\ ^^ '''J"'"^' ^ ^^«' «^t^« ^^'7 idle. Even in the] class I used to playi with boys as idle as myself. We Xi^^ut^clererly'^ '''' ^''^"^^ ^^ ^^^-^ '^' '- ^^^ ^^ vonrwT'* """^ ^1^"^^'" '""'^ ^^' "You must not raise your4 eyes from your books. You do not know what you lose by Idleness^ Study while you are young; you will not be able to study when you are« old. If any one sees another boy, who is not studying, let him tell me' " ^ "Now," said I to myself, -there is Fred Smith, I do not like him. If I see that he is not studying, I shall telF " and I told the master what I had seen. "Indeed ! " saM h- T Tr ^^ IZ""^"^!!' ^^^^ ^^^^^" "If yo^ please, si., ' saxd I, "I sawo him." ' O you saw^ him, and where ^ere your eyes when you saw» him ?" ^ I saw the other boys laugh^, and I wasio ashamed, for the master smiled, j § 280, 2. ■■' § 280, 3. ♦ § 352, 1, (1). » § 241, 2. • § 321. ' 8 269, 4. " § too, 5, a, note. • § 275. •» § 270, 2. EXERCISE LXXIV, a. At a time when ancient art was attracting so much atten- tion in Italy that modern arti was being neglected2, Michael Angelo had resort to a stratagem in order to teach the critics the tolly of judging such thincrs according to fashion^ or reputation^ He made a statue which represented^ a beautiful girl asleep4, and, breakings off an arm, buried the statue in a place where excavations were being madel It was soon found, and was lauded by critics^ and by the public as a valuable relic of antiquity!. When Michael Angelo thou-ht the time opportune, he produced the broken arm, and, to the great mortification of the critics, revealed himself as the sculptor. * § 321. s § 241, 2. » § 258, 3. ' § 352, 1, (3). EXERCISE LXXV, a. Had you seen us, Mr. Harley, when we were turned out of -ifl ' ■" ^ ' " ' South=hilI, I am sure you would liavo wept at that sight. Y ou il Ml til •Il 394 EXERCISE LXXV, a. remember old Trusty, my dog ; I shall never forget it while I live (fut.) ; the poor creature was old and almost blind, and could scarce crawl after us to the door ; he went, however, as far as the gooseberry-bush, which, as you may remember, stood on the left side of the yard ; he was wont to bask in the sun there ; when he had reached that spot, he stopped ; we went on ; I called him ; he wagged his tail, but did not stir ; I called again ; he lay down ; I whistled, and cried " Trusty " ; he gave a howl, and died ! I could have lain down and died ( = should have liked to lie down and die) too ; but God gave me strength to live for my children. Il ■li i! FRENCH READER. I. PAROLES D'UN CROYANT, CHAP. VII. Lamennais (1782-1854). Lorsqu'un arbre est seul, il est battu des vents et ddpouill^ de ses feuilles; et ses branches, au lieu de s'^lever, s'abaissent comme si elles cherchaient. la terre. Lorsqu'une plante est seule, ne trouvant point d'abri contre 1 ardeur du soleil, elle languit et se desseche, et ...eurt. 5 Lorsque I'hommt. est seul, le vent de la puissance le conrbe vers la terre, et I'ardeur de la convoitise des grands de ce monde absorbe la seve qui le nourrit. Ne soyez done point comme la plante et comme I'arbre qui sont seuls : mais unissez-vous les uns aux autres, et appuyez- 10 vous, et abritez-vous, mutuellement. Tandis que vous serez de'sunis, et que chacun ne songera qu'k SOI, vous n'avez rien a esperer, que souffrance, et malheur et oppression. ' Qu'y a-t-il de plus faible que le passereau, et de plus desarmd 15 que Ihirondelle? Cependant quand i)arait I'oiseau de proie, les hirondelles et les passereaux parviennent a le chasser, en se rassemblant autour de lui, et le poursuivant tous ensemble. Prenez exemple sur le passereau et sur I'hirondelle. Celui qui so separe de ses freres, la crainte le suit quand il 20 marche, s'assied pres de lui quand il repose, et ne le quitte pas meme durant son jommeil. Done, si I'on vous demande : " Corabien ^tes-vous 1 " r^pon- dez: "Nous sommes un, car nos freres, c'est nous, et nous c'est nos freres." ' ^ Dieu n'a fait ni petits ni grands, ni maitres ni esclaves, ni rois ni sujets : il a fait tous les hommes ^gaux. Mais, entre les hommes, quelques-uns ont plus d^- force ou de corps, ou d'esprit, ou de volont^, et ce sont ceux-la qui cherchent a _.-..„„j,, .,!,., .,,., -tat^r^o, i^jiaqjc ioiguuii uu icil con voitise' etouf- 30 lent en eux Tamour de leurs fr6res. 395 Iti \'i !i I 396 FRENCH READER. Et Dieu savaifc qu'il en serait ainsi, et c*est ponrquoi il a coimnandd aux honimes do s'aiiner, afin qu'ils fussont uuis, et que les faibles ne toinl)asse!it point sous I'oppression des forts. Oar jelui qui est plus fort qu'un seul sera inoiiis fort que 5 deux, et celiii qui est plus fort que deux sera iiio'ns fort que quatre; et ainsi les faibles ne craindront rien lorsquo, s'aimant les uns les autres, ils seront unis vdritablenient. Un homnie voyageait dans la moiita<,'ne, et I'l arriva en un heu ou un gros roclier, ayant nniU sur lo clieniiii, lo remplissait 10 tout entier, et liors du cliemin 11 n'y avait point d'autre issue, ni a gauche, ni a droite. ^ Or, cot homine voyant qu'il ne pouvait continuer son voyage a cause du rocher, essaya do le mouvoir pour se fairo un pas- sage, et il se fatigua beaucoup a ce travail, et tous ses efibrts 16 f urent vains. Ce que voyant, il s'assit ploin de tristesse et dit : "Que sera-ce de moi lorsque la nnit viendra et nie suiprendra dans cette solitude, sans nourrituro, sans abri, sans aucune defense, k riieure ou les betes forocos sortent pour chorchor leur proie?" 20 Et conime il (^tait al)sorbe dans cette pensoe, un autre voya- geur survint, et celui-ci, ayant fait ce qu'avait fait 1© premier et s'(^tant trouvd aussi inipuissant a remuer le rocher, s'assit en silence et baissa la tete. Et apres colui-ci, il en vint plusieurs autres, et aucun ne put 25raouvoir le rocher, et.leur crainte a tous etait grande. Enfin I'un d'eux dit aux autres: "Mes freres, prions notre Pere qui est dans les cieux : peut-etre qu'il aura pitid de nous dans cette d(^tresse." Et cette parole fut ecoutee, et ils priferent de cceur le Pfere 30 qui est dans les cieux. Et quand ils eurent prio, celui qui avait dit : " Prions," dit encore : "Mes freres, ce qu'aucun de nous n'a pu faire seul, qui sait si nous ne le ferons pas tous ensemble ? " Et ils se leverent, et tous ensemble ils poussferent le rocher et 35 le rocher ceda, et ils poursuivirent leur route en paix. Le voyageur c'est I'homme, le voyage c'est la vie, le rocher ce sont les misores qu'il rencontre a chaque pas sur sa route. Aucun homme ne saurait soulever seul ce rocher, mais Dieu en a mesurd le poids de maniere qu'il n'arrete jamais ceux qui 40 Yoy agent ensemble. FRENCH READER. 397 III 2. PAROLES D'UN CROYANT, CHAP. XVII. LAMENNAia (1782-1854). Deux hommes dtaient voisins, et chacun d'eux avait uiie femrne et plusieurs petits enfarits, et son seul travail pour los faire vivre. Et I'uri (le ces deux homines s'inquit'tait en lui memo, disaiit: " Si je nieurs ou que je toinbe inalade, que deviendront nia femino et mes eiifants 1 " Et cette pensee iie lo quittait point, et elle rongeait son coeur comme un ver ronge le fruit ou il est cache. Or, bien que la merne pensoe fut venue egalenient a I'autre pfere, il ne s'y t^tait point arreted; "car, disait-il, Dieu, qui oori-io nait toutes ses creatures et qui veille sur elles, veillera aussi sur moi, et sur ma femme, et sur mos enfants." Et celui-ci vivait tran(}ui]le, tandis que le premier ne goutait pas un instant de repos ni de joie interieurement. Un jour qu'il travaillait aux champs, triste et abattu k cause 15 de sa crainte, il vit quelques oiseaux entrer dans un buisson, en sortir, et puis bientot y ^evenir encore. Et, s'dtant approche, il vit deux nids poses cote a c6te, et dans chacun plusieurs petits nouvellement ^clos et encore sans plumes. 20 Kt quand il fut retourn^ k son travail, de temps en temps il levait les yeux, et regardait ces oiseaux qui allaient et venaient portant la nourriture a leurs petits. Or, voila qu'au moment ou I'une des meres rentrait avec sa becquee, un vautour la saisit, Tenleve, et la pauvre mere se25 d^battant vainement sous sa serre, jetait des cris perqants. A cette vue, I'homme qui travaillait sentit son ame plus troublee qu'auparavant ; " car, pensait-il, la mort de la mere, c'est la mort des enfants. Les miens n'ont que moi non plus. Que deviendront-ils si je leur manque?" 3( Et tout le jour il fut sombre et triste, et la nuit il ne dormit point. Le lendemain, de retour aux champs, il se dit : " Je veux voir les petits de cette pauvre mhre : plusieurs sans doute ont dej^ p^ri." Et il s'achemina vers le buisson. 86 Et, regardant, il vit les petits bien portants ; pas un ne sem- blait avoir pati. 11 898 FRENCH READER. Et, ceci Tayant ^tonnd, il se caclia pour observer ce qui se passerait. ^ Et, apr^s un peu de temps, il entendit un leger cri, et il apergut la secondc mere rapportant en hate la nourriture 6 quelle avait recueillie, et elle la distribua a tous les petits indistinctement, et il y en eut pour tous, et les ornhelins ne furent point delaissds dans leur misere. Et le pere qui s'e'tait d4i\e de la Providence raconta le soir a 1 autre pere ce qu'i] avait vu. JO Et celui-ci lui dit: "Pourquoi s'inqui^ter? Jamais Dieu nabandonne les siens. Son amour a des secrets que nous ne connaissons point. Croyons, esp^rons, aimons, et poursuivons notre route en paix. ^ "Si je meurs avant vous, vous serez le pere de mes enfants: 15 SI vous mourez avant moi, je serai le pere des votres. "Et si I'un et I'autre, nous mourons avant qu'ils soient en age de pourvoir eux-memes h. leurs necessittis, ils auront pour pere le P^re qui est dans les cieux." Mflil il >, I' I t t r 3. LE MAfTRE CHAT OU LE CHAT B0TT6. Perrault (1628-1703). XJn meunier ne laissa pour tous biens a trois enfants qu'il 20 avait, que son inoulin, son ane et son chat. Les partac/es furent bientot faits; ni le notaire, ni le piocureur n'y invent appeles. lis auraient eu bientot mange tout le pauvre patri- moine. L'aine eut le moulin, le second eut I'ane, et le plus jeune n'eut que le chat. Ce dernier ne pouvait se consoler 25 d avoir un si pauvre lot. ''Mes fr^res, disait-i], pourront gagner leur vie honnetement en se mettant ensemble; pour moi, lorsque j'aurai mang^ mon chat, et que je me serai fkit un manchon de sa peau, il faudra que je meure de faim." Le Chat, qui entendait ce discours, mais qui n'en fit pas semblant solui dit d'un air pose et s«^rieux : "Ne vous affligez point, mon maitre, vous n'avez qu'a me donner un sac et me faire faire une paire de bottes pour aller dans les brou.ssaiUes, et vous verrez que vous n'etes pas si mal partag^ que vous croyez." FRENCH READER. 399 Quoique le maitre du Chat ne fit pas grand fond 1^-dessus, il lui avait vu faire tant de tours de souplesse pour prendre dea rats et des souris, corame quand il se pendait par les pieds, ou qu'il se cachait dans la farine pour faire le mort, qu'il ne desespera pas d'en etre secouru dans sa rnisere. Lorsque le 5 Chat eut ce qu'il avait deinande, il se botta bravement, et, mettant son sac k son cou, il en prit les cordons avec ses pattes de devant, et s'en alia dans une garenne ou il y avait grand nombre de lapins. II mit du son et des lacerons dans son sac, et, s'etendant comme s'il eut ^t^ mort, il attendit quei quelque jeune lapin, peu instruit encore des ruses de ce monde, vint se fourrer dans son sac pour manger ce qu'il y avait mis. A peine fut-il couch^, qu'il eut contentement; un jeune etourdi de lapin entra dans son sac, et le maitre Chat, tirant aussitdt ses cordons, le prit et le tua sans misericorde. Tout glorieux 15 de sa proie, il s'en alia chez le roi et demanda k lui parler. On le fit monter k Fappartement de Sa Majesty, ou ^tant entr^, il fit une grande reverence au roi, et lui dit : " Voil^., sire, un lapin de garenne que M. le marquis de Carabas (c'^tait le nom qu'il prit en gre de donner a son maitre) m'a charg^ de 20 vous presenter de sa part. — Dis k ton maitre, repondit le roi, que je le remercie, et qu'il me fait plaisir." TJne autre fois, il alia se cacher dans un bl^, tenant toujours son sac ouvert, et lorsque deux perdrix y furent entries, il tira les cordons et les prit toutes deux. II alia ensuite les presenter au roi, comme 25 il avait fait du lapin de garenne. Le roi re9ut encore avec plaisir les deux perdrix, et lui fit donner pour boire. Le Chat continua ainsi, pendant deux ou trois mois, de porter de temps en temps au roi du gibier de la chasse de son maitre. Un jour qu'il sut que le roi devait aller a la promenade sur le bord de 30 la riviere, avec sa fille, la plus belle princesse du monde, il dit k son maitre : " Si vous voulez suivre mon conseil, votre for- tune est faite; vous n'avez qu'^ vous baigner dans la riviere, k I'endroit que je vous montrerai, et ensuite me laisser faire." Le marquis de Carabas fit ce que son chat lui conseillait, sans 35 savoir a quoi cela serait bon. Dans le temps qu'il se baignait, le roi vint a passer, et le Chat se mit k crier de toute sa force : " Au secoursj au secours ! voila M. le marquis de Carabas qui se noie ! " A ce cri, le roi mit la tete a la portiere, et recon- naissaiiD le v^iijit qui jUi tivaiiy jippui te uanu uu i^^is uu gi«jici, -rv il ordonna k ses gardes qu'on allat vite au secours de M. le ' ''! 11 I* 400 I I If ■If Hi'';- ifiL'!'. ' FRENCH READER. aue dan, « r ' *' ^W-ochant du carrosse, dit au roi :;, fiii« ^ -1 ^^ « "^^" ®*^ "^len fait de sa personnel ui eut pas plus tot jete deux ou trois re:v^t 1' FRENCH READER. 401 pas voulu passer si pr^s de son ch&teau sans avoir I'honneurde lui faire la rdv^rence. L'ogre le re9ut aussi civilement que le peut un ogre, et le fit reposer. « On m'a assur^, dit le Chat, que vous aviez le don de vous changer en toutes sortes d'ani! iTn?""' A^J^l T' ^^V'^^> P'''' exemple, vous transformer en 6 hon, en ^Idphant.-Cela est vrai, rdpondit brusquement I'ogre, et pour vous le montrer, vous allez me voir devenir lion." li Chat fut SI effrayd de voir un lion devant lui, qu'il gagna aussi- t6t les gouttiferes non sans peine et sans p^ril, k cause de ses bottes, qui ne yalaient rien pour marcher sur les tuiles. Quel- lol que temps apr^s, le Chat ayant vu que I'ogre avait quitt^ sa premiere forme, descendit et avoua qu'il avait eu bien peur. On m a assurd encore, dit le Chat, mais je ne saurais le croire que vous aviez aussi le pouvoir de prendre la forme aes plus petits animaux, par exemple de vous changer en unis rat, en une souris : je vous avoue que je tiens cela tout k fait impossible.— Impossible ! reprit I'ogre, vous allez le voir ;" et en meme temps il se changea en une souris, qui se mit k courir sur le plancher. Le Chat ne I'eut pas plus t6t apercue, qu'il se jeta dessus et la mangea. Cependant le roi, qui vit en20 passant le beau chateau de I'ogre, voulut entrer dedans. Le Chat qui entendit le bruit du carrosse qui passait sur le pont- levis, courut au-devant, et dit au roi : " Votre majesty soit la b-cnvenue dans ce chateau de M. le marquis de Carabas!— t ; iment, monsieur le marquis, s'^eria le roi, ce chateau est25 encore k vous !_ II ne se peat rien de plus beau que cette cour et tous ces Mtiments qui I'environnent; voyons les dedans, s'ii vous plait. Le marquis donna la main k la jeune princesse, et, suivant le roi qui montait le premier, lis entr^rent dans une grande salle, oii ils trouv^rent une magnifique collation 30 que 1 ogre avait fait preparer pour ses amis, qui devaient venir le voir ce mgme jour-la, mais qui n'avaient pas ose y entrer sachant que le roi y dtait. Le roi, charm^ des bonnes qualite's de M le marquis de Carabas, de meme que sa fille, qui en 6tait folle, et voyant les grands biens qu'il posse'dait, lui dit. 35 apr^s avoir bu cinq ou six coups: "II ne tiendra qu'a vous monsieur le marquis, que vous ne soyez mon gendre " Le marquis, faisant de grandes r^vdrences, accepta I'honneur que lui faisait le roi : et, dk. le m^me jour, il ^pousa la princesse. Le chat devmt grand seigneur, et ne courut plus apr^s les4o souns que pour se divertir. r f 26 til 402 FRENCH READER. ■ iili Jf p IV 4. UN NEZ GEL6. Dumas (1803-1870). ' Un jour, k Saint-Petersbourg, je me d^cidai de faire mes courses en me promenant. Je m'armai de pied en cap centre les hostilites du froid ; je m'enveloppai d'une grande redingote d'astracan, je m'enfon^ai un bonnet fourre sur les oreilles, je 5roulai autour de mon cou une cravate de caclieinire, et je ra'aventurai dan? la rue, n'ayant de toute ma personne que le l)out du nez k Tair, D'abord tout alia a merveille ; je m'dtonnai mOme du pen d'impression que me causait ie froid, et je riais tout bas de lotous les contes que j'en avais entendu faire; j'etais, au reste, enchants que le hasard m'eut donn^ cette occasion pour m'accli- raater. N^anmoins, comme les deux premiers ecoliers chez lesquels je me rendais n'etaient point chez eux, je commengais a trouver que le hasard faisait trop bien les choses, lorsque je 15 crus remarquer que ceux que je croisais me regardaient avec une certaine inquietude, mais cependant sans me rien dire. Bient6t un monsieur, plus causeur, a ce qu'il parait, que les autres, me dit en passant : iV'oss / Comme je ne savais pas un mot de russe, je crus que ce n'etait pas la peine de m'arreter 20 pour un monosyllabe, et je continuai mon chemin. Au coin > de la rue des Pois, je rencontrai un cocher qui passait ventre k terre en conduisant son traineau ; mais, si rapide que fut sa course, il se crut oblige de me parler k son tour et me cria : Noss ! noss ! Enfin, en arrivant sur la place de I'Amiraute, je 25 me trouvai en face d'un moujik qui ne me cria rien du tout, mais qui, ramassant une poignee de neige, se jeta sur moi, et avant que j'eusse pu me debarrasser de tout mon attirail, se mit a me debarbouiller la figure et a me frotter particuliere- ment le nez de toute sa force. Je trouvai la plaisanterie assez 30 mediocre, surtout par le temps qu'il faisait. et tirant un de mes bras d'une de mes poches, je lui allongeai un coup de poing qui I'envoya rouler a dix pas. Malheureusement ou heureuse- ment pour moi, deux paysans passaient en ce moment qui, apr^s m'avoir regarde un instant, se jeterent sur moi, et mal- 35gre ma d(^fense, me maintinrent les bras, tandis que mon enrage moujik ramassait une autre poignee de neige, et, comme s'il ne voulait pas en avoir le dementi, se precipitait de nouveau sur moi. Cette fois, profitant de I'impossibilite oii FRENCH READER. 403 j'dtais de me d^fendre, il se mifc k recommencer ses frictions. Mais, si j'avais les bras pris, j 'avals la langue libre : croyant que j'etais la victirae de quelque m^prise ou de quelque guet- apens, j'appelai de toute ma for.;e au secours. Un officier accourut et me deraanda en franQavs k qui j'en avais. s "Comment, monsieur!" m'^criai-je en faisant un dernier effort et en me d^barrassant de mes trois hommes, qui, de 1 'air le plus tranquille du monde, se remirent k continuer leur cherain, Tun vers la Perspective, et les deux autres du cote du quai Anglais, " vous ne voyez done pas ce que ces droles me lo faisaienti — Que vous faisaient-ils done? — Mais ils me frot- taient la figure avec de la neige. Est-ce que vous trouveriez cela une plaisanterie de bon gout par hasard, avec le temps qu'il fait? — Mais, monsieur, ils vous rendaient un enorme service, me r^pondit mon interlocuteur en me regardant comme 15 nous disons, nous autres Frangais, dans le blanc des yeux. — Comment cela?— Sans doute, vous aviez le nez gele. — Miseri- corde ! ra'dcriai-je en portant la main a la partie menacc^e. — Monsieur, dit un passant en s'adressant k Tinterlocuteur, mon- sieur I'officier, je vous pr^viens que votre nez gele. — Merci, 20 monsieur," dit I'officier, comme si on I'eut prdvenu de la chose la plus naturelle du monde. Et se baissant, il ramassa une poign^e de neige et se rendit k lui-meme le service que m'avait rendu le pauvre moujik que j'avais si brutalement recompense de son obligeance. 25 " C'est-a-dire alors, monsieur, que, sans cet homme . . . — Vous n'auriez plus de nez, continua I'officier en se frottant le sien. "Alois, monsieur, permettez. . ." Et je me mis k courir apr^s mon moujik, qui, croyant que je voulais achever de I'assommer, se mit k courir de son c6t^, so de sorte que, comme la crainte est naturellement plus .-^gile que la reconnaissance, je ne I'ousse probablement jamais rat- trap^ si quelques personnes, en le voyant fuir et en me voyant le poursuivre, ne I'eussent pris pour un voleur, et ne lui eussent barr^ !e chemin. Lorsque j'arrivai, je le trouvai parlant avec 35 une grande volubility afin de faire comprendre qu'il n'etait coupable que de trop de philanthropie ; dix roubles que je lui donnai expliqu^rent la fhose. Le moujik me baisa les mains, et un des assistants, qui parlait fran^ais, m'invita ^ faire d^sor- mais plus d'attention k mon nez. L'invitation ^tait inutile ; 40 pendant tout le reste de ma course, je ne le perdis pas de vue. — By kind permission of the Publisher, ^almsLnn Levy, 3 rue Auber, Paris. ,H', ii'i Ce t 11 ■■ 404 FRENCH READER S LA PIPE DE JEAN BARl Dumas (1803-1870). Jtmn BoA't ^fcaifc de Dunkerque, pays huraide et froid, o^ la pipo est non seulernent une coinpagne, mais uii poele. II ^tait petit-hls et neveu de corsaires, et fut corsaire lui-nienu; jusqu'a l^poque oh Louis XIV I'appela dans la marine militaire. 6 A cette ^poque, Jean Bart avait d^ik qu.irante et un ans; il dtait done trop tard pour qu'il changeat ses habitudes de jeunesse. Ceperulant, ceux qui voudront y rdfldcliir, demeure- ront parfaitement convaincus que, lorsque Jean Bart alluma sa pipe dans I'anticharabre du roi, ce n'etait pas par ignoranje lode 1 etiquette de Versailles, mais parce qu'il voiilait attirer 1 attention sur lui, de fa^on k ce qu'on fut forcd de le mettre k la porte du palais. Or, eomme, aprfes tout, il dtait chef d escadre et qu'il s'appelait Jean Bart, ce n't^tait pas chose facile de le mettre k la porte, ou d'aller dire k Louis XIV qu'il 16 y avait, porte k porte avec lui, un homme qui furaait. On savait que Jean Bart venait demander au roi une gr&ce, — une grace que le roi avait ddja ref us^e deux fois. On ne faisait pas parvenir au roi les demandes d'audience de Jean Bart ; il fallait que Jean Bart prit le cabinet du roi 20 par surprise. Jean Bart mit de c6t^ ses fameux habits de drap d'or double d'argent, qui faisaient tant de bruit dans les salons de Paris, revetit son simple costume d'officier supt'rieur de la marine, passa seulement k son cou la chaine d'or que le roi lui 25 avait donn^e autrefois en recompense de ses exploits, et se pr^senta k I'antichambre de Sa Majestd, comme s'il avait sa lettre d'admission. ** Monsieur le capitaine de frdgate, demanda Tofficier charg^ d'introduire les solliciteurs pres du roi ; monsieur le capitaine 30 de frdgate, avez-vous votre lettre d'audience? — Ma lettre d'audience? dit Jean Bart; pourquoi faire? Je suis, certes, assez bon ami du roi pour qu'il n'y ait pas besoin de toutes ces niaiseries-lk entre nous. Dites-lui que c'est Jean Bart qui demande k lui parler, et cela suffira. 86 -— Du moment oh vous n'avez pas de lettre d'audience reprit I'officier, personne ne se permettra de vous annoncer. — Mais j'ai besoin qu'on m'annonce, fit Jean Bart, et je ne m'annoncerai pas bien moi-meme 1 T"! FRENCH READER. 405 Et il s'avaiKja vers la porte de communication. facW """ ^^''^ ^'''' '''''" ''^^'^''' "^'^ ^« mou8quetaire de — Est-ce la consigne ? demanda Jean Bart — Cest la consigne, rdpondit le mousquetaire. . — Kespect k la consigne," dit Jean Bart Puis, s'adossant a la boiscrio, il tira une pipe du fond de son Chapeau, la bourca de tabac, bath't le briquet, et I'alluma Les courtisans le regardaient avec stupefaction. d,-f ivfffl'^^"" >''' observer. Monsieur le capitaine de frt5gate, la dit 1 officier, qu'on ne ^unie pas dans I'anticluunbre du roi — Alors, quon no m'y fasse pas attendre; moi, ie fume toujours quand j 'attends. ' '' -Monsieur le capitaine de frtJgate, je vais 6tre oblig^ de vous faire sortir. ""nfeo uo -Avant que j'aie parl^ au roi! fit Jean Bart en riant." Ah ! je vous en d^fie bien." Et, en effet, ce n'^tait pas, commo nous I'avons dit, ch3se facile que de mettre Jean Bart a la porte ; de deux maux alla'dire au vo^" ^^' ^^ '"''*''"^ ^^ '"''"'" dangereux, rofficier2o "Sire, il y a dans votre antichambre un officier de marine qui fume, qui nous d^fie de le faire sortir, et qui nous declare quil entrera ma]gv4 nous." Louis XIV ne se donna pas m6me la peine de chercher. 25 " Je pane que c'est Jean Bart ! " dit-il. L'officier s'inclina. "Laissez-le finir sa pipe, dit Louis XIV, et faites-le entrer " Jean Bart ne finit pas sa pipe ; il la jeta dans la cheminde et selanga vers le cabinet du roi. Mais k peine en eut-ilso Lou^sXIV "^^ '''"'''^^^' '^^"''''^' ^^^P^^tueusement Jean Bart ^tait arriv^ a son but. II se trouvait en face du roi avec la merae adresse qu'il manceuvrait devant les escadres ennemies. II conduisit la conversation a travers les ^cueils 35 les passes, les rochers, ou il voulait I'amener; c'est-^-dire qu ayant commence par se faire faire force compliments sur sa sortie du port de Dunkerque ou il e'tait etroitement bloqu^ par les Anglais ; sur I'incendie de plus de nnatrP-vinr^f- bA^iments ennerais qu'il brula en mer; et enfin sur sa descente'I New- 4, castle,~il mit un genou en terre devant le roi, et finit par lui 406 FRENCH HEADER. 4 P i: m demander la grAce de Keyser, son matelot, oondauiat) k uiort pour avoir tut^ son adversaire en duel, Le roi hesitiiit. Jean Bart, que I'amitid fraternello qu'il portaib b. Keyser 6rendait Eloquent, pria, adjura, conjura ! "Jean Bart, dit Louis XIV, je vous accorde ce que j'ai refust? k Tourville. —Sire, rt^pondit Jean Bart, men pfero, deux do mes frferes, vingt autres membres do raa faniille, sont iiiorts au service do 10 Votre Majestd Vous me donnez aujourd'hui la vie de mon matelot, je vous donne quittance pour cellos dos autres." Et Jean Bart sortit, pleurant comme un enfant, et criq,nt : " Vive le roi ! " h tue-tete. -^^^ -iKe^^J -a ^ ' ' " • ^-^"/f Co fut alors qu'env-^opp^ par tous les courtisans ddsireux de isfaire la cour a un homme qui dtait demeurt^ plus d'une derai- heure en audience privt^e avec Louis XIV, et no sachant com- r.ent sortir de ce cercle vivant qui commenc^-ait a I'dtouflFer, il profita de ce qu'un des courtisans lui deraandait : "Monsieur Jean Bart, comment done etes-vous sorti du 20 port de Dunkerque, bloque comme vous I'dtiez par la flotte anglaise ? — Vous voulez le savoir ? r^pondit-il. — Oui, oui, s't5criferent-ils tous en chceurj cela nous ferait grand plaisir. 26 — Eh bien! vous allez voir. Je suis Jean Bart, n'est-ce pas ? Vous etes la flotte anglaise ] vous mo bloquez dans I'artichambre du roi ; vous m'empechez de sortir. . .Eh bien, vli ! vlan ! piff ! pafF! \o\\k comment je suis sorti ! " Et a chaque exclamation, allongeant un coup de pied ou un 30 coup de poing a celui qui etait en face de lui et I'envoyant tomber sur son voisin, il s'ouvrit un passage jusqu'a la porte. Arrive \k : " Messieurs, dit-il, vdiXk comment je suis sorti du port de Dunkerque." 36 Et il sortit de Tantichambre du roi. — By kind permission of the Publisher, Calmann L^vy, 3 rue Auber, Paris. FRENCH READEIl. 407 6. LA DERNlfeRE CLASSE. Daudet (1840-1897). ^ Ce matin-li j'dtais trfes en retard pour nller h I'c^cole, et javais grand'peur d'etre groiide, d'autant plus (jue M. Hamel nous avait dit qu'il nous interrogerait sur K's participes, et jo nen savais pas le premier mot. Vn moment I'idee me vint do mancpier la classe et de prendre nui course k travers champs. 5 Le toHjps etait si chaud, si clair ! On enUindait les merles sifHer k la lisifcre du bois, et dans e prd Kippert, derriere la scierie, les I'russiens qui faisaient lexercice. Tout c*>i me tentait bien plus que la regie des participes; mais j'eus la force de resister, et je courus bienio vite vers I'ecole. En passant devant la mairie, je vis qu'il y avait du monde arret^ pr^s du petit grillage aux affiches. JJepuis deux ans, cestde la que nous sont venues toutes les raauvaises nouvelles, les batailles perdues, les requisitions, les ordres de la comman- 15 dature ; et je pensai sans m'arreter : " Qu'est-ce qu'il y a encore ? " Alors, coinme je traversais la place en courant, le forgeron Wachter, qui ^tait \k avec son apprenti en train de lire I'affiche, me cria : 20 '• Ne te d(^peclie pas tant, petit ; tu y arriveras toujours assez tot, a ton dcole ! " Je crus qu'il se moquait de moi, et j'entrai tout essouffld dans la petite cour de M. Hamel. D'ordinaire, au commencement de la classe, il se faisait un25 grand tapage qu'oii entendait jusque dans la rue, les pupitres ouverts, fermes, les Ici^-ons qu'on repetait tres haut ensemble en se bouchant les oreilles pour mieux apprendre, et la grosse regie du maitre qui tapait sur les tabNs : " Un pea de silence ' " 3^ Je comptais sur tout ce train pour gagner mon banc sans Stre vu ; mais justen.ent ce jour-la tout etait tranquille, comme un matin de dimanche. Par la fenetre ouverte je voyais mes camarades deja rangt^s k leur place, et M. Hamel, qui passait et repassait avec la terrible regie en fer sous le bras= II fallutss ouvrir la porte eo entrer au milieu de ce grand calme. Vous pensez si j'etais rouge, et si j'avais peur ! 408 FIlP:NCn IlKADER. Eh bien, non. M. llaiiiel mo regarda sans colere et me dit tres (loucomeiit : "Va vito k ta place, mon petit Frantz ; nous alliens com- mencer sans toi." 5 J'enjamhai le banc et jo nj'assis tout do suite k mon pupitre. Alors seuloment, un peu romis do frayeur, je romanjuai que notre maitre avait sa belle redingote veito, son jabot plissd fin et la calotte do soio noire brodde (|u'il ne mettait i\ue les jours d'inspection ou de distribution do pi-ix. Du reste, toute la loclasse avait 4uoK|ue chose d'extraordinaire et de solennol. Mais ce qui me surprit le plus, ce fut de voir au fond de la salle, sur les bancs (jui restaient vides d'habitude, les gens du village assis et silencioux coinme nous, le vieux Hauser avec son tricorno, Tancien maire, I'ancien factour, et puis d'autres ispersonnes encore. Tout ce nionde-la pai-aissait triste ; et Hauser avait apporte un vieil abt^cddaire niang^ aux bords qu'il tenait grand ouvert sur ses genoux, avec ses grosses lunettes posdes en travers des pag«;s. Pendant que je in'c'tonnais de tout cela, M. Hamel dtait 20montd dans sa chaire, et, de la meme voix douce et grave dont il m'avait rec^^u, il nous dit : "Mes enfants, c'est la derniere fois que je vous fais la classe. L'ordre est venu de Berlin de ne plus enseignt , que I'allemand dans les dcoles de I'Alsace et de la Lorraine. ... Le nouveau 25 maitre arrive domain. Aujourd'hui c'est votre deiriiere le(^;on de fran^ais. Je vous prie d'etre bien s.iitentifs." Ces quolques paroles rae boulevers^rent. Ah! les mis^m bles, voil^ ce qu'ils avaient attieh(5 k la mairie : Ma derniere lec^'on de franc^ais ! 80 Et moi (jui savais a peine dcrire ! Je n'apprenJrais done iamairi! II faudrait done en roster 1^! Coinme je m'en vou- iais maintenant du temps perdu, des classes manqu6es a courir les nids ou a faire des glissades sur la Saar ! Mes livres que tout a I'heure encore je trouvais si ennuyeux, si lourds a por- 85ter, ma grammaire, mon histoire sainte, me semblaient de vieux amis ([ui me feraient beaucoup de peine a quitter. C'est corame M. Hamel. L'ide'e (ju'il allait partir, que je ne le verrais plus, me faisait oublier les punitions, les coups de regie. Pauvre homme ! 40 C'est en I'honneur de cette dernifere classe qu'il avait mis ses beaux habits du dimanche, jt maintenant je comprenais pour- FRENCH READER. I ■ 409 qum ces vmux clu village (5ta,ent vonus s'asseoir au bout do la S.1II0. C(.]--i .seinhlait dim (lu'ils vv-gvetUiicnt de i.e pas y otre venua plus .s<,uv(,nt, h cetto dcolo. C'etait aussi comrno uno layon do rormuoior notvo nmitro do ses quarant<, ans do bona sorv.ces, <,fc do .v.ulro lours ^nd, De temps en temps quand je levais les yeux d dessus ma p.ge je voya.s M. Hamel immobile dansi chairelnL^t les objets autour de Im, comme s'il avait voulu emporter dans •20 son regard toute sa petite maison d'ecole. . . PenST depu^s quarante ans, , .5tait li k la mtoe place, avec sa cour enXce de Im et sa classe toute pareille. Seulenient les bancs les pupitres s'.ita.ent polls, frottes par I'usage; les noyms de la courava.entgrandi, et le houblon qu'il a™it plantJlulmLe »eng„,rlanda,t maintenant les fenetres jusqu'au toit oTel crtye-coeur 9a devait «tre pour ce pauvre homme de quitter toutes ces choses, et d'entendre sa soeur qui allait, venait, dans la chambre au^essus, en train de fermeJ leurs malles ' rar Us deva.ent partir le lendemain, s'en aller du pays pour touTou^ jusqn au bout Apres I'^cnture, nous eumes la lecon d'his- to .J ; ensmte les petits chant{,rent le ba be bi bo bu U-ba= au fond de la sa le, le vieux Hauser avait mis ses lunettet rt !u .• "y*',' "J""' « appl'quait, lui aussi ; sa voix tremblait d,imot,on, et c'^tait si dr61e de I'entendre, que nous avion' tous envie de rire et de pleurer. Ah ! je m'en souWeXHa oette dermfere classe. . . ""ciiuiai as Tout k coup rhorloge de r,!glise sonna midi, puis I'Anselua ~y~,; -/"""^^"v, ics truaipetTies des Prussiens qui revenaipnf de l'exerc;se *latferent sous nos fenStres. ... M. HTmel » i t FRENCH READER. 411 leva, tout pale, dans sa chaire. Jamais il ne m'avait paru si grand. "Mes amis, dit-il, mes amis, je. . . je. . . ." Mais quelque chcse I'dtouftait. II ne pouvait pas achever sa phrase. 6 Alors il se tourna vers le tableau, prit un morceau de craie, et, en appuyant de toutes ses forces, il dcrivit aussi gros qu'il put: " Vive la France ! " Puis il resta la, la tete appuj^e au mur, et, sans parler, avec lo sa main il nous faisait signe : *' C'est fini .... allez-vous-en." — From ** Contes du Luudi," by kind permission of the Publisher, Eugene Fasquelle, 11 rue de Grenelle, Paris. 7. LA CHfeVRE DE M. SEGUIN. Daudet (1840-1897). M. Seguin n'avait jamais eu de bonheur avec ses ch^vres. II les perdait toutes de la meme fagon : un beau matin, elles cassaient leur corde, s'en allaient dans la montagne, et la-haut 15 le loup les mangeait. Ni les caresses de leur maitre, ni la peur du loup, rien ne les retenait. C'etait, parait-il, des chevres indd- pendantes, voulant a tout prix le grand air et la liberte. Le brave M. Seguin, qui ne comprenait rien au caraotere de ses betes, ^tait constern^. II disait : 20 "C'est fini; les chevres s'ennuient chez raoi, je n'en garderai pas une." Cependant il ne se decouragea pas, et, apres avoir perdu six chevres de la meme maniere, il en acheta une septieme ; seule- ment, cette fois, il eut soin de la prendre toute jeune, pour 25 qu'elle s'habituat mieux a demeurer chez lui. Ah ! qu'elle ^tait jolie la petite chevre de M. Seguin ! qu'elle ^tait jolie avec ses yeux doux, sa barbiche de sous-officier, ses sabots noirs et luisants, ses cornes z^brees et ses longs poils blancs qui lui fais;i,ient une houppelande! et puis, docile, cares- 30 sante, se laissant traire sans I ouger, sans mettre son pied dans I'dcuelle. Un amour de petite clievre. . . 412 FRENCH READER. M. Seguin avait derriere sa inaison uii clos ontourd d'aubd- pines. C'est la qii'il iiiifc sa noiivelle peiisionnaire. II I'attacha a uti pieu au plus bcl eiidroit du pre, en ayant soiii de lui laisser beaucoup de corde, et de temps en temps il venait voir si elle 6dtait bien. La chevre se trouvait tros heureuse et broutait Iherbe de si bon coeur que M. Seguin dtait ravi. " Enfin, pensait le pauvre homme, en voila une qui ne s'en- nuiera pas cliez moi ! " M. Seguin se trompait, sa chevre s'ennuya. 10 Un jour, elle se dit en regardant la monta??ne : " Comme on doit etre bien 1^-haut ! Quel plaisir de gam- bader dans la bruyere, sans cette maudite longe qui vous dcorche le cou ! . . . C'est bon pour I'ane ou pour le boeuf de brquter dans un clos !. . Les chevres, il leur faut du large." 15 A partir do ce moment, I'herbe du clos lui parut fade. L'ennui lui vint. Elle maigrit, son lait se fit rare. C'etait pitie de la voir tirer tout le jour sur sa longe, la tete tournoo du c6te de la montagne, la narine ouverte, en faisant Me ! . . . tristement. 20 M. Seguin s'apercevait bien que sa chevre avait quelque chose, mais il ne savait pas ce que c'(5tait. . . Un matin, comme il achevait de la traire, la chevre se retourna et lui dit dans son patois : ''Ecoutez, monsieur Seguin, je me languis chez vous, laissez- 25 moi aller dans la montagne. —Ah! mon Dieu! . . . Elle aussi! cria M. Seguin stupefait, et du coup il laissa tomber son ecuelle ; puis, s'asseyant dans I'herbe a c6td de sa chevre : — Comment Blanquette, tu veux me quitter ! " Et Blanquette repondit : " Oui, monsieur Seguin : — Est ce que I'herbe te manque ici 1 — Oh ! non ! monsieur Seguin. — Tu es peut-etre attache'e de trop court ; veux-tu que 35 j'allonge la corde ! — Ce n'est pas la peine, monsieur Seguin. — Alors, qu'est-ce qu'il te faut ! qu'est-ce que tu veux ? — uQ ver;X aller dans la montagne, monsieur Seguin. •Mais, malheureuse, tu ne sais pas qu'il y a le loup dans la 30 40 montagne . Que feras-tu quand il viendra?. . . Tl FRENCH READER. 413 5 d'aub^- I'attacha li laisser ir si elle broutait lie s'en- de gam- ui vous bceuf do t large." it fade. C'^tuit tourn('(! Me!... quelque matin, ) lui dit laissez- iipefait, it dans tu que dans la — Je lui donnerai des coups de corno, monsieur Seguin. — Le loup se moque bien de tes cornes. II m'a mang^ des biques autrement encorndes que toi . , . Tu sais bien, la pauvre vieille Renaude qui ^tait ici I'an dernier ? une maitresse ch^vre, forte et m^chante comme un bouc. Elle s'est battue avec le 5 loup toute la nuit . . . puis, le matin, le loup I'a mangle. — Pdcaire ! Pauvre Renaudo ! . . . Q*a ne fait rien, monsieur Seguin, laissez-moi aller dans la montagne. — Bont^ divine ! . . . dit M. Seguin ; mais qu'est-ce qu'on leur fait done k mes chfevres ? Encore une que le loup va me lo manger ... Eh bien, non ... je te sauverai malgr<5 toi, coquine ! et de peur que tu ne rompes ta corde, je vais t'en- fermer dans ratable, et tu y resteras toujours. Lk-dessus, M. Seguin emporta la chevre dans une stable toute noire, dont il ferma la porte k double tour. Malheu-15 reusement, il avait oubli(^ la fenetre, et k peine eut-il le dos tourn^, que la petite s'en alia. . . . Quand la chevre blanche arriva dans la montagne, ce fut un ravissement general. Jamais les vieux sapins n'avaient rien vu d'aussi joli. On la re^ut comme une petite reine. Les 20 ch&taigniers se baissaient jusqu'a terre pour la caresser du bout de leurs branches. Les genets d'or s'ouvraient sur son passage, et sentaient bon tant qu'ils pouvaient. Toute la montagne lui fit f^te. On pense bien si notre chevre ^tait heureuse ! Plus de 25 corde, plus de pieu . . . rien qui I'empechat de gambader, de brouter a sa guise . . C'est la qu'il y en avait de I'herbe ! jusque par-dessus les cornes ! . . . Et quelle herbe ! savoureuse, fine, dentelde, faite de mille plantes . . . C'^tait bien autre chose que le gazon du clos. Et les fleurs done ! . . . De 30 grandes campanules bleues, des digitales de pourpre k longs calices, toute une for^t de fleurs sauvages d^bordant de sues capiteux ! . . . La chevre blanche, k moitie soule, se vautrait la dedans les jambes en I'air et roulait le long des talus, pele-mele avec les 35 feuilles tombees et les chataignes . . . Puis, tout a coup elle 36 redressait d'un bond sur ses pattes. Hop ! la voila partie, la tete en avant, k travers les maquis et les buissi^res, tantdt sur un pic, tantOt au fond d'un ravin, la-haut, en bas, par- tout . . . On aurait dit qu'il y avait dix ch^vres de M. Seguin 40 dans la montagne. 414 FRENCH READER. " C'est qu'elle n'avait peur cle rien la Blanqnette. saient au passage de poussiere l.uniide et d'ecume. Alors toute rmsse ante elle allait s'etendre sur que.quc roche p aTe en bas, tout en bas dans ]a plaine, la maison de M. Se-uin avec le clos demure. Cela la fit rire aux larmes. " lodedansi"'"' ^''^'' '^'""^ ^ "^'^'^ -j^ P- *-- 1^ Pauvrette ! de se voir si haut perch.., elle se croyait au moms aussi grande que le raonde. . . "^ La montagne devint Tout i coup le vent fraichit. . violette; c'^tait le soir. '' En bt'"lf ^ i^ petite chfevre ; et elle s'arreta fort ^tonne'e. En bas, les champs ^taient noyes de brume. Le clos de ^' ?e^ vovait^nT""'' t"^ '' ^^^"^"^^^^^' '' ^^ '^ -aisonnette on ne voyait plus que le toit avec un peu de fume'e Elle 20 W tout: r^t'" '\'^--^T- q-'on ramenait, et se sen 20 lame toute triste. . . Un gerfaut, qui rentrait, la frola de "Hou! hou!" 25peSi' P"7 '•^^\^«"P' ^« tout le jour la folle n'y avait pas la vall^. oV^r ."' T"''".^ "r ^^''^"^P^ ««""^^ ^^i«" Join d.ans effort ""^ ^- ^'^"^" ^"^ *"^*^^^* "^ ^^^^e-- "Hou ! hou !. . .faisait le loup. -Reviens ! reviens !. . ." criait la trompe '\\^!V^T eut envie de revenir; mais en se rappelant le Se nouvoT ?' ^T" ^'" '^"'' '"^ P^"-^'^ ^"^ maintenant elle ne pouvait plus se faire k cette vie, et qu'il valait mieux rester La trompe ne sonnait plus. . . La ch^vre entendit derri^re elle un bruit de feuilles Elle "'dJtr"" '.' ''' ^'''' ^''"^^'^ ^^^^ --"- eourtes toute droites, avec deux yeux qui reluisaient . . . C'e'tait le loup. FRENCH READER. 415 Enorrae, immobile, assis sur son train de derrifere, il ^tait \k regardant la petite chevrc blanche et la degustant par avance. Comrae il savait bien qu'il la mangerait, le loup ne se pressait pas; seulement, quand elle se retourna, il se mit k rire mechamment. 6 " Ha ! ha ! la petite chfevre de M. Seguin !" et il passa sa grosse langue rouge sur ses babines d'amadou. Blanquette se sentit perdue . . . Un moment en se rappelant I'histoire de la vieille Renaude, qui s'dtait battue toute la nuit pour etre raangee le matin elle se dit qu'il vaudrait peut- lo etre mieux se laisser manger tout de suite; puis, s'^tant ravis^e, elle tomba en garde, la tete basse et la corne en avant, comme une brave chevre de M. Seguin qu'elle etait. . . Non pas qu'elle eut I'espoir de tuer le loup,— les ch^vres ne tuent pas le loup, — mais seulement pour voir si elle pourrait tenir 15 aussi longtemps que la Renaude . , . Alors le monstre s'avan^a, et les petites cornes entrferent en danse. Ah ! la brave chevrette, comme elle y allait de bon coeur ! Plus de dix fois, je ne mens pas, elle for^a le loup a reculer20 pour reprendre haleine. Pendant ces treves d'une minute, la gourmande cueillait en hate encore un brin de sa chfere herbe ; puis elle retournait au combat, la bouche pleine . . . Cela dura toute la nuit. De temps en temps la chfevre de M. Seguin regardait les ^toiles danser dans le ciel clair, et elle se 25 disait : "Oh ! pourvu que je tienne jusqu'k I'aube. . ." L'une apres I'autre, les etoiles s'eteignirent. Blanquette redoubla de coups de cornes, le loup de coups de dents. . . Une lueur p^le parut dans I'horizon ... Le chant d'un coq 30 enrou^ monta d'une metairie. "Enfin!" dit la pauvre bete, qui n'attendait plus que le jour pour mourir • et elle s'allongea par terre dans sa belle fourrure blanche toute tach(^e de sansf. . . Alors le loup se jeta sur la petite chfevre et la mangea. 85 —From "Lettres de mon Moulin," by kind permission of the Publisher, Eugene Fasquelle, 11 rue de Grenelle, Paris. 41G FURNOII UKAOER. ffl .Jl 8. LA PATTE DE DINDON. Lkoouvk (1). 1S()7), " J(; vols qu(^ tu as bosoin quo jo to fasso uno potito logon. — vJ\ I siir (juoi, j)oro i ^ 6 —Siir luio disposition quo tu tiena do moi, lu^aa I ofc dont JO voudrais bion U\ gut^rir, — Quelle ost-ollo? — Le n^oit d'uiio potito avonture de ma vio d'dcolior to lappreiidra. '\J'rf '^'r ''"'' J'^*^*'''' ^" ""^'^'^^' ^^ ••'■^PPoH.tis chaque lundi, de olu'z ,nes parents, la grosse so.nnio de quin/e sour, destineo ^ payor n.es dojeunora du matin, oar le eolRw no nous lourn.ssait pour ce repas ,|u'un nmreoau do. pain to.rt sec. Vn lundi, en rontrant, jo trouve un do nos oania.ades (io 15 me rappelle encore son nom, il so nonnnait Couture) aniu^ dune superhe patte de dindon. Jo dis patto ot non cuisse, car 1 ol^iet tout e.itier so coniposait do ce quo, dans mon ignor- ance J appellerai un tibia, et do la patte avec ses qSatro doigts, le tout rocouvert do cette peau noire, luisante ot 2orugueuse qui fait que le dindon a I'air de marcher sur des brodequins de chagrin. ms quo mon camarade m'aper9ut : " Viens voir ! " me dit-il "viens voir ! ' "ii- ", J'accours ; il serrait le haut de la patto dans ses deux 25 mains, et, sur un mouvement d(. sa main droite, les <,uatro doigts souvraient et se refermaient comme los doicrts d'une mam humaine. Je restai stupefait et emerveilld Comment cette patte morte pouvait-elle remuer? Comment pouvait-i( la faire agir Un gar^on de dix-huit ans qui va au spectacle 30 et qui suit le developpement du drame le plus merveilleux n a, pas les yeux plus ^carquilles, les regards plus ardents, la tete plus fixement penchee en avant que moi, en face de cette patte de dindon. Chaque fois que ces quatre doigts s'ouvraient et se refermaient, il me passait devant les yeux comme un S6 6blouissement. Je croyais assister a un prodi^re Lorsque mon camarade, qui etait plus agq,et plus malin que moi, vit mon enthousiasme arrivti k son paroxysme, il remit sa FUKNOIf llEADKR. 417 morvoillo duns sa j4)olio ol .s'c'ldi^^na. Jo inV^ri allai Ac m<,3. sion d^sir^e, cette folle imprevoyance, cette puissance d'illusion, egale seulement helas ! k ma puissance de disillusion, tous ces traits de caractere se sont mille fois r^vei^' .s. . .que dis-ie? se c-.reveillent encore en moi, des qu'une passion m'envr- hit. Oh t oil n ^tudie pas assez les enfants ! On traite leurs sentiments de puerilites ! Rien n'est pueril dans I'arae humaine. L'enfant nemeurt jamais tout entier dans I'homme, et ce qui est pueril aujourd hui pent etre terrible ou coupable demain. Les pas- 40 sions «ont differentes, mais le coeur ou elles poussent est le meme, et le meilleur moyen de bien diriger un jeune homme est d'avoir I 1 FRENCH READER. 419 bien observt'i \o gar9on de dix ana. Ainai cette patte de dindon in'a forfc aorvi. Vingt foia dana nia vie, au beau milieu d'urie sottise, ce aouvenir in'eab revcnu. . . ''Tu seras done toujoura le iiieine?" me disais-jo, et jo mo mettais k rire, ce qui m'arretait court. II n'y a rien de plus utile que do se rire 5 au nez de temps en temps. Je me retournai alors vers mon fils, et je lui dis : " Cette fable montr e. . .([uo les fils ressemblent quelquefois h leurs p^res." — By kind permission of the Publishers, J. Hetzel & Cie., 18 ruo Jacob, Paris. 9. HORTIBUS. POU VILLON (b. 1840). I. Le petit college est en fete. Portes ouvertes, volets bat-io tants, des drapeaux aux fenrstres, du monde partout, des bousculades dans les escaliers, des galopades dans les corridors, et, dominant le tapage, les coups de marteau du tapissier en train de clouer les tentures sur I'estrade dressde dans la cour pour la distribution des prix. 15 Les prix ! les vacances ! des mots qui rient, des mots qui chantent, des mots qui eclatent coiiime des soleils et qui embaument comme un bouquet de fleurs des champs ! Tres triste, 1^-haut, dans Tinfirmerie toute blanche, le petit malade se soul^ve pour «couter. Des pas raontent, se hatent, 20 passent devant la porte ; aucun ne s'arrete. Personne. Le docteur — hem! hem! — est venu tout a I'heure, trks presse k cause de la fete ; bonjour, bonsoir, adieu mon m^decin. L'infirmifere, qui aide a faire les malles a la lingerie, parait une fois tous les quarts d'heure, fait voir le bout du nez, 2i referme la porte et s'en va. Qu'elle s'en aille ! Ce n'est pas elle qu'attend le petit malade, le docteur pas davantage. Ceux qu'il attend, tenez, les voil^ qui arrivent. Trois campagnards : un homme en veate ronde, une petite 30 femme courte en bonnet blanc, une fillette en robe longue, 420 FRENCH READER. trop longue, les manches jusqu'au bout des doigts , le pfere, la mere, la petite S(Bur. lis entrent : I'honime, discrl'tement, tr^s circonapect, uti peu timide ; la m^re, tout de go, les bras tendus en avant jusqu'i 6ce (juelle tienne embrass^e, 4Umffee sur sa poitrine, la chfere petite tete do I'enfant. Le p6re serre la main du nialade, la hllette so hausse sur la pointe des pieds jusqu'aux ioues penchdes vers ses l^vres. Et les questions pleuvent, 10 — Qu'as-tu, Tiennet? — Qu'est-ce qui te fait mal, pitchou ? — Rien, presque rien. Lh, au front, quelque chose qui me pesGa — Depuis quand ? 16 —Depuis la composition en th^me latin. Oh! ce sera bientOt passd — Bient6t? Non ; tout de suite, reprend la mere. Deraain jour de lessive, je fais des fouaces. C'est bon, les fouaces. eh i Tiennet ? 20 lis bavardent, et d'en bas, de I'estrade dress^e en plein air, une rumeur raonte ; des pr.s se pr^cipitent ; des crosses de fusil sonnent sur le pav^ de la cour. Les pompiers sont arrives. — P^re, allons-y, sollicite la petite sceur. Tant6t, nous 25 n aurons plus de place. Et, c&line, elle tire I'homme vers la porte. — Tu peux bien, dit la mere. A trois, que ferions-nous de plus 1 Descendez ; moi, je reste, s'il me veut, lui, ajoute-t-elle en couvant de I'oeil son Tiennet. n. 80 La petite sceur, le p^re, sont partis. La mhve a ferm^ les volets, k cause du grand jour, et, dans la demi-obscurit^ de 1 infirmerie close, ils demeurent tous les deux sommeillant. — Dors un peu, mien, 9a te gu^rira. — Oui, mere. 36 Et Tiennet ferme les yeux. Mais le moyen de s'endormir, avec le remue-mdnage d distribution des prix sous la fenStre ? — M^re, va voir, s'il te plait. Que fait-on? !a {' FRENCH READER. 421 i — Rien encore. Lea inoHsieurs soiit arriv<^8 ; une pleine estracle. Oh ! je vois au milieu uii orticier nvec un cbapeau garni d'un dnonno plumet ! — Le colonel ! — Et un autre au premier rang, en face, tout brocl^ d'argent. s — Le sous-pr^fet. Bon ; que vois-tu encore ] — Jdsus ! tant do prix ! lis en ont fait trois piles au bord de I'estrade ; et des couronnes ! une raontagne ! Brusquement, une fanfare t^clate k pleins cuivrea, k plains poumons. C'est beau, la musique ! Aleves, parents, jusqu'au lo petit malade, tout le monde applaudit. Attention, maintenant ! Le frac brodt5 d'argent se Ifeve, un chiffon de papier roul^ sur le doigt. . .le discours. On n'entend pas un mot, rien qu'un chantonnement aigu, ber^ant, monotone. ib C'est curieux comme, k distance, un sous-pr^fet qui parle peut faire I'effet d'un moucheron qui siffle. Le frac brod^ d'argent s'assied ; une robe noire se Ifeve : un long, chauve, avec un fort cahier k la main. II ne siftle pas, celui-ci, il bourdonne. Telle une tjrosse mouche. Des phrases 20 d'une lieue, des p^riodes d'une heure j un sermon. Du coup, la mfere s'est endormie. Tiennet, lui, s'impatiente. Aura-t-il, n'aura-t-i- pas le prix de thfeme latin? Le prix, il est \k, dans la pile, un beau livre dore sur tranche, I'attesta- 25 tion collee en dedans avec les palraes acad^miques en vignette et le parafe du principal. S'il pouvait lire le nom du vainqueur ! Et pendant qu'il calcule ses chances, le sommeil le prend k son tour. 10 HL II r^ve. Quel eauchemar! L'attestation est dans ses mains, sous ses yeux. H^las ! un autre a vaincu ; Luc Onzi^s a obtenu le premier prix. — Erreur ! injustice ! objecte Tiennet, ma copie ^tait sans 35 faute. — Sans fautc, ricanc jc proicsscur, sans iuuto ! Et oeci, petit malheureux, qu'en faites-vous 1 422 FRENCH READER. Suivant a}ors le doigt accusateur cle M. R^gulus Bee sur la copie onhUe d'annotations, Tiennet ddcouvref soul^n/tr j^ foxs k 1 encre rouge, cet affreux barbarisme : HORTIBUS. Hortibus ! Adieu le prix, adieu la gloire ! 'lui^'ir f r ' ^A '"^^ *^^^,V «^«^de ; il danse multipli^ devant louirlU %''' ^«"^\^'^ ^"gl-i«e^ imprimlenlettres bonnd en lettic: cmniques qui s'animent, tirant la ikngue envoyant des pieds de nez au vaincu '^"gue, 10 Hortibus! IV. Le malade s'agite, ses l^vres remuent. -II appelle quelqu'un, dit la mere. Tiennet, Tier.net ! Embrasse, secoue de caresses, Tiennet ouvre les yeux. Plus do hortibus ! ^vanoui dans le pays des songes avec la 15 figure irnt^e du professeur R^gulus Bee. Bon voyage k tous deux ! Mais lo prix ? la couronne ? Le prix, la couronne? lis viennent, ils niontent, pieuse- ment, rehgieusement apportds par le p^re et la petite sceur 20 U ne marche triomphale ! f^uiuc buiur. Ik entrent, et Voil^ le volume dtald sur le lit du netit malade, la, couronne posee sur son front. Le p^re rit, la m^re pleure ; tous s'embrassent. Oh ' le bonheur dos braves gen:, le vrai bonheur ! 25 Et tandis qu'on fait fote au vainqucur, hem ! hem ^ quel- qu un se prdsento, Idvite noire, figure rose : le doeteur " ^ . r-.A^^ -^"^ •'• • -I'^^^a^t va mieux ; ce laurier sur le front a fait des miracles. Allons, le grand air achfevera de le gu^r le "sp^^ ur^r.;:m^:rtt?!-^^ '- '^-^'- — Pas de th6me latin, entendez-vous ! —By kind permission of the Publisher, A. Lemerre, 23-31 passage Choiseul, t^aris. iki FRENCH READER. 423 ur la troia vant ttres ;liar- gue, c la use- 3ur. Btit ' le lel- )nt :'ir. tne le, 10. CHAGRIN D'UN VIEUX FORMAT. PlEREE LOTI (b. 1850). C'est une bien petite histoire, qui m'a 4t4 contde par Yves, — un soir ou il ^tait all^ en lade conduire, avec sa canonni^re, une cargaison de condamnes au grand transport en partance pour la Nouvelle-Caledonie, Dans le nombre se trouvait un for9at tres kge (soixante-dix s ans pour le moins), qui emmenait avec lui, tendrement, un pauvre moineau dans une petite cage. Yves, pour passer le temps, ^tait entre en conversation avec ce vieux, qui n'avait pas mauvaise figure, parait-il, — mais qui ^tait accoupl^ par une chaine k un jeune monsieur ignoble, le gouailleur, portant lunettes de myope sur un mince nez bleme. Vieux coureur de grands chemins, arrets, en cinquieme ou sixieme recidive, pour vagabondage et vol, il disait ; " Com- ment faire pour lie pas voler, quand on a commence une fois, — et qu'on n'a pas de metier, rien,— et que les gens ne veulentis plus de vous nulle part ? II faut bien manger, n'est-ce pas 1 — . Pour ma derniere condamnation, c'etait un sac de porames de terre que j'avais pris dans un champ, avec un fouet de roulier et un giraumont. Eet-ce qu'on n'aurait pas pu me laisser mourir en France, je vous demande, au lieu de m'envoyer la- 20 bas, si vieux comme je suis 1 . . ." Et, tout heureux de voir que quelqu'un consentait a I'dcou- ter avec compassion, il avait ensuite montre k Yves ce qu'il possddait de pr^cieux au monde : la petite cage et le moineau. Le moineau apprivoise, connaissant sa voix, et qui pendant 25 pres d'une annde, en prison, avait vecu perch^ sur son ^paule. . . — Ah ! ce n'est pas sans peine qu'il avait obtenu la permission de I'emmener avec lui en Caledonie ! — Et puis aprts, il avait fnllu lui faire une cage convenable pour le voyage ; se procurer du bois, un peu de vieux fil de fer, et un peu de peinture verte 30 pour peindre le tout et que ce fut joli. Ici, je me rappelle textuellement ces mots d'Yves : " Pauvre moineau ! II avait pour manger dans sa cage un morceau de ce pain gris qu'on donne dans les prisons. Et il avait I'air de se trouver content tout de meme ; il sautillait comme n*importe 35 quel autre oiseau." 424 FRENCH READER. Quolques l.eures apres, comme on accostaifc le tnmsporfc et que les formats allaient s'y e.nbaniucr pour le grand voyage. Yves qui avait oublid ce vioux, repassa par Iwtsard pr^sde lui. — lenez prenez-la, vous, lui dit-il d'une voix touto ehanLV(5e, sen lui tetidant sa petite cage. Je vous la donne ; ca pourra peut-etre vous servir k quelque cJiose, vous faire plaisir. . -Non, certes! reraercia Yves. II faut I'omportor au oon- traire^ vous savez bien. Ce sera votre petit co7npaffno7i la-bas. . . — Uli! reprit le vieux, il n'est plus dedans... Vous ne losaviez done pas ? il n'y est plus. . . Etdeux larrnes d'indicible misere lui coulaient sur les joues ii'endant une bousculado de la traverst'o, la por-te s't^tait ouverte, le momeau avait eu peur, s'etait envol(5,--et tout de suite dtait tonibt) k la mer a cause do son aile coupee. Oh i le 15 moment d'horribledouleur! Le voir se dobattre et mourir entraind dans le sillago rapide, et ne pouvoir rien pour lui i IJabord, dans un premier mouvement bien naturel, il avait voulu crier, demander du secours, s'adresser ;\ Yves lui-meme le supplier. . . Elan arret(5 aussitOt par la reflexion, par la 20 conscience imm^liate de sa degradation personnelle : un vieux miserable coranie lui, qui est-ceqi.l aurait pitiede son moineau qui est-ce qui voudrait seulement ^couter sa prifere? Est-ce qu 11 pouvaifc lui venir k I'esprit qu'on retarderait le navire pour repecher un moineau qui se noie -et un pauvre oiseau 26 de for9at, quel reve absurde! . . . Alors il s'dtait tenu silen- cieux a sa place, regardant s'^loigner sur I'ecume de la mer le petit corps gris qui se ddbattait toujours ; il s'etait senti eflProy- ablement seul maintenant, pour jamais, et de g,-osses larmes, des larmes de d^sesp^rance solitaire et supreme lui brouillaient sola vue,— tandis que le jeune monsieur a lunettes, son colleeue de chaine, riait de voir un vieux pleurer. Maintenant que I'oiseau n'y t^tait plus, il ne voulait pas garder cette cage, construite avec tant de sollicitude pour le petit mort ; il la tendait toujours a ce brave marin qui avait 35consenti k ecouter son histoire, dJ-rant lui laisser ce legs avant de partir pour son long et derr -^r voyacre. Et Yves, tristement, avait accepte le cadeau, la maisonnette vide,— pour ne pas faire plus de peine a ce vieil abandonn^ en ayant I'air de d^daigner cette chose qui lui avait cout^ tant de 4f\ i^noxfo'il •V ▼ l,VA.L« —By kind permission of the Publisher, Calmann Levy, 3 rue Auber, Paris. FRENCH READER. 425 II. L'AVARE, Arte III, Sc V, MouJCRE (1622.1673). Harpagon — ^Valfere, aide-moi k ceci. Or 9&, maltre Jacques, ai)prochez-vous ; je vous ai gardd pour le dernier. Maitue Jacques— Est-ce k votre cocher, monsieur, ou bien k votre cuisinier, que vous voulez parler? car je suis Tun et I'autre. ^ Harpagon — Cast k tous les deux. MAfTRE Jacques— Mais k qui des deux le premier? Harpagon — Au cuisinier. MaItrb Jacques— a ttendez done, s'il vous plait. [II 6te sa casaque de cocher, et jMirait vStu en cuisinier.] j© Harpagon — Quelle diantre de ce^r^monie est^ce 1&? MaItre Jacques — "Vous n'avez qu'^ parler. Harpagon — Je me suis engag^, maitre Jacques, k donner ce soir k souper. MaItrb Jacques — Grande merveille ! is Harpagon — Dis-moi un peu, nous feras-tu bonne chfere ? MaItre Jacques — Qui, si vous me donnez bien de 1 'argent. Harpagon — Que diable ! toujours de I'argent ! 11 semble qu'ils n'aient autre chose k dire, de I'argent, de I'argent, de i'argent ! Ah! ils n'ont que ce mot k la bouche, de I'argent ! 20 Toujours parler d'argent ! Voil4 leur ^pee de chevet, de I'argent ! Val^re — Je n'ai jamais vu de rt^ponse plus impertinente que celle-l&. Voil4 une belle merveille que de faire bonne chere avec bien de I'argent ! C'est une chose la plus aisde du 26 monde, et il n'y a si pauvre esprit qui n'en fit bien autant ; mais, pour agir en habile homme, 11 faut parler de faire bonne ch^re avec peu d'argent. Ma!tre Jacques — Bonne ch^re avec peu d'argent? VALfer.E— Oui. 3Q MaItre Jacques— Par ma foi, monsieur I'intendant, vous nous obligerez de nous faire voir ce secret, et de prendre mon office de cuisinier ; aussi bien vous melez-vous c^ans d'etre le factoton., Harpagon — Taisez-vous. Qu'est-ce qu'il nous faudra ? 35 iTi^ixiiis v.-nj;^uii^ ab'nTur dix. ^"""'^ " ^ "^ ' ""'"««'• P°- »>"*. " ? - » Val^re— Cela s'entend. Maitre Jacques -H^ bien, il faudra quatre grands pota^es et cinq assiettes d'entr^es. ^ b =» puuaj^ea Maitre Jacques— R6t ... trattre, tu manges tout mon bien. "' ' Maitre Jacques— Entremets ... VALfeRE-Est-ce que vous avez envie de faire crever tout le force de mangeaille? Allez-vous-en lire un peu les pr^centes pr^judiciable k I'homrae que de manger avec exc^s ^ Harpagon-— II a raison. jALfeRE-Apprenez, maitre Jacques, vous et vos pareils. que c est un coupe-gorge qu'une table remplie de t?op de t5 mndes; que pour so bien montrer ami d^ ceux que I'on mvite, il faut que la frugality r^gne dans les repas qu'on donne et que, suivant le dire d'un ancien, ilfaut mlgerZZ vivre, et non pas vivre pour manger. Harpagon- Ah, que cela est bien dit ! approche que le 30 1 embrasse pour ce mot. Voila la plus belle sentence que j'a e entendue de ma vie: d faut vivre pour manger, et non pas TuTtuXr '" " * '"' '' ""'''' P"' ''^^' ^^"^^«"* ««^ " ^pol'mZ^r^''^'''^''''' """^" ^^"^ "^*^^' '' -- ^- --^ BjinPAQOs~[^ Maitre Jacques.] Oui. Entends-tu? fAVa- l^re_\ Qui est le grand homrae qui a dit cela ? VALfeRE- Je ne me souviens pas maintenant de son nom Harpagon— Souviens-toi de m'^crire ces mots. .!« lea ve.,- #ofaire graver en iettres d'or sur la cheminde de ma salle"" ' ^ '* FRENCH READER. 427 ibie? aut preiL I y en a 3 potagea une villo e.] Ah, n 8ur la V tout le issiner a ir^ceptes de plus pareils, trop de lue Ton s qu'on rer pour que je [ue j'aie ion pas it est-ce IS vivre [I Va- lom. ^ VALfeRE-~Je n'y manquerai pas. Et pour votre souper, vous n avez qu a me laisser faire. Je reglerai tout cela comme il faut Harpagon — Fais done. Maitre Jacques— Tant mieux, j'en aurai moins de peine. Hahpagon— II faudra do ces choses dont on ne mange guere 5 et qui rassasient d'abord ; quelque bon haricot bien gr-as? avec quelque pate en pot bien garni de raarrons. VALfeiiE— Reposez-vous sur moi. Harpagon— Maintenant, maitre Jacques, 11 faut nettover mon carrosse. '' < Maitre Jacques -Attendez. Ceci s'adresse au cocher.^° [Ji remet sa casaque.] Vous dites Hakpagon— Qu'il faut nettoyer mon carrosse, et tenir mes chevaux tout prets pour conduire a la foire Maitre Jacques— Vos chevaux, monsieur? Ma foi, ils nei5 sont pomt du tout en etat de marcher. Je ne vous dirai point qu lis sont sur la liti^re, les pauvres betes n'en ont point, et ce serait mal parler ; mais vous leur faites observer des jeunes SI austeres, que ce ne sont plus rien que des idees ou des tant6mes, des fa^ons de chevaux. 20 Harpagon— Les voila bien malades ; ils ne font rien Maitre- Jacques— Et pour ne rien faire, monsieur, est-ce quil ne faut rien manger? II leur vaudrait bien mieux, les pauvres animaux, de travailler beaucoup, et de mancrer de meme. ^ Cela me fend le coeur de les voir ainsi extenues; car, 25 enhn,^ j ai une tendresse pour mes chevaux, qu'il me semble que c est moi-ra^ine, qiiand je les vois patir ; je m'ote tous les jours pour eux les choses de la bouche; et c'est etre, mon- 'ro"chatn"'' ''^^"'^^ ^'""^ '^"''' "^"^ ^^ '''^^''''" ''"^^^ ^'^'^ ^« ^^n foiS'^^''''^^^"'"^^ ^'^''^''^^ "^ ^^'''' P""^ ^''''^^' ^'''^^^'' J"^^"'^ la^^ Maitre JACQUES-Non, monsieur, je n'ai pas le courage de les mener; et je ferais conscience de leur donner des coups de fouet, en 1 etat ou ils sont. Comment voudriez-vous qu'ils trainassent 85' un carrosse ? lis ne peuvent pas se trainer eux-memes. VALfcRE-Mionsieur, j'obligerai le voisin Picard a se charger de les conduire: aussi bien nous fe.a-t-il ici besoin pour appreter le soiiper. -^ Maitre JACQUES-Soit. J'aime mieux encore qu'ils meurent 40 sous la mam d un autre que sous la mienne. 428 FRENCH READER. 12. WATERLOO, CHAP. IX. Victor Hugo (1802-1885). lis dtaient trois mille cinq cents. lis faisaient un front d'un quart de lieue. C'etaient des homines geants sur des chevaux colosses. lis etaient vingt-six escadrons ; et ils avaient derrifere eux, pour les appuyer, la division de Lefebvre-Desnouettes, les 5 cent six gendarmes d'elite, les chasseurs de la garde, onze cent quatre-vingt-dix-sept hommes, et les lanciers de la garde, huit cent quatre-vingts lances. lis portaient le casque sans crins et la cuirasse de fer battu, avec les pistolets d'argon dans les fontes et le long sabre-epe'e. Le matin toute I'arm^e les avait 10 admires, quand, a neuf heures, les clairons sonnant, toutes les musiques chantant : Veillons ait salut de Vempire, ils etaient venus, colonne epaisse, une de leurs batteries a leur flanc, I'autre k leur centre, se deployer sur deux rangs entre la chaussee de Genappe et Frischemont, et prendre leur place de bataiile dans i5cette puissante deuxierae ligne, si savamment composee par Napoleon, laquelle, ayant a son extrdmite de gauche les cuiras- siers de Kel'ermann et a son extremite de droite les cuirassiers de Milhaud, avait, pour ainsi dire, deux ailes de fer. L'aide de camp Bernard leur porta Tordre de I'empereur. 2oNey tira son epde et prit la tete. Les escadrons enormes s'dbranlerent. Alors on vit un spectacle formidable. Toute cette cavalerie, sabres levds, ^tendards et trompettes au vent, formee en colonne par division, descendit d'un meme 25 mouvement et comme un seul homme, avec la precision d'un belier de bronze qui ouvre une br^che, la colline de la Belle- Alliance, s'enfonga dans le fond redoutable ou tant d'homnies d^ja etaient tombe's, y disparut dans la fum^e, puis, sortant de cette ombre, reparut de I'autre c6t(5 du vallon, toujours com- 30 pacte et serree, montant au grand trot, k travers un nuage de mitraille crevant sur elle, I'^pouvantable pente de boue du plateau de Mont-Saint-Jean. Ils montaient, graves, mena- 9ants, imperturbables ; dans les intervalles de la raousqueterie et de I'artillerie, on entendait ce pi^tinement colossal. ;i]tant 35 deux divisions, ils Etaient deux colonnes ; la division Wathier avait la droite, la division Delord avait la gauche. On croyait voir de loin s'allonger vers la crgte du plateau deux immenses FRENCH READER. 429 un couleuvres d'acier. Cela traversa la bataille comme prodige. Rien de semblable ne s'^tait vu depuis la prise de la grande redoute de la Moskowa par la grosse cavalerie ; Murat y nian- quait, mais Ney s'y retrouvait. II serablait que cette masse s dtait de venue monstre et n'eut qu'une ame. Chaque escadron ondulait et se gonflait comme un anneau du polype. On les apercevait k travers une vaste fum^e dechiree 9^ et ]k. Pele- mele de casques, de cris, de sabres, bondissement orageux des croupes des chevaux dans le canon et la fanfare, tumulte disci- i(A plin^ et terrible ; 1^-dessus les cuirasses, comme les ^cailles sur I'hydre. Ces r^cits semblent d'un autre fi,ge. Quelque chose de pareil k cette vision apparaissait sans doute dans les vieilles dpop^es orphiques racontant les hommes-chevaux, les antiques hippan- 15 thropes, ces titans k face humaine et k poitrail ^questre dont le galop escalada I'Olympe, horribles, invuln^rables, sublimes ; dieux et betes. Bizarre coincidence num^rique, vingt-six bataillons allaient recevoir ces vingt-six escadrons. Derrifere la crete du plateau, 20 k I'ombre de la batterie masqu^e, I'infanterie anglaise, form^e en treize carr^s, deux bataillons par carr^, et sur deux lignes, sept sur la premiere, six sur la seconde, la crosse k I'^paule, couchant en joue ce qui allait venir, calme, muette, immobile, attendait, Elle ne voyait pas les cuirassiers et les cuirassiers 25 ne la voyaien^^ pas. Elle ^coutait monter cette maree d'hom- mes. Elle entendait le grossissement du bruit des trois mille chevaux, le frappement alternatif et symetrique des sabots au grand trot, le froissement des cuirasses, le cliquetis des sabres, et une sorte de grand souffle farouche. II y eut un silence so redoutable, puis, subitement, une longue file de bras levds brandissant des sabres apparut au-dessus de la crete, et les casques, et les trompettes, et les dtendards, et trois mille tetes k moustaches grises criant : vive I'empereur ! Toute cette cavalerie d^boucha sur le plateau, et ce fut comme I'entr^ess d'un tremblement de terre. Tout k coup, chose tragique, k la gauche des Anglais, k notre droite, la tete de colonne des cuirassiers se cabra avec une cla- meur eflfroyable. Parvenus au point culminant de la crete, effrdnds, tout k leur furio et k leur course d'ex termination sur 40 les carries et les canons, les cuirassiers venaient d'apercevoir 430 FRENCH READER. une chemin entre eux et les Anglais un fos creux d'Ohain. L'instant fiit ^pouvantable. Le ravin ^tait Ik, inattendu, b^ant, k pic sous les pieds des chevaux, profond de deux toises i£ntra son double talus; le second rang y poussa le premier, et le troisi^me y poussa le second; les chevaux se dressaient, se rejetaient en arrifere, tombaient sur la croupe, giissaient les quatre pieds en I'air, pilant et bouleversant les cavaliers, aucun moyen de reculer, toute la colonne n'^tait plus qu'un projectile, Ida force acquise pour ^eraser les anglais ^crasa les fran^ais, le ravin inexorable ne pouvait so rendre que comble ; cavaliers et chevaux y roul^rent pele-raele se broyant les uns les autres, ne faisant qu'une chair dans ce gouffre, et quand cette fosse fut pleine d'hommes vivants, on marcha dessus et le reste passa. 15 Presque un tiers de la brigade Dubois croula dans cet abime. Ceci coraraenqa la perte de la bataille. Une tradition locale, qui exagfere ^videmment, dit que deux mille chevaux et quinze cents hommes furent ensevelis dans le chemin creux d'Ohain. Ce chiffre vraisemblablement 2ocomprend tous les autres cadavres qu'on jeta dans ce ravin le lendemain du combat. Napoleon, avant d'ordonner cette charge des cuirassiers de Milhaud, avait scrutd le terrain, mais n'avait pu voir ce che- min creux qui ne faisait pas meme une ride & la surface du 25 plateau. Averti pourtant et mis en dveil par la petite chapelle blanche qui en marque Tangle sur la chauss^e de Nivelles, il avait fait, probablement sur I'^ventualit^ d'un obstacle, une question au guide Lacoste. Le guide avait r^pondu non. On pourrait presque dire que de ce signe de tete d'un paysan est 30 sortie la catastrophe de Napoleon. D'autres fatalit^s encore devaient surgir. Etait-il possible que Napoleon gagnat cette bataille? nous r^pondrons non. Pourquoi? k cause de Wellington? k cause de Blucher? non. A cause de Dieu. 35 Bonaparte vainqueur k Waterloo, ceci n'dtait plus dans la loi du dix-neuvieme siecle. Une autre s^rie de faits se pr^parait, ou Napoleon n'avait plus de place. La mauvaise volont^ des ^vdnements s'^tait annonc^e de longue date. n ^tait temps que cet homme vaste tomb^t. 40 L'excessive pesanteur de cet homme dans la destinde humaine troublait I'dquilibre. Cet individu comptait k lui seul plus que ne 1 FRENCH READER. 431 le groupe universel. Ces pldthores de toute la vitalitd humaine concentrt'e dans une seule tete, Je raonde montant au cerveau d un horame, cela serait raortel a la civilisation, si cela durait Le moment ^tait venu pour I'incorruptible ^quit^ supreme daviser. Probablement les principes et les ^l^ments, d'oil 5 dependent les gravitations r^guli^res dans I'ordre moral comma dans lordre materiel, se plaignaient. Le sang qui fume, le trop-plem des cimeti^rcs, les m^res en larmes, ce sont des plai- doyers redoutables. II y a, quand la terre soufFre d'une sur- charge, de myst^rieux g^missements de I'ombre, que I'abimeio entend. ^ Napoleon avait dtd d^nonc^ dans I'infini, et sa chute ^taif decid^e. II g§nait Dieu. Waterloo n'est point une bataille; c'est le changement dels front de I'univers. —From " les Misdrables,»' by kind permission of M. Paul Meurice, Paria. 13. LA MARSEILLAISE. ROUOET DE L'ISLE (1760-1836). Allons, enfants de la patrie, Le jour de gloire est arriv^ ! Contre nous de la tyrannie L'dtendard sanglant est lev^. Entendez-vous dans les campagnes Mugir ces fdroces soldats ? lis viennent jusque dans nos bras, Egorger nos fils, nos compagnes ! Aux armes, citoyens ! formez vos bataillons 1 Marchons, marchons I Qu'un sang impur abreuve nos sillons ! Marchons, marchons ! v^u un sang impur abreuve nos sillons I M 2fi %u 432 FRENCH READER. '% 10 Amour sacr^ de la patrie, Conduis, soutiens iios bras vengeura ; Libert^, i -jrtd ch(5rie, Combats aveu tes ddfenseurs ! Sous nos drapeaux ({ue la Victoire Accoure k tes mftles accents ! Que tes ennemis expirants Voient ton triomphe et notre gloire ! Aux armes, citoyens ! formez vos bataillons ! Marchons, raarchons ! Qu'un sang impur abreuve r "^ sillons 1 Marchons, marchons ! Qu'un sang impur abreuve nos sillons ! --+ 26 14. LA FEUILLE. Arnault (1766-1834). " De ta tige d^tachde, Pauvre feuille dess^ch^e, Oil vas-tu 1 — Je n'en sais rien. L'orage a bris^ le chene Qui seul ^tait mon soutien ; De son inconstante haleine, L<^ zephyr ou I'aquilon Depuis ce jour me prom^ne De la foret a la plaine, De la montagne au vallon. Jo vais oil le vent me mene, Sans me plaindre ou m'efFrayer, Je vais oii va toute chose, Oil va la fpuille de rose Et la feuiile de laurier." Fi^ENCH READER. 433 IS. L'EXILIi. Chateaubrianu (1768- 1848). Combien j'ai douce souvenance Du jv>li lieu de ma nais8ance ! Ma H(Bur, qu'ils etaient beaux, les jours De France ! O iiion pays ! sois mea amours, Toujours ! Te souvient-il que notre mfere, Au foyer de notre chaumifere, Nous pressait sur son coBur joyeux Ma chfere ? Efc nous baisions ses blancs cheveux, Tous deux. Te souvient-il du lac tranquille Qu'effleurait I'hirondelle agile, Du vent qui courbait le roseau Mobile, Et du soleil couchant sur I'eau, Si beau ? Ma soeur, te souvient-il encore Du chateau que baignait la Dore, Et de cette tant vieille tour Du Maure, Ou I'airain sonnait le retour Du jour 1 Oh ! qui me rendra mon Hdl^ne, Et la montagne, et lo grand chene ? Leur souvenir fait tous les jours Ma peine. Mon pays sera mes amours Toujours I 10 16 so 26 10 28 M 10 u *^* FRENCH READER l6. LA CHIM^RE. TiiioPHrLB Oautier (1811-1872). Une jeune chirafere, aux l^vrea de ma coupe, Dans I'orgie, a donn^ le bai.ser lo plus doux • *..le avait les yeux verts, efc jusque sur sa croupe Unduyait bn horrent I'or de ses cheveux roux. Dea ailes d'^pervier treri^blaienfc k son dpaule • La voyant s'envoler, je sauiai sur ses reins ; ^t, faisant jusqu'ii moi ployer soix ecu de saule, '• entonc^ai comnie un peigne une main dans sea crins. Elle so d^menaifc, hurlante et furieuse Mais en 7ain. Je broyais ses flancs dans mes genoux : Alora elle me dit d'une voix gracieuse, Plus Claire que I'argent : Maitre, oii done allons-nous ? Par delk le soleil et par deli I'espace, Ou Dieu n'arriverait qu'apr^s I'dternit^ , Mais avant d'etre au but ton aile sera lasse : Car je veux voir mon reve en sa r^litd -From "Podsies Diverses," by kind permission of the Publisher, Eugene Fasquelle, 11 rue de Grenelle, Paris 20 17. EXTASE. Victor Hugo (1802-1885). J'dtais seul pr^s des flots, par une nuit d'^toiles l-as un nuage aux cieux, sur les mers prs de voiles Mes yeux plongeaient plus loin que le monde rM. ^t Jes bois, et les monts, et toute la nature, aemblaient interroger dans un confus murrrure -ues fiots des mers, les feux du ciel. FRENCH READER. 435 Et lea ^toiles d'or, legions infinies, A voix haute, k voix basse, avec raille harmonies, Disaient, eii inclinant leura couronnes de feu ; Et lea flots bleus, que rien ne gouverne et n'arrfite, Disaient, en recourbant I'^cume de leur cr6te : — C'est lo Seigneur, le Seigneur Dieu ! — From "les Orieutalea," by kind perraisHion of M. Paul Meurice, Paris. iiiU 18. L'AUTOMNE. Lamartink (1791-1869). Salut ! hois couronnes d'un reste de verdure I Feuillages jaunissants sur lea gazona ^pars ! Salut, derniera beaux jours ! Le deuil de la nature Convient k ma douleur, et plait k mes regards. 10 Je auia d'un paa rSveur le aentier solitaire, J'airae k revoir encor, pour la dernifere foia, Cf! soleil palissant, dont la faible lumiire Perce k peine k mea pieda I'obacurit^ des bois. Oui, dana cea jours d'automne oili la nature expire, 15 A aea regards voil^a je trouve plus d'attraita : C'est I'adieu d'un ami, c'est le dernier sourire Dea l^vrea que la mort va fermer pour jamais ! Ainsi, pr6t k quitter rhorijion de la vie, Pleurant de mea longs jours I'espoir evanoui, so Je me retourne encore, et d'un regard d'envie Je contemple cea biens dont je n'ai paa joui. Terre, aoleil, vallons, belle et douce nature, Je voua dois une larme au bord de mon tombeau. L'air est si parfumo ! la lumifere est si t^ure ! 20 Aux regarda d'un mourant Ic soleil est ai beau. St' lO 436 FRENCH READER. Je voudrais mnintenanfc vidor jusqu'i la lie Ce calice m&U de noctar efc de fi(3l ; Au fond de oetto coupe on jo buvaia la vie, Peut-fitre restait-il uiie goutto de miel. Peut-6tre Tavenir me gardait-il encore Un retour de bonhour doiit I'eapoir est perdr - Peut-Otre dans la foulo, une Anio quo j'igiioM Aurait conipris mon funo et m'aurait rt'pondu. La fleur toinbo on livrart ses parfuma au z(5pliire, >. la vie, au soleil, ce sont ]h ses adioux ; Moi, je uieurs, et mon ftino, au moment, qu'elle expire, S'exhale comme un son triato efc m^lodieux. —By kind permisaion of M. Rt bert Vallier, gi5rant d'- la SocitittS propri»5taire do8 ceuvres de Lrtrnartina lU-i_; If 19. TRISTESSE. Dk Musskt (1810-1867). J'ai perdu ma force efc ma vie, Efc mes amis efc ma gaiett5 : J'ai perdu jusqu'^ la fiertd Qui faisaifc croire k mon gdnie. Quand j'ai connu la vdrifc^, J'ai cru que c'^tait une ^mie : Quand je I'ai comprise efc senfcie J 'en t^fcais d^ji. ddgoufc ™<^ "'''«" hi haveVtapainn'ooi:r,„"^ef,;;;;:5n''t:r- f^ ^ v^ jt of the carriage door, his help 18 T ,e °'^'^'"^/our guards that some one go to 19. AlLugh the cat e7ed"..r "."."f » ""' °* 'he 4.ter off his master^ clothe? ior^P "l"*' "'" *'™™^ ""ried 21. Wehadjusrg'°tliim"i::e' f' fc w"h t*^^" get into the carriage. 23. We slSjl n.:; F '.f>^ *'^''!' '''"'''' "==''"'' «™ ^'^ 26^ fV,^ ^1 1 ® thing to those we meet 07 tKo< • 1;t itrtrr Tetr ii \" ,r • f • «"'^ the li: 30. Can the caT Sge 'itse^' nto :tnT\rTr '"■ 3^:^wr, 'Tou t ^rht:™d"r "^ v^'l-- «" o.^. i.an the cat assume the form of a rat? 36. COMPOSITION EXERCISE III. 443 We shall ies before to the ' Follow him to >ppened 3 door, 3 go to water. carried Jlothes. d us to : them every ? 26. rhat is "idlest an do. 3 ogre tiles, you? annot I 36. The /nice bjgan to run over the floor. 37. If we hear the noise of the carriage, we shall not enter ^he castle. 38. Run to meet the nianjuis and the princess. 3i). You are welcome ! 10. Let us see these buildings, if 3M)i please. 41. We went up fiist, the cat followed us. 42. Our friends were to come and see us. 43. They did nol dare to ome in. 44. We saw the great wealth he possessed. 45. It will be my fault alone, if I am not the king's son-in-law. 46. Cats do not become great lords. 47. They run after mice to amuse themselves. B. All the proper' y a miller had was a mill, an ass and a cat. He left the mill to his eldest son and the cat to the youngest. The latter pnid that he would have to die of hunger, while his eldest brother would be able to earn his living decently. Th' cat pretended not to hear this speech. He told his master not to be troubled, but to give him a bag, and to get a pair of boots made for him. His master no longer despaired of being helped in his misery, for he had seen the cat play many clever tricks. He had seen him catch many rats and mice. Then the cat put on his l^oots, and seizing his bag with his fore-paws, he went off where there were many rabbits. Havnig put some bran into his bag, he stretched himself out, as if he were dead. A giddy young rabbit poked himself into the bag, the cat drew the strings, and caught him. Then he went to the king s palace, carry- ing his prey with him. He \s ent up to the king's apartments, and making a bow, he told the king that the Marquis de Carabas had commissioned him to present a rabbit to his majesty. Another time, he hid himself in some wheat, and caught two partridges which had gone into his bag. He presented these to the king also, and the king received them with pleasure. He carried thus, from time to time, game to the king. One day, the king went for a drive with his daughter, on the banks of the river. The cat advised his master to batne in the river, where the king would pass by. The marquis did not know what use it would be, but he followed the cat's advice. As the king was passing, the cat screamed, "Help! help! a man is drowning!" The king recognized the cat, and ordered his guards to go to the man's help. Now (or), the cat had hid his "master's clothes under a \m 444 COMPOSITION EXERCISE III. ff ff. !n,r V i^'"'',*^?. "*f ''^^ «^ ^^'« ^'i"«'« wardrobe went for some very fine o btlnng for the marquis. The king's daiL^h- ter fe 1 m love with the marquis, for he was very fine-look S^. Tnto t ;: k "'' '^''''"' i-ightenod his good looks. ^ Then he gJt into the kings carriage and took part in the drive. The cat wasdehghted to see that his plun^as succcedingrand go"g ahead he came upon so.ne peasants who were mowing in a meadow He ordered them to say to the king, if thf k n^ marlif %r'Tr^?t^ '' ''^'^ *^^^* '' befonged "o tSf marquis. They did not fail to say so (le) to the king. Then the cat came upon some liarvesters, and told them that if they did not say that the field of wheat which they w'ere cutting belonged to the marquis, they would be cut upL fine reZdT:A J^' ""'^^ ^^'i^^ "^-- «^^d it was, .^id they 7tht b?f ^«l-«ged to the marquis. The king rejoiced at this, but was astonished at the great possessions of the marquis. Now all these lands belonged to a rich ogre, who ived in a great castle. The cat made enquiries as to who this ogre was, and what he could do, and asked to speak to him, saying that he wished to have the honour of pay tg him his respects. He was civilly received by the ogre. Then th^ a'lTon' Thro'; ''' 7' w ^-^"^1,"^'^^^"^-^ himseS int After a liT ! ^ T f"ghtened, and fled to the eave-troughs. iTp t7l ^^ ?'^''^* T""^ ^°^"' ^"d to^d the ogre that h^ had been assured that the ogre could also change himself mto a rat or a mouse, but that he considered that imp- .sibb The ogre replied that he would soon see, and changing himi self into a mouse began to run over the floor. The cat pounced on the mouse and ate it. The kin., seeing the col?'"Thr^? ^T"^ the drawbridge and'^enS the court The cat ran to meet him r-d said, "Your maiestv IS welcome to the castle of the Marquis d; Carabas." 'tIiI king went m first the marquis and princess followed him In a great hall they found a wonderful repast which h^d been prepared by the r^re for his friends. ^The kin. and ^relt'^'writh'r.)^^^ -^^ *^^ ^««d q-^i*-« -^ the great wealth of the marquis, and the king said to him, thl^Vncfs.'^ "^ ^^^■^"-^^^•" ^^1 ^-^ '^y ^« ~d id carried 3 went for j's daugh- e-]ooking, len lie got The cat md going ving in a the king sd to the J. Tlien 1 that, if hey were ip as fine and they ' rejoiced is of tlie gre, who > to who speak to /ing him rhen the self into troughs, gre that himself p' '^sible. ng him- The cat ing the red the majesty » The id him. ch had ng and nd the o him, narried COMPOSITION EXERCISE IV. 445 EXERCISE IV. (Un nez gol^, pp. 402-3.) A. 1. We have decided to make our rounds on foot. 2. They were armed from head to foot. 3. I was delighted that we had the opportunity. 4. We were going to a gentleman's house who was not at home. 5. He was more of a talker, as it seems, than the others. 6. The coachman drove his sleigh at full speed. 7. However fast you may run, I shall catch (rattraper) you. 8. Before I could take off my cashmere scarf, he was washing my face. 9. In such weather as it is, I do not venture into the street. 10. They looked at us a moment. 11. We rushed again at them. 12. I profited by the fact that he could not defend himself. 13. He thought he was the victim of an ambuscade. 14. I got rid of the three men. 15. He did not think the joke in good taste. 16. We French look at people (gens) straight in the eye. 17. I rendered the same service to myself as the peasant had rendered me. 18. Gratitude is less nimble than fear. 19. We were guilty only of too much philanthropy. 20. Those present spoke Russian, and did not understand French. B. Dumas, being at St. Petersburg, ventured into the street one day, having only the tip of his nose to the air. He had armed himself against the cold, by (en) wrapping himself in a great Astrachan coat, and by pulling over his ears a fur-lined cap. At first, he was surprised at the little impression the cold made upon him. He laughed to himself at the stories he had heard told about it. Still he noticed that those whom he met looked at him with anxiety, but without saying anything to him. Soon, a gentleman, who was passing, shouted (crier) to him in Russian, but he did not know a word of Russian, and continued on his way. He soon met another man, who was driving his sleigh. The latter also shouted to him in Russian. Finally he met a labourer, who picked up a hand- ful of snow, and rushing at Dumas, rubbed his face and nose vigorously. In such weather, Dumas thought this a rather poor joke, and he gave the labourer a blow with his fist. Then two peasants looked at him a moment, and rushing at him, held his arms. The labourer, after having picked up • * # 446 COMPOSITION EXERCISE V. ■ jlij :|; another I ndful of snow, rusliod at him a^min, and becan agan. hia rubHng. Dumas thought ho was the victim of some -nistake, and lie -.-IV] for help. An ..{iicer, who liad What, exclaim.d Dumas, ''don't you see what those scamps were doing?" The officer replied that they were renderim. hmi a great service by (en) rubbing his face with snow, fo? Dumas had his nose frozen. A passer-by, adch-essii.g the otlicer, told him that his nose was frocving too. The )fficer stooped, picked up some snow, and rubbed liis nose Then Dumas put off after the labourer, whom he would not liave overtaken if some people had not stopped the way. When Dumas arrived where the labourer was, he gave him ten roubles, and explained the affair to him. Those present re commended Dumas to pay more attention in future to his nose. During the rest of his i-ounds he never lost sight of it. EXERCISE V. (La pipe de Jc. . Bart, pp. 404-6.) A. 1. It is not too h.te for us to change our habits 2 Keflect on it and you will be convinced. 3. We did not wish to attract attention. 4. They did not turn Jean Bart out of the palace. 5. For he was a rear-admiral. 6. They did not go and tell the king that a man whose name was Jean Bart was smoking in his ante-chamber. 7. We come to ask a favour of the king. 8. The rear-admiral has to take the kings cabinet by s.irprise. 9. We shall lay aside our famous garments. 10. The king put upon Jean Bart's neck a chain ot gold. 11. Captains receive gold chains as a reward for great deeds. 12. He showed the petitioners into the kin^s presence. 13. Are you a good enough friend of the captafn, for there to be no need of that? 1^ It will be enough if you tell him that I ask to speak to him. 15. Let us advance towards the door. IG. The orders are that no one can enter. 1/. ±le looked at us with astonishment. 18. The officer observed to us that no smoking was allowed. 19. Do not keep us waiting. 20. If you keep me waiting, I shall smoke, uii shall be obliged to smoke, if we wait here 22 We sxxall put them out. if they smoke. 23. I defy you to put me COMPOSITION EXERCISE V. 447 Find began victim of , who had viis angry. use scamps rendering snow, for ^ssii.L,' the rho >ffic('r >se, Then not liavo y. When liim ton )resent re- ire to his iight of it. abits. 2. I not wisli art out of y did not ^ean Bart to always smoked when he was waitin-,. The officer said i.- would be obliged to put him out. But it was not easy to put Jean Bart out ot loor,s, so the officer chose the less of two evils, and told the king that there was an officer in the ante- chamber who was smoking and who dared the courtier- to put 448 COMPOSITION EXERCISE VI. him out. The king told the officer to let Jean Bart finish his pipe and tlion to show liiiii in. But Joan Bart did not wait. Throwing his pipe away, he rushed into the king's cal)inet. He conducted the conver8ati(tn with much skill. He got many compliments paid to him regarding his exit from the port of Dunkirk and his burning of tip enemy's siiips. Then kneeling on one knee he asked pardon for one of his sailors who had killed his opponent in a duel. The king hesitated, but finally granted him what he asked for. When Jean Bart came out, he was surrounded by the courtiers. One of the latter asked him how he got out of the p "t of Dunkirk, when he was blockaded by the English fleet. 1-iey all said it would be a great pleasure to them to know (it). "Well," said he, "you shall see. You are the English fleet which is blockading me." And he gave kicks and blows to those who were in front of him, and opened a passage for himself. When he arrived at the door, he told them that that was how he got out of the port of Dunkirk. EXERCISE VI. (La derni^re classe, pp. 407-11.) A. 1. I was afraid, the more so as the master would ques- tion me. 2. We did not run away from school. 3. Were the Prussians drilling in the meadow? 4. Did you see people standing near the bulletin-board 1 5. The blacksmith ran across the square, 6. We were busy reading the notice. 7. If you hasten, you will get to school in time. 8. Are you making fun of me 1 9. They entered the school out of breath. 10. They stopped their ears when they were repeating their lessons. 11. Relying on this noise we gained our seats w^ith- out being seen. 1 2. Everything was quiet, as on. a Sunday morning. 13. You may well imagine he was afraid. 14. Were they going to begin without us? 15. They sat down at their desks. 16. The teacher puts on his frock coat only on inspection days. 1 7. What surprises us most is to see the postman sitting on a bench at the back of the room. 18. Did you bring your ABC book? 19. We shall teach nothing but German. 20, He asked us to be attentive. 21. That is what we had posted up at the school. 22. They hardly knew how to read. 23. Am book.^ tiresome? 24. It pains me to leave COMPOSITION EXERCISE VI. 449 finisli his not wait. s cabinet. Ho got fioni the 08. Then lis sailors hesitated, lean Bart ne of the irk, when 1 it would " said he, blockading e in front le arrived out of the ">uld ques- Were the ee people mith ran otice. 7. Are you of breath, ting their 3ats w'ith- fi Sunday 'aid. 14. sat down coat only to see the 18. Did thing but it is what :new how J to leave old friends. 25. Did you come and sit down on the bench ? 26. Will they regret not having conio oftener? 27. Will the fatherland pass away ? 28. When wo were at that point in our reflections, we heard our names called. 29. We got con- fused at the first word. 30. That's how things go when you do not know how to speak your language. 3i. We shall .see what will happen. 32. Let us not put it off till to-morrow. 33. A.e you anxious to see your children educated? — We are. 34. Would you prefer to send them to work on the land ? 35. The master made us water his garden. 30. As long as a people retains its language, it will not become a slave. 37. You would have said that the poor man wished to go away. 38. You should have seen how we worked ! 39. No one pays attention to them. 40. He did not raise his eyes from the page. 41. The desks were worn by use. 42. Let us pack our trunks, for we must leave to-morrow. 43. It was so funny that I hey all wanted to laugh. 44. Shall you forget it? 45. He seeii\s tall to me. 46. Can you finish the phrase? 47. We motion to them to go away. 48. Do not go away. 49. If we do not go away, we shall not see our friend. B. Little Frantz was late that morning, and he was afraid of being scolded, and he did not know the first word about the participles. The weather was so warm that the thought came to him to play truant. But he had the strength to resist, although {hien que with subj.) the blackbirds were whistling in the woods, and he ran to school. As he was passing the mayor's office, he saw people who were rending the notices. And he thought without stopping, "What is the matter 1 Is there bad news again ?" The blacksmith and his apprentice shouted to him, as he was running across the square, not to {de ne pas) be in such a hurry, that he would get to school soon enough. But Frantz thought the black- smith was making fun of him, and he entered the school yard. Generally you could hear (impf. ind.) out into the street the noise that was made, but that day everything was still. They [on) were not repeating their lessons out loud, and tlie master was not striking the table with his ruler. The little boy's comrades were already in their places, and the master was going up and down with his ruler under his arm, and Frantz had to enter in the midst of that calm. Then he noticed the 29 II ,i 450 COMPOSITION EXERCISE VI. If I II 1 _..>-.* master's beautiful green frock coat, and liis silk skull-cap. He noticed also, at the back of the room, sitting on benches, the old mayor and postman, who were holding open on their knees old ABC books. Then M. Hamel told the children that it was the last time he would have (/aire) the class, that it was their last lesson in French. These words upset little Frantz. Then he was angry with himself for the time that was lost. His books, which seemed a little ago so heavy to carry, were now old friends whom he could not leave. The little boy understood now why poor M. Hamel had put on his Sunday clothes, and why the old men had come to school. They were thanking the master for his forty years' services. Then he heard his name called. What would he not have given to be able to recite the rule of the participles ! But the master did not scold him, for he was sufficiently punished. He had said to iiiraself that he had plenty of time, that he would put off his education. He had claimed to be French and he could neither speak nor write his own language. The people of Alsatia were not anxious enough to see their children educated. They sent them to work in the spinning- factories or on the land. And the teacher himself had something to reproach himself with. When he wanted to go fishing for trout, he did not hesitate to give them a lioliday. Then M. Hamel spoke of the French language. And the little boy was astonished to see how he understood. "The French language," said he, "is the finest language in the world. It must never be forgotten." Whatever the master said seemed so easy to the boy. The poor man wanted to make all his knowledge go into the heads of his class before departing. Then they began to write. The copy-lines were, — France, Alsatia, and everybody was diligent. Even the little fellows, who were tracing their " strokes," paid no attention to the may-bugs which came in. And M. Hamel was motion- less in his desk. For forty years he had been there, and now he wished to carry away in his eye all the objects in his school. The walnut trees which he had planted had grown large, and the hop-vine encircled the windows. And now he and his sister were to go away from the country for ever. Then he gave the children their history lesson. The little fellows sang ba, be, bi, md old Hauser having put on his kull-cap. benches, on their children ass, that iet little me that leavy to ^e. The it on his ) school, services, lot have But the unished. that he French mguage. lee their pinning- elf had id to go lioliday. Vnd the "The in the 5 master mted to s before were, — he little ntion to motion- md now 5 in his I grown now he or ever, le little on his COMPOSITION EXERCISE VII. 451 spectacles spelled the letters with them. When the church clock rang noon, M. Hamel rose in his desk, and turning towards the black-board, he wrote with a piece of chalk, "Hurrah for Fxance." EXERCISE VII. (La chfevre de M. Ssguin, pp. 411-15.) A. 1. They all went off in the same way. 2. I could not make out their nature at all. 3. Do you weary being at home 1 4. Do not get discouraged. 5. We are getting used to it. {). How pretty the goat is! 7. Her beard was as pretty as that of a non-commissioned officer. 8. Will she let herself be milked ? 9. Yes, she will never move, nor put her foot into the dish. 10. I shall go now and then to see whether you are comfortable. 11. That's one that does not grow weary. 12. The tether rubs her neck. 13. From that day she cropped no more grass. 14. She turned her head in the direction of the mountain, 15. Does that seem insipid to you? 16. Is anything the matter with you? 17. Did you notice that the goat was pulling on its tether? 18. Do not let her go to the mountain. 19. Did you drop your dish? 20. Do not sit down in the grass. 21. She was not tied too short. 22. Shall I lengthen the rope? 23. What will you do when the wolf comes? 24. The wolf will not make fun of her horns. 25. Let us not fight with him, 26. That makes no difference, I shall not stay with you. 27. He will tie her to a stake for fear she should go away. 28. Hardly had he closed the door, when she ran off. 29. They bowed to the earth. 30. Those flowers smell sweet, do they not? 31. You may well imagine that she was happy ! 32. She had grass up over her horns ! 33. The white goat jumps up on her feet again. 34. There, she is off ! 35. I .should have said there were ten goats. 36. Let us jump across this stream. 37. Go and stretch yourself out on a flat rock. 38. We did not notice M. Seguin's field. 39. We laughed till we cried. 40. How little that house is. we can never find room in it. 41. Listen to the bells. 42. They are bringing home the flocks. 42. Do you think of the goat ? — I do. 44. I have a mind to return. 462 COMPOSITION EXERCISE VII. 45. But I can never i^et used tng, white hair, soft eyes and black hoofs ! M. Seguin tied hk goat to a st^ke in a meadow surrounded with hawthorn, where she was very comfortable She ate the grass so heartily that M. Seguin thougtit sh^ would never grow weary with him, but she did grow weary' One day she looked at the mountain, and from that moment the grass of the field seemed tasteless to her. She said to herself that one must be very happy on the mountain, that an ox nught crop grass in a field but that goats needed room. When M Seguin noticed that his goat was getting lean, lie knew that something was the matter with her, but he did not knovv what it was. She said to him that she was pining away, and that she wished to go into the mountain. It was not the grass that was lacking ; it was not the rope that was too short, ^^g"!^ told her that the wolf would eat her, but she said she would butt him, she would fight with him all night. But M Seguin said he would save her in spite of herself; and he shut his goat into a stable and locked the door securely. But he forgot the window, and the goat ran away. The old fir trees welcomed her The chestnut trees caressed her, the ..olden broom smelled sweet. The whole mountain received her hke a queen It was there that there was grass, Hne ami sweet! And the wild flowers overflowed with juices' She [Mil COMPOSITION EXERCISE VIIL 453 r).'i. If Let us wallowed in the fallen leaves; she ran (courir) through the bushes ; she was afraid of nothing. If the torrents .splashed her with foam, she stretched herself out on a lock juid dried herself in the sun. Suddenly it was evening. The fields disappeared in the mist. You could see no longer any- thing but the smoke of M. Soguin's cottage. There was a howl, and she thought of the wolf. Then M. Seguin blew his horn in the valley. She heard it and had a mind to return, but she rememljerod the stake and the rope, and thought it would be better to stay. There was a noise in the leaves, and turning round she saw the wolf. There he was on his haunches. He knew he would eat her, and was in no hurry. She remem- bered the story of another goat of M. Seguin, and being a brave goat, she said to herself that she would not let herself be eaten at once. She had no hope of killing the wolf, but she assumed a defensive attitude. The fight lasted all night. She forced the wolf to retieut more than ten times. The stars danced in the sky, and she said to herself, «' If I only hold out till daylight!" The stars died out on the horizon; a hoarse cock crowed in the valley ; the wolf ate the poor little goat. EXERCISE VIIL (La patto de dindon, pp. 416-19.) J. 1 . Do you need a lesson from me ? 2. He would like to cure *» 4^i it. 3. They were ten years old. 4. We had a large sum, which was intended to pay for our breakfast. f). Do you still remember his name ? 6. Their name is Cou- ture. 7. The object is composed of what is called a tibia. 8. He looked as if he were walking. 9. Will the fingers open and shut? 10, How can you make it move? 11. If you go to the theatre, will you follow th'^ development of the drama? 12. A dazzling brightness passed before our eyes. 13. Did you think you wpre present at a miracle? 14. You are older and sharper than we. 15. Wh withdrew. 16. Did you go away too? 17. We shall soon h-j^-rn the way to do it. 18. What fun we shall have! 19. Give it to us, we be^^ of you. 20. Won't you give it to U8? 21. We'll give you*ten cents for it. 22. He is making game of us. 23. How much m.^t-i1l^(mn aiBti I1 1 Hi , A 454 COMPOSITION EXERCISE VIII. m J did they want for it? 24. He ran after us again. 25. How they must have got on in the world ! 26. How they know the human heart ! 27. He knows liiinself no k)nger. 28. Put a cent into my hand. 29. He h a business man. 30. Do not rush after it. 31. That does not amuse me now at all. 32. Disenchantment seizes me. 33. The prospect of three weeks of dry bi-ead did not aiimse me. o4. These traits of character will not awaken again in you. 35, People have often called the feelings of children puerilities. 36. The hearts whe -e passions grow are the same. 37. The best way of guiding •. boy is to observe him. 38. It is useful to laugh at one's self now and then. 39. Sons are not always like their fathers. B. Ernest was at school on a Monday. He had fifteen cents which he had brought back from home to pay for his breakfast. On his return he found one of his comrades who had a fine turkey's foot. When his comrade said to him to come and see, he ran up. His comrade, by a movement of his hand, was opening and closing the fingers like the fingers of a human hand. He stood amazed every time the four fingers opened and closec. How could the dead foot move? The comrade was shrewder than he, and when he saw Ernest's great enthu- siasm he put the turkey's foot back into his pocket. Ernest could stand it no longer. He begged his comrade to give him the dead foot. His comrade told him to be gone. " If you will not give it to me, will you sell it to me 1 " He offered his comrade five cents for it, then ten cents, and then twenty cents. But the comrade demanded forty cents. After a few seconds he put fifteen cents into his comrade's hand, and wrote out a note for twenty-five cents for the remainder. After a couple of minutes he knew the secret as well as his comrade. For a couple of minutes it anfused him highly. But soon it amused him no longer. Sadness and regret came, and then bitterness and anger. After a few minutes he seized the tur- key's foot and threw it over the wall, so as never to see it any more. The recollection of this often comes back to him. He finds in himself again the child with the turkey's foot. And that turkey's foot has often been of great service to him. In the midst of a foolish action, he stops and says to himself, " Will you always be the same 1 " COMPOSITION EXERCISE. IX. 455 EXERCISE IX. (Hortibus, pp. 419-22.) A. 1. It was a holiday at the school. 2. The hammers were making a greater noise than all tlie rest. 3. They rose up to listen. 4. No one stopped at his door. 5. Are you packing your trunk'/ G. They will appear every fiftecui minutes. 7. If he were to show the tip of his nose, I should close the door. 8. Are you going away? 9. Let them go away too. 10. We are not waiting for the doctor, or the nurse.^ 11. The father came in circumspectly, the mother came in briskly, the little girl came in on tiptoe. 12 How long has It pained you? 13. On washing days the mother used to make hearth-cakes. 14. Is the platform in the college or in the open air? 15. I hear hurried steps. 16. Let us not go there. 17. There was no more room on the platform. 1«. Ihey gazed affectionately on their child. 19. Please go and see who are there. 20. The colonel had a hat with a plume. 21. Tiie si)eech of the sons-preYet was on a bit of paper rolled round his finger. 22. We could not hear a word ot it. 23. It was only a monotonous hum. 24. The certifi- cate was pasted inside. 25. The principal's signature was there 2G. We saw the academic palm-wreath in the form of a head-pieca. 27. Did you make a mistake in your Latin prose? 28.^ No, my paper was perfect. 29. Your paper was bristling with corrections, 30. Your paper contained (c-w- tenir) this frightful error-'Miortibus." 31. The master underlined it three times with red ink. 32. The awful word was posted on the wall. 33. His lips moved, he called his niother 34. Hortibus had vanished (s'A^anouir). 35. It was m the land of dreams. 36. Good-bye to Hortibus. 37 Both have come. 38. The winner received his book. 39. They put the wreath on his brow. 40. Are you better? 41. Yes I am much better. 42. The open air, walks, and exercise will cure you, but above pV no Latin prose. 7?. Vacation is i- word that smells as sweet as a bouqnet of flowers ! The decorators are busy putting up the drapery Ihere are people everywhere, jostling one another (se houscu- ler) m the halls and stairways. A platform has been erected tor the distribution of the prizes. But there is onp. l,'f.fl« c'ot iftl li^i I If-*- 1 456 COMPOSITION EXERCISE X. boy in the sick-ward who is awaiting some one. The dootor comes in g.-ea haste and goes away, and the nurse also Bu they are not the ones the little patient is waiting for He is awaitrng some country-people- a n,a„, a w,.man,lnd a young g.l. 1 here they come! They enter tlie sick-ward. The? clasp h,s hands and embrace him. They ask what is the matter with him. He had had a heavy feehng 1^ 1 is head nco the Latin prose paper. But it would soon^be gone. As nlhlt,^' ?,'"T"'' ""'^"'"' the platform in the ^ourt li I 'itn if'' "T'"' '"T^ ''°'™ *° ■'• The motlier and tiFh H 1, 1 1™"'*! '""'" '"'"• ^"t ''°^' eould he fall asleep with the hubbub under the window ! The platform wa« f un' The colonel was there, and the som-i»-eyet in his d ™s-c^t a i embroidered with silver. There we.-e so man^ p i™^;;^^ p les of book., and a nmuntain of wreaths! The brLs-band blared forth and everybody applauded. The .oJ-,S ^"e but not a word w.^s heard of his speech. Then a Sack ^wn ZZZt" '■^r'""?"" '"nS-.'^ '■^"'1 He hummed away^anS the n,other fel asleep. Tiennet became impatient. Wou"d wa rthe oit kT," ""u' ^'■^ heautifulTgilt-edged btk was m the pile. But he could not see the winner's name And he fell asleep too. He dreamed that he had made a fr ghlf" 1 barban.s,n in Ins Latin prose, and that another had win the first prize The awtui word "hortibus" haunted him It TT I ^1^*"* o"' "5 tongoe and made grimaces at him b^s ""^The fr"' "PTI^..";'^ ^^^^' *'>^''<' ™^ "° more '.horTi- bus. The father and httle sister brought up the nrize and laid It on the httle sick boy's bed. The^docto^^ cameToo ™d said the boy was better, the wreath on the brow had worked "n^Sn'prr"'^'^ ^™""^ """P'^'^ "'« --• •>- ^-^t EXERCISE X. (Chagrin d'un vieux forgat, pp. 423-4.) A. 1 Did Yves not go to conduct the convicts? 2 The h/rnVrif y "^'^.^^^ ^"^"^ ^'^^^ conversation with him ? 5. It was to pass the time. 6. They did not have b^ COMPOSITION EXERCISE X. 467 taces 7. Does he wear spectacles? 8. People did m,t want anything to do with me. 9. He had stolen a carter's whip. W. Me would not consent to listen to Yves. 11 The cage and the sparrow were his most precious possessions. 12 He had tamed the sparrow and it knew his voice. 13 If he has to build a cage fit for the journey, he will procure wood. U He will paint it, so that it may be pretty. 15 Do you remember the very words of Yves? 16. He will eat coarse bread like any other bird. 17. They embarked for the journey. 18. Will that be of any use to him? 19 You must take it with you. 20. Big tears run down his cheeks. Jl. The cage door opened. 22. Was the bird frightened? 23. The poor bird struggled and died. 24. It was carzied away m the wake of the ship. 25. He applied to me. 26. That wouM never occur to him. 27. We staid silent in our place. 28 Did you not feel dreadfully alone? 29. Tears dimmed their sight. 30. Did they laugh to see the old man weep? 31 Will you not keep the cage? 32. This cage was made for the little bird. 33. He wished to leave me this legacy 34 We did not wish to pain the old man. 35. He seemed to despise the thing. ^ ^. The transport-ship was about to sail for New Caledonia, and Yves was taking some convicts to it with his gunboat Amongst the convicts was an old man who had a sparrow in a cage. He had been arrested for the fifth or sixth time. He had to eat and he had no trade, and so (par consequent) he had stolen a bag of potatoes. He said they migiit have let him die m France instead of sending him away o& there. He had obtained permission to take away his sparrow. And then h^ had got wood and old wire and green paint, and he had made a cage for the sparrow. The sparrow had only the dark-toloured bread of the prisons to eat, but he seemed happy, and hopped about like any other bird. But during the passage to the transport-ship the bird flew away and fel? into the sea. It was a moment of sorrow for the convict He saw his bird struggle and die, and could do nothing for it. The first impulse was to ask for help, but the impulse was arrested by the consciousness of his personal degradation. Nobody would have pity on his sparrow ; nobody would listen to his request. Who would stop the ship to pick up again a 11 458 convict's di COMPOSITION EXERCISE XI-XII. bird irowning body grow more distant on the sea foam, and lie feJt himself very much alone. The bird was no lunger in the cage, and so he handed it to Yves, who had listened to his story. And Yves not wisliing to seem to despise the thing which had cost the old convict so much work, accepted the gift. EXERCISE XI. (L'Avare, pp. 425-7.) Harpagon is a miser. Valfere is his steward, and Maltre Jacques is his cook and coachman. 'Jlie raiser is goinij to give a supper, and has invited eight or ten people. He wishes good cheer, but does not wish to give much money. He thinks that a clever man can make good cheer with little money. Val^re, the steward, says the same thing. Ten people have been invited, but the raiser says that if there is enough to eat for eight, there will be plenty for ten. There is nothing more hurt- tul to men than to eat to excess. Frugality must rule in the repasts we give, and one must remember the maxim, "We should eat to live, and not live to eat." Harpagon will liave these words cut m letters of gold on his mantel-piece. Maitre Jacques will not fill the table with soups, entries and roasts, but with those things of which people eat sparingly. Then the miser addresses the coachman, tells him to clean the ^rriage, and have the horses ready to drive to the fair But Harpagon makes the poor brutes observe such strict fastin- that they caimot walk. Poor Maitre Jacques has pity on his neighbour. It breaks his heart to see his horses suffer Thev cannot drag themselves along, and he has not the heart to whip them. EXERCISE XII. (Waterloo, pp. 428-31). Tk"** r VT^®"*® y*'''® *^'®® thousand five hundred of us. 2 Ihe light cavalry was supporting them. 3. We did not wear helmets. 4. The cavalry descended like a batterin- ram of bronze, so to speak. 5. A cloud of grape-shot burst at their right. 6. Do you hear that mighty stampin-? 7 COMPOSITION EXERCISE XIL 459 )or little t himself B, and so y. And had coat Maltre joing to e wishes e thinks money. irve been > eat for re hurt- B in the I, "We ill have Maitre roasts, Tlien an the ". But fasting on his They )art to IS. 2. d not ;ering- burst J? 7. Nothing like it will ever be seen. 8. Murat had been at the taking of the redoubt of the Moskowa, but he was lacking at Waterloo. 9. Something like these stories appears in the epics of another age. 10. The infantry was taking aim at the cavalry. 11. The English listened to that tide rising. 12. Three thousand shouted, "Long live the Emperor." 13. There was an awful noise like that of an earthquake. 14. We have just noticed a ditch. 15. The second rank forced the first into the gulf. 16. The horses overturned and crushed the riders. 17. There was no way of retreat. 18. Fifteen hun- dred men were buried there. 19. It was a grave into which many other dead bodies were thrown on the day after the battle. 20. Did he examine the ground? 21. He asked a question of the peasant. 22. He was not warned by the peasant. 23. Napoleon's end came from a pet .ant's shake of the head. 24. It is time for Napoleon to fall. 25. Napoleon by himself counts for more than all others. 26. The moral order, like the material order, depends on principles. B. There were eleven hundred and ninety -seven of them, and they had beliind them one hundred and eighty lancers! At nine o'clock the bugles sounded and all the bands played. They came and took their place in the second line, where they had two iron wings, Kellermann on the left and Milhaud on the right. Then was seen a great sight. All that cavalry began to move. Like one man it came down the hill of la Belle-Alliance, disappeared in the valley and, reappearing on the other side, ascended the dreadful slope of Mont-Saint- Jean. There were two columns of them. Like two great serpents of steel they stretched out towards the plateau. Nothing like it was ever seen. The mass had become a monster. Through a great smoke you could see a pell-mell of helmets, swords, and of the rumps of horses, and above them the cuirasses, like the scales on tlie hydra. It was like a vision of Titans climbing Olympus. Twenty-six battalions of infantry were waiting for the twenty-six squadrons of cavalry. The infantry could not see the c.valry, but it could hear the noise of the horses, the rattle of the armour and the clanking of the swords. Then suddenly the helmets, the trumpeters, the standards and the horses ap])eared on the crest of the plateau. The cuirassiers arrived at the crest, and suddenly ']'< 460 COMPOMlTiON KXEUCISE XII. tliey saw l^etween tlierasnlvos aiul tlio English the hollow mad of Ohairi. Tfc was a friglitful ravine, two fafciioniH di op. Horses and riders foil into that graven and crushed one another. When the abyss was full of men and horses, the others marched on them and passed over. Napoleon did not see this ravine when he ordered the charg(!, and tiie peasant of whom he asked the question replied that there was no hollow road. Why was it not possible that Napoleon should win the battle 1 B(icause a new series of facts was preparing. The moment had come for that man to fall. His weight was disturbing the equilibrium of human destiny. Keeking lilood, cemeteries, mothers' tears were complaining. Napoleon's fall was settled. YOCA.BULARY. FRt.NCH-ENGUSH. a [a], Ji flg. piuH, indio. avoir. k [a], to, towards, at, for, in, into, around, by, with, from ; — voire, vionlre, by your watch. abaisser [abeHo], to lowor ; «' — , to lower one'H self, fall, ^ k, bo loweretl. abandonner [al)udnne], to aban- don, foraake. abattre [ahatr], to throw down, knock down, caat down, dis- hearten ; ahattn, p.p., disheait- ened, discouraged, (l(;preased. ab^c^daire f abesede : r], ni. , primer, spelling-book. abime [abiim], m., abyss. abondamment [abSdamd], abun- dantly. abondant faboda], abundant. abord (d') [d aho:r], at first, first (of ail), at the outset. abreuver [abroeve], to water, fill, soak. abri [abri], m., shelter, cover; A r — de, in the shelter of. abriter [abrite], to shelter, shield. absorber [apsorbe], to absorb, en- gross. absurde [apsyrd], absurd. abuser [abyze], to make a bad use (of, de), abuse. acad^mique [akademik], academic. accent [aksa], m., accent, tone. accepter [aksepte], to accept. accident [aksida], m., accident, incident. acclimater [aklimate], to acclima- tize ; «' — , to become acclima- tized. 461 accompagtier [akijpape], to ac- company. accorder [akorde], to grant, con- accoster [aknste], to come along- side (nav.). accoupler [akuplo], to couple, fasten. accourir [akuri:r], § 104, to run or hast ' up ; run or hasten to (•' (i's aid. accuurut [akury], 3 sg. p. def. (trcourir. accoutumer [akutyme], to accus- tom, habituate. accusateur [akyzatf)(^:r], accusing. accuser [akyze], to accuse, blame, reproach. achat [aja], m., purchase. acheter [ajte], § 158, to buy, pur- chase. acheminer (s') [s a f mine], to take one's way, set out. achever [a|ve], § li58, to finish, complete ; — de + infin., to finish. acier [asje], m. , steel. acqu^rir [akeriir], § 162, to ac- quire. acquis [aki], p.p. acqu4rir. acteur [aktoiir], m., actor. action [aksjS], f., actii .i. actuellement [aktqelma], now, at tliis very time. addition [adisjo], f. , bill, reckoning. adieu [adj0], m., good-bye, fare- well. adjurer [ad.'jyre], to adjure, be- seech. admettre [admetr], § 198, to admit, IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) ^0 // /. f/j 1.0 I.I 2,8 1^ |5 L25 i 1.4 IM 1.6 Uy^- Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-450? ^^ i\ iV :\ \ '^\ ^\^ %^ 6\ I.' ^ f y f/j f 462 VOC.IBULARY, i admirer [admire], to admire. tarice!°" ^'^''''"''^J' J' f- ^Jmit- •^^,°^,^f/s').r« a"«"•. i^^ order to. t^f/t^i"^' -^S' '' «^^^«r that, that (takes subjunctive) ^ «-?-i({.?, how old is he 9 age fase], aged, old. agile [asil], nimble, swift agir[a3i:rj, toact, operate, work move, manage. ' ' agiter (s') [s a.,ite], to stir, move, bo or grow restless, agneau[apo], m.,Iamb. TeaS'nt.f'^"^'^'^' ^^--^I^' ah.'[aoraO,ah!, hah!, oh! "afdS;£i*'---^--^ aider Cede], to aid, help. ..ssist. ^'fratfnf ' '^"*^ ' ^^^^"' P-- ailefel], f., wing. aimable (emablj, kind, amiable. ain^ fene]. eldest. ainsi [esij. thus, so ; — nue as aiK*?'^'«'r-<^"-''>«otosay: air le.rj, m., air, atmosphere ; air- look, appearance; d V ~, en I' — intheair;/e^m„^_ the open air ; en plein -, in the open air ; amr^'-,/,, toseemto. ' ?S? ^%''i' ""V ^''^•^«' bronze. i ^'^^ f^^'^'J' f--^ gladness ; ease, con- v.nience; « ^o» -, cumfortably, at your case, just as you like •suit yourself. ^ ^' ais6 [ezej, easy. aisement [ezomn], easily. lirlV' r ''^- P*"^'- ^"^J- ^^oir. ajouter [a.nitel, to add. f.H* '^;) f'l --^Ibre]; ^.^w -. Anfh rirV^'^'-y ^^- °f France. Alah[allci], m., Allah. allemand [aimn], adj., German; It ~T' ,"^'' *'Grman (the laneuaffe^ alleraleL§100.to^.o;--fiX^; to go to, go and -, y~de ban cmir] to go at (a thing) with spirit ^e«-, to go away, depart, set out afe-roM*-e«, go a^ay ; quelle s^en aille!, let her go (away)!:«z/o,^5.^ come!, co'fr- age!, up!, arise !;-_^L m'- m,^.e.i.,t.gotomeet;-o/.er- cher, go for, go and get; _ tronvn', go and find, goto;- (of garments) fit. ^ ' succcn out; — ?/M coni), to deal or administer a blow;'..'-, to stretcli out, extend. allumer[alymej, to light. alors [alo.-rj, then. ^t^Z^t^'Tl "• P^- ^•' A'^^tia. fSr. r f'^^^^'"^^t^fJ' alternate, tiiternatiiicr. » amadou [amadu], m. , tinder, punk ; Mn,>r,d'.~, red lips(of animals) ame[a!m], f., soul, hear<- amener famnej, § jss. jo bring. FRENCH-ENGLISH. 463 air, con- am^ricain [amerikf], American, amertume [amertyni], f., bitter- ness. ami [ami], m., friend; won—, my good fellow. amie [ami], f., friend, loved one. amical [amikal], friendly, amiraut^ [amirote], f., admiralty. amiti6 [amitje], f., friendship, anection. amour [amu:r], m. in sing, and I. in pi., love, affection; nn — (/'? petite c/tevre, a dear little goat. amoureux [amur^], enamoured, in love ; — ^ la jo/ip^ niadly in love, amusant [amyza], amusing, amusement [amyzmu], m., amuse- ment, amuser [amyze], to amuse ; s' — , to amuse or enjoy one's self, play. an [a], m., year; avoir qnarante ~s, to be forty years old, forty years of age ; le jour de I'An, New Year's day. ancien [asje], ancient, old; former, wi — , m. , an ancient. kne [a.-n], m., ass, donkey, anecdote [anegdot], f., anecdote. Angelus [o.^selys], m., Angelus (a prayer in honour of the Incarna- tion), ringing bell for ditto. anglais [ogle], adj. , English ; n. m. , Englishman ; l'—, m., English. anglaise [dgkizj, f., running- hand (of writing). an^le [a:gl], m., angle, corner. animal [animal], m., animal, beast. ammer (s') [s anime], to become animated, become lively. anneau [ano], m. , ring. ann^e [ane], f. , year, twelvemonth ; /' — derniere, last year. annoncer [anose], § 156, to an- nounce, usher in; «'— , to an- nounce one's self, be indicated, be evident. annotation [anotasjo], f., annota- tion, note. antichambre [dtijaihr], f., ante- chamber, antique [utik], ancient. aout[u], m., August. apercevoir [apersavwair], § 213, to perceive, see, observe, notice ; •s' — , ditto, apergoit [aperswa], 3 sg. pres. in- die, apercevoir. apergu [apersy], p.p. apercevoir. apergut [apersy], 3 sg. p. def. apercejjoir. apotre [apo:tr], m., apostle. apparaitre [apareitr], § 188, to appear, appar tement [apartama], m. , apart- ments, suite of rooms, appartenir [apartoniir], § 177, to belong (to, d). appel [apel], m., call, appeler [aple], § 158, to call ; call in, summon ; name ; s' — , to be called, named ; comment s'ap- pelle-t-il?, what is his name?; il s'appelle Jean Bart, his name is Jean Bart, applaudir [aplodiir], to applaud, clap (the hands). appliquer [aplike], to apply ; «'— , to apply one's self, work, set to work, take pains. apporter [aporte], to bring (to, d). apprendre [apraidr], § 202 to learn ; teach. apprenti [aprati], m., apprentice. apprSter [aprete], to prepare, get ready. appriyoiser [aprivwaze], to tame (animals). appr<»che [aproj], f., approach. approcher [aproje], intr., to ap- proach, draw near; -de, ditto; s' — , to approach, draw near ^o, de). ' ' appuyer [apijije], § 157, to prop, support, lean, rest, press on ; appmjd, p.p., leaning or sup- ported (on, d); s'— , to support one's self, loan. apr^s [apre], after, next (to) ; adv., afterwards, after. V! '%: r 464 VOCABULARY. I apr^s-demain [apre dm?], the day after to-morrow. apr^s Tiidi [apre midi], m. f. , after- noon. aquilon [akil3], m., north-wind. arabe [arab], Arabian ; Arabe, m., (an) Arabian. Arabic [arabi], f., Arabia. arbre [arbr], m., tree. arbuste [arbyst], m. , shrub. Arc de Triomphe [ark do tri3:f], name of an arch in Paris. ar^on [ars3], ni., saddle-bow. ardent [arda], fiery, eager, intense. ardeur [ardoeir], f., heat, burning heat. argent [ar.^^a], m. , silver, money. argument [argj'ma], m. , argument. arithm^tique [aritmetik], f. , arith- metic. ame [arm], f. , arm, weapon ; atix — s! to arms! arm^e [arme], f. , army. armer [arme], to arm, equip, fit out, provide ; s' — , to arm, fort- ify, secure one's self. armoire [armwair], f., cupboard, clothes-press. Arnault [amo], French author, b. 1766, d. 1834. arracher [araje], to pull out, snatch (from), extract (a tooth). arranger [araje], § 156, to arrange. arreter [arete], to stop, delay, stay, check, arrest; s' — , to stop, pause, give heed (to. A) ; du monde arrit4, people standing. arrifere [arjeir], m., back part; en — , back( wards). arriver [arive], to ajTrive (at, d, dans, sur) ; come, come to, come up ; happen, occur ; les voild qui arrivent, see them coming (there). arroser [aroze], to sprinkle, water (a garden, etc. ). article [artikl], m. , article. articuler [artikyle], to articulate, utter. artillerie [artijri], f., artillery. as [a], 2 sg. pres. indie, avoir. ascension [asfisjo], f., ascension; la fSte de V Ascension, Ascension day. assassiner [asasine], to assassin- ate, murder. asseoir(s') [s aswair], § 215, to sit down, seat one's self, be seated. asse7ant(s') [s aseja], pres. part. s'a^seoir. assez [ase], enough, sufficiently ; pretty, rather, quite, very; — lion, good enough. assied(s') [s asje], 3 sg. pres. indie. s'asseoir. assiette [asjet], f., plate. assis [asi], p.p. s'asseoir, seated, sitting. assistant [asista], m., person pres- ent, bystander. assister [asiste], to be present (at, d), look upon. assit(s') [s asi], 3 sg. past def. s'asseoir. associ^ [asosje], m., partner. asscnmer [asome], to knock down, beat to death. assomption [asopsjo], f., assump- tion ; la file de I Assomption, As- sumption day. assujettir [asy^etiir], to subdue, enthral, subject. assurer [asyre], to assure. astracan [astraka], astrakhan (a kind of fur). attacher [atajej, to fasten, tie, make fast. attendre [ataidr], §210, to wait; wait for, expect. attentif [atutif], attentive. attention [atOsjoJ, f., attention; faire — , to pay attention. attentivement [atativmu], atten- tively. attestation [atestasjo], f., certifi- cate. attirail [atiraij], m., apparatus, gear, paraphernalia. attirer [atire], to attract, draw. attrait [atre], m., attraction, charm. au [o], contr. of d -f fe. iscension ; Ascension assassin- 215, to sit be seated, res. part. fficiently ; very; — res. indie. r, seated, srson pres- resent (at, past def. tner. oek down, , assump- iption, As- o subdue, e. rakhan (a isten, tie, », to wait ; ve. xttention ; lion. lU], at ten - f., certifi- ipparatus, ), draw, ittraction, FRENCH-ENGLISH. 465 aube [ojb], i., dawn. aub^pine [obepin], f. , hawthoiii. auberge [ober.i], f., inn. aubergiste [ober.'iist], m., inn- keeper. aucun [okoe], any, no j ne. . . — , no, none, no one. au-dessus [odsy], above ; — de, above. audience [odjuis], f., audience, interview. Auguste [ogyst], m., Augustus. aujourd'hui [o3«rdx{i], to-day, now ; — en huit, a week from to-day. auparavant [oparavu], adv., be- fore. aupr&s de [opre da], into the pres- ence of, to. auquel [okel], contr. of d -f- lequel. aura [ora], 3 sg. fut. avoir. aural [ore], 1 sg. fut. avoir. auraient [ore], 3 pi. condl. avoir ; — eu (obs. form), would have. aurais [ore], 1 sg. condl. avoir. aurait [ore], 3 sg. condl. avoii'. auras [ora], 2 sg. fut. indie, avoir. aurez [ore], 2 pi. fut. avoir. auriez [orje], 2 pi. condl. avoir. auront [oro], 3 pi. fut. avoir. ausculter [oskylte], to auscultate, sound (lungs, etc.). aussi [osi], too, also, likewise ; as (in comparison) ; — 6ig?«, besides; — bieii que, as well as. aussitot [osito], immediately.forth- with, at once. austere [osteir], austere, severe, rigorous. autant [ota], as or so much, as or so many ; — de, ditto ; d' — -phis, the more so; bieii — , quite as much. automne [oton], m., autumn; en — , in autumn. autour de [otu : r da], prep. , around, round. autre [otr], other ; les — s, others, the others, other people ; d' — s, others ; Vun et V — , both ; les uns les — s, one another, both, all ; nous — s Fran^ais, we 80 Frenchmen ; Men — chose, some- thing very different. autrefois [otrofwa], formerly, ones. autrement [otromu], otherwise ; — eucornees que to'i, with horns very different from yours. aux [o], contr. oid + len. avaient [ave], 3 pi. impf. indie. avoir. avait [ave], 3 sg. impf. indie. avoir. avance[ava:s],f., advance; par — , beforehand. avancer [a vase], § l.'SG, to advance, forward; .s' — , to advance, move forward ; avanc^, advanced ; proficient. avant [ava], before ; en — , for- ward ; la tete en — , head first, head foremost ; — de, before. avant que [ava ko], conj. -\- subj., before. avare [ava:r], m. Miser; VAvare, a comedy by Moliere. avec [avek], with ; — le temps qu'il fait, in such weather as this. f.venir [avniir], m., future. aventure [avatyir], f., adventure; d' — , by chance. aventurer (s') [s ava tyre], to ven- , ture. avenue [avny], f., avenue. avertir [avertiir], to warn, in- form ; averti, warned, put on one's guard. avez [ave], 2sg. pres. indie. , avoir. aviser [avize], to consider, talie counsel. ivoir[avwa:r], § 154, to have; ob- tain, receive, get; y — , impers., il y a, there is, there are ; il y avait, there was, etc. ; il y a Iiidt jours, a week ago ; il y etit, there was, etc. ; il eut le moulin, he obtained, received, the mill ; cet enfant a que/que chose, there is something the matter with that child ; qu'est-ce que vous avez ?, what is the matter with you t; it a dix ans, he is ten !•■■' f Mt ! I", f"^ n^' I ! i iJtilH i; 4o6 VOCABULARY. i years old, ten years of age ; vous n'avezqu'A parler, you liave only to speak ; — ra'mm, to l)o (in the) right ; en — d, bo angry with. avons [av5], 1 pi. pica, indie. avoir. avouer [avwe], to confess, declare, avow, acknowledge. avril [avril], ni., April. ayant [ejo], prea. part, avoir. ayez [cje] , 2 pi. impve. avoir. ayons [ej3], 1 pi. pres. subj. avoir. B. babine [babin], f., lip (of animals) ; £s d'aiuadou, red lii)s. ole [babjol], f., toy, trinket. ! [ba], pooh ! pshaw ! baigner [bejie], tr. to bathe, lave; 86 — , to bathe (intr.). baiser [beze], to kiss, baiser [beze], m. , kiss. baisser [besej, to lower, let down, hang (down); — la tete, bow down, hang one's head ; se — , to stoop down, stoop. balancer [balaso], § 156, to balance, swing, wave ; se — , intr. , to swing, rock, sway. banane [banan], f., banana. banc [ba], ni., bench, scat. bander [bade], to bind up. banque [ba:k], f., bank. banquier [bakje], m., banker. barbarisme [barbarism], m., bar- barism. barbiche [barbij], f., tuft of beard, tufted beard. barter [bare], to bar, obstruct, block. Bart (Jean) [so French seaman, 1651, d. 1702. bas [ba], low ; Id — , over there, yonder ; tout — , in an under- tone, to one's self, softly, silently; c?i — , below, at the bottom, down (below), down stairs ; d'en — , from down be- low. bair], famous b. at Dunkirk Bas-Canada [ba kanada], m., fjowcr Canada. Bastille [bastiij], f., Bastile. bataille fl)at(iij], f., battle. bataillon [batajf)], m., battalion, scjuadron. bateau [bato], m., boat; sc pro- viener en — , to go for a boat- ride, row, sail (in a boat). b^timent [bntiniO], ni., buikbng, editiec ; sliip, vessel. batir [hati:r], to Imild. baton [bdtfi], m., stick; stroke (in learning to write) ; coupde—, blow with a stick. batterie [l)atri], f. , battery (mi lit. ). battre [batr], § 180, to beat, strike: thresh ; — dcs mains, clap the hands ; — fc briquet, to strike a light witli flint and steel ; hottn, beaten, wrought ; .se — , to fight; hnttant, swinging, swingingopen, flapping. bavarder [bavarde], to babble, prattle, gossip. b^ant [ben], gaping. beau, bel, belle, pi. beaux, belles [bo, bel, bel, ho, bel], beautiful, ha-idsome, fine ; au — milieu, in the very midst; il f ait — (tern i>s), it is fine, beaucoup [boku], much, a great deal, very much, many, very many, a great many; — de, ditto. Bee [bek], proper name. becher [beje], to dig, delve, becqueter [bekte], § 158, to peck. becquee [beke], f., biUful. bel [bel], see beau. b^lier [belje], m., ram; battering ram. belle [bel], see beau. benediction [benediksjo], f. , bene- diction. b^nir [beniir], § 163, to bless. ber^ant [bersa], soothing, som- niferous. bercer [berse], § 156, to rock, lull to sleep. FRENCH-ENGLISH. 467 berger [herso], m., shcplienl ; rhU'ii (h: — , sliephord's dog. Berlin [herle], ni., Herlin. besoin [l).)/wej, m., net'd, neces- sity ; avoir — d<>, to need, ))e in need of ; vouh uvtz — ijtw jc voitu aide, you need my help ; ausHi hien nous fera-t-il — , then be- sides wo shall need him, bete [be:t], f. , Ixsast, brute, animal. bete [b£!t], stupid. betise [betiiz], f., stupidity, folly. bibliothfeque " bibliote : k], f. ; library. bicyclette [bisiklet], f., bicycle. bien [bje], well, very, indeed, real- ly, I am sure, surely, of course, quite ; — plun, much more ; j'ai — le tewpfi, I have plenty of time ; itre — , to be well, bo well off, be comfortable, be happy ; — qm {+ subj.), though, although ; oti — , or indeed, or on the contrary ; — de, much, a great deal of. bien [bje], m. , good. biens [bje], m. pi,, estate, prop- t^rl^yj goods, wealth, possessions ; blessings. bientot [bjeto], soon, shortly, pre- sently, bienvenu [bjgvny], adj., welcome; (Itre — , to be welcome, billet [bije], m., note, letter; pro- missory note; ticket; —d'entrde, ticket (of admission). bique [bik], f,, she-goat. bJse [bi:z], f., north wind. bizarre [bizair], odd, singular, strange. blanc [bla], white; le — , n. m,, the white. Blanche [bio:/], pr. n. f., Blanche. Blanquette [bluket], f., 'Whitey.' ble [ble], m, , wheat, wheat-field. bleme [bleim], pale, pallid. blesser [blese], to wound. blessure [blesyir], f,, wound, bleu [bl0], blue, bloquer [bloke], to blockade. Blucher [ blykeir or bly[e:r ], Prussian general, ally of Wel- liugton at Waterloo. bceuf [boef], m., ox, boire[bwa!t],§ 181, todrink; don- Iter pour — , to give a gratuity, a tip (colloq, ). bois [bwa], m,, wo()d(s), forest. bois de Boulogne [bwa do buloji], . m., name of a park in the suburbs of Paris, boiserie [bwazri], f,, wainscoting. boite[bwa!t], f,, box. bon [bo], good ; kind ; sentir — , to smell sweet. Bonaparte [bonapart], (Napoleon) Bonaparte. bonbon [l)obo], m., bonbon, candy. bond [ho], m., bound, skip. bondissement [bodisma], ni., bounding, leaping. bonheur [bonoeir], m., happiness; good fortune, (good) luck. bonjour [bosuir], m., good morn- ing, good day. bonne [bon], f., maid, servant, nurserv-maid. bonnet [bone], m., cap. bonsoir [boswair], m., good even- ing, bont^ [bote], f., goodness; — divine. !, goodness gracious ! bord [boir], m,, shore, bank, margin, edge; board (nav. ); il — de, on board of. borner [borne], to limit ; se — , to be limited. botte[bot], f,, boot. hotter [bote], to furnish with boots; 6o«^, booted, with boots on ; "/yf Chat Botte, " ' ' Puss in Boots ;" se — , to put on one's boots, bouc [buk], m., he-goat, bouche [buj], f, , mouth ; d la ~, in one's mouth, boucher [buje], to stop, stop up, boue [bu], f. , mud, mire, bouger [hine], § 156, intr,, to stir, budge. boulanger [buldse], ra., baker. bouleverser [bulverse], to over- throw, overturn, upset, agito^-p. bouquet [buke], m., nosega^^ bouquet. t, :-■ 1 f ti I 468 VOCABULARY. I? I! ff I bourdonner fburdone], to bnzz, hum. bourrer [bure], to stuff, fill.. bousculade [bu.skyladj, f., jostling, hustling, confusion. bout [bu], ni., end, tip; edge, extremity ; au — de, at the end of. boutique [butik],f., shop. branche[bru!/],f., branch, brandir [bradiir], to brandish, bras [bra], m., arm. brave [braiv], brave, gallant; good, kind, honest, worthy. bravement [bravma], bravely, courageously. braver [brave], to defy, brave. brfeche[brej],f., breach. brigade [brigad], f., brigade. tf^*}*^ [briga], m., brigand, briller[brije], to shine, sparkle. bnn [bre], m., blade, sprig. briquet [brike], m., steel (for strik- ing a light); battre le — , to strike a light. brise[bri!z], f., breeze. briser [brize], to break, break or dash to pieces, shatter. broder [brode], to embroider; brodd, p. part. , embroidered. brpdequin [brodke], m., (laced-) boot. bronze [broiz], m., bronze. brosse [bros], f., brush. brosser [brose], to brush. brouUlard [brujajr], m., fog, mist, brouiller [bruje], to confuse ; be- dim (the sight). broussailles[brusa ij], f. pi., brush- wood, bushes. brouter [brute], to browse. broyer [brwaje], § 157, to grind, crush to pieces. bruit [briii], m., noise, sound; fame, reputation ifaire tantde—^ to attract ao much attention. briilant [bryla], burning hot. bruler [bryle], to burn. brume [brym], f., fog, mist, haze. brusque [brysk], blunt, brusquement [bryskma], bluntly, roughly, abruptly ; suddenly, brutalement [brytalmu], brutally, rudely. "^ bruy6re[bryje : r],f. , heath, heather. bu [by], p. part, boire. buissifere [bqisjcir], f., thicket, bush. buisson [bqiso], m., bush, thicket. bureau [byro], m., office. but [byt or by], object, end, goal ; arriver d son — , attain his ob- ject. buvais [byve], 1 sg. impf. indie. boire. C. Sf [sa], (for cela) that. 9'a €tk [s a ete], for fa or ce a dtl ^a [sa], here ; — et la, here and there, up and down, hither and thither. cabinet [kabine], m., cabinet; office, private office. cabrer (se) [sa kabre], intr. to rear. cachemire [kajmiir], m., cash- mere. cacher [ka|e], to hide, conceal; ae — , to hide one's self. cadavre [kadajvr], m., corpse, dead body. cadeau [kado], m., present, gift. cafe [kafe], ra. , coffee ; coffee-house, restaurant, cafe. cage [ka:^], f., cage. cahier [kaje], m., note-book, ex- ercise-book. caille[ka!j], f., quail. caiUou [kaju], m., pebble, stone. caissier [kesje], m., cashier. calculer [kalkyle], to calculate, reckon. calice [kalis], m., chalice, cup; calyx. c41in [kolf], adj., wheedling, coax- ing. calme [kalm], m., stillness, calm, calme [kalm], calm, still. calmer [kalme], to calm. l'& PRENCH-ENQLISH. 469 it. tia], bluntly, suddenly, u], brutally, ath, heather. f., thicket. ish, thicket. ce. i, end, goal ; tain his oh- impf. indie. I or ce a 4t6. I, here ancl hither and . , cabinet ; j]. intr. to m,, cash- e, conceal ; 3lf. Q. , corpse, sent, gift, jffee-house, ■book, ex- •le, stone, hier. calculate, 'lice, cup ; ling, coax- 3SS, calm. 1. calotte [kalot], f., cap, skull-cap. camarade [kamarad], m., f., com- rade, playmate. camp [kfi], m., camp. campagnaid[kupajiajr], m., coun- tryman. campagnj [kapaji], f., country, fields ; d la — , in the country. campanule [kapanyl], f., campa- nula, bell-flower. Caiiada [kanada], m. , Canada. Canadian [kanadjf], Canadian. canard [kanair], m., duck. caniche [kanij], m., poodle. canif [kanif], ni.,. penknife. canon [kanS], m. , cannon. canonni^i'e [kanonjea], f., gun- boat. cantique [katik], m., hymn. cap [kap], head, obs., except in de pied en — , from head to foot. capitaine [kapiten], m., captain. capitale [kapital], f. , capital letter. capiteux [kapit0], heady, intoxi- cating. * car [kar], for. caract^re [karakteir], m., charac- ter, disposition, temper. caravane [karaAn], f., caravan. caressant [karesa], kindly, gentle. caresse [kares], f., caress; /aire mille — s d, qq., to overwhelm anyone with kindness. caresser [karese], to caress, stroke. cargaison [kargezo], f. , cargo. carotte [karot], f. , carrot. carr6 [kare], m., square. carrosse [karos], m., carriage, coach. cas [ka], m. , case. casaque [kazak], f., jacket. casque [kask], m., helmet. casser [kaise], to break. Castille [kastiij], f., Castile. catastrophe [katastrof], f., catas- trophe. Caucase[koka!z], m., Caucasus. cauchemar [kojmair], m., night- mare. cause [ko:z], f., cause; d — de, because of. causer [koze], to cause ; chat, talk ; — une ivi})reaaion, to make an impression. causeur [kozoeir], talkative, cavalerie [kavalri], f., cavalry; (jroHHe — , heavy cavalry. cavalier [kavalje], m., horseman, rider, trooper. ce [so], pron., it, this, that; c'est pourquoi, that is why ; c'e-st nous, it is we ; ce nont eux, it is they ; ce qui, ce que, that which, which, what, ce, cet, cette, ces [sq, set, set, se], adj., this, that; t-e. . . -Id, that (emphatic). c^ans [sea], here within, in this house. ceci [s8si], pron. , this, c^der [sede], § 158, to y'eld, give way. cela [sla], pron. , that ; — s'entend, that is evident ; of course. c^l^brer [selebre], § 158, to cele- brate. c^lfebre [selebr], celebrated, celle [sel], see celui. celui, celle, ceux, celles [solqi, sel, 80, sel], this or that, this or that one ; the one, he, him ; — qui, the one who, he or him who. celui-ci [salqi si], celle-ci, ceux- ci, celles-ci, pron., this, this man, this one, the latter, he (too). celui-lk, etc. [saliii la], pron. , that, that man, that one, the former, he. cent [sa], (a) hundred. centifeme [satjem], hundredth. centime [satim], m., the hundredth part of a franc. centre [sa:tr], m., centre. cependant [sspada], yet, never- theless; still, however, in the meantime, meanwhile; — que, while, whilst. cercle [scrklj, m. , circle. c^r^moniefseremoni], f. , ceremony, cerise [sarijz], f., cherry. I 470 VOCAHULARV. cerisier [aori/.jo], m., cherry-troo. certain [sert?], certain. certes [sert], (iottiuiily, sundy. cerveau [heivo], m., hniin, iniiid. cervelle [setvel), f., i)mins, cesser [sesj], to coaso, leave off; — de, ditto. ces [se], see cc cet [«et], see c.e. cette [set], f. of ce. ceux [80], in. pi. crliii. chacun [Jakd'], pion., each, each one, every one. chagrin [Jagr?], ni., sorrow, grief; shagreen. chaine [jein], f., chain. chair [Je:r], f., flesh, meat; ~ d l)dttl, niince-nieat ; ne faisant (/u'une — , becoming only an in- distinguishable mass of il a\\. chaire [je:r], f., pulpit, desk (of a teacher). chaise [jeiz], f., chair. chaleur [Jahea-], f., heat. chambre [juibr], f., room ; C/mm- lire des iUpnUs, House of Parlia- ment. chameau [Jamo], m., camel. champ [fa], m., field. Champs-Elysdes [fo:z elize], ni. pi. , name of certain public gar- dens in Paris. chance [Jnis], f. , chance. changement [Jnsmri], m., change ; — de front, change of front, transformation. changer [ja.'se], § 156, to change, alter, transform ; se — , to change or transform one's self, change (intr. ). chanson [}us5], f., song. chant [Jci], m., singing; crowing (of a cock). chanter [Jote], to sing ; chant, in- tone, play. chantonnement [ Ja tonma ], m., humming, singing. chapeau [Japo], m., hat. chapelier [japglje], m. , hatter ; chez le — , to 07- at the hatter's. chapelle [Japel], f. , chapjl. chapitre IfapitiJ, m., chapter. chaque IfakJ, each, every. charbonner [Jarb.)n(«], to write with charcoal, sketch, scrawl. charge [|ar.^J, f. , chargi?, load. charger [Jar.'^e], § 156, to charge, comniisKJon, order, entrust ; se — , to undertake. charmant [Jarmo], charming. charmer [Jarmc], to charm, de- light; charnidde, charmed with, deliglited with. chasse [[as], f. , chase, hunt, hunt- ing, hunting-party. chasser [Jase], to chase, drive away. chasseur [Jasd-n], m., light infan- try soldier, chasseur. chat [ja], m. , cat ; "Le Chat Bottdy" " Puss in Hoots." chdtaigne [joteji], f., chestnut. chdtaignier [Jatejie], m. , chestnut- tree. chateau '^[nto], m., castle, palace. Chateau ).riand [("(itobriu], French writer, b. 1768, d. 1848. chaud [fo], warm, hot. chaud [jo], m. , heat, warmth ; il fait --, it is warm, hot (of weather, etc. ) ; avoir — , to be warm, hot (of living beings). chaumi^re [jomjeir], f., thatched house, cottage, cot. chauss^e [Jose], f . , highway, main road. chaussures [Josyir], f. pi., shoes, boots. chauve [Joiv], bald ; ?<« — , a bald man. chef [jef], m., chief, commander; — cVescadre, rear-admiral, chemin [fome], m., way, road; grand —, main road, highway; — de fer, railway ; — faisant, on the way ; en — , on the way. cheminee [Jomine], f., fire-.place; mantel-shelf. chene [Jem], m., oak. chenille [Joniij], f., caterpillar. PRENCri-ENaUSH. 4? !71 lai-jl. chapter, ety. 1, to wriU) ;li, scrawl, gi!, load. , to charge, entrust ; se [iriiiiiig. charm, de- anned with, hunt, hunt- ihaso, drive light iufau- Chat Bottd," chestnut. n.,cliestnut- stle, palac(!. riul, French 848. i. warmth ; if m, hot (of ir — , to be ; beings), f., thatched ;hway, main . pi., shoes, in — , a bald ;ommander ; Imiral. way, road ; I, highway; — faisnnt, on the way. , fire-.place; terpillar. cher [Jejr], <1ear; beloved ; j)ai/pr - -, pay dear(ly) for, pay too much tor. chercher [Jerje], to seek, search, look for; a/kr — , go for, go ami get ; — (I, seek to, try to. ch6re [/e:r], f., cheer, entertain- nient ; /aire bonne — , to pro- vide good cheer, provide a good spread. cherir [\v.v\ : r], to cherish ; cMri, beloved, clierishcd, dear. cheval [Joval], m., liorse ; d — , on horseback, chevet [Jove], m., pillow, bolster, the head of a bed ; dpdt de — , see dj)de. cheveu fft>v0], m.,hair; cheveux, T)l., hair. chevre [JeivrJ, f., goat. chevreau [jovro], m., kid. chevrette [Jovret], f., little goat. chez [jo], to, at, in, into (the house, shop, office, etc. , of) ; with ; aller — le roi, to go to the king'.s (palace, court, etc.); its dtaient — eitx, they were at home ; — moi, at my house, at home ; — vous, at your house, at home, chien [fje], m., dog ; — de berr/er, shepherd's dog; — danois, Danish dog, great Dane, chiffon [Jifo], m. , rag ; strip, piece, chiffre [Jilr], m., figure, number. chimfere [Jimeir], f., chimtera (a fabulous beast of antiquity). choeur [ka'u], m., chorus. choisir [Jwaziir], to choose. cho; : [Jo:z], f., thing, affair, mat- ter; quelqiie — , m. pron., something; quelque — dVxfrn- ordinaire, something extraordi- nary, unusual ; fa chivre a f/uelqiie — , there is som- thing the matter with the goat ; bien autre — , something very dif- ferent. chou [fu], m., cabbage. chute ijyt], f., fall, downfall. -ci fsi], see ce, Cic^ron Isisero], Cicero. Cid[sid], l< Citl. tlraiiia l»y Corneille. ciel, pi. cieux [sjel, bj0J, m., _ heaven, hcav(!ns, sky. cimeti^re [sinitjeirj, cemetery, m. cinq [s?:k], live. cinquenib [H^kdit], fifty, cinquifeme (s?kJGm|, fifth circonspect [sirk.)spe(kt)J, circum- spect, cautious. cirque [sirk], m,, circus, cite [site], f., city. citoven fsitwaj?], m., citizen, civilement [sivilmdj, civilly, cour- teously, politely, civilisation [sivilizasjS], f., civil- isation. clair [kleir], clear, bright, plain, clair [kle:r], m., light, cleaniess; — de lune, nuwjnlight. clair [kleir], clearly, plain(ly). clairon [klero], m., clarion, clameur [klamouir], f., clamour, outcry. classe [klois], f., class, recitation, lesson, class-room ; laamjiwr la — , stay away from school, play truant ; /aire la — , give a lesson (to a class), teach (a class), clef [kle], f., key. cliquetis [kliktij, m., rattle, click- ing, jingle, cloche [klor],f., bell, clochette [klojet], f., (small) bell, clos [klo], p. part, clore, to close, shut. clos [klo], m. , enclosure, field, clouer [klue], to nail. cocher [hojo\, m. , coachman, cceur [kceir], m., heart, heartiness, courage, energy; de (bon) — , heartily, fervently ; le — gros, with a heavy heart. coin [kwe], m., corner. coincidence [koesidains], f., coin. cidence. colore [koleir], f., anger; se meU tre en — , to get angry, be angry. collation [kolasjo], f., collation, repast. 472 VOCABULAUY. i'^' f % i C0ll^g:e [kolei 3], rn. , oollegt% mihool. collogue [koleg], in., colleaguo, iiiatu. coller [kolo], to glue, paste. colline [kolinj, f., hill. colonel [koli)nel), m., colonel. colonne [k.)l;)n], f., colmnn • -^ 6paiHHf, close colunui, in close niarching order. colossal [kolosal], colossal, niightv. colosse [koloH], in.,colosHUH, giant ; chemiux — s, coloHwil or gigantic luiises. combat [koha], m. , cornbat, fight. combattre [kobatrj, § 180, to Hght, do battle. combien [kabj?], liow much?, how nianv V ; at what price ? ; how much, how many ; — Sten-voua'/, how many are there of you ? ; -- aerez-vous ile genu il table ?, how . many (people) will there be of vou at table? ; — avez-vouapay^?^ how much or what did you pay (for) ? ' ^^ combler [koble], t(» heap up ; fill, crown, complete; combU, full to overflowing. comique [kamik], comical. commandature [komadatyir], f., hcfubiuarters (railit. ). commander [komade], to com- mand, order, bid. comma [kom], as, like ; as it were, as if ; as well as ; how ; how ! ; — void, as follows ; — il faut, in fine style, exactly right, as it should be. commencement [komasmn], ni., beginning, commencement. commencer [komuse], § 156, to begin, commence (to, d, de). comment [koma], how; how?; how !, what ! — cela ?, how is that ? ; — faire pour ne ]>as voler?, ho^v is one to avoid stealing ? commode [komod], comfortable. communication [komynikasjo], f., communication. compact [kopaktj, compact, dense. compagne [k'^p'^jO* ^-t companion; wife. compagnie [k5pajii], f., company. compagnon [k^paji.")], m., com- {lanion ; — de voymje, travelling- companion. comparaison [koparexi)], f., com- parison. comparer [k^parol, to (lompare. compartiment [ k^pariinui J, m., compaitment. compassion [k.jpdsjj], f., compas- sion, pity. complet i_k.')ple'J, m., suit (of clothes) ; complement ; £tre au — , to be full. compliment [koplimf], ni., com- ))lunei>.t. composer [k")pozo], to compose, form, arrange ; se —, to bo com- posed, consist (of, de). composition [kijpozisjo], f., com- position. comprendre [kSpratdr], § 202, to understand, comprehend ; in- clude ; /aire — , to explain. compter [kSte], to count, reckvui ; intend, think ; be of import- ance ; il comptait j)lu8, ho was of more account. concentrer [kosutre], to concen- trate. concert [koseir], m., concert. Concorde [kokord], f. , concord ; place de la Concorde, name of a square in Paris. condamnation [ki5danasj3], f., con- demnation, sentence. condamner [kodane], to conf "!mn, sentence. condamn^ [kodane], m., convict. conduire [kodqir], § 185s to con- duct, lead, guide, drive, take, convey. confiance [kof ja : s], f. , confidence, trust. confiseur [kofizceir], m,, confec- tioner. confus [kofy], confubed, indistinct. conge [ko3e], m., holiday ; donner — d, to give a holiday to. FRENCH-ENGLISH. 473 conjurer fk^syrcl, to inii)lore, connais [k.)iiej, I 8g. picH. i,Klic. C(ninaUr<'. connalssance [k;)n£8u:8], f., n<- (luaintaiico ; /aire — uvrc, bu- tnmi! iKxiuainted vith. connaissez [koneHcJ, 2 pi. prea. iiidic. cunnattre. connaissons fk.)ri£83], 1 pi. pics. indie, coniialtre. connait [kone], 3 Hg. prcH. indie. connailre. connaftre [kone:tr], § 188, to know, ho acquainted with, un- derstand, conscience fkrjHJa :h], f. , conseicn;;;;; consciouHncasjconHiiientiousiu's.s; je fernls — de, I should tciuplo *' , I should think it a win m. cc...>ril [koseij], in., counsel, ad- vice. conseiller [koseje], to advise, counsel. consentir [kosati-r], § 166, to con- sent. conserver [kSservo], to preserve, save. consigne [koaiji], f. , orders (niilit. ), instructions. consister [kosiste], to consist, consoler [kosole], toconsole, solace, comfort ; se — , to console one's self (with, de). consterner [kosterne], to astound, dismay, amaze, terrify. construire [kostrqiir], §185, to con- struct. conte [k3!t], m., story, tale ; faire un — , tell a story. contenplt .• fkotuple], to contem- plate, gaze on, survey. contenir [kotoniir], § l"77, to con- tain. content [koto], adj. , content, satis- fied, pleased, gratified, happy. contentement [kotatmo], m., con- tentment, satisfaction. contenter [kotate], to satisfy. conter [k3te], to relate, t«ll. continuer [k3tini[e], to continue (to, de), keep on, pursue. co.itraire [k.Ureir], ni., contrary nil - , on the cv2kyj, convinced, MJitislifd. convenable fkovitnabl], suitable. convenir [k,)v.)ni!rj, 4} 17H, to suit, become, bo fitting or appro- priate. conversation [kuversosja], f., con vcrsation. convoitise [k.^vwatiiz], f., covot- ousness, envy, copie [k;)pij, f., copy; exercis.. coq [kakj, m. , cock. coquin-e [kok?, kokinj, rogue, wretch, scamp. cordelk;)=lJ, f., cord, rope. cordon [k.)rd5], i.,., cord, string; — de aounette, bell-pull, bell- I'ope. cornerkorn], f., hoin. Corneille [kornsij], m., French dramatist, b. 1606, d. 1684. corps [ko:r], m., body, form, corridor [koridoir], m., corridor, passage. corsaire [korseir], m., privateer, costume [kostym], m., costume, dress. cote [kot], f., coast, rib, side ; — d ^ — , side by side. cbtk [kote], m,, side, way ; d'tin—, on one side ; de I'autre — , on the other side ; de ce — , on this side ; de — , to one side, aside ; (ill — ■ de, in the direction of, towards ; de sou — , on his part, he too ; a — de, beside. cou fku], m., neck. coucher [kuje], intr., to lie, lie down; set (of the sun); tr., to put to bed, lay down ; — eti joue, take aim (at) ; se — , to go to bed, retire (to rest); itre coiiche, to be lying down, coucher [knje], m., setting; —tfu soldi, sunset. coulee f kule], f. , running-hand, couler [kule], to flow, run, trickle, couleur [kulceir], f., colour. I. n 174 VOCABULARY. r r3 I couleuvre [kula^ivr], t., snako. coup [ku], 111., blow, stroke ; drink ; boire cinq on nix — s, to tako five or six drinks or draughts ; — de poing, a blow with tlie fist ; — de jnedf a kick ; d'un seal — , at a singlo stroko ; tout d — , all at once ; dii — , at once, thereupon ; donnerdes — s dc come, to hook, butt ; — de dent, bite ; doinier des — s de fouet, to whip ; — de tonnen-e, thunder-clap ; — de bdton, blow with a stick ; — de pistolet, pistol-shot ; de plusieurs — 8, in sever.il places. coupable [kupabl], guilty, at fault, blameworthy. coupe [kuj)], f., cup, wine-cup. COupe-gjrge [kuj) g;)r?,l mi., a cut-thi'oat place, a nest of swindlers. couper [kupe], to cut. cour[ku!r],f., court ; yard, court- yard ; faire la — , pay court ; iiens de la — , courtiers. courage [kuraia], m., courage. courageux [kura?,0], brave. couramment [kurama], fluently. courber [kurbe], to bend, bow. coureur [kuroeir], m., runner; — de (frauds cheinivs, tramp, va- grant. COurir[kuri!r], § 164, to ruii(about); hasten ; hunt after ; — /cs nids, to hunt after birds' nesis, go birds' nesting. couronne [kuron], f. , crown ; wreath. couronner [kur;)ne|, to crown, wreathe. course [kurs], f. , coxirse, tour, walk, round ; /aire tine — , take a walk, make a round ; prendre sa — , to take one's way. court [ku:i'], short (adj.); short (adv. ) ; de trap — , too short, too tightly. court [kuir], 3 sg. pres. indie. conrir. courtisan [kurtiza], m., courtier. COuru [kury], p.p. courir. courus [kury], 1 sg. past det courir. courut [ kury ], 3 sg. j^ast def. courir. cousin-e [kn/.e, kuzin], cousin, couteau [kuto]. m., knife, couter [kute|, to cost. coutume [kutym], f., custom, habit. couturifere [kutyrjeir], f., dress maker. couver [kuve], to brood, hatch ; couvant de I'oiil, wistfully eying, gazing at. couvert [kuve:r], p. p. couvi'ir, covered; cloudy, overcast; with one's iiat on. couvrir [kuvriir], § 176, to cover; nc — , cover one's self, bo covered, craindre [kreulr], § 190, to fear, bo afraid of. craie [kie], f., chalk, crainte [kre:t], f. , fear, cravate [kravat], f., neckcloth, crayon [krej3], m., pencil, creature [krcatyir], f., creature. Crete [kie:t], f., crest, summit, creuser [kr^ze], to dig. creux [ki0], hollow; chemin — , deep-cut road. crfeve-coeur [krev koeir], m., heart- break, grief. crever [krove], § 158, to burst j die, perish. cri [kri], m. , cry, shout, outcry, cribler [krible], to sift ; riddle, crier [krie], to cry (out), shout, call (out), exclaim. crin [kre], m., hair (of the mane and tail of the horse, etc. ) ; C7-ins, pi. , hair, mane • plume (of a lielmet). cristal [kristal], m. , crystal, croire [krwair], § 191, to believe ; think ; se — , to believe or think one's self ; /aire — a, to make (one) believe in. croiser [krwaze], to cross, come across, n-.eet. croitre [krwaitr], § 192, to grow, increase. FRENCH-ENQLIBH. 475 paiSt def, jjjist def. joiisin. b. , custom, f., dress [1, hatch ; lly eying, i. coum'ir, 3ast; with to cover; o covered. », to fear, kcloth. il. reatnre. .1111 mit. hemin — , m.jheart- mrst ; die, outcry, riddle. b), shout, the mane le, etc. ) ; 3 • plume tal. ) believe ; e or think to make )ss, come to grow, crosse [kr^.s]. f. • — de fusil, butt (-end) of t gun or musket. crouler [l.rule], to crumble, go to ruin, oink to ruin. croupe [krup], f., croup, rump. croyant [ krvvoja ], pres. part. croire ; — , m.^ believer. croyez [krwoje], 2 pi. pros, indie. croire. croyons [krwajS], 1 pi. indie, or iinpve. croire. crus [kry], 1 sg. past def. croire. crut [kry], 3 sg. past def. croire. cueillir [ktejiir], § 165, to pick, pluck, gather. cmller [kyjeir], f., spoon. cuir [ki|i:r], m., leather. cuirasse [ kqiras ], f. , cuiras;-!, breast-plate, cuirassier [kijirasje], ni. , cuirassier. cuisinier [kqizinjo], m., cook. cuisini^re [ki{izinje:r], f., cook, cuisse [kqis], f., thigh; leg, "drum-stick." cuivre [k^iivr], m., copper, brass ; d, pleins — «, as loud as the band could play. culminant [kylminu], culminating. curieux rkyrj0j, curious, odd. curiosity [kyrjozite], f., curiosity. cytise [sitiiz], m., cytisus, bean- trefoil, laburnum. D. dame [dam], f., lady. dangereux [do3r0], dangerous. danois [danwa], Danish, dans [da], in, witliin, to, into, at, on, among, between ; — le temps, at the time. danse [dais], f., dance; entrer en — , to begin to play, danser [dase], to dance, date [dat], f. , date ; de longue — , long before. Daudet [dode], Alphonse Daudet, French novelist, b. at Nimc3s, 1840, d. 1897. uEvEnts.g'c [uavotri;.^], morc ; Ic docteur pas — , nor the doctor either. de [do], of, from, out of, for, with, in, on, by, at, to; — + iiifin., to, at, for, in, etc. debarbouiller [dcbarbuje], toclean, wash (the face). debarrr.sser [deliarase], to dis- encumber, rid ; Hi' — , to free one's self, get rid (of, de). d^battre (se) [so debatr], § 180, to struggle. d^border [deborde], to overflow, run over. deboucher [dobuje], to come out (on, sur)y debouch. debout [dobu], adv., up'ight, standing. decapiter [dekapite], to beliead. d^cembre [desuibr], m., Decem- ber. dechirer [dejire], to tear (asunder), rend. decide [deside], decided. decider [deside], to decide, deter- mine ; se — , to decide, resolve, make up one's mind. declarer [deklare], to declare. d^courager [dekura^e], § 156, to discourage ; se — , to be discour- aged, give up (intr. ). d^couvrir [dekuvri:r], § 176, to discover ; take off the hat. d^daigner [dedepe], to disdain. dedans [doda]^ adv., within, in- side ; in it, into it ; le — , les — , n. m. , the inside, interior; en — , inside. d^fendre [defoidr], § 210, to de- fend, protect (from, de) ; forbid ; se — , to defend one's self. defense [defais], f., defense, pro- tection. defenseur[defasce:r], m., defender, guardian. d6fier [defje], to defy, challenge ; je -ous en ddjie, I dare, defy, you to do it ; se — de, to mis- trust, distrust. d^gouter [degute], to disgust. (?: 'gradation [degradcisjjj, f., de- gradation. degre [dsgre], m. , step ; degree. lii I i 1fe 'I' <\imuiMiSi& 476 VOCABULARY. d^g^ster [degyste], to taste, enjoy the taste of. d6jk[de3a],already; ddjd,!, so soon! dejeuner [de30ne], m., breakfast; lunch'; — du matin or premier — , breakfast {i.e., the first meal of the day) ; — il lafourchette or second — , luncheon, lunch. dejeuner [des^ne], to breakfast, lunch. delk [dala], beyond ; par — , further (than), beyond, d^laisser [delese], to abandon, de- sert, forsake. d^licatesse [delikates], f. , delicacy, consideration. demain [dam?], m. , to-morrow. demande [damaid], f., demand, request. demander [damade], to ask, ask for ; — (i, to ask of, from (indir. bj. ), ask ; — (1 + infin. , to ask to ; se — , to ask one's self, wonder. demener (se) [sa demne], § 158, to struggle. dementi [demati], m., contradic- tion; ■' ne voulait pas en avoir le — , he was determined not to be beaten. demeurer [damoere], to live, dwell, reside ; remain, be. demi [dami], half ; d — , half. demi-heure [dami ce:r], f., half an hour, demi-obscurite [dami opskyrite] f., half darkness, faint light feeble light. d^montrer [demotre], to show prove, denier [donje], m. , denarius (obs. ) penny. denoncer [denose], § 156, to de nounce. dent [da], f., tooth; coup de — bite. dentel^ [datle], denticulated notched (said of leaves). dentelle [datel], f., lace, dentiste [dutist], m., dentiat. depart [depair], m., departure. d^pecher (se) [sa depeje], to make haste, hurry ; ne te d4p6che pa» tant, do not be in such a hurry. d^pendance [depadais], f., de- pendencej territory. dependre [depuidr], §210, to de- pend (upon, de). d6penser [depose], to spend, ex- pend. d^ployer (se) [sa deplwaje], § 157, to deploy (milit. ). d^pouiller [depuje], to strip, de- spoil, deprive. depuis [dapqi], since ; from ; — deux ans, for two years back, for the last two years ; — que, since ; — quand?, since when?, how long ? d6put^ [depy te], m. , deputy, mem- ber of parliament. d^raciner [derasine], to uproot. deranger [derate], § 156. to de- range ; se — , to trouble one's self. dernier [dernje], latter, last, final. derriere [derjeir], behind (prep.) ; behind, at the back (adv. ) ; de — , liind (adj.). des [de], contr. of de + les. des [de], from (dating from), not later than ; — demain, beginning to-morrow ; — que, as soon as, from the very moment that ; — le mime jour, on the (very same) day ; — le point du jour, at daybreak. desagreable [ dezagreabl ], dis- agreeable, unpleasant. desarmer [dezarnie], to disarm ; desarm6, unprotected, helpless. descendre [destiidr], §210, to de- scend, come or go down ; go down (stairs). descente [desa:t], f., descent. desenchantement [ dezajatmp ], ra. , disenchantment, disappoint- ment. desert [deze:r], m. , desert. desesplrance [ dezespera is], f. , despair. d^sesperer [dezesper?]> § 158, to despair. FRENCH-ENGLISH. 477 (UpSche pat ch a hurry. is], f., de- 210, to de- spend, ex- vaje], § 157, strip, de- ; from ; — years back, irs ; — que, ince when?, jputy, mem- uproot. 156. to de- :oubie one's r, last, final, ind (prep.) ; 1 (adv. ) ; de ■les. 5 from), not n, beginning as soon as, ment that ; n the (very dnt du jour, i-eabl ], dis- it. to disarm ; d, helpless. i 210, to de- down ; go descent, lezajatma ], , disappoint- 38ert. perais], f., e], § 158, to disillusion [dezilyzjo], f., disillu- sion. d6sir [deziir], ni,, desire, longing. d^sirer [dezire], to desire, wish, desireux [dezir0], desirous, anxious (to, de). d^sormais [dezorrae], henceforth. dess^cher [desefe], § 158, to dry, dry up, parch, wither ; se — , to dry up, wither. [scheme. dessein [dess], m., design, plan, dessert [deseir], m., dessert. dessus [dasy], adv. , above, over ; upon or over (it, them, etc.); de — , from (off). destin^e [destine], f . , fate, destiny. destiner [destine], to destine ; in- tend, design. destruction [destryksjS], f., de- struction. d^sunir [dezjoiiir], to disunite. detacher [ detaje ], to detach, separate. d^tresse [detres], f., distress, grief, trouble. deuil [doeij], m., mourning (attire). deux [d0], two ; ious (or toutes) — , both (Oi them). deuxieme [d0zjem], second. devant [davd], prep., before, in fro'it of, ahead of. devant [dova], adv. , before, ahead, in advance ; pattes de — , front paws, fore-paws ; prendre les — .s, to go on before, ahead ; courir au — , to run to meet. d^veloppement [ devlopma ], m. development, progress. devenir [davniir], § 178, to be- come ; become of. deviendront [davjsdro], 3 pi. fut. devenir. devint [dave], 3 sg. past def. de- venir. devoir [davwair], m., duty; exer- cise (lesson) ; re.ndre leurs — s d, to pay their respects to. devoir [davwair], §214, to owe; bo ones duty to, ought, be to, have to, be obliged to, must; h infin., to be one's duty to, ought, be to, have to, be obliged to, must, diable [djaibl], interj., the devil \ the deuce ! diantre [dja : tr], interj. , the deuce ! Dieu [dj0], m., God; ah! mon — .' , oh ! dear me ! dieu [dj0], m., god. difference [diferais], f., difference, differend [difera], m., quarrel, dispute, different [difera], different, divers, various. difficile [difisil], difficult, hard, difificulte [difikylte], f., difficulty, digitale [digital], f., fox-glove, dimanche [dimaij], m., Sunday; tons les — s, every Sunday, dindon [dedo], m. , turkey ; patte de — , see patte. diner [dine], to dine, diner [dine], m., dinner; d — , to or at dinner. dire [di:r], § 193, to say, tell, re- cite ; c^est a — , that is (to say) ; dis-moi un pen, just tell me ; voidoir — , to mean, dire [di:r], m., saying, maxim, directeur [direktoeir], m., director, manager. dirent [di:r], 3 pi, p. def. dire. diriger [dirise], § 156, to direct, guide. dis [di], 2 sg. indie, or impve. dire. disais [dize], 1 sg. impf. indie, dire. disait [dize], 3 sg. impf. indie, dire. disant [diza], pres. part. dire. discipliner [disipline], to discipline, discours [diskuir], m., discoi.i.'se, speech. discrfetement[diskretma],discreet- ly, circumspectly, cautiously, disons [diz5], 1 pi. pres. indie, dire. disparaitre [dispareitr], § 188, to disappear, vanish, disposition [dispozisjo], f., disposi- tion, tendency, habit ; disposal, distance [distois], f., distance; d — , al a distance. distribuer [distribqe], to distribute, deal out, portion out. m . 478 VOCABULARY. distribution [flistribysiol. f rHo tribution. •* ^ ' dit [di] 3 sg. pres. indie, 3 as. pastdef., amfp. part, of dire. dites [dit], 2 pi. pres. indie, and ^ pi. impve. dire ; voits — ?. . . wiiat did you say ? • • • • » divertir [divertiirl,' to divert, amuse; se — , to divert one's selt, amuse one's self. dmn [div?J, divine. diviser [divize], to divide. division [divizj3],f.,-divi8ion. dix [dis], ten. dix-huit [diz qitj, eighteen. dix-neuvifeme [diz noevjem], nine- teenth. docile [dosil], docile, tractable, quiet. docteur [doktoeir], m., doctor. doigt [dwa], m., finger; toe. dois [dwQj, 1 and 2 sg. pres. indie. devoir. doMsir [dola.-r], m., dollar, dominer [domine], to rule, prevail over, rise above. dommage [domain], m., damage, pity. ® don [d3], m., gift, power, knack. done [do], then, therefore, conse- quently. donner [done], to give ; bear (of trees) ; — d sovper, to give a sup- per; se~, to give to each other. dont [do], of whom, of (from, etc.) which, whose, with whi ' etc whence. ' Dore [do:r], f., name of a river in central France. dor6 [dore], gilt, dormir [dormi : r], § 166, to sleep. dos [do], m. , back. double [dubl], double. doubler [duble], to double; line (clothes). doucement [dusmd], gently, softly, quietly, kindly. *^ douleur [duloe:r], f., pain, grief, sorrow. douloureusement [ dulur^zmu ], sadly. ■• doute [dut], m., doubt; sans -_ no doubt, doubtless. ' douter (se) [so dute], to be sus- picious ; 86 — de, to suspect. khi Jl ""'' ^"^^""^ ' ^°^^' S^"^'^' douzaine[duze:n],f., dozen, douze [duiz], twelve. drame [dram], m., drama. drap[dra], m., cloth, drapeau [drapo], m., flag, banner, dresser [drese], to erect, set up • se— to rise upright, rear. ' droit [drwo], straight, right; up- right, erect. ^ droit [drwa], m., right; Stre en ~ de, to have a right to. ^^'•o/te [drwat], f. , right hand, right, rightside; ,i-_, t/6-,too?on the right (hand). drole [droil], comical, amusing. drole [dro!l], m., rogue, rascal. du[dy], contr. oide + le. ducat [dyka], m., ducat. anel[di{el], m., duel. Dumas [dyma], Alexandre Dumas, K ^oni ^,^amatist and novelist, b. 1803, d. 1870. Dunkerque [doksrk], a French seaport, Dunkirk, duquel [dykel], contr. of de + leguel. dur [dyir], hard, harsh, uurant [dyra], during. durer [dyre], to last, continue, endure. E. eau [o], f. , water. ^blouissant [ebluisa], dazzling, e Wouissement [ebluismu], m. , daz- ^branler (s') [s ebrale], to begin to move(intr.). ^caille [ekaij], f., scale (of fish, etc. ). ^carquille [ekarkije], p. part. , wide open (of eyes). ^carter (s;) [s ekarte], to go away (trom, de), ramble, stray. FRENCH-ENGLisd. 47§ >tj sans — , to be sus- suspect. oft, gentle, dozen. na. ag, banner. 3t, set up; rear, right; up- ; Stre en — and, right, -, to or on musing, rascal. re Dumas, • novelist, a French of de + continue, zling. , ni. , daz- begin to (of fish, rt. , wide go away r. ^change [e/ais], m., exchange; en — de, in exchange for. ^chapper (s') [s ejape], ni., to es- cape. ^clabousser [eklabuse], to splash, spatter. Eclair [ekle:r], m., lightning, flash of lightning; il fait des —s, it lightens. ^clat [ekla], m. , burst, outburst. 6clater [eklate], to burst out, burst forth, sound out (suddenly and loudly), break out. ^clore [ekloir], §183, to hatch; ^dos, p. part., hatched. ^cole [ekol], f., school; mnison d^ — , school-house. ^colier [ekolje], m., school-boy, pupil. Scorcher [ekorje], to skin, flay, gall, rub the skin off. ^couter [ekute], to listen, listen to, hear. ^eraser [ekraze], to crush, over- whelm. Verier (s') [s ekrie], to cry out, exclaim. ^crire [ekri:r], § 194, to write. ecrit [ekri], p. part. 4crire. Venture [ekrityir], f., writing. 6crivit[ekrivi], 3 sg. pastdef. ecrire. ^cueil[ekoe!J], m., reef, rock. ^cuelle [eknel], f., porringer, niilk- pail. ^cume [ekym], f. , foam. ^cureuil [ekyroeij], m., squirrel. edifice [edifis], m. , edifice, building. Education [edykasjoj, f., educa- tion, training. effet [efel, m., effect; en — , in effect, indeed, in fact. effleurer [efloere], to skim (over), touch (lightly). effort [efo:r], m. , effort, endeavour ; force, might; tenter un dernier — , to make a final effort. effrayer [efreje], § 157, to frighten, terrify, alarm; .s'— , to be frightened, fear. effr^n^ [efrene], unbridled, uncon- trollable. effroyable [efrwajabl], frightful, iiorrible. effroyablement [ efrwujablama ], ^ frightfully, terribly, dreadfully, egal [egal], equal, ^galement [egalma], equally, in like manner, also. ^garer (s') [s egare], to lose one's way. 6glise [egliiz], f., church, ^gorger [egorse], § 156, to cut the throat of, butcher, slaughter. egyptien [esipsjs], Egyptian, eh 1 [e], ah !, well ! ; — hien .', well !, well then !, well now ! ilan [eld], m., impulse, elancer (s') [s ela se], § 1 56, to bound, rush, da h, precipitate one's self. ^l^ment [elema], m., element, elephant [elefa], m., elephant. ^l^ve[ele;v], m., f., pupil, scholar. Clever [elve], § 158, to raise, raise up, lift up, exalt; rear, bring up ; .s' — , to rise, exalt one's self, be lifted up, be exalted, elite [elit], choice, pick ; d' — , selected, picked, elle [el], she, it, her. eloigne [elwape], distant. eloigner (s') [s ehvajie], to go away, disappear in the distance, eloquent [eloka], eloquent, embarras [abara], m., embarrass- ment. embarquer (s')[s abarke], intr., to embark. embaumer [abome], to perfume. embleme [ableim], m., emblem. embrasser [ubrase], to embrace, clasp, kiss ; .s' — , to embrace one another, kiss one another. embrasure [abrazyir], f., embra- sure, recess (of window, etc. ). embrouiller (s'), [s abruje], to be- come confused, get puzzled. emerveill^ [emervc:je], p. part., as ton j--*! pc^. emmenei ; imnc], § 158, to lead Amotion [emosjo], f., emotion, feeling. i\ ,. 480 VOCABULARY i ^1 emp^cher [dpEje], to hinder, pre- vent (from, (le). empereur [aprojir], m., emperor. empire [api:r], m., empire. emplette [aplet], f., purchase; (tiler /aire des —, to go shopping. emporter [a parte], to carry away, carry off, take away. empressement [ apresmu ], m., eagerness. en [a], in, into ; at ; of ; as i, like a; ni + nrcs. part., in, while, wliilst, by (or untranslated) ; — dge de, of an age to ; — route, on the way ; — nnjent, of silver; — quoi?, of what (material)? en [d], pron. and adv., of (from, out of, for, by, etc. ) it or them ; of him, of her, some of it, some of them ; some, any. enchanter [ajute], to enchant, cliarm, delight ; enchcmtd, de- lighted. encore [akoir], yet, still, again, more, still more, moreover, be- sides, also, now, only ; — im, another, one more ; — si, even if. encorn^ [akorne], see under autre- ment. encouragement [ukurajmu], m., encouragement. encre[n:kr], f., ink; a V — , with ink. encrier [akrie], m., inkstand. endormir (s') [s Odormiir], § 166, to go to sleep, fall asleep ; o)- dormi, asleep. endroit fudrwa], m., place, spot. enfant [tifd], m. f., child, son, daughter ; boy, girl, offspring. enfermer [nferme], to shut up, lock up. enfin [ofs], at last, finally, in fine, in short. enfoncer [afose], § 156, to sink, f)usli down, plunge ; s' — , to >ury one's self, plunge. engager [ugase], § 156, to pledge, engage : .s'^ — , to promise, pledge one's self. j enguirlander [ ugirlade ], to wreathe, encircle. enjamber [u^abe], bestride, put one's leg over. enlever [alve], § 158, to carry away, carry off. ennemi [enmi], m., enemy, foe. ennemi [enmi], hostile ; of the enemy. ennui [dnifi], m., weariness, ennui, tedium, vexation, annoyance. ennuyer (s') [s anijije], § 157, to be wearied, grow weary, find it tiresome. ennuyeux [nnipj^], tiresome, an- noying. ^norme [enorm], enormous, ver}' large, very great. enrag^ [urase], mad, enraged, des- perate. enroue farwe], hoarse. enseigner [dsepe], to teach. ensemble [dsaibl], together, all together. ensevelir [asovliir], to bury, swallow up. ensuite [usqit], afterwards, then, tliereupon, after tiiat. entendre [dtdidr], § 210, to hear ; ccla s'eutend, that is evident ; of course. enthousiasme [utuzjasm], m., en- thusiasm. entier [fltje], entire, whole ; tout — , wholly. entierement [utjermd], entirely, wholly. entourer future], to suriound. entrainer [utrene], to carry away, drag away. entre [ditr], between, among, amongst. entree [dtre], f., entrance, be- ginning ; entree (a term in cookery); billet d'—, ticket (of admission). entremets [utra me], side-dish, entremets. entrer [dtre], to enter, go in, come in ; — dans, enter. FRENCH-ENGLISH. 481 eiium^rer [enymere], § 158, to enu- merate, envahir [a vai i r], to invade, attack. envelopper [avlope], to envelop, wrap up, muffle ; surround. envers [uveir], towards. envie [dvi], f., envy, desire, incli- nation ; avoir — de, to feel like, wish or desire to. environner [civirone], to surround, environ. envoler (s'| [a a vole], to fly away, take to flight. envoyer [avwajel, § 157, to send. ^pais [epe], thick, close together ; colonne 6paisse, see colcnne. ^pargner [eparpe], to save, eco- nomize. ^pars [epair], scattered. ^paule [epoil], f., shoulder. 6p6e [epe], f. , sword ; ~ de chevet, sword kept under the pillow for defence in case of attack by night, a thing which one con- stantly uses, a •• stand by." ^peler [eple], § 158, to spell. ^pervier [epervje], m., hawk. ^pi [epi], m., ear (of corn). 6pingle [epe;gl], f., pin. ^pop6e [epope], f., epic poem, epic. ^poque [epok], f., epoch, period, time. ^pouser [epuze], to marry (tr.), take in marriage, wed, ^pouvantable [epuvutabl], fright- ful, dreadful, terrible. ^puiser (s) [s epijize], to be or be- come exhausted, waste away. ^questre [ekestr], equestrian, of a horse, ^quilibre [ekiliibr], m,, equili- brium, balance. 6quit6 [ekite], f., equity, justice. Arable [erabl], m., maple. erreur [eroeir], f., erroi, mistake. es [e], 2 sg. pres. indie, elre. escadre [eskadr], f., squadron, fleet ; chef d' — , rear-admiral, escadron [eskadro], m., squadron (milit.). 81 escalader [cskalade], to scale, climb. escalier [eskalje], m,, stairs. esclave [csklaiv], m. f., slave; tomber — , to fall into slavery, become a slave. espace [espais], m., space, espfece [espes], f., species, kind, esperancc [esperais], f., hope. esp6rer fespere], § 158, to hope, hope for, expect. espoir [espwair], m. , hope,expeota- tion, esprit [espri], m., spirit, mind, wit ; Saint- Esprit, Holy Ghost. essayer [eseje], § 157, to try, at- tempt ; try on. essouffl^ [esufle], p. part,, out of breath, breathless, est [e], 3 sg, pres, indie, Stre ; ce que?, is it (the case) that? (a statement prefixed by est-ce que ? becomes interrogative) ; n'est-ce pas ?, lit., is it not (so) ? (variously rendered to suit the context). estrade[eatrad], f. , stage, platform, et [e], and. etable [etabl], £., stable, byre, ^tait [etc], 3 sg. impf. indie, itre. ^taient [ete], 3 pi. impf. indie. etre. Staler [etale], to spread out, dis- play, etant [eta], pres. part. Stre. 6tat [eta], m. , state ; condition ; homme d'Etat, statesman ; en — , de, in a condition to. Etats-Unis [etaz yni], m,, pi,, United States, ^te [ete], m., summer; en — , in summer, ^teindre [ete:dr], § 190, to extin- guish ; 6''—, to be extinguished, die away, go cut or disappeai (of a light, etc. ), ^teignirent [etejiiir], 3 pi, past def. eteindre. etendard [etodairl, m.. standa,rd. banner, etendre [etuidr], § 210, to stretch. iff 482 VOCABULARY. extend, gtretch oi'.t ; «'_ to ^trrn'^ltr'^'^.r" '''''' 'i^ down, eternel [eternel], eternal. |J^''n»te (eternitej, f., eternity. |tes[E:t] 2pl. pres. indie, d-e. |ti(juette[etiket],f., etiquette. ^toile[etwal], f.,.stttr. 6tonner [etone], to astonisl,, sur- pnse; .v'_, to bo astonished, surprised (at, de). itouffer [etufe], to suffocate, choke, smotiier, stifle. ' ^tourdi[eturdi],m., madcap. etre[s:tr], §l54,tobe;-d, to . belong to ; fen dfais /A de mes reflexions, H Had gone thus far in my reflexions; vom somvieschuy there aie five of us '' IJrenne [etren], f. , New Year's gift ebse;^'"'f^'^"^^"^^j'"----iy; ^tudier [etydje], to study. eu ly], past p. avoir. f'SL* f-r'^' ? Pl- P^«t def. avoir. Europe[oerop],f., Europe. europ^en [oerope?], European, eus [y], 1 sg. past def. a.->jr eut [y], 3 sg. past def. .,w.i-. eut[y] 3gg. impf. subj. ayo/r. eutes [yt] 2 pi. p. def. a.oir. eux [0], they, them. selves, themselves. ^vanouir (s') [s evanwiir], to van- ish ; dvanoui, p. part., vanished, vanishing. ' ^veil [eve : j], m. , awakening, watch • en —^ on one's guard, on the watcn. ^^fnfTr"* i«^^""i"]' ni., event. eventail[evata:j], m.,fan. Eventuality [evatifalite], f., con- tingency. Evidemment [evidamd], evidently exagfdrer [egza.^erej, § 156, to ex- aggerate. Vt^?}^AJ f*'g^^'"ine], to examine. excepts [eksepte], except. exces [ekse], m., excess. excessif [eksesifj, excessive, exciter [ek^ive], to excite, exclamation [esklamasjS], f., ex- claniation. excuser [ekskyze], to excuse. ^^^^?^ [%'=^^'Pl]. m., example, pattern; copy copy-slip, head- line ; ;9ar _, for instance, for example; you don't say so ' dear me ! J- °" •• exercice [egzersis], m., exercise; /aere/'-, to drill (milit.). exhaler (s') [s egzale], to be ex^ haled, bo breathed forth exil6 [egzile], m., exile, exister [egziste], to exist, expirer [ekspire], to expire, die. explication [eksplikasjSJ, f., ex- planation. J J. ^m ex VS}ISi^\ [f ksplike], to explain, exploit [eksplwaj, m., exploit. achievement, exprimer [eksprime], to express. t^e^ t^'^^ta.-zj, f., ecstasy, rap, ext^nuer [ekstemie], to extenuate, enfeeble, weaken, reduce extermination [eksterniinasjol f extermination. J j» -i extraordinaire [ekstraordineir 1 extraordinary, unusual. extremity [ ekstremite ], f ex. lefT"^' ~'^' ^""''''' extreme F. fable [fa bl], f., fable, story. Z ^/If^' ^•it''^ ' ^^ -' opposite, on the other side; en ~ de opposite to, facing, before, face to face with, in the presence of; {eac1i7the?r '' ^'''' "^P"''" facher [faje], to vex, displease; Jdch^, sorry, angry. facheux [fa/0j, vexatious, annoy- facile [fasil], easy. facilement [fasilnia], easily fajon [fasoj, f., fashion, way, FRENCH-ENGLISH. 483 way, manner ; outline, sketch ; de — (l ce que, in such a way or manner that ; da la viime — , in the same way. facteur [faktceir], m., post-man. letter-carrier. faction [faksjo], f., Stre de —, to be on duty. factoton [faktoto], m,, factotum. fade [fad], insipid, tasteless. faible [feibl], weak, feeble. faiblesse [febks], f., weakness. faim [f?], f., hunger; avoir—, to be hungry. faire [feir], § 195, to do, make, act, cause ( -f infin. , to do or be done), produce, occasion, give, form ; say, reply, exclaim, cry, remark ; /aire /aire, to have made, cause to be made ; — vivre, to keep alive, support; — le tour de, to go vound ; — le mort, to pretend to be dead ; — plaisir, to give pleasure; —peur a, to frighten ; — sea coifrses, to make one's rounds; — attention, to pay attention ; — sortir, to put out, expel ; — la cour, pay court ; — I'exercice, to drill (milit. ) ; — la classe, to give a lesson, teach ; cela ne fait rien, that makes no difference; —/e7e A, to welcome, hail with joy ; ce qui fait que le dindon a Fair de, etc., which makes the turkey seem to, etc. ; — les malles, to pack the trunks ; — voir, to show ; — mat d,, to pain, hurt ; — un pas, to take a step ; — boniw chire, to pro- vide good cheer, provide a good spread ; fais done, do (so) then, do (it your own way) then, all right ; je ferais conscience de, I should scruple to, I should think it a s- to ; — une quen- tion, to asiv a question ; il fait beau (chatid, etc. ), it is fine (hot, etc. ). faire (se) [aa fetr], § 195, to make one's self, render one's self, make to or for one's self ; to be done ; to become ; to take place ; to bo ; se — rare, to decrease, bo- come scanty ; il sefaisait un (jrand tapaye, there was a great uproar ; .se — (I, to adapt one's self to fais [fe], 1 8g. pros, indie, faire. faisaient [foze], 3 pi. impf. indio. faire. faisais [faze], 1 sg. impf. faire. faisait [faze], 3 sg. impf. faire. faisant [fozfl], pres. part, faire. faisan [fezuj, ni., pheasant. faisons [faz5], 1 pi. pies, indie. faire. fait [fet], m. , fact, event ; font A — [tut a fe], altogether, entirely, quite. fait [fe], 3 sg. pres, indie, faire. fait [fe], p. part, faire; bien — de m personne, handsome. faites [fet], 2 pi. pres. indie, and impve. faire. fallait [fale], 3 sg. impf. indie. falloir. falloir [falwair], § 218, impers. yb., to be necessary, have to; ilfaut + infin., one (etc.) must, one has to ; it fallait que, it was necessary that (he, etc. ), he was obliged to or had to ; il luifa^it, he needs, must have ; il faut manger, one jiiuat eat ; il avail falla, he had been obliged. fallut [faly], 3 sg. past def. falloir. fameux [fam0], famous, celebrated. famille [famiij], 1, family. fanfare [fufai r], f. , flourish of trum- pets, brass-band. fantome [fatoim], m., phantom, shadow, ghost. fardeau [fardo], m., burden, load. farine [farin], f., flour. farouche [faruf], wild, fierce. fasse [fas], 3 sg. pres. subj. faire. fatal [fatal], fatal. fataiite [fatalite], f., fatality. fatigue [fati:g], f., fatigue. fatigue [fatige], tired. fatiguer [fatige], to fatigue, weaiy, tire ; se —, to fatigue one's self, etc. i: :1 ! ;i! 'if Wi.^i 484 VOCABULARY. faucher [fofe], to mow, reap, faucheur [fof(u:rJ, m., mower, reaper, faudra [fodra], 3 «<,'. fut. jalloir. faut [fo], 3 8L'. pns. uulic./ti/luir. faute [fo!t], f., fault, mistake. faux-col [fo kol], 111., collar. fSler [fele], to crack (glass, etc.), femme ffam], f., woman, wife. fendre [ffiulr], §?]{), to split, cleave; break; fie—, intr., to Imrst (asunder), break, fenetre [fone:tr], f., window. fer ffe:r], m., iron; en — , iron (adj. ), of iron ; — Ixittu, wrought iron ; chnnin de — , railway ; — ). 'hacher [aje], to chop, hack, cut to pieces, mince, 'haie [e], f. , hedge. *haine[e!n], f., hatred. haleine[ale:n], f., breath ; prendre — , to take breath, recover one's breath. 'hanneton [antS], m., may-brig, fnck-chafer. hannonie [armoni], f. , harmony. 'haricot [ariko], m., kidney-bean ; stew of nuitton and turnips. 'Harpagon [arpagS], Harpagon, a miser, the chief personage in Moliure's "I'Avare". 'hasard [aza:r], m., chance; par — , by chance, perchance. *h4te [ait], f., haste; en — , in haste. *hAter (se) [sa ate], to hasten, hurry. 'hausser (se) [se ose], to raise- one's self, rise ; se — sur la pointe de» pieds, to stand upon tiptoe. 111! IJi* 488 VOCABULARY. P ri- \hi \U4 'haut [o], ni., lioight ; top, upper [liirt, suiiiniit ; eii — , up stairs. 'haut |o|, liigli ; loud, 'haut [()|, adv., loud, 'haye! [ha:jj, iuterj., nidicatiiig surprise, 'h^! |c|, hoy!, halloo! helas! [cldisj, alas! Heleue |ole:n], f., Helen. Henri |ori|, ni., Henry, herbe [erh], f., grass, herl)(s). heritage [eritai.'^], ni., heritage, inheritancie. hesiter [ezitc], to hesitate. 'hetre [estr], ui., heeeh. heure [tea-], f., hour; tiiue ; qmdk —est-il?, what o'clock is it ? ; (I ~ heure .?, at what o'clock?, at what houi-? ; d hciiJ' — .s, at nine o'clock ; tout d V~, not long ago, just iu)w, a little ago; de bonne — , eaily, betimes, in good time, heureusement [(er0zmd], ha])pily, luckily, fortunately. heureux [a'r0], happy. hier [jeir], yesterday; — aoir, yesterday evening. hippanthrope [ipdtrop], m., a fabu- lous monster half man half horse, centaur. hirondelle [irodel], f., swallow. histoire [istwa: r], f. , history, story. hiver [iveir], m., winter; en ~, in winter. homme ['nn], m. , man ; — iVl^tut, statesman. homme-cheval [om J oval], m,, centaui. honnetement [onetmu], honestly, honourably, decently, honneur [oiue:r], m., honour, 'honte [3 : t], f. , shame ; avoir — , to be ashamed, hopital [opital], m. , hospital. horizon forizaj, m., hori/on. horloge[orlo!3], f., clock. horrible roHbl], linnible. 'hors de [.) : r do], outsiile of, except, apart from. 'hortibus [.irtibys], the erroneous Latiti form wiiich the scluMil-boy dreamt that he wrote in his ex- ei-cise instead of the form hortin. hote |o:t], 111., guest. hostilite [.)stilite], f., hostility, attack. Hotel-Dieu fitel dj0], m., hospital, hotel de ville L.)tel do vil], m. , town- liall. 'houblon (ubi.l], m., hop, hop- vine. *houppelandelupld:d], f., big coat, great-coat. Hugo (Victor) fviktoir ygo ], Kreiicb writer, I). 180'J, d. 1885. huile [i|i]|, f., oil. *huit |i|it I, eight, humaiii [\ mej, human, humeur (yuKeirJ, f., hunumr. humide |ymid|, damp, wet. 'hurlement [yrlomuj, m., howl, howling. 'hurler lyrle], to howl, roar, bellow, hydre [idr], f., hydra. I. ici [isi], here; ici-has, here below. idee fide], f., idea. ignoble [ijiobl], mean, base. ignorance [ijiorciis], f., ignorance. ignorer [ijiore], to be ignorant of, not to know. il [il], lie, it ; — en vint plusieur.s, there came several. lie [il], f., island. ils [il], they. illusion [ilyzjoj, f. , illusion. immediat [nnedja], innnediate. immense [imdis], inunense. immobile [imobilj, motionless. impatience [epasjais], f., impa- tience. impatienter (s') [s fpasjate], to become impatient. impertinent [Jpertina], imperti- nent, stupid. imperturbable [epertyrbabl], im- perturbable. impetuosite [tpct^ozite], f. , impe- tuosity. important [eporta], important. FRENCH-ENGLLSH. 489 importer [fporte], to be of conse- W£\, in., toy. jouir [swiir], to elijoy ; — dc, to enjoy. J0ur[3U!r"j, lu., day, light; -de fete, lioliday ; le ~ dc I' An, New Year's day. journal [aurnal], m. , newsimper. journee [suine], f., day; tnute la — , all day long. joyeux [.^waj0], joyous, glad. juge [ay: 3], m., judge. juif [sqif], ni., Jew. juillet [^qije], m., July, jusque (k) [sysk (a)], "to, even, as far as, until; —